RAV4 PRIME_OM_OM42C52U_(U)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Pictorial index
Search by illustration
For safety
and security
Make sure to read through them
(Main topics: Child seat, theft deterrent system)
Plug-in hybrid
system
Plug-in hybrid system features, charging method,
etc.
(Main topics: Driving tips, charging methods)
Vehicle status
information and
indicators
Reading driving-related information
(Main topics: Meters, multi-information display)
Before driving
Opening and closing the doors and windows,
adjustment before driving
(Main topics: Keys, doors, seats)
Driving
Operations and advice which are necessary for
driving
(Main topics: Starting hybrid system, refueling)
Interior features
Usage of the interior features
(Main topics: Air conditioner, storage features)
Maintenance
and care
Caring for your vehicle and maintenance
procedures
(Main topics: Interior and exterior, light bulbs)
When trouble
arises
What to do in case of malfunction and emergency
(Main topics: 12-volt battery discharge, flat tire)
Vehicle
specifications
Vehicle specifications, customizable features
(Main topics: Fuel, oil, tire inflation pressure)
For owners
Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners, and seat
belt and SRS airbag instructions for Canadian
owners
Index
Search by symptom
Search alphabetically
2
TABLE OF CONTENTS
For your information................... 6
Reading this manual................11
How to search..........................12
Pictorial index ..........................14
1-1. For safe use
Before driving...................26
For safe driving ................27
Seat belts.........................29
SRS airbags.....................34
Front passenger occupant
classification system ......44
Exhaust gas precautions..49
1-2. Child safety
Riding with children..........50
Child restraint systems.....51
1-3. Emergency assistance
Safety Connect ................66
1-4. Theft deterrent system
Immobilizer system ..........72
Alarm................................73
2-1. Plug-in hybrid system
Plug-in hybrid system fea-
tures ...............................76
Plug-in hybrid system pre-
cautions..........................87
Plug-in hybrid vehicle driving
tips..................................92
EV driving range ..............95
2-2. Charging
Charging equipment.........99
AC charging cable......... 102
Locking and unlocking the
charging port lid and
charging connector...... 107
Power sources that can be
used............................. 111
Charging methods......... 114
Charging tips ................. 118
Things to know before
charging....................... 120
How to charge ............... 123
Using the charging schedule
function........................ 130
Using the “My Room Mode”
.................................... 144
When charging cannot be
carried out ................... 147
3-1. Instrument cluster
Warning lights and indicators
.................................... 160
Gauges and meters....... 165
Multi-information display 170
Head-up display ............ 182
Energy monitor/consumption
screen.......................... 187
4-1. Key information
Keys .............................. 194
4-2. Opening, closing and lock-
ing the doors
Side doors ..................... 198
1
For safety and security
2
Plug-in hybrid system
3
Vehicle status
information and
indicators
4
Before driving
3
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Back door...................... 203
Smart key system ......... 217
4-3. Adjusting the seats
Front seats .................... 224
Rear seats..................... 225
Driving position memory 227
Head restraints.............. 230
4-4. Adjusting the steering
wheel and mirrors
Steering wheel .............. 232
Inside rear view mirror .. 233
Digital Rear-view Mirror 234
Outside rear view mirrors
.................................... 244
4-5. Opening, closing the win-
dows and moon roof
Power windows ............. 246
Moon roof...................... 249
Panoramic moon roof.... 252
5-1. Before driving
Driving the vehicle......... 258
Cargo and luggage ....... 265
Vehicle load limits ......... 268
Trailer towing ................ 269
Dinghy towing ............... 278
5-2. Driving procedures
Power (ignition) switch .. 279
Hybrid transmission ...... 285
Turn signal lever ........... 289
Parking brake................ 290
Brake Hold .................... 293
5-3. Operating the lights and
wipers
Headlight switch ............ 295
AHB (Automatic High Beam)
.................................... 298
Windshield wipers and
washer......................... 301
Rear window wiper and
washer......................... 304
5-4. Refueling
Opening the fuel tank cap
.................................... 306
5-5. Using the driving support
systems
Toyota Safety Sense 2.0309
PCS (Pre-Collision System)
.................................... 315
LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)
.................................... 323
RSA (Road Sign Assist) 333
Dynamic radar cruise control
with full-speed range ... 336
BSM (Blind Spot Monitor)
.................................... 347
Intuitive parking assist... 356
PKSB (Parking Support
Brake).......................... 363
Parking Support Brake func-
tion (static objects) ...... 368
Parking Support Brake func-
tion (rear-crossing vehicles)
.
...
................................ 373
Driving mode select switch
.................................... 377
Trail Mode ..................... 379
Driving assist systems... 380
5-6. Driving tips
Winter driving tips.......... 387
5
Driving
4
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Utility vehicle precautions
.................................... 390
6-1. Using the air conditioning
system and defogger
Automatic air conditioning
system......................... 396
Remote Air Conditioning Sys-
tem .............................. 405
Heated steering wheel/Front
seat heaters/Front seat
heaters and ventilators/Rear
seat heaters ................ 407
6-2. Using the interior lights
Interior lights list ............ 410
6-3. Using the storage features
List of storage features . 413
Luggage compartment fea-
tures ............................ 417
6-4. Using the other interior fea-
tures
Other interior features ... 420
Garage door opener...... 435
7-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting the
vehicle exterior............ 444
Cleaning and protecting the
vehicle interior............. 447
7-2. Maintenance
Maintenance requirements
.................................... 450
General maintenance.... 451
Emission inspection and
maintenance (I/M) programs
.................................... 454
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Do-it-yourself service precau-
tions............................. 455
Hood.............................. 457
Positioning a floor jack .. 458
Engine compartment ..... 460
12-volt battery................ 466
Tires .............................. 468
Tire inflation pressure.... 480
Wheels .......................... 482
Air conditioning filter...... 483
Cleaning the DC/DC Con-
verter air intake vent and fil-
ter ............................... 486
Wiper insert replacement
.................................... 489
Electronic key battery.... 493
Checking and replacing fuses
.................................... 495
Light bulbs..................... 497
8-1. Essential information
Emergency flashers....... 504
If your vehicle has to be
stopped in an emergency
.................................... 505
If the vehicle is trapped in ris-
ing water...................... 506
8-2. Steps to take in an emer-
gency
If your vehicle needs to be
towed........................... 507
6
Interior features
7
Maintenance and care
8
When trouble arises
5
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
If you think something is
wrong .......................... 509
If a warning light turns on or a
warning buzzer sounds 511
If a warning message is dis-
played.......................... 523
If you have a flat tire...... 527
If the hybrid system will not
start ............................. 534
If you lose your keys ..... 536
If the fuel filler door cannot be
opened ........................ 536
If the electronic key does not
operate properly.......... 537
If the 12-volt battery is dis-
charged ....................... 539
If your vehicle overheats 544
If the vehicle becomes stuck
.................................... 548
9-1. Specifications
Maintenance data (fuel, oil
level, etc.).................... 550
Fuel information ............ 557
Tire information ............. 559
9-2. Customization
Customizable features .. 569
9-3. Initialization
Items to initialize ........... 582
10-1.For owners
Reporting safety defects for
U.S. owners................. 584
Seat belt instructions for
Canadian owners (in
French)........................ 585
SRS airbag instructions for
Canadian owners (in
French)........................ 586
What to do if... (Trouble-
shooting) ..................... 596
Alphabetical Index ........ 599
9
Vehicle specifications
10
For owners
Index
6
Please note that this manual
applies to all models and
explains all equipment, including
options. Therefore, you may find
some explanations for equip-
ment not installed on your vehi-
cle.
All specifications provided in this
manual are current at the time of
printing. However, because of
the Toyota policy of continual
product improvement, we
reserve the right to make
changes at any time without
notice.
Depending on specifications,
the vehicle shown in the illustra-
tions may differ from your vehi-
cle in terms of equipment.
Approximately five hours after
the hybrid system is turned off,
you may hear sound coming
from under the vehicle for sev-
eral minutes. This is the sound
of a fuel evaporation leakage
check and, it does not indicate a
malfunction.
A wide variety of non-genuine
spare parts and accessories for
Toyota vehicles are currently
available in the market. You
should know that Toyota does
not warrant these products and
is not responsible for their per-
formance, repair, or replace-
ment, or for any damage they
may cause to, or adverse effect
they may have on, your Toyota
vehicle.
This vehicle should not be modi-
fied with non-genuine Toyota
products. Modification with non-
genuine Toyota products could
affect its performance, safety or
durability, and may even violate
governmental regulations. In
addition, damage or perfor-
mance problems resulting from
the modification may not be cov-
ered under warranty.
The installation of a mobile two-
way radio system in your vehicle
could affect electronic systems
such as:
Hybrid system
Multiport fuel injection sys-
tem/sequential multiport fuel
injection system
For your information
Main Owner’s Manual
Noise from under vehicle
after turning off the hybrid
system
Accessories, spare parts
and modification of your
Toyota
Installation of a mobile
two-way radio system
7
Toyota Safety Sense 2.0
Anti-lock brake system
SRS airbag system
Seat belt pretensioner system
Be sure to check with your
Toyota dealer for precautionary
measures or special instructions
regarding installation of a mobile
two-way radio system.
High voltage parts and cables
on the hybrid vehicles emit
approximately the same amount
of electromagnetic waves as the
conventional gasoline powered
vehicles or home electronic
appliances despite of their elec-
tromagnetic shielding.
Unwanted noise may occur in
the reception of the mobile two-
way radio.
The vehicle is equipped with
sophisticated computers that will
record certain data, such as:
• Engine speed/ Electric motor
speed (traction motor speed)
• Accelerator status
• Brake status
• Vehicle speed
• Operation status of the driving
assist systems
• Images from the cameras
Your vehicle is equipped with
cameras. Contact your
Toyota dealer for the location
of recording cameras.
• Hybrid battery (traction bat-
tery) status
The recorded data varies
according to the vehicle grade
level and options with which it is
equipped.
These computers do not record
conversations or sounds, and
only record images outside of
the vehicle in certain situations.
Data Transmission
Your vehicle may transmit the data
recorded in these computers to
Toyota without notification to you.
Data usage
Toyota may use the data recorded
in this computer to diagnose mal-
functions, conduct research and
development, and improve quality.
Toyota will not disclose the
recorded data to a third party
except:
• With the consent of the vehicle
owner or with the consent of the
lessee if the vehicle is leased
• In response to an official request
by the police, a court of law or a
government agency
• For use by Toyota in a lawsuit
• For research purposes where the
data is not tied to a specific vehi-
cle or vehicle owner
Recorded image information
can be erased by your Toyota
dealer.
The image recording function can
be disabled. However, if the func-
tion is disabled, data from when the
system operates will not be avail-
Vehicle data recording
8
able.
To learn more about the vehi-
cle data collected, used and
shared by Toyota, please visit
www.toyota.com/privacyvts/
.
If your Toyota has Safety Con-
nect and if you have subscribed
to those services, please refer to
the Safety Connect Telematics
Subscription Service Agreement
for information on data collected
and its usage.
To learn more about the vehi-
cle data collected, used and
shared by Toyota, please visit
www.toyota.com/privacyvts/
.
This vehicle is equipped with an
event data recorder (EDR). The
main purpose of an EDR is to
record, in certain crash or near
crash-like situations, such as an
air bag deployment or hitting a
road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a
vehicle’s systems performed.
The EDR is designed to record
data related to vehicle dynamics
and safety systems for a short
period of time, typically 30 sec-
onds or less.
The EDR in this vehicle is
designed to record such data
as:
How various systems in your
vehicle were operating;
Whether or not the driver and
passenger safety belts were
buckled/fastened;
How far (if at all) the driver
was depressing the accelera-
tor and/or brake pedal; and,
How fast the vehicle was trav-
eling.
These data can help provide a
better understanding of the cir-
cumstances in which crashes
and injuries occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded
by your vehicle only if a non-triv-
ial crash situation occurs; no
data are recorded by the EDR
under normal driving conditions
and no personal data (e.g.,
name, gender, age, and crash
location) are recorded. How-
ever, other parties, such as law
enforcement, could combine the
EDR data with the type of per-
sonally identifying data rou-
tinely acquired during a crash
investigation.
To read data recorded by an
EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the
vehicle or the EDR is needed. In
addition to the vehicle manufac-
turer, other parties, such as law
enforcement, that have the spe-
cial equipment, can read the
Usage of data collected
through Safety Connect
(U.S.mainland only)
Event data recorder
9
information if they have access
to the vehicle or the EDR.
Disclosure of the EDR data
Toyota will not disclose the data
recorded in an EDR to a third party
except when:
• An agreement from the vehicle’s
owner (or the lessee for a leased
vehicle) is obtained
• In response to an official request
by the police, a court of law or a
government agency
• For use by Toyota in a lawsuit
However, if necessary, Toyota
may:
• Use the data for research on
vehicle safety performance
• Disclose the data to a third party
for research purposes without
disclosing information about the
specific vehicle or vehicle owner
The SRS airbag and seat belt
pretensioner devices in your
Toyota contain explosive chemi-
cals. If the vehicle is scrapped
with the airbags and seat belt
pretensioners left as they are,
this may cause an accident such
as fire. Be sure to have the sys-
tems of the SRS airbag and seat
belt pretensioner removed and
disposed of by a qualified ser-
vice shop or by your Toyota
dealer before you scrap your
vehicle.
Special handling may apply,
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/
hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
Your vehicle has components
that may contain perchlorate.
These components may include
the airbags, seat belt preten-
sioners, wireless remote control
batteries, and the batteries in
the tire pressure warning valve
and transmitters.
Scrapping of your Toyota
Perchlorate Material
WARNING
■ General precautions while
driving
Driving under the influence: Never
drive your vehicle when under the
influence of alcohol or drugs that
have impaired your ability to oper-
ate your vehicle. Alcohol and cer-
tain drugs delay reaction time,
impair judgment and reduce coor-
dination, which could lead to an
accident that could result in death
or serious injury.
Defensive driving: Always drive
defensively. Anticipate mistakes
that other drivers or pedestrians
might make and be ready to avoid
accidents.
Driver distraction: Always give
your full attention to driving. Any-
thing that distracts the driver,
such as adjusting controls, talking
on a cellular phone or reading can
result in a collision with resulting
death or serious injury to you,
your occupants or others.
10
WARNING
■ General precaution regarding
children’s safety
Never leave children unattended
in the vehicle, and never allow
children to have or use the key.
Children may be able to start the
vehicle or shift the vehicle into
neutral. There is also a danger
that children may injure them-
selves by playing with the side
windows, the moon roof or the
panoramic moon roof, or other
features of the vehicle. In addi-
tion, heat build-up or extremely
cold temperatures inside the vehi-
cle can be fatal to children.
11
Reading this manual
Explains symbols used in
this manual
Symbols in this manual
Symbols Meanings
WARNING:
Explains something
that, if not obeyed,
could cause death or
serious injury to people.
NOTICE:
Explains something
that, if not obeyed,
could cause damage to
or a malfunction in the
vehicle or its equip-
ment.
Indicates operating or
working procedures.
Follow the steps in
numerical order.
Symbols in illustrations
Symbols Meanings
Indicates the action
(pushing, turning, etc.)
used to operate
switches and other
devices.
Indicates the outcome
of an operation (e.g. a
lid opens).
Symbols Meanings
Indicates the compo-
nent or position being
explained.
Means Do not, Do not
do this, or Do not let
this happen.
13
14
Pictorial index
Pictorial index
■Exterior
Side doors ..........................................................................P.198
Locking/unlocking ................................................................P.198
Opening/closing the side windows.......................................P.246
Locking/unlocking by using the mechanical key ..................P.537
Warning messages ..............................................................P.523
Back door ...........................................................................P.203
Locking/unlocking ................................................................P.204
Opening from inside the cabin
*
............................................P.207
Opening from outside...................................................P.205, 207
Warning messages ..............................................................P.523
Outside rear view mirrors .................................................P.244
Adjusting the mirror angle ....................................................P.244
Folding the mirrors ...............................................................P.244
Defogging the mirrors
*
.........................................................P.398
Windshield wipers .............................................................P.301
A
B
C
D
15
Pictorial index
Precautions against winter season ......................................P.387
To prevent freezing (windshield wiper de-icer)
*
...................P.403
Precautions against car wash
(Rain-sensing windshield wipers)
*
.......................................P.445
Replacing the wiper insert ...................................................P.489
Fuel filler door ....................................................................P.306
Refueling method.................................................................P.306
Fuel type/fuel tank capacity .................................................P.551
Charging port .......................................................................P.99
Charging method .................................................................P.114
Tires ....................................................................................P.468
Tire size/inflation pressure ...................................................P.555
Winter tires/tire chain ...........................................................P.387
Checking/rotation/tire pressure warning system ..................P.468
Coping with flat tires.............................................................P.527
Hood....................................................................................P.457
Opening ...............................................................................P.457
Engine oil .............................................................................P.552
Coping with overheat ...........................................................P.544
Warning messages ..............................................................P.523
Headlights/side marker lights ...........................................P.295
Turn signal lights ...............................................................P.289
Parking lights/daytime running lights..............................P.295
LED accessory lights
*
........................................................P.295
Tail lights/side marker lights ............................................P.295
Tail lights ............................................................................P.295
Back-up lights
Light bulbs of the exterior lights for driving
(Replacing method: P.497, Watts: P.556)
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
17
Pictorial index
■Instrument panel
Power switch ......................................................................P.279
Starting the hybrid system/changing the modes ..........P.279, 283
Emergency stop of the hybrid system..................................P.505
When the hybrid system will not start ..................................P.534
Warning messages ..............................................................P.523
Shift lever............................................................................P.285
Changing the shift position...................................................P.286
Precautions against towing ..................................................P.507
When the shift lever does not move.....................................P.286
Meters .................................................................................P.165
Reading the meters/adjusting the instrument panel
light ..............................................................................P.165, 169
Warning lights/indicator lights ..............................................P.160
When the warning lights come on........................................P.511
Multi-information display ..................................................P.170
Display .................................................................................P.170
A
B
C
D
18
Pictorial index
Energy monitor.....................................................................P.187
When the warning messages are displayed ........................P.523
Turn signal lever ................................................................P.289
Headlight switch ................................................................P.295
Headlights/parking lights/tail lights/license plate lights/daytime run-
ning lights/LED accessory lights
*1
........................................P.295
Windshield wiper and washer switch ..............................P.301
Rear window wiper and washer switch ...........................P.304
Usage...........................................................................P.301, 304
Adding washer fluid..............................................................P.465
Warning messages ..............................................................P.523
Emergency flasher switch.................................................P.504
Hood lock release lever.....................................................P.457
Tilt and telescopic steering lock release lever................P.232
Adjustment ...........................................................................P.232
Air conditioning system ....................................................P.396
Usage...................................................................................P.396
Rear window defogger .........................................................P.398
Audio
*1, 2
Audio Plus
*1, 2
Premium Audio
*1, 2
Fuel filler door opener switch ...........................................P.307
*1
:If equipped
*2
:Refer to “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MAN-
UAL”.
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
19
Pictorial index
■Switches
Driving position memory switches
*1
................................P.227
Window lock switch ...........................................................P.248
Power window switches....................................................P.246
Door lock switches ............................................................P.201
Outside rear view mirror switches ...................................P.244
“ODO TRIP” switch ............................................................P.169
Instrument panel light control dial ...................................P.169
Automatic High Beam switch ...........................................P.298
Windshield wiper de-icer switch
*1
....................................P.403
Camera switch
*1, 2
Heated steering wheel switch
*1
........................................P.407
AC 120 V switch
*1
...............................................................P.421
Power back door switch
*1
.................................................P.207
*1
:If equipped
*2
:Refer to “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MAN-
UAL”.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
20
Pictorial index
Meter control switches ......................................................P.171
Paddle shift switches
*1
......................................................P.287
Phone switch
*2
LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) switch ....................................P.323
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance switch...................................P.342
Cruise control switches
Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range .............P.336
Audio remote control switches
*2
Talk switch
*2
*1
:If equipped
*2
:Refer to “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MAN-
UAL”.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
21
Pictorial index
VSC OFF switch .................................................................P.382
Front seat heater switches
*
...............................................P.408
Front seat heater/seat ventilator switches
*
.....................P.408
Parking brake switch .........................................................P.290
Applying/releasing................................................................P.290
Precautions against winter season ......................................P.388
Warning buzzer/message ............................................P.517, 523
Brake hold switch ..............................................................P.293
AUTO EV/HV mode switch ..................................................P.78
EV/HV mode selection switch.............................................P.78
Driving mode select switch...............................................P.377
Trail Mode switch ...............................................................P.379
*
: If equipped
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
22
Pictorial index
■Interior
SRS airbags..........................................................................P.34
Floor mats.............................................................................P.26
Front seats..........................................................................P.224
Rear seats...........................................................................P.225
Head restraints...................................................................P.230
Seat belts ..............................................................................P.29
Console box .......................................................................P.414
Inside lock buttons ............................................................P.201
Cup holders ........................................................................P.414
Assist grips ........................................................................P.434
Rear seat heater switches
*
................................................P.408
*
: If equipped
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
23
Pictorial index
■Ceiling
“SOS” button
*1
.....................................................................P.66
Moon roof switch
*1
.............................................................P.249
Panoramic moon roof switch
*1
.........................................P.252
Moon roof switch
*1
..............................................................P.249
Electronic sunshade switch
*1
...........................................P.252
Interior lights
*2
...................................................................P.410
Personal lights ...................................................................P.411
Auxiliary box ......................................................................P.415
Vanity mirrors.....................................................................P.420
Sun visors...........................................................................P.420
Inside rear view mirror
*1
....................................................P.233
Digital Rear-view Mirror
*1
..................................................P.234
Garage door opener switches
*1
........................................P.435
*1
:If equipped
*2
:The illustration shows the front, but they are also equipped in the rear.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
24
Pictorial index
25
1
1
For safety and security
For safety and security
1-1. For safe use
Before driving.................26
For safe driving ..............27
Seat belts.......................29
SRS airbags...................34
Front passenger occupant
classification system ....44
Exhaust gas precautions 49
1-2. Child safety
Riding with children........50
Child restraint systems...51
1-3. Emergency assistance
Safety Connect ..............66
1-4. Theft deterrent system
Immobilizer system ........72
Alarm..............................73
26
1-1. For safe use
1-1.For safe use
Use only floor mats designed
specifically for vehicles of the
same model and model year as
your vehicle. Fix them securely
in place onto the carpet.
1 Insert the retaining hooks
(clips) into the floor mat eye-
lets.
2 Turn the upper knob of each
retaining hook (clip) to secure
the floor mats in place.
Always align the marks .
The shape of the retaining hooks
(clips) may differ from that shown in
the illustration.
Before driving
Observe the following
before starting off in the
vehicle to ensure safety of
driving.
Installing floor mats
A
WARNING
Observe the following precau-
tions.
Failure to do so may cause the
driver’s floor mat to slip, possibly
interfering with the pedals while
driving. An unexpectedly high
speed may result or it may
become difficult to stop the vehi-
cle. This could lead to an acci-
dent, resulting in death or serious
injury.
■ When installing the driver’s
floor mat
● Do not use floor mats designed
for other models or different
model year vehicles, even if
they are Toyota Genuine floor
mats.
● Only use floor mats designed
for the driver’s seat.
● Always install the floor mat
securely using the retaining
hooks (clips) provided.
● Do not use two or more floor
mats on top of each other.
● Do not place the floor mat bot-
tom-side up or upside-down.
27
1-1. For safe use
1
For safety and security
Adjust the angle of the seat-
back so that you are sitting
straight up and so that you do
not have to lean forward to
steer. (P.224)
Adjust the seat so that you
can depress the pedals fully
and so that your arms bend
slightly at the elbow when
gripping the steering wheel.
(P.224)
Lock the head restraint in
place with the center of the
head restraint closest to the
top of your ears. (P.230)
Wear the seat belt correctly.
(P.30)
WARNING
■ Before driving
● Check that the floor mat is
securely fixed in the correct
place with all the provided
retaining hooks (clips). Be espe-
cially careful to perform this
check after cleaning the floor.
● With the hybrid system stopped
and the shift lever in P, fully
depress each pedal to the floor
to make sure it does not inter-
fere with the floor mat.
For safe driving
For safe driving, adjust the
seat and mirror to an appro-
priate position before driv-
ing.
Correct driving posture
A
B
C
D
28
1-1. For safe use
Make sure that all occupants are
wearing their seat belts before
driving the vehicle. (P.30)
Use a child restraint system
appropriate for the child until the
child becomes large enough to
properly wear the vehicle’s seat
belt. (P.51)
Make sure that you can see
backward clearly by adjusting
the inside rear view mirror (if
equipped), Digital Rear-view
Mirror (if equipped) and outside
rear view mirrors properly.
(P.233, 234, 244)
WARNING
Observe the following precau-
tions.
Failure to do so may result in
death or serious injury.
● Do not adjust the position of the
driver’s seat while driving.
Doing so could cause the driver
to lose control of the vehicle.
● Do not place a cushion between
the driver or passenger and the
seatback. A cushion may pre-
vent correct posture from being
achieved, and reduce the effec-
tiveness of the seat belt and
head restraint.
● Do not place anything under the
front seats.
Objects placed under the front
seats may become jammed in
the seat tracks and stop the
seat from locking in place. This
may lead to an accident and the
adjustment mechanism may
also be damaged.
● Always observe the legal speed
limit when driving on public
roads.
● When driving over long dis-
tances, take regular breaks
before you start to feel tired.
Also, if you feel tired or sleepy
while driving, do not force your-
self to continue driving and take
a break immediately.
Correct use of the seat
belts
Adjusting the mirrors
29
1-1. For safe use
1
For safety and security
Seat belts
Make sure that all occu-
pants are wearing their seat
belts before driving the
vehicle.
WARNING
Observe the following precautions
to reduce the risk of injury in the
event of sudden braking, sudden
swerving or an accident.
Failure to do so may cause death
or serious injury.
■ Wearing a seat belt
● Ensure that all passengers wear
a seat belt.
● Always wear a seat belt prop-
erly.
● Each seat belt should be used
by one person only. Do not use
a seat belt for more than one
person at once, including chil-
dren.
● Toyota recommends that chil-
dren be seated in the rear seat
and always use a seat belt
and/or an appropriate child
restraint system.
● To achieve a proper seating
position, do not recline the seat
more than necessary. The seat
belt is most effective when the
occupants are sitting up straight
and well back in the seats.
● Do not wear the shoulder belt
under your arm.
● Always wear your seat belt low
and snug across your hips.
■ Pregnant women
Obtain medical advice and wear
the seat belt in the proper way.
(P.30)
Women who are pregnant should
position the lap belt as low as
possible over the hips in the same
manner as other occupants,
extending the shoulder belt com-
pletely over the shoulder and
avoiding belt contact with the
rounding of the abdominal area.
If the seat belt is not worn prop-
erly, not only the pregnant
woman, but also the fetus could
suffer death or serious injury as a
result of sudden braking or a colli-
sion.
■ People suffering illness
Obtain medical advice and wear
the seat belt in the proper way.
(P.30)
■ When children are in the vehi-
cle
P.59
■ Seat belt damage and wear
● Do not damage the seat belts
by allowing the belt, plate, or
buckle to be jammed in the
door.
30
1-1. For safe use
Extend the shoulder belt so
that it comes fully over the
shoulder, but does not come
into contact with the neck or
slide off the shoulder.
Position the lap belt as low as
possible over the hips.
Adjust the position of the
seatback.
Sit up straight and well back
in the seat.
Do not twist the seat belt.
■ Child seat belt usage
The seat belts of your vehicle were
principally designed for persons of
adult size.
● Use a child restraint system
appropriate for the child, until the
child becomes large enough to
properly wear the vehicle’s seat
belt. (P.51)
● When the child becomes large
enough to properly wear the vehi-
cle’s seat belt, follow the instruc-
tions regarding seat belt usage.
(P.29)
■ Seat belt extender
If your seat belts cannot be fastened
securely because they are not long
enough, a personalized seat belt
extender is available from your
Toyota dealer free of charge.
WARNING
● Inspect the seat belt system
periodically. Check for cuts,
fraying, and loose parts. Do not
use a damaged seat belt until it
is replaced. Damaged seat belts
cannot protect an occupant
from death or serious injury.
● Ensure that the belt and plate
are locked and the belt is not
twisted.
If the seat belt does not function
correctly, immediately contact
your Toyota dealer.
● Replace the seat assembly,
including the belts, if your vehi-
cle has been involved in a seri-
ous accident, even if there is no
obvious damage.
● Do not attempt to install,
remove, modify, disassemble or
dispose of the seat belts. Have
any necessary repairs carried
out by your Toyota dealer. Inap-
propriate handling may lead to
incorrect operation.
Correct use of the seat
belts
WARNING
■ Using a seat belt extender
Observe the following precautions
to reduce the risk of injury in the
event of sudden braking, sudden
swerving or an accident.
Failure to do so may cause death
or serious injury.
31
1-1. For safe use
1
For safety and security
1 To fasten the seat belt, push
the plate into the buckle until
a click sound is heard.
2 To release the seat belt,
press the release button .
■ Emergency locking retractor
(ELR)
The retractor will lock the belt during
a sudden stop or on impact. It may
also lock if you lean forward too
quickly. A slow, easy motion will
allow the belt to extend so that you
can move around fully.
■ Automatic locking retractor
(ALR)
When a passenger’s shoulder belt is
completely extended and then
retracted even slightly, the belt is
locked in that position and cannot
be extended. This feature is used to
hold a child restraint system (CRS)
firmly. To free the belt again, fully
retract the belt and then pull the belt
out once more.
1 Push the seat belt shoulder
anchor down while pressing
the release button .
2 Push the seat belt shoulder
anchor up while pressing the
release button .
WARNING
● Do not wear the seat belt
extender if you can fasten the
seat belt without the extender.
● Do not use the seat belt
extender when installing a child
restraint system because the
belt will not securely hold the
child restraint system, increas-
ing the risk of death or serious
injury in the event of an acci-
dent.
● The personalized extender may
not be safe on another vehicle,
when used by another person,
or at a different seating position
other than the one originally
intended.
NOTICE
■ When using a seat belt
extender
When releasing the seat belt,
press on the buckle release but-
ton on the extender, not on the
seat belt.
This helps prevent damage to the
vehicle interior and the extender
itself.
Fastening and releasing
the seat belt
Adjusting the seat belt
shoulder anchor height
(front seats)
A
A
A
32
1-1. For safe use
Move the height adjuster up and
down as needed until you hear a
click.
The pretensioners help the seat
belts to quickly restrain the
occupants by retracting the seat
belts when the vehicle is sub-
jected to certain types of severe
frontal collision or a vehicle roll-
over.
The front seat belt pretensioners
also activate when the vehicle is
subjected to certain types of
severe side collision.
The pretensioners do not activate
in the event of a minor frontal
impact, a minor side impact or a
rear impact.
■ Replacing the belt after the pre-
tensioner has been activated
If the vehicle is involved in multiple
collisions, the pretensioner will acti-
vate for the first collision, but will not
activate for the second or subse-
quent collisions.
■ PCS-linked seat belt preten-
sioner control
If the PCS (Pre-Collision System)
determines that the possibility of a
collision with a vehicle is high, the
seat belt pretensioners will be pre-
pared to operate.
WARNING
■ Adjustable shoulder anchor
Always make sure the shoulder
belt is positioned across the cen-
ter of your shoulder. The belt
should be kept away from your
neck, but not falling off your
shoulder. Failure to do so could
reduce the amount of protection in
an accident and cause death or
serious injuries in the event of a
sudden stop, sudden swerve or
accident.
Seat belt pretensioners
(front and outboard rear
seats)
WARNING
■ Seat belt pretensioners
Observe the following precautions
to reduce the risk of injury in the
event of sudden braking, sudden
swerving or an accident.
Failure to do so may cause death
or serious injury.
● Do not place anything, such as
a cushion, on the front passen-
ger’s seat.
Doing so will disperse the pas-
senger’s weight, which prevents
the sensor from detecting the
passenger’s weight properly. As
a result, the seat belt preten-
sioner for the front passenger’s
seat may not activate in the
event of a collision.
33
1-1. For safe use
1
For safety and security
WARNING
● If the pretensioner has acti-
vated, the SRS warning light will
come on. In that case, the seat
belt cannot be used again and
must be replaced at your Toyota
dealer.
34
1-1. For safe use
■ Location of the SRS airbags
SRS front airbags
SRS driver airbag/front passenger airbag
Can help protect the head and chest of the driver and front passenger from
impact with interior components
SRS knee airbag
Can help provide driver protection
SRS seat cushion airbag
Can help restrain the front passenger
SRS side and curtain shield airbags
SRS front side airbags
Can help protect the torso of the front seat occupants
SRS airbags
The SRS airbags inflate when the vehicle is subjected to cer-
tain types of severe impacts that may cause significant injury
to the occupants. They work together with the seat belts to
help reduce the risk of death or serious injury.
SRS airbag system
A
B
C
D
35
1-1. For safe use
1
For safety and security
SRS curtain shield airbags
• Can help protect primarily the head of occupants in the outer seats
• Can help prevent the occupants from being thrown from the vehicle in the
event of vehicle rollover
■ SRS airbag system components
Front impact sensors
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indicator lights
Front passenger airbag
Side impact sensors (front door)
Curtain shield airbags
Seat belt pretensioners and force limiters (front seats)
Side impact sensors (front)
Side airbags
Seat cushion airbag
Front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch
Side impact sensors (rear)
Seat belt pretensioners and force limiters (outboard rear seats)
Driver’s seat position sensor
E
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
36
1-1. For safe use
Driver airbag
Front passenger occupant classification sensors
Knee airbag
SRS warning light
Airbag sensor assembly
Your vehicle is equipped with ADVANCED AIRBAGS designed
based on the US motor vehicle safety standards (FMVSS208). The
airbag sensor assembly (ECU) controls airbag deployment based on
information obtained from the sensors etc. shown in the system
components diagram above. This information includes crash sever-
ity and occupant information. As the airbags deploy, a chemical
reaction in the inflators quickly fills the airbags with non-toxic gas to
help restrain the motion of the occupants.
■ If the SRS airbags deploy
(inflate)
● Slight abrasions, burns, bruising
etc., may be sustained from SRS
airbags, due to the extremely high
speed deployment (inflation) by
hot gases.
● A loud noise and white powder will
be emitted.
● Parts of the airbag module (steer-
ing wheel hub, airbag cover and
inflator) as well as the front seats,
parts of the front and rear pillars,
and roof side rails, may be hot for
several minutes. The airbag itself
may also be hot.
● The windshield may crack.
● The hybrid system will be stopped
and fuel supply to the engine will
be stopped. (P.91)
● The brakes and stop lights will be
controlled automatically.
(P.381)
● The interior lights will turn on auto-
matically. (P.411)
● The emergency flashers will turn
on automatically. (P.504)
● For Safety Connect subscribers, if
any of the following situations
occur, the system is designed to
send an emergency call to the
response center, notifying them of
the vehicle’s location (without
needing to push the “SOS” button)
and an agent will attempt to speak
with the occupants to ascertain
the level of emergency and assis-
tance required. If the occupants
are unable to communicate, the
agent automatically treats the call
as an emergency and helps to dis-
patch the necessary emergency
services. (P.66)
• An SRS airbag is deployed.
• A seat belt pretensioner is acti-
vated.
• The vehicle is involved in a severe
rear-end collision.
■ SRS airbag deployment condi-
tions (SRS front airbags)
● The SRS front airbags will deploy
in the event of an impact that
exceeds the set threshold level
(the level of force corresponding
to an approximately 12-18 mph
[20-30 km/h] frontal collision with
a fixed wall that does not move or
deform).
However, this threshold velocity will
be considerably higher in the follow-
N
O
P
Q
R
37
1-1. For safe use
1
For safety and security
ing situations:
• If the vehicle strikes an object,
such as a parked vehicle or sign
pole, which can move or deform
on impact
• If the vehicle is involved in an
underride collision, such as a colli-
sion in which the front of the vehi-
cle underrides, or goes under, the
bed of a truck
● Depending on the type of collision,
it is possible that only the seat belt
pretensioners will activate.
● The SRS front airbags for the front
passenger will not activate if there
is no passenger sitting in the front
passenger seat. However, the
SRS front airbags for the front
passenger may deploy if luggage
is put in the seat, even if the seat
is unoccupied.
● The SRS seat cushion airbag on
the front passenger seat will not
operate if the occupant is not
wearing a seat belt.
■ SRS airbag deployment condi-
tions (SRS side and curtain
shield airbags)
● The SRS side and curtain shield
airbags will deploy in the event of
an impact that exceeds the set
threshold level (the level of force
corresponding to the impact force
produced by an approximately
3300 lb. [1500 kg] vehicle colliding
with the vehicle cabin from a
direction perpendicular to the
vehicle orientation at an approxi-
mate speed of 12 -18 mph [20 -30
km/h]).
● Both SRS curtain shield airbags
may deploy in the event of a
severe side collision.
● Both SRS curtain shield airbags
will deploy in the event of vehicle
rollover.
● Both SRS curtain shield airbags
may also deploy in the event of a
severe frontal collision.
■ Conditions under which the
SRS airbags may deploy
(inflate), other than a collision
The SRS front airbags and SRS cur-
tain shield airbags may also deploy
if a serious impact occurs to the
underside of your vehicle. Some
examples are shown in the illustra-
tion.
● Hitting a curb, edge of pavement
or hard surface
● Falling into or jumping over a deep
hole
● Landing hard or falling
The SRS curtain shield airbags may
also deploy under the situations
shown in the illustration.
● The angle of vehicle tip-up is mar-
ginal.
● The vehicle skids and hits a curb
stone.
■ Types of collisions that may not
deploy the SRS airbags (SRS
front airbags)
The SRS front airbags do not gener-
ally inflate if the vehicle is involved
in a side or rear collision, if it rolls
over, or if it is involved in a low-
speed frontal collision. But, when-
ever a collision of any type causes
sufficient forward deceleration of the
vehicle, deployment of the SRS
38
1-1. For safe use
front airbags may occur.
● Collision from the side
● Collision from the rear
● Vehicle rollover
■ Types of collisions that may not
deploy the SRS airbags (SRS
side and curtain shield airbags)
The SRS side and curtain shield air-
bags may not activate if the vehicle
is subjected to a collision from the
side at certain angles, or a collision
to the side of the vehicle body other
than the passenger compartment.
● Collision from the side to the vehi-
cle body other than the passenger
compartment
● Collision from the side at an angle
The SRS side airbags do not gener-
ally inflate if the vehicle is involved
in a frontal or rear collision, if it rolls
over, or if it is involved in a low-
speed side collision.
● Collision from the front
● Collision from the rear
● Vehicle rollover
The SRS curtain shield airbags do
not generally inflate if the vehicle is
involved in a rear collision, if it
pitches end over end, or if it is
involved in a low-speed side or low-
speed frontal collision.
● Collision from the rear
● Pitching end over end
■ When to contact your Toyota
dealer
In the following cases, the vehicle
will require inspection and/or repair.
Contact your Toyota dealer as soon
as possible.
● Any of the SRS airbags have
been inflated.
● The front of the vehicle is dam-
aged or deformed, or was
involved in an accident that was
not severe enough to cause the
SRS front airbags to inflate.
● A portion of a door or its surround-
ing area is damaged, deformed or
has had a hole made in it, or the
39
1-1. For safe use
1
For safety and security
vehicle was involved in an acci-
dent that was not severe enough
to cause the SRS side and curtain
shield airbags to inflate.
● The pad section of the steering
wheel, dashboard near the front
passenger airbag or lower portion
of the instrument panel is
scratched, cracked, or otherwise
damaged.
● The front passenger’s seat cush-
ion surface is scratched, cracked,
or otherwise damaged.
● The surface of the seats with the
SRS side airbag is scratched,
cracked, or otherwise damaged.
● The portion of the front pillars, rear
pillars or roof side rail garnishes
(padding) containing the SRS cur-
tain shield airbags inside is
scratched, cracked, or otherwise
damaged.
WARNING
■ SRS airbag precautions
Observe the following precautions
regarding the SRS airbags.
Failure to do so may cause death
or serious injury.
● The driver and all passengers in
the vehicle must wear their seat
belts properly.
The SRS airbags are supple-
mental devices to be used with
the seat belts.
● The SRS driver airbag deploys
with considerable force, and
can cause death or serious
injury especially if the driver is
very close to the airbag. The
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA)
advises:
Since the risk zone for the driver’s
airbag is the first 2 - 3 in. (50 - 75
mm) of inflation, placing yourself
10 in. (250 mm) from your driver
airbag provides you with a clear
margin of safety. This distance is
measured from the center of the
steering wheel to your breast-
bone. If you sit less than 10 in.
(250 mm) away now, you can
change your driving position in
several ways:
40
1-1. For safe use
WARNING
• Move your seat to the rear as
far as you can while still reach-
ing the pedals comfortably.
• Slightly recline the back of the
seat.
Although vehicle designs vary,
many drivers can achieve the
10 in. (250 mm) distance, even
with the driver seat all the way
forward, simply by reclining the
back of the seat somewhat. If
reclining the back of your seat
makes it hard to see the road,
raise yourself by using a firm,
non-slippery cushion, or raise
the seat if your vehicle has that
feature.
• If your steering wheel is adjust-
able, tilt it downward. This
points the airbag toward your
chest instead of your head and
neck.
The seat should be adjusted as
recommended by NHTSA above,
while still maintaining control of
the foot pedals, steering wheel,
and your view of the instrument
panel controls.
● If the seat belt extender has
been connected to the front
passenger’s seat belt buckle but
the seat belt extender has not
also been fastened to the latch
plate of the seat belt, the SRS
front airbags will judge that the
front passenger is wearing the
seat belt even though the seat
belt has not been connected. In
this case, the SRS front airbags
for the front passenger may not
activate correctly in a collision,
resulting in death or serious
injury in the event of a collision.
Be sure to wear the seat belt
with the seat belt extender.
● The SRS front passenger air-
bag also deploys with consider-
able force, and can cause death
or serious injury especially if the
front passenger is very close to
the airbag. The front passenger
seat should be as far from the
airbag as possible with the seat-
back adjusted, so the front pas-
senger sits upright.
● Improperly seated and/or
restrained infants and children
can be killed or seriously injured
by a deploying airbag. An infant
or child who is too small to use
a seat belt should be properly
secured using a child restraint
system. Toyota strongly recom-
mends that all infants and chil-
dren be placed in the rear seats
of the vehicle and properly
restrained. The rear seats are
safer for infants and children
than the front passenger seat.
(P.51)
41
1-1. For safe use
1
For safety and security
WARNING
● Do not sit on the edge of the
seat or lean against the dash-
board.
● Do not allow a child to stand in
front of the SRS front passenger
airbag unit or sit on the knees of
a front passenger.
● Do not allow the front seat occu-
pants to hold items on their
knees.
● Do not lean against the door,
the roof side rail or the front,
side and rear pillars.
● Do not allow anyone to kneel on
the passenger seat toward the
door or put their head or hands
outside the vehicle.
● Do not attach anything to or
lean anything against areas
such as the dashboard, steering
wheel pad and lower portion of
the instrument panel.
These items can become pro-
jectiles when the SRS driver,
front passenger and knee air-
bags deploy.
● Do not attach anything to areas
such as a door, windshield, side
windows, front or rear pillar, roof
side rail and assist grip.
42
1-1. For safe use
WARNING
● Do not hang coat hangers or
other hard objects on the coat
hooks. All of these items could
become projectiles and may
cause death or serious injury,
should the SRS curtain shield
airbags deploy.
● If a vinyl cover is put on the area
where the SRS knee airbag will
deploy, be sure to remove it.
● Do not use seat accessories
which cover the parts where the
SRS side airbags and SRS seat
cushion airbag inflate as they
may interfere with inflation of
the SRS airbags. Such acces-
sories may prevent the SRS
side airbags and SRS seat
cushion airbag from activating
correctly, disable the system or
cause the SRS side airbags and
SRS seat cushion airbag to
inflate accidentally, resulting in
death or serious injury.
● Do not strike or apply significant
levels of force to the area of the
SRS airbag components or the
front doors.
Doing so can cause the SRS
airbags to malfunction.
● Do not touch any of the compo-
nent parts immediately after the
SRS airbags have deployed
(inflated) as they may be hot.
● If breathing becomes difficult
after the SRS airbags have
deployed, open a door or side
window to allow fresh air in, or
leave the vehicle if it is safe to
do so. Wash off any residue as
soon as possible to prevent skin
irritation.
● If the areas where the SRS air-
bags are stored, such as the
steering wheel pad and front
and rear pillar garnishes, are
damaged or cracked, have
them replaced by your Toyota
dealer.
● Do not place anything, such as
a cushion, on the front passen-
ger’s seat. Doing so will
disperse the passenger’s
weight, which prevents the sen-
sor from detecting the passen-
ger’s weight properly. As a
result, the SRS front airbags for
the front passenger may not
deploy in the event of a colli-
sion.
■ Modification and disposal of
SRS airbag system compo-
nents
Do not dispose of your vehicle or
perform any of the following modi-
fications without consulting your
Toyota dealer. The SRS airbags
may malfunction or deploy
(inflate) accidentally, causing
death or serious injury.
● Installation, removal, disassem-
bly and repair of the SRS air-
bags
● Repairs, modifications, removal
or replacement of the steering
wheel, instrument panel, dash-
board, seats or seat upholstery,
front, side and rear pillars, roof
side rails, front door panels,
front door trims or front door
speakers
● Modifications to the front door
panel (such as making a hole in
it)
● Repairs or modifications of the
front fender, front bumper, or
side of the occupant compart-
ment
43
1-1. For safe use
1
For safety and security
WARNING
● Installation of a grille guard (bull
bars, kangaroo bar, etc.), snow
plows, winches or roof luggage
carrier
● Modifications to the vehicle’s
suspension system
● Installation of electronic devices
such as mobile two-way radios
and CD players
● Modifications to your vehicle for
a person with a physical disabil-
ity
44
1-1. For safe use
SRS warning light
Driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt reminder light
“AIR BAG OFF” indicator light
“AIR BAG ON” indicator light
Front passenger occupant classification system
Your vehicle is equipped with a front passenger occupant
classification system. This system detects the conditions of
the front passenger seat and activates or deactivates the front
passenger airbag and seat cushion airbag in the front passen-
ger side.
System components
A
B
C
D
WARNING
■ Front passenger occupant
classification system precau-
tions
Observe the following precautions
regarding the front passenger
occupant classification system.
Failure to do so may cause death
or serious injury.
● Wear the seat belt properly.
● Make sure the front passenger’s
seat belt plate has not been left
inserted into the buckle before
someone sits in the front pas-
senger seat.
45
1-1. For safe use
1
For safety and security
WARNING
● Make sure the “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator light is not illuminated
when using the seat belt
extender for the front passenger
seat. If the “AIR BAG OFF” indi-
cator light is illuminated, discon-
nect the extender tongue from
the seat belt buckle, and recon-
nect the seat belt. Reconnect
the seat belt extender after
making sure the “AIR BAG ON”
indicator light is illuminated. If
you use the seat belt extender
while the “AIR BAG OFF” indi-
cator light is illuminated, the
SRS airbags for the front pas-
senger will not activate, which
could cause death or serious
injury in the event of a collision.
● Do not apply a heavy load to the
front passenger seat or equip-
ment (e.g. seatback pocket).
● Do not put weight on the front
passenger seat by putting your
hands or feet on the front pas-
senger seat seatback from the
rear passenger seat.
● Do not let a rear passenger lift
the front passenger seat with
their feet or press on the seat-
back with their legs.
● Do not put objects under the
front passenger seat.
● Do not recline the front passen-
ger seatback so far that it
touches a rear seat. This may
cause the “AIR BAG OFF” indi-
cator light to be illuminated,
which indicates that the SRS
airbags for the front passenger
will not activate in the event of a
severe accident. If the seatback
touches the rear seat, return the
seatback to a position where it
does not touch the rear seat.
Keep the front passenger seat-
back as upright as possible
when the vehicle is moving.
Reclining the seatback exces-
sively may lessen the effective-
ness of the seat belt system.
● If an adult sits in the front pas-
senger seat, the “AIR BAG ON”
indicator light is illuminated. If
the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator is
illuminated, ask the passenger
to sit up straight, well back in
the seat, feet on the floor, and
with the seat belt worn correctly.
If the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator
still remains illuminated, either
ask the passenger to move to
the rear seat, or if that is not
possible, move the front pas-
senger seat fully rearward.
● When it is unavoidable to install
a forward-facing child restraint
system on the front passenger
seat, install the child restraint
system on the front passenger
seat in the proper order.
(P.54)
● Do not modify or remove the
front seats.
● Do not kick the front passenger
seat or subject it to severe
impact. Otherwise, the SRS
warning light may come on to
indicate a malfunction of the
front passenger occupant clas-
sification system. In this case,
contact your Toyota dealer
immediately.
46
1-1. For safe use
■ Adult
*1
WARNING
● Child restraint systems installed
on the rear seat should not con-
tact the front seatbacks.
● Do not use a seat accessory,
such as a cushion and seat
cover, that covers the seat
cushion surface.
● Do not modify or replace the
upholstery of the front seat.
● Adjust the front passenger seat
so that the head restraint does
not touch the ceiling. If the head
restraint is left in contact with
the ceiling, the system may not
detect the front passenger prop-
erly, leading to improper opera-
tion of the airbags.
Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant
classification system
Indicators/warn-
ing lights
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator lights
“AIR BAG ON”
SRS warning light Off
Driver’s and front passenger’s seat
belt reminder light
Off
*2
or flashing
*3
Devices
Front passenger airbag Activated
Front passenger seat cushion airbag
Activated
*2
or
deactivated
*3
47
1-1. For safe use
1
For safety and security
■ Child
*4
■ Child restraint system with infant
*5
■ Unoccupied
Indicators/warn-
ing lights
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator lights
“AIR BAG OFF”
or “AIR BAG
ON”
*4
SRS warning light Off
Driver’s and front passenger’s seat
belt reminder light
Off
*2
or flashing
*3
Devices
Front passenger airbag
Deactivated or
activated
*4
Front passenger seat cushion airbag
Deactivated or
activated
*2, 4
Indicators/warn-
ing lights
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator lights
“AIR BAG OFF”
*6
SRS warning light Off
Driver’s and front passenger’s seat
belt reminder light
Off
*2
or flashing
*3
Devices
Front passenger airbag
Deactivated
Front passenger seat cushion airbag
Indicators/warn-
ing lights
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator lights
“AIR BAG OFF”
SRS warning light
Off
Driver’s and front passenger’s seat
belt reminder light
Devices
Front passenger airbag
Deactivated
Front passenger seat cushion airbag
48
1-1. For safe use
■ There is a malfunction in the system
*1
:The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller
adult sits in the front passenger seat, the system may not recognize
him/her as an adult depending on his/her physique and posture.
*2
:In the event the front passenger is wearing a seat belt.
*3
:In the event the front passenger does not wear a seat belt.
*4
:For some children, child in seat, child in booster seat or child in convert-
ible seat, the system may not recognize him/her as a child. Factors
which may affect this can be the physique or posture.
*5
:Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger
seat. A forward-facing child restraint system should only be installed on
the front passenger seat when it is unavoidable. (P.54)
*6
:In case the indicator light is not illuminated, consult this manual on how
to install the child restraint system properly. (P.51)
Indicators/warn-
ing lights
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator lights
“AIR BAG OFF”
SRS warning light
On
Driver’s and front passenger’s seat
belt reminder light
Devices
Front passenger airbag
Deactivated
Front passenger seat cushion airbag
49
1-1. For safe use
1
For safety and security
Exhaust gas precau-
tions
Harmful substance to the
human body is included in
exhaust gases if inhaled.
WARNING
Exhaust gases contain harmful
carbon monoxide (CO), which is
colorless and odorless. Observe
the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause
exhaust gases to enter the vehicle
and may lead to an accident
caused by light-headedness, or
may lead to death or a serious
health hazard.
■ Important points while driving
● Keep the back door closed.
● If you smell exhaust gases in
the vehicle even when the back
door is closed, open the side
windows and have the vehicle
inspected at your Toyota dealer
as soon as possible.
■ When parking
● If the vehicle is in a poorly venti-
lated area or a closed area,
such as a garage, stop the
hybrid system.
● Do not leave the vehicle with
the hybrid system operating for
a long time.
If such a situation cannot be
avoided, park the vehicle in an
open space and ensure that
exhaust fumes do not enter the
vehicle interior.
● Do not leave the hybrid system
operating in an area with snow
build-up, or where it is snowing.
If snowbanks build up around
the vehicle while the hybrid sys-
tem is operating, exhaust gases
may collect and enter the vehi-
cle.
■ Exhaust pipe
The exhaust system needs to be
checked periodically. If there is a
hole or crack caused by corro-
sion, damage to a joint or abnor-
mal exhaust noise, be sure to
have the vehicle inspected and
repaired by your Toyota dealer.
50
1-2. Child safety
1-2.Child safety
Riding with children
Observe the following pre-
cautions when children are
in the vehicle.
Use a child restraint system
appropriate for the child,
until the child becomes
large enough to properly
wear the vehicle’s seat belt.
It is recommended that chil-
dren sit in the rear seats to
avoid accidental contact
with the shift lever, wiper
switch, etc.
Use the rear door child-pro-
tector lock or the window
lock switch to avoid children
opening the door while driv-
ing or operating the power
window accidentally.
(P.202, 248)
Do not let small children
operate equipment which
may catch or pinch body
parts, such as the power
window, hood, back door,
seats, etc.
WARNING
■ When children are in the vehi-
cle
Never leave children unattended
in the vehicle, and never allow
children to have or use the key.
Children may be able to start the
vehicle or shift the vehicle into
neutral. There is also a danger
that children may injure them-
selves by playing with the side
windows, the moon roof (if
equipped), the panoramic moon
roof (if equipped) or other features
of the vehicle. In addition, heat
build-up or extremely cold tem-
peratures inside the vehicle can
be fatal to children.
51
1-2. Child safety
1
For safety and security
Points to remember: P.51
Child restraint system: P.53
When using a child restraint sys-
tem: P.54
Child restraint system installa-
tion method
• Fixed with a seat belt: P.55
• Fixed with a child restraint
LATCH anchor: P.60
• Using an anchor bracket (for
top tether strap): P.62
The laws of all 50 states of the
U.S.A. as well as Canada now
require the use of child restraint
systems.
Prioritize and observe the
warnings, as well as the laws
and regulations for child
restraint systems.
Use a child restraint system
until the child becomes large
enough to properly wear the
vehicle’s seat belt.
Choose a child restraint sys-
tem that suits your vehicle
and is appropriate to the age
and size of the child.
Child restraint sys-
tems
Before installing a child
restraint system in the vehi-
cle, there are precautions
that need to be observed,
different types of child
restraint systems, as well as
installation methods, etc.,
written in this manual.
Use a child restraint system
when riding with a small child
that cannot properly use a
seat belt. For the child’s
safety, install the child
restraint system to a rear seat.
Be sure to follow the installa-
tion method that is in the oper-
ation manual enclosed with
the restraint system.
Table of contents
Points to remember
WARNING
■ When a child is riding
Observe the following precau-
tions.
Failure to do so may result in
death or serious injury.
● For effective protection in auto-
mobile accidents and sudden
stops, a child must be properly
restrained, using a seat belt or
child restraint system which is
correctly installed. For installa-
tion details, refer to the opera-
tion manual enclosed with the
child restraint system. General
installation instructions are pro-
vided in this manual.
52
1-2. Child safety
WARNING
● Toyota strongly urges the use of
a proper child restraint system
that conforms to the weight and
size of the child, installed on the
rear seat. According to accident
statistics, the child is safer when
properly restrained in the rear
seat than in the front seat.
● Holding a child in your or some-
one else’s arms is not a substi-
tute for a child restraint system.
In an accident, the child can be
crushed against the windshield
or between the holder and the
interior of the vehicle.
■ Handling the child restraint
system
If the child restraint system is not
properly fixed in place, the child or
other passengers may be seri-
ously injured or even killed in the
event of sudden braking, sudden
swerving, or an accident.
● If the vehicle were to receive a
strong impact from an accident,
etc., it is possible that the child
restraint system has damage
that is not readily visible. In
such cases, do not reuse the
restraint system.
● Make sure you have complied
with all installation instructions
provided with the child restraint
system manufacturer and that
the system is properly secured.
● Keep the child restraint system
properly secured on the seat
even if it is not in use. Do not
store the child restraint system
unsecured in the passenger
compartment.
● If it is necessary to detach the
child restraint system, remove it
from the vehicle or store it
securely in the luggage com-
partment.
53
1-2. Child safety
1
For safety and security
■ Types of child restraint system installation methods
Confirm with the operation manual enclosed with the child restraint
system about the installation of the child restraint system.
Child restraint system
Installation method Page
Seat belt attachment P.55
Child restraint LATCH
anchors attachment
P.60
Anchor brackets (for
top tether strap) attach-
ment
P.62
54
1-2. Child safety
■ When installing a child
restraint system to a front
passenger seat
For the safety of a child, install a
child restraint system to a rear
seat. When installing the child
restraint system to a front pas-
senger seat is unavoidable,
adjust the seat as follows and
install the child restraint system.
Adjust the seatback angle to
the most upright position.
Move the front seat fully rear-
ward.
If the head restraint interferes
with the child restraint system
installation and the head
restraint can be removed,
remove the head restraint.
Otherwise, put the head
restraint in the upper most
position.
When using a child
restraint system
WARNING
■ When using a child restraint
system
Observe the following precau-
tions.
Failure to do so may result in
death or serious injury.
● Never install a rear-facing child
restraint system on the front
passenger seat even if the “AIR
BAG OFF” indicator light is illu-
minated. In the event of an acci-
dent, the force of the rapid
inflation of the front passenger
airbag can cause death or seri-
ous injury to the child if the rear-
facing child restraint system is
installed on the front passenger
seat.
● A forward-facing child restraint
system may be installed on the
front passenger seat only when
it is unavoidable. A child
restraint system that requires a
top tether strap should not be
used in the front passenger seat
since there is no top tether strap
anchor for the front passenger
seat.
55
1-2. Child safety
1
For safety and security
A child restraint system for a
small child or baby must itself be
properly restrained on the seat
with the lap portion of the
lap/shoulder belt.
■ Installing child restraint
system using a seat belt
(child restraint lock func-
tion belt)
Install the child restraint system
in accordance to the operation
WARNING
● A forward-facing child restraint
system may be installed on the
front passenger seat only when
it is unavoidable. When install-
ing a forward-facing child
restraint system on the front
passenger seat, adjust the seat-
back angle to the most upright
position, move the seat to the
rearmost position, even if the
“AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is
illuminated.
If the head restraint interferes
with the child restraint system
installation and the head
restraint can be removed,
remove the head restraint.
● Do not allow the child to lean
his/her head or any part of
his/her body against the door or
the area of the seat, front or rear
pillars, or roof side rails from
which the SRS side airbags or
SRS curtain shield airbags
deploy even if the child is
seated in the child restraint sys-
tem. It is dangerous if the SRS
side and curtain shield airbags
inflate, and the impact could
cause death or serious injury to
the child.
● When a booster seat is
installed, always ensure that the
shoulder belt is positioned
across the center of the child’s
shoulder. The belt should be
kept away from the child’s neck,
but not so that it could fall off the
child’s shoulder.
● Use a child restraint system
suitable to the age and size of
the child and install it to the rear
seat.
● If the driver’s seat interferes
with the child restraint system
and prevents it from being
attached correctly, attach the
child restraint system to the
right-hand rear seat.
● Adjust the front passenger seat
so that it does not interfere with
the child restraint system.
Child restraint system
fixed with a seat belt
56
1-2. Child safety
manual enclosed with the child
restraint system.
■ Rear-facing Infant
seat/convertible seat
1 Adjust the rear seat.
If there is a gap between the child
restraint system and the seatback,
adjust the seatback angle until
good contact is achieved.
2 Place the child restraint sys-
tem on the rear seat facing
the rear of the vehicle.
3 Run the seat belt through the
child restraint system and
insert the plate into the
buckle. Make sure that the
belt is not twisted.
4 Fully extend the shoulder belt
and allow it to retract to put it
in lock mode. In lock mode,
the belt cannot be extended.
5 While pushing the child
restraint system down into
the rear seat, allow the shoul-
der belt to retract until the
child restraint system is
securely in place.
After the shoulder belt has
retracted to a point where there is
no slack in the belt, pull the belt to
check that it cannot be extended.
6 After installing the child
restraint system, rock it back
and forth to ensure that it is
installed securely. (P.59)
■ Forward-facing Convert-
ible seat
1 Adjust the seat.
When using the front passenger
seat: If installing the child restraint
system to the front passenger seat
is unavoidable, refer to P.54 for
front passenger seat adjustment.
57
1-2. Child safety
1
For safety and security
When using the rear seat: If there is
a gap between the child restraint
system and the seatback, adjust
the seatback angle until good con-
tact is achieved.
2 If the head restraint interferes
with the child restraint system
installation and the head
restraint can be removed,
remove the head restraint.
(P.231)
3 Place the child restraint sys-
tem on the seat facing the
front of the vehicle.
4 Run the seat belt through the
child restraint system and
insert the plate into the
buckle. Make sure that the
belt is not twisted.
5 Fully extend the shoulder belt
and allow it to retract to put it
in lock mode. In lock mode,
the belt cannot be extended.
6 While pushing the child
restraint system into the rear
seat, allow the shoulder belt
to retract until the child
restraint system is securely in
place.
After the shoulder belt has
retracted to a point where there is
no slack in the belt, pull the belt to
58
1-2. Child safety
check that it cannot be extended.
7 If the child restraint has a top
tether strap, follow the child
restraint manufacturer’s
operation manual regarding
the installation, using the top
tether strap to latch onto the
top tether strap anchor.
(P.62)
8 After installing the child
restraint system, rock it back
and forth to ensure that it is
installed securely. (P.59)
■ Booster seat
1 If installing the child restraint
system to the front passen-
ger seat is unavoidable, refer
to P.54 for front passenger
seat adjustment.
2 High back type: If the head
restraint interferes with your
child restraint system, and
the head restraint can be
removed, remove the head
restraint. (P.231)
3 Place the child restraint sys-
tem on the seat facing the
front of the vehicle.
Booster type
High back type
4 Sit the child in the child
restraint system. Fit the seat
belt to the child restraint sys-
tem according to the manu-
facturer’s instructions and
insert the plate into the
59
1-2. Child safety
1
For safety and security
buckle. Make sure that the
belt is not twisted.
Check that the shoulder belt is cor-
rectly positioned over the child’s
shoulder and that the lap belt is as
low as possible. (P.29)
■ Removing a child restraint
system installed with a seat
belt
Press the buckle release button
and fully retract the seat belt.
When releasing the buckle, the
child restraint system may spring
up due to the rebound of the seat
cushion. Release the buckle while
holding down the child restraint
system.
Since the seat belt automatically
reels itself, slowly return it to the
stowing position.
WARNING
■ When installing a child
restraint system
Observe the following precau-
tions.
Failure to do so may result in
death or serious injury.
● Do not allow children to play
with the seat belt. If the seat belt
becomes twisted around a
child’s neck, it may lead to
choking or other serious injuries
that could result in death.
If this occurs and the buckle
cannot be unfastened, scissors
should be used to cut the belt.
● Ensure that the belt and plate
are securely locked and the
seat belt is not twisted.
● Shake the child restraint system
left and right, and forward and
backward to ensure that it has
been securely installed.
● After securing a child restraint
system, never adjust the seat.
● When a booster seat is
installed, always ensure that the
shoulder belt is positioned
across the center of the child’s
shoulder. The belt should be
kept away from the child’s neck,
but not so that it could fall off the
child’s shoulder.
● Follow all installation instruc-
tions provided by the child
restraint system manufacturer.
60
1-2. Child safety
■ Child restraint LATCH
anchors
LATCH anchors are provided for
the outboard rear seats.
■ When installing in the rear
outboard seats
Install the child restraint system
in accordance to the operation
manual enclosed with the child
restraint system.
1 Adjust the seat.
If there is a gap between the child
restraint system and the seatback,
adjust the seatback angle until
good contact is achieved.
2 If the head restraint interferes
with the child restraint system
installation and the head
restraint can be removed,
WARNING
● When securing some types of
child restraint systems in rear
seats, it may not be possible to
properly use the seat belts in
positions next to the child
restraint without interfering with
it or affecting seat belt effective-
ness. Be sure your seat belt fits
snugly across your shoulder
and low on your hips. If it does
not, or if it interferes with the
child restraint, move to a differ-
ent position. Failure to do so
may result in death or serious
injury.
● When installing a child restraint
system in the center rear seat,
adjust both seatbacks at the
same angle. Otherwise, the
child restraint system cannot be
securely restrained and this
may cause death or serious
injuries in the event of sudden
braking, sudden swerving or an
accident.
■ When installing a booster
seat
To prevent the belt from going
into ALR lock mode, do not fully
extend the shoulder belt. ALR
mode causes the belt to tighten
only. This could cause injury or
discomfort to the child. (P.31)
■ Do not use a seat belt
extender
If a seat belt extender is used
when installing a child restraint
system, the seat belt will not
securely hold the child restraint
system, which could cause death
or serious injury to the child or
other passengers in the event of
sudden braking, sudden swerv-
ing or an accident.
Child restraint system
fixed with a child restraint
LATCH anchor
61
1-2. Child safety
1
For safety and security
remove the head restraint.
(P.231)
With flexible lower attach-
ments
3 Latch the hooks of the lower
attachments onto the LATCH
anchors.
For owners in Canada:
The symbol on a child
restraint system indicates
the presence of a lower con-
nector system.
With rigid lower attachments
3 Latch the buckles onto the
LATCH anchors.
For owners in Canada:
The symbol on a child
restraint system indicates
the presence of a lower con-
nector system.
4 If the child restraint has a top
tether strap, follow the child
restraint manufacturer’s
operation manual regarding
the installation, using the top
tether strap to latch onto the
top tether strap anchor.
(P.62)
5 After installing the child
restraint system, rock it back
and forth to ensure that it is
installed securely. (P.59)
A
A
62
1-2. Child safety
■ When installing in the rear
center seat
There are no LATCH anchors
behind the rear center seat.
However, the inboard LATCH
anchors of the outboard seats,
which are 17.3 in. (440 mm)
apart, can be used if the child
restraint system manufacturer’s
instructions permit use of those
anchors with the anchor spacing
stated.
Child restraint systems with rigid
lower attachments cannot be
installed in the center seat. This
type of child restraint system
can only be installed in the out-
board seat.
■ Laws and regulations pertain-
ing to anchors
The LATCH system conforms to
FMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2.
Child restraint systems conforming
to FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 speci-
fications can be used.
This vehicle is designed to conform
to SAE J1819.
■ Anchor brackets (for top
tether strap)
Anchor brackets are provided
for each rear seat.
Use anchor brackets when fix-
ing the top tether strap.
WARNING
■ When installing a child
restraint system
Observe the following precau-
tions.
Failure to do so may result in
death or serious injury.
● When using the LATCH
anchors, be sure that there are
no foreign objects around the
anchors and that the seat belt is
not caught behind the child
restraint system.
● Follow all installation instruc-
tions provided by the child
restraint system manufacturer.
● Never attach two child restraint
system attachments to the
same anchor. In a collision, one
anchor may not be strong
enough to hold two child
restraint system attachments
and may break.
If the LATCH anchors are
already in use, use the seat belt
to install a child restraint system
in the center seat.
● When securing some types of
child restraint systems in rear
seats, it may not be possible to
properly use the seat belts in
positions next to the child
restraint without interfering with
it or affecting seat belt effective-
ness. Be sure your seat belt fits
snugly across your shoulder
and low on your hips. If it does
not, or if it interferes with the
child restraint, move to a differ-
ent position. Failure to do so
may result in death or serious
injury.
● If the seat is adjusted, reconfirm
the security of the child restraint
system.
Using an anchor bracket
(for top tether strap)
63
1-2. Child safety
1
For safety and security
Outboard rear seats
Anchor brackets
Top tether strap
Center rear seat
Anchor bracket
Top tether strap
■ Fixing the top tether strap
to the anchor bracket
Install the child restraint system
in accordance to the operation
manual enclosed with the child
restraint system.
Outboard rear seats
1 Remove the head restraint.
(P.231)
2 Latch the hook onto the
anchor bracket and tighten
the top tether strap.
Make sure the top tether strap is
securely latched. (P.59)
Hook
Top tether strap
3 If the head restraint does not
interfere with the child
A
B
A
B
A
B
64
1-2. Child safety
restraint system installation,
install the head restraint.
Center rear seat
1 Adjust the head restraint to
the upmost position.
If the head restraint interferes with
your child restraint system, and the
head restraint can be removed,
remove the head restraint.
(P.231)
2 Latch the hook onto the
anchor bracket and tighten
the top tether strap.
Make sure the top tether strap is
securely latched.
When installing the child restraint
system with the head restraint
being raised, be sure to have the
top tether strap pass underneath
the head restraint.
Hook
Top tether strap
■ Laws and regulations pertain-
ing to anchors
The LATCH system conforms to
FMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2.
Child restraint systems conforming
to FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 speci-
fications can be used.
This vehicle is designed to conform
to SAE J1819.
WARNING
■ When installing a child
restraint system
Observe the following precau-
tions.
Failure to do so may result in
death or serious injury.
● Firmly attach the top tether
strap and make sure that the
belt is not twisted.
● Do not attach the top tether
strap to anything other than the
anchor bracket.
● After securing a child restraint
system, never adjust the seat.
● Follow all installation instruc-
tions provided by the child
restraint system manufacturer.
A
B
65
1-2. Child safety
1
For safety and security
WARNING
● Center rear seat: When install-
ing the child restraint system
with the head restraint being
raised, after the head restraint
has been raised and then the
anchor bracket has been fixed,
do not lower the head restraint.
66
1-3. Emergency assistance
1-3.Emer gency as sistance
Microphone
“SOS” button
LED light indicators
Safety Connect
Safety Connect is a sub-
scription-based telematics
service that uses Global
Positioning System (GPS)
data and embedded cellular
technology to provide
safety and security features
to subscribers. Safety Con-
nect is supported by
Toyota’s designated
response center, which
operates 24 hours per day, 7
days per week.
Safety Connect service is
available by subscription on
select, telematics hardware-
equipped vehicles.
By using the Safety Connect
service, you are agreeing to
be bound by the Telematics
Subscription Service Agree-
ment and its Terms and
Conditions, as in effect and
amended from time to time,
a current copy of which is
available at Toyota.com in
the United States,
Toyotapr.com in Puerto
Rico and Toyota.ca in Can-
ada. All use of the Safety
Connect service is subject
to such then-applicable
Terms and Conditions.
System components
A
B
C
67
1-3. Emergency assistance
1
For safety and security
■ Certification for the Safety Connect
68
1-3. Emergency assistance
Subscribers have the following
Safety Connect services avail-
able:
Automatic Collision Notifica-
tion
*
Helps drivers receive necessary
response from emergency service
providers. (
P.69)
*
: U.S. Patent No. 7,508,298 B2
Stolen Vehicle Location
Helps drivers in the event of vehicle
theft. (
P.70)
Emergency Assistance Button
(“SOS”)
Connects drivers to response-cen-
ter support. (
P.70)
Enhanced Roadside Assis-
tance
Provides drivers various on-road
assistance. (
P.70)
After you have signed the
Telematics Subscription Ser-
vice Agreement and are
enrolled, you can begin receiv-
ing services.
A variety of subscription terms
are available for purchase. Con-
tact your Toyota dealer, call the
following appropriate Customer
Experience Center or push the
“SOS” button in your vehicle for
further subscription details.
The United States
1-800-331-4331
Canada
1-888-869-6828
Puerto Rico
1-877-855-8377
Services Subscription
69
1-3. Emergency assistance
1
For safety and security
■ Safety Connect Services Infor-
mation
● Phone calls using the vehicle’s
Bluetooth
®
technology will not be
possible when Safety Connect is
active and in use.
● Safety Connect is available begin-
ning Fall 2009 on select Toyota
models (in the contiguous United
States only). Contact with the
Safety Connect response center
is dependent upon the telematics
device being in operative condi-
tion, cellular connection availabil-
ity, and GPS satellite signal
reception, which can limit the abil-
ity to reach the response center or
receive emergency service sup-
port. Enrollment and Telematics
Subscription Service Agreement
are required. A variety of subscrip-
tion terms are available; charges
vary by subscription term selected
and location.
● Automatic Collision Notification,
Emergency Assistance and Stolen
Vehicle Location are available in
the United States, including
Hawaii and Alaska, Puerto Rico
and Canada, and Enhanced
Roadside Assistance are avail-
able in the United States, Puerto
Rico and Canada.
● Automatic Collision Notification,
Emergency Assistance, Stolen
Vehicle and Enhanced Road
Assistance are not available in the
U.S. Virgin Islands.
For vehicles first sold in the U.S.
Virgin Islands, no Safety Connect
services will function in or outside
the U.S. Virgin Islands.
● Safety Connect services are not
subject to section 255 of the Tele-
communications Act and the
device is not TTY compatible.
■ Languages
The Safety Connect response cen-
ter will offer support in multiple lan-
guages. The Safety Connect system
will offer voice prompts in English,
Spanish, and French. Please indi-
cate your language of choice when
enrolling.
■ When contacting the response
center
You may be unable to contact the
response center if the network is
busy.
When the power switch is turned
to ON, the red indicator light
comes on for 2 seconds then
turns off. Afterward, the green
indicator light comes on, indicat-
ing that the service is active.
The following indicator light pat-
terns indicate specific system
usage conditions:
Green indicator light on =
Active service
Green indicator light flashing
= Safety Connect call in pro-
cess
Red indicator light (except at
vehicle start-up) = System
malfunction (contact your
Toyota dealer)
No indicator light (off) =
Safety Connect service not
active
■ Automatic Collision Notifi-
cation
In case of either airbag deploy-
Safety Connect LED light
Indicators
Safety Connect services
70
1-3. Emergency assistance
ment or severe rear-end colli-
sion, the system is designed to
automatically call the response
center. The responding agent
receives the vehicle’s location
and attempts to speak with the
vehicle occupants to assess the
level of emergency. If the occu-
pants are unable to communi-
cate, the agent automatically
treats the call as an emergency,
contacts the nearest emer-
gency services provider to
describe the situation, and
requests that assistance be sent
to the location.
■ Stolen Vehicle Location
If your vehicle is stolen, Safety
Connect can work with local
authorities to assist them in
locating and recovering the
vehicle. After filing a police
report, call the Customer Experi-
ence Center at 1-800-331-4331
in the United States, 1-877-855-
8377 in Puerto Rico or 1-888-
869-6828 in Canada, and follow
the prompts for Safety Connect
to initiate this service.
In addition to assisting law
enforcement with recovery of a
stolen vehicle, Safety-Connect-
equipped vehicle location data
may, under certain circum-
stances, be shared with third
parties to locate your vehicle.
Further information is available
at Toyota.com in the United
States, Toyotapr.com in Puerto
Rico and Toyota.ca in Canada.
■ Emergency Assistance But-
ton (“SOS”)
In the event of an emergency on
the road, push the “SOS” button
to reach the Safety Connect
response center. The answering
agent will determine your vehi-
cle’s location, assess the emer-
gency, and dispatch the
necessary assistance required.
If you accidentally press the “SOS”
button, tell the response-center
agent that you are not experiencing
an emergency.
■ Enhanced Roadside Assis-
tance
Enhanced Roadside Assistance
adds GPS data to the already
included warranty-based Toyota
roadside service.
Subscribers can press the
“SOS” button to reach a Safety
Connect response-center agent,
who can help with a wide range
of needs, such as: towing, flat
tire, fuel delivery, etc. For a
description of the Enhanced
Roadside Assistance services
and their limitations, please see
the Safety Connect Terms and
Conditions, which are available
at Toyota.com in the United
States, Toyotapr.com in Puerto
Rico and Toyota.ca in Canada.
71
1-3. Emergency assistance
1
For safety and security
Important! Read this informa-
tion before using Safety Con-
nect.
■ Exposure to radio fre-
quency signals
The Safety Connect system
installed in your vehicle is a low-
power radio transmitter and
receiver. It receives and also
sends out radio frequency (RF)
signals.
In August 1996, the Federal
Communications Commission
(FCC) adopted RF exposure
guidelines with safety levels for
mobile wireless phones. Those
guidelines are consistent with
the safety standards previously
set by the following U.S. and
international standards bodies.
ANSI (American National
Standards Institute) C95.1
[1992]
NCRP (National Council on
Radiation Protection and
Measurement) Report 86
[1986]
ICNIRP (International Com-
mission on Non-Ionizing Radi-
ation Protection) [1996]
Those standards were based on
comprehensive and periodic
evaluations of the relevant sci-
entific literature. Over 120 scien-
tists, engineers, and physicians
from universities, and govern-
ment health agencies and
industries reviewed the avail-
able body of research to
develop the ANSI Standard
(C95.1).
The design of Safety Connect
complies with the FCC guide-
lines in addition to those stan-
dards.
Safety information for
Safety Connect
72
1-4. Theft deterrent system
1-4.Theft deterrent system
The indicator light flashes after
the power switch has been
turned to OFF to indicate that
the system is operating.
The indicator light goes off after
the power switch has been
turned to ACC or ON to indicate
that the system has been can-
celed.
■ System maintenance
The vehicle has a maintenance-free
type immobilizer system.
■ Conditions that may cause the
system to malfunction
● If the grip portion of the key is in
contact with a metallic object
● If the key is in close proximity to or
touching a key to the security sys-
tem (key with a built-in transpon-
der chip) of another vehicle
■ Certification for the immobi-
lizer system
P.221
Immobilizer system
The vehicle’s keys have
built-in transponder chips
that prevent the hybrid sys-
tem from starting if a key
has not been previously
registered in the vehicle’s
on-board computer.
Never leave the keys inside
the vehicle when you leave
the vehicle.
This system is designed to
help prevent vehicle theft but
does not guarantee absolute
security against all vehicle
thefts.
Operating the system
NOTICE
■ To ensure the system oper-
ates correctly
Do not modify or remove the sys-
tem. If modified or removed, the
proper operation of the system
cannot be guaranteed.
73
1-4. Theft deterrent system
1
For safety and security
*
: If equipped
■ Items to check before lock-
ing the vehicle
To prevent unexpected trigger-
ing of the alarm and vehicle
theft, make sure of the following:
Nobody is in the vehicle.
The side windows and moon
roof (if equipped) or pan-
oramic moon roof (if
equipped) are closed before
the alarm is set.
No valuables or other per-
sonal items are left in the
vehicle.
■ Setting
Close the doors and hood, and
lock all the doors. The system
will be set automatically after 30
seconds.
The security indicator changes from
being on to flashing when the sys-
tem is set.
If all doors are closed with hood
open, alarm system can be set.
(P.73)
■ Canceling or stopping
Do one of the following to deac-
tivate or stop the alarm:
Unlock the doors.
Turn the power switch to ACC
or ON, or start the hybrid sys-
tem. (The alarm will be deacti-
vated or stopped after a few
seconds.)
■ System maintenance
The vehicle has a maintenance-free
type alarm system.
■ Triggering of the alarm
The alarm may be triggered in the
following situations:
(Stopping the alarm deactivates the
alarm system.)
● The doors are unlocked using the
mechanical key.
Alarm
*
The alarm uses light and
sound to give an alert when
an intrusion is detected.
The alarm is triggered in the
following situations when
the alarm is set:
A locked door is unlocked or
opened in any way other
than using the entry func-
tion, wireless remote control
or mechanical key. (The
doors will lock again auto-
matically.)
The hood is opened.
Setting/canceling/stop-
ping the alarm system
74
1-4. Theft deterrent system
If a door is unlocked using the
mechanical key while the alarm is
set, a warning will sound intermit-
tently for approximately 10 seconds.
If the alarm is not canceled or
stopped during this time, the warn-
ing pattern changes and the warn-
ing sounds for a certain period of
time.
● A person inside the vehicle opens
a door or hood, or unlocks the
vehicle using an inside lock but-
ton.
● The 12-volt battery is recharged or
replaced when the vehicle is
locked. (P.539)
■ Alarm-operated door lock
In the following cases, depending
on the situation, the door may auto-
matically lock to prevent improper
entry into the vehicle:
● When a person remaining in the
vehicle unlocks the door and the
alarm is activated.
● While the alarm is activated, a
person remaining in the vehicle
unlocks the door.
● When recharging or replacing the
12-volt battery.
NOTICE
■ To ensure the system oper-
ates correctly
Do not modify or remove the sys-
tem. If modified or removed, the
proper operation of the system
cannot be guaranteed.
75
2
2
Plug-in hybrid system
Plug-in hybrid system
2-1. Plug-in hybrid system
Plug-in hybrid system fea-
tures .............................76
Plug-in hybrid system pre-
cautions........................87
Plug-in hybrid vehicle driv-
ing tips..........................92
EV driving range ............95
2-2. Charging
Charging equipment.......99
AC charging cable....... 102
Locking and unlocking the
charging port lid and
charging connector.... 107
Power sources that can be
used .......................... 111
Charging methods....... 114
Charging tips............... 118
Things to know before
charging .................... 120
How to charge............. 123
Using the charging schedule
function...................... 130
Using the “My Room Mode”
.................................. 144
When charging cannot be
carried out ................. 147
76
2-1. Plug-in hybrid system
2-1.Plug-in hybrid system
The illustration is an example for explanation and may differ from the actual
item.
Gasoline engine
Front electric motor (traction motor)
Rear electric motor (traction motor)
Plug-in hybrid system features
The plug-in hybrid system is a system excellent in both eco-
nomical efficiency of electric vehicles and practicality of
hybrid vehicles.
EV driving can be performed using electricity charged from an
external power source.
*
If the amount of electricity remaining in the hybrid battery (trac-
tion battery) becomes low, the vehicle is automatically controlled
in such a way that it can be driven as a hybrid vehicle through
the joint use of the gasoline engine.
*
: The EV driving range will vary in accordance with conditions such as
vehicle speed, the amount of charge remaining in the hybrid battery
(traction battery) and the usage of the air conditioning system. The gas-
oline engine may also be used simultaneously in accordance with driv-
ing conditions.
System components
A
B
C
77
2-1. Plug-in hybrid system
2
Plug-in hybrid system
The plug-in hybrid system oper-
ates in the following modes.
The multi-information display can
be used to check which mode the
plug-in hybrid system is currently
being driven in. (P.160)
■ EV mode
When a sufficient amount of
electricity is remaining after
charging
*1
, EV driving is per-
formed using electricity stored in
the hybrid battery (traction bat-
tery).
*2
When in EV mode, the EV drive
mode indicator illuminates.
*1
:The amount of remaining charge
can be checked on the SOC
(State of Charge) gauge.
(P.165)
*2
:Depending on the situation, EV
driving may be canceled and
both gasoline engine and electric
motor are used. (P.82)
■ AUTO EV/HV mode
Normally, the electricity stored
in the hybrid battery (traction
battery) is used for EV driving.
However, when more power is
required, such as for driving
uphill or accelerating suddenly,
the gasoline engine starts and
provides powerful acceleration
by strongly depressing the
accelerator pedal.
When the vehicle is in a condi-
tion where EV driving is possi-
ble, EV mode and AUTO EV/HV
mode can be switched by oper-
ating the switch. (P.78)
When in AUTO EV/HV mode, the
AUTO EV/HV mode indicator illumi-
nates.
■ HV mode
When in HV mode, the vehicle is
driven using both the gasoline
Plug-in hybrid system
operation mode
78
2-1. Plug-in hybrid system
engine and electric motor.
(P.81)
• If electricity needed for EV
driving in EV mode or AUTO
EV/HV mode is not remaining,
the operation mode will be
automatically switched to HV
mode.
• The operation mode can be
switched to HV mode at any
timing by operating the switch
to keep electricity for EV driv-
ing etc.
*
(P.78). Switching
to HV mode when driving on a
highway or when driving uphill
is recommended in order to
conserve battery power.
When in HV mode, the HV drive
mode indicator illuminates.
*
: The EV driving range may reduce
even after switching to HV mode.
■ Hybrid battery (traction bat-
tery) charge mode (P.79)
Electricity generated in the gas-
oline engine can be charged in
the hybrid battery (traction bat-
tery) by switching to the hybrid
battery (traction battery) charge
mode when electricity needed
for EV driving is not remaining.
*
• The system may not be able
to switch to the hybrid battery
(traction battery) charge
mode due to the state of the
plug-in hybrid system.
(P.80)
• Charging time differs depend-
ing on the driving state of the
vehicle when driving in hybrid
battery (traction battery)
charge mode.
When in the hybrid battery (traction
battery) charge mode, the hybrid
battery charge mode indicator illu-
minates.
*
: When in the hybrid battery (trac-
tion battery) charge mode, the
hybrid battery can be charged
while driving. However, the gaso-
line engine runs to charge the
battery and fuel consumption
becomes higher compared with
driving in HV mode.
The plug-in hybrid system oper-
ation modes can be switched
using the switches.
■ Switching the plug-in
hybrid system operation
modes
Press the AUTO EV/HV mode
switch or EV/HV mode selection
switch to change modes as the
following table shows.
When in EV mode, the EV drive
mode indicator illuminates.
Plug-in hybrid system
operation mode selection
switches
79
2-1. Plug-in hybrid system
2
Plug-in hybrid system
When in AUTO EV/HV mode, the
AUTO EV/HV mode indicator illumi-
nates.
When in HV mode, the HV drive
mode indicator illuminates.
AUTO EV/HV mode switch
*
: If there is not enough charge
remaining in the hybrid battery
(traction battery) to allow EV driv-
ing, AUTO EV/HV mode will not
be selectable.
EV/HV mode selection switch
*
: If there is not enough charge
remaining in the hybrid battery
(traction battery) to allow EV driv-
ing, EV mode will not be select-
able.
■ Switching to the hybrid bat-
tery (traction battery)
charge mode
Press and hold the EV/HV mode
selection switch.
Take your hand off the switch once
the hybrid battery charge mode
indicator starts to blink.
The hybrid battery charge mode
indicator illuminates when the
switch to hybrid battery (traction
battery) charge mode is complete.
When the hybrid battery (traction
battery) is fully charged
*
, the hybrid
battery (traction battery) charge
mode is automatically canceled and
the operation mode will be switched
to HV mode.
The hybrid battery (traction bat-
tery) charge mode will be canceled
by pressing AUTO EV/HV mode
switch or EV/HV mode selection
switch.
*
: The maximum charge amount in
the hybrid battery (traction bat-
tery) charge mode is approxi-
mately 80% of the fully charged
capacity for the charging from an
Current mode
Mode after
switching
EV mode
AUTO EV/HV
mode
AUTO EV/HV
mode
EV mode
HV mode
AUTO EV/HV
mode
*
Current mode
Mode after
switching
EV mode HV mode
AUTO EV/HV
mode
HV mode
HV mode
EV mode
*
80
2-1. Plug-in hybrid system
external power source.
■ If the plug-in hybrid system
operation mode cannot be
changed
In the following situations, the plug-
in hybrid system operation mode
cannot be changed even if the
AUTO EV/HV mode switch or
EV/HV mode selection switch is
pressed. (In this case, the warning
message is displayed on the multi-
information display when the switch
is pressed.)
● When electricity needed for EV
driving is not remaining (when in
EV mode or AUTO EV/HV mode)
● When the traction battery is
almost completely charged (hybrid
battery [traction battery] charge
mode)
■ When switching from EV mode
to another mode using the
switch
When the power switch is turned off,
operation mode switching is can-
celed and the system returns to EV
mode the next time the vehicle is
started.
*
*
: If there is not enough charge
remaining in the hybrid battery
(traction battery) to allow EV driv-
ing, the system switches to HV
mode.
■ Hybrid battery (traction battery)
charge mode
● The following may occur to protect
the system, etc.
• Cannot switch to hybrid battery
(traction battery) charge mode or
cannot cancel it
• Gasoline engine does not start or
stops even after switching to
hybrid battery (traction battery)
charge mode
● If a load to the system is large,
such as when the power con-
sumption of the air conditioning
system is large or when the tem-
perature of the engine coolant is
high, it may take longer time than
usual to charge using the hybrid
battery (traction battery) charge
mode, or charging to the hybrid
battery (traction battery) may not
be performed.
■ When in EV mode
In EV mode, EV driving (driving
WARNING
■ When using the hybrid bat-
tery (traction battery) charge
mode
Observe the following precautions
when using the hybrid battery
(traction battery) charge mode
while parking.
Failure to do so may lead to death
or serious health hazard, as the
gasoline engine operates when in
the hybrid battery (traction bat-
tery) charge mode.
● Do not stop the vehicle near
flammable materials.
● Do not use the hybrid battery
(traction battery) charge mode
in a closed area where ventila-
tion is insufficient, such as in a
garage or area with snow
buildup.
Control when driving in
each mode
81
2-1. Plug-in hybrid system
2
Plug-in hybrid system
using only the electric motor)
*
is
possible. However, depending
on the situation, EV driving may
be canceled and both gasoline
engine and electric motor are
used (P.82). Also, if a little
electricity is remaining in the
hybrid battery (traction battery),
HV mode is automatically
selected. To drive in EV mode
long, observe the followings.
Avoid sudden acceleration
and sudden deceleration, and
be sure to drive smoothly. If
you repeatedly accelerate,
the hybrid battery (traction
battery) charge will deplete
quickly. Also, EV driving may
be canceled by rapid acceler-
ation or vehicle speed.
Restrain your speed as much
as possible. The distance that
can be driven in EV mode will
reduce considerably at high
speeds.
*
: The EV driving range can be
checked using the multi-informa-
tion display. (P.172)
■ When in AUTO EV/HV mode
Only the electric motor is used
for EV driving
*
during normal
driving, but when the accelera-
tor pedal is strongly depressed,
the gasoline engine starts.
(P.82)
Also, when the hybrid battery
(traction battery) level is low, the
mode switches to HV mode
automatically the same as in EV
mode.
AUTO EV/HV mode is suitable
for driving conditions when more
power is required, such as for
driving uphill or accelerating
suddenly. However, because
the gasoline engine will start
more easily, it is recommended
to drive in EV mode usually.
*
: The EV driving range can be
checked using the multi-informa-
tion display. (P.172)
■ When in HV mode
The vehicle can be used in the
same way as a standard hybrid
vehicle.
In HV mode, controls are pri-
marily carried out as follows in
accordance with the driving con-
ditions.
The gasoline engine stops
*
when the vehicle is stopped.
During start off, the electric
motor (traction motor) drives
the vehicle.
During normal driving, the
gasoline engine and electric
motor (traction motor) are
controlled effectively, and the
vehicle is driven with optimum
fuel efficiency. Also, when
necessary, the electric motor
(traction motor) operates as
an electrical generator to
charge the hybrid battery
(traction battery).
82
2-1. Plug-in hybrid system
When the accelerator pedal is
depressed heavily, drive force
from both the gasoline engine
and the electric motor (trac-
tion motor) is used to acceler-
ate.
*
: When the hybrid battery (traction
battery) requires charging or the
engine is warming up, etc., the
gasoline engine will not automati-
cally stop. (P.83)
■ When braking (regenera-
tive braking)
The electric motor (traction
motor) charges the hybrid bat-
tery (traction battery).
The EV driving range can be
extended by actively using this
regenerative braking to store
electricity in the hybrid battery
(traction battery).
Moreover, as fuel consumption
is also reduced when in HV
mode, the regenerative braking
system can be used effectively.
■ Regenerative braking
In the following situations, kinetic
energy is converted to electric
energy and deceleration force can
be obtained in conjunction with the
recharging of the hybrid battery
(traction battery).
● The accelerator pedal is released
while driving with the shift lever in
D or S.
● The brake pedal is depressed
while driving with the shift lever in
D or S.
■ EV driving range
● The EV driving range is displayed
on the multi-information display.
(P.172)
● The EV driving range changes in
accordance with the charge status
of the hybrid battery (traction bat-
tery), the speed of the vehicle, etc.
● Even if there is enough charge
remaining in the hybrid battery
(traction battery), EV driving may
be canceled and both gasoline
engine and electric motor are
used depending on the situation.
(P.82)
■ EV indicator
The EV indicator comes on when
the vehicle is driven using only the
electric motor (traction motor) or the
gasoline engine is stopped.
The on/off operation of the EV indi-
cator can be changed. (P.177)
■ After EV mode has switched to
HV mode due to low hybrid bat-
tery (traction battery) charge
If the hybrid battery (traction battery)
is regenerated by driving continu-
ously down a long slope, the EV
driving range etc. will be displayed
on the multi-information display and
EV mode will be automatically
switched to.
If EV mode is not switched to even
though EV driving range is being
displayed, EV mode can be
switched to by pressing the EV/HV
mode selection switch.
■ Gasoline engine operation in
EV mode or AUTO EV/HV mode
Even if there is a sufficient amount
of electricity remaining in the hybrid
battery (traction battery) and EV
83
2-1. Plug-in hybrid system
2
Plug-in hybrid system
driving range (P.172) is being dis-
played on the multi-information dis-
play, EV driving (driving using only
the electric motor) may be canceled
and both gasoline engine and elec-
tric motor are used depending on
the situation (EV driving will be
returned to automatically after EV
driving becomes possible again).
EV driving may be canceled auto-
matically in the following circum-
stances
*1
:
● When vehicle speed is more than
approximately 84 mph (135 km/h).
● When power is needed temporar-
ily, for example when the acceler-
ator pedal is depressed firmly or
when accelerating suddenly.
*2
● When the temperature of the
hybrid system is high.
The vehicle has been left in the
sun, driven on a hill, driven at high
speeds, etc.
● When the temperature of the
hybrid system is low.
● When the heater is switched on
when the outside temperature is
below about 14°F (-10°C).
● When the windshield defogger
switch is pressed. (P.398)
● When the system determines that
the gasoline engine needs to be
started.
*1
:The gasoline engine may also
operate in circumstances other
than those listed above, depend-
ing on conditions.
*2
:When driving in AUTO EV/HV
mode. Even in EV mode, the gas-
oline engine may start, depend-
ing on the condition of the hybrid
battery (traction battery).
■ If “Engine Started to Protect
System EV driving unavailable”
is displayed on the multi-infor-
mation display
EV driving may be canceled in order
to protect the hybrid system, etc.
In this case, perform driving with the
gasoline engine until EV driving will
be returned to automatically.
■ Conditions in which the gaso-
line engine may not stop
The gasoline engine starts and
stops automatically. However, it
may not stop automatically in the
following conditions
*
:
● During gasoline engine warm-up
● During hybrid battery (traction bat-
tery) charging
● When the temperature of the
hybrid battery (traction battery) is
high or low
● When the windshield defogger
switch is pressed. (P.398)
*
: Depending on the circumstances,
the gasoline engine may also not
stop automatically in situations
other than those above.
■ Sounds and vibrations specific
to a hybrid vehicle
There may be no engine sound or
vibration even though the vehicle is
able to move with the “READY” indi-
cator is illuminated. For safety,
apply the parking brake and make
sure to shift the shift lever to P when
parked.
The following sounds or vibrations
may occur when the hybrid system
is operating and are not a malfunc-
tion.
● Motor sounds may be heard from
the engine compartment.
● Sounds may be heard from the
hybrid battery (traction battery)
when the hybrid system starts or
stops.
● Relay operating sounds such as a
snap or soft clank will be emitted
from the hybrid battery (traction
battery), behind the rear seats,
when the hybrid system is started
or stopped.
84
2-1. Plug-in hybrid system
● Sounds from the hybrid system
may be heard when the back door
is open.
● Sounds may be heard from the
transmission when the gasoline
engine starts or stops, when driv-
ing at low speeds, or during idling.
● Engine sounds may be heard
when accelerating sharply.
● Sounds may be heard due to
regenerative braking when the
brake pedal is depressed or as
the accelerator pedal is released.
● Vibration may be felt when the
gasoline engine starts or stops.
● Cooling fan sounds may be heard
from the air intake vent under the
rear seat. (P.91)
● Sounds may be heard from near
the hybrid battery (traction battery)
in accordance with the operation
of the air conditioning system or
“Battery Cooler” (P.116).
■ Maintenance, repair, recycling,
and disposal
Contact your Toyota dealer regard-
ing maintenance, repair, recycling
and disposal. Do not dispose of the
vehicle yourself.
In order to make EV mode or
AUTO EV/HV mode available,
charge the hybrid battery (trac-
tion battery) from an external
power source before using the
vehicle.
Even if charging the hybrid battery
(traction battery) has not been com-
pleted, the vehicle can be driven.
However, if there is not enough
charge remaining, it is possible that
the vehicle cannot be driven in EV
mode or AUTO EV/HV mode or the
EV driving range will become
shorter.
■ Refilling fuel
Plug-in hybrid vehicles can be
driven using electricity charged from
an external power source. However,
as the gasoline engine is used
depending on the situation (P.82)
even if in EV mode or AUTO EV/HV
mode, and the gasoline engine is
provided on board as a power
source for driving in HV mode, it is
needed to refueling the vehicle.
Check the fuel amount and refill
immediately when the fuel level
becomes low. (P.306)
■ If the vehicle is not used for a
long time
● The 12-volt battery may dis-
charge. In this event, charge the
12-volt battery. (P.539)
In order to prevent the hybrid bat-
tery (traction battery) from becom-
ing extremely low in charge,
charge the hybrid battery (traction
battery) from external power
source or start the hybrid system
at least once every 2 or 3 months,
and turn the power switch off after
the gasoline engine has stopped
automatically. (If the gasoline
engine does not start up even
after approximately 10 seconds
have passed since the “READY”
indicator came on, the power
Charging (P.99)
85
2-1. Plug-in hybrid system
2
Plug-in hybrid system
switch can be turned to off without
any further action.)
When the 12-volt battery is dis-
charged, refer to P.539, “If the 12-
volt battery is discharged” and
perform the correction procedure.
● When the vehicle is left with the
AC charging cable connected, the
electricity consumption amount of
the 12-volt battery increases due
to controls, such as the system
checking, operating. When the AC
charging cable is not needed,
immediately remove it from the
vehicle.
When driving with the gasoline
engine stopped, a sound, which
changes in accordance with the
driving speed, will be played in
order to warn people nearby of
the vehicle’s approach. The
sound will stop when the vehicle
speed exceeds approximately
22 mph (35 km/h).
■ Acoustic Vehicle Alerting Sys-
tem
In the following cases, the Acoustic
Vehicle Alerting System may be dif-
ficult for surrounding people to hear.
● In very noisy areas
● In the wind or the rain
Also, as the Acoustic Vehicle Alert-
ing System is installed on the front
of the vehicle, it may be more diffi-
cult to hear from the rear of the vehi-
cle compared to the front.
■ When “Acoustic Vehicle Alert-
ing System Malfunction Visit
your Dealer” is displayed on the
multi-information display
The Acoustic Vehicle Alerting Sys-
tem may be malfunctioning. Have
the vehicle inspected by your
Toyota dealer immediately.
*
: This function can only be used in
the mainland U.S.A. It cannot be
used in other states and territo-
ries, including Alaska and Hawaii.
This system operates based on
the driving situation and traffic
information to enhance fuel
economy.
For details about Predictive effi-
cient drive, refer to “NAVIGA-
TION AND MULTIMEDIA
SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.
When the vehicle approaches
to predictive deceleration sup-
port points registered in the
navigation system, the “Refer-
ence operation range” ( ) of
the ECO Accelerator Guid-
ance (P.173) on the multi-
information display will be
turned off to encourage the
driver to reduce excessive
acceleration.
Acoustic Vehicle Alerting
System
Predictive efficient drive
(predictive deceleration
support) (vehicles with
navigation system)
*
A
86
2-1. Plug-in hybrid system
The engine braking force will
be increased according to the
driving conditions to more effi-
ciently charge the hybrid bat-
tery (traction battery) after the
accelerator pedal is released.
87
2-1. Plug-in hybrid system
2
Plug-in hybrid system
The illustration is an example for explanation and may differ from the actual
item.
Caution label
High voltage cables (orange)
Power control unit
DC/DC converter
Rear electric motor (traction motor)
AC charging inlet
Service plug
Onboard traction battery charger
Hybrid battery (traction battery)
Plug-in hybrid system precautions
Take care when handling the hybrid system, as it contains a
high voltage system (about 650V at maximum) as well as
parts that become extremely hot when the hybrid system is
operating. Obey the caution labels attached to the vehicle.
System components
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
88
2-1. Plug-in hybrid system
Front electric motor (traction motor)
Air conditioning compressor
Junction box
■ Running out of fuel
When the vehicle has run out of fuel
and the hybrid system cannot be
started, refuel the vehicle with at
least enough gasoline to make the
low fuel level warning light (P.518)
go off. If there is only a small
amount of fuel, the hybrid system
may not be able to start. (The stan-
dard amount of fuel is about 2.3 gal.
[8.8 L, 1.9 Imp.gal.], when the vehi-
cle is on a level surface. This value
may vary when the vehicle is on a
slope. Add extra fuel when the vehi-
cle is inclined.)
■ Electromagnetic waves
● High voltage parts and cables on
the hybrid vehicles incorporate
electromagnetic shielding, and
therefore emit approximately the
same amount of electromagnetic
waves as conventional gasoline
powered vehicles or home elec-
tronic appliances.
● Your vehicle may cause sound
interference in some third party-
produced radio parts.
■ Effect of magnetic forces
If objects that generate strong mag-
netic forces, such as large speak-
ers, are placed inside the luggage
compartment or installed nearby,
the generated magnetic forces may
negatively affect the hybrid system.
■ Hybrid battery (traction battery)
(lithium-ion battery)
The hybrid battery (traction battery)
has a limited service life.
The hybrid battery (traction battery)
capacity (the ability to hold a
charge) reduces with time and use
in the same way as other recharge-
able batteries. The extent at which
capacity reduces changes drasti-
cally depending on the environment
(ambient temperature, etc.) and
usage conditions, such as how the
vehicle is driven and how the hybrid
battery (traction battery) is charged.
This is a natural characteristic of
lithium-ion batteries, and is not a
malfunction. Also, even though the
EV driving range becomes shorter
when the hybrid battery (traction
battery) capacity reduces, vehicle
performance does not significantly
become worse.
In order to reduce the possibility of
the capacity reducing, follow the
directions listed on P.121, “Capacity
reduction of the hybrid battery (trac-
tion battery)”.
■ Starting the hybrid system in an
extremely cold environment
When the hybrid battery (traction
battery) is extremely cold (below
approximately -22°F [-30°C]) under
the influence of the outside tem-
perature, it may not be possible to
start the hybrid system. In this case,
try to start the hybrid system again
after the temperature of the hybrid
battery increases due to the outside
temperature increase etc.
J
K
L
WARNING
■ High voltage precautions
The vehicle has high voltage DC
and AC systems as well as a 12-
volt system. DC and AC high volt-
age is very dangerous and can
cause severe burns and electric
shock that may result in death or
serious injury.
89
2-1. Plug-in hybrid system
2
Plug-in hybrid system
WARNING
● Never touch, disassemble,
remove or replace the high volt-
age parts, cables or their con-
nectors.
● The hybrid system will become
hot after starting as the system
uses high voltage. Be careful of
both the high voltage and the
high temperature, and always
obey the caution labels
attached to the vehicle.
● Never try to open the service
plug access hole located in the
luggage compartment. The ser-
vice plug is used only when the
vehicle is serviced and is sub-
ject to high voltage.
■ Road accident cautions
Observe the following precautions
to reduce the risk of death or seri-
ous injury:
● Pull your vehicle off the road,
apply the parking brake, shift
the shift lever to P, and turn the
hybrid system off.
● Do not touch the high voltage
parts, cables and connectors.
● If electric wires are exposed
inside or outside your vehicle,
an electric shock may occur.
Never touch exposed electric
wires.
● Do not touch the battery if liquid
is leaking from or adhering to it.
If electrolyte (carbonic-based
organic electrolyte) from the
hybrid battery (traction battery)
comes into contact with the
eyes or skin, it could cause
blindness or skin wounds. In the
unlikely event that it comes into
contact with the eyes or skin,
wash it off immediately with a
large amount of water, and seek
immediate medical attention.
● If electrolyte is leaking from the
hybrid battery (traction battery),
do not approach the vehicle.
Even in the unlikely event that
the hybrid battery (traction bat-
tery) is damaged, the internal
construction of the battery will
prevent a large amount of elec-
trolyte from leaking out. How-
ever, any electrolyte that does
leak out will give off a vapor.
This vapor is an irritant to skin
and eyes and could cause acute
poisoning if inhaled.
● Do not bring burning or high-
temperature items close to the
electrolyte. The electrolyte may
ignite and cause a fire.
● If a fire occurs in the hybrid
vehicle, leave the vehicle as
soon as possible. Never use a
fire extinguisher that is not
meant for electric fires. Using
even a small amount of water
may be dangerous.
● If your vehicle needs to be
towed, do so with front wheels
raised. If the wheels connected
to the electric motor (traction
motor) are on the ground when
towing, the motor may continue
to generate electricity. This may
cause a fire. (P.507)
90
2-1. Plug-in hybrid system
WARNING
● Carefully inspect the ground
under the vehicle. If you find
that liquid has leaked onto the
ground, the fuel system may
have been damaged. Leave the
vehicle as soon as possible.
■ Hybrid battery (traction bat-
tery)
● Your vehicle contains a sealed
lithium-ion battery.
● Never resell, hand over or mod-
ify the hybrid battery. To prevent
accidents, hybrid batteries that
have been removed from a dis-
posed vehicle are collected
through Toyota dealer. Do not
dispose of the battery yourself.
Unless the battery is properly
collected, the following may
occur, resulting in death or seri-
ous injury:
• The hybrid battery may be ille-
gally disposed of or dumped,
and it is hazardous to the envi-
ronment or someone may touch
a high voltage part, resulting in
an electric shock.
• The hybrid battery is intended to
be used exclusively with your
hybrid vehicle. If the hybrid bat-
tery is used outside of your
vehicle or modified in any way,
accidents such as electric
shock, heat generation, smoke
generation, an explosion and
electrolyte leakage may occur.
When reselling or handing over
your vehicle, the possibility of
an accident is extremely high
because the person receiving
the vehicle may not be aware of
these dangers.
● If your vehicle is disposed of
without the hybrid battery hav-
ing been removed, there is a
danger of serious electric shock
if high voltage parts, cables and
their connectors are touched. In
the event that your vehicle must
be disposed of, the hybrid bat-
tery must be disposed of by
your Toyota dealer or a qualified
service shop. If the hybrid bat-
tery is not disposed of properly,
it may cause electric shock that
can result in death or serious
injury.
■ Caution while driving
If the vehicle under floor area
receives strong shock or impact
while driving, stop the vehicle in a
safe area and check around the
bottom of the vehicle. If there is
damage to the hybrid battery
(traction battery) or liquid leakage,
it may lead to a vehicle fire, etc.
Do not touch the vehicle and
immediately contact your Toyota
dealer.
■ Modifications
Do not modify the vehicle to make
the height lower.
It is easier for the hybrid battery
(traction battery) in the under floor
area to come in contact with the
ground when the vehicle is low-
ered. If the hybrid battery (traction
battery) is damaged, a vehicle fire
may occur which could lead to
death or serious injury.
91
2-1. Plug-in hybrid system
2
Plug-in hybrid system
There is an air intake vent under
the rear seat for cooling the
DC/DC converter.
Blocking the air intake vent may
prevent the plug-in hybrid sys-
tem from operating properly.
When a certain level of impact is
NOTICE
■ Notice about fuel
● For plug-in hybrid vehicles, fuel
may remain in the tank for a
long time and undergo changes
in quality depending on the how
the vehicle is used. Refuel at
least 5.3 gal. (20 L, 4.4 Imp.gal.)
of fuel every 12 months (refuel a
total of at least 5.3 gal. [20 L,
4.4 Imp.gal.] over a 12-month
period), as this may affect com-
ponents of the fuel system or
the gasoline engine.
● If the vehicle has not been refu-
eled for a certain amount of time
and it is possible that the quality
of the fuel remaining in the tank
has changed, “No New Fuel has
been Added Recently Please
refuel” is displayed on the multi-
information display when the
power switch is turned to ON. If
the message is displayed, refuel
the vehicle immediately.
DC/DC converter air
intake vent
NOTICE
■ DC/DC converter air intake
vent
● Make sure not to block the air
intake vent with anything, such
as a seat cover, plastic cover, or
luggage. Blocking the air intake
vent may prevent the plug-in
hybrid system from operating
properly.
● When dust etc. has accumu-
lated in the air intake vent, clean
it with a vacuum cleaner to pre-
vent the vent from clogging.
● Do not wet or allow foreign sub-
stances to enter the air vent as
this may cause a short circuit
and damage the DC/DC con-
verter.
● Do not carry large amounts of
water such as water cooler bot-
tles in the vehicle. If water spills
onto the DC/DC converter, the
converter may be damaged.
Have the vehicle inspected by
your Toyota dealer.
● A filter is installed to the air
intake vent. When the filter
remains noticeably dirty even
after cleaning the air intake
vent, filter cleaning or replace-
ment is recommended. When
cleaning the filter, refer to
P.486.
● If “Maintenance required for
DCDC converter cooling parts
See Owner’s Manual” is shown
on the multi-information dis-
play, the air intake vent and fil-
ter may be clogged. Refer to
P.486 for information on how to
clean the air intake vent.
Emergency shut off sys-
tem
92
2-1. Plug-in hybrid system
detected by the impact sensor,
the emergency shut off system
blocks off the high voltage cur-
rent and stops the fuel pump to
minimize the risk of electrocu-
tion and fuel leakage.
If the emergency shut off system
activates, your vehicle will not
restart. To restart the hybrid sys-
tem, contact your Toyota dealer.
A message is automatically dis-
played when a malfunction
occurs in the hybrid system or
an improper operation is
attempted.
If a warning message is shown
on the multi-information display,
read the message and follow the
instructions.
■ If a warning light comes on, a
warning message is displayed
or the 12-volt battery is discon-
nected
The hybrid system may not start. In
that case, try to start the system
again. If the “READY” indicator does
not come on, contact your Toyota
dealer.
Primarily using EV mode and
AUTO EV/HV mode when driv-
ing in cities and using HV mode
when driving on highways (or
freeways) can help conserve
fuel and electricity. (P.78)
When using Eco drive mode, the
torque corresponding to the
accelerator pedal depression
amount can be generated more
smoothly than it is in normal
conditions. In addition, the oper-
ation of the air conditioning sys-
tem (heating/cooling) will be
minimized, improving fuel and
electricity economy. (P.377)
Eco-friendly driving is possible
by keeping the Hybrid System
Indicator within Eco area.
(P.167)
Hybrid warning message
Plug-in hybrid vehicle
driving tips
For economical and ecolog-
ical driving, pay attention to
the following points:
Using EV mode, AUTO
EV/HV mode and HV
mode effectively
Using Eco drive mode
Use of Hybrid System
Indicator
93
2-1. Plug-in hybrid system
2
Plug-in hybrid system
Shift the shift lever to D when
stopped at a traffic light, or driv-
ing in heavy traffic etc. Shift the
shift lever to P when parking.
When using the N, there is no
positive effect on fuel consump-
tion. In the N, the gasoline
engine operates but electricity
cannot be generated. Also,
when using the air conditioning
system, etc., the hybrid battery
(traction battery) power is con-
sumed.
Drive your vehicle smoothly.
Avoid abrupt acceleration and
deceleration. Gradual accel-
eration and deceleration will
make more effective use of
the electric motor (traction
motor) without having to use
gasoline engine power.
Avoid repeated acceleration.
Repeated acceleration con-
sumes hybrid battery (trac-
tion battery) power, resulting
in poor fuel consumption. Bat-
tery power can be restored by
driving with the accelerator
pedal slightly released.
Make sure to operate the brakes
gently and a timely manner. A
greater amount of electrical
energy can be regenerated
when slowing down.
Repeated acceleration and
deceleration, as well as long
waits at traffic lights, will lead to
high fuel and electricity con-
sumption. Check traffic reports
before leaving and avoid delays
as much as possible. When driv-
ing in a traffic jam, gently
release the brake pedal to allow
the vehicle to move forward
slightly while avoiding overuse
of the accelerator pedal. Doing
so can help control excessive
electricity and fuel consumption.
Control and maintain the vehi-
cle at a constant speed.
Before stopping at a toll booth
or similar, allow plenty of time
to release the accelerator and
gently apply the brakes. A
greater amount of electrical
energy can be regenerated
when slowing down.
Electricity consumption will
increase significantly when
driving at high speeds in EV
mode or AUTO EV/HV mode.
If there will be a long distance
to the next external charging
point after leaving a freeway,
it is recommended to drive in
Shift lever operation
Accelerator pedal/brake
pedal operation
When braking
Delays
Highway driving
94
2-1. Plug-in hybrid system
HV mode while on the free-
way and change to EV mode
or AUTO EV/HV mode after
leaving the freeway. (P.78)
Turn the “A/C” switch off
when it is not needed. Doing
so can help reduce excessive
electricity and fuel consump-
tion.
In summer: When the ambient tem-
perature is high, use the recircu-
lated air mode. Doing so will help to
reduce the burden on the air condi-
tioning system and reduce electric-
ity and fuel consumption as well.
In winter: Avoid excessive and
unnecessary use of the heater.
Usage of the heated steering wheel
(if equipped) (P.407) and seat
heaters (P.408) are effective.
Using the Remote Air Condi-
tioning System (P.405)
while the AC charging cable is
connected to the vehicle can
reduce electricity consump-
tion immediately after starting
off by operating air condition-
ing mainly using electricity
from an external power
source.
When setting the charging
schedule, setting the charging
mode to “Departure” and “Cli-
mate Prep” to on can reduce
electricity consumption imme-
diately after starting off by
operating air conditioning
before charging is completed.
(P.130)
Make sure to check the tire infla-
tion pressure frequently. If there
is improper tire inflation pres-
sure in the tires, the EV driving
range will become shorter, and
fuel consumption when in HV
mode will increase.
Also, as snow tires can cause
large amounts of friction, their
use on dry roads can lead to
increased fuel and electricity
consumption.
Carrying heavy luggage will lead
to poor fuel economy. Avoid car-
rying unnecessary luggage.
Installing a large roof rack will
also cause poor fuel economy.
Since the gasoline engine starts
up and cuts out automatically,
warming up is not necessary.
Air conditioning
Checking tire inflation
pressure
Luggage
Warming up before driv-
ing
95
2-1. Plug-in hybrid system
2
Plug-in hybrid system
The value displayed on the SOC
(State of Charge) gauge
(P.165) is estimated from the
following information.
The amount of hybrid battery
(traction battery) charge cur-
rently remaining
The electricity consumption
(the estimated distance that
EV driving is possible per unit
of electrical energy) based on
the recorded value
Past air conditioning system
electricity consumption
amount
The electricity consumption var-
ies depending on how the vehi-
cle is driven. The vehicle
automatically records the elec-
tricity consumption when being
charged and uses the electricity
consumption for estimating the
EV driving range. Therefore, the
EV driving range displayed
when the hybrid battery (traction
battery) is fully charged may dif-
fer from the previous EV driving
range depending on how the
vehicle was driven.
The EV driving range may
change significantly with each
charging until the electricity con-
sumption based on the recorded
value is stable (for approxi-
mately the first month or two).
However, this does not indicate
a malfunction.
When the air conditioning sys-
tem is turned on, the EV driving
range (with using the air condi-
tioning system) is estimated
based on the past air condition-
ing electricity consumption
amount considering that the
electricity consumption may
become higher.
The distance that EV driving is
possible varies significantly
depending on how the vehicle is
driven, road conditions, the
weather, the outside tempera-
ture, usage conditions of electri-
cal components and the number
EV driving range
The EV driving range dis-
played on the multi-informa-
tion display shows the
reference distance that EV
driving (driving using only
the electric motor) is possi-
ble, and the actual distance
that can be driven may dif-
fer from that displayed.
Even if the EV driving range is
displayed, EV driving may be
canceled and both gasoline
engine and electric motor are
used depending on the situa-
tion. (P.82)
Displayed value
Tips for extending the EV
driving range
96
2-1. Plug-in hybrid system
of occupants.
The distance that EV driving is
possible can be extended if the
following is performed:
■ When starting off, depress
the accelerator pedal
smoothly to accelerate
As a guide, accelerate up to
approximately 12mph (20 km/h)
in the first 5 seconds.
Electrical and fuel efficiency can
be improved just by using the
ECO Accelerator Guidance dis-
played on the multi-information
display and taking care to start
off gently. (P.173)
When the driving mode is set to
Eco drive mode, depressing the
accelerator pedal generates
smooth torque that makes it easier
to operate the accelerator gently.
At the same time, the air condition-
ing control is switched to eco air
conditioning mode (P.397) to
reduce the strength of the air condi-
tioning operation.
■ Maintain sufficient vehicle-
to-vehicle distance and do
not accelerate or decelerate
unnecessarily
Try to maintain a fixed speed
while driving. Driving at a short
vehicle-to-vehicle distance will
result in repeating wasteful
acceleration and deceleration,
which will worsen the electrical
and fuel efficiency.
■ Release the accelerator
pedal early before stopping
the vehicle, such as at a
traffic light
The regenerative brake will
operate to convert the kinetic
energy of the vehicle into electri-
cal energy, which will charge the
hybrid battery (traction battery).
The regeneration status can be
checked from the Hybrid Sys-
tem Indicator. (P.167)
When the brake pedal is
depressed lightly during decel-
eration, the regeneration
amount increases, enabling
more electrical energy to be
recovered.
If the brake pedal is depressed too
strongly, the recovered amount
indicator will reach the maximum
level and the upper limit of the
recoverable energy will be
exceeded. Therefore, be sure to
operate the brake pedal early.
■ Use the air conditioning
system appropriately, and
also utilize the heated steer-
ing wheel (if equipped) and
seat heaters
In EV mode, the vehicle is
cooled and heated by electrical
energy. (Except in extremely
cold temperatures of approxi-
mately 14°F (-10°C) or less.)
Preventing excessive cooling or
heating of the vehicle will reduce
power consumption and
improve electrical efficiency.
97
2-1. Plug-in hybrid system
2
Plug-in hybrid system
When eco air conditioning mode
is used, the air conditioning con-
trol is switched automatically to
a lower setting. (P.397)
The heated steering wheel (if
equipped) and seat heaters are
efficient heating device that
directly warm the body using
less electric power.
When used together with the air
conditioning system, a low tem-
perature setting can be used to
improve electrical and fuel effi-
ciency.
■ Check the tire pressure
If the tire pressure is lower than
the specified value, it will
worsen the electrical and fuel
efficiency.
A pressure level 7 psi (50 kPa, 0.5
kgf/cm
2
or bar) lower than the spec-
ified value will cause a worsening of
several percentage points.
■ When driving on highways,
use the EV/HV mode selec-
tion switch to drive in HV
mode
The power consumption will
increase significantly if the vehi-
cle is driven in EV mode on
highways.
■ Do not load unnecessary
objects in the vehicle
Driving with objects weighing
220 lb. (100 kg) in the vehicle
will worsen the electrical and
fuel efficiency by approximately
3%.
Air resistance also greatly
affects electrical and fuel effi-
ciency. Remove any exterior
accessories such as a roof lug-
gage carrier when they are not
being used.
The running resistance of snow
tires is high and they will worsen
electrical and fuel efficiency.
Replace them with standard
tires as soon as they are no lon-
ger needed.
■ Know your vehicle’s electri-
cal and fuel efficiency
If you know your vehicle’s daily
electrical and fuel efficiency, you
will understand the benefits of
Eco drive.
Use the Power Consump-
tion/Fuel Economy, ECO Accel-
erator Guidance/“Eco Score”
and other data displayed on the
multi-information display.
The following indicate that
charging has been carried out
properly.
The charging indicator of the
charging port turns off
“Charging Complete” is dis-
played on the multi-informa-
tion display when a door is
opened with the power switch
off (P.119)
Regardless of the type of power
Display when charging is
completed
99
2-2. Charging
2
Plug-in hybrid system
2-2.Charging
AC charging inlet
AC charging inlet light
Charging indicator (P.100)
AC charging inlet cap
Charging port lid (P.100)
AC charging cable (P.102)
Charging port
Charging equipment
This vehicle features equipment for connecting to an external
power source.
Charging equipment and names
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
100
2-2. Charging
■ Opening the charging port
lid
Press the central rear edge of
the charging port lid (the loca-
tion shown in the illustration)
with the doors unlocked.
Push and take your hand away to
slightly open the charging port lid.
Then open the lid fully by hand.
■ Closing the charging port
lid
Close the charging port lid and
press the central rear edge of
the charging port lid (the loca-
tion shown in the illustration).
When the doors are locked, the
charging port lid is also locked.
(P.107)
The illumination/flashing pattern changes to inform the user of the
charging status in the following ways.
Opening and closing the
charging port lid
Charging indicator
101
2-2. Charging
2
Plug-in hybrid system
*
: Flashes for a certain period of time, and then turns off.
■ Charging indicator of the charging port
When a system malfunction occurs while charging or using the Remote Air
Conditioning System, the charging indicator rapidly flashes for a certain
period of time, and then turns off.
If this occurs, when a door is opened with the power switch off, a message
is displayed on the multi-information display. When a message is displayed,
follow the instructions displayed on the screen.
Illumination/flashing pat-
tern
Vehicle condition
Illuminated
Charging is in progress
Charging is possible
“Battery Heater” (P.115) is operating
“Battery Cooler” (P.116) is operating
Flashing (normally)
*
When charging schedule is registered (P.130)
and AC charging cable is connected to vehicle
Rapidly flashing
*
When charging cannot be carried out due to
malfunction in a power source or the vehicle etc.
(P.149)
Not illuminated
Charging connector is not inserted into AC
charging inlet
When the charging schedule (P.130) is on
standby
When charging is completed
102
2-2. Charging
AC charging cable
The function, correct oper-
ating procedure, etc. of the
AC charging cable are
explained.
WARNING
■ When using the AC charging
cable and CCID (Charging
Circuit Interrupting Device)
Observe the following precau-
tions.
Failure to do so may cause an
unexpected accident, resulting in
death or serious injury.
● Do not attempt to disassemble
or repair the AC charging cable,
charging connector, plug or
CCID (Charging Circuit Inter-
rupting Device).
If a problem arises with the AC
charging cable or the CCID
(Charging Circuit Interrupting
Device), stop charging immedi-
ately and contact your Toyota
dealer.
● Do not subject the AC charging
cable, charging connector, plug
or CCID (Charging Circuit Inter-
rupting Device) to strong force
or impact.
● Do not apply excessive force to
the AC charging cable by force-
fully folding, twisting, pulling or
dragging the AC charging cable.
● Do not damage the AC charging
cable with sharp objects.
● Do not fold the charging con-
nector or plug or insert foreign
objects into them.
● Do not put the charging connec-
tor and plug into water.
● Do not bring the AC charging
cable to a high-temperature
item such as a heating device.
● Do not apply a load to the AC
charging cable and plug-cord
(such as wrapping the AC
charging cable around the CCID
(Charging Circuit Interrupting
Device) and the charging con-
nector).
● Do not use or leave the AC
charging cable in situations
where a load is applied to the
outlet and the plug (such as
when the CCID (Charging Cir-
cuit Interrupting Device) is
hanging in the air without con-
tacting the ground).
NOTICE
■ Precautions when handling
AC charging cable
Make sure to observe the follow-
ing precautions. Failure to
observe these precautions may
result in damage to the AC
charging cable and AC charging
inlet.
● Insert the charging connector
straight into the AC charging
inlet.
● After inserting the charging con-
nector, do not apply excessive
force to or twist the connector.
Also, do not lean on the connec-
tor or hang any objects from it.
● Do not step on or trip over the
AC charging cable.
● Before removing the charging
connector, make sure that it is
unlocked. (P.107)
● After removing the AC charging
cable, promptly return it to its
proper location.
103
2-2. Charging
2
Plug-in hybrid system
Charging connector
Latch release button
Plug
NOTICE
● After removing the charging
connector, securely install the
AC charging inlet cap.
■ When using the AC charging
cable and related parts
P.123
■ Precautions for low tempera-
tures
In low temperatures, the AC
charging cable and plug-cord may
become hard.
Therefore, make sure to not apply
excessive force when they are
hard. If excessive force is applied
to the hardened AC charging
cable and plug-cord, they may be
damaged.
The names of each part of the AC charging cable
A
B
C
104
2-2. Charging
Plug-cord
CCID (Charging Circuit Interrupting Device)
Power indicator (P.104)
Charging indicator (P.104)
Error warning indicator (P.104)
The CCID (Charging Circuit
Interrupting Device) has the fol-
lowing safety features.
■ Electrical leakage detec-
tion function
If an electrical leakage is
detected during charging, the
power source will be automati-
cally interrupted, thus prevent-
ing fires or electrical shocks
caused by electrical leakage.
If the power source is interrupted,
the error warning indicator flashes.
If the power source is interrupted:
P.105
■ Automatic check function
This is an automatic system
check that is run before
charging begins to check for
problems in the operation of the
electrical leakage detection
function.
If a malfunction is found in the elec-
trical leakage detection function as
a result of the check, the error
warning indicator flashes to inform
the user. (P.105)
■ Temperature detection
function
A temperature detection func-
tion is equipped to the plug.
While charging, if heat is gener-
ated due to looseness on the
outlet side etc., this function
suppresses heat by controlling
the charging current.
■ Conditions for supplying
current to the vehicle
The CCID (Charging Circuit
Interrupting Device) is designed
to prevent electrical current from
being supplied to the charging
connector when it is not con-
nected to the vehicle, even if the
plug is inserted into the outlet.
■ Indicator operation
3 indicators are used to indicate
the following conditions.
D
E
F
G
H
Safety functions
CCID (Charging Circuit
Interrupting Device) indi-
cators
105
2-2. Charging
2
Plug-in hybrid system
Power indicator
Illuminates when electricity is flow-
ing to the CCID (Charging Circuit
Interrupting Device).
Charging indicator
Illuminates when charging is in
progress.
Error warning indicator
Flashes when there is an electrical
leakage or when a malfunction
occurs in the CCID (Charging Cir-
cuit Interrupting Device).
■ When a malfunction occurs during charging
The indicators on the CCID (Charging Circuit Interrupting Device)
use a combination of different statuses (not illuminated, illuminated
or flashing) to inform the user of internal malfunctions.
When the error warning indicator is illuminated or flashing, temporarily
remove the plug from the outlet and then reconnect it to check if the error
indicator turns off.
If the error warning indicator turns off, charging is now possible.
If it does not turn off, perform the correction procedure in the following
chart.
A
B
C
Status
Power indi-
cator
Error warning
indicator
Cause/Correction procedure
Charging sys-
tem error
Not illumi-
nated
Not illumi-
nated or illu-
minated
An electrical leakage is
detected and charging is
canceled, or there is a mal-
function in the AC charging
cable.
Consult your Toyota
dealer
Illuminated Flashes
Plug tempera-
ture detection
malfunction
Flashes Flashes
There is a malfunction in the
plug temperature detection
part.
*1
Consult your Toyota
dealer
106
2-2. Charging
*1
:When this occurs, charging is carried out without a limited charging cur-
rent.
*2
:When this occurs, charging is carried out with a limited charging current.
For safety, inspect the AC
charging cable on a routine
basis.
Plug tempera-
ture increase
detection
Flashes
Not illumi-
nated
An increase in the tempera-
ture of the plug is detected
due to an improper connec-
tion between the outlet and
plug.
*2
Check that the plug is
securely connected to
the outlet
AC charging
cable life span
notice
Illuminated Flashes
The number of charges
using the AC charging cable
is nearing the end of its
usable life span.
Consult your Toyota
dealer
AC charging
cable life span
Illuminated Illuminated
The number of charges
using the AC charging cable
has exceeded its usable
number of charges.
Consult your Toyota
dealer
Status
Power indi-
cator
Error warning
indicator
Cause/Correction procedure
Inspecting and maintain-
ing the AC charging cable
WARNING
■ Routine inspection
Check the following points regu-
larly.
Failure to do so may cause an
unexpected accident, resulting in
death or serious injury.
● The AC charging cable, plug,
charging connector, CCID
(Charging Circuit Interrupting
Device) etc. have not been
damaged.
● The outlet has not been dam-
aged.
107
2-2. Charging
2
Plug-in hybrid system
■ Unlocking the charging port
lid
1 Unlock the doors using the
smart key system or wireless
remote control.
2 Press the central rear edge
of the charging port lid (the
WARNING
● The plug can be securely
inserted into the outlet.
● The plug does not get extremely
hot during use.
● The tip of the plug has not been
deformed.
● The plug is not dirtied by dust
etc.
Remove the plug from the outlet
before inspecting it. If any abnor-
malities are found in the AC
charging cable as a result of the
inspection, immediately stop use
and consult your Toyota dealer.
■ Maintaining the AC charging
cable
When the AC charging cable is
dirty, first remove the dirt with a
hard, wringed cloth, and then
wipe the cable with a dry cloth.
However, never wash it with
water. If the AC charging cable is
washed with water, fire or electric
shock may occur during charging,
possibly resulting in death or seri-
ous injury.
■ When not using the AC
charging cable for a long time
Remove the plug from the outlet.
Dust could accumulate on the
plug or in the outlet, possibly
causing overheating which could
lead to a fire.
Also, keep the cable in a place
free from moisture.
Locking and unlock-
ing the charging port
lid and charging con-
nector
The charging port lid and
charging connector can be
locked/unlocked by the fol-
lowing procedures.
Using the smart key sys-
tem
*
: P.198
Using the wireless remote
control
*
: P.196
*
: If the smart key system or the
wireless remote control does
not operate properly, use the
mechanical key. (P.537)
Locking and unlocking
the charging port lid
108
2-2. Charging
location shown in the illustra-
tion) and open it.
■ Locking the charging port
lid
The charging port lid will be
locked when the lid is closed
and the doors are locked using
the smart key system or wire-
less remote control.
■ Security feature
If a door or charging port lid is not
opened within approximately 60
seconds after the vehicle is
unlocked, the security feature auto-
matically locks the lid again when
the doors are automatically locked.
(P.199)
■ Locking the charging port lid
If the charging port lid is closed after
the doors are locked, the lid will not
be locked. In this case, close the lid
and then lock the doors again.
■ If the charging port lid does not
open
If the charging port lid does not
open when using the normal proce-
dure, it can be opened in an emer-
gency by performing the following
steps.
1 Open the back door. (P.205,
207)
2 Pull the luggage side cover and
remove it. (P.467)
3 Hook a finger to the emergency
release lever as shown in the
illustration.
4 Move the emergency release
lever in the direction shown in
the illustration.
*
The charging port lid is unlocked
and can be opened.
*
: Make sure to move in the direction
shown in the illustration. Applying
force in other directions may dam-
age the emergency release lever.
5 Press the central rear edge of
the charging port lid to open it.
(P.100)
This unlocking method is a tempo-
rary correction procedure for emer-
gency use only. If the problem
persists, have the vehicle inspected
by your Toyota dealer immediately.
■ Locking the charging con-
nector
The charging connector will be
automatically locked when
inserting it into the AC charging
Locking and unlocking
the charging connector
109
2-2. Charging
2
Plug-in hybrid system
inlet. (The setting can be
changed: P.109)
■ Unlocking the charging
connector
The charging connector will be
unlocked when the doors are
unlocked using the smart key
system or wireless remote con-
trol.
■ Changing the charging con-
nector lock settings
The method for locking and
unlocking the charging connec-
tor can be changed as follows
on the screen on the multi-
information display.
Refer to P.177 for details on how to
change the settings.
*1
:The charging connector will be
unlocked if power supply is inter-
rupted due to a power outage
etc. after the charging connector
is automatically locked.
*2
:The charging connector can be
unlocked by similar operations to
that of “Auto Lock” (Default set-
ting).
■ Charging connector lock func-
tion
The charging connector lock func-
tion does not guarantee that theft of
the AC charging cable will be pre-
vented, and is not necessarily effec-
tive for all mischiefs.
■ Unlocking the charging connec-
tor using the smart key system
If the charging connector is locked
while the doors are unlocked, lock
and then unlock the doors to unlock
the charging connector.
■ Security function for unlocking
If the charging connector is not
removed within approximately 30
seconds after the vehicle is
unlocked, the security function auto-
matically locks the connector again.
■ Changing the charging connec-
tor lock settings
The charging connector lock set-
tings cannot be changed when the
AC charging cable is connected to
the vehicle.
■ When the charging connector
cannot be inserted into the AC
charging inlet
Check that the connector lock pin is
not lowered.
If the connector lock pin is lowered,
the connector lock is operating.
Unlock the doors using the smart
key system or wireless remote con-
trol and unlock the charging connec-
tor lock and check that the
connector lock pin is not lowered.
Setting Operation description
“Auto
Lock”
(Default
setting)
The charging connec-
tor is automatically
locked when the
charging connector is
connected.
“Auto Lock
& Unlock”
The charging connec-
tor is automatically
locked when the
charging connector is
connected and auto-
matically unlocked
when charging is com-
pleted.
*1, 2
“OFF”
Not using the charging
connector locking sys-
tem
110
2-2. Charging
■ If the charging connector can-
not be unlocked
The charging connector can be
unlocked by operating the emer-
gency release lever.
1 Open the back door. (P.205,
207)
2 Remove the cover as shown in
the illustration.
3 Insert a hand from the lower side
of the vehicle obliquely upward,
and hook a finger to the emer-
gency release lever.
4 Move the emergency release
lever in the direction shown in
the illustration.
*
The charging connector is unlocked
and can be removed.
*
: Make sure to move in the direction
shown in the illustration. Applying
force in other directions may dam-
age the emergency release lever.
5 Reinstall the cover to the its orig-
inal position.
This method is a temporary correc-
tion procedure for emergency use
only. If the problem persists, have
the vehicle inspected by your
Toyota dealer immediately.
Do not operate the emergency
release lever when the charging
connector can be unlocked in the
normal procedure.
WARNING
■ When connecting the
charging connector to the AC
charging inlet
● Do not insert hand into the con-
nector lock portion.
A hand may be caught in the
connector lock pin, resulting in
an injury.
111
2-2. Charging
2
Plug-in hybrid system
Connect to an AC 120 V out-
let (NEMA 5-15R) with a
Ground-Fault Circuit-Inter-
rupter (GFCI) and a circuit
breaker. Use of a 15A individ-
ual circuit is strongly recom-
mended to ensure AC
charging cable will operate
properly.
When charging outdoors,
make sure to connect to a
weatherproof outlet that is
certified for outdoor use.
Checking Ground-Fault Cir-
cuit-Interrupter (GFCI) opera-
tion before its use is
recommended.
WARNING
● Be careful not to touch the
charging port lid lock portion.
When the connector lock oper-
ates, the charging port lid lock
will also operate. The charging
port lid lock pin may hit a hand,
resulting in an injury.
NOTICE
■ When locking the charging
connector
Observe the following precau-
tions. Failure to do so may cause
a malfunction in the charging con-
nector locking system.
● Check that the charging con-
nector is compatible with this
vehicle.
A charging connector of the dif-
ferent type or a charging con-
nector with damaged or
deformed insertion part may not
be locked.
● Do not apply excessive force to
the charging connector when
the charging connector is
locked.
When removing the charging
connector, make sure to unlock
the charging connector.
Power sources that
can be used
An external power source
that fulfills the following cri-
teria is necessary for
charging this vehicle. Con-
firm this before charging.
WARNING
■ Warnings for electrical faults
Make sure to observe the precau-
tions in this Owner’s Manual when
charging the vehicle.
Failure to use a power source that
fulfills the requirements, or failure
to observe regulations while
charging could lead to an acci-
dent, possibly resulting in death or
serious injury.
Power sources
112
2-2. Charging
NEMA 5-15R outlet
The illustration is an example
shown for demonstration pur-
poses, and may differ from the
actual configuration.
■ The charging environment
For safe charging, the following
charging equipment and settings
are recommended.
● Weatherproof outlet
When charging outdoors, connect
the plug to a weatherproof outlet,
and ensure that the plug remains
waterproof while the plug is con-
nected.
● Dedicated circuit
• To reduce the risk of fire, connect
only to an at least 15A branch cir-
cuit with an over-current protec-
tion in accordance with the
National Electric Code,
ANSI/NFPA 70.
• To reduce the risk of electric
shock when working with the plug,
connect to a outlet with a Ground-
Fault Circuit-Interrupter (GFCI) or
that has an Earth Leakage Circuit
Breaker installed.
■ When your circuit breaker trips
during charging
The upper limit of the charging cur-
rent can be changed in “Vehicle Set-
tings” on the multi-information
display.
1 Press or of the meter
control switches to select .
2 Press or of the meter
control switches to select “Vehi-
cle Settings”, and then press and
hold .
3 Press or of the meter
control switches to select
“Charging Settings”, and then
press .
The “Charging Settings” screen
will be displayed.
4 Press or of the meter
control switches to select
“Charging Current”, and then
press .
The “Charging Current” screen
will be displayed.
5 Press or of the meter
control switches to select “16A”
*1
or “8A”, and then press .
The maximum charging current
during charging will be restricted
to 16A
*1
or 8A.
*2
If the breaker still trips while
charging, even after changing the
upper limit of the charging current,
check if the connected power
source meets the specified charging
conditions. (P.111)
*1
:Vehicles with 6.6 kW onboard
traction battery charger only
*2
:Restricting the charging current
will lengthen the charging time.
Outlets that can be con-
nected
113
2-2. Charging
2
Plug-in hybrid system
WARNING
■ Power sources precautions
Observe the following precau-
tions.
If you do not follow them, fire,
electrical shock or damage may
occur, possibly resulting in death
or serious injury.
● Connect to an AC 120 V outlet
(NEMA 5-15R) with a Ground-
Fault Circuit-Interrupter (GFCI)
and supplied by a circuit
breaker per your local code.
Use of a 15A individual circuit is
strongly recommended.
● Do not connect the AC charging
cable to a multi-outlet adaptor,
multi-plugs, or conversion plug.
● Connecting the AC charging
cable to an extension cord is
strictly prohibited. The exten-
sion cord may overheat and
does not contain a Ground-
Fault Circuit-Interrupter (GFCI).
The leakage detection function
of the CCID (Charging Circuit
Interrupting Device) (P.104)
may not operate correctly.
● Do not connect to a power strip.
● Use of a block heater for
charging is prohibited.
● Make sure to connect the
charging connector and AC
charging inlet directly. Do not
connect a converting adaptor or
extension cord between the
charging connector and AC
charging inlet.
114
2-2. Charging
■ Charging from an external
power source (P.123)
This is a charging method used
when charging from an AC out-
let (120 V) with the AC charging
cable equipped to the vehicle or
charging at a public charging
station.
The charging start time (or depar-
ture time) and day can be set to
carry out charging using the
charging schedule at the desired
date and time. (P.130)
■ Using the hybrid battery
(traction battery) charge
mode (P.79)
The plug-in hybrid system can
be switched to hybrid battery
(traction battery) charge mode
to charge the hybrid battery
(traction battery) using electricity
generated by gasoline engine
operation.
The maximum charge amount in
the hybrid battery (traction battery)
charge mode is approximately 80%
of the fully charged capacity for the
charging from an external power
source.
The time required to charge the
hybrid battery (traction battery)
differs according to the charging
voltage and charging current.
Home power source
Charging voltage: AC 120 V
Charging current
*1
: 12A
Estimated charging time
*2, 3
:
Approximately 12 hours
Charging station (3.3 kW
onboard traction battery char-
ger)
Charging voltage: AC 240 V
Charging current
*1
: 16A
Estimated charging time
*2, 3
:
Approximately 4 hours 30 minutes
Charging station (6.6 kW
onboard traction battery char-
ger
*4
)
Charging voltage: AC 240 V
Charging current
*1
: 32A
Estimated charging time
*2, 3
:
Approximately 2 hours 30 minutes
*1
:This is the maximum value. Fur-
thermore, the upper limit of the
charging current can be changed
in “Vehicle Settings”. (P.112)
*2
:The time required to complete
charging depends on conditions
such as the remaining charge of
the hybrid battery (traction bat-
tery), the outside temperature
and specifications of a charger
(charging station).
*3
:When using “My Room Mode”
Charging methods
The following methods can
be used to charge the
hybrid battery (traction bat-
tery).
Types of charging meth-
ods
Estimated charging time
115
2-2. Charging
2
Plug-in hybrid system
(P.144), the time required for
charging to complete may be
longer or the charging may not
be completed.
*4
:If equipped
■ Charging time may increase
In the following situations, charging
time may become longer than nor-
mal:
● In very hot or very cold tempera-
tures.
● When the hybrid battery (traction
battery) becomes hot, such as
immediately after high-load driv-
ing.
● The vehicle is consuming a lot of
electricity, for example, when the
headlights are on etc.
● When using “My Room Mode”.
(P.144)
● There is a power outage during
charging.
● There is an interruption in the
electrical supply.
● There is a drop in the voltage of
external power source.
● The charge in the 12-volt battery
is low, for example due to the
vehicle being left unused for a
long period of time.
● The maximum charging current is
set to 8A or 16A
*
through “Vehicle
Settings”. (P.112)
● When the “Battery Heater” oper-
ates. (P.115)
● When the “Battery Cooler” is oper-
ated before charging. (P.116)
● When the plug generates heat
due to a loose outlet connection
etc.
*
: Vehicles with 6.6 kW onboard
traction battery charger only
■ Using a DC Charger
DC Chargers cannot be used with
this vehicle.
■ Charging electricity
This vehicle can be charged up to
approximately 3.3 kW or 6.6 kW
*
.
However, depending on the used
charger or AC charging cable,
charging electricity may be limited.
*
: Vehicles with 6.6 kW onboard
traction battery charger only
This vehicle is equipped with
several functions that are linked
with charging.
■ “My Room Mode” (P.144)
When the AC charging cable is
connected to the vehicle, electri-
cal components such as the air
conditioning system or audio
system can be used using the
external power source
*
.
*
: The power of the hybrid battery
(traction battery) may be used
depending on the situation.
■ “Battery Heater”
When the outside temperature
is low and the AC charging
cable is connected to the vehi-
cle, this function automatically
warms the hybrid battery (trac-
tion battery) until it reaches or
exceeds a certain temperature.
“Battery Heater” will operate
when the “Battery Heater” of the
“Charging Settings” on the multi-
information display is on.
(P.178)
Charging-linked functions
116
2-2. Charging
■ Hybrid battery (traction bat-
tery) warming control
(Alaska and Canada only)
This control operates after the
AC charging cable remains con-
nected to the vehicle for 3 days
and “Battery Heater” automati-
cally stops. It automatically insu-
lates the hybrid battery (traction
battery) in extremely low tem-
peratures.
This control stops 31 days
after the AC charging cable is
connected, even if it is still
connected to the vehicle.
When this control operates,
charging schedule settings
are ignored and charging
starts.
■ “Battery Cooler”
When the hybrid battery (trac-
tion battery) is hot and the AC
charging cable is connected to
the vehicle, this function cools
the hybrid battery (traction bat-
tery) before charging is carried
out.
“Battery Cooler” will operate
when the “Battery Cooler” of
the “Charging Settings” on the
multi-information display is
on. (P.178)
When the charging voltage is
120 V, the function does not
operate.
■ Traction battery heating and
cooling system (“Battery
Heater” and “Battery Cooler”)
● The system operates when the
hybrid battery (traction battery) is
below or above a certain tempera-
ture.
● The system may operate when
charging is not being performed.
● When the charging schedule is
used (P.130), this function will
operate according to the charging
schedule.
■ “Battery Heater”
● When “Battery Heater” is operat-
ing, the charging indicator illumi-
nates.
● When the AC charging cable is
removed from the vehicle or
remains connected to the vehicle
for approximately 3 days, the sys-
tem automatically stops.
● When “Battery Heater” is operat-
ing during charging, the charging
time may be longer than normal.
● If the outside temperature
becomes high while “Battery
Heater” is operating, charging
may complete earlier than the
“Departure” time set. (P.130)
● When the following operations are
performed while “Battery Heater”
is operating, the hybrid battery
(traction battery) heating opera-
tion stops.
• The shift lever is changed to any
position other than P
• The Remote Air Conditioning Sys-
tem is operated (P.405)
● “Battery Heater” may operate
even when the hybrid battery
(traction battery) is fully charged
depending on the temperature of
the hybrid battery (traction bat-
tery).
• The remaining charge of the
hybrid battery (traction battery)
decreases when “Battery Heater”
operates. The charging operation
117
2-2. Charging
2
Plug-in hybrid system
may start again to charge the
hybrid battery (traction battery).
• “Charging Stopped Due to Pulled
Charging Connector” may be
shown when the charging connec-
tor is removed while recharging.
(P.152)
■ “Battery Cooler”
● The charging indicator is illumi-
nated while “Battery Cooler” is on
standby or operating.
● “Battery Cooler” is implemented
for a maximum of approximately
30 minutes. However, when the
“Departure” time is set (P.130)
and there is not sufficient time
between the current time and the
time that charging will complete,
“Battery Cooler” operation time
may become shorter.
● When there is a small amount of
remaining charge in the hybrid
battery (traction battery), even if
the hybrid battery (traction battery)
is hot, “Battery Cooler” may not be
implemented.
● When the traction battery is
almost completely charged, “Bat-
tery Cooler” may not be imple-
mented.
● When the following operations are
performed while “Battery Cooler”
is operating, the hybrid battery
(traction battery) cooling operation
stops.
• The hood is opened
• The power switch is turned to any
mode other than off
• The Remote Air Conditioning Sys-
tem is operated (P.405)
• “Charge Now” is implemented
(P.131)
● “Battery Cooler” uses the power of
the hybrid battery (traction battery)
and external power source.
• While “Battery Cooler” is operat-
ing, the amount of the remaining
charge of the hybrid battery (trac-
tion battery) increases and
decreases in a certain range, and
does not increase as in normal
charging.
• The operation of “Battery Cooler”
is recognized as charging by a
charger. The charger that calcu-
lates the fee according to charging
time causes a charging fee.
118
2-2. Charging
To enable the use of EV mode
or AUTO EV/HV mode, we rec-
ommend systematically
charging the vehicle.
■ Before leaving home
In order to use EV mode or
AUTO EV/HV mode, charge the
hybrid battery (traction battery)
at home before leaving.
The charging schedule function
(P.130) can be used to set the
system to automatically fully charge
the hybrid battery (traction battery)
before your desired departure time.
It is also possible to set the air con-
ditioning to make the interior in a
comfortable state before your
desired departure time.
■ At your destination
Use a public charging station to
charge the hybrid battery (trac-
tion battery).
If there are no charging facilities
at your destination, the hybrid
battery (traction battery) can be
charged using the hybrid battery
(traction battery) charge mode.
(P.79)
*
*
: When using the hybrid battery
(traction battery) charge mode
while parked, make sure that no
flammable objects are near the
vehicle and the vehicle is parked
in a well-ventilated area. (P.80)
■ After returning home
In order to drive the next time,
charge the hybrid battery (trac-
tion battery).
Settings the charging schedule
allows you to charge the hybrid bat-
tery (traction battery) at the desired
time such as late at night or early in
the morning. Furthermore, the
charging schedule can be set to
automatically charge the hybrid bat-
tery (traction battery) every day or
at the same time on certain days.
(P.130)
Charging tips
This section explains meth-
ods for using the charging
function for this vehicle and
checking information
related to charging.
Systematically charging
119
2-2. Charging
2
Plug-in hybrid system
Information related to charging
is displayed and can be checked
on the multi-information display.
■ While charging
When any door is opened during
charging, the current charging
condition and approximate time
remaining until charging is com-
plete are displayed for a certain
period of time.
■ After charging is complete
When any door is opened with
the power switch off after
charging is complete, a mes-
sage detailing the results of the
charging is displayed for a while.
Also, a message is displayed if
an operation that stops charging
is performed or a situation
where charging cannot be per-
formed occurs.
When a message is displayed, fol-
low the instructions displayed on
the screen. (P.152)
■ Multi-information display
during charging
If approximately 100 seconds
elapse after the power switch is
turned to ON during charging, the
power switch will automatically turn
off and the display will disappear.
Checking information
related to charging
120
2-2. Charging
■ Safety functions
● The hybrid system will not start
while the AC charging cable is
attached to the vehicle, even if the
power switch is operated.
● If the AC charging cable is con-
nected while the “READY” indica-
tor is illuminated, the hybrid
system will stop automatically and
driving will not be possible.
This vehicle has been designed
to allow charging from an exter-
nal power source using a AC
charging cable for exclusive use
with standard household AC
outlets.
However, the vehicle differs
greatly from standard household
electrical goods in the following
ways, and incorrect usage could
cause fire or electric shock, pos-
sibly leading to death or serious
injury.
The charging operation is
designed to operate at 12A
continuously for the charge
duration (up to 12 hours).
(P.114)
Charging can be conducted
outdoors.
To charge properly, follow the
procedure after reading the
explanation below. Charging is
intended to be carried out by
licensed drivers only who prop-
erly understand the charging
procedure.
Do not allow children to use
Things to know before
charging
Make sure to read the fol-
lowing precautions before
connecting the AC charging
cable to the vehicle and
charging the hybrid battery
(traction battery).
WARNING
■ Caution when charging
People with implantable cardiac
pacemakers or cardiac resynchro-
nization therapy-pacemakers
should not carry out the charging
procedure. Ask someone else to
do it.
● Do not approach the charger
and AC charging cable while
charging.
Charging procedure may affect
the operation of such devices.
● Do not remain in the vehicle
during charging.
Charging procedure may affect
the operation of such devices.
● Do not enter the vehicle even to
take something out of the lug-
gage compartment.
Charging procedure may affect
the operation of such devices.
■ When the AC charging cable
is connected to the vehicle
Do not operate the shift lever.
In the unlikely event that the AC
charging cable has been dam-
aged, the shift position may
change from P to another position
and the vehicle could move, pos-
sibly leading to an accident.
Charging precautions
121
2-2. Charging
2
Plug-in hybrid system
the AC charging cable without
supervision. Also, keep the
AC charging cable out of
reach of infants.
When charging with a char-
ger, follow the procedures for
using each charger.
When charging using a public
charging facility, check the
setting of the charging sched-
ule function.
• When the charging schedule is
registered, temporarily turn off
the function or turn “Charge Now”
on. (P.137, 142)
• When the charging schedule is
set to on, charging will not start
even if the AC charging cable is
connected. Also, charging fee
may occur due to connection of
the AC charging cable.
Before charging, always check
the following items.
The parking brake is applied.
(P.290)
Lights such as the head-
lights, emergency flashers
and interior lights etc. are
turned off.
If these light switches are turned
on, then these features will con-
sume electricity, and charging time
will increase.
The power switch is turned to
OFF. (P.283)
Before charging, make sure that
each part of the AC charging
cable is in good condition.
(P.106)
■ During charging
● The charging starting time may
differ depending on the state of
the vehicle, but this does not indi-
cate a malfunction.
● Cooling fan sounds may be heard
from near the rear seat. (P.91)
● During charging, sounds may be
heard from near the hybrid battery
(traction battery) in accordance
with the operation of the air condi-
tioning system or “Battery Cooler”
(P.116).
● During and after charging, the rear
seat and its surrounding area in
which the onboard traction battery
charger is installed may get warm.
● The surface of the CCID
(Charging Circuit Interrupting
Device) may become hot, but this
does not indicate a malfunction.
● Depending on radio wave condi-
tions, interference may be heard
on the radio.
● The current charging condition
and the estimated time until
charging will complete can be
checked on the multi-information
display.
■ Capacity reduction of the
hybrid battery (traction battery)
The capacity of the hybrid battery
(traction battery) will decline gradu-
ally when the hybrid battery (traction
battery) is in use. The rate at which
it declines will differ in accordance
with environmental conditions and
the way in which the vehicle is used.
Observing the following can help
Confirm the following
before charging
Inspecting the AC
charging cable
122
2-2. Charging
suppress battery capacity decline.
● Avoid parking the vehicle in areas
with a high temperature under
direct sunlight when the hybrid
battery (traction battery) is fully
charged.
● Avoid accelerating and decelerat-
ing frequently and suddenly when
EV driving.
● Avoid frequent driving near the top
speed for EV driving. (P.82)
● Leave a low level of charge in the
hybrid battery (traction battery)
when leaving the vehicle undriven
for a long period of time.
After confirming that EV mode or
AUTO EV/HV mode has switched
to HV mode, turn the power switch
off.
● Use the charging schedule func-
tion as much as possible in order
to fully charge the hybrid battery
(traction battery) immediately
before starting off. (P.130)
Also, if the hybrid battery (traction
battery) capacity reduces, the dis-
tance that can be driven in EV mode
or AUTO EV/HV mode decreases.
However, vehicle performance does
not significantly become worse.
■ When the remaining charge of
the hybrid battery (traction bat-
tery) is low after charging
In the following situations, the
remaining charge of the hybrid bat-
tery (traction battery) after charging
completes may be less than normal
in order to protect the system (the
EV driving range after the battery is
fully charged may be shorter).
*
● Charging is carried out when the
outside temperature is low or high.
● Charging is carried out immedi-
ately after high-load driving or in
extreme heat.
When none of the above situations
apply and there is a drastic drop in
the remaining charge of the hybrid
battery (traction battery) after
charging completes, have the vehi-
cle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
*
: When this occurs, even if the
remaining charge display of the
hybrid battery (traction battery)
shows that it is fully charged, the
remaining charge rapidly
decreases faster than normal.
■ When the charging amount sent
to the hybrid battery (traction
battery) decreases
When the amount of power supplied
by the charger is low or operation of
the “Battery Heater”, etc., reduces
the charging power sent to the
hybrid battery (traction battery), the
charging amount sent to the hybrid
battery (traction battery) may
decrease.
■ Certification
This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC Rules. Operation is subject
to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harm-
ful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause unde-
sired operation.
123
2-2. Charging
2
Plug-in hybrid system
P.121
1 Prepare the AC charging
cable.
2 Insert the AC charging cable
into the outlet of the external
power source.
Make sure to hold the body of the
plug and insert it firmly into the out-
let.
Check that the power indicator on
the CCID (Charging Circuit Inter-
rupting Device) is illuminated. (If it
is not illuminated, refer to P.147)
In order to reduce the load on the
outlet and plug, when inserting the
plug, use a string, etc. to hang the
CCID (Charging Circuit Interrupting
How to charge
This section explains the
procedure for charging the
hybrid battery (traction bat-
tery) with the equipped AC
charging cable.
When using a charging sta-
tion, make sure to check the
operation instructions on
the charging station.
When the charging schedule
is registered, make sure
“Charge Now” is turned on
before charging. (P.137,
142)
WARNING
■ AC charging inlet
Do not disassemble, repair or
modify the AC charging inlet.
Doing so may lead to unforeseen
accidents or serious injury. When
the AC charging inlet needs to be
repaired, consult your Toyota
dealer.
NOTICE
■ When using the AC charging
cable and related parts
To prevent damage to the AC
charging cable and related parts,
observe the following precautions.
● When interrupting or canceling
charging, remove the charging
connector before removing the
plug.
● When removing the AC
charging cable, check that the
charging connector is unlocked.
● Do not forcefully pull the
charging connector cap and AC
charging inlet cap.
● Do not apply a vibration to the
charging connector while
charging. Charging may be
stopped.
● Do not insert anything but the
charging connector into the AC
charging inlet.
● When inserting the plug into or
removing the plug from the out-
let, make sure to hold the body
of the plug.
● Do not damage the AC charging
inlet cap with a sharp object.
● Do not forcefully pull the AC
charging cable that is caught or
entangled. If the cable is entan-
gled, disentangle it before
using.
Charging precautions
When charging
124
2-2. Charging
Device) on a hook or equivalent.
3 Unlock the doors and open
the charging port lid.
(P.107)
The AC charging inlet light ( ) will
illuminate.
4 Remove the AC charging
inlet cap and secure it into
the holder on the charging
port lid.
5 Remove the charging con-
nector cap and secure it to
the cable.
6 Insert the charging connector
into the AC charging inlet.
Align the guide position on the bot-
tom of the charging connector, and
push the charging connector
straight into the AC charging inlet
as far as possible.
Once a click sound is heard, check
that the charging connector is
securely locked.
When the charging connector is
inserted straight as far as possible,
it will automatically lock. (P.108)
7 Confirm that the charging
indicator of the charging port
is illuminated.
Charging will not start if the
A
125
2-2. Charging
2
Plug-in hybrid system
charging indicator does not illumi-
nate when the charging connector
is inserted. (P.105)
If the charging indicator is flashing,
the charging schedule is registered.
(P.130)
If the error warning indicator on the
CCID (Charging Circuit Interrupting
Device) flashes during charging,
check P.125 and follow the correc-
tion procedure.
The charging indicator will turn off
when charging is completed.
The charging indicator will also turn
off when charging is interrupted. In
this case, refer to P.147.
■ If the charging indicator of the
charging port flashes after con-
necting the AC charging cable
The charging schedule (P.130) is
registered and charging cannot be
performed. To cancel charging
using the charging schedule and
start charging, perform any of the
following procedures.
● Turn “Charge Now” on (P.137,
142)
● While the charging indicator is
flashing, remove and reconnect
the charging connector within 5
seconds
■ When the charging connector
cannot be inserted into the AC
charging inlet
P.109
■ Charging time
P.114
■ Safety function
If the latch release button is
pressed, charging will not begin
even if the AC charging cable is
connected.
Also, charging will be stopped if the
latch release button is pressed and
held for several seconds during
charging. When restarting charging,
reinsert the charging connector after
pulling it out, and check that the
charging indicator of the charging
port illuminates.
■ Charging time may increase
P.115
■ While charging
When the power switch is turned to
ON and the energy monitor is dis-
played on the audio system screen,
the charging connector is displayed
on the energy monitor and the flow
of electricity during charging is dis-
played (P.187).
■ Protection function of AC
charging inlet overheating
(vehicles with 6.6 kW onboard
traction battery charger)
By installing a temperature sensor
to the AC charging inlet, prevents
parts from melting when the tem-
perature rises due to foreign matter
entering the charging connector.
When a certain temperature
increase is detected, charging is
stopped immediately and a mes-
sage is displayed on the multi-infor-
mation display. After the
temperature has decreased,
charging resumes by performing the
operation to start charging again.
126
2-2. Charging
WARNING
■ When charging
Observe the following precau-
tions.
Failure to do so may cause an
unexpected accident, resulting in
death or serious injury.
● Connect to a power source suit-
able for charging. (P.111)
● Check that the AC charging
cable, plug and outlet are free of
foreign matter.
● Before charging, check that the
AC charging inlet is not
deformed, damaged or cor-
roded, and check that the inlet
is free of foreign matter such as
dirt, snow and ice.
If there is dirt or dust in these
areas, remove completely
before inserting the charging
connector.
● Do not get the terminals of the
AC charging inlet wet.
● Only use outlets where the plug
can be securely inserted.
● Do not bundle or wind the AC
charging cable while charging,
as doing so may result in over-
heating.
● Do not touch the terminals of
the charging connector and AC
charging inlet with a sharp metal
objects (needles etc.) or hands,
or short them with foreign
objects.
● When charging outdoors, make
sure to connect to a weather-
proof outlet for outdoor use.
Ensure the weatherproof outlet
cover closes completely. If the
weatherproof outlet cover can-
not be closed, install a weather-
proof outlet cover that will close.
● In order to stop charging at the
charging station, follow the
instructions of the charger.
● If any heat, smoke, odors, noise
or other abnormalities are
noticed during charging, stop
charging immediately.
● Do not insert the plug if the out-
let is submerged in water or
snow.
● When charging while it is raining
or snowing, do not connect or
disconnect the plug if your
hands are wet. Also, do not get
the plug or outlet wet.
● Do not charge the vehicle
during a lightning storm.
● Prevent the AC charging cable
from being caught in the door or
back door.
● Do not let the wheels on the AC
charging cable, plug, charging
connector and CCID (Charging
Circuit Interrupting Device).
● Firmly insert the plug into the
outlet.
● Do not use an extension cord
and converting adaptor.
● Close the hood before using the
charging system. The cooling
fan may start operating sud-
denly. Touching or getting close
to rotating parts such as the fan
may cause your hands or
clothes (especially a necktie or
scarf) to become caught and
result in a serious injury.
● If the power indicator on the
CCID (Charging Circuit Inter-
rupting Device) does not illumi-
nate after plugging the AC
charging cable into the socket-
outlet, unplug it immediately.
127
2-2. Charging
2
Plug-in hybrid system
WARNING
■ If the error warning indicator
on the CCID (Charging Circuit
Interrupting Device) illumi-
nates or flashes during
charging
There may be an electrical leak-
age in the power source path, or
there may be a malfunction in the
AC charging cable or CCID
(Charging Circuit Interrupting
Device). Refer to P.105 and follow
the correction procedure. If the
error warning indicator does not
turn off even after performing the
correction procedure, immediately
stop charging, remove the AC
charging cable and contact your
Toyota dealer. Continuing to
charge the vehicle in that condi-
tion may lead to unforeseen acci-
dents or serious injury.
■ Onboard traction battery
charger
The onboard traction battery char-
ger is located under the rear
seats. Make sure to observe the
following precautions regarding
the onboard traction battery char-
ger. Failure to observe these pre-
cautions may result in death or
serious injury such as burns and
electric shocks.
● The onboard traction battery
charger is hot during charging.
Do not touch the onboard trac-
tion battery charger, as doing so
may result in burns.
● Do not disassemble, repair or
modify the onboard traction bat-
tery charger. When the onboard
traction battery charger needs
to be repaired, consult your
Toyota dealer.
NOTICE
■ When charging
Do not insert the plug into the AC
charging inlet.
The AC charging inlet may be
damaged.
■ Using private power genera-
tor
Do not use private power genera-
tors as a power source for
charging.
Doing so may make charging
unstable, the voltage may be
insufficient, and the error warning
indicator on the CCID (Charging
Circuit Interrupting Device) of the
AC charging cable may flash.
■ Charging station
Due to the environment in which
the power equipment is located,
charging may be unstable due to
noise, the voltage may be insuffi-
cient, and the error warning indi-
cator on the CCID (Charging
Circuit Interrupting Device) of the
AC charging cable may flash.
■ Onboard traction battery
charger cooling air intake
vent
Cooling air intake vent for the
onboard traction battery charger
is installed under the rear seats.
Make sure to observe the follow-
ing precautions regarding the
cooling air intake vent. Failure to
observe these precautions may
result in a charging system mal-
function.
128
2-2. Charging
1 Unlock the doors to unlock
the charging connector.
(P.109)
The charging connector will be
unlocked and the AC charging inlet
light will illuminate when the doors
are unlocked.
2 Pull the charging connector
towards you while pressing
the latch release button.
If the latch release button is
pressed during charging (while the
charging indicator is illuminated),
charging will be interrupted.
3 Attach the charging connec-
tor cap.
4 Attach the AC charging inlet
cap and close the charging
port lid.
Lock the doors to lock the charging
port lid. (P.108)
5 Remove the plug from the
outlet when the charging
equipment will not be used
for a prolonged period of
time.
Hold the body of the plug when
removing.
Make sure to put the cable away
immediately after disconnecting.
(P.129)
When leaving the plug inserted,
inspect the plug and connector
once a month to check if dirt or dust
NOTICE
● Do not block the air intake vent
with seat covers or luggage
● If the air intake vent is clogged
with dust, clean it with a vacuum
cleaner
● Do not allow water or foreign
matter to enter the air intake
vent
● Do not spill large amounts of
water near the air intake vent
If water is spilled, have the vehi-
cle inspected by your Toyota
dealer and do not charge the
hybrid battery (traction battery)
before the inspection.
After charging
129
2-2. Charging
2
Plug-in hybrid system
has accumulated.
■ When the outside temperature
is low or high
The level shown on the SOC (State
of Charge) gauge (P.165) may
drop slightly when the power switch
is turned to ON, even if charging
has been completed and the hybrid
battery (traction battery) is fully
charged. However, this does not
indicate a malfunction.
■ When removing the charging
connector
Press the latch release button,
check that the lever raises up, and
then pull the charging connector
towards you.
If the lever does not raise up even
after the latch release button is
pressed, the charging connector is
locked. If this occurs, unlock the
doors using the smart key system or
wireless remote control to unlock
the charging connector. (P.107)
■ If the charging connector can-
not be unlocked
P.110
WARNING
■ After charging
Remove the plug if it will not be
used for a long time.
Dirt and dust may accumulate
plug or outlet, which could cause
a malfunction or fire, possibly
leading to death or serious injury.
NOTICE
■ After charging
● Store the AC charging cable out
of reach from infants and chil-
dren.
● After disconnecting the charging
connector from the AC charging
inlet, make sure to put on the
AC charging inlet cap and close
the charging port lid. If the AC
charging inlet cap is not put on,
water or foreign objects may
enter the AC charging inlet,
which could lead to vehicle
damage.
● After removing the plug from the
outlet, keep it in a safe place
free from moisture and dust.
The AC charging cable or plug
may be damaged if the cable is
stepped on or ridden over by
the vehicle.
130
2-2. Charging
■ Calendar settings
Current date and time information is
automatically set using GPS. How-
ever, if GPS calibration of clock is
turned off in the multimedia system
settings, the date needs to be set on
the multi-information display.
If the calendar settings check
screen is displayed when an
attempt was made to register a
charge schedule, check that the cor-
rect date is set. If it is incorrect, be
sure to correct it.
If the calendar information is wrong,
the charging schedule function will
not operate normally.
When registering the charging
schedule, the following settings
can be changed.
■ Select the charging mode
One of the two following
charging modes can be
selected.
“Start”
Starts charging at the set time
*1
and finishes charging when fully
charged.
*2
“Departure”
Starts charging to finish at the
set time.
*3, 4
When this setting is selected,
the air conditioning-linked func-
tion can be used.
*1
:Charging schedule function is
performed in accordance with
the clock in the multi-information
display. Before registering the
charging schedule, check the
clock settings to the proper time.
*2
:There might be a slight error in
the timing when charging starts
due to the state of the hybrid bat-
tery (traction battery).
*3
:When the system determines
that there is no time to finish
charging by the set scheduled
departure time, it starts charging.
Check the charging schedules.
*4
:If sudden changes in tempera-
ture or changes in the condition
of the power source occur while
charging, charging may not end
exactly at the time estimated by
the system.
■ Repeated setting
The periodic charging schedule
can be set by selecting your
desired day of the week. (If no
days are selected, charging is
only carried out once.)
Using the charging
schedule function
Charging can be carried out
at the desired time by regis-
tering the charging sched-
ule. Also, it is possible to
set the charging schedule to
one’s preferences, such as
having charging complete
by a certain departure time
or be carried out at the
same time on certain days.
Settings of the charging
schedule function
131
2-2. Charging
2
Plug-in hybrid system
■ Air conditioning-linked set-
ting (“Climate Prep”)
When the charging mode is set
to “Departure”, the vehicle air
conditioning system (P.396)
can be set to automatically oper-
ate
*
according to the set time.
By adjusting the cabin temperature
in advance, passengers can enjoy
a pleasant interior immediately after
entering the vehicle.
*
: Operation starts approximately
20 minutes before the set depar-
ture time.
■ Turning “Charge Now” on
and off
If even one charging schedule is
registered, charging does not
start until the set time, even if
the AC charging cable is con-
nected to the vehicle. To start
charging without changing the
charging schedule setting, turn
“Charge Now” on to temporarily
cancel the charging schedule
and enable charging after con-
necting the AC charging cable.
■ Changing “Next Event”
*1
It is possible to temporarily set
the time of the next charging
schedule without changing the
registered repeated setting.
*2
*1
:The “Next Event” refers to the
closest charging schedule from
the current time among the regis-
tered charging schedules.
Charging schedule is performed
based on the “Next Event”.
*2
:When “Next Event” is changed,
the current charging schedule
will be temporarily ignored and
charging will not be carried out
until the time specified by “Next
Event”. (For example, when
“Next Event” is set for 2 days
later, even if items are registered
on the charging schedule,
charging will not be carried out
until the time specified by “Next
Event”.)
The charging schedule can be
registered on the multi-informa-
tion display or audio system
screen (vehicles with Premium
Audio).
Multi-information display
operation: P.133
Audio system screen opera-
tion (vehicles with Premium
Audio): P.139
■ Charging schedule
● The charging schedule cannot be
set while driving.
● A maximum of 15 charging sched-
ules can be registered.
Registering the charging
schedule
132
2-2. Charging
■ To make sure that the charging
schedule function operates cor-
rectly
Check the following items.
● Adjust the clock to the correct time
(P.169)
● The calendar is set to the correct
date (P.177)
● Check that the power switch is
turned off
● After registering the charging
schedule, connect the AC
charging cable
The charging start time is deter-
mined based on the charging
schedule at the time that the AC
charging cable was connected.
● After connecting the AC charging
cable, check that the charging
indicator of the charging port
flashes (P.100)
● Do not use an outlet that has a
power cut off function (including a
timer function)
Use an outlet that constantly sup-
plies electricity. For outlets where
the power is cut off due to a timer
function, etc., charging may not be
carried out according to plan if the
power is cut off during the set
time.
■ When the AC charging cable
remains connected to the vehi-
cle
Even if multiple consecutive
charging schedules are registered,
the next charge will not be carried
out according to the charging
schedule until the AC charging
cable is removed and reconnected
after charging completes. Also,
when the hybrid battery (traction
battery) is fully charged, charging
according to the charging schedule
will not be carried out.
■ “Climate Prep”
● When the air conditioning-linked
setting is turned on, the air condi-
tioning operates until the set
departure time. Therefore, the air
conditioning will consume electric-
ity and charging may not complete
by the set departure time.
● If the hybrid battery (traction bat-
tery) is fully charged, charging will
not be carried out, even if the
charging schedule is set. How-
ever, if “Climate Prep” is turned
on, the air conditioning will oper-
ate only once when it nears the
time set in “Departure”. If this
occurs, the air conditioning will
consume electricity and the
remaining charge of the hybrid
battery (traction battery) when
departing may be decreased.
● When the doors are unlocked, the
air conditioning system does not
operate.
■ Smartphone-linked operation
(vehicles with Premium Audio)
After applying to Toyota Apps, it is
possible to use the smartphone
application to change charging
schedule settings.
For details about Toyota Apps, refer
to
http://www.toyota.com/connectedse
rvices in the United States and
http://www.toyota.ca/connected
in
Canada.
■ When charging schedules are
ignored
When the following operations are
performed while the charging
schedule is on standby, charging
schedule is temporarily canceled
and charging is started.
● When the Remote Air Condition-
ing System (P.405) is operated
● When turning “My Room Mode”
on (P.144)
● When turning “Charge Now” on
(P.137, 142)
● When an operation that temporar-
ily cancel charging using the
charging schedule (P.125)
133
2-2. Charging
2
Plug-in hybrid system
■ Effects of outside temperature
When the charging mode is set to
“Departure”, charging schedule may
be ignored due to the outside tem-
perature and charging may start.
■ “Battery Heater” (P.115) /
“Battery Cooler” (P.116)
When charging is carried out using
the charging schedule, the hybrid
battery (traction battery) heating or
cooling function may operate
according to the temperature of the
hybrid battery (traction battery).
● When the charging mode is set to
“Start”, the function starts at the
set charging start time.
● “Battery Heater”: When the
charging mode is set to “Depar-
ture”, the function starts automati-
cally to complete heating by the
desired departure time.
● “Battery Cooler”: When the
charging mode is set to “Depar-
ture”, cooling starts approximately
30 minutes before the charging
start time. However, if there is no
time to finish charging by the
charging schedule, the hybrid bat-
tery (traction battery) cooling time
may be shortened and “Battery
Cooler” may not operate.
When operating charging
schedule, use the meter control
switches.
Meter control switches
(P.171)
Multi-information display
■ Registering the charging
schedule
1 Press or of the meter
control switches to select .
2 Press or of the meter
control switches to select
“Vehicle Settings”, and then
press and hold .
3 Press or of the meter
control switches to select
“Charging Settings”, and then
press .
The “Charging Settings” screen will
be displayed.
4 Press or of the meter
control switches to select
“Charging Schedule”, and
then press .
The “Charging Schedule” screen
will be displayed.
5 Press or of the meter
control switches to select
“Scheduled Events”, and
then press .
The “Scheduled Events” screen will
Setting operations on
multi-information display
A
B
134
2-2. Charging
be displayed.
6 Press or of the meter
control switches to select “+”,
and then press .
The “Charging Mode” screen will be
displayed.
7 Press or of the meter
control switches to select the
item to change with the cur-
sor, and then press or
to change the setting.
Set the desired charging mode and
charging start (or departure) time.
When the charging mode is “Start”,
this sets the charging start time.
When it is “Departure”, this sets the
charging end time.
After changing the settings to the
desired settings, press .
When the charging mode is set to
“Departure”, the “Climate Prep”
screen is displayed. When the
charging mode is set to “Start”, the
“Repeat” screen (step 9) is dis-
played.
8 When the charging mode is
set to “Departure”, set the
“Climate Prep” to on or off.
*
Press or of the meter con-
trol switches and select “Yes” or
“No”, and then press .
Select “Yes” to turn on the air con-
ditioning system and select “No” to
turn it off.
The “Repeat” screen will be dis-
played.
*
: When the charging mode is set to
“Start”, “Climate Prep” screen will
not display.
9 To activate the repeated set-
ting, press or of the
meter control switches to
select the desired day to acti-
vate for the repeated setting,
and then press .
135
2-2. Charging
2
Plug-in hybrid system
Each time is pressed, the
repeated setting switches between
on and off.
When set to on, the charging
schedule is repeated on that day. It
is possible to set more than one
day to on.
If no days are set to on, charging is
only carried out once according to
the charging schedule for the next
24 hours.
After changing the settings to the
desired settings, select “Done”, and
then press .
A screen where the settings can be
saved will be displayed.
10Select “Save” and press
to save the settings.
The settings will be saved.
If you wish to change the settings,
press and perform the setting
procedure again.
After setting operations are com-
plete, when the AC charging cable
is connected to the vehicle,
charging will be carried out accord-
ing to the charging schedule set-
tings.
■ Switching charging sched-
ules between on and off
The registered charging sched-
ules can be turned on and off.
1 Perform step 1 to 5 of the
“Registering the charging
schedule” procedure
(P.133) and display
“Scheduled Events” screen.
A list of the registered charging
schedule will be displayed.
2 Press or of the meter
control switches to select the
item to turn ON/OFF, and
then press .
Each time is pressed, the
selected charging schedule
switches between on and off.
When set to off, a charging sched-
ule is ignored and charging accord-
ing to the charging schedule is not
136
2-2. Charging
carried out.
■ Changing the registered
charging schedules
The registered charging sched-
ules can be modified or deleted.
1 Perform step 1 to 5 of the
“Registering the charging
schedule” (P.133) proce-
dure and display “Scheduled
Events” screen.
A list of the registered charging
schedule will be displayed.
2 Press or of the meter
control switches to select the
item to change, and then
press and hold .
The “Edit Event” screen will be dis-
played.
3 Press or of the meter
control switches to select the
item to operate, press
and perform the necessary
operation.
“Edit”
Change the desired settings as
described starting from step 7 of
the “Registering the charging
schedule” procedure. (P.133)
Press to return to the previous
screen.
“Delete”
A deletion confirmation screen will
be displayed.
Press or of the meter con-
trol switches to select “Yes”, and
then press to delete the
selected charging schedule.
To cancel deletion, select “No” and
137
2-2. Charging
2
Plug-in hybrid system
then press .
Press to return to the previous
screen.
■ Setting “Charge Now” to on
The “Charge Now” setting can
be changed by performing one
of the two following procedures.
Operation on “Charging
Schedule” screen
1 Perform step 1 to 4 of the
“Registering the charging
schedule” procedure
(P.133) and display
“Charging Schedule” screen.
2 Press or of the meter
control switches to select
“Charge Now”, and then
press .
Each time is pressed, “Charge
Now” switches between on and off.
Operation on “Closing Dis-
play” screen
*
*
: If “Closing Display” is not set to
“Charging Schedule” on the
screen of the multi-information
display, the “Closing Display” is
not displayed. In this case, check
the settings on the multi-informa-
tion display.
1 Turn the power switch off.
The “Closing Display” screen is dis-
played on the multi-information dis-
play. (P.138)
2 Press to set “Charge
Now” to on.
Each time is pressed, “Charge
Now” switches between on and off.
After setting operations are
complete, charging starts when
the AC charging cable is con-
nected. (P.123)
■ Changing “Next Event”
*
*
: When “Charge Now” is set to on
or when using “My Room Mode”
(P.144) etc., it is not possible to
change the registered “Next
Event”.
1 Perform step 1 to 4 of the
“Registering the charging
schedule” procedure
(P.133) and display
“Charging Schedule” screen.
2 Press or of the meter
control switches to select
“Next Event”, and then press
.
The “Next Event” screen will be dis-
played.
138
2-2. Charging
3 Press or of the meter
control switches to select
“Yes”, and then press .
The confirmation message will be
displayed on the screen.
Press , and the “Charging
Mode” screen will be displayed.
Press to return to the previous
screen.
4 Change the desired settings
as described starting from
step 7 of the “Registering the
charging schedule” proce-
dure. (P.133)
Press to return to the previous
screen.
■ When charging schedule set-
ting operations are canceled
When the vehicle is in the following
conditions, charging schedule set-
ting operations are canceled.
● The power switch is operated
before the settings are confirmed
● The vehicle starts off
● A display with a higher priority
than that of the charging schedule
setting is shown
■ “Next Event”
After charging completes, the “Next
Event” displayed on the multi-infor-
mation display will not change until
the AC charging cable is removed,
even after charging is performed
according to the “Next Event”
schedule.
■ To return to original setting
after changing “Next Event”
setting
Turning the setting of “Charge Now”
on and then off can return the set-
ting of “Next Event” to its original
setting.
■ When “Next Event” is changed
while charging
● When the charging mode is
“Departure”, the current charging
is interrupted or continued
depending on the remaining time
until the charging is completed.
● When the charging mode is
“Start”, the current charging is
interrupted, the next charging will
start at the set time.
■ When the power switch is
turned off
You can check the next charging
schedule (“Next Event”) on the
“Closing Display” screen
*
when
“Closing Display” is set to “Charging
Schedule” on screen of the
multi-information display and the
power switch is turned off.
*
: The “Closing Display” screen may
not be displayed during charging.
139
2-2. Charging
2
Plug-in hybrid system
For details on how to operate the
audio system screen, refer to
“NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA
SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.
Setting operations related to the
charging schedule are per-
formed on the “Charging Sched-
ule” screen.
■ Displaying the “Charging
Schedule” screen
1 Press the “MENU” button to
display the menu screen.
2 Select “Info” and “Charging
Schedule”, in that order.
The “Charging Schedule” screen
will be displayed.
■ How to read the “Charging
Schedule” screen
Charging schedules (calen-
dar display)
Displays the week-long registered
WARNING
■ Cautions while performing
the setting operation
When performing the setting
operation while the hybrid system
is operated, ensure that the vehi-
cle is parked in a place with ade-
quate ventilation. In a closed area
such as a garage, exhaust gases
including harmful carbon monox-
ide (CO) may collect and enter
the vehicle. This may lead to
death or a serious health hazard.
NOTICE
■ While performing the setting
operation
When performing the setting
operation while the hybrid system
is stopped, be careful that the 12-
volt battery will not be discharged.
Setting operations on the
audio system screen
(vehicles with Premium
Audio)
A
140
2-2. Charging
charging schedule in a list using
icons.
“Add” button
Press to add a new item to the
charging schedule. (P.140)
“Edit” button
Press to change or delete regis-
tered items on the charging sched-
ule. (P.141)
“Charge Now” button
Press to set “Charge Now” to on.
(P.142)
Return button
Press to close the “Charging
Schedule” screen.
Charging schedules (icon
display)
When an item is registered on the
charging schedule, an icon is dis-
played on the calendar.
Main content displayed on the
calendar:
*1
:A row with a red line indicates
the current time.
*2
:When “Charge Now” (P.142) is
set to on, the orange icon moves
to the position of the red line and
changes to display “Charge
Now”.
■ Registering the charging
schedule
1 Display the “Charging Sched-
ule” screen. (P.139)
2 Press “Add”.
The “Edit Charging Event” screen
will be displayed on the screen.
3 Change the schedule to the
desired time.
Charging mode
Press “Start” or “Departure” to set
the desired charging mode.
Start (or departure) time
When the charging mode is “Start”,
set the charging start time (start
time). When it is “Departure”, set
the charging end time (departure
time).
Press “+” or “-” to set the desired
time.
Repeated settings
Each time the button is pressed,
the repeated setting for the
selected day switches between on
and off.
When turned on, the charging
schedule is repeated on that day. It
Display Content
Red line
*1
Current time
Orange icon
*2
Charging sched-
ule for Next
Event
Green icon
The charging
mode is set to
“Departure”
Blue icon
The charging
mode is set to
“Start”
B
C
D
E
F
A
B
C
141
2-2. Charging
2
Plug-in hybrid system
is possible to turn more than one
day on.
If no buttons are turned on,
charging is only carried out once
according to the charging schedule
for the next 24 hours.
“Climate Prep” (P.131)
When the charging mode is set to
“Departure”, the “Climate Prep” is
displayed.
To operate the air conditioning sys-
tem, press the “Climate Prep” but-
ton to set the function to on.
Each time the button is pressed,
the function switches between on
and off.
4 After setting operations are
complete, press “Save”.
The charging schedule is registered
and an icon is added to the calen-
dar.
To cancel registration of the
charging schedule, press the return
button.
After setting operations are com-
plete, when the power switch is
turned off and the AC charging
cable is connected to the vehicle,
charging is carried out according to
the charging schedule settings.
■ Switching charging sched-
ules between on and off
1 Display the “Charging Sched-
ule” screen. (P.139)
2 Press “Edit”.
The “Scheduled Events” screen will
be displayed on the screen.
3 From the items displayed on
the screen, press on or off in
the row of the charging
schedule you wish to change.
If the charging schedule you wish to
change is not displayed on the
screen, scroll the list up and down
to display it.
Each time the button is pressed,
the charging schedule switches
between on and off.
■ Changing the registered
charging schedules
1 Display the “Charging Sched-
ule” screen. (P.139)
2 Press “Edit”.
The “Scheduled Events” screen will
be displayed on the screen.
3 From the items displayed on
the screen, press “Edit” in the
row of the charging schedule
you wish to change.
The settings screen will be dis-
played on the screen.
D
142
2-2. Charging
It is also possible to display the
“Edit Charging Event” screen by
pressing the icon of the charging
schedule you wish to change from
those displayed on the calendar.
Changing registered items:
Change the desired settings as
described in step 3 to step 4 of the
“Registering the charging schedule”
procedure. (P.140)
When a setting is changed, its icon
on the calendar also changes.
Deleting registered items:
Press “Delete”.
A deletion confirmation message
will be displayed.
Press “Yes” to delete the selected
charging schedule.
To cancel deletion, press “No” or
the return button.
When a charging schedule is
deleted, its icon is also deleted from
the calendar.
■ Turning “Charge Now” on
1 Display the “Charging Sched-
ule” screen. (P.139)
2 Press “Charge Now”.
Each time the button is pressed,
“Charge Now” switches between on
and off and the indicator on the but-
ton turns on and off.
After setting operations are
complete, charging starts when
the AC charging cable is con-
nected. (P.123)
■ Changing Next Event
*
*
: When “Charge Now” is turned on
or when using “My Room Mode”
(P.144) etc., the registered
Next Event cannot be changed.
1 Display the “Charging Sched-
ule” screen. (P.139)
Next Event is displayed on the
“Charging Schedule” screen with
an orange icon.
2 Press the orange icon.
A confirmation screen for the
changes will be displayed.
3 Press “Yes”.
The “Scheduled Events” screen will
be displayed on the screen.
To cancel changing, press “No” or
143
2-2. Charging
2
Plug-in hybrid system
the return button.
4 Change the desired settings
as described in step 3 to step
4 of the “Registering the
charging schedule” proce-
dure. (P.140)
The charging schedule settings are
saved and icons are added to the
charging schedule.
To cancel changing Next Event,
press the return button.
■ When a charging schedule has
been registered
When all the items in the charging
schedule are turned off, icons are
not displayed on the “Charging
Schedule” screen (calendar dis-
play).
The icons will be displayed when
they are set to on using the “Sched-
uled Events” screen.
■ When charging schedule set-
ting operations are canceled
When the vehicle is in the following
conditions, charging schedule set-
ting operations are canceled.
● The power switch is turned off
before the settings are confirmed
● The vehicle starts off
● A display with a higher priority
than that of the charging schedule
setting is shown
■ Next Event
After charging completes, the Next
Event displayed on the display will
not change until the AC charging
cable is removed, even after
charging is performed according to
the Next Event schedule.
■ To return to original setting
after changing Next Event set-
ting
Turning the setting of “Charge Now”
on and then off can return the set-
ting of Next Event to its original set-
ting.
■ When Next Event is changed
while charging
● When the charging mode is
“Departure”, the current charging
is interrupted or continued
depending on the remaining time
until the charging is completed.
● When the charging mode is
“Start”, the current charging is
interrupted, the next charging will
start at the set time.
■ Displaying advice related to
charging schedule settings
When “?” is pressed on the “Edit
Charging Event” screen (P.141),
an explanation of the setting item on
the “Edit Charging Event” screen
will be displayed.
144
2-2. Charging
1 Connect the AC charging
cable to the vehicle and start
charging
2 Turn the power switch on
during charging
The setting screen of “My Room
Mode” is displayed automatically on
the multi-information display.
3 Press or of the meter
control switches, select
“Yes”, and then press .
“My Room Mode” starts and sys-
tems such as the air conditioning
system and audio system can be
used inside the vehicle.
When not using “My Room Mode”,
select “No”, and then press .
WARNING
■ Cautions performing the set-
ting operation
As the hybrid system needs to be
operating during setting up the
display, ensure that the vehicle is
parked in a place with adequate
ventilation. In a closed area such
as a garage, exhaust gases
including harmful carbon monox-
ide (CO) may collect and enter
the vehicle. This may lead to
death or a serious health hazard.
NOTICE
■ While performing the setting
operation
When performing the setting
operation while the hybrid system
is stopped, be careful that the 12-
volt battery will not be discharged.
Using the “My Room
Mode”
When the AC charging cable
is connected to the vehicle,
electrical components such
as the air conditioning sys-
tem or audio system can be
used using the external
power source.
Starting “My Room Mode”
145
2-2. Charging
2
Plug-in hybrid system
To stop “My Room Mode”, turn
the power switch off.
When “My Room Mode” starts,
the remaining charge display
screen for the hybrid battery
(traction battery) is displayed
automatically on the multi-infor-
mation display. The approxi-
mate power balance (balance
between electricity supply and
consumption) while using “My
Room Mode” can be checked
from the color and size of the
arrows.
Discharging status
Charging status
When the electricity supply from the
AC charging cable is larger than the
power consumption inside the vehi-
cle, becomes larger. When the
power consumption is larger than
the electricity supply, becomes
larger.
When the electricity supply and
consumption are balanced (when
the power balance is judged to be
zero), and are displayed as
the same size.
■ Meter display during charging
If “My Room Mode” is not turned on
for approximately 100 seconds after
the power switch is turned on during
charging, the power switch will auto-
matically turn off.
■ While using “My Room Mode”
Any of the following may occur.
● When the remaining charge of the
hybrid battery (traction battery)
reaches the lower limit, the air
conditioning system automatically
turns off.
In this situation, the air condition-
ing system cannot be used until
the remaining charge of the hybrid
battery (traction battery)
increases. Turn the power switch
off and use “My Room Mode” after
the remaining charge of the hybrid
battery (traction battery) is
restored.
● When the outside temperature is
low, the heater output may be lim-
ited due to the air conditioning
system operation being restricted.
● Warning lights and indicators such
as electric power steering system
warning light (yellow) and mal-
function indicator lamp may turn
on, but this is not a malfunction.
Also, when the headlight switch is
in the AUTO position and the sur-
rounding area is dark, the head-
lights are turned on. (P.295)
■ When a charging schedule is
registered
When “My Room Mode” starts while
the charging schedule is on
standby, charging schedules are
ignored and charging starts.
Display of power balance
information while using
“My Room Mode”
A
B
B
A
A
B
146
2-2. Charging
■ When “My Room Mode” is used
while the hybrid battery (trac-
tion battery) is fully charged
When the power switch is turned on
while the hybrid battery (traction
battery) is fully charged and the
charging connector that supplies
power is connected, “Charging Port
Lid is Open” is displayed on the
multi-information display. In this
case, press on the meter control
switches to display the setting
screen of “My Room Mode”, and
then select “My Room Mode”.
When “My Room Mode” is used
while the hybrid battery (traction
battery) is fully charged, the electric
power of the hybrid battery (traction
battery) may be consumed. In this
case, charging may be performed
again.
■ When a message related to “My
Room Mode” is displayed
When a message is displayed on
the multi-information display while
using or attempting to start “My
Room Mode”, take the following cor-
rection procedures.
● “Traction battery is too low for “My
Room Mode””
There is insufficient remaining
charge in the hybrid battery (traction
battery) for starting “My Room
Mode”.
Wait until the charge of the hybrid
battery (traction battery) increases,
then start “My Room Mode”.
● ““My Room Mode” has stopped
due to low traction battery”
The remaining charge in the hybrid
battery (traction battery) is insuffi-
cient.
Stop using “My Room Mode” and
charge the hybrid battery (traction
battery).
● ““My Room Mode” will stop when
traction battery is too low Reduce
power usage to continue using
“My Room Mode””
The power consumption inside the
vehicle is greater than the power
being charged to the hybrid battery
(traction battery), and the remaining
charge of the hybrid battery (traction
battery) is low.
*
• “My Room Mode” will end unless
the power consumption inside the
vehicle is improved.
• To continue using “My Room
Mode”, turn off the power of sys-
tems such as the air conditioning
system and audio system to
increase the remaining charge of
the hybrid battery (traction bat-
tery).
*
: The power balance status during
“My Room Mode” can be checked
from the remaining charge dis-
play screen for the hybrid battery
(traction battery) displayed on the
multi-information display.
WARNING
■ Cautions for using “My Room
Mode”
Make sure to observe the follow-
ing precautions.
Failure to do so may result in seri-
ous health problems or even
death.
● Do not leave children, people
who need assistance, or pets
inside the vehicle. The system
may turn off automatically and
the interior temperature may
become high or low, resulting in
heat stroke, dehydration or
hypothermia. Devices such as
the wipers can also be used,
which may lead to mistaken
operation and an accident.
● Check the safety around the
vehicle carefully before use.
147
2-2. Charging
2
Plug-in hybrid system
Refer to the following table and carry out the appropriate correction
procedure.
■ The power source indicator on the CCID (Charging Circuit
Interrupting Device) does not illuminate, even though the
plug is connected to an external power source.
When charging cannot be carried out
When charging does not start, even though the normal proce-
dure is followed, check each of the following items.
If a message is shown on the multi-information display, also refer
to P.152.
When charging cannot be carried out
Likely cause Correction procedure
Plug is not properly connected to
outlet
Check that the plug is properly con-
nected to the outlet.
Power is out
After power is restored, carry out the
charging procedure again.
Building breaker is tripped and
power is cut off
Check that the breaker is connected
and if there is no malfunction, check
if the vehicle can be charged through
another outlet.
If charging is possible, the first outlet
may have a malfunction. Contact the
building or facility manager, or an
electrician.
Short circuit between CCID
(Charging Circuit Interrupting
Device) and plug
Immediately stop charging and con-
tact your Toyota dealer.
148
2-2. Charging
■ The error warning indicator on the CCID (Charging Circuit
Interrupting Device) flashes.
■ Charging indicator of the charging port does not illuminate,
even though charging connector is connected.
Likely cause Correction procedure
Electrical leakage detection function
or self-diagnostic function operates
and power is cut off
When the voltage is insufficient, the
error warning indicator may flash
when there is noise interference.
Perform a reset and connect to a
proper power source. (P.105)
If charging does not start, immedi-
ately stop charging and contact your
Toyota dealer.
Likely cause Correction procedure
The plug is not properly connected to
the outlet
Check whether the plug is properly
connected to the outlet.
Charging connector is not securely
connected to AC charging inlet
Check the connection status of the
charging connector.
When connecting the charging
connector, make sure not to touch
the latch release button. Insert the
charging connector securely until
you hear a click. The charging con-
nector may not be connected cor-
rectly if the latch release button is
pressed while inserting.
After connecting the charging con-
nector, check that the latch release
button is not pressed and the
charging indicator of the charging
port is turned on.
If the charging indicator of the
charging port does not illuminate,
even though the charging connector
is securely connected, there may be
a malfunction in the system. Immedi-
ately stop charging and contact your
Toyota dealer.
149
2-2. Charging
2
Plug-in hybrid system
■ Charging indicator of the charging port flashes and charging
cannot be carried out.
*
: Refer to P.100 for details regarding charging indicator of the charging port
illumination and flashing.
Refer to the following table and carry out the appropriate correction
procedure.
■ Cannot charge at desired time
Hybrid battery (traction battery) is
already fully charged
When the hybrid battery (traction
battery) is fully charged, charging is
not performed.
The charger does not operate
Please contact the facility manager
when there is a problem with char-
ger.
Likely cause Correction procedure
When charging indicator of the
charging port flashes
*
: Charging
schedule is registered
When you wish to charge according
to the charging schedule, wait until
the set time.
To start charging, set “Charge Now”
to on. (P.137, 142)
When charging indicator of the
charging port rapidly flashes
*
: Mal-
function occurred in an external
power source or the vehicle
Start the hybrid system and follow
the instructions displayed by the
message on the multi-information
display. (P.152)
When charging schedule function does not operate nor-
mally
Likely cause Correction procedure
Vehicle clock is not properly adjusted
Check the clock settings and adjust it
to the proper time. (P.169)
The vehicle calendar is not set cor-
rectly.
Check the calendar setting and set it
to the correct date. (P.177)
Likely cause Correction procedure
150
2-2. Charging
■ Cannot change charging schedule from smartphone applica-
tion (vehicles with Premium Audio)
*
*
: In order to use the smartphone application, it is necessary to apply to
Toyota Apps. For details about Toyota Apps, refer to
http://www.toyota.com/connectedservices
in the United States and
http://www.toyota.ca/connected
in Canada.
■ Charging starts, even though charging schedule is registered
AC charging cable is not connected
to vehicle
Before using the charging schedule,
connect the AC charging cable.
Incorrect charging mode selected
Check the charging mode setting.
(P.130)
When the charging mode is “Start”,
charging starts at the set time, but
when it is “Departure”, charging is
completed by the set time. (The
charging start time is automatically
controlled by the system.)
Likely cause Correction procedure
Smartphone is outside its coverage
area
Check the signal strength. If the
smartphone is outside its coverage
area, move to a place with a better
signal.
Likely cause Correction procedure
“Charge Now” is set to on
When charging according to the
charging schedule, set “Charge
Now” to off. (P.137, 142)
Charging schedule is set to off
Check that charging schedule is not
set to off. (P.135, 136)
Charging mode is set to “Departure”
and schedule departure time is close
to current time
When the system determines that
there is no time to finish charging by
the set scheduled departure time, it
starts charging. Check the charging
schedules.
Likely cause Correction procedure
151
2-2. Charging
2
Plug-in hybrid system
■ Charging ends earlier than time set in “Departure”
AC charging cable was removed and
reinserted while charging indicator of
the charging port was flashing
If the AC charging cable is removed
and reinserted while the charging
indicator is flashing, the charging
schedule is canceled (P.125).
Temporarily remove the AC charging
cable, and then reconnect it.
The Remote Air Conditioning Sys-
tem was operated
When the Remote Air Conditioning
System is operated, the system will
start charging, even if the charging
schedule is registered. To carry out
charging using the charging sched-
ule, stop the Remote Air Condition-
ing System, and then reconnect the
AC charging cable.
“Battery Heater” (P.115) operated
When the charging mode is set to
“Departure”, “Battery Heater” may
operate before charging starts.
Check the status of the charging
indicator of the charging port.
(P.100)
Outside temperature is low and
hybrid battery (traction battery)
warming control (P.116) operated
(Alaska and Canada only)
When hybrid battery (traction bat-
tery) warming control operates, the
charging schedules are ignored and
charging starts. In order to protect
the hybrid battery (traction battery),
allow charging to continue.
Likely cause Correction procedure
Charging end time does not match
estimated end time due to condition
of power source or outside tempera-
ture
If sudden changes in temperature or
changes in the condition of the
power source occur while charging,
charging may end earlier than the
time estimated by the system.
Likely cause Correction procedure
152
2-2. Charging
■ Charging is not complete, even though it is time set in
“Departure”
■ Charging does not start, even though it is time set in “Start”
When a door is opened with the
power switch off, after charging,
a message is displayed in the
multi-information display.
When this occurs, follow the
instructions displayed on the
screen.
Likely cause Correction procedure
“Climate Prep” is set to on
When “Climate Prep” is set to on, the
air conditioning operates until the set
departure time.
Therefore, charging may not com-
plete by the set time due to charging
conditions.
To have the hybrid battery (traction
battery) fully charged, allow charging
to continue.
Charging end time does not match
estimated end time due to condition
of power source or outside tempera-
ture
If sudden changes in temperature or
changes in the condition of the
power source occur while charging,
charging may not end exactly at the
time estimated by the system.
Likely cause Correction procedure
AC charging cable was connected
after set time
Connect the AC charging cable
before the time set in “Start”.
When charging-related message is displayed
153
2-2. Charging
2
Plug-in hybrid system
■ If “Charging Stopped Due to Pulled Charging Connector” is
shown
*
: Electricity is consumed when operating “Battery Heater” (P.115), the air
conditioning-linked function (P.131) or Remote Air Conditioning System
(P.405).
Likely cause Correction procedure
Charging connector is removed
while charging
When the charging connector is
removed while charging, charging
stops. If you want to fully charge the
hybrid battery (traction battery),
reconnect the charging connector.
After the hybrid battery (traction bat-
tery) is fully charged, the charging
connector is removed while the
hybrid battery (traction battery) is
being recharged again because
electricity-consuming functions
*
have
been used and the remaining charge
is now reduced.
Charging connector is not securely
connected
Check the connection status of the
charging connector.
When connecting the charging
connector, make sure not to touch
the latch release button. Insert the
charging connector securely until
you hear a click. The charging con-
nector may not be connected cor-
rectly if the latch release button is
pressed while inserting.
After connecting the charging con-
nector, check that the latch release
button is not pressed and the
charging indicator of the charging
port is turned on.
If charging cannot be carried out,
even though the proper procedures
were followed, have the vehicle
inspected by your Toyota dealer.
Latch release button of charging
connector was pressed while
charging
When the latch release button is
pressed while charging, charging
stops. To continue charging, recon-
nect the charging connector.
154
2-2. Charging
■ If “Charging Complete Limited Due to Battery Temp” is
shown
■ If “Charging Stopped Check Charging Source” is shown (1)
Likely cause Correction procedure
Charging was stopped to protect the
hybrid battery (traction battery) as it
continued to remain hot for a certain
period of time.
Allow the hybrid battery (traction bat-
tery) to cool down and perform
charging again if the charging
amount has not reached the desired
amount.
Likely cause Correction procedure
Problem in power supply from exter-
nal power source
Check the following items.
Plug is not disconnected
Power source indicator on the
CCID (Charging Circuit Interrupting
Device) is illuminated
The circuit breaker has tripped
If there is no problem with any of the
above items, there may be a prob-
lem with the outlet of the building.
Contact an electrician and request
an inspection. (Contact the facility
manager of the charging station
when there is a problem with
charging station.)
If charging cannot be carried out,
even though there is no problem with
the power source path, there may be
a malfunction in the system. Have
the vehicle inspected by your Toyota
dealer.
Furthermore, if the error warning
indicator on the CCID (Charging Cir-
cuit Interrupting Device) is flashing,
there may be an electrical leakage.
Consult your Toyota dealer.
155
2-2. Charging
2
Plug-in hybrid system
■ If “Charging Stopped Check Charging Source” is shown (2)
Charger has stopped charging
Charging may be canceled by an
interruption of power supply depend-
ing on specifications of a charger.
Refer to the instructions provided
with the charger.
When charging is stopped using
the charger
Equipment with charging schedule
function
Equipment that is not compatible
with the charging schedule func-
tion of the vehicle
Check if it is possible to charge with
the AC charging cable equipped to
the vehicle.
If charging cannot be carried out,
even when using the genuine AC
charging cable, consult your Toyota
dealer.
Likely cause Correction procedure
Charger is not compatible with vehi-
cle
Check if it is possible to charge with
the AC charging cable equipped to
the vehicle.
If charging cannot be carried out,
even when using the genuine AC
charging cable, consult your Toyota
dealer.
Charger has stopped charging
Likely cause Correction procedure
156
2-2. Charging
■ If “Charging Stopped Check Charging Source” is shown (3)
Likely cause Correction procedure
Problem in power supply from exter-
nal power source
Check the following items.
Plug is securely inserted
Extension cord is not used and
outlet is not overloaded
Connected to a dedicated power
line
Electrical leakage has occurred or
not
If there is no problem with any of the
above items, there may be a prob-
lem with the outlet of the building.
Contact an electrician to request an
inspection.
If charging cannot be carried out,
even though there is no problem with
the power source path, there may be
a malfunction in the system. Have
the vehicle inspected by your Toyota
dealer.
Charger has stopped charging
Check if it is possible to charge with
the AC charging cable equipped to
the vehicle.
If charging cannot be carried out,
even when using the genuine AC
charging cable, consult your Toyota
dealer.
157
2-2. Charging
2
Plug-in hybrid system
■ If “Charging Stopped High Energy Use See Owner’s Manual”
is shown
■ If “Charging System Malfunction See Owner’s Manual” is
shown
■ If “The Traction Battery Temp is low System put priority on
charging to preserve battery condition” is shown (Alaska and
Canada only)
Likely cause Correction procedure
Power is being consumed by electri-
cal components of vehicle
Check the following items, and then
carry out charging again.
If the headlights and audio are
turned on, turn them off.
Turn the power switch off.
If charging cannot be carried out,
even after performing the above, the
auxiliary battery may not be suffi-
ciently charged. Operate the hybrid
system for approximately 15 minutes
or more to charge the auxiliary bat-
tery.
Likely cause Correction procedure
Malfunction occurred in charging
system
Have the vehicle inspected by your
Toyota dealer.
Likely cause Correction procedure
The Hybrid battery (traction battery)
warming control was operated
(P.116)
When the hybrid battery (traction
battery) warming control operates,
the charging schedule is not used
and charging is performed.
This is a control to protect the hybrid
battery (traction battery), and not a
malfunction.
158
2-2. Charging
159
3
3
Vehicle status information and indicators
Vehicle status informa-
tion and indicators
3-1. Instrument cluster
Warning lights and indica-
tors ............................ 160
Gauges and meters .... 165
Multi-information display
.................................. 170
Head-up display .......... 182
Energy monitor/consump-
tion screen................. 187
160
3-1. Instrument cluster
3-1.Instrument cluster
For the purpose of explanation, the following illustrations display all
warning lights and indicators illuminated.
The display of the speedometer can be selected from two types,
analog or digital. (P.177)
■ When analog speedometer is displayed
The units used on the meters and some indicators may differ depending on
the target region.
Warning lights and indicators
The warning lights and indicators on the instrument cluster,
center panel and outside rear view mirrors inform the driver
of the status of the vehicle’s various systems.
Instrument cluster
161
3-1. Instrument cluster
3
Vehicle status information and indicators
■ When digital speedometer is displayed
The units used on the meters and some indicators may differ depending on
the target region.
Warning lights inform the driver
of malfunctions in the indicated
vehicle’s systems.
Warning lights
(U.S.A.)
Brake system warn-
ing light
*1
(P.511)
(Canada)
(Red)
Brake system warn-
ing light
*1
(P.511)
(Yellow)
Brake system warn-
ing light
*1
(P.511)
Charging system
warning light
*1
(P.511)
High coolant tempera-
ture warning light
*2
(P.512)
Hybrid system over-
heat warning light
*2
(P.512)
Low engine oil pres-
sure warning light
*2
(P.512)
(U.S.A.)
Malfunction indicator
lamp
*1
(P.512)
(Canada)
Malfunction indicator
lamp
*1
(P.512)
SRS warning light
*1
(P.513)
(U.S.A.)
ABS warning light
*1
(P.513)
(Canada)
ABS warning light
*1
(P.513)
(Red/yellow)
Electric power steer-
ing system warning
light
*1
(P.513)
(Flashes or
illuminates)
PCS warning light
*1
(P.514)
162
3-1. Instrument cluster
*1
:These lights turn on when the
power switch is turned to ON to
indicate that a system check is
being performed. They will turn
off after the hybrid system is on,
or after a few seconds. There
may be a malfunction in a sys-
tem if the light does not come on,
or turn off. Have the vehicle
inspected by your Toyota dealer.
*2
:This light illuminates on the
multi-information display with a
message.
*3
:Intuitive parking assist OFF indi-
cator turns on when the power
switch is turned to ON while the
Intuitive parking assist function is
on. It will turn off after a few sec-
onds.
(Orange)
LTA indicator
(P.514)
Intuitive parking assist
OFF indicator
*3
(if
equipped) (P.515)
PKSB OFF indica-
tor
*1
(if equipped)
(P.515)
BSM OFF indicator
*1
(P.516)
RCTA OFF indica-
tor
*1
(if equipped)
(P.516)
Slip indicator light
*1
(P.516)
Brake Override Sys-
tem/Drive-Start Con-
trol/PKSB (if
equipped) warning
light
*2
(P.517)
(Flashes)
Brake hold operated
indicator
*1
(P.517)
(U.S.A.)
(Flashes)
Parking brake indica-
tor (P.517)
(Canada)
(Flashes)
Parking brake indica-
tor (P.517)
Tire pressure warning
light
*1
(P.518)
Low fuel level warn-
ing light (P.518)
Driver’s and front pas-
senger’s seat belt
reminder light
(P.518)
Rear passengers’ seat
belt reminder lights (if
equipped) (P.519)
WARNING
■ If a safety system warning
light does not come on
Should a safety system light such
as the ABS and SRS warning light
not come on when you start the
hybrid system, this could mean
that these systems are not avail-
able to help protect you in an acci-
dent, which could result in death
or serious injury. Have the vehicle
inspected by your Toyota dealer
immediately if this occurs.
163
3-1. Instrument cluster
3
Vehicle status information and indicators
The indicators inform the driver
of the operating state of the
vehicle’s various systems.
Indicators
Turn signal indicator
(P.289)
(U.S.A.)
Headlight indicator
(P.295)
(Canada)
Tail light indicator
(P.295)
Headlight high beam
indicator (P.297)
Automatic High Beam
indicator (P.298)
Smart key system
indicator
*1
(P.279)
Cruise control indica-
tor (P.336)
Dynamic radar cruise
control indicator
(P.336)
Cruise control “SET”
indicator (P.336)
LTA indicator
*2
(P.328)
Intuitive parking assist
OFF indicator
*3, 4
(if
equipped) (P.358)
PKSB OFF indicator
*3, 5
(if equipped)
(P.364)
(Flashes)
Slip indicator light
*5
(P.381)
VSC OFF indicator
*3, 5
(P.382)
PCS warning light
*3, 5
(P.317)
BSM outside rear view
mirror indicators
*5, 6
(P.347)
BSM OFF indicator
*3, 5
(P.347)
RCTA OFF indicator
*3, 5
(if equipped)
(P.347)
Brake hold standby
indicator
*5
(P.293)
Brake hold operated
indicator
*5
(P.293)
Security indicator
(P.72, 73)
“READY” indicator
(P.279)
Low outside tempera-
ture indicator
*7
(P.168)
EV indicator (P.82)
(U.S.A.)
Parking brake indica-
tor (P.290)
(Canada)
Parking brake indica-
tor (P.290)
EV drive mode indica-
tor
*8
(P.78)
AUTO EV/HV mode
indicator
*8
(P.78)
HV drive mode indica-
tor
*8
(P.78)
164
3-1. Instrument cluster
*1
:This light illuminates on the
multi-information display with a
message.
*2
:Depending on the operating con-
dition, the color and illuminat-
ing/flashing state of the light
change.
*3
:The light comes on when the
system is turned off.
*4
:Intuitive parking assist OFF indi-
cator turns on when the power
switch is turned to ON while the
Intuitive parking assist function is
on. It will turn off after a few sec-
onds.
*5
:These lights turn on when the
power switch is turned to ON to
indicate that a system check is
being performed. They will turn
off after the hybrid system is on,
or after a few seconds. There
may be a malfunction in a sys-
tem if the lights do not turn on, or
turn off. Have the vehicle
inspected by your Toyota dealer.
*6
:This light illuminates on the out-
side rear view mirrors.
*7
:When the outside temperature is
approximately 37°F (3°C) or
lower, the indicator will flash for
approximately 10 seconds, then
stay on.
*8
:The displayed indicator changes
according to the current plug-in
hybrid system operation mode.
*9
:This light illuminates on the cen-
ter panel.
■ BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) out-
side rear view mirror indicators
In order to confirm operation, the
BSM outside rear view mirror indica-
tors illuminate when the power
switch is turned to ON, or when the
BSM function/RCTA function is
enabled while the power switch is in
ON.
If the system is functioning correctly,
the BSM outside rear view mirror
indicators will turn off after a few
seconds.
If the BSM outside rear view mirror
indicators do not illuminate or do not
turn off, there may be a malfunction
in the system. If this occurs, have
the vehicle inspected by your
Toyota dealer.
Hybrid battery charge
mode indicator
*8
(P.79)
Eco drive mode indi-
cator (P.377)
Sport mode indicator
(P.377)
Trail Mode indicator
(P.379)
“AIR BAG ON/OFF”
indicator
*5, 9
(P.44)
165
3-1. Instrument cluster
3
Vehicle status information and indicators
The display of the speedometer can be selected from two types,
analog or digital. (P.177)
■ Analog speedometer
The units used on the meter and display may differ depending on the target
region.
Hybrid System Indicator
Displays the hybrid system output or regeneration level (P.167)
Speedometer
Displays the vehicle speed
Clock
Automatically adjusts the time by using the GPS time information (GPS
clock).
For details, refer to “Navigation and Multimedia System Owner’s Manual” or
“Multimedia Owner’s Manual”.
Fuel gauge
Displays the quantity of fuel remaining in the tank
SOC (State of Charge) gauge
Displays the amount of charge remaining in the traction battery.
Gauges and meters
The meters display various drive information.
Meter display
A
B
C
D
E
166
3-1. Instrument cluster
When the gauge is in the green zone, EV driving is possible. When the
gauge is in the blue zone, EV driving is no longer possible (in this situation,
the vehicle switches to HV mode). Charge the hybrid battery (traction bat-
tery) to allow EV driving.
Odometer and trip meter
Odometer:
Displays the total distance that the vehicle has been driven
Trip meter:
Displays the distance the vehicle has been driven since the meter was last
reset. Trip meters “A” and “B” can be used to record and display different
distances independently.
Outside temperature (P.168)
Multi-information display
Presents the driver with a variety of driving-related data (P.170)
Displays warning messages if a malfunction occurs (P.523)
Shift position and shift range indicator
Displays the selected shift position or selected shift range (P.285)
■ Digital speedometer
The units used on the meter and display may differ depending on the target
region.
Hybrid System Indicator
Displays the hybrid system output or regeneration level (P.167)
Speedometer
Displays the vehicle speed
Clock
F
G
H
I
A
B
C
167
3-1. Instrument cluster
3
Vehicle status information and indicators
Automatically adjusts the time by using the GPS time information (GPS
clock).
For details, refer to “Navigation and Multimedia System Owner’s Manual” or
“Multimedia Owner’s Manual”.
Fuel gauge
Displays the quantity of fuel remaining in the tank
SOC (State of Charge) gauge
Displays the amount of charge remaining in the traction battery.
When the gauge is in the green zone, EV driving is possible. When the
gauge is in the blue zone, EV driving is no longer possible (in this situation,
the vehicle switches to HV mode). Charge the hybrid battery (traction bat-
tery) to allow EV driving.
Odometer and trip meter
Odometer:
Displays the total distance that the vehicle has been driven
Trip meter:
Displays the distance the vehicle has been driven since the meter was last
reset. Trip meters “A” and “B” can be used to record and display different
distances independently.
Outside temperature (P.168)
Multi-information display
Presents the driver with a variety of driving-related data (P.170)
Displays warning messages if a malfunction occurs (P.523)
Shift position and shift range indicator
Displays the selected shift position or selected shift range (P.285)
■ The meters and display illumi-
nate when
The power switch is in ON.
■ When changing driving mode
Speedometer color is changed fol-
lowing the selected driving mode or
when Trail Mode is turned on.
(P.377, 379)
■ Hybrid System Indicator
The display contents of the Hybrid
System Indicator are different in EV
mode and HV mode.
D
E
F
G
H
I
168
3-1. Instrument cluster
READY OFF area
Shows that the hybrid system is not
operating.
Charge area
Shows regeneration
*
status. Regen-
erated energy will be used to charge
the hybrid battery (traction battery).
Eco area
Shows that the vehicle is being
driven in an Eco-friendly manner.
By keeping the indicator needle
within Eco area, more Eco-friendly
driving can be achieved.
Power area
Shows that an Eco-friendly driving
range is being exceeded (during full
power driving etc.)
EV driving area (EV mode or
AUTO EV/HV mode)
Shows that the vehicle is driven
using only the electric motor (trac-
tion motor).
Hybrid Eco area (HV mode)
Shows that gasoline engine power
is not being used very often.
The gasoline engine will automati-
cally stop and restart under various
conditions.
*
: When used in this manual, “regen-
eration” refers to the conversion of
energy created by the movement
of the vehicle into electrical
energy.
In the following situation, the Hybrid
System Indicator does not operate.
● “READY” indicator is not illumi-
nated.
● The shift lever is in a range other
than D or S.
■ Outside temperature display
● In the following situations, the cor-
rect outside temperature may not
be displayed, or the display may
take longer than normal to
change.
• When stopped (including when
using “My Room Mode”), or driv-
ing at low speeds (less than 12
mph [20 km/h])
• When the outside temperature
has changed suddenly (at the
entrance/exit of a garage, tunnel,
etc.)
● When “--” or “E” is displayed, the
system may be malfunctioning.
Take your vehicle to your Toyota
dealer.
A
B
C
D
E
F
169
3-1. Instrument cluster
3
Vehicle status information and indicators
● Displays the outside temperature
within the range of -40°F (-40°C)
to 122°F (50°C).
● When the outside temperature is
approximately 37°F (3°C) or
lower, the indicator will flash
for approximately 10 seconds,
then stay on.
■ Liquid crystal display
P.171
■ Customization
Settings (e. g. meter display) can be
changed on the screen of the
multi-information display. (P.177)
Switches the items of the odom-
eter, trip meter A and trip meter
B by pressing the “ODO TRIP”
switch.
When the trip meter is dis-
played, pressing and holding the
switch will reset the trip meter.
The brightness of the instrument
panel lights can be adjusted by
turning the dial.
WARNING
■ The information display at
low temperatures
Allow the interior of the vehicle to
warm up before using the liquid
crystal information display. At
extremely low temperatures, the
display monitor may respond
slowly, and display changes may
be delayed.
For example, there is a lag
between the driver’s shifting and
the new shift range appearing on
the display. This lag could cause
the driver to downshift again,
causing rapid and excessive
engine braking and possibly an
accident resulting in death or
injury.
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the
engine and its components
The engine may be overheating if
“Engine Coolant Temp High Stop
in a Safe Place See Owner’s
Manual” is shown on the multi-
information display. In this case,
immediately stop the vehicle in a
safe place, and check the engine
after it has cooled completely.
(P.544)
Using the “ODO TRIP”
switch
Instrument panel light
control
170
3-1. Instrument cluster
1 Brighter
2 Darker
■ Instrument panel brightness
adjustment
The instrument panel brightness
levels when the tail lights are on and
off can be adjusted individually.
However, when the surroundings
are bright (daytime, etc.), turning on
the tail lights will not change the
instrument panel brightness.
The clock can be adjusted on
the audio system screen.
Refer to “NAVIGATION AND
MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM
OWNER’S MANUAL”.
Following information is dis-
played on the multi-information
display.
Driving support system infor-
mation
Displays recognized signs while the
RSA system (if equipped) is operat-
ing. (P.333)
Displays an image when the follow-
ing systems are operating and a
menu icon other than is
selected:
• LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)
(P.323)
• Dynamic radar cruise control with
full-speed range (P.336)
Adjusting the clock
Multi-information dis-
play
The multi-information dis-
play is used to display fuel
efficiency related informa-
tion and various types of
driving-related information.
The multi-information dis-
play can also be used to
change the display settings
and other settings.
Display contents
A
171
3-1. Instrument cluster
3
Vehicle status information and indicators
Information display area
A variety of information can be dis-
played by selecting a menu icon.
Additionally, warning or sugges-
tion/advice pop-up displays will be
displayed in some situations.
Menu icons (P.171)
■ The multi-information display is
displayed when
The power switch is in ON.
■ When changing driving mode
Background color of the multi-infor-
mation display is changed following
the selected driving mode or when
Trail Mode is turned on. (P.377,
379)
■ Liquid crystal display
Small spots or light spots may
appear on the display. This phe-
nomenon is characteristic of liquid
crystal displays, and there is no
problem continuing to use the dis-
play.
The multi-information display is
operated using the meter control
switches.
Scroll the screen
*
/switch the
display
*
/move the cursor
Press: Enter/Set
Press and hold: Reset/Dis-
play customizable items
Return to the previous screen
Call sending/receiving and
history display (if equipped)
Linked with the hands-free
system, sending or receiving
call is displayed. For details
regarding the hands-free sys-
tem, refer to “NAVIGATION
AND MULTIMEDIA SYS-
TEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.
*
: On screens where the screen can
be scrolled and the display can
be switched, a scroll bar or a
round icon that shows the num-
ber of registered screens is dis-
played.
Information related to each icon
can be displayed by selecting
the icon with the meter control
switches.
Some of the information may be
displayed automatically depending
on the situation.
Changing the display
B
C
A
B
WARNING
■ Caution for use while driving
For safety, avoid operating the
meter control switch while driving
as much as possible, and do not
look continuously at the multi-
information display while driving.
Stop the vehicle and operate the
meter control switch. Failure to do
so may cause a steering wheel
operation error, resulting in an
unexpected accident.
Menu icons
C
D
172
3-1. Instrument cluster
Select to display fuel consump-
tion data in various forms.
■ Power Consumption/Fuel
Economy
The display contents are differ-
ent in EV mode or AUTO EV/HV
mode, and HV mode.
EV mode or AUTO EV/HV
mode
EV driving range
Displays the EV driving range with
charge remaining in the hybrid bat-
tery (traction battery). (P.95)
Distance to empty
Displays the driving range with
remaining fuel. (P.175)
Average power consumption
Displays the average power con-
sumption since the function was
reset or the average power con-
sumption after starting.
*1, 2, 3
The average power consumption
selected by “Power Consumption”
on the screen is displayed.
(P.177)
Current power consumption
Displays the instantaneous current
power consumption.
*1
:Use the displayed power con-
sumption as a reference only.
*2
:Average power consumption
since the function was reset can
be reset by pressing and holding
.
*3
:Average power consumption
after starting is reset each time
the hybrid system stops.
HV mode
Icon Display
Driving information dis-
play (P.172)
Driving support system
information display
(P.175)
Audio system-linked dis-
play (if equipped)
(P.175)
Vehicle information dis-
play (P.176)
Settings display
(P.177)
Warning message dis-
play (P.181)
Driving information dis-
play
A
B
C
D
173
3-1. Instrument cluster
3
Vehicle status information and indicators
EV driving range
Displays the EV driving range with
charge remaining in the hybrid bat-
tery (traction battery). (P.82)
Distance to empty
Displays the driving range with
remaining fuel. (P.175)
Average fuel economy
Displays the average fuel economy
since the function was reset or the
average fuel economy after starting
or refueling.
*1, 2, 3
The average fuel economy selected
by “Fuel Economy” on the
screen is displayed. (P.177)
Current fuel economy
Displays the instantaneous current
fuel economy.
*1
:Use the displayed fuel consump-
tion as a reference only.
*2
:Average fuel economy since the
function was reset can be reset
by pressing and holding .
*3
:Average fuel economy after
starting is reset each time the
hybrid system stops.
■ ECO Accelerator Guid-
ance/“Eco Score”
Displays a reference operation
range for using the accelerator
pedal according to driving condi-
tions, and a score result that
evaluates the current driving
status.
ECO Accelerator Guidance
“Eco Score”
ECO Accelerator Guidance
ECO area
Shows that the vehicle is being
driven in an Eco-friendly manner.
Power area
Shows that an Eco-friendly driving
range is being exceeded (during full
power driving etc.).
Current acceleration
Reference operation range
A zone is displayed in blue under
the Eco area which can be used as
a reference operation range for
using the accelerator pedal accord-
ing to driving conditions such as
starting off and cruising.
The ECO Accelerator Guidance
display changes according to the
driving status, such as when start-
A
B
C
D
A
B
A
B
C
D
174
3-1. Instrument cluster
ing off or cruising.
It is easier to drive in an Eco-
friendly manner by driving accord-
ing to the display showing the
accelerator pedal operations and
staying within the reference opera-
tion range.
“Eco Score”
The driving status for the follow-
ing 3 situations are evaluated in
5 levels: Smooth start-off accel-
eration (“Start”), driving without
sudden acceleration (“Cruise”)
and smooth stopping (“Stop”).
Each time the vehicle is
stopped, a score result is dis-
played out of a perfect score of
100 points.
Score result
“Start”
“Cruise”
“Stop”
How to read the bar display:
After starting off, “Eco Score” dis-
play does not start until the vehicle
speed exceeds approximately 12
mph (20 km/h).
The “Eco Score” is reset each time
the vehicle starts off to start a new
evaluation.
When the hybrid system stops, the
current total score result is dis-
played.
*
*
: The score result is displayed only
when “Eco Score” is selected for
“Closing Display”. (P.177)
■ EV Ratio/EV Driving Ratio
Elapsed time after starting
Displays the elapsed time since
hybrid system was started.
*
EV driving ratio after starting
Displays the percentage of EV driv-
ing since the hybrid system was
started.
*
*
: It is reset each time the hybrid
system stops.
Score Bar display
Unrated
A
B
C
D
Low
High
Score Bar display
A
B
175
3-1. Instrument cluster
3
Vehicle status information and indicators
■ Electricity consumption
When the unit is set to “MPH”:
Electricity consumption is the con-
sumption rate of the electricity when
EV driving is performed and equiva-
lent to the fuel consumption for the
gasoline vehicles. For this vehicle,
driven distance per kWh of electric-
ity consumed (“miles/kWh”) is dis-
played as electricity consumption on
each screen.
When the unit is set to “km/h”:
Electricity consumption is the con-
sumption rate of the electricity when
EV driving is performed and equiva-
lent to the fuel consumption for the
gasoline vehicles. For this vehicle,
electricity consumed per 100 km
(“kWh/100 km”) is displayed as
electricity consumption on each
screen.
■ EV driving range
● When the air conditioning system
is operating, is displayed next
to the EV driving range and the
EV driving range with the air con-
ditioning system on is displayed.
● The EV driving range may shorten
even when not driving due to
power consumption by the sys-
tem.
● For details, refer to “EV driving
range” (P.95)
■ Distance to empty
● This distance is computed based
on your average fuel consump-
tion. As a result, the actual dis-
tance that can be driven may
differ from that displayed.
● When only a small amount of fuel
is added to the tank, the display
may not be updated. When refuel-
ing, turn the power switch off. If
the vehicle is refueled without
turning the power switch off, the
display may not be updated.
● When “Refuel” is displayed, the
remaining fuel amount is low and
the distance that can be driven
with the remaining fuel cannot be
calculated.
Refuel immediately.
■ ECO Accelerator Guid-
ance/“Eco Score” will not oper-
ate when
The ECO Accelerator Guid-
ance/“Eco Score” will not operate in
the following situations:
● The Hybrid System Indicator is not
operating.
● The vehicle is being driven using
the dynamic radar cruise control
with full-speed range.
■ Driving support system
information display
Select to display the operational
status of the following systems:
LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)
(P.323)
Dynamic radar cruise control
with full-speed range
(P.336)
■ Navigation system-linked
display (if equipped)
Select to display the following
navigation system-linked infor-
mation.
Route guidance
Compass display
Select to enable selection of an
Driving support system
information display
Audio system-linked dis-
play (if equipped)
176
3-1. Instrument cluster
audio source or track on the dis-
play.
■ Drive information
2 items that are selected using
the “Drive Info Items” setting
(average speed, distance and
total time) can be displayed ver-
tically.
The displayed information
changes according to the “Drive
Info Type” setting (since the sys-
tem was started or between
resets). (P.177)
Use the displayed information as a
reference only.
Following items will be displayed.
“Trip”
• “Average Speed”: Displays the
average vehicle speed since
hybrid system start
*
• “Distance”: Displays the distance
driven since hybrid system start
*
• “Total Time”: Displays the
elapsed time since hybrid system
start
*
*
: These items are reset each time
the hybrid system stops.
“Total”
• “Average Speed”: Displays the
average vehicle speed since the
display was reset
*
• “Distance”: Displays the distance
driven since the display was
reset
*
• “Total Time”: Displays the
elapsed time since the display
was reset
*
*
: To reset, display the desired item
and press and hold .
■ Energy monitor
P.187
■ Tire pressure
P.471
■ AWD system display
Torque distribution display
Displays the drive status of each
wheel in 6 steps from 0 to 5.
G-force display
*
Displays the size and direction of
the G-force applied to the vehicle
via changes to the position of the
ball on the display.
Maximum G-force course
*
This item is linked with the G-force
display and the course of the past
movement of the ball is displayed.
Press and hold to reset the
record.
Wheel spin display
When a tire is spinning, its icon on
the display changes its color and
blinks.
Vehicle information dis-
play
A
B
C
D
177
3-1. Instrument cluster
3
Vehicle status information and indicators
*
: This item is displayed only when
driving mode is set to sport mode.
Vehicle settings and the content
displayed on the screen can be
changed by using the meter
control switches.
■ Setting procedure
1 Operate or of the
meter control switches and
select .
2 Operate or of the
meter control switches and
select the desired item.
• If the function is turned on and
off or the volume, etc. is
changed on the setting
screen, the setting is changed
each time is pressed.
• For functions that allow oper-
ation contents, display con-
tents, etc., of function to be
selected, the setting screen is
displayed by pressing and
holding . When the setting
screen is displayed, select the
setting or desired value (time,
etc.) with .
3 After changing the settings,
press of the meter control
switches.
■ LTA (Lane Tracing
Assist) (P.323)
Select to set up the following
items.
“Lane Center”
Select to enable/disable the lane
centering function.
“Steering Assist”
Select to enable/disable steering
wheel assistance.
“Alert”
Select to change each notification
method of the lane departure alert.
“Sensitivity”
Select to set the lane departure
alert sensitivity.
“Sway Warning”
Select to enable/disable the vehicle
sway warning.
“Sway Sensitivity”
Select to set the vehicle sway warn-
ing sensitivity.
■ PCS (Pre-Collision Sys-
tem) (P.315)
Select to set up the following
items.
PCS on/off
Select to enable/disable the pre-
collision system.
“Sensitivity”
Select to change the pre-collision
warning timing.
■ BSM (Blind Spot Moni-
tor) (P.347)
Select to set up the following
items.
BSM (Blind Spot Monitor)
on/off
Select to enable/disable the BSM
Settings display
178
3-1. Instrument cluster
system.
“Brightness”
Select to switch the brightness of
the outside rear view mirror indica-
tors. (P.347)
“Sensitivity”
Select to change the alert timing for
an approaching vehicle.
■ (Intuitive parking
assist) (if equipped)
(P.356)
Select to set up the following
items.
Intuitive parking assist on/off
Select to enable/disable the Intui-
tive parking assist.
“Volume”
Select to set the volume of the
buzzer which sounds when the
Intuitive parking assist is operated.
■ RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic
Alert) (P.347)
RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic
Alert) on/off
Select to enable/disable the RCTA
system.
“Volume”
Select to change the RCTA buzzer
volume.
■ PKSB (Parking Sup-
port Brake System) (if
equipped) (P.363)
Select to enable/disable the
Parking Support Brake function.
■ “HUD Main” (if equipped)
(P.182)
HUD on/off
Select to enable/disable the head-
up display.
“HUD Brightness/Position”
Select to adjust the brightness or
vertical position of the head-up dis-
play.
“HUD Driving Support”
Select to change the items dis-
played on the head-up display.
“HUD Rotation”
Select to adjust the angle of the
head-up display.
■ RSA (Road Sign
Assist) (if equipped)
(P.333)
Select to set up the following
items.
Road Sign Assist on/off
Select to enable/disable the RSA
system.
“Notification Method”
Select to change each notification
method used to notify the driver
when the system recognizes
excess speed, no overtaking and
no-entry sign.
“Notification Level”
Select to change each notification
level used to notify the driver when
the system recognizes a speed limit
sign.
■ Vehicle Settings
“Charging Settings”
179
3-1. Instrument cluster
3
Vehicle status information and indicators
Select to set up the following items.
• “Charging Schedule”
Select to register or change the
charging schedule. (P.130)
• “Charging Current”
Select to change the charging cur-
rent. (P.112)
• “Connector Lock”
Select to change the charging con-
nector lock settings. (P.109)
• “Battery Heater”
Select to enable/disable the bat-
tery heater. (P.115)
• “Battery Cooler”
Select to enable/disable the bat-
tery cooler. (P.116)
PBD (Power Back Door)
(if equipped) (P.207)
Select to set up the following items.
• System settings
Select to enable/disable the power
back door system.
• “Hands Free”
*
Select to enable/disable the Hands
Free Power Back Door.
• “Opening Adjustment”
Select the open position when
power back door is fully open.
•“Volume”
Select to set the volume of the
buzzer which sounds when the
power back door system operates.
*
: Vehicles with Hands Free Power
Back Door
“TPWS” (Tire Pressure Warn-
ing System) (P.471)
• “Setting Pressure”
Select to initialize the tire pressure
warning system.
• “Identify Wheel”
Select to register the ID codes of
the tire pressure sensors to the tire
pressure warning system.
• “Setting Unit”
Select to change the units of mea-
sure displayed.
“Scheduled Maintenance”
(P.451)
Select to reset the scheduled main-
tenance information (message indi-
cating maintenance is required and
distance until the next mainte-
nance) after all maintenance is per-
formed.
“Rear Seat Reminder”
(P.200)
Select to enable/disable the rear
seat reminder.
■ Settings
“Language”
Select to change the language on
the multi-information display.
“Units”
Select to change the units of mea-
sure displayed.
“Meter Type”
Select to change the speedometer
display.
(EV indicator) (P.82)
Select to enable/disable the EV
indicator.
(Driving information dis-
play settings)
180
3-1. Instrument cluster
Select to set up the following items.
• “Hybrid System”
Select to enable/disable the ECO
Accelerator Guidance (P.173).
• “Fuel Economy”
Select to change the display on
Fuel Economy (P.172).
• “Power Consumption”
Select to change the display on
Power Consumption (P.172).
(Audio settings) (if
equipped)
Select to enable/disable
screen.
(Vehicle information dis-
play settings)
• “Display Contents”
Select to set up the following items.
“Energy monitor”:
Select to enable/disable the Energy
monitor (P.187)
“AWD”:
Select to enable/disable the AWD
system display (P.176).
• “Drive Info Type”
Select to change the drive informa-
tion type display between trip and
total. (P.176).
• “Drive Info Items”
Select to set the items on the upper
and lower side of the drive informa-
tion screen from three items, aver-
age speed, distance and total time.
“Closing Display”
Select to set the items displayed
when the power switch is turned off.
“Pop-Up Display” (if
equipped)
Select to enable/disable the follow-
ing pop-up displays, which may
appear in some situations.
• Intersection guidance display of
the navigation system-linked sys-
tem (if equipped)
• Incoming call display of the
hands-free phone system (if
equipped)
• Audio operation (if equipped)
• Volume operation (if equipped)
• Voice control (if equipped)
“Calender”
Select to set up the calender.
This can only be set if GPS calibra-
tion of clock is turned off in the mul-
timedia system settings.
“MID OFF”
A blank screen is displayed.
“Default Settings”
Select to reset the meter display
settings.
■ Suspension of the settings dis-
play
● In the following situations, opera-
tion of the settings display will be
temporarily suspended.
• When a warning message
appears on the multi-information
display
• When the vehicle begins to move
● Settings for functions not
equipped to the vehicle are not
displayed.
● When a function is turned off, the
related settings for that function
are not selectable.
181
3-1. Instrument cluster
3
Vehicle status information and indicators
Select to display warning mes-
sages and measures to be
taken if a malfunction is
detected. (P.523)
Displays suggestions to the
driver in the following situations.
To select a response to a dis-
played suggestion, use the
meter control switches.
■ Suggestion to enable the
power back door (if
equipped)
If the power back door system is
disabled on the screen and
the power back door switch on
the instrument panel is oper-
ated, a suggestion message will
be displayed asking if you wish
to enable the power back door
system. To enable the power
back door system, select “Yes”.
After enabling the power back door
system, press the power back door
switch again to open or close the
power back door.
■ Suggestion to turn on the
headlights
If the headlight switch is in other
than or , and the vehicle
speed is 3 mph (5 km/h) or
higher for a certain amount of
time when the surroundings are
dark, a suggestion message will
be displayed.
■ Suggestion to turn off the
headlights
If the headlights are left on for a
certain amount of time after the
power switch has been turned
off, a suggestion message will
be displayed.
When the headlight switch is in
the AUTO position: The mes-
sage asking if you wish to turn
the headlights off is displayed.
To turn the headlights off, select
“Yes”.
If the driver’s door is opened after
the power switch is turned off, this
suggestion message will not be dis-
played.
■ Customization
The suggestion function can be
turned on/off. (Customizable fea-
WARNING
■ Cautions during setting up
the display
As the hybrid system needs to be
operating during setting up the
display, ensure that the vehicle is
parked in a place with adequate
ventilation. In a closed area such
as a garage, exhaust gases
including harmful carbon monox-
ide (CO) may collect and enter
the vehicle. This may lead to
death or a serious health hazard.
NOTICE
■ During setting up the display
To prevent 12-volt battery dis-
charge, ensure that the hybrid
system is operating while setting
up the display features.
Warning message display
Suggestion function
182
3-1. Instrument cluster
tures: P.570)
*
: If equipped
Illustrations used in this text are
intended as examples, and may dif-
fer from the image that is actually
displayed by the head-up display.
Driving support system infor-
mation/navigation system-
linked display area (if
equipped) (P.185)
Shift position display
area/RSA (Road Sign Assist)
display area (if equipped)
(P.285, 333)
Vehicle speed display
Hybrid System Indica-
Head-up display
*
The head-up display proj-
ects a variety of driving-
related information and the
operating state of the driv-
ing support systems on the
windshield.
System components
A
B
C
D
183
3-1. Instrument cluster
3
Vehicle status information and indicators
tor/tachometer (P.186)
■ Head-up display will operate
when
The power switch is in ON.
■ When using the head-up dis-
play
The head-up display may seem
dark or hard to see when viewed
through sunglasses, especially
polarized sunglasses. Adjust the
brightness of the head-up display or
remove your sunglasses.
■ Street name display (vehicles
with navigation system)
Only street names which are
included in the map data will be dis-
played.
WARNING
■ When using the head-up dis-
play
● Check that the position and
brightness of the head-up dis-
play image does not interfere
with safe driving. Incorrect
adjustment of the image’s posi-
tion or brightness may obstruct
the driver’s view and lead to an
accident, resulting in death or
serious injury.
● Do not continuously look at the
head-up display while driving as
you may fail to see pedestrians,
objects on the road, etc. ahead
of the vehicle.
NOTICE
■ Head-up display projector
● Do not place any drinks near
the head-up display projector. If
the projector gets wet, electrical
malfunctions may result.
● Do not place anything on or put
stickers onto the head-up dis-
play projector.
Doing so could interrupt head-
up display indications.
● Do not touch the inside of the
head-up display projector or
thrust sharp edges or the like
into the projector.
Doing so could cause mechani-
cal malfunctions.
184
3-1. Instrument cluster
Vehicle settings and the content
displayed on the head-up dis-
play can be changed by using
the meter control switches.
1 Operate or of the
meter control switches and
select on the multi-infor-
mation display.
2 Operate or of the
meter control switches and
select “HUD Main” to set up
the following items.
■ Enabling/disabling the
head-up display
Press to enable/disable the
head-up display.
■ Changing the head-up dis-
play settings
Press and hold to display the
setting screen and change the
following settings:
Brightness and vertical posi-
tion of the head-up display
Select to adjust the brightness or
vertical position of the head-up dis-
play.
Display content
Select to change the display
between the following:
• No content
• Hybrid System Indicator
• Tachometer
Select to enable/disable the follow-
ing items:
• Route guidance to destination (if
equipped)
• Driving support system informa-
tion display
• Compass (if equipped)
• Audio system operation status (if
equipped)
Display angle
Select to adjust the angle of the
head-up display.
■ Enabling/disabling of the head-
up display
If the head-up display is disabled, it
will remain disabled when the power
switch is turned off then back to ON.
■ Display brightness
The brightness of the head-up dis-
play can be adjusted on screen
of the multi-information display.
Also, it is automatically adjusted
according to the ambient brightness.
Using the head-up display
WARNING
■ Caution for changing settings
of the head-up display
If the hybrid system is operating
when changing the display set-
tings, ensure that the vehicle is
parked in a place with adequate
ventilation. In a closed area such
as a garage, exhaust gases
including harmful carbon monox-
ide (CO) may collect and enter
the vehicle. This may lead to
death or a serious health hazard.
185
3-1. Instrument cluster
3
Vehicle status information and indicators
■ Driving support system
information display
Displays the operational status
of the following systems:
LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)
(P.323)
Dynamic radar cruise control
with full-speed range
(P.336)
Displayed content is the same as
that displayed on the multi-informa-
tion display. For details, refer to the
explanations of each system.
■ Navigation system-linked
display area (if equipped)
Displays the following items
which are linked to the naviga-
tion system:
Street name
Route guidance to destination
Compass
Pop-up displays for the following
systems will be displayed when
necessary:
■ Driving support systems
Displays a warning/sugges-
tion/advice message or the
operating state of a relevant
system.
PCS (Pre-Collision System)
(P.315)
Brake Override System
(P.259)
Drive-Start Control (P.259)
Parking Support Brake func-
tion (static objects) (if
equipped) (P.368)
Displayed content is the same as
that displayed on the multi-informa-
tion display. For details, refer to the
explanations of each system.
■ / icons
Displays the following multi-
information display linked icons:
: Master warning icon
Displayed when a warning mes-
sage is displayed on the multi-infor-
mation display.
: Information icon
Displayed when a sugges-
tion/advice pop-up display is dis-
played on the multi-information
display.
■ Warning message
Some warning messages are
displayed when necessary,
according to certain conditions.
Displayed content is the same as
NOTICE
■ When changing the settings
of the head-up display
To prevent 12-volt battery dis-
charge, ensure that the hybrid
system is operating while chang-
ing the settings of the head-up
display.
Driving support system
information/navigation
system-linked display
area (if equipped)
Pop-up display
186
3-1. Instrument cluster
that displayed on the multi-informa-
tion display. For details, refer to the
explanations of each system.
■ Audio system operation
status (if equipped)
Displayed when an audio
remote control switch on the
steering wheel is operated.
■ Hands-free system status
(if equipped)
Displayed when the hands-free
system is operated.
■ Outside temperature dis-
play
Displayed when the power
switch is turned to ON or when
the low outside temperature
indicator is flashing.
■ When a pop-up display is dis-
played
When a pop-up display is displayed,
a current display may no longer be
displayed. In this case, the display
will return after the pop-up display
disappears.
■ Outside temperature display
● When the ambient temperature is
approximately 3°C (37°F) or
lower, will flash for approxi-
mately 10 seconds and the out-
side temperature display will turn
off.
● In the following situations, the cor-
rect outside temperature may not
be displayed, or the display may
take longer than normal to
change:
• When stopped (including when
using “My Room Mode”), or driv-
ing at low speeds (less than 20
km/h [12 mph])
• When the outside temperature
has changed suddenly (at the
entrance/exit of a garage, tunnel,
etc.)
● When “--” or “E” is displayed, the
system may be malfunctioning.
Take your vehicle to your Toyota
dealer.
Display content selected by
“HUD Driving Support” on the
screen is displayed.
(P.184)
■ Hybrid System Indicator
Charge area
Hybrid Eco area
Eco area
Power area
Displayed content is the same as
that displayed on the meter (Hybrid
System Indicator).
For details, refer to P.167.
■ Tachometer
Displays the engine speed in
revolutions per minute.
Hybrid System Indica-
tor/Tachometer
A
B
C
D
187
3-1. Instrument cluster
3
Vehicle status information and indicators
Audio system screen
Multi-information display
Meter control switches
(P.171)
The energy monitor can be used
to check the vehicle drive status,
hybrid system operation status
and energy regeneration status.
■ Display
Multi-information display
Press or of the meter
control switches on the steering
wheel and select , and
then press or to select
the energy monitor display.
Audio or Audio Plus (vehicles
without Data Communication
Module)
1 Press the “MENU” button.
2 Select “Info” on the “Menu”
screen.
If a screen other than “Energy mon-
itor” is displayed, select “Energy”.
Audio or Audio Plus (vehicles
with Data Communication
Module)/Premium Audio
1 Press the “MENU” button.
2 Select “Info” on the “Menu”
screen.
3 Select “ECO” on the “Infor-
mation” screen.
If a screen other than “Energy mon-
itor” is displayed, select “Energy”.
■ Reading the display
The arrows will appear in accor-
dance with the energy flow.
When there is no energy flow,
arrows will not be displayed.
The color of the arrows will change
as follows
Green: When the hybrid battery
(traction battery) is regenerated or
charged.
Yellow: When the hybrid battery
(traction battery) is in use.
Red: When the gasoline engine is
in use.
Energy monitor/con-
sumption screen
You can view the status of
your vehicle on the multi-
information display and the
audio system screen
*
.
*
: For navigation system or multi-
media system
System components
Energy monitor
A
B
C
188
3-1. Instrument cluster
Multi-information display
The image shows all the arrows as
an example. The actual display will
vary depending on conditions.
Gasoline engine
Hybrid battery (traction bat-
tery)
Front tire
Rear tire
Audio system screen (except
when charging)
The image shows all the arrows as
an example. The actual display will
vary depending on conditions.
Gasoline engine
Front electric motor (traction
motor)
Hybrid battery (traction bat-
tery)
Rear electric motor (traction
motor)
Front tire
Rear tire
Audio system screen (when
charging)
The image shows all the arrows as
an example. The actual display will
vary depending on conditions.
Gasoline engine
Front electric motor (traction
motor)
Air conditioning system oper-
ation
*1
Charging connector
Power outlet (120 VAC) (if
equipped)
*2
Hybrid battery (traction bat-
tery)
*1
:The icon is displayed when the
air conditioning system is operat-
ing.
*2
:The icon is displayed when the
power outlet is in use.
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
E
F
A
B
C
D
E
F
189
3-1. Instrument cluster
3
Vehicle status information and indicators
Audio system screen (“Home”
screen)
The image shows all the arrows as
an example. The actual display will
vary depending on conditions.
Gasoline engine
Hybrid battery (traction bat-
tery)
Tire
■ Color of the hybrid battery
(traction battery) on the display
It will be green when the hybrid bat-
tery (traction battery) is being
charged, and yellow when the
hybrid battery (traction battery) is
being used.
■ Remaining charge amount
warning of hybrid battery (trac-
tion battery)
● The buzzer sounds intermittently
when the hybrid battery (traction
battery) remains without charging
while the shift lever is in N, or the
remaining charge amount drops
below a certain level. If the
remaining charge amount drops
further, the buzzer sounds contin-
uously.
● When a warning message is
shown on the multi-information
display and the buzzer sounds,
follow the instructions displayed
on the screen to perform trouble-
shooting.
■ Color of the gasoline engine on
the audio system screen
It will be blue when the engine is
warming up, and it will turn to red
when the warming up is finished.
■ Display
Audio or Audio Plus (vehicles
without Data Communication
Module)
1 Press the “MENU” button.
2 Select “Info” on the “Menu”
screen.
3 Select “Trip information” or
“History”.
Audio or Audio Plus (vehicles
with Data Communication
Module)/Premium Audio
1 Press the “MENU” button.
2 Select “Info” on the “Menu”
screen.
3 Select “ECO” on the “Infor-
mation” screen.
4 Select “Trip information” or
“History”.
■ Trip information
If a screen other than “Trip infor-
mation” is displayed, select “Trip
information”.
The image is an example only, and
may vary slightly from actual condi-
tions.
A
B
C
Consumption
190
3-1. Instrument cluster
Fuel consumption in the past
15 minutes
Regenerated energy in the
past 15 minutes
One symbol indicates 50 Wh. Up to
5 symbols are shown.
Current fuel consumption
Resetting the consumption
data
Average vehicle speed since
the hybrid system was
started
Elapsed time since the hybrid
system was started
Cruising range (P.191)
Average fuel consumption for the
past 15 minutes is divided by color
into past averages and averages
attained since the power switch
was last turned to ON. Use the dis-
played average fuel consumption
as a reference.
■ History
If a screen other than “History”
is displayed, select “History”.
The image is an example only, and
may vary slightly from actual condi-
tions.
Best recorded fuel consump-
tion
Latest fuel consumption
Previous fuel consumption
record
• Audio and Audio Plus:
Displays the daily average fuel con-
sumption. (Instead of the date, “Trip
1” through “Trip 5” will be dis-
played.)
• Premium Audio:
Displays the daily average fuel con-
sumption.
Updating the latest fuel con-
sumption data
Resetting the history data
The average fuel consumption his-
tory is divided by color into past
averages and the average fuel con-
sumption since the last time
updated. Use the displayed aver-
age fuel consumption as a refer-
ence.
■ Updating the history data
Update the latest fuel consumption
by selecting “Update” to measure
the current fuel consumption again.
■ Resetting the data
The fuel consumption data can be
deleted by selecting “Clear”.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
A
B
C
D
E
191
3-1. Instrument cluster
3
Vehicle status information and indicators
■ Cruising range
Displays the estimated maximum
distance that can be driven with the
quantity of fuel remaining.
This distance is computed based on
your average fuel consumption. As
a result, the actual distance that can
be driven may differ from that dis-
played.
192
3-1. Instrument cluster
193
4
4
Before driving
Before driving
4-1. Key information
Keys ............................ 194
4-2. Opening, closing and
locking the doors
Side doors................... 198
Back door.................... 203
Smart key system ....... 217
4-3. Adjusting the seats
Front seats .................. 224
Rear seats................... 225
Driving position memory
.................................. 227
Head restraints............ 230
4-4. Adjusting the steering
wheel and mirrors
Steering wheel ............ 232
Inside rear view mirror 233
Digital Rear-view Mirror234
Outside rear view mirrors
.................................. 244
4-5. Opening, closing the win-
dows and moon roof
Power windows ........... 246
Moon roof.................... 249
Panoramic moon roof.. 252
194
4-1. Key information
4-1.Key information
The following keys are provided
with the vehicle.
Electronic keys
• Operating the smart key system
(P.217)
• Operating the wireless remote
control function (P.196)
Mechanical keys
Key number plate
■ When riding in an aircraft
When bringing an electronic key
onto an aircraft, make sure you do
not press any buttons on the elec-
tronic key while inside the aircraft
cabin. If you are carrying an elec-
tronic key in your bag etc., ensure
that the buttons are not likely to be
pressed accidentally. Pressing a
button may cause the electronic key
to emit radio waves that could inter-
fere with the operation of the air-
craft.
■ Electronic key battery depletion
● The standard battery life is 1 to 2
years.
● If the battery becomes low, an
alarm will sound in the cabin and a
message will be displayed on the
multi-information display when the
hybrid system stops.
● To reduce key battery depletion
when the electronic key is to not
be used for long periods of time,
set the electronic key to the bat-
tery-saving mode. (P.218)
● As the electronic key always
receives radio waves, the battery
will become depleted even if the
electronic key is not used. The fol-
lowing symptoms indicate that the
electronic key battery may be
depleted. Replace the battery
when necessary.
• The smart key system or the wire-
less remote control does not oper-
ate.
• The detection area becomes
smaller.
• The LED indicator on the key sur-
face does not turn on.
You can replace the battery by your-
self (P.493). However, as there is
a danger that the electronic key may
be damaged, it is recommended
that replacement is carried out by
your Toyota dealer.
● To avoid serious deterioration, do
not leave the electronic key within
3 ft. (1 m) of the following electri-
cal appliances that produce a
magnetic field:
•TVs
• Personal computers
• Cellular phones, cordless phones
and battery chargers
• Table lamps
• Induction cookers
● If the electronic key is near the
vehicle for longer than necessary,
even if the smart key system is not
operated, the key battery may
become depleted faster than nor-
mal.
■ If a message regarding the state
of the electronic key or power
switch mode, etc. is shown
To prevent trapping the electronic
key inside the vehicle, leaving the
vehicle carrying the electronic key
Keys
Key types
A
B
C
195
4-1. Key information
4
Before driving
on your person without turning the
power switch to OFF or other pas-
sengers from unintentionally taking
the key out of the vehicle, etc., a
message that prompts the user to
confirm the state of the electronic
key or power switch mode may be
shown on the multi-information dis-
play. In those cases, follow the
instructions on the display immedi-
ately.
■ If “Key Battery Low Replace
Key Battery” is displayed on
the multi-information display
The electronic key has a low bat-
tery. Replace the electronic key bat-
tery. (P.493)
■ Replacing the battery
P.493
■ Confirmation of the registered
key number
The number of keys already regis-
tered to the vehicle can be con-
firmed. Ask your Toyota dealer for
details.
■ If “A New Key has been Regis-
tered Contact Your Dealer for
Details” is displayed on the
multi-information display
This message will be displayed
each time the driver’s door is
opened when the doors are
unlocked from the outside for
approximately 10 days after a new
electronic key has been registered.
If this message is displayed but you
have not had a new electronic key
registered, ask your Toyota dealer
to check if an unknown electronic
key (other than those in your pos-
session) has been registered.
NOTICE
■ To prevent key damage
● Do not drop the keys, subject
them to strong shocks or bend
them.
● Do not expose the keys to high
temperatures for long periods of
time.
● Do not get the keys wet or wash
them in an ultrasonic washer,
etc.
● Do not attach metallic or mag-
netic materials to the keys or
place the keys close to such
materials.
● Do not disassemble the keys.
● Do not attach a sticker or any-
thing else to the surface of the
electronic key.
● Do not place the keys near
objects that produce magnetic
fields, such as TVs, audio sys-
tems and induction cookers.
● Do not place the keys near
medical electrical equipment
such as low-frequency therapy
equipment or microwave ther-
apy equipment, and do not
receive medical attention with
the keys on your person.
■ Carrying the electronic key
on your person
Carry the electronic key 3.9 in.
(10 cm) or more away from elec-
tric appliances that are turned on.
Radio waves emitted from electric
appliances within 3.9 in. (10 cm)
of the electronic key may interfere
with the key, causing the key to
not function properly.
■ In case of a smart key system
malfunction or other key-
related problems
P.537
■ When an electronic key is lost
P.536
196
4-1. Key information
The electronic keys are
equipped with the following
wireless remote control:
Locks all the doors (P.198)
Unlocks all the doors
(P.198)
Opens the side windows
*1
and the moon roof
*1, 2
or
panoramic moon roof
*1, 2
(P.198)
Opens and closes the power
back door
*2
(P.207)
Operates Remote Air Condi-
tioning System (P.405)
Sounds the alarm (P.196)
*1
:These settings must be custom-
ized at your Toyota dealer.
*2
:If equipped
■ Theft deterrent panic mode
When is pressed for longer
than about 1 second, an alarm will
sound intermittently and the vehicle
lights will flash to deter any person
from trying to break into or damage
your vehicle.
To stop the alarm, press any button
on the electronic key.
■ Conditions affecting operation
P.218
To take out the mechanical key,
slide the release lever and
take the key out.
The mechanical key can only be
inserted in one direction, as the key
only has grooves on one side. If the
key cannot be inserted in a lock cyl-
inder, turn it over and re-attempt to
insert it.
After using the mechanical key,
store it in the electronic key. Carry
the mechanical key together with
the electronic key. If the electronic
key battery is depleted or the entry
function does not operate properly,
you will need the mechanical key.
(P.537)
Wireless remote control
A
B
C
D
E
F
Using the mechanical key
A
198
4-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
4-2.Opening, closing and locking the do ors
■ Using the entry function
Carry the electronic key to
enable this function.
1 Grip the driver’s door handle
to unlock the door. Holding
the driver’s door handle for
approximately 2 seconds
unlocks all the doors.
Grip the front passenger’s
door handle or rear door han-
dle (some models) to unlock
all the doors
*
.
Make sure to touch the sensor on
the back of the handle.
The doors cannot be unlocked for 3
seconds after the doors are locked.
*
: The door unlock settings can be
changed. (P.198)
2 Touch the lock sensor (the
indentation on the upper part
of the door handle) to lock
the doors.
Check that the door is securely
locked.
■ Using the wireless remote
control
1 Locks all the doors
Check that the door is securely
locked.
2 Unlocks all the doors
Pressing the button unlocks the
driver’s door. Pressing the button
again within 5 seconds unlocks the
other doors.
Press and hold to open the side
windows and moon roof (if
equipped) or panoramic moon roof
(if equipped).
*
*
: This setting must be customized
at your Toyota dealer.
■ Switching the door unlock func-
tion
It is possible to set which doors the
entry function unlocks using the
wireless remote control. Perform the
switching operation in the vehicle or
Side doors
The vehicle can be locked
and unlocked using the
entry function, wireless
remote control, door lock
switches or inside lock but-
tons.
Charging port lid and charging
connector will also be locked
and unlocked. (P.107)
Unlocking and locking the
doors from the outside
199
4-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
4
Before driving
within approximately 3.2 ft. (1 m) of
the vehicle.
1 Turn the power switch to OFF.
2 When the indicator light on the
key surface is not on, press and
hold , or for
approximately 5 seconds while
pressing and holding .
The setting changes each time an
operation is performed, as shown
below. (When changing the setting
continuously, release the buttons,
wait for at least 5 seconds, and
repeat step 2.)
Vehicles with alarm: To prevent
unintended triggering of the alarm,
unlock the doors using the wireless
remote control and open and close
a door once after the settings have
been changed. (If a door is not
opened within 60 seconds after
is pressed, the doors will be
locked again and the alarm will
automatically be set.)
In a case that the alarm is triggered,
immediately stop the alarm.
(P.73)
■ Impact detection door lock
release system
In the event that the vehicle is sub-
ject to a strong impact, all the doors
are unlocked. Depending on the
force of the impact or the type of
accident, however, the system may
not operate.
■ Operation signals
Doors: A buzzer sounds and the
emergency flashers flash to indicate
that the doors have been
locked/unlocked. (Locked: Once;
Unlocked: Twice)
Side windows and moon roof (if
equipped) or panoramic moon roof
(if equipped): A buzzer sounds to
indicate that the side windows and
moon roof or panoramic moon roof
are operating.
■ Security feature
If a door is not opened within
approximately 60 seconds after the
vehicle is unlocked, the security fea-
ture automatically locks the vehicle
again. (However, depending on the
location of the electronic key, the
key may be detected as being in the
vehicle. In this case, vehicle may be
unlocked.)
■ When the door cannot be
locked by the lock sensor on
the upper part of the door han-
dle
If the door will not lock even when
the topside sensor area is touched,
try touching both the topside and
underside sensor areas at the same
time.
When gloves are being worn,
remove the gloves.
Multi-informa-
tion dis-
play/Beep
Unlocking func-
tion
Exterior: Beeps 3
times
Holding the
driver’s door han-
dle unlocks only
the driver’s door.
Holding the pas-
senger’s door
handle or press-
ing the back door
opener switch
unlocks all the
doors.
Exterior: Beeps
twice
Holding a door
handle or press-
ing the back door
opener switch
unlocks all the
doors.
200
4-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
■ Door lock buzzer
If an attempt to lock the doors using
the smart key system is made when
a door other than the door you are
locking is open, a buzzer sounds
continuously for 5 seconds. Fully
close all the doors, and lock the
vehicle once more.
■ Setting the alarm (if equipped)
Locking the doors will set the alarm
system. (P.73)
■ Conditions affecting the opera-
tion of the smart key system or
wireless remote control
P.218
■ If the smart key system or the
wireless remote control does
not operate properly
● Use the mechanical key to lock
and unlock the doors. (P.537)
● Replace the key battery with a
new one if it is depleted. (P.493)
■ If the 12-volt battery is dis-
charged
The doors cannot be locked and
unlocked using the smart key sys-
tem or wireless remote control. Lock
or unlock the doors using the
mechanical key. (P.537)
■ Rear seat reminder function
● In order to remind you not to for-
get luggage, etc. in the rear seat,
when the power switch is turned to
OFF after any of the following con-
ditions are met, a buzzer will
sound and a message will be dis-
played on the multi-information
display for approximately 6 sec-
onds.
• The hybrid system is started
within 10 minutes after opening
and closing a rear door.
• A rear door has been opened and
closed after the hybrid system
was started.
However, if a rear door is opened
and then closed within approxi-
mately 2 seconds, the rear seat
reminder function may not operate.
● The rear seat reminder function
determines that luggage, etc. has
been placed in a rear seat based
on opening and closing of a rear
door. Therefore, depending on the
situation, the rear seat reminder
function may not operate and you
may still forget luggage, etc. in the
rear seat, or it may operate unnec-
essarily.
● The rear seat reminder function
can be enabled/disabled.
(P.569)
■ Customization
Settings (e.g. unlocking function
using a key) can be changed.
(Customizable features: P.573)
WARNING
■ To prevent an accident
Observe the following precautions
while driving the vehicle.
Failure to do so may result in a
door opening and an occupant
could be thrown out of the vehicle,
resulting in death or serious
injury.
● Ensure that all doors are prop-
erly closed and locked.
● Do not pull the inside handle of
the doors while driving.
Be especially careful for the
front doors, as the doors may
be opened even if the inside
lock buttons are in locked posi-
tion.
201
4-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
4
Before driving
■ Using the door lock
switches
1 Locks all the doors
2 Unlocks all the doors
■ Using the inside lock but-
tons
1 Locks the door
2 Unlocks the door
The front doors can be opened by
pulling the inside handle even if the
lock buttons are in the lock position.
■ Locking the front doors from
the outside without a key
1 Move the inside lock button to
the lock position.
2 Close the door.
The door cannot be locked if the
power switch is in ACC or ON, or
the electronic key is left inside the
WARNING
● Set the rear door child-protector
locks when children are seated
in the rear seats.
■ When opening or closing a
door
Check the surroundings of the
vehicle such as whether the vehi-
cle is on an incline, whether there
is enough space for a door to
open and whether a strong wind
is blowing. When opening or clos-
ing the door, hold the door handle
tightly to prepare for any unpre-
dictable movement.
■ When using the wireless
remote control, key or
mechanical key and operating
the power windows, moon
roof (if equipped) or pan-
oramic moon roof (if
equipped)
Operate the power window, moon
roof or panoramic moon roof after
checking to make sure that there
is no possibility of any passenger
having any of their body parts
caught in the side window, moon
roof or panoramic moon roof.
Also, do not allow children to
operate the wireless remote con-
trol, key or mechanical key. It is
possible for children and other
passengers to get caught in the
side window, moon roof or pan-
oramic moon roof.
Unlocking and locking the
doors from the inside
202
4-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
vehicle.
Depending on the position of the
electronic key, the key may not be
detected correctly and the door may
be locked.
■ Open door warning buzzer
If the vehicle speed reaches 3 mph
(5 km/h), a buzzer sounds to indi-
cate that the door(s) or the hood is
not fully closed.
The open door(s) or hood is dis-
played on the multi-information dis-
play.
■ When all the doors are locked
with the entry function or wire-
less remote control
● The doors cannot be unlocked
with the door lock switch.
● The door lock switches can be
reset by unlocking all the doors
with the entry function or wireless
remote control.
The door cannot be opened
from inside the vehicle when the
lock is set.
1 Unlock
2 Lock
These locks can be set to prevent
children from opening the rear
doors. Push down on each rear
door switch to lock both rear doors.
The following functions can be
set or canceled:
For instructions on customizing,
refer to P.569.
Rear door child-protector
lock
Automatic door locking
and unlocking systems
Function Operation
Speed linked
door locking
function
All doors are
automatically
locked when
vehicle speed is
approximately
12mph (20 km/h)
or higher.
Shift position
linked door lock-
ing function
All doors are
automatically
locked when
shifting the shift
lever to position
other than P.
Shift position
linked door
unlocking func-
tion
All doors are
automatically
unlocked when
shifting the shift
lever to P.
Driver’s door
linked door
unlocking func-
tion
All doors are
automatically
unlocked when
driver’s door is
opened within
approximately 45
seconds after
turning the power
switch off.
203
4-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
4
Before driving
Back door
The back door can be
locked/unlocked and
opened/closed by the fol-
lowing procedures.
Charging port lid and charging
connector will also be locked
and unlocked. (P.107)
WARNING
Observe the following precau-
tions.
Failure to do so may result in
death or serious injury.
■ Before driving
● Make sure that the back door is
fully closed.
If the back door is not fully
closed, it may open unexpect-
edly while driving and hit near-
by objects or luggage in the lug-
gage compartment may be
thrown out, causing an acci-
dent.
● Do not allow children to play in
the luggage compartment.
If a child is accidentally locked
in the luggage compartment,
they could get heat exhaustion
or other injuries.
● Do not allow a child to open or
close the back door.
Doing so may cause the back
door to operate unexpectedly,
or cause the child’s hands,
head, or neck to be caught by
the closing back door.
■ Important points while driving
● Keep the back door closed
while driving.
If the back door is left open, it
may hit near-by objects or lug-
gage in the luggage compart-
ment may be thrown out,
causing an accident.
● Never let anyone sit in the lug-
gage compartment.
In the event of sudden braking,
sudden swerving or a collision,
they are susceptible to death or
serious injury.
■ Back door handles
Do not hang any object to the
back door handles.
If any object is hung, the back
door may suddenly shut, causing
parts of the body to be caught,
resulting in death or serious
injury.
■ Operating the back door
Observe the following precau-
tions.
Failure to do so may cause parts
of the body to be caught, resulting
in death or serious injury.
● Remove any heavy loads, such
as snow and ice, from the back
door before opening it. Failure
to do so may cause the back
door to suddenly shut again
after it is opened.
● When opening or closing the
back door, thoroughly check to
make sure the surrounding area
is safe.
● If anyone is in the vicinity, make
sure they are safe and let them
know that the back door is
about to open or close.
● Use caution when opening or
closing the back door in windy
weather as it may move
abruptly in strong wind.
204
4-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
■ Using the entry function
Carry the electronic key to
enable this function.
WARNING
● Vehicles without power back
door: The back door may sud-
denly shut if it is not opened
fully. It is more difficult to open
or close the back door on an
incline than on a level surface,
so beware of the back door
unexpectedly opening or closing
by itself. Make sure that the
back door is fully open and
secure before using the luggage
compartment.
● Vehicles with power back door:
The back door may suddenly
shut if it is not opened fully,
while on a steep incline. Make
sure that the back door is
secured before using the lug-
gage compartment.
● When closing the back door,
take extra care to prevent your
fingers, etc. from being caught.
● Vehicles without power back
door: When closing the back
door, make sure to press it
lightly on its outer surface. If the
back door handle is used to fully
close the back door, it may
result in hands or arms being
caught.
● Vehicles without power back
door: Do not pull on the back
door damper stay (P.206) to
close the back door, and do not
hang on the back door damper
stay.
Doing so may cause hands to
be caught or the back door
damper stay to break, causing
an accident.
● Vehicles with power back door:
Do not pull on the back door
spindle (P.214) to close the
back door, and do not hang on
the back door spindle.
Doing so may cause hands to
be caught or the back door spin-
dle to break, causing an acci-
dent.
● Vehicles without power back
door: If a bicycle carrier or simi-
lar heavy object is attached to
the back door, it may suddenly
shut again after being opened,
causing someone’s hands,
head or neck to be caught and
injured. When installing an
accessory part to the back door,
using a genuine Toyota part is
recommended.
Unlocking and locking the
back door from the out-
side
205
4-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
4
Before driving
1 Unlocks all the doors
The doors cannot be unlocked for 3
seconds after the doors are locked.
2 Locks all the doors
Check that the door is securely
locked.
■ Using the wireless remote
control
P.198
■ Operation signals
P.199
■ Security feature
P.199
■ Using the door lock
switches
P.201
■ Open
Raise the back door while
pressing up the back door
opener switch.
■ Close
Lower the back door using the
back door handle , and make
sure to push the back door
down from the outside to close
it.
Be careful not to pull the back door
sideways when closing the back
door with the handle.
■ Luggage compartment light
The luggage compartment light
turns on when the back door is
opened with the luggage compart-
ment light switch on.
When the power switch is turned to
OFF, the light will go off automati-
cally after 20 minutes.
Unlocking and locking the
back door from the inside
Opening/closing the back
door (vehicles without
power back door)
A
206
4-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
1 On
2 Off
■ If the back door opener is inop-
erative
The back door can be unlocked
from the inside.
1 Remove the cover.
To prevent damage, cover the tip of
the screwdriver with a rag.
2 Loosen the screw.
3 Turn the cover.
4 Move the lever.
5 When installing, reverse the
steps listed.
■ Open door warning buzzer
P.202
NOTICE
■ Back door damper stays
The back door is equipped with
damper stays that hold the back
door in place.
Observe the following precau-
tions.
Failure to do so may cause dam-
age to the back door damper stay,
resulting in malfunction.
● Do not attach any foreign
objects, such as stickers, plastic
sheets, or adhesives to the
damper stay rod.
● Do not touch the damper stay
rod with gloves or other fabric
items.
● Do not attach any accessories
other than genuine Toyota parts
to the back door.
● Do not place your hand on the
damper stay or apply lateral
forces to it.
207
4-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
4
Before driving
■ Using the wireless remote
control
Press and hold the switch.
The power back door automatically
opens/closes.
Pressing the switch while the power
back door is opening/closing stops
the operation. When the switch is
pressed and held again during the
halted operation, the back door will
perform the reverse operation.
■ Using the power back door
switch on the instrument
panel
Press and hold the switch.
The power back door automatically
opens/closes.
Unlock the back door before oper-
ating.
Pressing the switch while the power
back door is opening/closing stops
the operation. When the switch is
pressed and held again during the
halted operation, the back door will
perform the reverse operation.
■ Using the back door opener
switch
When the back door is
unlocked: Press the back door
opener switch.
When the back door is locked:
While carrying the electronic key
on your person, press and hold
the back door opener switch.
The power back door automatically
opens.
Pressing the switch while the power
back door is opening/closing stops
the operation.
■ Using the power back door
switch on the back door
Press the switch.
The power back door automatically
closes.
Pressing the switch while the power
back door is operating will stop the
operation.
Opening/closing the back
door (vehicles with power
back door)
208
4-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
When the switch is pressed again
during the halted operation, the
back door will perform the reverse
operation.
■ Using the back door han-
dles
Lower the back door using the
back door handle .
The back door closing assist
(P.210) will be activated, and the
power back door will fully close
automatically.
■ Using the kick sensor (vehi-
cles with Hands Free Power
Back Door)
The Hands Free Power Back
Door enables automatic opening
and closing of the power back
door by putting your foot near
the lower center part of the rear
bumper and moving it away
from the rear bumper. When
operating the Hands Free
Power Back Door, make sure
that the power switch is in OFF,
the Hands Free Power Back
Door operation is enabled
(P.177) and you are carrying
an electronic key.
1 While carrying an electronic
key, stand within the smart
key system operation range,
approximately 11.8 to 19.7 in.
(30 to 50 cm) from the rear
bumper.
Kick sensor
Hands Free Power Back
Door operation detection
area
Smart key system operation
detection area (P.217)
2 Perform a kick operation by
moving your foot to within
approximately 3.9 in. (10 cm)
of the rear bumper and then
pulling it back.
Perform the entire kick operation
within 1 second.
The back door will not start operat-
ing while a foot is detected under
the rear bumper.
Operate the Hands Free Power
A
A
B
C
209
4-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
4
Before driving
Back Door without contacting the
rear bumper with your foot.
If another electronic key is in the
cabin or luggage compartment, it
may take slightly longer than nor-
mal for the operation to occur.
Kick sensor
Hands Free Power Back
Door operation detection
area
3 When the kick sensor detects
that your foot is pulled back,
a buzzer will sound and the
back door will automatically
fully open/close.
If a foot is moved under the rear
bumper while the back door is
opening/closing, the back door will
stop moving.
If a foot is moved under the rear
bumper again during the halted
operation, the back door will per-
form the reverse operation.
■ Luggage compartment light
The luggage compartment light
turns on when the back door is
opened with the luggage compart-
ment light switch on.
When the power switch is turned to
OFF, the light will go off automati-
cally after 20 minutes.
1 On
2 Off
■ Back door closer
In the event that the back door is left
slightly open, the back door closer
will automatically close it to the fully
closed position.
Whatever the state of the power
switch, the back door closer oper-
ates.
■ Power back door operating con-
ditions
The power back door can automati-
cally open and close under the fol-
lowing conditions:
● When the power back door sys-
tem is enabled. (P.177)
● When the power switch is in ON,
in addition to the above for the
opening operations, the back door
operates for any of the following
conditions:
• Parking brake is engaged
• The brake pedal is depressed
• The shift lever is in P.
■ Operation of the power back
door
● A buzzer sounds and the emer-
gency flashers flash twice to indi-
cate that the back door is
opening/closing.
● When the power back door sys-
tem is disabled, the power back
door does not operate but it can
be opened and closed by hand.
● When the power back door auto-
matically opens, if an abnormality
due to people or objects is
detected, operation will stop.
A
B
210
4-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
■ Jam protection function
Sensors are equipped on both sides
of the power back door. If anything
obstructs the power back door while
it is closing, the back door will auto-
matically operate in the opposite
direction or stop.
■ Fall-down protection function
While the power back door is open-
ing automatically, applying exces-
sive force to it will stop the opening
operation to prevent the power back
door from suddenly shutting.
■ Back door closing assist
If the back door is lowered manually
when the back door is stopped at an
open position, the back door will
fully close automatically.
■ Back door reserve lock function
This function is a function which
reserves locking of all doors, before-
hand, when the power back door is
open.
When the following procedure is
performed, all the doors except the
power back door are locked and
then power back door will also be
locked at the same time it is closed.
1 Close all doors, except the back
door.
2 During the power back door clos-
ing operation, lock the doors
using the smart key system from
the side doors (P.198) or the
wireless remote control.
(P.198)
Operation signals will indicate that
all the doors have been closed and
locked (P.199).
● If the electronic key is placed
inside the vehicle after starting a
close operation via the door
reserve lock function, the elec-
tronic key may become locked
inside the vehicle.
● If the power back door does not
fully close due to the operation of
the jam protection function, etc.,
while the back door is automati-
cally closing after a door reserve
lock operation is performed, the
door reserve lock function is can-
celed and all the doors will unlock.
● Before leaving the vehicle, make
sure that all the doors are closed
and locked.
■ Hands Free Power Back Door
operating conditions (vehicles
with Hands Free Power Back
Door)
The Hands Free Power Back Door
will open/close automatically when
the following conditions are met:
● The Hands Free Power Back Door
operation is enabled (P.177)
● The power switch is in OFF.
● The electronic key is within the
operational range. (P.217)
● A foot is put near the lower center
part of the rear bumper and
moved away from the rear
bumper.
The power back door may also be
operated by putting a hand, an
elbow, a knee, etc. near the lower
center part of the rear bumper and
moving it away from the rear
bumper. Make sure to put it close
enough to the center part of the
rear bumper.
■ Situations in which the Hands
Free Power Back Door may not
operate properly (vehicles with
Hands Free Power Back Door)
In the following situations, the
Hands Free Power Back Door may
not operate properly:
● When a foot remains under the
rear bumper
211
4-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
4
Before driving
● If the rear bumper is strongly hit
with a foot or is touched for a while
If the rear bumper has been touched
for a while, wait for a short time
before attempting to operate the
Hands Free Power Back Door
again.
● When operated while a person is
too close to the rear bumper
● When an external radio wave
source interferes with the commu-
nication between the electronic
key and the vehicle (P.218)
● When charging from an external
power source or connecting the
AC charging cable
● When the vehicle is parked near
an electrical noise source which
affects the sensitivity of the Hands
Free Power Back Door, such as a
pay parking spot, gas station,
electrically heated road, or fluo-
rescent light
● When the vehicle is near a TV
tower, electric power plant, radio
station, large display, airport or
other facility that generates strong
radio waves or electrical noise
● When a large amount of water is
applied to the rear bumper, such
as when the vehicle is being
washed or in heavy rain
● When mud, snow, ice, etc. is
attached to the rear bumper
● When the vehicle has been
parked for a while near objects
that may move and contact the
rear bumper, such as plants
● When an accessory is installed to
the rear bumper
If an accessory has been installed,
turn the Hands Free Power Back
Door operation setting off.
■ Preventing unintentional opera-
tion of the Hands Free Power
Back Door (vehicles with Hands
Free Power Back Door)
When an electronic key is in the
operation range, the Hands Free
Power Back Door may operate unin-
tentionally, so be careful in the fol-
lowing situations.
● When a large amount of water is
applied to the rear bumper, such
as when the vehicle is being
washed or in heavy rain
● When dirt is wiped off the rear
bumper
● When a small animal or small
object, such as a ball, moves
under the rear bumper
● When an object is moved from
under the rear bumper
● If someone is swinging their legs
while sitting on the rear bumper
● If the legs or another part of some-
one’s body contacts the rear
bumper while passing by the vehi-
cle
● When the vehicle is parked near
an electrical noise source which
affects the sensitivity of the Hands
Free Power Back Door, such as a
pay parking spot, gas station,
electrically heated road, or fluo-
rescent light
● When the vehicle is near a TV
tower, electric power plant, radio
station, large display, airport or
other facility that generates strong
radio waves or electrical noise
● When the vehicle is parked in a
place where objects such as
plants are near the rear bumper
● If luggage, etc. is set near the rear
bumper
● If accessories or a vehicle cover is
installed/removed near the rear
bumper
● When the vehicle is being towed
To prevent unintentional operation,
212
4-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
turn the Hands Free Power Back
Door operation setting off. (P.177)
■ When reconnecting the 12-volt
battery
To enable the power back door to
operate properly, close the back
door manually.
■ If the back door opener is inop-
erative
The back door can be unlocked
from the inside.
1 Remove the cover.
To prevent damage, cover the tip of
the screwdriver with a rag.
2 Loosen the screw.
3 Turn the cover.
4 Move the lever.
5 When installing, reverse the
steps listed.
■ Customization
Settings (e.g. power back door
opening angle) can be changed.
(Customizable features: P.575)
WARNING
■ Back door closer
● In the event that the back door
is left slightly open, the back
door closer will automatically
close it to the fully closed posi-
tion. It takes several seconds
before the back door closer
begins to operate. Be careful
not to catch fingers or anything
else in the back door, as this
may cause bone fractures or
other serious injuries.
● Use caution when using the
back door closer as it still oper-
ates when the power back door
system is canceled.
213
4-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
4
Before driving
WARNING
■ Power back door
Observe the following precautions
when operating the power back
door.
Failure to do so may cause death
or serious injury.
● Check the safety of the sur-
rounding area to make sure
there are no obstacles or any-
thing that could cause any of
your belongings to get caught.
● If anyone is in the vicinity, make
sure they are safe and let them
know that the back door is
about to open or close.
● If the power back door system is
turned off while the back door is
operating automatically, the
automatic operation is stopped.
The back door then has to be
operated manually. Take extra
care when on an incline, as the
back door may open or close
unexpectedly.
● If the operating conditions of the
power back door are no longer
met, a buzzer may sound and
the back door may stop opening
or closing. The back door then
has to be operated manually.
Take extra care when on an
incline, as the back door may
open or close abruptly.
● On an incline, the back door
may suddenly shut after it
opens. Make sure the back door
is fully open and secure.
● In the following situations, the
power back door may detect an
abnormality and automatic
operation may be stopped. In
this case, the back door has to
be operated manually. Take
extra care when on an incline,
as the back door may open or
close abruptly.
• When the back door contacts an
obstacle
• When the 12-volt battery volt-
age suddenly drops, such as
when the power switch is turned
to ON or the hybrid system is
started during automatic opera-
tion
● If a bicycle carrier or similar
heavy object is attached to the
back door, the power back door
may not operate, causing itself
to malfunction, or the back door
may suddenly shut again after
being opened, causing some-
one’s hands, head or neck to be
caught and injured. When
installing an accessory part to
the back door, using a genuine
Toyota part is recommended.
■ Jam protection function
Observe the following precau-
tions.
Failure to do so may cause death
or serious injury.
● Never use any part of your body
to intentionally activate the jam
protection function.
● The jam protection function may
not work if something gets
caught just before the back door
fully closes. Be careful not to
catch fingers or anything else.
● The jam protection function may
not work depending on the
shape of the object that is
caught. Be careful not to catch
fingers or anything else.
214
4-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
WARNING
■ Hands Free Power Back Door
(if equipped)
Observe the following precautions
when operating the Hands Free
Power Back Door.
Failure to do so may cause death
or serious injury.
● Check the safety of the sur-
rounding area to make sure
there are no obstacles or any-
thing that could cause any of
your belongings to get caught.
● When putting your foot near the
lower center part of the rear
bumper and moving it from the
rear bumper, be careful not to
touch the exhaust pipes until
they have cooled down suffi-
ciently, as touching hot exhaust
pipes can cause burns.
● Do not leave the electronic key
within the effective range
(detection area) of the luggage
compartment.
NOTICE
■ Back door spindles
The back door is equipped with
spindles that hold the back door in
place.
Observe the following precau-
tions.
Failure to do so may cause dam-
age to the back door spindle,
resulting in malfunction.
● Do not attach any foreign
objects, such as stickers, plastic
sheets, or adhesives to the
spindle rod.
● Do not attach any accessories
other than genuine Toyota parts
to the back door.
● Do not place your hand on the
spindle or apply lateral forces to
it.
■ To prevent back door closer
malfunction
Do not apply excessive force to
the back door while the back door
closer is operating. Applying
excessive force may cause the
back door closer to malfunction.
■ To prevent damage to the
power back door
● Make sure that there is no ice
between the back door and
frame that would prevent move-
ment of the back door. Operat-
ing the power back door when
excessive load is present on the
back door may cause a mal-
function.
215
4-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
4
Before driving
NOTICE
● Do not apply excessive force to
the back door while the power
back door is operating.
● Take care not to damage the
sensors (installed on the right
and left edges of the power
back door) with a knife or other
sharp object. If the sensor is
disconnected, the power back
door will not close automati-
cally.
■ Hands Free Power Back Door
precautions (if equipped)
The kick sensor is located behind
lower center part of the rear
bumper. Observe the following to
ensure that the Hands Free
Power Back Door function oper-
ates properly:
● Keep the lower center part of
the rear bumper clean at all
times.
If the lower center part of the
rear bumper is dirty or covered
with snow, the kick sensor may
not operate. In this situation,
clean off the dirt or snow, move
the vehicle from the current
position and then check if the
kick sensor operates.
If it does not operate, have the
vehicle inspected by your
Toyota dealer.
● Do not apply coatings that have
a rain clearing (hydrophilic)
effect, or other coatings, to the
lower center part of the rear
bumper.
● Do not park the vehicle near
objects that may move and con-
tact the lower center part of the
rear bumper, such as grass or
trees.
If the vehicle has been parked
for a while near objects that
may move and contact the
lower center part of the rear
bumper, such as grass or trees,
the kick sensor may not oper-
ate. In this situation, move the
vehicle from the current position
and then check if the kick sen-
sor operates. If it does not oper-
ate, have the vehicle inspected
by your Toyota dealer.
● Do not subject the kick sensor
or its surrounding area to a
strong impact.
If the kick sensor or its sur-
rounding area has been sub-
jected to a strong impact, the
kick sensor may not operate
properly. If the kick sensor does
not operate in the following situ-
ations, have the vehicle
inspected by your Toyota
dealer.
• The kick sensor or its surround-
ing area has been subjected to
a strong impact.
• The lower center part of the rear
bumper is scratched or dam-
aged.
● Do not disassemble the rear
bumper.
● Do not attach stickers to the
rear bumper.
● Do not paint the rear bumper.
● If a bicycle carrier or similar
heavy object is attached to the
power back door, disable the
Hands Free Power Back Door.
(P.177)
216
4-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
The settings of the power back
door system can be changed by
selecting the “Vehicle Settings”
from the screen of the multi-
information display and display-
ing the “PBD” screen. (P.177)
The changed power back door set-
tings are not reset by turning the
power switch to OFF. In order to
restore the original settings, they
need to be changed back on the
screen of the multi-information
display.
The open position of the power
back door can be adjusted.
1 Stop the back door in the
desirable position. (P.207)
2 Press and hold the power
back door switch on the back
door for approximately 2 sec-
onds.
When the settings are completed,
the buzzer sounds 4 times.
When opening the back door the
next time, the back door will stop at
that position.
■ Canceling the adjusted open
position of the back door
Press and hold the power back door
switch on the back door for approxi-
mately 7 seconds.
After the buzzer sounds 4 times, it
sounds twice more. When the
power back door does the opening
operation the next time, the door will
open to the initial settings position.
■ Customization
The opening position can be set
with the multi-information display.
(P.177)
Priority for the stop position is given
to the last position set by either the
power back door switch on the back
door or multi-information display.
Changing settings of the
power back door system
(vehicles with power back
door)
Adjusting the open posi-
tion of the back door
(vehicles with power back
door)
217
4-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
4
Before driving
■ Antenna location
Antennas outside the cabin
(front)
Antennas outside the cabin
(rear) (if equipped)
Antenna outside the luggage
compartment
Antennas inside the cabin
■ Effective range (areas within
which the electronic key is
detected)
When locking or unlocking the
doors
The system can be operated when
the electronic key is within about 2.3
ft. (0.7 m) of the front door handles,
rear door handles (if equipped) and
back door opener switch. (Only the
doors detecting the key can be
operated.)
When starting the hybrid system
or changing power switch modes
The system can be operated when
the electronic key is inside the vehi-
cle.
■ If an alarm sounds or a warning
message is displayed
An alarm sounds and warning mes-
sage displays shown on the multi-
information display are used to pro-
tect against unexpected accidents
or theft of the vehicle resulting from
erroneous operation. When a warn-
ing message is displayed, take
appropriate measures based on the
displayed message.
When only an alarm sounds, cir-
cumstances and correction proce-
dures are as follows.
Smart key system
The following operations
can be performed simply by
carrying the electronic key
on your person, for example
in your pocket. The driver
should always carry the
electronic key.
Locks and unlocks the
doors
*
(P.198)
Locks and unlocks the back
door
*
(P.204)
Starts the hybrid system
(P.279)
*
: Charging port lid and charging
connector will also be locked
and unlocked. (P.107)
A
B
C
D
A
B
218
4-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
● When an exterior alarm sounds
once for 5 seconds
● When an interior alarm pings con-
tinuously
■ Battery-saving function
The battery-saving function will be
activated in order to prevent the
electronic key battery and the 12-
volt battery from being discharged
while the vehicle is not in operation
for a long time.
● In the following situations, the
smart key system may take some
time to unlock the doors.
• The electronic key has been left in
an area of approximately 11.5 ft.
(3.5 m) of the outside of the vehi-
cle for 2 minutes or longer.
• The smart key system has not
been used for 5 days or longer.
● If the smart key system has not
been used for 14 days or longer,
the doors cannot be unlocked at
any doors except the driver’s
door. In this case, take hold of the
driver’s door handle, or use the
wireless remote control or the
mechanical key, to unlock the
doors.
■ Turning an electronic key to
battery-saving mode
● When battery-saving mode is set,
battery depletion is minimized by
stopping the electronic key from
receiving radio waves.
Press twice while pressing
and holding .
Confirm that the electronic key indi-
cator flashes 4 times.
While the battery-saving mode is
set, the smart key system cannot be
used. To cancel the function, press
any of the electronic key buttons.
● Electronic keys that will not be
used for long periods of time can
be set to the battery-saving mode
in advance.
■ Conditions affecting operation
The smart key system uses weak
radio waves. In the following situa-
tions, the communication between
the electronic key and the vehicle
may be affected, preventing the
smart key system, wireless remote
control and immobilizer system from
operating properly.
● When the electronic key battery is
depleted
● Near a TV tower, electric power
plant, gas station, radio station,
large display, airport or other facil-
ity that generates strong radio
waves or electrical noise
● When the electronic key is in con-
tact with, or is covered by the fol-
Situation
Correction pro-
cedure
An attempt was
made to lock the
vehicle while a
door was open.
Close all of the
doors and lock
the doors again.
Situation
Correction pro-
cedure
The power
switch was
turned to ACC
while the driver’s
door was open
(or the driver’s
door was opened
while the power
switch was in
ACC).
Turn the power
switch to OFF
and close the
driver’s door.
219
4-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
4
Before driving
lowing metallic objects
• Cards to which aluminum foil is
attached
• Cigarette boxes that have alumi-
num foil inside
• Metallic wallets or bags
• Coins
• Hand warmers made of metal
• Media such as CDs and DVDs
● When other wireless key (that
emits radio waves) is being used
nearby
● When carrying the electronic key
together with the following devices
that emit radio waves
• Portable radio, cellular phone,
cordless phone or other wireless
communication devices
• Another vehicle’s electronic key or
a wireless key that emits radio
waves
• Personal computers or personal
digital assistants (PDAs)
• Digital audio players
• Portable game systems
● If window tint with a metallic con-
tent or metallic objects are
attached to the rear window
● When the electronic key is placed
near a battery charger or elec-
tronic devices
● When the vehicle is parked in a
pay parking spot where radio
waves are emitted.
If the doors cannot be
locked/unlocked using the smart key
system, lock/unlock the doors by
performing any of the following:
● Bring the electronic key close to
either front door handle and oper-
ate the entry function.
● Operate the wireless remote con-
trol. If the doors cannot be
locked/unlocked using the above
methods, use the mechanical key.
(P.196)
If the hybrid system cannot be
started using the smart key system,
refer to P.538.
■ Note for the entry function
● Even when the electronic key is
within the effective range (detec-
tion areas), the system may not
operate properly in the following
cases:
• The electronic key is too close to
the window or outside door han-
dle, near the ground, or in a high
place when the doors are locked
or unlocked.
• The electronic key is on the instru-
ment panel, luggage cover or
floor, or in the door pockets or
glove box when the hybrid system
is started or power switch modes
are changed.
● Do not leave the electronic key on
top of the instrument panel or near
the door pockets when exiting the
vehicle. Depending on the radio
wave reception conditions, it may
be detected by the antenna out-
side the cabin and the door will
become lockable from the outside,
possibly trapping the electronic
key inside the vehicle.
● As long as the electronic key is
within the effective range, the
doors may be locked or unlocked
by anyone. However, only the
doors detecting the electronic key
can be used to lock or unlock the
vehicle. (For vehicles equipped
with sensors on the rear door han-
dles, it is possible to lock (but not
unlock) all the doors using a door
handle that is not being detected
by the electronic key.)
● Even if the electronic key is not
inside the vehicle, it may be possi-
ble to start the hybrid system if the
electronic key is near the window.
● The doors may unlock if a large
amount of water splashes on the
door handle, such as in the rain or
in a car wash when the electronic
key is within the effective range.
(The doors will automatically be
locked after approximately 60 sec-
onds if the doors are not opened
and closed.)
220
4-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
● If the wireless remote control is
used to lock the doors when the
electronic key is near the vehicle,
there is a possibility that the door
may not be unlocked by the entry
function. (Use the wireless remote
control to unlock the doors.)
● Touching the door lock sensor
while wearing gloves may delay or
prevent lock operation. Remove
the gloves and touch the lock sen-
sor again.
● When the lock operation is per-
formed using the lock sensor, rec-
ognition signals will be shown up
to two consecutive times. After
this, no recognition signals will be
given.
● If the door handle becomes wet
while the electronic key is within
the effective range, the door may
lock and unlock repeatedly. In that
case, follow the following correc-
tion procedures to wash the vehi-
cle:
• Place the electronic key in a loca-
tion 6 ft. (2 m) or more away from
the vehicle. (Take care to ensure
that the key is not stolen.)
• Set the electronic key to battery-
saving mode to disable the smart
key system. (P.218)
● If the electronic key is inside the
vehicle and a door handle
becomes wet during a car wash, a
message may be shown on the
multi-information display and a
buzzer will sound outside the vehi-
cle. To turn off the alarm, lock all
the doors.
● The lock sensor may not work
properly if it comes into contact
with ice, snow, mud, etc. Clean
the lock sensor and attempt to
operate it again, or use the lock
sensor on the lower part of the
door handle.
● A sudden approach to the effec-
tive range or door handle may pre-
vent the doors from being
unlocked. In this case, return the
door handle to the original position
and check that the doors unlock
before pulling the door handle
again.
● If there is another electronic key in
the detection area, it may take
slightly longer to unlock the doors
after the door handle is gripped.
■ When the vehicle is not driven
for extended periods
● To prevent theft of the vehicle, do
not leave the electronic key within
6 ft. (2 m) of the vehicle.
● The smart key system can be
deactivated in advance. (P.574)
● Battery-saving mode can reduce
the power consumption of elec-
tronic keys. (P.218)
■ To operate the system properly
Make sure to carry the electronic
key when operating the system. Do
not get the electronic key too close
to the vehicle when operating the
system from the outside of the vehi-
cle.
Depending on the position and hold-
ing condition of the electronic key,
the key may not be detected cor-
rectly and the system may not oper-
ate properly. (The alarm may go off
accidentally, or the door lock pre-
vention may not operate.)
■ If the smart key system does
not operate properly
● Locking and unlocking the doors:
Use the mechanical key.
(P.537)
● Starting the hybrid system:
P.538
■ Customization
Settings (e.g. smart key system)
can be changed.
(Customizable features: P.573)
If the smart key system has been
deactivated in a customized setting,
refer to the explanations for the fol-
lowing operations.
● Locking and unlocking the doors:
Use the wireless remote control or
222
4-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
For vehicles sold in Canada
223
4-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
4
Before driving
WARNING
■ Caution regarding interfer-
ence with electronic devices
● People with implantable car-
diac pacemakers, cardiac
resynchronization therapy-
pacemakers or implantable car-
dioverter defibrillators should
keep away from the smart key
system antennas. (P.217)
The radio waves may affect the
operation of such devices. If
necessary, the entry function
can be disabled. Ask your
Toyota dealer for details, such
as the frequency of radio waves
and timing of the emitted radio
waves. Then, consult your doc-
tor to see if you should disable
the entry function.
● User of any electrical medical
device other than implantable
cardiac pacemakers, cardiac
resynchronization therapy-
pacemakers or implantable car-
dioverter defibrillators should
consult the manufacturer of the
device for information about its
operation under the influence of
radio waves.
Radio waves could have unex-
pected effects on the operation
of such medical devices.
Ask your Toyota dealer for details
for disabling the entry function.
224
4-3. Adjusting the seats
4-3.Adjusting the seats
Manual seat
1 Seat position adjustment
lever
2 Seatback angle adjustment
lever
Power seat
1 Seat position adjustment
switch
2 Seatback angle adjustment
switch
3 Seat cushion (front) angle
adjustment switch (driver’s
side only)
4 Vertical height adjustment
switch (driver’s side only)
5 Lumbar support adjustment
switch (driver’s side only)
■ When adjusting the seat
Take care when adjusting the seat
so that the head restraint does not
touch the ceiling.
Front seats
The seats can be adjusted
(longitudinally, vertically,
etc.). Adjust the seat to
ensure the correct driving
posture.
Adjustment procedure
WARNING
■ When adjusting the seat posi-
tion
● Take care when adjusting the
seat position to ensure that
other passengers are not
injured by the moving seat.
225
4-3. Adjusting the seats
4
Before driving
Pull the seatback angle adjust-
ment lever , and adjust the
seatback angle.
WARNING
● Do not put your hands under the
seat or near the moving parts to
avoid injury.
Fingers or hands may become
jammed in the seat mechanism.
● Make sure to leave enough
space around the feet so they
do not get stuck.
● Manual seat only: After adjust-
ing the seat, make sure that the
seat is locked in position.
■ Seat adjustment
To reduce the risk of sliding under
the lap belt during a collision, do
not recline the seat more than
necessary.
If the seat is too reclined, the lap
belt may slide past the hips and
apply restraint forces directly to
the abdomen, or your neck may
contact the shoulder belt, increas-
ing the risk of death or serious
injury in the event of an accident.
Adjustments should not be made
while driving as the seat may
unexpectedly move and cause
the driver to lose control of the
vehicle.
Rear seats
Reclining adjustments and
folding the seatbacks can
be done with lever opera-
tion.
Adjustment procedure
WARNING
■ When operating the seatback
Observe the following precau-
tions.
Failure to do so may cause death
or serious injury.
● Keep other passengers from
being hit with the seatback.
● Do not bring your hands close
to the moving parts or between
the seats, as well as do not let
any part of your body get
caught.
A
226
4-3. Adjusting the seats
■ Before folding down the
seatbacks
1 Park the vehicle in a safe
place.
Apply the parking brake (P.290)
and shift the shift lever to P.
(P.286)
2 Adjust the position of the
front seat and the angle of
the seatback. (P.224)
Depending on the position of the
front seat, if the seatback is folded
backward, it may interfere with the
operation of the rear seat.
3 Lift up and push down the
head restraints of the rear
outboard seats, and lower
the head restraint of the rear
center seat. (P.230)
4 Stow the armrest of the rear
seat if it is pulled out.
(P.434)
This step is not necessary when
operating the left side seat only.
■ Folding down the seat-
backs
While pulling the seatback angle
adjustment lever , fold the
seatback down.
■ Returning the rear seat-
backs
To avoid trapping the seat belt
between the seat and the inside
of the vehicle, pass the seat belt
outside the seat belt guide
and then return the seatback
securely to the locked position.
WARNING
● After adjusting the seat, make
sure that the seat is locked in
position.
If the seatback is not securely
locked, the red marking will be
visible. Make sure that the red
marking is not visible.
Folding down the rear
seatbacks
WARNING
Observe the following precau-
tions.
Failure to do so may result in
death or serious injury.
A
A
227
4-3. Adjusting the seats
4
Before driving
*
: If equipped
■ Recording procedure
1 Check that the shift lever is in
P.
2 Turn the power switch to ON.
3 Adjust the driver’s seat to the
desired positions.
4 While pressing the “SET” but-
ton, or within 3 seconds after
the “SET” button is pressed,
press button “1” or “2” until
the buzzer sounds.
If the selected button has already
been preset, the previously
recorded position will be overwrit-
WARNING
■ When folding the rear seat-
backs down
● Do not fold the seatbacks down
while driving.
● Stop the vehicle on level
ground, set the parking brake
and shift the shift lever to P.
● Do not allow anyone to sit on a
folded seatback or in the lug-
gage compartment while driv-
ing.
● Do not allow children to enter
the luggage compartment.
● Do not operate the rear seat if it
is occupied.
● Be careful not to get feet or
hands caught in the moving
parts or joints of the seats
during operation.
● Do not allow children to operate
the seat.
■ After returning the rear seat-
back to the upright position
● Make sure that the seatback is
securely locked in position by
lightly pushing it back and forth.
If the seatback is not securely
locked, the red marking will be
visible. Make sure that the red
marking is not visible.
● Check that the seat belts are
not twisted or caught in the
seatback.
Driving position mem-
ory
*
This feature automatically
adjusts the driver’s seat to
suit your preferences.
Your preferred driving posi-
tion (the position of the
driver’s seat) can be
recorded and recalled by
pressing a button.
Two different driving posi-
tions can be recorded into
memory.
Each electronic key can be
registered to recall your pre-
ferred driving position.
Recording/recalling a
driving position
228
4-3. Adjusting the seats
ten.
■ Recall procedure
1 Check that the shift lever is in
P.
2 Turn the power switch to ON.
3 Press one of the buttons for
the driving position you want
to recall until the buzzer
sounds.
■ To stop the position recall oper-
ation part-way through
Perform any of the following:
● Press the “SET” button.
● Press button “1” or “2”.
● Operate any of the seat adjust-
ment switches.
■ Seat positions that can be
memorized (P.224)
The adjusted positions other than
the position adjusted by lumbar sup-
port switch can be recorded.
■ Operating the driving position
memory after turning the power
switch to OFF
Recorded seat positions can be
activated up to 180 seconds after
the driver’s door is opened and
another 60 seconds after it is closed
again.
■ In order to correctly use the
driving position memory func-
tion
If a seat position is already in the
furthest possible position and the
seat is operated in the same direc-
tion, the recorded position may be
slightly different when it is recalled.
■ When recalling the driving posi-
tion
Take care when recalling the driving
position so that the head restraint
does not touch the ceiling.
■ If the 12-volt battery is discon-
nected
The memorized positions are
erased.
■ Registering procedure
Record your driving position to
button “1” or “2” before perform-
ing the following:
Carry only the key you want to
WARNING
■ Seat adjustment caution
Take care during seat adjustment
so that the seat does not strike
the rear passenger or squeeze
your body against the steering
wheel.
Registering/recall/cancel-
ing a driving position to
an electronic key (mem-
ory recall function)
229
4-3. Adjusting the seats
4
Before driving
register, and then close the
driver’s door.
If 2 or more keys are in the vehi-
cle, the driving position cannot
be recorded properly.
1 Check that the shift lever is in
P.
2 Turn the power switch to ON.
3 Recall the driving position
that you want to record.
4 While pressing the recalled
button, press and hold the
door lock switch (either lock
or unlock) until the buzzer
sounds.
If the button could not be regis-
tered, the buzzer sounds continu-
ously for approximately 3 seconds.
■ Recall procedure
Make sure that the doors are
locked before recalling the driv-
ing position.Carry the electronic
key that has been registered to
the driving position, and then
unlock and open the driver’s
door using the smart key system
or wireless remote control.
The driving position will move to the
recorded position.
If the driving position is in a position
that has already been recorded, the
seat will not move.
■ Cancelation procedure
Carry only the key you want to
cancel and then close the
driver’s door.
If 2 or more keys are in the vehi-
cle, the driving position cannot
be canceled properly.
1 Check that the shift lever is in
P.
2 Turn the power switch to ON.
3 While pressing the “SET” but-
ton, press and hold the door
lock switch (either lock or
unlock) until the buzzer
sounds twice.
If the button could not be canceled,
the buzzer sounds continuously for
approximately 3 seconds.
■ Recalling the driving position
using the memory recall func-
tion
● Different driving positions can be
registered for each electronic key.
Therefore, the driving position that
is recalled may be different
depending on the key being car-
ried.
● If a door other than the driver’s
door is unlocked with smart key
system, the driving position can-
not be recalled. In this case, press
the driving position button which
has been set.
■ Customization
Settings (e.g. the unlock door set-
tings of the memory recall function)
can be customized. (Customizable
features: P.576)
230
4-3. Adjusting the seats
■ Front seats
1 Up
Pull the head restraints up.
2 Down
Push the head restraint down while
pressing the lock release button
.
■ Center rear seat
1 Up
Pull the head restraints up.
2 Down
Push the head restraint down while
pressing the lock release button
.
■ Outboard rear seats
Head restraints cannot be
adjusted.
■ Adjusting the height of the head
restraints (front seats)
Make sure that the head restraints
are adjusted so that the center of
the head restraint is closest to the
top of your ears.
■ Adjusting the center rear seat
head restraint
Always raise the head restraint one
level from the stowed position when
using.
Head restraints
Head restraints are pro-
vided for all seats.
WARNING
■ Head restraint precautions
Observe the following precautions
regarding the head restraints.
Failure to do so may result in
death or serious injury.
● Use the head restraints
designed for each respective
seat.
● Adjust the head restraints to the
correct position at all times.
● After adjusting the head
restraints, push down on them
and make sure they are locked
in position.
● Do not drive with the head
restraints removed.
Vertical adjustment
A
A
231
4-3. Adjusting the seats
4
Before driving
Pull the head restraint up while
pressing the lock release button
.
If the head restraint touches the
ceiling, making the removal difficult,
change the seat height or angle.
(P.224)
■ Front and center rear seats
Align the head restraint with the
installation holes and push it
down to the lock position.
Press and hold the lock release
button when lowering the
head restraint.
■ Outboard rear seats
Align the head restraint with the
installation holes and push it
down to the lowest lock position.
Removing the head
restraints
Installing the head
restraints
A
A
232
4-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
4-4.Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
1 Hold the steering wheel and
push the lever down.
2 Adjust to the ideal position by
moving the steering wheel
horizontally and vertically.
After adjustment, pull the lever up
to secure the steering wheel.
To sound the horn, press on or
close to the mark.
Steering wheel
Adjustment procedure
WARNING
■ Caution while driving
Do not adjust the steering wheel
while driving.
Doing so may cause the driver to
mishandle the vehicle and cause
an accident, resulting in death or
serious injury.
■ After adjusting the steering
wheel
Make sure that the steering wheel
is securely locked.
Otherwise, the steering wheel
may move suddenly, possibly
causing an accident, and resulting
in death or serious injury. Also,
the horn may not sound if the
steering wheel is not securely
locked.
Sounding the horn
233
4-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
4
Before driving
*
: If equipped
The height of the rear view mir-
ror can be adjusted to suit your
driving posture.
Adjust the height of the rear
view mirror by moving it up and
down.
Reflected light from the head-
lights of vehicles behind can be
reduced by operating the lever.
1 Normal position
2 Anti-glare position
Responding to the level of
brightness of the headlights of
vehicles behind, the reflected
light is automatically reduced.
Changing automatic anti-glare
function mode on/off
When the automatic anti-glare func-
tion is in ON mode, the indicator
illuminates.
The function will set to ON mode
each time the power switch is
turned to ON.
Pressing the button turns the func-
tion to OFF mode. (The indicator
also turns off.)
Inside rear view mir-
ror
*
The rear view mirror’s posi-
tion can be adjusted to
enable sufficient confirma-
tion of the rear view.
Adjusting the height of
rear view mirror
WARNING
■ Caution while driving
Do not adjust the position of the
mirror while driving.
Doing so may lead to mishandling
of the vehicle and cause an acci-
dent, resulting in death or serious
injury.
Anti-glare function (vehi-
cles with manual anti-
glare inside rear view mir-
ror)
Anti-glare function (vehi-
cles with auto anti-glare
inside rear view mirror)
A
A
234
4-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
■ To prevent sensor error (vehi-
cles with auto anti-glare inside
rear view mirror)
To ensure that the sensors operate
properly, do not touch or cover
them.
*
: If equipped
Digital Rear-view Mir-
ror
*
The Digital Rear-view Mirror
is a system that uses the
camera on the rear of the
vehicle and displays its
image on the display of the
Digital Rear-view Mirror.
The Digital Rear-view Mirror
can be changed between
optical mirror mode and dig-
ital mirror mode by operat-
ing the lever.
The Digital Rear-view Mirror
allows the driver to see the
rear view despite obstruc-
tions, such as the head
restraints or luggage,
ensuring rear visibility.
Also, the rear seats are not
displayed and privacy of the
passengers is enhanced.
WARNING
Observe the following precau-
tions.
Failure to do so may result in
death or serious injury.
■ Before using the Digital Rear-
view Mirror
● Make sure to adjust the mirror
before driving. (P.236)
• Change to optical mirror mode
and adjust the position of the
Digital Rear-view Mirror so that
the area behind your vehicle
can be viewed properly.
235
4-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
4
Before driving
Icon display area
Displays icons, adjusting gauge,
etc. (P.236)
Lever
Operate to change between digital
mirror mode and optical mirror
mode.
Menu button
Press to display the icon display
area and select the item you want
to adjust.
Select/adjust button
Press to change the setting of the
item you want to adjust.
Camera indicator
Indicates that the camera is operat-
ing normally.
Operate the lever to change
between digital mirror mode and
optical mirror mode.
1 Digital mirror mode
Displays an image of the area
behind the vehicle.
will illuminate in this mode.
2 Optical mirror mode
Turns off the display of the Digital
Rear-view Mirror allows it to be
used as an optical mirror.
■ Digital mirror mode operating
condition
The power switch is turned to ON.
When the power switch is changed
from ON to OFF or ACC, the image
will disappear after several seconds.
■ When using the Digital Rear-
view Mirror in digital mirror
mode
● If it is difficult to see the displayed
image due to light reflected off the
Digital Rear-view Mirror, the cam-
era being dirty or covered with
water droplets, or if lights of a
vehicle behind your vehicle or the
displayed image are bothering
you, change to optical mirror
mode.
● When the back door is open, the
Digital Rear-view Mirror image
may not display properly. Before
WARNING
• Change to digital mirror mode
and adjust the display settings.
● As the range of the image dis-
played by the Digital Rear-view
Mirror is different from that of
the optical mirror, make sure to
check this difference before
driving.
System components
A
B
C
D
E
Changing modes
236
4-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
driving, make sure the back door
is closed.
● If the display is difficult to see due
to reflected light, close the sun-
shade for the moon roof (if
equipped) or the electronic sun-
shade for the panoramic moon
roof (if equipped).
● Any of the following conditions
may occur when driving in the
dark, such as at night. None of
them indicates that a malfunction
has occurred.
• Colors of objects in the displayed
image may differ from their actual
color.
• Depending on the height of the
lights of the vehicle behind, the
area around the vehicle may
appear white and blurry.
• Automatic image adjustment for
brighter surrounding image may
cause flickering.
If it is difficult to see the displayed
image or flickering bothers you,
change to optical mirror mode.
● The Digital Rear-view Mirror may
become hot while it is in digital
mirror mode.
This is not a malfunction.
● Depending on your physical con-
dition or age, it may take longer
than usual to focus on the dis-
played image. In this case,
change to optical mirror mode.
● Do not let passengers stare at the
displayed image when the vehicle
is being driven, as doing so may
cause motion sickness.
■ When the system malfunctions
If the symbol shown in the illustra-
tion is displayed when using the
Digital Rear-view Mirror in digital
mirror mode, the system may be
malfunctioning. The symbol will dis-
appear in a few seconds. Operate
the lever, change to optical mirror
mode and have the vehicle
inspected by your Toyota dealer.
■ Adjusting the mirror height
The height of the rear view mir-
ror can be adjusted to suit your
driving posture.
Change to optical mirror mode,
adjusting the height of the rear
view mirror by moving it up and
down.
■ Display settings (digital
mirror mode)
Settings of the display in the dig-
ital mirror mode, on/off opera-
tion of the automatic anti-glare
function, etc. can be changed.
1 Press the menu button.
Adjusting the mirror
237
4-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
4
Before driving
The icons will be displayed.
2 Press the menu button
repeatedly and select the
item you want to adjust.
3 Press or to
change the setting.
The icons will disappear if a button
is not operated for approximately 5
seconds or more.
*
: This is a function for the optical
mirror mode, however, the setting
can also be changed while using
the digital mirror mode.
■ Enabling/disabling the
automatic anti-glare func-
tion (optical mirror mode)
The automatic anti-glare func-
tion in the optical mirror mode
can be enabled/disabled. The
setting can be changed in both
the digital mirror mode and the
optical mirror mode.
When using the digital mirror
mode
P.236
Icons Settings
Select to adjust the bright-
ness of the display.
Select to adjust the area
displayed up/down.
Select to adjust the area
displayed to the left/right.
Select to adjust the angle of
the displayed image.
Select to zoom in/out the
displayed image.
Select to enable/disable the
automatic anti-glare func-
tion.
*
Responding to the bright-
ness of the headlights of
vehicles behind, the
reflected light is automati-
cally adjusted.
The automatic anti-glare
function is enabled each
time the power switch is
changed to ON.
Select to display
HomeLink
®
Training Tuto-
rial to assist customers to
train their Garage Door
Opener System. (P.437)
Select to change the lan-
guage of the Homelink
®
Training Tutorial.
Icons Settings
238
4-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
When using the optical mirror
mode
1 Press the menu button.
The icons will be displayed.
2 Press the menu button
repeatedly and select .
The setting display will be dis-
played.
3 Press or to
enable (ON)/disable (OFF)
the automatic anti-glare func-
tion.
The icons will disappear if a button
is not operated for approximately 5
seconds or more.
■ Adjusting the display (digital
mirror mode)
● If the displayed image is adjusted,
it may appear distorted. This is not
a malfunction.
● If the brightness of the Digital
Rear-view Mirror is set too high, it
may cause eye strain. Adjust the
Digital Rear-view Mirror to an
appropriate brightness. If your
eyes become tired, change to
optical mirror mode.
● The brightness of the Digital Rear-
view Mirror will change automati-
cally according to the brightness
of the area in front of your vehicle.
■ To prevent the light sensors
from malfunctioning
To prevent the light sensors from
malfunctioning, do not touch or
cover them.
WARNING
Observe the following precau-
tions.
Failure to do so may result in
death or serious injury.
■ While driving
● Do not adjust the position of the
Digital Rear-view Mirror or
adjust the display settings while
driving.
Stop the vehicle and operate
the Digital Rear-view Mirror
control switches.
Failure to do so may cause a
steering wheel operation error,
resulting in an unexpected acci-
dent.
● Always pay attention to the
vehicle’s surroundings.
The size of the vehicles and other
objects may look different when in
digital mirror mode and optical
mirror mode.
When backing up, make sure to
directly check the safety of the
area around your vehicle, espe-
cially behind the vehicle.
Additionally, if a vehicle
approaches from the rear in the
dark, such as at night, the sur-
rounding area may appear dim.
239
4-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
4
Before driving
■ Cleaning the mirror surface
If the mirror surface is dirty, the
image on the display may be dif-
ficult to see.
Clean the mirror surface gently
using a soft dry cloth.
■ Cleaning the camera
If the camera lens is dirty, the
displayed image may not be
clear. In this case, clean it with a
soft cloth dampened with water
or a swab.
■ The camera
The camera for the Digital Rear-
view Mirror is located as shown.
■ The cooling fan
There is a cooling fan in the Digital
Rear-view Mirror. Cooling fan
sounds may be heard when using
the system.
WARNING
■ To prevent causes of fire
If the driver continues using the
Digital Rear-view Mirror while
smoke or odor comes from the
mirror, it may result in fire. Stop
using the system immediately and
contact your Toyota dealer.
Cleaning the Digital Rear-
view Mirror
NOTICE
■ To prevent the Digital Rear-
view Mirror from malfunction-
ing
● Do not use detergents, such as
thinner, benzene, and alcohol to
clean the mirror. They may dis-
color, deteriorate or damage the
mirror surface.
● Do not smoke, use matches,
use cigarette lighters or allow
open flames near the mirror. It
may damage the mirror or
cause a fire.
● Do not remove, disassemble or
modify the mirror.
■ To prevent the camera from
malfunctioning
● Observe the following precau-
tions, otherwise the Digital
Rear-view Mirror may not oper-
ate properly.
• Do not strike or hit the camera
or subject it to a strong impact,
as the camera installation posi-
tion and angle may be changed.
• Do not remove, disassemble or
modify the camera.
• Do not allow an organic solvent,
car wax, window cleaner or
glass coating to adhere to the
camera. If this happens, wipe it
off as soon as possible.
• When cleaning the camera lens,
wipe the camera lens with a
damp soft cloth.
Do not strongly rub the camera
lens, as it may be scratched and
will not be able to transmit a
clear image.
240
4-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
If you notice any of the following symptoms, refer to the following
table for the likely cause and the solution.
If the symptom is not resolved by the solution, have the vehicle
inspected by your Toyota dealer.
NOTICE
• When applying colored film
(including transparent film) to
the rear window glass, do not
apply it to the area in front of the
camera.
If film is applied to the area in
front of the camera, the image
from the camera may not dis-
play properly.
● Do not subject the camera to a
strong impact as this could
cause a malfunction.
If this happens, have the vehicle
inspected by your Toyota dealer
as soon as possible.
● Do not block the vent holes of
the mirror. Otherwise, the mirror
may be hot, leading to a mal-
function or a fire.
If you notice any symptoms
241
4-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
4
Before driving
Symptom Likely cause Solution
The image is
difficult to see.
The mirror surface is dirty.
Clean the mirror surface
gently, using a soft dry
cloth.
Sunlight or headlights are shin-
ing directly into the Digital Rear-
view Mirror.
Change to optical mirror
mode.
(If the light is coming
through the moon roof [if
equipped] or panoramic
moon roof [if equipped],
close the sunshade or
electronic sunshade.)
• The vehicle is in a dark area.
• The vehicle is near a TV
tower, broadcasting station,
electric power plant, or other
location where strong radio
waves or electrical noise may
be present.
• The temperature around the
camera is extremely high/low.
• The ambient temperature is
extremely low.
• It is raining or humid.
• Sunlight or headlights are
shining directly into the cam-
era lens.
• The vehicle is under fluores-
cent lights, sodium lights,
mercury lights, etc.
• Exhaust gas is obstructing
the camera.
Change to optical mirror
mode.
(Change back to digital
mirror mode when the
conditions have
improved.)
Foreign matters such as water
droplets or dust is on the cam-
era lens.
Wipe the camera lens
with a damp soft cloth.
242
4-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
The image is
difficult to see.
The luggage in the luggage
compartment is reflected off the
rear window glass and obstruct-
ing the camera.
• Change to optical mirror
mode.
• Move the luggage to a
position where it does
not obstruct the cam-
era or cover it with a
black cloth to reduce
the amount it is
reflected off the rear
window glass.
The rear window glass is
fogged up.
Change to optical mirror
mode.
After defogging the rear
window using the rear
window defogger
(P.398), use the digital
mirror mode again.
The outside of the rear window
glass is dirty.
Use the rear window
wiper to remove dirt.
The inside of the rear window
glass is dirty.
Wipe the inside of rear
window glass with a damp
soft cloth.
The image is
out of align-
ment.
The back door is not fully
closed.
Fully close the back door.
The camera or its surrounding
area has received a strong
impact.
Change to optical mirror
mode and have the vehi-
cle inspected by your
Toyota dealer.
The display is
dim and is
displayed.
The system may be malfunc-
tioning.
Change to optical mirror
mode and have the vehi-
cle inspected by your
Toyota dealer.
goes off.
Symptom Likely cause Solution
243
4-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
4
Before driving
is dis-
played.
The Digital Rear-view Mirror is
extremely hot.
(The display will gradually
become more dim. If the tem-
perature continues to increase,
the Digital Rear-view Mirror will
turn off.)
Reducing the cabin tem-
perature is recom-
mended to reduce the
temperature of the mirror.
( will disappear when
the mirror becomes cool.)
If does not disappear
even though the mirror is
cool, have the vehicle
inspected by your Toyota
dealer.
The lever can-
not be oper-
ated properly.
The lever may be malfunction-
ing.
Change to optical mirror
mode and have the vehi-
cle inspected by your
Toyota dealer.
(To change to optical mir-
ror mode, press and hold
the menu button for
approximately 10 sec-
onds.)
Symptom Likely cause Solution
244
4-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
■ Defogging the mirrors
The outside rear view mirrors can
be cleared using the mirror defog-
gers. Turn on the rear window
defogger to turn on the outside rear
view mirror defoggers.
(P.398)
1 To select a mirror to adjust,
press the switch.
Left
Right
2 To adjust the mirror, press
the switch.
Up
Right
Down
Left
■ Mirror angle can be adjusted
when
The power switch is in ACC or ON.
Push the mirror back in the
direction of the vehicle’s rear.
Outside rear view mir-
rors
The rear view mirror’s posi-
tion can be adjusted to
enable sufficient confirma-
tion of the rear view.
WARNING
■ Important points while driving
Observe the following precautions
while driving.
Failing to do so may result in loss
of control of the vehicle and cause
an accident, resulting in death or
serious injury.
● Do not adjust the mirrors while
driving.
● Do not drive with the mirrors
folded.
● Both the driver and passenger
side mirrors must be extended
and properly adjusted before
driving.
■ When the mirror defoggers
are operating
Do not touch the rear view mirror
surfaces, as they can become
very hot and burn you.
Adjustment procedure
Folding the mirrors
A
B
A
B
C
D
245
4-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
4
Before driving
WARNING
■ When a mirror is moving
To avoid personal injury and mir-
ror malfunction, be careful not to
get your hand caught by the mov-
ing mirror.
246
4-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof
4-5.Opening, closing the windows and m oon roof
The power windows can be
opened and closed using the
switches.
Operating the switch moves the
side windows as follows:
1 Closing
2 One-touch closing
*
3 Opening
4 One-touch opening
*
*
: To stop the side window partway,
operate the switch in the opposite
direction.
■ The power windows can be
operated when
The power switch is in ON.
■ Operating the power windows
after turning the hybrid system
off
The power windows can be oper-
ated for approximately 45 seconds
even after the power switch is
turned to ACC or OFF. They cannot,
however, be operated once either
front door is opened.
■ Jam protection function
If an object becomes jammed
between the side window and the
window frame while the side window
is closing, side window movement is
stopped and the side window is
opened slightly.
■ Catch protection function
If an object becomes caught
between the door and side window
while the side window is opening,
side window movement is stopped.
■ When the power window cannot
be opened or closed
When the jam protection function or
catch protection function operates
unusually and the side window can-
not be opened and closed, perform
the following operations with the
power window switch of that door.
● Stop the vehicle. With the power
switch in ON, within 4 seconds of
the jam protection function or
catch protection function activat-
ing, continuously operate the
power window switch in the one-
touch closing direction or one-
touch opening direction so that the
side window can be opened and
closed.
● If the side window cannot be
opened and closed even when
performing the above operations,
perform the following procedure
for function initialization.
1 Turn the power switch to ON.
2 Pull and hold the power window
switch in the one-touch closing
direction and completely close
the side window.
3 Release the power window
switch for a moment, resume
pulling the switch in the one-
touch closing direction, and hold
it there for approximately 6 sec-
onds or more.
4 Press and hold the power win-
dow switch in the one-touch
opening direction. After the side
window is completely opened,
continue holding the switch for
an additional 1 second or more.
Power windows
Opening and closing the
power windows
247
4-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof
4
Before driving
5 Release the power window
switch for a moment, resume
pushing the switch in the one-
touch opening direction, and
hold it there for approximately 4
seconds or more.
6 Pull and hold the power window
switch in the one-touch closing
direction again. After the side
window is completely closed,
continue holding the switch for a
further 1 second or more.
If you release the switch while the
side window is moving, start again
from the beginning.
If the side window reverses and
cannot be fully closed or opened,
have the vehicle inspected by your
Toyota dealer.
■ Door lock linked power window
operation
● The power windows can be
opened and closed using the
mechanical key.
*
(P.538)
● The power windows can be
opened using the wireless remote
control.
*
(P.198)
● Vehicles with alarm: The alarm
may be triggered if the alarm is set
and the power window is closed
using the door lock linked power
window operation function.
(P.73)
*
: These settings must be custom-
ized at your Toyota dealer.
■ Power window open reminder
function
The buzzer sounds and a message
is shown on the multi-information
display when the power switch is
turned to OFF and the driver’s door
is opened with the power windows
open.
■ Customization
Settings (e.g. linked door lock oper-
ation) can be changed. (Customiz-
able features: P.576)
WARNING
Observe the following precau-
tions.
Failing to do so may result in
death or serious injury.
■ Closing the power windows
● The driver is responsible for all
the power window operations,
including the operation for the
passengers. In order to prevent
accidental operation, especially
by a child, do not let a child
operate the power windows. It is
possible for children and other
passengers to have body parts
caught in the power window.
Also, when riding with a child, it
is recommended to use the win-
dow lock switch. (P.248)
● Check to make sure that all pas-
sengers do not have any part of
their body in a position where it
could be caught when a power
window is being operated.
● When using the wireless remote
control or mechanical key and
operating the power windows,
operate the power window after
checking to make sure that
there is no possibility of any
passenger having any of their
body parts caught in the side
window. Also, do not let a child
operate the power window by
the wireless remote control or
mechanical key. It is possible
for children and other passen-
gers to get caught in the power
window.
248
4-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof
This function can be used to
prevent children from acciden-
tally opening or closing a pas-
senger window.
Press the switch.
The indicator will come on and
the passenger windows will be
locked.
The passenger windows can still be
opened and closed using the
driver’s switch even if the lock
switch is on.
■ The window lock switch can be
operated when
The power switch is in ON.
■ When the 12-volt battery is dis-
connected
The window lock switch is disabled.
If necessary, press the window lock
switch after reconnecting the 12-volt
battery.
WARNING
● When exiting the vehicle, turn
the power switch to OFF, carry
the key and exit the vehicle
along with the child. There may
be accidental operation, due to
mischief, etc., that may possibly
lead to an accident.
■ Jam protection function
● Never use any part of your body
to intentionally activate the jam
protection function.
● The jam protection function may
not work if something gets
jammed just before the side
window is fully closed. Be care-
ful not to get any part of your
body jammed in the side win-
dow.
■ Catch protection function
● Never use any part of your body
or clothing to intentionally acti-
vate the catch protection func-
tion.
● The catch protection function
may not work if something gets
caught just before the side win-
dow is fully opened. Be careful
not to get any part of your body
or clothing caught in the side
window.
Preventing accidental
operation (window lock
switch)
A
249
4-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof
4
Before driving
*
: If equipped
■ Opening and closing
1 Opens the moon roof
*
The moon roof stops slightly before
the fully open position to reduce
wind noise.
Press the switch again to fully open
the moon roof.
2 Closes the moon roof
*
*
: Lightly press either side of the
moon roof switch to stop the
moon roof partway.
■ Tilting up and down
1 Tilts the moon roof up
*
2 Tilts the moon roof down
*
*
: Lightly press either side of the
moon roof switch to stop the
moon roof partway.
■ The moon roof can be operated
when
The power switch is in ON.
■ Operating the moon roof after
turning the hybrid system off
The moon roof can be operated for
approximately 45 seconds after the
power switch is turned to ACC or
OFF. It cannot, however, be oper-
ated once either front door is
opened.
■ Jam protection function
If an object is detected between the
moon roof and the frame while the
moon roof is closing or tilting down,
travel is stopped and the moon roof
opens slightly.
■ Sunshade
The sunshade can be opened and
closed manually. However, the sun-
shade will open automatically when
the moon roof is opened.
■ Door lock linked moon roof
operation
● The moon roof can be opened
and closed using the mechanical
key.
*
(P.538)
● The moon roof can be opened
using the wireless remote control.
*
(P.198)
● Vehicles with alarm: The alarm
may be triggered if the alarm is set
and the moon roof is closed using
the door lock linked moon roof
operation function. (P.73)
*
: These settings must be custom-
ized at your Toyota dealer.
Moon roof
*
Use the overhead switches
to open and close the moon
roof and tilt it up and down.
Operating the moon roof
250
4-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof
■ When the moon roof does not
close normally
Perform the following procedure:
1 Stop the vehicle.
2 Press and hold the “CLOSE”
switch.
*
The moon roof will close, reopen
and pause for approximately 10
seconds. Then it will close again
and stop at the completely closed
position.
3 Check to make sure that the
moon roof is completely closed
and then release the switch.
*
: If the switch is released at the
incorrect time, the procedure will
have to be performed again from
the beginning.
If the moon roof does not fully close
even after performing the above
procedure correctly, have the vehi-
cle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
■ If the moon roof does not move
normally
If the moon roof does not open or
close normally or the automatic
opening function does not operate,
perform the following initialization
procedure.
1 Stop the vehicle.
2 Press and hold the “DOWN”
switch.
*
The moon roof will stop at the tilt-up
position. After that, it will open,
close, tilt up, tilt down, and stop at
the fully closed position.
3 Confirm that the moon roof has
completely stopped and release
the switch.
*
: If you release the switch while the
moon roof is moving, perform the
procedure again from the begin-
ning.
If, after performing the above proce-
dures correctly, the moon roof still
does not open or close normally or
the automatic opening function does
not operate, have the vehicle
inspected by your Toyota dealer.
■ Moon roof open reminder func-
tion
The buzzer sounds and a message
is shown on the multi-information
display when the power switch is
turned to OFF and the driver’s door
is opened with the moon roof open.
■ Customization
Settings (e.g. linked door lock oper-
ation) can be changed. (Customiz-
able features: P.576)
WARNING
Observe the following precau-
tions.
Failure to do so may cause death
or serious injury.
■ Opening the moon roof
● Do not allow any passengers to
put their hands or head outside
the vehicle while it is moving.
● Do not sit on top of the moon
roof.
■ Opening and closing the
moon roof
● The driver is responsible for
moon roof opening and closing
operations.
In order to prevent accidental
operation, especially by a child,
do not let a child operate the
moon roof. It is possible for chil-
dren and other passengers to
have body parts caught in the
moon roof.
251
4-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof
4
Before driving
WARNING
● Check to make sure that all pas-
sengers do not have any part of
their body in a position where it
could be caught when the moon
roof is being operated.
● When using the wireless remote
control or mechanical key and
operating the moon roof, oper-
ate the moon roof after checking
to make sure that there is no
possibility of any passenger
having any of their body parts
caught in the moon roof. Also,
do not let a child operate moon
roof by the wireless remote con-
trol or mechanical key. It is pos-
sible for children and other
passengers to get caught in the
moon roof.
● When exiting the vehicle, turn
the power switch to OFF, carry
the key and exit the vehicle
along with the child. There may
be accidental operation, due to
mischief, etc., that may possibly
lead to an accident.
■ Jam protection function
● Never use any part of your body
to intentionally activate the jam
protection function.
● The jam protection function may
not work if something gets
caught just before the moon
roof is fully closed. Also, the jam
protection function is not
designed to operate while the
switch is being pressed. Take
care so that your fingers, etc. do
not get caught.
252
4-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof
*
: If equipped
■ Opening and closing the
electronic sunshade
1 Opens the electronic sun-
shade
*
Slide and hold the switch
backward. The electronic sunshade
will fully open automatically.
2 Closes the electronic sun-
shade
*
Slide and hold the switch for-
ward. The electronic sunshade will
fully close automatically.
If the panoramic moon roof is not
fully closed, it will close fully before
the electronic sunshade closes.
*
: Quickly slide and release the
switch in either direction to
stop the electronic sunshade
partway.
■ Tilting the panoramic moon
roof up and down
Press the switch to tilt the
panoramic moon roof up.
*
When the panoramic moon roof is
tilted up, the electronic sunshade
will open to the half-open position
of the roof.
*
: Lightly press the switch
again to stop the panoramic
moon roof partway.
Press and hold the switch
to tilt the panoramic moon roof
down.
The panoramic moon roof can be
tilted down only when it is in the tilt-
up position.
■ Opening and closing the
panoramic moon roof
Opens the panoramic moon
roof
*
Slide and hold the switch
Panoramic moon roof
*
Use the overhead switches
to operate the panoramic
moon roof and electronic
sunshade.
Operating the electronic
sunshade and panoramic
moon roof
253
4-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof
4
Before driving
backward. The panoramic moon
roof and electronic sunshade will
open automatically.
The panoramic moon roof can be
opened from the tilt-up position.
*
: Quickly slide and release the
switch in either direction to
stop the panoramic moon roof
partway.
Closes the panoramic moon
roof
Slide and hold the switch for-
ward. The panoramic moon roof will
fully close automatically.
■ The panoramic moon roof can
be operated when
The power switch is in ON.
■ Operating the panoramic moon
roof after turning the hybrid
system off
The panoramic moon roof and elec-
tronic sunshade can be operated for
approximately 45 seconds after the
power switch is turned to ACC or
OFF. They cannot, however, be
operated once either front door is
opened.
■ Jam protection function
If an object is detected between the
panoramic moon roof and the frame
in the following situations, travel is
stopped and the panoramic moon
roof opens slightly.
● The panoramic moon roof is clos-
ing or tilting down.
● The electronic sunshade is clos-
ing.
■ Closing both the panoramic
moon roof and electronic sun-
shade
Slide the switch forward.
The electronic sunshade will close
to the half-open position and pause.
The panoramic moon roof will then
fully close. Then the electronic sun-
shade will fully close.
■ Door lock linked panoramic
moon roof operation
● The panoramic moon roof can be
opened and closed using the
mechanical key.
*
(P.538)
● The panoramic moon roof can be
opened using the wireless remote
control.
*
(P.198)
● Vehicles with alarm: The alarm
may be triggered if the alarm is set
and the panoramic moon roof is
closed using the door lock linked
panoramic moon roof operation
function. (P.73)
*
: These settings must be custom-
ized at your Toyota dealer.
■ When the panoramic moon roof
or electronic sunshade does
not close normally
Perform the following procedure:
254
4-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof
1 Stop the vehicle.
2 Turn the power switch to ON.
3 Slide and hold the switch
or switch forward. Continue
sliding and holding the switch for
approximately 10 seconds after
the panoramic moon roof or elec-
tronic sunshade closes and
reopens. The panoramic moon
roof and electronic sunshade will
start to close.
*
4 Check that the panoramic moon
roof and electronic sunshade are
fully closed and release the
switch.
*
: If the switch is released at the
incorrect time, the procedure will
have to be performed again from
the beginning.
If the panoramic moon roof or elec-
tronic sunshade does not fully close
even after performing the above
procedure correctly, have the vehi-
cle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
■ Panoramic moon roof open
reminder function
A buzzer sounds and a message is
shown on the multi-information dis-
play when the power switch is
turned to OFF and the driver’s door
is opened with the panoramic moon
roof open.
■ Customization
Settings (e.g. linked door lock oper-
ation) can be changed. (Customiz-
able features: P.576)
WARNING
Observe the following precau-
tions.
Failure to do so may result in
death or serious injury.
■ Opening and closing the elec-
tronic sunshade
● Check to make sure that all pas-
sengers do not have any part of
their body in a position where it
could be caught when the elec-
tronic sunshade is being oper-
ated.
● Do not let a child operate the
electronic sunshade. Closing
the electronic sunshade on
someone can cause death or
serious injury.
■ Opening the panoramic moon
roof
● Do not allow any passengers to
put their hands or head outside
the vehicle while it is moving.
● Do not sit on top of the pan-
oramic moon roof.
■ Opening and closing the pan-
oramic moon roof
● The driver is responsible for
panoramic moon roof opening
and closing operations.
In order to prevent accidental
operation, especially by a child,
do not let a child operate the
panoramic moon roof. It is pos-
sible for children and other pas-
sengers to have body parts
caught in the panoramic moon
roof.
255
4-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof
4
Before driving
WARNING
● Check to make sure that all pas-
sengers do not have any part of
their body in a position where it
could be caught when the pan-
oramic moon roof is being oper-
ated.
● When using the wireless remote
control or mechanical key and
operating the panoramic moon
roof, operate the panoramic
moon roof after checking to
make sure that there is no pos-
sibility of any passenger having
any of their body parts caught in
the panoramic moon roof. Also,
do not let a child operate pan-
oramic moon roof by the wire-
less remote control or
mechanical key. It is possible
for children and other passen-
gers to get caught in the pan-
oramic moon roof.
● When exiting the vehicle, turn
the power switch to OFF, carry
the key and exit the vehicle
along with the child. There may
be accidental operation, due to
mischief, etc., that may possibly
lead to an accident.
■ Jam protection function
● Never use any part of your body
to intentionally activate the jam
protection function.
● The jam protection function may
not work if something gets
caught just before the pan-
oramic moon roof or electronic
sunshade is fully closed. Also,
the jam protection function is
not designed to operate while
the switch is being pressed.
Take care so that your fingers,
etc. do not get caught.
■ To prevent burns or injuries
Do not touch the area between
the underside of the panoramic
moon roof and the electronic sun-
shade. Your hand may get caught
and you could injure yourself.
Also, if the vehicle is left in direct
sunlight for a long time, the under-
side of the panoramic moon roof
could become very hot and could
cause burns.
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the
panoramic moon roof
● Before opening the panoramic
moon roof, make sure that there
are no foreign objects, such as
stones or ice, around the open-
ing.
● Do not hit the surface or edge of
the panoramic moon roof with
hard objects.
■ After the vehicle has been
washed or rained on
Before opening the panoramic
moon roof, wipe any water off the
panoramic moon roof. Otherwise,
water may enter the cabin when
the panoramic moon roof is
opened.
256
4-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof
257
5
5
Driving
Driving
5-1. Before driving
Driving the vehicle....... 258
Cargo and luggage ..... 265
Vehicle load limits ....... 268
Trailer towing .............. 269
Dinghy towing ............. 278
5-2. Driving procedures
Power (ignition) switch 279
Hybrid transmission .... 285
Turn signal lever ......... 289
Parking brake.............. 290
Brake Hold .................. 293
5-3. Operating the lights and
wipers
Headlight switch.......... 295
AHB (Automatic High
Beam)........................ 298
Windshield wipers and
washer....................... 301
Rear window wiper and
washer....................... 304
5-4. Refueling
Opening the fuel tank cap
.................................. 306
5-5. Using the driving support
systems
Toyota Safety Sense 2.0
.................................. 309
PCS (Pre-Collision System)
.................................. 315
LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)
.................................. 323
RSA (Road Sign Assist)
.................................. 333
Dynamic radar cruise con-
trol with full-speed range
.................................. 336
BSM (Blind Spot Monitor)
.................................. 347
Intuitive parking assist. 356
PKSB (Parking Support
Brake)........................ 363
Parking Support Brake func-
tion (static objects) .... 368
Parking Support Brake func-
tion (rear-crossing vehi-
cles)........................... 373
Driving mode select switch
.................................. 377
Trail Mode ................... 379
Driving assist systems. 380
5-6. Driving tips
Winter driving tips........ 387
Utility vehicle precautions
.................................. 390
258
5-1. Before driving
5-1.Before driving
■ Before starting the hybrid
system
Check that the AC charging
cable is disconnected. (P.123)
■ Starting the hybrid system
P.279
■ Driving
1 With the brake pedal
depressed, shift the shift
lever to D. (P.285)
2 Release the parking brake.
(P.290)
If the parking brake is in automatic
mode, the parking brake is
released automatically when shift-
ing the shift lever to any position
other than P. (P.290)
3 Gradually release the brake
pedal and gently depress the
accelerator pedal to acceler-
ate the vehicle.
■ Stopping
1 With the shift lever in D,
depress the brake pedal.
2 If necessary, set the parking
brake. (P.290)
If the vehicle is to be stopped for an
extended period of time, shift the
shift lever to P. (P.285)
■ Parking the vehicle
1 With the shift lever in D,
depress the brake pedal.
2 Set the parking brake
(P.290), and shift the shift
lever to P (P.285).
3 Turn the power switch to
OFF to stop the hybrid sys-
tem.
4 Lock the door, making sure
that you have the key on your
person.
If parking on a hill, block the wheels
as needed.
■ Starting off on a steep
uphill
1 With the brake pedal
depressed, shift the shift
lever to D. (P.285)
2 Pull the parking brake switch
and parking brake is set
manually. (P.290)
3 Release the brake pedal and
gently depress the accelera-
tor pedal to accelerate the
vehicle.
Parking brake automatic release
function (P.291)
■ When starting off on a uphill
The hill-start assist control will acti-
vate. (P.381)
■ For electricity-saving and fuel-
efficient driving
Understand the system characteris-
tics of the vehicle to use the func-
tions of the hybrid system. Also,
keep in mind that hybrid vehicles
are similar to conventional vehicles,
and it is necessary to refrain from
Driving the vehicle
The following procedures
should be observed to
ensure safe driving:
Driving procedure
259
5-1. Before driving
5
Driving
activities such as sudden accelera-
tion. Refer to “Plug-in hybrid vehicle
driving tips” (P.92).
■ Driving in the rain
● Drive carefully when it is raining,
because visibility will be reduced,
the windows may become fogged-
up, and the road could be slip-
pery.
● Drive carefully when it starts to
rain, as the road surface could be
especially slippery.
● Refrain from high speeds when
driving on an expressway in the
rain, because there may be a
layer of water between the tires
and the road surface, preventing
the steering and brakes from
operating properly.
■ ECO Accelerator Guidance
(P.173)
It is easier to drive in an Eco-friendly
manner by driving while referring to
the ECO Accelerator Guidance dis-
play. Also, by using the ECO Accel-
erator Guidance it is easier to
increase the “Eco Score” evaluation.
● When starting off:
While staying within the ECO
Accelerator Guidance range,
gradually depress the accelerator
pedal and accelerate to the
desired speed. If excessive accel-
eration is avoided, the “Start”
score will increase.
● When driving:
After accelerating to the desired
speed, release the accelerator
pedal and drive at a stable speed
within the ECO Accelerator Guid-
ance range. By keeping the vehi-
cle within the ECO Accelerator
Guidance range, the “Cruise”
score will increase.
● When stopping:
When stopping the vehicle, early
releasing the accelerator pedal
will cause the “Stop” score to
increase.
■ Restraining the hybrid system
output (Brake Override System)
● When the accelerator and brake
pedals are depressed at the same
time, the hybrid system output
may be restrained.
● A warning message is displayed
on the multi-information display
and head-up display (if equipped)
while the system is operating.
(P.517)
■ Restraining sudden start (Drive-
Start Control)
● When the following unusual oper-
ation is performed, the hybrid sys-
tem output may be restrained.
• When the shift lever is shifted from
R to D, D to R, N to R, P to D
*
, or
P to R
*
(D includes S) with the
accelerator pedal depressed, a
warning message appears on the
multi-information display and
head-up display (if equipped). If a
warning message is shown on the
multi-information display, read the
message and follow the instruc-
tions.
• When the accelerator pedal is
depressed too much while the
vehicle is in reverse.
*
: Depending on the situation, the
shift lever may not be changed.
● While Drive-Start Control is being
activated, your vehicle may have
trouble escaping from the mud or
fresh snow. In such case, deacti-
vate TRAC (P.382) to cancel
Drive-Start Control so that the
vehicle may be able to escape
from the mud or fresh snow.
● Drive-Start Control does not work
when Trail Mode is turned on.
■ Breaking in your new Toyota
To extend the life of the vehicle,
observing the following precautions
is recommended:
● For the first 200 miles (300 km):
Avoid sudden stops.
260
5-1. Before driving
● For the first 500 miles (800 km):
Do not tow a trailer.
● For the first 600 miles (1000 km):
• Do not drive at extremely high
speeds.
• Avoid sudden acceleration.
• Do not drive continuously in low
gears.
• Do not drive at a constant speed
for extended periods.
■ Operating your vehicle in a for-
eign country
Comply with the relevant vehicle
registration laws and confirm the
availability of the correct fuel.
(P.551)
WARNING
Observe the following precau-
tions.
Failure to do so may result in
death or serious injury.
■ When starting the vehicle
Always keep your foot on the
brake pedal while stopped with
the “READY” indicator is illumi-
nated. This prevents the vehicle
from creeping.
■ When driving the vehicle
● Do not drive if you are unfamil-
iar with the location of the brake
and accelerator pedals to avoid
depressing the wrong pedal.
• Accidentally depressing the
accelerator pedal instead of the
brake pedal will result in sudden
acceleration that may lead to an
accident.
• When backing up, you may twist
your body around, leading to a
difficulty in operating the pedals.
Make sure to operate the pedals
properly.
• Make sure to keep a correct
driving posture even when mov-
ing the vehicle only slightly. This
allows you to depress the brake
and accelerator pedals properly.
• Depress the brake pedal using
your right foot. Depressing the
brake pedal using your left foot
may delay response in an emer-
gency, resulting in an accident.
● The driver should pay extra
attention to pedestrians when
the vehicle is powered only by
the electric motor (traction
motor). As there is no engine
noise, the pedestrians may mis-
judge the vehicle’s movement.
Even though the vehicle is
equipped with the Acoustic
Vehicle Alerting System, drive
with care as pedestrians in the
vicinity may still not notice the
vehicle if the surrounding area
is noisy.
● Do not drive the vehicle over or
stop the vehicle near flammable
materials such as leaves, paper
or rags.
The exhaust system and
exhaust gases can be
extremely hot. These hot parts
may cause a fire if there is any
flammable material nearby.
261
5-1. Before driving
5
Driving
WARNING
● During normal driving, do not
turn off the hybrid system. Turn-
ing the hybrid system off while
driving will not cause loss of
steering or braking control, how-
ever, power assist to the steer-
ing will be lost. This will make it
more difficult to steer smoothly,
so you should pull over and stop
the vehicle as soon as it is safe
to do so.
In the event of an emergency,
such as if it becomes impossible
to stop the vehicle in the normal
way: P.505
● Use engine braking (downshift)
to maintain a safe speed when
driving down a steep hill.
Using the brakes continuously
may cause the brakes to over-
heat and lose effectiveness.
(P.285)
● Do not adjust the position of the
steering wheel, the seat, or the
inside or outside rear view mir-
rors while driving.
Doing so may result in a loss of
vehicle control.
● Always check that all passen-
gers’ arms, head or other parts
of their body are not outside the
vehicle.
● Do not drive in excess of the
speed limit. Even if the legal
speed limit permits it, do not
drive over 85 mph (140 km/h)
unless your vehicle has high-
speed capability tires. Driving
over 85 mph (140 km/h) may
result in tire failure, loss of con-
trol and possible injury. Be sure
to consult a tire dealer to deter-
mine whether the tires on your
vehicle are high-speed capabil-
ity tires or not before driving at
such speeds.
■ When driving on slippery
road surfaces
● Sudden braking, acceleration
and steering may cause tire
slippage and reduce your ability
to control the vehicle.
● Sudden acceleration, engine
braking due to shifting, or
changes in engine speed could
cause the vehicle to skid.
● After driving through a puddle,
lightly depress the brake pedal
to make sure that the brakes
are functioning properly. Wet
brake pads may prevent the
brakes from functioning prop-
erly. If the brakes on only one
side are wet and not functioning
properly, steering control may
be affected.
■ When shifting the shift lever
● Do not let the vehicle roll back-
ward while a forward driving
position is selected, or roll for-
ward while the shift lever is in R.
Doing so may result in an acci-
dent or damage to the vehicle.
● Do not shift the shift lever to P
while the vehicle is moving.
Doing so can damage the trans-
mission and may result in a loss
of vehicle control.
● Do not shift the shift lever to R
while the vehicle is moving for-
ward.
Doing so can damage the trans-
mission and may result in a loss
of vehicle control.
● Do not shift the shift lever to a
driving position while the vehicle
is moving backward.
Doing so can damage the trans-
mission and may result in a loss
of vehicle control.
262
5-1. Before driving
WARNING
● Moving the shift lever to N while
the vehicle is moving will disen-
gage the hybrid system. Engine
braking is not available with the
hybrid system disengaged.
● Be careful not to shift the shift
lever with the accelerator pedal
depressed.
Shifting the shift lever to a gear
other than P or N may lead to
unexpected rapid acceleration
of the vehicle that may cause an
accident and result in death or
serious injury. Doing so can
damage the transmission and
may result in a loss of vehicle
control.
■ If you hear a squealing or
scraping noise (brake pad
wear limit indicators)
Have the brake pads checked and
replaced by your Toyota dealer as
soon as possible.
Rotor damage may result if the
pads are not replaced when
needed.
It is dangerous to drive the vehicle
when the wear limits of the brake
pads and/or those of the brake
discs are exceeded.
■ When the vehicle is stopped
● Do not depress the accelerator
pedal unnecessarily.
If the vehicle is in any gear other
than P or N, the vehicle may
accelerate suddenly and unex-
pectedly, causing an accident.
● In order to prevent accidents
due to the vehicle rolling away,
always keep depressing the
brake pedal while stopped with
the “READY” indicator is illumi-
nated, and apply the parking
brake as necessary.
● If the vehicle is stopped on an
incline, in order to prevent acci-
dents caused by the vehicle roll-
ing forward or backward, always
depress the brake pedal and
securely apply the parking
brake as needed.
● Avoid revving or racing the
engine.
Running the engine at high
speed while the vehicle is
stopped may cause the exhaust
system to overheat, which could
result in a fire if combustible
material is nearby.
■ When the vehicle is parked
● Do not leave glasses, cigarette
lighters, spray cans, or soft
drink cans in the vehicle when it
is in the sun.
Doing so may result in the fol-
lowing:
• Gas may leak from a cigarette
lighter or spray can, and may
lead to a fire.
• The temperature inside the
vehicle may cause the plastic
lenses and plastic material of
glasses to deform or crack.
• Soft drink cans may fracture,
causing the contents to spray
over the interior of the vehicle,
and may also cause a short cir-
cuit in the vehicle’s electrical
components.
● Do not leave cigarette lighters in
the vehicle. If a cigarette lighter
is in a place such as the glove
box or on the floor, it may be lit
accidentally when luggage is
loaded or the seat is adjusted,
causing a fire.
263
5-1. Before driving
5
Driving
WARNING
● Do not attach adhesive discs to
the windshield or windows. Do
not place containers such as air
fresheners on the instrument
panel or dashboard. Adhesive
discs or containers may act as
lenses, causing a fire in the
vehicle.
● Do not leave a door or window
open if the curved glass is
coated with a metallized film
such as a silver-colored one.
Reflected sunlight may cause
the glass to act as a lens, caus-
ing a fire.
● Always apply the parking brake,
shift the shift lever to P, stop the
hybrid system and lock the vehi-
cle.
Do not leave the vehicle unat-
tended while the “READY” indi-
cator is illuminated.
If the vehicle is parked with the
shift lever in P but the parking
brake is not set, the vehicle may
start to move, possibly leading
to an accident.
● Do not touch the exhaust pipes
while the “READY” indicator is
illuminated or immediately after
turning the hybrid system off.
Doing so may cause burns.
■ When taking a nap in the
vehicle
Always turn the hybrid system off.
Otherwise, if you accidentally
move the shift lever or depress
the accelerator pedal, this could
cause an accident or fire due to
hybrid system overheating. Addi-
tionally, if the vehicle is parked in
a poorly ventilated area, exhaust
gases may collect and enter the
vehicle, leading to death or a seri-
ous health hazard.
■ When braking
● When the brakes are wet, drive
more cautiously.
Braking distance increases
when the brakes are wet, and
this may cause one side of the
vehicle to brake differently than
the other side. Also, the parking
brake may not securely hold the
vehicle.
● If the electronically controlled
brake system does not operate,
do not follow other vehicles
closely and avoid hills or sharp
turns that require braking.
In this case, braking is still pos-
sible, but the brake pedal
should be depressed more
firmly than usual. Also, the brak-
ing distance will increase. Have
your brakes fixed immediately.
● The brake system consists of 2
or more individual hydraulic sys-
tems; if one of the systems fails,
the other will still operate. In this
case, the brake pedal should be
depressed more firmly than
usual and the braking distance
will increase. Have your brakes
fixed immediately.
■ If the vehicle becomes stuck
Do not spin the wheels exces-
sively when any of the tires is up
in the air, or the vehicle is stuck in
sand, mud, etc. This may damage
the driveline components or pro-
pel the vehicle forward or back-
ward, causing an accident.
NOTICE
■ When driving the vehicle
● Do not depress the accelerator
and brake pedals at the same
time during driving, as this may
restrain the hybrid system out-
put.
264
5-1. Before driving
NOTICE
● Do not use the accelerator
pedal or depress the accelera-
tor and brake pedals at the
same time to hold the vehicle on
a hill.
■ Avoiding damage to vehicle
parts
● Do not turn the steering wheel
fully in either direction and hold
it there for an extended period
of time.
Doing so may damage the
power steering motor.
● When driving over bumps in the
road, drive as slowly as possible
to avoid damaging the wheels,
underside of the vehicle, etc.
■ If you get a flat tire while driv-
ing
A flat or damaged tire may cause
the following situations.
● It may be difficult to control your
vehicle.
● The vehicle will make abnormal
sounds or vibrations.
● The vehicle will lean abnor-
mally.
Hold the steering wheel firmly and
gradually depress the brake pedal
to slow down the vehicle.
Information on what to do in case
of a flat tire (P.527)
■ When encountering flooded
roads
Do not drive on a road that has
flooded after heavy rain, etc.
Doing so may cause the following
serious damage to the vehicle:
● Engine stalling
● Short in electrical components
● Engine damage caused by
water immersion
In the event that you drive on a
flooded road and the vehicle is
flooded, be sure to have your
Toyota dealer check the following:
● Brake function
● Changes in quantity and quality
of oil and fluid used for the
engine, hybrid transaxle (front
and rear), etc.
● Lubricant condition for the bear-
ings and suspension joints
(where possible), and the func-
tion of all joints, bearings, etc.
■ When parking the vehicle
Always set the parking brake, and
shift the shift lever to P. Failure to
do so may cause the vehicle to
move or the vehicle may acceler-
ate suddenly if the accelerator
pedal is accidentally depressed.
265
5-1. Before driving
5
Driving
Cargo capacity depends on the
total weight of the occupants.
(Cargo capacity) = (Total load
capacity) - (Total weight of occu-
pants)
Steps for Determining Correct
Load Limit
(1) Locate the statement “The
combined weight of occupants
and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your
vehicle’s placard.
(2) Determine the combined
weight of the driver and passen-
gers that will be riding in your
vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined
weight of the driver and passen-
gers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals
the available amount of cargo
and luggage load capacity.
Cargo and luggage
Take notice of the following
information about storage
precautions, cargo capacity
and load.
WARNING
■ Things that must not be car-
ried in the luggage compart-
ment
The following things may cause a
fire if loaded in the luggage com-
partment:
● Receptacles containing gaso-
line
● Aerosol cans
■ Storage precautions
Observe the following precau-
tions.
Failure to do so may prevent the
pedals from being depressed
properly, may block the driver’s
vision, or may result in items hit-
ting the driver or passengers, pos-
sibly causing an accident.
● Stow cargo and luggage in the
luggage compartment when-
ever possible.
● Do not stack anything in the lug-
gage compartment higher than
the seatbacks.
● Do not place cargo or luggage
in or on the following locations.
• At the feet of the driver
• On the front passenger or rear
seats (when stacking items)
• On the luggage cover (if
equipped)
• On the instrument panel
• On the dashboard
● Secure all items in the occupant
compartment.
● When you fold down the rear
seats, long items should not be
placed directly behind the front
seats.
● Never allow anyone to ride in
the luggage compartment. It is
not designed for passengers.
They should ride in their seats
with their seat belts properly
fastened. Otherwise, they are
much more likely to suffer death
or serious bodily injury, in the
event of sudden braking, sud-
den swerving or an accident.
Capacity and distribution
266
5-1. Before driving
For example, if the “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and
there will be five 150 lb passen-
gers in your vehicle, the amount
of available cargo and luggage
load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 -
750 (5 150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined
weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle.
That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and
luggage load capacity calcu-
lated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing
a trailer, load from your trailer
will be transferred to your vehi-
cle. Consult this manual to
determine how this reduces the
available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle.
(P.268)
Cargo capacity
Total load capacity (vehicle
capacity weight) (P.550)
When 2 people with the com-
bined weight of A lb. (kg) are rid-
ing in your vehicle, which has a
total load capacity (vehicle
capacity weight) of B lb. (kg),
the available amount of cargo
and luggage load capacity will
be C lb. (kg) as follows:
B
*2
lb. (kg) - A
*1
lb. (kg) = C
*3
lb.
(kg)
*1
:A = Weight of people
*2
:B = Total load capacity
*3
:C = Available cargo and luggage
load
In this condition, if 3 more passen-
gers with the combined weight of D
lb. (kg) get on, the available cargo
and luggage load will be reduced E
lb. (kg) as follows:
C lb. (kg) - D
*4
lb. (kg) = E
*5
lb.
(kg)
*4
:D = Additional weight of people
*5
:E = Available cargo and luggage
WARNING
■ Capacity and distribution
● Do not exceed the maximum
axle weight rating or the total
vehicle weight rating.
● Even if the total load of occu-
pant’ weight and the cargo load
is less than the total load capac-
ity, do not apply the load
unevenly. Improper loading may
cause deterioration of steering
or braking control which may
cause death or serious injury.
Calculation formula for
your vehicle
A
B
267
5-1. Before driving
5
Driving
load
As shown in the example above,
if the number of occupants
increases, the cargo and lug-
gage load will be reduced by an
amount that equals the
increased weight due to the
additional occupants. In other
words, if an increase in the num-
ber of occupants causes an
excess of the total load capacity
(combined weight of occupants
plus cargo and luggage load),
you must reduce the cargo and
luggage on your vehicle.
WARNING
■ When loading cargo on the
roof luggage carrier (if
equipped)
Observe the following precau-
tions:
● Place the cargo so that its
weight is distributed evenly
between the front and rear
axles.
● If loading long or wide cargo,
never exceed the vehicle overall
length or width. (P.550)
● Before driving, make sure the
cargo is securely fastened on
the roof luggage carrier.
● Loading cargo on the roof lug-
gage carrier will make the cen-
ter of gravity of the vehicle
higher. Avoid high speeds, sud-
den starts, sharp turns, sudden
braking or abrupt maneuvers,
otherwise it may result in loss of
control or vehicle rollover due to
failure to operate this vehicle
correctly and result in death or
serious injury.
● If driving for a long distance, on
rough roads, or at high speeds,
stop the vehicle now and then
during the trip to make sure the
cargo remains in its place.
● Do not exceed 176.4 lb. (80 kg)
cargo weight on the roof lug-
gage carrier.
NOTICE
■ When loading cargo on the
roof luggage carrier (if
equipped)
Be careful not to scratch the sur-
face of the moon roof (if
equipped) or the panoramic moon
roof (if equipped).
268
5-1. Before driving
■ Total load capacity and seating
capacity
These details are also described on
the tire and loading information
label. (P.480)
Vehicle load limits
Vehicle load limits include
total load capacity, seating
capacity, TWR (Trailer
Weight Rating) and cargo
capacity.
Total load capacity (vehicle
capacity weight): P.550
Total load capacity means the
combined weight of occu-
pants, cargo and luggage.
Seating capacity: P.550
Seating capacity means the
maximum number of occu-
pants whose estimated aver-
age weight is 150 lb. (68 kg)
per person.
TWR (Trailer Weight Rat-
ing): P.273, 550
TWR means the maximum
gross trailer weight (trailer
weight plus its cargo weight)
that your vehicle is able to
tow.
Cargo capacity
Cargo capacity may increase
or decrease depending on the
weight and the number of
occupants.
WARNING
■ Overloading the vehicle
Do not overload the vehicle. It
may not only cause damage to
the tires, but also degrade steer-
ing and braking ability, resulting in
an accident.
269
5-1. Before driving
5
Driving
■ Before towing
Check that the following conditions
are met:
● Ensure that your vehicle’s tires
are properly inflated. (P.555)
● Trailer tires are inflated according
to the trailer manufacturer’s rec-
ommendation.
● All trailer lights work as required
by law.
● All lights work each time you con-
nect them.
● The trailer ball is set at the proper
height for the coupler on the
trailer.
● The trailer is level when it is
hitched.
Do not drive if the trailer is not
level, and check for improper
tongue weight, overloading, worn
suspension, or other possible
causes.
● The trailer cargo is securely
loaded.
● The rear view mirrors conform to
all applicable federal, state/provin-
cial or local regulations. If they do
not, install rear view mirrors
appropriate for towing purposes.
Trailer towing
Your vehicle is designed
primarily as a passenger-
and-load-carrying vehicle.
Towing a trailer can have an
adverse impact on handling,
performance, braking, dura-
bility, and fuel consump-
tion. For your safety and the
safety of others, you must
not overload your vehicle or
trailer. You must also
ensure that you are using
appropriate towing equip-
ment, that the towing equip-
ment has been installed
correctly and used properly,
and that you employ the
requisite driving habits.
Vehicle-trailer stability and
braking performance are
affected by trailer stability,
brake performance and set-
ting, trailer brakes, the hitch
and hitch systems (if
equipped).
To tow a trailer safely, use
extreme care and drive the
vehicle in accordance with
your trailer’s characteris-
tics and operating condi-
tions.
Toyota warranties do not
apply to damage or mal-
function caused by towing a
trailer for commercial pur-
poses.
Contact your Toyota dealer for
further information about addi-
tional requirements such as a
towing kit, etc.
270
5-1. Before driving
WARNING
■ Trailer towing precautions
To tow a trailer safely, use
extreme care and drive the vehi-
cle in accordance with the trailer’s
characteristics and operating con-
ditions. Failure to do so could
cause an accident resulting in
death or serious injury. Vehicle
stability and braking performance
are affected by trailer stability,
brake setting and performance,
and the hitch. Your vehicle will
handle differently when towing a
trailer.
■ To avoid accident or injury
● Do not exceed the TWR,
unbraked TWR, GCWR, GVWR
or GAWR.
● Adjust the tongue weight within
the appropriate range. Place
heavier loads as close to the
trailer axle as possible.
● Do not exceed 65 mph (104
km/h), the posted towing speed
limit or the speed limit for your
trailer as set forth in your trailer
owner’s manual, whichever is
lowest. Slow down sufficiently
before making a turn, in cross
winds, on wet or slippery sur-
face, etc. to help avoid an acci-
dent. If you experience a
vehicle-trailer instability from
reducing a certain speed, slow
down and make sure you keep
your vehicle speed under the
speed of which you experience
the instability.
● Do not make jerky, abrupt or
sharp turns.
● Do not apply the brakes sud-
denly as you may skid, resulting
in jackknifing and loss of vehicle
control. This is especially true
on wet or slippery surfaces.
● Do not exceed the trailer hitch
assembly weight, gross vehicle
weight, gross axle weight and
trailer tongue weight capacities.
● Do not use dynamic radar
cruise control with full-speed
range when towing.
● Slow down and downshift
before descending steep or long
downhill grades. Do not make
sudden downshifts while
descending steep or long down-
hill grades.
● Vehicle-trailer instability is more
likely on steep long downhills.
Before descending steep or
long downhill grades, slow
down and downshift. Do not
make sudden downshifts when
descending steep or long down-
hill grades. Avoid holding the
brake pedal down too long or
applying the brakes too fre-
quently. This could cause the
brakes to overheat and result in
reduced braking efficiency.
● Do not tow a trailer when the
compact spare tire is installed
on your vehicle.
■ When towing a trailer
Toyota recommends trailers with
brakes that conform to any appli-
cable federal and state/provincial
regulations.
● If the gross trailer weight
exceeds unbraked TWR, trailer
brakes are required. Toyota rec-
ommends trailers with brakes
that conform to all applicable
federal and state/provincial reg-
ulations.
● Never tap into your vehicle’s
hydraulic system, as this will
lower the vehicle’s braking
effectiveness.
271
5-1. Before driving
5
Driving
■ GCWR (Gross Combination
Weight Rating)
The maximum allowable gross
combination weight. The gross
combination weight is the sum
of the total vehicle weight
(including the occupants, cargo
and any optional equipment
installed on the vehicle) and the
weight of the trailer being towed
(including the cargo in the
trailer).
■ GVWR (Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating)
The maximum allowable gross
vehicle weight. The gross vehi-
cle weight is the total weight of
the vehicle. When towing a
trailer, it is the sum of the vehi-
cle weight (including the occu-
pants, cargo and any optional
equipment installed on the vehi-
cle) and the tongue weight.
■ GAWR (Gross Axle Weight
Rating)
The maximum allowable gross
axle weight. The gross axle
weight is the load placed on
each axle (front and rear).
Front GAWR
Rear GAWR
■ TWR (Trailer Weight Rating)
The maximum allowable gross
trailer weight. The gross trailer
weight is the sum of the trailer
weight and the weight of the
cargo in the trailer.
TWR is calculated assuming
WARNING
● Never tow a trailer without using
a safety chain securely attached
to both the trailer and the vehi-
cle. If damage occurs to the
coupling unit or hitch ball, there
is danger of the trailer wander-
ing into another lane.
Towing related terms
A
B
272
5-1. Before driving
base vehicle with one driver,
one front passenger, hitch and
hitch systems (if required).
Additional optional equipment, pas-
sengers and cargo in the vehicle
will reduce the trailer weight rating
so as not to exceed GCWR, GVWR
and GAWR.
(With brakes)
■ Unbraked TWR (Unbraked
Trailer Weight Rating)
The trailer weight rating for tow-
ing a trailer without a trailer ser-
vice brake system.
(Without brakes)
■ Tongue Weight
The load placed on the trailer
hitch ball. (P.273)
The gross trailer weight must
never exceed 2500 lb. (1135
kg).
The gross combination weight
must never exceed 8030 lb.
(3645 kg).
The gross vehicle weight
must never exceed the
GVWR indicated on the Certi-
fication Regulation Label.
The gross axle weight on
each axle must never exceed
the GAWR indicated on the
Certification Regulation Label.
If the gross trailer weight is
over the unbraked TWR,
trailer service brakes are
required.
A
A
Weight limits
273
5-1. Before driving
5
Driving
Confirm that the gross trailer
weight, gross combination
weight, gross vehicle weight,
gross axle weight and tongue
weight are all within the limits.
■ GCWR
*
8030 lb. (3645 kg)
*
: This model meets the tow-vehicle
trailering requirement of SAE
International per SAE J2807.
■ TWR
*
2500 lb. (1135 kg)
*
: This model meets the tow-vehicle
trailering requirement of SAE
International per SAE J2807.
■ Unbraked TWR
*
1000 lb. (450 kg)
*
: This model meets the tow-vehicle
trailering requirement of SAE
International per SAE J2807.
A recommended tongue
weight varies in accordance
with the types of trailers or
towing as described below.
To ensure the recommended
values shown below, the
trailer must be loaded by
referring to the following
instructions.
• Tongue Weight
The gross trailer weight should be
distributed so that the tongue
weight is 9% to 11%.
(Tongue weight /Gross trailer
weight x 100 = 9% to 11%)
Gross trailer weight
Tongue weight
The gross trailer weight, gross
axle weight and tongue weight
can be measured with platform
scales found at a highway
weighing station, building supply
company, trucking company,
junk yard, etc.
Trailer hitch assemblies have
different weight capacities.
Toyota recommends the use of
Toyota hitch/bracket for your
vehicle. For details, contact your
Toyota dealer.
If you wish to install a trailer
hitch, contact your Toyota
dealer.
Use only a hitch that con-
forms to the gross trailer
weight requirement of your
vehicle.
Follow the directions supplied
GCWR, TWR and
Unbraked TWR
Trailer Tongue Weight
Hitch
A
B
274
5-1. Before driving
by the hitch manufacturer.
Lubricate the hitch ball with a
light coating of grease.
Remove the hitch ball when-
ever you are not towing a
trailer. Remove the trailer
hitch if you do not need it.
After removing the hitch, seal
any mounting holes in the
vehicle body to prevent entry
of any substances into the
vehicle.
Weight carrying ball position:
43.3 in. (1100 mm)
Hitch receiver pin hole posi-
tion: 38.1 in. (969 mm)
■ Matching trailer ball height to
trailer coupler height
No matter which class of tow hitch
applies, for a more safe trailer
hookup, the trailer ball setup must
be the proper height for the coupler
on the trailer.
Coupler
Trailer ball
WARNING
■ Hitch
Trailer hitch assemblies have dif-
ferent weight capacities estab-
lished by the hitch manufacturer.
Even though the vehicle may be
physically capable of towing a
higher weight, the operator must
determine the maximum weight
rating of the particular hitch
assembly and never exceed the
maximum weight rating specified
for the trailer-hitch. Exceeding the
maximum weight rating set by the
trailer-hitch manufacturer can
cause an accident resulting in
death or serious personal injuries.
NOTICE
■ When installing a trailer hitch
Use only the position recom-
mended by your Toyota dealer.
Do not install the trailer hitch on
the bumper; this may cause body
damage.
Positions for towing hitch
receiver and hitch ball
A
B
A
B
275
5-1. Before driving
5
Driving
Please consult your dealer
when installing trailer lights, as
incorrect installation may cause
damage to the vehicle’s lights.
Please take care to comply with
your state’s laws when installing
trailer lights.
Your vehicle will handle differ-
ently when towing a trailer. Help
to avoid an accident, death or
serious injury, keep the follow-
ing in mind when towing:
Speed limits for towing a
trailer vary by state or prov-
ince. Do not exceed the
posted towing speed limit.
Toyota recommends that the
vehicle-trailer speed limit is 65
mph (104 km/h) on a flat,
straight, dry road. Do not
exceed this limit, the posted
towing speed limit or the
speed limit for your trailer as
set forth in your trailer owner’s
manual, whichever is lowest.
Instability of the towing vehi-
cle-trailer combination (trailer
sway) increases as speed
increases. Exceeding speed
limits may cause loss of con-
trol.
Before starting out, check the
trailer lights, tires and the
vehicle-trailer connections.
Recheck after driving a short
distance.
Practice turning, stopping and
reversing with the trailer
attached in an area away
from traffic until you become
accustomed to the feel of the
vehicle-trailer combination.
Reversing with a trailer
attached is difficult and
requires practice. Grip the
bottom of the steering wheel
and move your hand to the
left to move the trailer to the
left. Move your hand to the
right to move the trailer to
right. (This is generally oppo-
site to reversing without a
trailer attached.) Avoid sharp
or prolonged turning. Have
someone guide you when
reversing to reduce the risk of
an accident.
As stopping distance is
increased when towing a
trailer, vehicle-to vehicle dis-
tance should be increased.
For each 10 mph (16 km/h) of
speed, allow at least one
vehicle and trailer length.
Avoid sudden braking as you
may skid, resulting in the
trailer jackknifing and a loss of
Connecting trailer lights
NOTICE
■ Do not directly splice trailer
lights
Do not directly splice trailer lights.
Directly splicing trailer lights may
damage your vehicle’s electrical
system and cause a malfunction.
Trailer towing tips
276
5-1. Before driving
vehicle control. This is espe-
cially true on wet or slippery
surfaces.
Avoid jerky starts or sudden
acceleration.
Avoid jerky steering and
sharp turns, and slow down
before making turn.
Note that when making a turn,
the trailer wheels will be
closer than the vehicle wheels
to the inside of the turn. Com-
pensate by making a wider
than normal turning radius.
Slow down before making a
turn, in cross winds, on wet or
slippery surfaces, etc.
Increasing vehicle speed can
destabilize the trailer.
Take care when passing other
vehicles. Passing requires
considerable distance. After
passing a vehicle, do not for-
get the length of your trailer,
and be sure you have plenty
of room before changing
lanes.
To maintain engine braking
efficiency, when using engine
braking, do not use the trans-
mission in D.
Instability happens more fre-
quently when descending
steep or long downhill grades.
Before descending, slow
down and downshift. Do not
make sudden downshifts
while descending steep or
long downhill grades.
Avoid holding the brake pedal
down too long or applying the
brakes too frequently. This
could cause the brakes to
overheat and result in
reduced braking efficiency.
Due to the added load of the
trailer, your vehicle’s hybrid
system may overheat on hot
days (at temperatures over
85°F [30°C]) when driving up
a long or steep grade. If the
high coolant temperature
warning light indicates over-
heating, immediately turn off
the air conditioning (if in use),
pull your vehicle off the road
and stop in a safe spot.
(P.544)
Always place wheel blocks
under both the vehicle’s and
the trailer’s wheels when
parking. Apply the parking
brake firmly, and put the
transmission in P. Avoid park-
ing on a slope, but if unavoid-
able, do so only after
performing the following:
1 Apply the brakes and keep
them applied.
2 Have someone place wheel
blocks under both the vehi-
cle’s and trailer’s wheels.
3 When the wheel blocks are in
place, release the brakes
slowly until the blocks absorb
the load.
277
5-1. Before driving
5
Driving
4 Apply the parking brake
firmly.
5 Shift into P and turn off the
hybrid system.
When restarting after parking
on a slope:
1 With the transmission in P,
start the hybrid system. Be
sure to keep the brake pedal
depressed.
2 Shift into a forward gear. If
reversing, shift into R.
3 If the parking brake is in man-
ual mode, release the park-
ing brake. (P.290)
4 Release the brake pedal, and
slowly pull or back away from
the wheel blocks. Stop and
apply the brakes.
5 Have someone retrieve the
blocks.
■ Break-in schedule
If your vehicle is new or equipped
with any new power train compo-
nents (such as an engine, transmis-
sion, differential or wheel bearing),
Toyota recommends that you do not
tow a trailer until the vehicle has
been driven for over 500 miles (800
km).
After the vehicle has been driven for
over 500 miles (800 km), you can
start towing. However, for the next
500 miles (800 km), drive the vehi-
cle at a speed of less than 45 mph
(72 km/h) when towing a trailer, and
avoid full throttle acceleration.
■ Maintenance
● If you tow a trailer, your vehicle
will require more frequent mainte-
nance due to the additional load.
(See “Scheduled Maintenance
Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Sup-
plement”.)
● Retighten the fixing bolts of the
towing ball and bracket after
approximately 600 miles (1000
km) of trailer towing.
■ If trailer sway occurs
One or more factors (crosswinds,
passing vehicles, rough roads, etc.)
can adversely affect handling of
your vehicle and trailer, causing
instability.
● If trailer swaying occurs:
• Firmly grip the steering wheel.
Steer straight ahead.
Do not try to control trailer sway-
ing by turning the steering wheel.
• Begin releasing the accelerator
pedal immediately but very gradu-
ally to reduce speed.
Do not increase speed. Do not
apply vehicle brakes.
If you make no extreme correction
with the steering or brakes, your
vehicle and trailer should stabilize (if
enabled, Trailer Sway Control can
also help to stabilize the vehicle and
trailer.).
● After the trailer swaying has
stopped:
• Stop in a safe place. Get all occu-
pants out of the vehicle.
• Check the tires of the vehicle and
the trailer.
• Check the load in the trailer.
Make sure the load has not
shifted.
Make sure the tongue weight is
appropriate, if possible.
• Check the load in the vehicle.
Make sure the vehicle is not over-
loaded after occupants get in.
If you cannot find any problems, the
speed at which trailer swaying
occurred is beyond the limit of your
particular vehicle-trailer combina-
tion. Drive at a lower speed to pre-
vent instability. Remember that
278
5-1. Before driving
swaying of the towing vehicle-trailer
increases as speed increases.
Dinghy towing
Your vehicle is not designed
to be dinghy towed (with 4
wheels on the ground)
behind a motor home.
NOTICE
■ To avoid serious damage to
your vehicle
Do not tow your vehicle with 4
wheels on the ground.
■ To prevent causing serious
damage to the transmission
and AWD system
Never tow this vehicle with any of
the wheels on the ground. This
may cause serious damage to the
transmission and AWD system.
279
5-2. Driving procedures
5
Driving
5-2.Driving procedures
1 Check that the AC charging
cable is disconnected.
(P.123)
2 Pull the parking brake switch
to check that the parking
brake is set. (P.290)
The parking brake indicator will
come on.
3 Check that the shift lever is
set in P.
4 Firmly depress the brake
pedal.
and a message will be dis-
played on the multi-information dis-
play.
If it is not displayed, the hybrid sys-
tem cannot be started.
5 Press the power switch
shortly and firmly.
When operating the power switch,
one short, firm press is enough. It is
not necessary to press and hold the
switch.
If the “READY” indicator turns on,
the hybrid system will operate nor-
mally.
Continue depressing the brake
pedal until the “READY” indicator is
illuminated.
The hybrid system can be started
from any power switch mode.
6 Check that the “READY” indi-
cator is illuminated.
The vehicle will not move when the
“READY” indicator is off.
■ Power switch illumination
According to the situation, the
power switch illumination operates
as follows.
● When driver’s door or front pas-
senger’s door is opened, the
power switch illumination illumi-
nates.
● When the power switch is in OFF
and depressing the brake pedal
with carrying the electronic key on
your person, the power switch illu-
mination blinks.
● When the power switch is in ACC
or ON, the power switch illumina-
tion illuminates.
● When the power switch mode is
changed from ACC or ON to OFF,
the power switch illumination illu-
minates for a certain amount of
time. Afterwards, the power switch
illumination turns off.
■ If the hybrid system does not
start
● The immobilizer system may not
have been deactivated. (P.72)
Contact your Toyota dealer.
● If a message related to start-up is
shown on the multi-information
Power (ignition)
switch
Performing the following
operations when carrying
the electronic key on your
person starts the hybrid
system or changes power
switch modes.
Starting the hybrid sys-
tem
280
5-2. Driving procedures
display, read the message and fol-
low the instructions.
■ When the ambient temperature
is low, such as during winter
driving conditions
● When starting the hybrid system,
the flashing time of the “READY”
indicator may be long. Leave the
vehicle as it is until the “READY”
indicator is steady on, as steady
means the vehicle is able to move.
● When the hybrid battery (traction
battery) is extremely cold (below
approximately -22°F [-30°C])
under the influence of the outside
temperature, it may not be possi-
ble to start the hybrid system. In
this case, try to start the hybrid
system again after the tempera-
ture of the hybrid battery
increases due to the outside tem-
perature increase etc.
■ Sounds and vibrations specific
to a hybrid vehicle
P.83
■ If the 12-volt battery is dis-
charged
The hybrid system cannot be
started using the smart key system.
Refer to P.539 to restart the hybrid
system.
■ Electronic key battery depletion
P.194
■ Conditions affecting operation
P.218
■ Note for the entry function
P.219
■ Steering lock function
● After turning the power switch to
OFF and opening and closing the
doors, the steering wheel will be
locked due to the steering lock
function. Operating the power
switch again automatically can-
cels the steering lock.
● When the steering lock cannot be
released, “Push power switch
while turning the steering wheel in
either direction” will be displayed
on the multi-information display.
Check that the shift lever is set in
P. Press the power switch shortly
and firmly while turning the steer-
ing wheel left and right.
● To prevent the steering lock motor
from overheating, the motor may
be suspended if the hybrid system
is turned on and off repeatedly in
a short period of time. In this case,
refrain from operating the power
switch. After about 10 seconds,
the steering lock motor will
resume functioning.
■ If there is a malfunction in the
smart key system
If “Smart Key System Malfunction”
is displayed on the multi-information
display, the system may be mal-
functioning. Have the vehicle
inspected by your Toyota dealer
immediately.
■ If the “READY” indicator does
not come on
In the event that the “READY” indi-
cator does not come on even after
performing the proper procedures
for starting the vehicle, contact your
Toyota dealer immediately.
■ When “Check Fuel Cap” is dis-
played on the multi-information
display
P.308
■ If the hybrid system is malfunc-
tioning
P.92
■ Electronic key battery
P.493
281
5-2. Driving procedures
5
Driving
■ Operation of the power switch
● If the switch is not pressed shortly
and firmly, the power switch mode
may not change or the hybrid sys-
tem may not start.
● If attempting to restart the hybrid
system immediately after turning
the power switch to OFF, the
hybrid system may not start in
some cases. After turning the
power switch to OFF, please wait
a few seconds before restarting
the hybrid system.
■ Customization
If the smart key system has been
deactivated in a customized setting,
refer to P.538.
1 Stop the vehicle completely.
2 If the parking brake is in man-
ual mode, set the parking
brake. (P.290)
Check the parking brake indicator
is illuminated.
3 Shift the shift lever to P.
4 Press the power switch
shortly and firmly.
The hybrid system will stop, and the
meter display will be extinguished.
Release the shift lever when press-
ing the power switch.
5 Release the brake pedal and
check that “ACCESSORY” or
“IGNITION ON” is not shown
on the multi-information dis-
play.
■ Automatic hybrid system shut
off feature
● The vehicle is equipped with a
feature that automatically shuts off
the hybrid system when the shift
lever is in P with the hybrid system
operating for an extended period.
● The hybrid system will automati-
cally shut off after approximately 1
hour if it has been left operating
while the shift lever is in P.
WARNING
■ When starting the hybrid sys-
tem
Always start the hybrid system
while sitting in the driver’s seat.
Do not depress the accelerator
pedal while starting the hybrid
system under any circumstances.
Doing so may cause an accident
resulting in death or serious
injury.
■ Caution while driving
If hybrid system failure occurs
while the vehicle is moving, do not
lock or open the doors until the
vehicle reaches a safe and com-
plete stop. Activation of the steer-
ing lock in this circumstance may
lead to an accident, resulting in
death or serious injury.
NOTICE
■ When starting the hybrid sys-
tem
If the hybrid system becomes diffi-
cult to start, have your vehicle
checked by your Toyota dealer
immediately.
■ Symptoms indicating a mal-
function with the power
switch
If the power switch seems to be
operating somewhat differently
than usual, such as the switch
sticking slightly, there may be a
malfunction. Contact your Toyota
dealer immediately.
Stopping the hybrid sys-
tem
282
5-2. Driving procedures
● The message asking if you wish to
enable/disable the automatic
hybrid system shut off feature will
sometimes be displayed on the
multi-information display.
Leaving the vehicle as is or select-
ing “Perform Auto Off” keeps the
automatic hybrid system shut off
feature enabled, and selecting
“Keep Vehicle On” disables the
automatic hybrid system shut off
feature.
● The timer for the automatic hybrid
system shut off feature will reset if
the brake pedal is depressed or if
the shift lever is in a position other
than P.
● After the vehicle is parked, if the
door is locked with the door lock
switch (P.201) from the inside
or the mechanical key (P.537)
from the outside, the automatic
hybrid system shut off feature will
be disabled. The timer for the
automatic hybrid system shut off
feature will be re-enabled if the
driver’s door is opened.
WARNING
■ Stopping the hybrid system
in an emergency
● If you want to stop the hybrid
system in an emergency while
driving the vehicle, press and
hold the power switch for more
than 2 seconds, or press it
briefly 3 times or more in suc-
cession. (P.505)
However, do not touch the
power switch while driving
except in an emergency. Turn-
ing the hybrid system off while
driving will not cause a loss of
steering or braking control.
However, power assist for the
steering wheel may be lost mak-
ing it difficult to steer smoothly
before stopping the vehicle
depending on the remaining
charge in the 12-volt battery or
usage conditions. In this situa-
tion, you should pull over and
stop the vehicle as soon as it is
safe to do so.
● If the power switch is operated
while the vehicle is running, a
warning message will be shown
on the multi-information display
and a buzzer sounds.
● When restarting the hybrid sys-
tem after an emergency shut-
down, shift the shift lever to N
and press the power switch
shortly and firmly.
283
5-2. Driving procedures
5
Driving
Modes can be changed by
pressing the power switch with
the brake pedal released. (The
mode changes each time the
switch is pressed.)
1 OFF
*
The emergency flashers can be
used.
2 ACC
Some electrical components such
as the audio system can be used.
“ACCESSORY” will be displayed
on the multi-information display.
3 ON
All electrical components can be
used.
“IGNITION ON” will be displayed on
the multi-information display.
*
: If the shift lever is in a position
other than P when turning off the
hybrid system, the power switch
will remain ON, will not turn to
OFF.
■ Auto power off function
● If the vehicle is left in ACC or ON
(the hybrid system is not operat-
ing) for more than 20 minutes with
the shift lever in P, the power
switch will automatically turn to
OFF.
● If the 12-volt battery is low with the
shift lever is in P and the power
switch is in ACC or ON (the hybrid
system is not operating), a buzzer
WARNING
■ When parking
Exhaust gases include harmful
carbon monoxide (CO), which is
colorless and odorless. Observe
the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause
exhaust gases to enter the vehicle
and may lead to an accident
caused by light-headedness, or
may lead to death or a serious
health hazard.
● If the vehicle is in a poorly venti-
lated area or a closed area,
such as a garage, stop the
hybrid system.
● Do not leave the vehicle with
the hybrid system operating for
a long time. If such a situation
cannot be avoided, park the
vehicle in an open space and
ensure that exhaust fumes do
not enter the vehicle interior.
● Do not leave the hybrid system
operating in an area with snow
build-up, or where it is snowing.
If snowbanks build up around
the vehicle while the hybrid sys-
tem is operating, exhaust gases
may collect and enter the vehi-
cle.
Changing power switch
modes
284
5-2. Driving procedures
sounds and a message will be dis-
played on the multi-information
display. If this continues, the
power switch is automatically turn
to OFF.
However, this function cannot
entirely prevent the 12-volt battery
discharge. Do not leave the vehicle
with the power switch in ACC or ON
for long periods of time when the
hybrid system is not operating.
If the hybrid system is stopped
with the shift lever in a position
other than P, the power switch
will not be turned to OFF but
instead be turned to ACC. Per-
form the following procedure to
turn the switch to OFF:
1 Check that the parking brake
is set.
2 Shift the shift lever to P.
3 Check that “IGNITION ON” is
displayed on the multi-infor-
mation display and press the
power switch shortly and
firmly.
4 Check that “ACCESSORY”
or “IGNITION ON” on the
multi-information display is
off.
NOTICE
■ To prevent 12-volt battery dis-
charge
● Do not leave the power switch
in ACC or ON for long periods of
time without the hybrid system
on.
● If “ACCESSORY” or “IGNITION
ON” is displayed on the multi-
information display, the power
switch is not in OFF. Exit the
vehicle after turning the power
switch to OFF.
When stopping the hybrid
system with the shift lever
in a position other than P
NOTICE
■ To prevent 12-volt battery dis-
charge
Do not stop the hybrid system
when the shift lever is in a position
other than P. If the hybrid system
is stopped in another shift lever
position, the power switch will not
be turned to OFF but instead
remain ON. If the vehicle is left in
ON, 12-volt battery discharge
may occur.
285
5-2. Driving procedures
5
Driving
*1
:To improve fuel efficiency and
reduce noise, shift the shift lever
to D for normal driving.
*2
:Vehicles with paddle shift
switches only: Selecting shift
ranges in the D position allows
suitable use of engine braking.
(P.287)
*3
:By selecting shift ranges using S
mode, you can control accelerat-
ing force and engine braking
force.
■ When driving with dynamic
radar cruise control with full-
speed range activated
Even when performing the following
actions with the intent of enabling
engine braking, engine braking will
not activate because dynamic radar
cruise control with full-speed range
will not be canceled.
● While driving in S mode, down-
shifting to 5 or 4. (P.288)
● When switching the driving mode
to sport mode while driving in D
position. (P.377)
■ Restraining sudden start (Drive-
Start Control)
P.259
Hybrid transmission
Select the shift position
depending on your purpose
and situation.
Shift position purpose
and functions
Shift
position
Objective or function
P
Parking the vehi-
cle/starting the hybrid
system
R Reversing
N Neutral
D
Normal driving
*1, 2
S
S mode driving
*3
WARNING
■ When driving on slippery
road surfaces
Be careful of downshifting and
sudden acceleration, as this could
result in the vehicle skidding to
the side or spinning.
NOTICE
■ Hybrid battery (traction bat-
tery) charge
If the shift lever is in N, the hybrid
battery (traction battery) will not
be charging, even when the
engine is running. Therefore, if
the vehicle is left with the shift
lever in N for a long period of
time, the hybrid battery (traction
battery) will discharge, and this
may result in the vehicle not being
able to start.
286
5-2. Driving procedures
While the power switch
is in ON and the brake pedal
depressed
*
, shift the shift lever
while pushing the shift release
button on the shift knob.
Shift the shift lever while
pushing the shift release button
on the shift knob.
Shift the shift lever nor-
mally.
When shifting the shift lever
between P and D, make sure that
the vehicle is completely stopped
and the brake pedal is depressed.
*
: For the vehicle to be able to be
shifted from P, the brake pedal
must be depressed before the
shift release button is pushed. If
the shift release button is pushed
first, the shift lock will not be
released.
■ Shift lock system
The shift lock system is a system to
prevent accidental operation of the
shift lever in starting.
The shift lever can be shifted from P
only when the power switch is in
ON, the brake pedal is depressed
and the shift release button is
pushed.
■ If the shift lever cannot be
shifted from P
First, check whether the brake pedal
is being depressed.
If the shift lever cannot be shifted
even though the brake pedal is
depressed and the shift release but-
ton is pushed, there may be a prob-
lem with the shift lock system. Have
the vehicle inspected by your
Toyota dealer immediately.
The following steps may be used as
an emergency measure to ensure
that the shift lever can be shifted.
Releasing the shift lock:
1 Pull the parking brake switch to
check that the parking brake is
set. (P.290)
2 Turn the power switch off.
3 Depress the brake pedal.
4 Pry the cover up with a flathead
screwdriver or equivalent tool.
To prevent damage to the cover,
cover the tip of the screwdriver
with a rag.
5 Press and hold the shift lock
override button and then push
the button on the shift knob.
Shifting the shift lever
287
5-2. Driving procedures
5
Driving
The shift lever can be shifted
while both buttons are pressed.
P.377
To drive using temporary shift
range selection, operate the “-”
paddle shift switch. The shift
range can then be selected by
operating the “-” and “+” paddle
shift switches. Changing the
shift range allows restriction of
the highest gear, preventing
upshifting and enabling the level
of engine braking force to be
selected.
1 Upshifting
2 Downshifting
The selected shift range, from D1 to
D6, will be displayed on the multi-
information display.
■ Shift ranges and their functions
● You can choose from 6 levels of
accelerating force and engine
braking force.
● A lower shift range will provide
greater accelerating force and
engine braking force than a higher
shift range, and the engine revolu-
tions will also increase.
■ Downshifting restriction warn-
ing buzzer
To help ensure safety and driving
performance, downshifting opera-
tion may sometimes be restricted. In
some circumstances, downshifting
may not be possible even when the
paddle shift switch is operated. (A
buzzer will sound twice.)
■ Automatic deactivation of shift
range selection in the D posi-
tion
Shift range selection in the D posi-
tion will be deactivated in the follow-
ing situations:
● When the vehicle comes to a stop
● If the accelerator pedal is
WARNING
■ To prevent an accident when
releasing the shift lock
Before pressing the shift lock
override button, make sure to set
the parking brake and depress the
brake pedal.
If the accelerator pedal is acci-
dentally depressed instead of the
brake pedal when the shift lock
override button is pressed and the
shift lever is shifted out of P, the
vehicle may suddenly start, possi-
bly leading to an accident result-
ing in death or serious injury.
Selecting the driving
mode
Selecting shift ranges in
the D position (vehicles
with paddle shift
switches)
288
5-2. Driving procedures
depressed for more than a certain
period of time
● When the shift lever is shifted to a
position other than D
● When the “+” paddle shift switch is
held down for a period of time
When the shift lever is in the S
position, the shift lever or paddle
shift switches (if equipped) can
be operated as follows:
1 Upshifting
2 Downshifting
The selected shift range, from S1 to
S6, will be displayed on the multi-
information display.
The initial shift range in S mode
is set automatically to S4.
*
*
: It is set to S3 when the driving
mode is set to sport mode.
(P.377)
■ S mode
● You can choose from 6 levels of
accelerating force and engine
braking force.
● A lower shift range will provide
greater accelerating force and
engine braking force than a higher
shift range, and the engine revolu-
tions will also increase.
● To prevent the engine from over-
revving, upshifting may automati-
cally occur when the shift range is
3 or lower.
● When the shift range is 4 or lower,
holding the shift lever toward “+”
sets the shift range to 6.
■ Downshifting restriction warn-
ing buzzer
To help ensure safety and driving
performance, downshifting opera-
tion may sometimes be restricted. In
some circumstances, downshifting
may not be possible even when the
shift lever or paddle shift switches (if
equipped) is operated. (A buzzer
will sound twice.)
■ If the “S” indicator does not
come on or the “D” indicator is
displayed even after shifting the
shift lever to S
This may indicate a malfunction in
the transmission system. Have the
vehicle inspected by your Toyota
dealer immediately. (In this situa-
tion, the transmission will operate in
the same manner as when the shift
lever is in D.)
Changing shift ranges in
S mode
289
5-2. Driving procedures
5
Driving
1 Right turn
2 Lane change to the right
(move the lever partway and
release it)
The right hand signals will flash 3
times.
3 Lane change to the left
(move the lever partway and
release it)
The left hand signals will flash 3
times.
4 Left turn
■ Turn signals can be operated
when
The power switch is in ON.
■ If the indicator flashes faster
than usual
Check that a light bulb in the front or
rear turn signal lights has not
burned out.
■ If the turn signals stop flashing
before a lane change has been
performed
Operate the lever again.
■ To discontinue flashing of the
turn signals during a lane
change
Operate the lever in the opposite
direction.
Turn signal lever
Operating instructions
290
5-2. Driving procedures
■ Using the manual mode
The parking brake can be set
and released manually.
Parking brake indicator light
(U.S.A.)
Parking brake indicator light
(Canada)
Parking brake switch indica-
tor
1 Pull the switch to set the
parking brake.
The parking brake indicator light
and Parking brake switch indicator
will turn on.
Pull and hold the parking brake
switch if an emergency occurs and
it is necessary to operate the park-
ing brake while driving.
2 Push the switch to release
the parking brake.
• Operate the parking brake switch
while depressing the brake pedal.
• Parking brake automatic release
function (P.291)
Make sure that the parking brake
indicator light and parking brake
switch indicator turn off.
If the parking brake indicator
light and parking brake switch
indicator flash, operate the
switch again. (P.517)
■ Turning the automatic
mode on
While the vehicle is stopped,
pull and hold the parking brake
switch until a buzzer sounds and
a message is shown on the
multi-information display.
When the automatic mode is
turned on, the parking brake
operates as follows.
Parking brake
The parking brake can be
set or released automati-
cally or manually. In auto-
matic mode, the parking
brake can be set or released
automatically according to
shift lever operation. Also,
even in automatic mode, the
parking brake can be set or
released manually.
Operating instructions
A
B
C
291
5-2. Driving procedures
5
Driving
When the shift lever is shifted
from P, the parking brake will
be released, and the parking
brake indicator light and park-
ing brake switch indicator will
turn off.
When the shift lever is shifted
to P, the parking brake will be
set, and the parking brake
indicator light and parking
brake switch indicator will turn
on.
Operate the shift lever with the
vehicle stopped and the brake
pedal depressed.
■ Turning the automatic
mode off
While the vehicle is stopped and
depressing the brake pedal,
press and hold the parking
brake switch until a buzzer
sounds and a message is
shown on the multi-information
display.
■ Parking brake operation
● When the power switch is not in
ON, the parking brake cannot be
released using the parking brake
switch.
● When the power switch is not in
ON, automatic mode (automatic
brake setting and releasing) is not
available.
■ Parking brake automatic
release function
The parking brake will be released
automatically when the accelerator
pedal is slowly depressed under the
following conditions:
● The driver’s door is closed
● The driver is wearing the seat belt
● The shift lever is in a forward or
reverse position.
● The malfunction indicator lamp or
brake system warning light is not
illuminated
If the automatic release function
does not operate, release the park-
ing brake manually.
■ If “Parking Brake Temporarily
Unavailable” is displayed on
the multi-information display
If the parking brake is operated
repeatedly over a short period of
time, the system may restrict opera-
tion to prevent overheating. If this
happens, refrain from operating the
parking brake. Normal operation will
return after about 1 minute.
■ If “Parking Brake Unavailable”
is displayed on the multi-infor-
mation display
Operate the parking brake switch. If
the message does not disappear
after operating the switch several
times, the system may be malfunc-
tioning. Have the vehicle inspected
by your Toyota dealer.
■ Parking brake operation sound
When the parking brake operates, a
motor sound (whirring sound) may
be heard. This does not indicate a
malfunction.
■ Parking brake indicator light
● Depending on the power switch
mode, the parking brake indicator
light will turn on and stay on as
292
5-2. Driving procedures
described below:
ON: Comes on until the parking
brake is released.
Not in ON: Stays on for approxi-
mately 15 seconds.
● When the power switch is turned
off with the parking brake set, the
parking brake indicator light will
stay on for about 15 seconds. This
does not indicate a malfunction.
■ When the parking brake switch
malfunctions
Automatic mode (automatic brake
setting and releasing) will be turned
on automatically.
■ Parking the vehicle
P.258
■ Parking brake engaged warning
buzzer
A buzzer will sound if the vehicle is
driven with the parking brake
engaged. “Parking Brake ON” is dis-
played on the multi-information dis-
play (with the vehicle reaching a
speed of 5 km/h [3 mph]).
■ If the brake system warning
light comes on
P.511
■ Usage in winter time
P.388
WARNING
■ When parking the vehicle
Do not leave a child in the vehicle
alone. The parking brake may be
released unintentionally by a child
and there is the danger of the
vehicle moving that may lead to
an accident resulting in death or
serious injury.
■ Parking brake switch
Do not set any objects near the
parking brake switch. Objects
may interfere with the switch and
may lead the parking brake to
unexpectedly operate.
NOTICE
■ When parking the vehicle
Before you leave the vehicle, shift
the shift lever to P, set the parking
brake and make sure that the
vehicle does not move.
■ When the system malfunc-
tions
Stop the vehicle in a safe place
and check the warning messages.
■ When the parking brake can-
not be released due to a mal-
function
Driving the vehicle with the park-
ing brake set will lead to brake
components overheating, which
may affect braking performance
and increase brake wear. Have
the vehicle inspected by your
Toyota dealer immediately if this
occurs.
293
5-2. Driving procedures
5
Driving
Press the brake hold switch to
turn the brake hold system on
The brake hold standby indicator
(green) comes on. While the
system is holding the brake, the
brake hold operated indicator (yel-
low) comes on.
■ Brake hold system operating
conditions
The brake hold system cannot be
turned on in the following condi-
tions:
● The driver’s door is not closed.
● The driver is not wearing the seat
belt.
If any of the conditions above are
detected when the brake hold sys-
tem is enabled, the system will turn
off and the brake hold standby indi-
cator light will go off. In addition, if
any of the conditions are detected
while the system is holding the
brake, a warning buzzer will sound
and a message will be shown on the
multi-information display. The park-
ing brake will then be set automati-
cally.
■ Brake hold function
● If the brake pedal is left released
for a period of about 3 minutes
after the system has started hold-
ing the brake, the parking brake
will be set automatically. In this
case, a warning buzzer sounds
and a message is shown on the
multi-information display.
● To turn the system off while the
system is holding the brake, firmly
depress the brake pedal and
press the button again.
● The brake hold function may not
hold the vehicle when the vehicle
is on a steep incline. In this situa-
tion, it may be necessary for the
driver to apply the brakes. A warn-
ing buzzer will sound and the
multi-information display will
inform the driver of this situation. If
a warning message is shown on
the multi-information display, read
the message and follow the
instructions.
■ When the parking brake is set
automatically while the system
is holding the brakes
Perform any of the following opera-
tions to release the parking brake:
● Depress the accelerator pedal.
(The parking brake will not be
released automatically if the seat
belt is not fastened.)
● Operate the parking brake switch
with the brake pedal depressed.
Brake Hold
The brake hold system
keeps the brake applied
when the shift lever is in D,
S or N with the system on
and the brake pedal has
been depressed to stop the
vehicle. The system
releases the brake when the
accelerator pedal is
depressed with the shift
lever in D or S to allow
smooth start off.
Enabling the system
A
B
294
5-2. Driving procedures
Make sure that the parking brake
indicator light goes off. (P.290)
■ When an inspection at your
Toyota dealer is necessary
When the brake hold standby indi-
cator (green) does not illuminate
even when the brake hold switch is
pressed with the brake hold system
operating conditions met, the sys-
tem may be malfunctioning. Have
the vehicle inspected at your Toyota
dealer.
■ If “Brake Hold Malfunction
Press Brake to Deactivate Visit
Your Dealer” or “Brake Hold
Malfunction Visit Your Dealer”
is displayed on the multi-infor-
mation display
The system may be malfunctioning.
Have the vehicle inspected by your
Toyota dealer.
■ Warning messages and buzzers
Warning messages and buzzers are
used to indicate a system malfunc-
tion or to inform the driver of the
need for caution. If a warning mes-
sage is shown on the multi-informa-
tion display, read the message and
follow the instructions.
■ If the brake hold operated indi-
cator flashes
P.517
WARNING
■ When the vehicle is on a
steep incline
When using the brake hold sys-
tem on a steep incline, exercise
caution. The brake hold function
may not hold the vehicle in such a
situation.
■ When stopped on a slippery
road
The system cannot stop the vehi-
cle when the gripping ability of the
tires has been exceeded. Do not
use the system when stopped on
a slippery road.
NOTICE
■ When parking the vehicle
The brake hold system is not
designed for use when parking
the vehicle for a long period of
time. Turning the power switch off
while the system is holding the
brake may release the brake,
which would cause the vehicle to
move. When operating the power
switch, depress the brake pedal,
shift the shift lever to P and set
the parking brake.
295
5-3. Operating the lights and wipers
5
Driving
5-3.Operati ng the lights an d wipers
Operating the switch
turns on the lights as follows:
U.S.A.
1 The side marker, park-
ing, tail, license plate, instru-
ment panel lights, daytime
running lights and LED
accessory lights (if equipped)
(P.296) turn on.
2 The headlights and all
lights listed above (except
daytime running lights) turn
on.
3 The headlights, daytime
running lights, LED acces-
sory lights (if equipped)
(P.295) and all the lights
listed above turn on and off
automatically.
4 Off
Canada
1 The side marker, park-
ing, tail, license plate, instru-
ment panel lights, and LED
accessory lights (if equipped)
(P.296) turn on.
2 The headlights and all
lights listed above turn on.
3 The headlights, daytime
running lights, LED acces-
sory lights (if equipped)
(P.295) and all the lights
listed above turn on and off
automatically.
■ AUTO mode can be used when
The power switch is in ON.
■ Daytime running light system
● The daytime running lights illumi-
nate using the same lights as the
parking lights and illuminate
brighter than the parking lights.
● To make your vehicle more visible
Headlight switch
The headlights can be oper-
ated manually or automati-
cally.
Turning on the headlights
296
5-3. Operating the lights and wipers
to other drivers during daytime
driving, the daytime running lights
turn on automatically when all of
the following conditions are met.
(The daytime running lights are
not designed for use at night.)
• The hybrid system is operating
• The parking brake is released
• For the U.S.A.: The headlight
switch is in the or position
• For Canada: The headlight switch
is in the position
• The surroundings are bright
The daytime running lights remain
on after they illuminate, even if the
parking brake is set again.
● For the U.S.A.: Daytime running
lights can be turned off by operat-
ing the switch.
● Compared to turning on the head-
lights, the daytime running light
system offers greater durability
and consumes less electricity, so
it can help improve fuel economy.
■ LED accessory lights (if
equipped)
To make your vehicle more visible
to other drivers during daytime driv-
ing, the LED accessory lights turn
on automatically when the parking
brake is released while the hybrid
system is operating.
When the parking lights are turned
on, the LED accessory lights dim.
■ Headlight control sensor (if
equipped)
The sensor may not function prop-
erly if an object is placed on the sen-
sor, or anything that blocks the
sensor is affixed to the windshield.
Doing so interferes with the sensor
detecting the level of ambient light
and may cause the automatic head-
light system to malfunction.
■ Automatic light off system
● When the headlights are on: The
lights turn off 30 seconds after the
power switch is turned to ACC or
OFF and a door is opened and
closed. (The lights turn off imme-
diately if on the key is
pressed after all the doors are
closed.)
● When only the tail lights are on:
The tail lights turn off automati-
cally if the power switch is turned
to ACC or OFF and the driver’s
door is opened.
To turn the lights on again, turn the
power switch to ON, or turn the light
switch to the or position
once and then back to or
position.
■ Light reminder buzzer
A buzzer sounds when the power
switch is turned to ACC or OFF and
the driver’s door is opened while the
lights are turned on.
■ Automatic headlight leveling
system (if equipped)
The level of the headlights is auto-
matically adjusted according to the
number of passengers and the load-
ing condition of the vehicle to
ensure that the headlights do not
interfere with other road users.
■ Windshield wiper linked head-
light illumination (if equipped)
When driving during daytime with
the headlight switch turned to , if
the windshield wipers are used, the
headlights will turn on automatically
297
5-3. Operating the lights and wipers
5
Driving
after several seconds to help
enhance the visibility of your vehi-
cle.
■ 12-volt battery-saving function
In order to prevent the 12-volt bat-
tery of the vehicle from discharging,
if the headlights and/or tail lights are
on when the power switch is turned
to OFF, the battery saving function
will operate and automatically turn
off all the lights after approximately
20 minutes.
When any of the following are per-
formed, the 12-volt battery-saving
function is canceled once and then
reactivated. All the lights will turn off
automatically 20 minutes after the
12-volt battery-saving function has
been reactivated:
● When the headlight switch is oper-
ated
● When a door is opened or closed
■ If “Headlight System Malfunc-
tion Visit Your Dealer” is dis-
played on the multi-information
display
The system may be malfunctioning.
Have the vehicle inspected by your
Toyota dealer.
■ Customization
Settings (e.g. light sensor sensitiv-
ity) can be changed.
(Customizable features: P.577)
1 With the headlights on, push
the lever away from you to
turn on the high beams.
Pull the lever toward you to the
center position to turn the high
beams off.
2 Pull the lever toward you and
release it to flash the high
beams once.
You can flash the high beams with
the headlights on or off.
AFS (Adaptive Front-lighting
System) secures excellent visi-
bility at intersections and on
curves by automatically adjust-
ing the direction of the light axis
of the headlights according to
vehicle speed and the degree of
the tire’s angle as controlled by
steering input.
AFS operates at speeds of
approximately 6 mph (10 km/h)
or higher.
NOTICE
■ To prevent 12-volt battery dis-
charge
Do not leave the lights on longer
than necessary when the hybrid
system is not operating.
Turning on the high beam
headlights
AFS (Adaptive Front-light-
ing System) (if equipped)
298
5-3. Operating the lights and wipers
1 Press the Automatic High
Beam switch.
2 Turn the headlight switch to
the or position.
The Automatic High Beam indicator
will come on when the system is
operating.
■ High beams automatic turning
on or off conditions
● When all of the following condi-
tions are fulfilled, the high beams
will be automatically turned on
(after approximately 1 second):
• Vehicle speed is above approxi-
mately 21 mph (34 km/h) or more.
• The area ahead of the vehicle is
dark.
• There are no vehicles ahead with
headlights or tail lights turned on.
• There are few streetlights on the
road ahead.
● If any of the following conditions
are fulfilled, the high beams will be
automatically turned off:
• Vehicle speed drops below
approximately 17 mph (27 km/h).
• The area ahead of the vehicle is
not dark.
• Vehicles ahead have headlights
or tail lights turned on.
• There are many streetlights on the
road ahead.
■ Front camera detection infor-
mation
● The high beams may not be auto-
matically turned off in the following
situations:
• When oncoming vehicles sud-
denly appear from a curve
• When the vehicle is cut in front of
AHB (Automatic High
Beam)
The Automatic High Beam
uses an in-vehicle front
camera to assess the bright-
ness of streetlights, the
lights of vehicles ahead etc.,
and automatically turns the
high beams on or off as nec-
essary.
WARNING
■ Limitations of the Automatic
High Beam
Do not overly rely on the Auto-
matic High Beam. Always drive
safely, taking care to observe
your surroundings and turning the
high beams on or off manually if
necessary.
■ To prevent incorrect opera-
tion of the Automatic High
Beam system
Do not overload the vehicle.
Activating the Automatic
High Beam system
299
5-3. Operating the lights and wipers
5
Driving
by another vehicle
• When vehicles ahead are hidden
from sight due to repeated curves,
road dividers or roadside trees
• When vehicles ahead appear from
the faraway lane on a wide road
• When vehicles ahead have no
lights
● The high beams may be turned off
if a vehicle ahead that is using fog
lights without using the headlights
is detected.
● House lights, street lights, traffic
signals, and illuminated billboards
or signs may cause the high
beams to switch to the low beams,
or the low beams to remain on.
● The following factors may affect
the amount of time taken to turn
the high beams on or off:
• The brightness of headlights, fog
lights, and tail lights of vehicles
ahead
• The movement and direction of
vehicles ahead
• When a vehicle ahead only has
operational lights on one side
• When a vehicle ahead is a two-
wheeled vehicle
• The condition of the road (gradi-
ent, curve, condition of the road
surface etc.)
• The number of passengers and
amount of luggage
● The high beams may be turned on
or off when the driver does not
expect it.
● Bicycles or similar objects may not
be detected.
● In the situations shown below, the
system may not be able to accu-
rately detect surrounding bright-
ness levels. This may cause the
low beams to remain on or the
high beams to cause problems for
pedestrians, vehicles ahead or
other parties. In these cases,
manually switch between the high
and low beams.
• In bad weather (rain, snow, fog,
sandstorms, etc.)
• The windshield is obscured by
fog, mist, ice, dirt, etc.
• The windshield is cracked or dam-
aged
• The front camera is deformed or
dirty
• When the temperature of the front
camera is extremely high
• Surrounding brightness levels are
equal to those of headlights, tail
lights or fog lights
• When headlights or tail lights of
vehicles ahead are turned off,
dirty, changing color, or not aimed
properly
• When the vehicle is hit by water,
snow, dust, etc. from a preceding
vehicle
• When driving through an area of
intermittently changing brightness
and darkness
• When frequently and repeatedly
driving ascending/descending
roads, or roads with rough, bumpy
or uneven surfaces (such as
stone-paved roads, gravel roads,
etc.)
• When frequently and repeatedly
taking curves or driving on a wind-
ing road
• There is a highly reflective object
ahead of the vehicle, such as a
sign or mirror
• The back of a vehicle ahead is
highly reflective, such as a con-
tainer on a truck
• The vehicle’s headlights are dam-
aged or dirty, or are not aimed
properly
• The vehicle is listing or titling due
to a flat tire, a trailer being towed,
etc.
• The high beams and low beams
are repeatedly being switched
between in an abnormal manner
• The driver believes that the high
beams may be causing problems
or distress to other drivers or
pedestrians nearby
■ If “Headlight System Malfunc-
tion Visit Your Dealer” is dis-
played on the multi-information
display
The system may be malfunctioning.
300
5-3. Operating the lights and wipers
Have the vehicle inspected by your
Toyota dealer.
■ Temporarily lowering sensor
sensitivity
The sensitivity of the sensor can be
temporarily lowered.
1 Turn the power switch off while
the following conditions are met.
● The headlight switch is in or
position.
● The headlight switch lever is in
high beam position.
● Automatic High Beam switch is
on.
2 Turn the power switch to ON.
3 Within 60 seconds after step 2,
repeat pulling the headlight
switch lever to the original posi-
tion then pushing it to the high
beam position quickly 10 times,
then leave the lever in the origi-
nal position.
4 If the sensitivity is changed, the
Automatic High Beam indicator
is turn on and off 3 times.
Automatic High Beam (headlights)
may turn on even when the vehicle
is stopped.
■ Switching to the high
beams
Push the lever away from you.
The Automatic High Beam indicator
will turn off and the headlight high
beam indicator will turn on.
Pull the lever to its original position
to activate the Automatic High
Beam system again.
■ Switching to the low beams
Press the Automatic High Beam
switch.
The Automatic High Beam indicator
will turn off.
Press the switch to activate the
Automatic High Beam system
again.
■ Temporarily switching to
the low beams
Pull the lever toward you and
then return it to its original posi-
tion.
The high beams are on while the
lever is pulled toward you, how-
ever, after the lever is returned to
its original position, the low beams
remain on for a certain amount of
time. Afterwards, the Automatic
High Beam will be activated again.
Turning the high beams
on/off manually
301
5-3. Operating the lights and wipers
5
Driving
■ Temporarily switching to the
low beams
It is recommended to switch to the
low beams when the high beams
may cause problems or distress to
other drivers or pedestrians nearby.
Operating the lever oper-
ates the wipers or washer as fol-
lows:
Intermittent windshield wipers
1
*1
or
*2
Off
2
*1
or
*2
Intermittent
operation
3
*1
or
*2
Low speed
operation
Windshield wipers and
washer
Operating the lever can
switch between automatic
operation and manual oper-
ation, or can use the
washer.
NOTICE
■ When the windshield is dry
Do not use the wipers, as they
may damage the windshield.
Operating the wiper lever
302
5-3. Operating the lights and wipers
4
*1
or
*2
High speed
operation
5
*1
or
*2
Temporary
operation
*1
:For the U.S.A.
*2
:For Canada
If equipped, wiper intervals can
be adjusted when intermittent
operation is selected.
6 Increases the intermittent
windshield wiper frequency
7 Decreases the intermittent
windshield wiper frequency
8 Washer/wiper dual
operation
Pulling the lever operates the wip-
ers and washer.
The wipers will automatically oper-
ate a couple of times after the
washer squirts.
Rain-sensing windshield wip-
ers
1
*1
or
*2
Off
2 Rain-sensing opera-
tion
3
*1
or
*2
Low speed
operation
4
*1
or
*2
High speed
operation
5
*1
or
*2
Temporary
operation
*1
:For the U.S.A.
*2
:For Canada
When “AUTO” is selected, the wip-
ers will operate automatically when
the sensor detects falling rain. The
system automatically adjusts wiper
timing in accordance with rain vol-
ume and vehicle speed.
The sensor sensitivity can be
adjusted when “AUTO” is
selected.
303
5-3. Operating the lights and wipers
5
Driving
6 Increases the sensitivity
7 Decreases the sensitivity
8 Washer/wiper dual
operation
Pulling the lever operates the wip-
ers and washer.
The wipers will automatically oper-
ate a couple of times after the
washer squirts.
■ The windshield wipers and
washer can be operated when
The power switch is in ON.
■ Effects of vehicle speed on
wiper operation
Vehicles with intermittent wind-
shield wipers
With low speed windshield wiper
operation selected, wiper operation
will be switched from low speed to
intermittent wiper operation when
the vehicle is stationary. (However,
when the wiper intervals are
adjusted to highest level, the mode
will not switch.)
Vehicles with rain-sensing wind-
shield wipers
With low speed windshield wiper
operation selected, wiper operation
will be switched from low speed to
intermittent wiper operation when
the vehicle is stationary. (However,
when the sensor sensitivity is
adjusted to the highest level, the
mode will not switch.)
■ Raindrop sensor (vehicles with
rain-sensing windshield wipers)
● The raindrop sensor judges the
amount of raindrops. An optical
sensor is adopted. It may not
operate properly when sunlight
from the rising or setting of the
sun intermittently strikes the wind-
shield, or if bugs, etc. are present
on the windshield.
● If the wiper switch is turned to the
“AUTO” position while the power
switch is in ON, the wipers will
operate once to show that “AUTO”
mode is activated.
● If the wiper sensitivity is adjusted
to higher, the wiper may operate
once to indicate the change of
sensitivity.
● If the temperature of the raindrop
sensor is 185°F (85°C) or higher,
or 5°F (-15°C) or lower, the auto-
matic operation may not occur. In
this case, operate the wipers in
any mode other than “AUTO”.
■ If no windshield washer fluid
sprays
Check that the washer nozzles are
304
5-3. Operating the lights and wipers
not blocked if there is washer fluid in
the windshield washer fluid reser-
voir.
Operating the switch
operates the rear wiper as fol-
lows:
1
*1
or
*2
Off
2
*1
or
*2
Intermittent
operation
3
*1
or
*2
Normal oper-
ation
*1
:For the U.S.A.
*2
:For Canada
WARNING
■ Caution regarding the use of
windshield wipers in “AUTO”
mode (vehicles with rain-
sensing windshield wipers)
The windshield wipers may oper-
ate unexpectedly if the sensor is
touched or the windshield is sub-
ject to vibration in “AUTO” mode.
Take care that your fingers or
anything else does not become
caught in the windshield wipers.
■ Caution regarding the use of
washer fluid
When it is cold, do not use the
washer fluid until the windshield
becomes warm. The fluid may
freeze on the windshield and
cause low visibility. This may lead
to an accident, resulting in death
or serious injury.
NOTICE
■ When the washer fluid tank is
empty
Do not operate the switch continu-
ally as the washer fluid pump may
overheat.
■ When a nozzle becomes
blocked
In this case, contact your Toyota
dealer.
Do not try to clear it with a pin or
other object. The nozzle will be
damaged.
■ To prevent 12-volt battery dis-
charge
Do not leave the wipers on longer
than necessary when the hybrid
system is off.
Rear window wiper
and washer
The rear window wiper and
washer can be used by
operating the lever.
NOTICE
■ When the rear window is dry
Do not use the wiper, as it may
damage the rear window.
Operating the wiper lever
305
5-3. Operating the lights and wipers
5
Driving
4 Washer/wiper dual
operation
Pushing the lever operates the
wiper and washer.
The wiper will automatically operate
a couple of times after the washer
squirts.
■ The rear window wiper and
washer can be operated when
The power switch is in ON.
■ If no washer fluid sprays
Check that the washer nozzle is not
blocked if there is washer fluid in the
washer fluid reservoir.
■ Back door opening linked rear
window wiper stop function
When the rear window wiper is
operating, if the back door is opened
while the vehicle is stopped, opera-
tion of the rear window wiper will be
stopped to prevent anyone near the
vehicle from being sprayed by water
from the wiper. When the back door
is closed, wiper operation will
resume.
*
*
: The setting must be customized at
your Toyota dealer.
■ Reverse-linked rear window
wiper function
When the shift lever is shifted to R
when the front wipers are operating,
the rear window wiper will operate
once.
■ Customization
Setting of the reverse-linked func-
tion can be changed. (Customizable
features: P.577)
NOTICE
■ When the washer fluid tank is
empty
Do not operate the switch continu-
ally as the washer fluid pump may
overheat.
■ When a nozzle becomes
blocked
In this case, contact your Toyota
dealer.
Do not try to clear it with a pin or
other object. The nozzle will be
damaged.
■ To prevent 12-volt battery dis-
charge
Do not leave the wiper on longer
than necessary when the hybrid
system is off.
306
5-4. Refueling
5-4.Refueling
Close all the doors and win-
dows, and turn the power
switch to OFF.
Confirm the type of fuel.
■ Fuel types
P.557
■ Fuel tank opening for unleaded
gasoline
To help prevent incorrect fueling,
your vehicle has a fuel tank opening
that only accommodates the spe-
cial nozzle on unleaded fuel pumps.
Opening the fuel tank
cap
The fuel tank of your vehicle
has a special structure,
which requires a reduction
in fuel tank pressure before
refueling. After the opener
switch has been pressed, it
will take several seconds
until the vehicle is ready for
refueling.
Before refueling the vehi-
cle
WARNING
■ When refueling the vehicle
Observe the following precautions
while refueling the vehicle. Failure
to do so may result in death or
serious injury.
● After exiting the vehicle and
before opening the fuel door,
touch an unpainted metal sur-
face to discharge any static
electricity. It is important to dis-
charge static electricity before
refueling because sparks result-
ing from static electricity can
cause fuel vapors to ignite while
refueling.
● Always hold the grips on the
fuel tank cap and turn it slowly
to remove it.
A whooshing sound may be
heard when the fuel tank cap is
loosened. Wait until the sound
cannot be heard before fully
removing the cap. In hot
weather, pressurized fuel may
spray out of the filler neck and
cause injury.
● Do not allow anyone that has
not discharged static electricity
from their body to come close to
an open fuel tank.
● Do not inhale vaporized fuel.
Fuel contains substances that
are harmful if inhaled.
● Do not smoke while refueling
the vehicle.
Doing so may cause the fuel to
ignite and cause a fire.
● Do not return to the vehicle or
touch any person or object that
is statically charged. This may
cause static electricity to build
up, resulting in a possible igni-
tion hazard.
307
5-4. Refueling
5
Driving
1 Press the opener to open the
fuel filler door.
The fuel filler door will open within
about 10 seconds of the switch
being pressed. Before refueling is
possible, a message will be shown
on the multi-information display in
the instrument cluster to indicate
the progress of the fuel filler door
opener.
2 Turn the fuel tank cap slowly
to open it and put it into the
holder on the fuel filler door.
■ If the fuel filler door cannot be
opened
P.536
After refueling, turn the fuel tank
cap until you hear a click. Once
the cap is released, it will turn
slightly in the opposite direction.
WARNING
■ When refueling
Observe the following precautions
to prevent fuel overflowing from
the fuel tank:
● Securely insert the fuel nozzle
into the fuel filler neck.
● Stop filling the tank after the fuel
nozzle automatically clicks off.
● Do not top off the fuel tank.
NOTICE
■ Refueling
● Finish refueling within 30 min-
utes. If more than 30 minutes
passes, the internal valve
closes. In this condition, fuel
may overflow during the refuel-
ing process. Press the fuel filler
door opener switch again.
● Do not spill fuel during refueling.
Doing so may damage the vehi-
cle, such as causing the emis-
sion control system to operate
abnormally or damaging fuel
system components or the vehi-
cle’s painted surface.
■ Notice about fuel
P.91
Opening the fuel tank cap
Closing the fuel tank cap
308
5-4. Refueling
■ When “Check Fuel Cap” is dis-
played on the multi-information
display
The fuel tank cap may be unfas-
tened or loose. Turn the power
switch off, check the cap and tighten
it securely. If the message remains,
wait a few seconds and then turn
the power switch off once again.
WARNING
■ When replacing the fuel tank
cap
Do not use anything but a genu-
ine Toyota fuel tank cap designed
for your vehicle. Doing so may
cause a fire or other incident
which may result in death or seri-
ous injury.
NOTICE
■ When refueling
When refueling your vehicle,
make sure that the fuel filler door
lock is not pushed by the fuel noz-
zle boot, etc., as this may cause a
valve to close, possibly resulting
in a fuel spill.
If the fuel filler door lock has been
pushed, operate the fuel filler door
opener switch in the vehicle
before continuing to refuel.
309
5-5. Using the driving support systems
5
Driving
5-5.Using the driving support systems
■ PCS (Pre-Collision System)
P.315
■ LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)
P.323
■ AHB (Automatic High
Beam)
P.298
■ RSA (Road Sign Assist) (if
equipped)
P.333
■ Dynamic radar cruise con-
trol with full-speed range
P.336
Two types of sensors, located
behind the front grille and wind-
shield, detect information neces-
sary to operate the drive assist
systems.
Radar sensor
Front camera
Toyota Safety Sense
2.0
The Toyota Safety Sense
2.0 consists of the following
drive assist systems and
contributes to a safe and
comfortable driving experi-
ence:
Driving assist system
WARNING
■ Toyota Safety Sense 2.0
The Toyota Safety Sense 2.0 is
designed to operate under the
assumption that the driver will
drive safely, and is designed to
help reduce the impact to the
occupants and the vehicle in the
case of a collision or assist the
driver in normal driving condi-
tions.
As there is a limit to the degree of
recognition accuracy and control
performance that this system can
provide, do not overly rely on this
system. The driver is always
responsible for paying attention to
the vehicle’s surroundings and
driving safely.
Sensors
A
B
310
5-5. Using the driving support systems
WARNING
■ To avoid malfunction of the
radar sensor
Observe the following precau-
tions.
Otherwise, the radar sensor may
not operate properly, possibly
leading to an accident resulting in
death or serious injury.
● Keep the radar sensor and the
radar sensor cover clean at all
times.
Radar sensor
Radar sensor cover
If the front of the radar sensor or
the front or back of the radar sen-
sor cover is dirty or covered with
water droplets, snow, etc., clean
it.
Clean the radar sensor and radar
sensor cover with a soft cloth to
avoid damaging them.
● Do not attach accessories,
stickers (including transparent
stickers) or other items to the
radar sensor, radar sensor
cover or surrounding area.
● Do not subject the radar sensor
or its surrounding area to a
strong impact.
If the radar sensor, front grille,
or front bumper has been sub-
jected to a strong impact, have
the vehicle inspected by your
Toyota dealer.
A
B
● Do not disassemble the radar
sensor.
● Do not modify or paint the radar
sensor or radar sensor cover.
● In the following cases, the radar
sensor must be recalibrated.
Contact your Toyota dealer for
details.
• When the radar sensor or front
grille are removed and installed,
or replaced
• When the front bumper is
replaced
■ To avoid malfunction of the
front camera
Observe the following precau-
tions.
Otherwise, the front camera may
not operate properly, possibly
leading to an accident resulting in
death or serious injury.
● Keep the windshield clean at all
times.
• If the windshield is dirty or cov-
ered with an oily film, water
droplets, snow, etc., clean the
windshield.
• If a glass coating agent is
applied to the windshield, it will
still be necessary to use the
windshield wipers to remove
water droplets, etc. from the
area of the windshield in front of
the front camera.
• If the inner side of the wind-
shield where the front camera is
installed is dirty, contact your
Toyota dealer.
311
5-5. Using the driving support systems
5
Driving
WARNING
● Do not attach objects, such as
stickers, transparent stickers,
etc., to the outer side of the
windshield in front of the front
camera (shaded area in the
illustration).
From the top of the windshield
to approximately 0.4 in. (1 cm)
below the bottom of the front
camera
Approximately 7.9 in. (20 cm)
(Approximately 4.0 in. [10 cm]
to the right and left from the
center of the front camera)
● If the part of the windshield in
front of the front camera is
fogged up or covered with con-
densation, or ice, use the wind-
shield defogger to remove the
fog, condensation, or ice.
(P.398)
● If water droplets cannot be
properly removed from the area
of the windshield in front of the
front camera by the windshield
wipers, replace the wiper insert
or wiper blade.
● Do not attach window tint to the
windshield.
● Replace the windshield if it is
damaged or cracked.
After replacing the windshield,
the front camera must be recali-
brated. Contact your Toyota
dealer for details.
A
B
● Do not allow liquids to contact
the front camera.
● Do not allow bright lights to
shine into the front camera.
● Do not dirty or damage the front
camera.
When cleaning the inside of the
windshield, do not allow glass
cleaner to contact the lens of
the front camera. Also, do not
touch the lens.
If the lens is dirty or damaged,
contact your Toyota dealer.
● Do not subject the front camera
to a strong impact.
● Do not change the installation
position or direction of the front
camera or remove it.
● Do not disassemble the front
camera.
● Do not modify any components
of the vehicle around the front
camera (inside rear view mirror,
etc.) or ceiling.
● Do not attach any accessories
to the hood, front grille or front
bumper that may obstruct the
front camera. Contact your
Toyota dealer for details.
● If a surfboard or other long
object is to be mounted on the
roof, make sure that it will not
obstruct the front camera.
● Do not modify the headlights or
other lights.
312
5-5. Using the driving support systems
■ Certification
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A. and Hawaii
For vehicles sold in Canada
313
5-5. Using the driving support systems
5
Driving
■ If a warning message is displayed on the multi-information display
A system may be temporarily unavailable or there may be a malfunction in
the system.
● In the following situations, perform the actions specified in the table. When
the normal operating conditions are detected, the message will disappear
and the system will become operational.
If the message does not disappear, contact your Toyota dealer.
Situation Actions
When the area around a sensor is
covered with dirt, moisture (fogged
up, covered with condensation, ice,
etc.), or other foreign matter
To clean the part of the windshield in
front of the front camera, use the
windshield wipers or the windshield
defogger of the air conditioning sys-
tem (P.398).
314
5-5. Using the driving support systems
● In the following situations, if the situation has changed (or the vehicle has
been driven for some time) and the normal operating conditions are
detected, the message will disappear and the system will become opera-
tional.
If the message does not disappear, contact your Toyota dealer.
• When the temperature around the radar sensor is outside of the opera-
tional range, such as when the vehicle is in the sun or in an extremely cold
environment
• When the front camera cannot detect objects in front of the vehicle, such
as when driving in the dark, snow, or fog, or when bright lights are shining
into the front camera
When the temperature around the
front camera is outside of the opera-
tional range, such as when the vehi-
cle is in the sun or in an extremely
cold environment
If the front camera is hot, such as
after the vehicle had been parked in
the sun, use the air conditioning sys-
tem to decrease the temperature
around the front camera.
If a sunshade was used when the
vehicle was parked, depending on its
type, the sunlight reflected from the
surface of the sunshade may cause
the temperature of the front camera
to become excessively high.
If the front camera is cold, such as
after the vehicle is parked in an
extremely cold environment, use the
air conditioning system to increase
the temperature around the front
camera.
The area in front of the front camera
is obstructed, such as when the
hood is open or a sticker is attached
to the part of the windshield in front
of the front camera.
Close the hood, remove the sticker,
etc. to clear the obstruction.
Situation Actions
315
5-5. Using the driving support systems
5
Driving
The system can detect the fol-
lowing:
Vehicles
Bicyclists
Pedestrians
■ Pre-collision warning
When the system determines
that the possibility of a frontal
collision is high, a buzzer will
sound and a warning message
will be displayed on the multi-
information display to urge the
driver to take evasive action.
■ Pre-collision brake assist
When the system determines
that the possibility of a frontal
collision is high, the system
applies greater braking force in
relation to how strongly the
brake pedal is depressed.
■ Pre-collision braking
If the system determines that
the possibility of a frontal colli-
sion is extremely high, the
brakes are automatically applied
to help avoid the collision or
reduce the impact of the colli-
sion.
PCS (Pre-Collision Sys-
tem)
The pre-collision system
uses a radar sensor and
front camera to detect
objects (P.315) in front of
the vehicle. When the sys-
tem determines that the
possibility of a frontal colli-
sion with an object is high,
a warning operates to urge
the driver to take evasive
action and the potential
brake pressure is increased
to help the driver avoid the
collision. If the system
determines that the possi-
bility of a frontal collision
with an object is extremely
high, the brakes are auto-
matically applied to help
avoid the collision or help
reduce the impact of the
collision.
The pre-collision system can
be disabled/enabled and the
warning timing can be
changed. (P.317)
Detectable objects
System functions
316
5-5. Using the driving support systems
WARNING
■ Limitations of the pre-colli-
sion system
● The driver is solely responsible
for safe driving. Always drive
safely, taking care to observe
your surroundings.
Do not use the pre-collision sys-
tem instead of normal braking
operations under any circum-
stances. This system will not
prevent collisions or lessen col-
lision damage or injury in every
situation. Do not overly rely on
this system. Failure to do so
may lead to an accident, result-
ing in death or serious injury.
● Although this system is
designed to help avoid a colli-
sion or help reduce the impact
of the collision, its effectiveness
may change according to vari-
ous conditions, therefore the
system may not always be able
to achieve the same level of
performance.
Read the following conditions
carefully. Do not overly rely on
this system and always drive
carefully.
• Conditions under which the sys-
tem may operate even if there is
no possibility of a collision:
P.319
• Conditions under which the sys-
tem may not operate properly:
P.320
● Do not attempt to test the oper-
ation of the pre-collision system
yourself.
Depending on the objects used
for testing (dummies, card-
board objects imitating detect-
able objects, etc.), the system
may not operate properly, pos-
sibly leading to an accident.
■ Pre-collision braking
● When the pre-collision braking
function is operating, a large
amount of braking force will be
applied.
● If the vehicle is stopped by the
operation of the pre-collision
braking function, the pre-colli-
sion braking function operation
will be canceled after approxi-
mately 2 seconds. Depress the
brake pedal as necessary.
● The pre-collision braking func-
tion may not operate if certain
operations are performed by the
driver. If the accelerator pedal is
being depressed strongly or the
steering wheel is being turned,
the system may determine that
the driver is taking evasive
action and possibly prevent the
pre-collision braking function
from operating.
● In some situations, while the
pre-collision braking function is
operating, operation of the func-
tion may be canceled if the
accelerator pedal is depressed
strongly or the steering wheel is
turned and the system deter-
mines that the driver is taking
evasive action.
● If the brake pedal is being
depressed, the system may
determine that the driver is tak-
ing evasive action and possibly
delay the operation timing of the
pre-collision braking function.
■ When to disable the pre-colli-
sion system
In the following situations, disable
the system, as it may not operate
properly, possibly leading to an
accident resulting in death or seri-
ous injury:
● When the vehicle is being towed
317
5-5. Using the driving support systems
5
Driving
■ Enabling/disabling the pre-
collision system
The pre-collision system can be
enabled/disabled on the
screen (P.177) of the multi-
information display.
The system is automatically
enabled each time the power
switch is turned to ON.
If the system is disabled, the
PCS warning light will turn on
and a message will be displayed
on the multi-information display.
■ Changing the pre-collision
warning timing
The pre-collision warning timing
can be changed on the
screen (P.177) of the multi-
information display.
The warning timing setting is
retained when the power switch is
turned to OFF. However, if the pre-
collision system is disabled and re-
enabled, the operation timing will
return to the default setting (mid-
dle).
WARNING
● When your vehicle is towing
another vehicle
● When transporting the vehicle
via truck, boat, train or similar
means of transportation
● When the vehicle is raised on a
lift with the hybrid system on
and the tires are allowed to
rotate freely
● When inspecting the vehicle
using a drum tester such as a
chassis dynamometer or speed-
ometer tester, or when using an
on vehicle wheel balancer
● When a strong impact is applied
to the front bumper or front
grille, due to an accident or
other reasons
● If the vehicle cannot be driven in
a stable manner, such as when
the vehicle has been in an acci-
dent or is malfunctioning
● When the vehicle is driven in a
sporty manner or off-road
● When the tires are not properly
inflated
● When the tires are very worn
● When tires of a size other than
specified are installed
● When tire chains are installed
● When a compact spare tire or
an emergency tire puncture
repair kit is used
● If equipment (snow plow, etc.)
that may obstruct the radar sen-
sor or front camera is temporar-
ily installed to the vehicle
Changing settings of the
pre-collision system
318
5-5. Using the driving support systems
1 Early
2 Middle
This is the default setting.
3 Late
■ Operational conditions
The pre-collision system is enabled and the system determines that the pos-
sibility of a frontal collision with a detected object is high.
Each function is operational at the following speed
● Pre-collision warning
● Pre-collision brake assist
Detectable objects Vehicle speed
Relative speed between
your vehicle and object
Vehicles
Approx. 7 to 110 mph
(10 to 180 km/h)
Approx. 7 to 110 mph
(10 to 180 km/h)
Bicyclists and pedestri-
ans
Approx. 7 to 50 mph (10
to 80 km/h)
Approx. 7 to 50 mph (10
to 80 km/h)
Detectable objects Vehicle speed
Relative speed between
your vehicle and object
Vehicles
Approx. 20 to 110 mph
(30 to 180 km/h)
Approx. 20 to 110 mph
(30 to 180 km/h)
Bicyclists and pedestri-
ans
Approx. 20 to 50 mph
(30 to 80 km/h)
Approx. 20 to 50 mph
(30 to 80 km/h)
319
5-5. Using the driving support systems
5
Driving
● Pre-collision braking
The system may not operate in the following situations:
● If a 12-volt battery terminal has been disconnected and reconnected and
then the vehicle has not been driven for a certain amount of time
● If the shift lever is in R
● When the VSC OFF indicator is illuminated (only the pre-collision warning
function will be operational)
■ Object detection function
The system detects objects based
on their size, profile, motion, etc.
However, an object may not be
detected depending on the sur-
rounding brightness and the motion,
posture, and angle of the detected
object, preventing the system from
operating properly. (P.320)
The illustration shows an image of
detectable objects.
■ Cancelation of the pre-collision
braking
If either of the following occur while
the pre-collision braking function is
operating, it will be canceled:
● The accelerator pedal is
depressed strongly.
● The steering wheel is turned
sharply or abruptly.
■ Conditions under which the
system may operate even if
there is no possibility of a colli-
sion
● In some situations such as the fol-
lowing, the system may determine
that there is a possibility of a fron-
tal collision and operate.
• When passing a detectable
object, etc.
• When changing lanes while over-
taking a detectable object, etc.
• When approaching a detectable
object in an adjacent lane or on
the roadside, such as when
changing the course of travel or
driving on a winding road
• When rapidly closing on a detect-
able object, etc.
• When approaching objects on the
roadside, such as detectable
objects, guardrails, utility poles,
trees, or walls
• When there is a detectable object
or other object by the roadside at
Detectable objects Vehicle speed
Relative speed between
your vehicle and object
Vehicles
Approx. 7 to 110 mph
(10 to 180 km/h)
Approx. 7 to 110 mph
(10 to 180 km/h)
Bicyclists and pedestri-
ans
Approx. 7 to 50 mph (10
to 80 km/h)
Approx. 7 to 50 mph (10
to 80 km/h)
320
5-5. Using the driving support systems
the entrance of a curve
• When there are patterns or paint
in front of your vehicle that may be
mistaken for a detectable object
• When the front of your vehicle is
hit by water, snow, dust, etc.
• When overtaking a detectable
object that is changing lanes or
making a right/left turn
• When passing a detectable object
in an oncoming lane that is
stopped to make a right/left turn
• When a detectable object
approaches very close and then
stops before entering the path of
your vehicle
• If the front of your vehicle is raised
or lowered, such as when on an
uneven or undulating road surface
• When driving on a road sur-
rounded by a structure, such as in
a tunnel or on an iron bridge
• When there is a metal object
(manhole cover, steel plate, etc.),
steps, or a protrusion in front of
your vehicle
• When passing under an object
(road sign, billboard, etc.)
• When approaching an electric toll
gate barrier, parking area barrier,
or other barrier that opens and
closes
• When using an automatic car
wash
• When driving through or under
objects that may contact your
vehicle, such as thick grass, tree
branches, or a banner
• When driving through steam or
smoke
• When driving near an object that
reflects radio waves, such as a
large truck or guardrail
• When driving near a TV tower,
broadcasting station, electric
power plant, or other location
where strong radio waves or elec-
trical noise may be present
■ Situations in which the system
may not operate properly
● In some situations such as the fol-
lowing, an object may not be
detected by the radar sensor and
front camera, preventing the sys-
tem from operating properly:
• When a detectable object is
approaching your vehicle
• When your vehicle or a detectable
object is wobbling
321
5-5. Using the driving support systems
5
Driving
• If a detectable object makes an
abrupt maneuver (such as sudden
swerving, acceleration or deceler-
ation)
• When your vehicle approaches a
detectable object rapidly
• When a detectable object is not
directly in front of your vehicle
• When a detectable object is near
a wall, fence, guardrail, manhole
cover, vehicle, steel plate on the
road, etc.
• When a detectable object is under
a structure
• When part of a detectable object
is hidden by an object, such as
large baggage, an umbrella, or
guardrail
• When multiple detectable objects
are close together
• If the sun or other light is shining
directly on a detectable object
• When a detectable object is a
shade of white and looks
extremely bright
• When a detectable object appears
to be nearly the same color or
brightness as its surroundings
• If a detectable object cuts or sud-
denly emerges in front of your
vehicle
• When the front of your vehicle is
hit by water, snow, dust, etc.
• When a very bright light ahead,
such as the sun or the headlights
of oncoming traffic, shines directly
into the front camera
• When approaching the side or
front of a vehicle ahead
• If a vehicle ahead is a motorcycle
• If a vehicle ahead is narrow, such
as a personal mobility vehicle
• If a preceding vehicle has a small
rear end, such as an unloaded
truck
• If a preceding vehicle has a low
rear end, such as a low bed trailer
• If a vehicle ahead has extremely
high ground clearance
• If a vehicle ahead is carrying a
load which protrudes past its rear
bumper
• If a vehicle ahead is irregularly
shaped, such as a tractor or side
car
• If a vehicle ahead is a child sized
bicycle, a bicycle that is carrying a
large load, a bicycle ridden by
more than one person, or a
uniquely shaped bicycle (bicycle
with a child seat, tandem bicycle,
etc.)
• If a pedestrian/or the riding height
of a bicyclist ahead is shorter than
approximately 3.2 ft. (1 m) or taller
than approximately 6.5 ft. (2 m)
• If a pedestrian/bicyclist is wearing
oversized clothing (a rain coat,
long skirt, etc.), making their sil-
houette obscure
• If a pedestrian is bending forward
or squatting or bicyclist is bending
forward
• If a pedestrian/bicyclist is moving
fast
• If a pedestrian is pushing a
stroller, wheelchair, bicycle or
other vehicle
• When driving in inclement weather
322
5-5. Using the driving support systems
such as heavy rain, fog, snow or a
sandstorm
• When driving through steam or
smoke
• When the surrounding area is dim,
such as at dawn or dusk, or while
at night or in a tunnel, making a
detectable object appear to be
nearly the same color as its sur-
roundings
• When driving in a place where the
surrounding brightness changes
suddenly, such as at the entrance
or exit of a tunnel
• After the hybrid system has
started the vehicle has not been
driven for a certain amount of time
• While making a left/right turn and
for a few seconds after making a
left/right turn
• While driving on a curve and for a
few seconds after driving on a
curve
• If your vehicle is skidding
• If the front of the vehicle is raised
or lowered
• If the wheels are misaligned
• If a wiper blade is blocking the
front camera
• The vehicle is being driven at
extremely high speeds
• When driving on a hill
• If the radar sensor or front camera
is misaligned
● In some situations such as the fol-
lowing, sufficient braking force
may not be obtained, preventing
the system from performing prop-
erly:
• If the braking functions cannot
operate to their full extent, such as
when the brake parts are
extremely cold, extremely hot, or
wet
• If the vehicle is not properly main-
tained (brakes or tires are exces-
sively worn, improper tire inflation
pressure, etc.)
• When the vehicle is being driven
on a gravel road or other slippery
surface
■ If VSC is disabled
● If VSC is disabled (P.382), the
pre-collision brake assist and pre-
collision braking functions are also
disabled.
● The PCS warning light will turn on
and “VSC Turned OFF Pre-Colli-
sion Brake System Unavailable”
will be displayed on the multi-
information display.
323
5-5. Using the driving support systems
5
Driving
LTA (Lane Tracing
Assist)
When driving on highways
and freeways with white
(yellow) lane lines, this
function alerts the driver
when the vehicle might
depart from its lane or
course
*
and provides assis-
tance by operating the
steering wheel to keep the
vehicle in its lane or
course
*
. Furthermore, the
system provides steering
assistance when dynamic
radar cruise control with
full-speed range is operat-
ing to keep the vehicle in its
lane.
The LTA system recognizes
white (yellow) lane lines or a
course
*
using the front cam-
era. Additionally, it detects
preceding vehicles using
the front camera and radar.
*
: Boundary between asphalt and
the side of the road, such as
grass, soil, or a curb
WARNING
■ Before using LTA system
● Do not rely solely upon the LTA
system. The LTA system does
not automatically drive the vehi-
cle or reduce the amount of
attention that must be paid to
the area in front of the vehicle.
The driver must always assume
full responsibility for driving
safely by paying careful atten-
tion to the surrounding condi-
tions and operating the steering
wheel to correct the path of the
vehicle. Also, the driver must
take adequate breaks when
fatigued, such as from driving
for a long period of time.
● Failure to perform appropriate
driving operations and pay care-
ful attention may lead to an
accident, resulting in death or
serious injury.
● When not using the LTA sys-
tem, use the LTA switch to turn
the system off.
■ Situations unsuitable for LTA
system
In the following situations, use the
LTA switch to turn the system off.
Failure to do so may lead to an
accident, resulting in death or
serious injury.
● Vehicle is driven on a road sur-
face which is slippery due to
rainy weather, fallen snow,
freezing, etc.
● Vehicle is driven on a snow-cov-
ered road.
● White (yellow) lines are difficult
to see due to rain, snow, fog,
dust, etc.
● Vehicle is driven in a temporary
lane or restricted lane due to
construction work.
324
5-5. Using the driving support systems
WARNING
● Vehicle is driven in a construc-
tion zone.
● A spare tire, tire chains, etc. are
equipped.
● When the tires have been
excessively worn, or when the
tire inflation pressure is low.
● When tires of a size other than
specified are installed.
● Vehicle is driven in traffic lanes
other than that highways and
freeways.
● When your vehicle is towing a
trailer or during emergency tow-
ing
■ Preventing LTA system mal-
functions and operations per-
formed by mistake
● Do not modify the headlights or
place stickers, etc. on the sur-
face of the lights.
● Do not modify the suspension
etc. If the suspension etc. needs
to be replaced, contact your
Toyota dealer.
● Do not install or place anything
on the hood or grille. Also, do
not install a grille guard (bull
bars, kangaroo bar, etc.).
● If your windshield needs
repairs, contact your Toyota
dealer.
■ Conditions in which functions
may not operate properly
In the following situations, the
functions may not operate prop-
erly and the vehicle may depart
from its lane. Drive safely by
always paying careful attention to
your surroundings and operate
the steering wheel to correct the
path of the vehicle without relying
solely on the functions.
● When the follow-up cruising dis-
play is displayed (P.328) and
the preceding vehicle changes
lanes. (Your vehicle may follow
the preceding vehicle and also
change lanes.)
● When the follow-up cruising dis-
play is displayed (P.328) and
the preceding vehicle is sway-
ing. (Your vehicle may sway
accordingly and depart from the
lane.)
● When the follow-up cruising dis-
play is displayed (P.328) and
the preceding vehicle departs
from its lane. (Your vehicle may
follow the preceding vehicle and
depart from the lane.)
● When the follow-up cruising dis-
play is displayed (P.328) and
the preceding vehicle is being
driven extremely close to the
left/right lane line. (Your vehicle
may follow the preceding vehi-
cle and depart from the lane.)
● Vehicle is being driven around a
sharp curve.
325
5-5. Using the driving support systems
5
Driving
WARNING
● Objects or patterns that could
be mistaken for white (yellow)
lines are present on the side of
the road (guardrails, reflective
poles, etc.).
● Vehicle is driven where the road
diverges, merges, etc.
● Repair marks of asphalt, white
(yellow) lines, etc. are present
due to road repair.
● There are shadows on the road
that run parallel with, or cover,
the white (yellow) lines.
● The vehicle is driven in an area
without white (yellow) lines,
such as in front of a tollgate or
checkpoint, or at an intersec-
tion, etc.
● The white (yellow) lines are
cracked, “Botts’ dots”, “Raised
pavement marker” or stones are
present.
● The white (yellow) lines cannot
be seen or are difficult to see
due to sand, etc.
● The vehicle is driven on a road
surface that is wet due to rain,
puddles, etc.
● The traffic lines are yellow
(which may be more difficult to
recognize than lines that are
white).
● The white (yellow) lines cross
over a curb, etc.
● The vehicle is driven on a bright
surface, such as concrete.
● If the edge of the road is not
clear or straight.
● The vehicle is driven on a sur-
face that is bright due to
reflected light, etc.
● The vehicle is driven in an area
where the brightness changes
suddenly, such as at the
entrances and exits of tunnels,
etc.
● Light from the headlights of an
oncoming vehicle, the sun, etc.
enters the camera.
● The vehicle is driven on a slope.
● The vehicle is driven on a road
which tilts left or right, or a wind-
ing road.
● The vehicle is driven on an
unpaved or rough road.
326
5-5. Using the driving support systems
■ Lane departure alert func-
tion
When the system determines
that the vehicle might depart
from its lane or course
*
, a warn-
ing is displayed on the multi-
information display, and either a
warning buzzer will sound or the
steering wheel will vibrate to
alert the driver.
When the warning buzzer sounds
or the steering wheel vibrates,
check the area around your vehicle
and carefully operate the steering
wheel to move the vehicle back to
the center of the lane.
When the system determines that
the vehicle might depart from its
lane and that the possibility of a col-
lision with an overtaking vehicle in
the adjacent lane is high, the lane
departure alert will operate even if
the turn signals are operating.
*
: Boundary between asphalt and
the side of the road, such as
grass, soil, or a curb
■ Steering assist function
When the system determines
that the vehicle might depart
WARNING
● The traffic lane is excessively
narrow or wide.
● The vehicle is extremely tilted
due to carrying heavy luggage
or having improper tire pres-
sure.
● The distance to the preceding
vehicle is extremely short.
● The vehicle is moving up and
down a large amount due to
road conditions during driving
(poor roads or road seams).
● When driving in a tunnel or at
night with the headlights off or
when a headlight is dim due to
its lens being dirty or it being
misaligned.
● The vehicle is struck by a cross-
wind.
● The vehicle is affected by wind
from a vehicle driven in a
nearby lane.
● The vehicle has just changed
lanes or crossed an intersec-
tion.
● Tires which differ by structure,
manufacturer, brand or tread
pattern are used.
● Snow tires, etc. are equipped.
● The vehicle is being driven at
extremely high speeds.
Functions included in
LTA system
327
5-5. Using the driving support systems
5
Driving
from its lane or course
*
, the sys-
tem provides assistance as nec-
essary by operating the steering
wheel in small amounts for a
short period of time to keep the
vehicle in its lane.
If the system detects that the steer-
ing wheel has not been operated
for a fixed amount of time or the
steering wheel is not being firmly
gripped, a warning is displayed on
the multi-information display and
the function is temporarily can-
celed.
When the system determines that
the vehicle might depart from its
lane and that the possibility of a col-
lision with an overtaking vehicle in
the adjacent lane is high, the steer-
ing assist function will operate even
if the turn signals are operating.
*
: Boundary between asphalt and
the side of the road, such as
grass, soil, or a curb
■ Vehicle sway warning func-
tion
When the vehicle is swaying
within a lane, the warning
buzzer will sound and a mes-
sage will be displayed on the
multi-information display to alert
the driver.
■ Lane centering function
This function is linked with
dynamic radar cruise control
with full-speed range and pro-
vides the required assistance by
operating the steering wheel to
keep the vehicle in its current
lane.
When dynamic radar cruise control
with full-speed range is not operat-
ing, the lane centering function
does not operate.
In situations where the white (yel-
low) lane lines are difficult to see or
are not visible, such as when in a
328
5-5. Using the driving support systems
traffic jam, this function will operate
to help follow a preceding vehicle
by monitoring the position of the
preceding vehicle.
If the system detects that the steer-
ing wheel has not been operated
for a fixed amount of time or the
steering wheel is not being firmly
gripped, a warning is displayed on
the multi-information display and
the function is temporarily can-
celed.
Press the LTA switch to turn the
LTA system on.
The LTA indicator illuminates and a
message is displayed on the multi-
information display.
Press the LTA switch again to
turn the LTA system off.
When the LTA system is turned on
or off, operation of the LTA system
continues in the same condition the
next time the hybrid system is
started.
LTA indicator
The illumination condition of the
indicator informs the driver of the
system operation status.
Illuminated in white: LTA system is
operating.
Illuminated in green: Steering
wheel assistance of the steering
assist function or lane centering
function is operating.
Flashing in orange: Lane departure
alert function is operating.
Operation display of steering
wheel operation support
Displayed when the multi-informa-
tion display is switched to the driv-
ing support system information
display.
Turning LTA system on
Indications on multi-infor-
mation display
A
B
329
5-5. Using the driving support systems
5
Driving
Indicates that steering wheel assis-
tance of the steering assist function
or lane centering function is operat-
ing.
Both outer sides of the lane are dis-
played: Indicates that steering
wheel assist of the lane centering
function is operating.
One outer side of the lane is dis-
played: Indicates that steering
wheel assist of the steering assist
function is operating.
Both outer sides of the lane are
flashing: Alerts the driver that their
input is necessary to stay in the
center of the lane (lane centering
function).
Follow-up cruising display
Displayed when the multi-informa-
tion display is switched to the driv-
ing support system information
display.
Indicates that steering assist of the
lane centering function is operating
by monitoring the position of a pre-
ceding vehicle.
When the follow-up cruising display
is displayed, if the preceding vehi-
cle moves, your vehicle may move
in the same way. Always pay care-
ful attention to your surroundings
and operate the steering wheel as
necessary to correct the path of the
vehicle and ensure safety.
Lane departure alert function
display
Displayed when the multi-informa-
tion display is switched to the driv-
ing support system information
display.
Inside of displayed lines is
white
Indicates that the system is recog-
nizing white (yellow) lines or a
course
*
. When the vehicle departs
from its lane, the white line dis-
played on the side the vehicle
departs from flashes orange.
Inside of displayed lines is
black
Indicates that the system is not able
to recognize white (yellow) lines or
a course
*
or is temporarily can-
celed.
*
: Boundary between asphalt and
the side of the road, such as
grass, soil, or a curb
■ Operation conditions of each
function
● Lane departure alert function
This function operates when all of
the following conditions are met.
C
D
330
5-5. Using the driving support systems
• LTA is turned on.
• Vehicle speed is approximately 32
mph (50 km/h) or more.
*1
• System recognizes white (yellow)
lane lines or a course
*2
. (When a
white [yellow] line or course
*2
is
recognized on only one side, the
system will operate only for the
recognized side.)
• Width of traffic lane is approxi-
mately 9.8 ft. (3 m) or more.
• Turn signal lever is not operated.
(Except when another vehicle is in
the lane on the side where the
turn signal was operated)
• Vehicle is not being driven around
a sharp curve.
• No system malfunctions are
detected. (P.332)
*1
:The function operates even if the
vehicle speed is less than
approximately 32 mph (50 km/h)
when the lane centering function
is operating.
*2
:Boundary between asphalt and
the side of the road, such as
grass, soil, or a curb
● Steering assist function
This function operates when all of
the following conditions are met in
addition to the operation conditions
for the lane departure alert function.
• Setting for “Steering Assist” in the
screen of the multi-information
display is set to “ON”. (P.170)
• Vehicle is not accelerated or
decelerated by a fixed amount or
more.
• Steering wheel is not operated
with a steering force level suitable
for changing lanes.
• ABS, VSC, TRAC and PCS are
not operating.
• TRAC or VSC is not turned off.
• Hands off steering wheel warning
is not displayed. (P.331)
● Vehicle sway warning function
This function operates when all of
the following conditions are met.
• Setting for “Sway Warning” in the
screen of the multi-information
display is set to “ON”. (P.170)
• Vehicle speed is approximately 32
mph (50 km/h) or more.
• Width of traffic lane is approxi-
mately 9.8 ft. (3 m) or more.
• No system malfunctions are
detected. (P.332)
● Lane centering function
This function operates when all of
the following conditions are met.
• LTA is turned on.
• Setting for “Steering Assist” and
“Lane Center” in the screen of
the multi-information display are
set to “ON”. (P.170)
• This function recognizes white
(yellow) lane lines or the position
of a preceding vehicle (except
when the preceding vehicle is
small, such as a motorcycle).
• The dynamic radar cruise control
with full-speed range is operating
in vehicle-to-vehicle distance con-
trol mode.
• Width of traffic lane is approxi-
mately 10 to 13 ft. (3 to 4 m).
• Turn signal lever is not operated.
• Vehicle is not being driven around
a sharp curve.
• No system malfunctions are
detected. (P.332)
• Vehicle does not accelerate or
decelerate by a fixed amount or
more.
• Steering wheel is not operated
with a steering force level suitable
for changing lanes.
• ABS, VSC, TRAC and PCS are
not operating.
• TRAC or VSC is not turned off.
• Hands off steering wheel warning
is not displayed. (P.331)
• The vehicle is being driven in the
center of a lane.
• Steering assist function is not
operating.
331
5-5. Using the driving support systems
5
Driving
■ Temporary cancelation of func-
tions
● When operation conditions are no
longer met, a function may be
temporarily canceled. However,
when the operation conditions are
met again, operation of the func-
tion is automatically restored.
(P.329)
● If the operation conditions
(P.329) are no longer met while
the lane centering function is
operating, the steering wheel may
vibrate and the buzzer may sound
to indicate that the function has
been temporarily canceled. How-
ever, if the “Alert” customization
setting is set to “Steering wheel
vibration”, the system will notify
the driver by vibrating the steering
wheel instead of sounding the
buzzer.
■ Steering assist function/lane
centering function
● Depending on the vehicle speed,
lane departure situation, road con-
ditions, etc., the driver may not
feel the function is operating or
the function may not operate at
all.
● The steering control of the func-
tion is overridden by the driver’s
steering wheel operation.
● Do not attempt to test the opera-
tion of the steering assist function.
■ Lane departure alert function
● The warning buzzer may be diffi-
cult to hear due to external noise,
audio playback, etc. Also, it may
be difficult to feel steering wheel
vibrations due to the road condi-
tions, etc.
● If the edge of the course
*
is not
clear or straight, the lane depar-
ture alert function may not oper-
ate.
● It may not be possible for the sys-
tem to determine if there is a dan-
ger of a collision with a vehicle in
an adjacent lane.
● Do not attempt to test the opera-
tion of the lane departure alert
function.
*
: Boundary between asphalt and
the side of the road, such as
grass, soil, or a curb
■ Hands off steering wheel warn-
ing
In the following situations, a warning
message urging the driver to hold
the steering wheel and the symbol
shown in the illustration are dis-
played on the multi-information dis-
play to warn the driver. The warning
stops when the system determines
that the driver holds the steering
wheel. Always keep your hands on
the steering wheel when using this
system, regardless of warnings.
● When the system determines that
the driver is driving without hold-
ing the steering wheel while the
system is operating
If the driver continues to keep their
hands off of the steering wheel, the
buzzer sounds, the driver is warned
and the function is temporarily can-
celed. This warning also operates in
the same way when the driver con-
tinuously operates the steering
wheel only a small amount.
The buzzer also sounds even if the
alert type is set to “Steering wheel
vibration”.
● When the system determines that
the vehicle may not turn and
instead depart from its lane while
driving around a curve
332
5-5. Using the driving support systems
Depending on the vehicle condition
and road conditions, the warning
may not operate. Also, if the system
determines that the vehicle is driv-
ing around a curve, warnings will
occur earlier than during straight-
lane driving.
● When the system determines that
the driver is driving without hold-
ing the steering wheel while the
steering wheel assist of the steer-
ing assist function is operating.
If the driver continues to keep their
hands off of the steering wheel and
the steering wheel assist is operat-
ing, the buzzer sounds and the
driver is warned. Each time the
buzzer sounds, the continuing time
of the buzzer becomes longer.
The buzzer also sounds even if the
alert type is set to “Steering wheel
vibration”.
■ Vehicle sway warning function
When the system determines that
the vehicle is swaying while the
vehicle sway warning function is
operating, a buzzer sounds and a
warning message urging the driver
to rest and the symbol shown in the
illustration are simultaneously dis-
played on the multi-information dis-
play.
Depending on the vehicle and road
conditions, the warning may not
operate.
■ Warning message
If the following warning message is
displayed on the multi-information
display and the LTA indicator illumi-
nates in orange, follow the appropri-
ate troubleshooting procedure. Also,
if a different warning message is
displayed, follow the instructions
displayed on the screen.
● “LTA Malfunction Visit Your
Dealer”
The system may not be operating
properly. Have the vehicle inspected
by your Toyota dealer.
● “LTA Unavailable”
The system is temporarily canceled
due to a malfunction in a sensor
other than the front camera. Turn
the LTA system off, wait for a little
while, and then turn the LTA system
back on.
● “LTA Unavailable at Current
Speed”
The function cannot be used as the
vehicle speed exceeds the LTA
operation range. Drive slower.
■ Customization
Function settings can be changed.
(P.177)
333
5-5. Using the driving support systems
5
Driving
*
: If equipped
When the front camera recog-
nizes a sign, the sign will be dis-
played on the multi-information
display.
When the driving support sys-
tem information display is
selected, a maximum of 3
signs can be displayed.
(P.170)
When a tab other than the
driving support system infor-
mation display is selected, the
following types of road signs
will be displayed. (P.170)
• Speed limit sign
• Do Not Enter sign (when notifica-
tion is necessary)
If signs other than speed limit
signs are recognized, they will
RSA (Road Sign
Assist)
*
The RSA system recognizes
specific road signs using
the front camera to provide
information to the driver via
the display.
If the system judges that the
vehicle is being driven over
the speed limit, performing
prohibited actions, etc.
according to the recog-
nized road signs, it notifies
the driver through a visual
notification and notification
buzzer.
WARNING
■ Before using the RSA
Do not rely solely upon the RSA
system. RSA is a system which
supports the driver by providing
information, but it is not a replace-
ment for a driver’s own vision and
awareness. Drive safely by
always paying careful attention to
the traffic rules.
Indication on the multi-
information display
334
5-5. Using the driving support systems
be displayed in an overlapping
stack under the current speed
limit sign.
The following types of road
signs, including electronic signs
and blinking signs, are recog-
nized.
A non-official or a recently intro-
duced traffic sign may not be recog-
nized.
In the following situations, the
RSA system will notify the
driver.
When the vehicle speed
exceeds the speed notifica-
tion threshold of the speed
limit sign displayed, the sign
display will be emphasized
and a buzzer will sound.
When the RSA system recog-
nizes a do not enter sign and
determines that your vehicle
has entered a no-entry area,
the displayed sign will flash
and a buzzer will sound.
Depending on the situation, a
notification function may not
operate properly.
■ Setting procedure
P.177
■ Automatic turn-off of RSA sign
display
In the following situations, a dis-
played speed limit sign and/or do
not enter sign will stop being dis-
played automatically:
● No sign has been recognized for a
certain distance.
● The road changes due to a left or
right turn, etc.
In the following situations, stop and
yield signs will stop being displayed
automatically:
● The system determines that your
vehicle has passed the sign.
● The road changes due to a left or
right turn, etc.
■ Conditions in which the func-
tion may not operate or detect
correctly
In the following situations, RSA
does not operate normally and may
not recognize signs, display the
incorrect sign, etc. However, this
does not indicate a malfunction.
● The front camera is misaligned
due to a strong impact being
applied to the sensor, etc.
● Dirt, snow, stickers, etc. are on the
windshield near the front camera.
● In inclement weather such as
heavy rain, fog, snow or sand
storms.
● Light from an oncoming vehicle,
Supported types of road
signs
Speed limit
Do Not Enter
Stop
Yield
Notification function
335
5-5. Using the driving support systems
5
Driving
the sun, etc. enters the front cam-
era.
● The sign is dirty, faded, tilted or
bent.
● The contrast of electronic sign is
low.
● All or part of the sign is hidden by
the leaves of a tree, a pole, etc.
● The sign is only visible to the front
camera for a short amount of time.
● The driving scene (turning, lane
change, etc.) is judged incorrectly.
● If a sign not appropriate for the
currently traveled lane, but the
sign exists directly after a freeway
branches, or in an adjacent lane
just before merging.
● Stickers are attached to the rear
of the preceding vehicle.
● A sign resembling a system com-
patible sign is recognized.
● Side road speed signs may be
detected and displayed (if posi-
tioned in sight of the front camera)
while the vehicle is traveling on
the main road.
● Roundabout exit road speed signs
may be detected and displayed (if
positioned in sight of the front
camera) while traveling on a
roundabout.
● The front of the vehicle is raised or
lowered due to the carried load.
● The surrounding brightness is not
sufficient or changes suddenly.
● When a sign intended for trucks,
etc. is recognized.
● The speed information displayed
on the meter and on the naviga-
tion system may be different due
to the navigation system using
map data.
■ Speed limit sign display
If the power switch was last turned
off while a speed limit sign was dis-
played on the multi-information dis-
play, the same sign displays again
when the power switch is turned to
ON.
■ If “RSA Malfunction Visit Your
Dealer” is shown
The system may be malfunctioning.
Have the vehicle inspected by your
Toyota dealer.
■ Customization
Some functions can be customized.
(Customizable features: P.177)
336
5-5. Using the driving support systems
■ Meter display
Multi-information display
Set speed
Indicators
■ Operation switches
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance
switch
“+RES” switch
Cruise control main switch
Cancel switch
“-SET” switch
Dynamic radar cruise
control with full-speed
range
In vehicle-to-vehicle dis-
tance control mode, the
vehicle automatically accel-
erates, decelerates and
stops to match the speed
changes of the preceding
vehicle even if the accelera-
tor pedal is not depressed.
In constant speed control
mode, the vehicle runs at a
fixed speed.
Use the dynamic radar
cruise control with full-
speed range on freeways
and highways.
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance
control mode (P.339)
Constant speed control
mode (P.343)
System Components
A
B
WARNING
■ Before using dynamic radar
cruise control with full-speed
range
● Driving safely is the sole
responsibility of the driver. Do
not rely solely on the system,
and drive safely by always pay-
ing careful attention to your sur-
roundings.
C
A
B
C
D
E
337
5-5. Using the driving support systems
5
Driving
WARNING
● The dynamic radar cruise con-
trol with full-speed range pro-
vides driving assistance to
reduce the driver’s burden.
However, there are limitations
to the assistance provided.
Read the following conditions
carefully. Do not overly rely on
this system and always drive
carefully.
• When the sensor may not be
correctly detecting the vehicle
ahead: P.345
• Conditions under which the
vehicle-to-vehicle distance con-
trol mode may not function cor-
rectly: P.346
● Set the speed appropriately
depending on the speed limit,
traffic flow, road conditions,
weather conditions, etc. The
driver is responsible for check-
ing the set speed.
● Even when the system is func-
tioning normally, the condition
of the preceding vehicle as
detected by the system may dif-
fer from the condition observed
by the driver. Therefore, the
driver must always remain alert,
assess the danger of each situ-
ation and drive safely. Relying
solely on this system or assum-
ing the system ensures safety
while driving can lead to an
accident, resulting in death or
serious injury.
● Switch the dynamic radar cruise
control with full-speed range
setting to off, using the cruise
control main switch when not in
use.
■ Cautions regarding the driv-
ing assist systems
Observe the following precau-
tions, as there are limitations to
the assistance provided by the
system. Failure to do so may
cause an accident resulting in
death or serious injury.
● Assisting the driver to measure
following distance
The dynamic radar cruise control
with full-speed range is only
intended to help the driver in
determining the following distance
between the driver’s own vehicle
and a designated vehicle traveling
ahead. It is not a mechanism that
allows careless or inattentive driv-
ing, and it is not a system that can
assist the driver in low-visibility
conditions.
It is still necessary for driver to
pay close attention to the vehi-
cle’s surroundings.
● Assisting the driver to judge
proper following distance
The dynamic radar cruise control
with full-speed range determines
whether the following distance
between the driver’s own vehicle
and a designated vehicle traveling
ahead is within a set range. It is
not capable of making any other
type of judgement. Therefore, it is
absolutely necessary for the
driver to remain vigilant and to
determine whether or not there is
a possibility of danger in any
given situation.
338
5-5. Using the driving support systems
WARNING
● Assisting the driver to operate
the vehicle
The dynamic radar cruise control
with full-speed range does not
include functions which will pre-
vent or avoid collisions with vehi-
cles ahead of your vehicle.
Therefore, if there is ever any
possibility of danger, the driver
must take immediate and direct
control of the vehicle and act
appropriately in order to ensure
the safety of all involved.
■ Situations unsuitable for
dynamic radar cruise control
with full-speed range
Do not use dynamic radar cruise
control with full-speed range in
any of the following situations.
Doing so may result in inappropri-
ate speed control and could
cause an accident resulting in
death or serious injury.
● Roads where there are pedes-
trians, cyclists, etc.
● In heavy traffic
● On roads with sharp bends
● On winding roads
● On slippery roads, such as
those covered with rain, ice or
snow
● On steep downhills, or where
there are sudden changes
between sharp up and down
gradients
Vehicle speed may exceed the
set speed when driving down a
steep hill.
● At entrances to freeways and
highways
● When weather conditions are
bad enough that they may pre-
vent the sensors from detecting
correctly (fog, snow, sandstorm,
heavy rain, etc.)
● When there is rain, snow, etc.
on the front surface of the radar
or front camera
● In traffic conditions that require
frequent repeated acceleration
and deceleration
● When your vehicle is towing a
trailer or during emergency tow-
ing
● When an approach warning
buzzer is heard often
339
5-5. Using the driving support systems
5
Driving
This mode employs a radar to detect the presence of vehicles up to
approximately 328 ft. (100 m) ahead, determines the current vehicle-
to-vehicle following distance, and operates to maintain a suitable fol-
lowing distance from the vehicle ahead. The desired vehicle-to-vehi-
cle distance can also be set by operating the vehicle-to-vehicle
distance switch.
When driving on downhill slopes, the vehicle-to-vehicle distance may
become shorter.
Example of constant speed cruising
When there are no vehicles ahead
The vehicle travels at the speed set by the driver.
Example of deceleration cruising and follow-up cruising
When a preceding vehicle driving slower than the set speed
appears
When a vehicle is detected running ahead of you, the system automatically
decelerates your vehicle. When a greater reduction in vehicle speed is nec-
essary, the system applies the brakes (the stop lights will come on at this
time). The system will respond to changes in the speed of the vehicle
ahead in order to maintain the vehicle-to-vehicle distance set by the driver.
Approach warning warns you when the system cannot decelerate suffi-
ciently to prevent your vehicle from closing in on the vehicle ahead.
When the vehicle ahead of you stops, your vehicle will also stop (vehicle is
stopped by system control). After the vehicle ahead starts off, pressing the
“+RES” switch or depressing the accelerator pedal (start-off operation) will
resume follow-up cruising. If the start-off operation is not performed, system
Driving in vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode
A
B
340
5-5. Using the driving support systems
control continues to keep your vehicle stopped.
When the turn signal lever is operated and your vehicle moves to an over-
taking lane while driving at 50 mph (80 km/h) or more, the vehicle will accel-
erate to help to overtake a passing vehicle.
The system’s identification of what is an overtaking lane may be deter-
mined solely based on the location of the steering wheel in the vehicle (left
side driver position versus right side driver position.) If the vehicle is driven
to a region where the overtaking lane is on a different side from where the
vehicle is normally driven, the vehicle may accelerate when the turn signal
lever is operated in the opposite direction to the overtaking lane (e.g., if the
driver normally operates the vehicle in a region where the overtaking lane is
to the right but then drives to a region where the overtaking lane is to the
left, the vehicle may accelerate when the right turn signal is activated).
Example of acceleration
When there are no longer any preceding vehicles driving slower
than the set speed
The system accelerates until the set speed is reached. The system then
returns to constant speed cruising.
1 Press the cruise control main
switch to activate the cruise
control.
Dynamic radar cruise control indi-
cator will come on and a message
will be displayed on the multi-infor-
mation display. Press the switch
again to deactivate the cruise con-
trol.
If the cruise control main switch is
pressed and held for 1.5 seconds
or more, the system turns on in
constant speed control mode.
(P.343)
2 Accelerate or decelerate,
with accelerator pedal opera-
tion, to the desired vehicle
speed (at or above approxi-
mately 20 mph [30 km/h])
and press the “-SET” switch
to set the speed.
Cruise control “SET” indicator will
come on.
The vehicle speed at the moment
the switch is released becomes the
C
Setting the vehicle speed
(vehicle-to-vehicle dis-
tance control mode)
341
5-5. Using the driving support systems
5
Driving
set speed.
Adjusting the set speed by the
switch
To change the set speed, press
the “+RES” or “-SET” switch
until the desired set speed is
displayed.
1 Increases the speed (Except
when the vehicle has been
stopped by system control in
vehicle-to-vehicle distance
control mode)
2 Decreases the speed
Fine adjustment: Press the switch.
Large adjustment: Press and hold
the switch to change the speed,
and release when the desired
speed is reached.
In the vehicle-to-vehicle dis-
tance control mode, the set
speed will be increased or
decreased as follows:
For the U.S. mainland and
Hawaii
Fine adjustment: By 1 mph (1.6
km/h)
*1
or 1 km/h (0.6 mph)
*2
each
time the switch is pressed
Large adjustment: Increases or
decreases in 1 mph (1.6 km/h)
*1
or
1 km/h (0.6 mph)
*2
increments for
as long as the switch is held
Except for the U.S. mainland
and Hawaii
Fine adjustment: By 1 mph (1.6
km/h)
*1
or 1 km/h (0.6 mph)
*2
each
time the switch is pressed
Large adjustment: Increases or
decreases in 5 mph (8 km/h)
*1
or 5
km/h (3.1 mph)
*2
increments for as
long as the switch is held
In the constant speed control
mode (P.343), the set speed
will be increased or decreased
as follows:
Fine adjustment: By 1 mph (1.6
km/h)
*1
or 1 km/h (0.6 mph)
*2
each
time the switch is pressed
Large adjustment: The speed will
continue to change while the switch
is held.
*1
:When the set speed is shown in
“MPH”
*2
:When the set speed is shown in
“km/h”
Increasing the set speed by
the accelerator pedal
Adjusting the set speed
342
5-5. Using the driving support systems
1 Accelerate with accelerator
pedal operation to the
desired vehicle speed
2 Press the “-SET” switch
Pressing the switch changes the
vehicle-to-vehicle distance as
follows:
1 Long
2 Medium
3 Short
The vehicle-to-vehicle distance is
set automatically to long mode
when the power switch is turned to
ON.
If a vehicle is running ahead of you,
the preceding vehicle mark will
also be displayed.
Select a distance from the table
below. Note that the distances
shown correspond to a vehicle
speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance
increases/decreases in accor-
dance with vehicle speed. When
the vehicle is stopped by system
control, the vehicle stops at a
certain vehicle-to-vehicle dis-
tance depending on the situa-
tion.
After the vehicle ahead of you
starts off, press the “+RES”
switch.
Your vehicle will also resume
follow-up cruising if the acceler-
ator pedal is depressed after the
vehicle ahead of you starts off.
Changing the vehicle-to-
vehicle distance (vehicle-
to-vehicle distance con-
trol mode)
Vehicle-to-vehicle dis-
tance settings (vehicle-to-
vehicle distance control
mode)
A
Distance options
Vehicle-to-vehi-
cle distance
Long
Approximately
160 ft. (50 m)
Medium
Approximately
130 ft. (40 m)
Short
Approximately
100 ft. (30 m)
Resuming follow-up
cruising when the vehicle
has been stopped by sys-
tem control (vehicle-to-
vehicle distance control
mode)
343
5-5. Using the driving support systems
5
Driving
1 Pressing the cancel switch
cancels the speed control.
The speed control is also canceled
when the brake pedal is depressed.
(When the vehicle has been
stopped by system control,
depressing the brake pedal does
not cancel the setting.)
2 Pressing the “+RES” switch
resumes the cruise control
and returns vehicle speed to
the set speed.
When your vehicle is too close
to a vehicle ahead, and suffi-
cient automatic deceleration via
the cruise control is not possi-
ble, the display will flash and the
buzzer will sound to alert the
driver. An example of this would
be if another driver cuts in front
of you while you are following a
vehicle. Depress the brake
pedal to ensure an appropriate
vehicle-to-vehicle distance.
■ Warnings may not occur
when
In the following instances, warn-
ings may not occur even when
the vehicle-to-vehicle distance is
small.
When the speed of the pre-
ceding vehicle matches or
exceeds your vehicle speed
When the preceding vehicle is
traveling at an extremely slow
speed
Immediately after the cruise
control speed was set
When depressing the acceler-
ator pedal
When constant speed control
Canceling and resuming
the speed control
Approach warning (vehi-
cle-to-vehicle distance
control mode)
Selecting constant speed
control mode
344
5-5. Using the driving support systems
mode is selected, your vehicle
will maintain a set speed without
controlling the vehicle-to-vehi-
cle distance. Select this mode
only when vehicle-to-vehicle dis-
tance control mode does not
function correctly due to a dirty
radar, etc.
1 With the cruise control off,
press and hold the cruise
control main switch for 1.5
seconds or more.
Immediately after the switch is
pressed, the dynamic radar cruise
control indicator will come on. After-
wards, it switches to the cruise con-
trol indicator.
Switching to constant speed control
mode is only possible when operat-
ing the switch with the cruise con-
trol off.
2 Accelerate or decelerate,
with accelerator pedal opera-
tion, to the desired vehicle
speed (at or above approxi-
mately 20 mph [30 km/h])
and press the “-SET” switch
to set the speed.
Cruise control “SET” indicator will
come on.
The vehicle speed at the moment
the switch is released becomes the
set speed.
Adjusting the speed setting:
P.341
Canceling and resuming the speed
setting: P.343
■ Dynamic radar cruise control
with full-speed range can be set
when
● The shift lever is in D.
● The desired set speed can be set
when the vehicle speed is approx-
imately 20 mph (30 km/h) or more.
(However, when the vehicle speed
is set while driving at below
approximately 20 mph [30 km/h],
the set speed will be set to
approximately 20 mph [30 km/h].)
■ Accelerating after setting the
vehicle speed
The vehicle can accelerate by oper-
ating the accelerator pedal. After
accelerating, the set speed
resumes. However, during vehicle-
to-vehicle distance control mode,
the vehicle speed may decrease
below the set speed in order to
maintain the distance to the preced-
ing vehicle.
■ When the vehicle stops while
follow-up cruising
● Pressing the “+RES” switch while
the vehicle ahead stops will
resume follow-up cruising if the
vehicle ahead starts off within
approximately 3 seconds after the
switch is pressed.
● If the vehicle ahead starts off
within 3 seconds after your vehicle
stops, follow-up cruising will be
345
5-5. Using the driving support systems
5
Driving
resumed.
■ Automatic cancelation of vehi-
cle-to-vehicle distance control
mode
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
mode is automatically canceled in
the following situations.
● VSC is activated.
● TRAC is activated for a period of
time.
● When the VSC or TRAC system is
turned off.
● The sensor cannot detect cor-
rectly because it is covered in
some way.
● Pre-collision braking is activated.
● The parking brake is operated.
● The vehicle is stopped by system
control on a steep incline.
● The following are detected when
the vehicle has been stopped by
system control:
• The driver is not wearing a seat
belt.
• The driver’s door is opened.
• The vehicle has been stopped for
about 3 minutes
If vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
mode is automatically canceled for
any reasons other than the above,
there may be a malfunction in the
system. Contact your Toyota dealer.
■ Automatic cancelation of con-
stant speed control mode
Constant speed control mode is
automatically canceled in the follow-
ing situations:
● Actual vehicle speed is more than
approximately 10 mph (16 km/h)
below the set vehicle speed.
● Actual vehicle speed falls below
approximately 20 mph (30 km/h).
● VSC is activated.
● TRAC is activated for a period of
time.
● When the VSC or TRAC system is
turned off.
● Pre-collision braking is activated.
● The parking brake is operated.
If constant speed control mode is
automatically canceled for any rea-
sons other than the above, there
may be a malfunction in the system.
Contact your Toyota dealer.
■ Brake operation
A brake operation sound may be
heard and the brake pedal response
may change, but these are not mal-
functions.
■ Warning messages and buzzers
for dynamic radar cruise con-
trol with full-speed range
Warning messages and buzzers are
used to indicate a system malfunc-
tion or to inform the driver of the
need for caution while driving. If a
warning message is shown on the
multi-information display, read the
message and follow the instructions.
(P.313, 523)
■ When the sensor may not be
correctly detecting the vehicle
ahead
In the case of the following and
depending on the conditions, oper-
ate the brake pedal when decelera-
tion of the system is insufficient or
operate the accelerator pedal when
acceleration is required.
As the sensor may not be able to
correctly detect these types of vehi-
cles, the approach warning
(P.343) may not be activated.
● Vehicles that cut in suddenly
● Vehicles traveling at low speeds
● Vehicles that are not moving in
the same lane
● Vehicles with small rear ends
(trailers with no load on board,
etc.)
346
5-5. Using the driving support systems
● Motorcycles traveling in the same
lane
● When water or snow thrown up by
the surrounding vehicles hinders
the detecting of the sensor
● When your vehicle is pointing
upwards (caused by a heavy load
in the luggage compartment, etc.)
● Preceding vehicle has an
extremely high ground clearance
■ Conditions under which the
vehicle-to-vehicle distance con-
trol mode may not function cor-
rectly
In the case of the following condi-
tions, operate the brake pedal (or
accelerator pedal, depending on the
situation) as necessary.
As the sensor may not be able to
correctly detect vehicles ahead, the
system may not operate properly.
● When the road curves or when the
lanes are narrow
● When steering wheel operation or
your position in the lane is unsta-
ble
● When the vehicle ahead of you
decelerates suddenly
● When driving on a road sur-
rounded by a structure, such as in
a tunnel or on a bridge
● While the vehicle speed is
decreasing to the set speed after
the vehicle accelerates by
depressing the accelerator pedal
347
5-5. Using the driving support systems
5
Driving
Multi-information display
Turning the BSM function/RCTA
function on/off.
Outside rear view mirror indi-
cators
BSM (Blind Spot Moni-
tor)
The Blind Spot Monitor is a
system that has 2 functions:
The BSM (Blind Spot Moni-
tor) function
Assists the driver in making a
decision when changing lanes
The RCTA (Rear Cross
Traffic Alert) function
Assists the driver when back-
ing up
These functions use the
same sensors.
WARNING
■ Cautions regarding the use of
the BSM function
The driver is solely responsible for
safe driving. Always drive safely,
taking care to observe your sur-
roundings.
The BSM function is a supple-
mentary function which alerts the
driver that a vehicle is in a blind
spot of the outside rear view mir-
rors or is approaching rapidly from
behind into a blind spot. Do not
overly rely on the BSM function.
As the function cannot judge if it is
safe to change lanes, over reli-
ance could lead to an accident
resulting in death or serious
injury.
As the system may not function
correctly under certain condi-
tions, the driver’s own visual con-
firmation of safety is necessary.
■ Cautions regarding the use of
the RCTA function
The driver is solely responsible for
safe driving. Always drive safely,
taking care to observe your sur-
roundings.
The RCTA function is only a sup-
plementary function which alerts
the driver that a vehicle is
approaching from the right or left
at the rear of the vehicle. As the
RCTA function may not function
correctly under certain condi-
tions, the driver’s own visual con-
firmation of safety is necessary.
Over reliance on this function may
lead to an accident resulting
death or serious injury.
System components
A
B
348
5-5. Using the driving support systems
BSM function:
When a vehicle is detected in a
blind spot of the outside rear view
mirrors or approaching rapidly from
behind into a blind spot, the outside
rear view mirror indicator on the
detected side will illuminate. If the
turn signal lever is operated toward
the detected side, the outside rear
view mirror indicator will flash.
RCTA function:
When a vehicle approaching from
the right or left at the rear of the
vehicle is detected, both outside
rear view mirror indicators will flash.
Monitor screen display
(RCTA function only)
If a vehicle approaching from the
right or left at the rear of the vehicle
is detected, the RCTA icon
(P.353) for the detected side will
be displayed.
BSM OFF indicator/RCTA
OFF indicator
When the Blind Spot Monitor is dis-
abled, the BSM OFF indicator illu-
minates.
When the RCTA function is dis-
abled, the RCTA OFF indicator illu-
minates.
RCTA buzzer (RCTA func-
tion only)
If a vehicle approaching from the
right or left at the rear of the vehicle
is detected, a buzzer will sound
from behind the rear seat.
The BSM function and the
RCTA function can be
enabled/disabled on the
screen of the multi-information
display. (P.177)
The BSM function/RCTA function
will be enabled each time the power
switch is turned to ON.
■ Outside rear view mirror indica-
tors visibility
In strong sunlight, the outside rear
view mirror indicator may be difficult
to see.
■ Hearing the RCTA buzzer
The RCTA buzzer may be difficult to
hear over loud noises such as high
audio volume.
■ When “Blind Spot Monitor
Unavailable” or “Rear Cross
Traffic Alert Unavailable” is
shown on the multi-information
display
The sensor voltage has become
abnormal, or water, snow, mud,
etc., may be built up in the vicinity of
the sensor area of the rear bumper.
(P.350)
Removing the water, snow, mud,
etc., from the vicinity of the sensor
area should return it to normal.
Also, the sensor may not function
normally when used in extremely
hot or cold weather.
■ When “Blind Spot Monitor Mal-
function Visit Your Dealer” or
“Rear Cross Traffic Alert Mal-
function Visit Your Dealer” is
shown on the multi-information
display
There may be a sensor malfunction
or misaligned. Have the vehicle
inspected at a Toyota dealer.
■ Customization
Some functions can be customized.
(P.177)
Turning the BSM func-
tion/RCTA function on/off
C
D
E
349
5-5. Using the driving support systems
5
Driving
■ Certification for the Blind Spot Monitor
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A. and Hawaii
For vehicles sold in Canada
350
5-5. Using the driving support systems
■ Vehicles that can be
detected by the Blind Spot
Monitor
The BSM function uses radar
sensors to detect the following
vehicles traveling in adjacent
lanes and advises the driver of
the presence of such vehicles
via the indicators on the outside
rear view mirrors.
WARNING
■ Handling the radar sensor
Blind Spot Monitor sensors are
installed inside the left and right
sides of the rear bumper respec-
tively. Observe the following to
ensure the Blind Spot Monitor can
function correctly.
● Keep the sensors and the sur-
rounding areas on the rear
bumper clean at all times.
If a sensor or its surrounding
area on the rear bumper is dirty
or covered with snow, the Blind
Spot Monitor may not operate
and a warning message
(P.348) will be displayed. In
this situation, clear off the dirt or
snow and drive the vehicle with
the operation conditions of the
BSM function (P.352) satis-
fied for approximately 10 min-
utes. If the warning message
does not disappear, have the
vehicle inspected by your
Toyota dealer.
● Do not subject a sensor or its
surrounding area on the rear
bumper to a strong impact.
If a sensor is moved even
slightly off position, the system
may malfunction and vehicles
may not be detected correctly.
In the following situations, have
your vehicle inspected by your
Toyota dealer.
• A sensor or its surrounding area
is subject to a strong impact.
• If the surrounding area of a sen-
sor is scratched or dented, or
part of them has become dis-
connected.
● Do not disassemble the sensor.
● Do not attach accessories,
stickers (including transparent
stickers), aluminum tape, etc. to
a sensor or its surrounding area
on the rear bumper.
● Do not modify the sensor or sur-
rounding area on the rear
bumper.
● If a sensor or the rear bumper
needs to be removed/installed
or replaced, contact your
Toyota dealer.
● Do not paint the rear bumper
any color other than an official
Toyota color.
The Blind Spot Monitor
function
351
5-5. Using the driving support systems
5
Driving
Vehicles that are traveling in
areas that are not visible
using the outside rear view
mirrors (the blind spots)
Vehicles that are approach-
ing rapidly from behind in
areas that are not visible
using the outside rear view
mirrors (the blind spots)
■ The BSM function detection
areas
The areas that vehicles can be
detected in are outlined below.
The range of each detection area
is:
Approximately 1.6 ft. (0.5 m)
to 11.5 ft. (3.5 m) from either
side of the vehicle
The area between the side of the
vehicle and 1.6 ft. (0.5 m) from the
side of the vehicle cannot be
detected.
Approximately 3.3 ft. (1 m)
forward of the rear bumper
Approximately 9.8 ft. (3 m)
from the rear bumper
Approximately 9.8 ft. (3 m) to
197 ft. (60 m) from the rear
bumper
The greater the difference in speed
between your vehicle and the
detected vehicle is, the farther
away the vehicle will be detected,
causing the outside rear view mirror
indicator to illuminate or flash.
A
B
A
B
C
D
352
5-5. Using the driving support systems
■ The BSM function is operational
when
The BSM function is operational
when all of the following conditions
are met:
● The BSM function is on.
● The shift lever is in a position
other than R.
● The vehicle speed is greater than
approximately 10 mph (16 km/h).
■ The BSM function will detect a
vehicle when
The BSM function will detect a vehi-
cle present in the detection area in
the following situations:
● A vehicle in an adjacent lane over-
takes your vehicle.
● You overtake a vehicle in an adja-
cent lane slowly.
● Another vehicle enters the detec-
tion area when it changes lanes.
■ Conditions under which the
BSM function will not detect a
vehicle
The BSM function is not designed to
detect the following types of vehi-
cles and/or objects:
● Small motorcycles, bicycles,
pedestrians, etc.
*
● Vehicles traveling in the opposite
direction
● Guardrails, walls, signs, parked
vehicles and similar stationary
objects
*
● Following vehicles that are in the
same lane
*
● Vehicles traveling 2 lanes away
from your vehicle
*
● Vehicles which are being over-
taken rapidly by your vehicle
*
: Depending on the conditions,
detection of a vehicle and/or
object may occur.
■ Conditions under which the
BSM function may not function
correctly
● The BSM function may not detect
vehicles correctly in the following
situations:
• When the sensor is misaligned
due to a strong impact to the sen-
sor or its surrounding area
• When mud, snow, ice, a sticker,
etc. is covering the sensor or sur-
rounding area on the rear bumper
• When driving on a road surface
that is wet with standing water
during bad weather, such as
heavy rain, snow, or fog
• When multiple vehicles are
approaching with only a small gap
between each vehicle
• When the distance between your
vehicle and a following vehicle is
short
• When there is a significant differ-
ence in speed between your vehi-
cle and the vehicle that enters the
detection area
• When the difference in speed
between your vehicle and another
vehicle is changing
• When a vehicle enters a detection
area traveling at about the same
speed as your vehicle
• As your vehicle starts from a stop,
a vehicle remains in the detection
area
• When driving up and down con-
secutive steep inclines, such as
hills, dips in the road, etc.
• When driving on roads with sharp
bends, consecutive curves, or
uneven surfaces
• When vehicle lanes are wide, or
353
5-5. Using the driving support systems
5
Driving
when driving on the edge of a
lane, and the vehicle in an adja-
cent lane is far away from your
vehicle
• When an accessory (such as a
bicycle carrier) is installed to the
rear of the vehicle
• When there is a significant differ-
ence in height between your vehi-
cle and the vehicle that enters the
detection area
• Immediately after the BSM func-
tion/RCTA function are turned on
• When towing a trailer
● Instances of the BSM function
unnecessarily detecting a vehicle
and/or object may increase in the
following situations:
• When the sensor is misaligned
due to a strong impact to the sen-
sor or its surrounding area
• When the distance between your
vehicle and a guardrail, wall, etc.
that enters the detection area is
short
• When driving up and down con-
secutive steep inclines, such as
hills, dips in the road, etc.
• When vehicle lanes are narrow, or
when driving on the edge of a
lane, and a vehicle traveling in a
lane other than the adjacent lanes
enters the detection area
• When driving on roads with sharp
bends, consecutive curves, or
uneven surfaces
• When the tires are slipping or
spinning
• When the distance between your
vehicle and a following vehicle is
short
• When an accessory (such as a
bicycle carrier) is installed to the
rear of the vehicle
• When the vehicle throws up water
or snow behind.
■ Operation of the RCTA
function
The RCTA function uses radar
sensors to detect vehicles
approaching from the right or left
at the rear of the vehicle and
alerts the driver of the presence
of such vehicles by flashing the
outside rear view mirror indica-
tors and sounding a buzzer.
Approaching vehicles
Detection areas
■ RCTA icon display
When a vehicle approaching
from the right or left at the rear
of the vehicle is detected, the
following will be displayed on
the navigation system (if
equipped) or multimedia sys-
tem (if equipped) screen.
When the Toyota parking
assist monitor (if equipped) is
displayed
The Rear Cross Traffic
Alert function
A
B
354
5-5. Using the driving support systems
When the panoramic view
monitor (if equipped) is dis-
played
■ The RCTA function detec-
tion areas
The areas that vehicles can be
detected in are outlined below.
The buzzer can alert the driver of
faster vehicles approaching from
farther away.
Example:
■ The RCTA function is opera-
tional when
The RCTA function operates when
all of the following conditions are
met:
● The RCTA function is on.
● The shift lever is in R.
● The vehicle speed is less than
approximately 5 mph (8 km/h).
● The approaching vehicle speed is
between approximately 5 mph (8
km/h) and 18 mph (28 km/h).
■ Setting the buzzer volume
The buzzer volume can be adjusted
on the multi-information display.
(P.177)
■ Conditions under which the
RCTA function will not detect a
vehicle
The RCTA function is not designed
to detect the following types of vehi-
cles and/or objects.
● Vehicles approaching from
directly behind
● Vehicles backing up in a parking
space next to your vehicle
● Vehicles that the sensors cannot
detect due to obstructions
Approach-
ing vehicle
Speed
Approxi-
mate alert
distance
Fast
18 mph
(28 km/h)
65 ft. (20
m)
Slow
5 mph (8
km/h)
18 ft. (5.5
m)
A
355
5-5. Using the driving support systems
5
Driving
● Guardrails, walls, signs, parked
vehicles and similar stationary
objects
*
● Small motorcycles, bicycles,
pedestrians, etc.
*
● Vehicles moving away from your
vehicle
● Vehicles approaching from the
parking spaces next to your vehi-
cle
*
*
: Depending on conditions, detec-
tion of a vehicle and/or object may
occur.
■ Conditions under which the
RCTA function may not func-
tion correctly
● The RCTA function may not
detect vehicles correctly in the fol-
lowing situations:
• When the sensor is misaligned
due to a strong impact to the sen-
sor or its surrounding area
• When mud, snow, ice, a sticker,
etc. is covering the sensor or sur-
rounding area on the rear bumper
• When driving on a road surface
that is wet with standing water
during bad weather, such as
heavy rain, snow, or fog
• When multiple vehicles are
approaching with only a small gap
between each vehicle
• When a vehicle is approaching at
high speed
• When parking on a steep incline,
such as hills, a dip in the road, etc.
• When an accessory (such as a
bicycle carrier) is installed to the
rear of the vehicle
• When backing up on a slope with
a sharp change in grade
• When backing out of a shallow
angle parking spot
• Immediately after the RCTA func-
tion is turned on
• Immediately after the hybrid sys-
tem is started with the RCTA func-
tion on
• When towing a trailer
• When the sensors cannot detect a
vehicle due to obstructions
● Instances of the RCTA function
unnecessary detecting a vehicle
and/or object may increase in the
following situations:
• When a vehicle passes by the
side of your vehicle
• When the parking space faces a
street and vehicles are being
356
5-5. Using the driving support systems
driven on the street
• When the distance between your
vehicle and metal objects, such as
a guardrail, wall, sign, or parked
vehicle, which may reflect electri-
cal waves toward the rear of the
vehicle, is short
• When an accessory (such as a
bicycle carrier) is installed to the
rear of the vehicle
*
: If equipped
■ Location and types of sen-
sors
Front corner sensors
Front center sensors
Rear corner sensors
Rear center sensors
■ Display (Multi-information
display)
When the sensors detect an
object, such as a wall, a graphic
Intuitive parking
assist
*
The distance from your
vehicle to objects, such as a
wall, when parallel parking
or maneuvering into a
garage is measured by the
sensors and communicated
via the multi-information
display, navigation system
or multimedia system
screen and a buzzer. Always
check the surrounding area
when using this system.
System components
A
B
C
D
357
5-5. Using the driving support systems
5
Driving
is shown on the multi-informa-
tion display depending on the
position and distance to the
object.
Front corner sensor detection
Front center sensor detec-
tion
*1
Rear corner sensor detec-
tion
*2
Rear center sensor detec-
tion
*2
*1
:Displayed when the shift lever is
in a driving position
*2
:Displayed when the shift lever is
in R
■ Display (Audio system
screen)
When the sensors detect an
object, such as a wall, a graphic
is shown on the navigation sys-
tem (if equipped) or multimedia
system (if equipped) screen
depending on the position and
distance to the object.
When the Toyota parking
assist monitor (if equipped) is
displayed
A simplified image is displayed on
the upper corner of the screen
when an obstacle is detected.
When the panoramic view
monitor (if equipped) is dis-
played
Panoramic view
*
A graphic is shown when the pan-
oramic view monitor is displayed.
*
: A simplified image is displayed on
the upper corner of the screen
when an obstacle is detected
while magnified display is shown.
Except panoramic view
A simplified image is displayed on
the upper corner of the screen
when an obstacle is detected.
A
B
C
D
358
5-5. Using the driving support systems
The Intuitive parking assist can
be enabled/disabled on the
screen of the multi-information
display. (P.177)
When the intuitive parking assist
function is disabled, the intuitive
parking assist OFF indicator
(P.163) illuminates on the multi-
information display.
To re-enable the system, select
on the multi-information display,
select and turn it on.
If the system is disabled, it will
remain off even if the power switch
is turned to ON after the power
switch has been turned off.
Turning intuitive parking
assist on/off
WARNING
■ Intuitive parking assist pre-
cautions
Observe the following precau-
tions.
Failing to do so may result in the
vehicle being unable to be driven
safely and possibly cause an acci-
dent.
● Do not use the sensor at
speeds in excess of 6 mph (10
km/h).
● The sensors’ detection areas
and reaction times are limited.
When moving forward or revers-
ing, check the areas surround-
ing the vehicle (especially the
sides of the vehicle) for safety,
and drive slowly, using the
brake to control the vehicle’s
speed.
● Do not install accessories near
the bumpers as those areas are
within the sensors’ detection
areas.
● The area directly under the
bumpers is not detected.
Thin posts or objects lower than
the sensor may not be detected
when approached, even if they
have been detected once.
■ When to disable the function
In the following situations, disable
the function as it may operate
even though there is no possibility
of a collision.
● The vehicle is equipped with a
commercial fender pole, wire-
less antenna or fog lights.
● The front or rear bumper or a
sensor receives a strong
impact.
● A non-genuine Toyota suspen-
sion (lowered suspension, etc.)
is installed.
● Towing eyelets (if equipped) are
installed.
● A backlit license plate is
installed.
● When using an automatic car
wash
359
5-5. Using the driving support systems
5
Driving
■ The system can be operated
when
● The power switch is in ON.
● Intuitive parking assist function is
on.
● The vehicle speed is less than
about 6 mph (10 km/h).
● The shift lever is in a position
other than P.
■ If “Clean Parking Assist Sen-
sor” is displayed on the multi-
information display
A sensor may be covered with ice,
snow, dirt, etc. Remove the ice,
snow, dirt, etc., from the sensor to
return the system to normal.
Also, due to ice forming on a sensor
at low temperatures, a warning
message may be displayed or the
sensor may not be able to detect an
object. Once the ice melts, the sys-
tem will return to normal.
If a warning message is displayed
even if the sensor is clean, there
may be a sensor malfunction. Have
the vehicle inspected by your
Toyota dealer.
■ If “Parking Assist Unavailable”
is displayed on the multi-infor-
mation display
Water may be continuously flowing
over the sensor surface, such as in
a heavy rain. When the system
determines that it is normal, the sys-
tem will return to normal.
■ Sensor detection information
● The sensor’s detection areas are
limited to the areas around the
vehicle’s front and rear bumpers.
● The following situations may occur
during use.
• Depending on the shape of the
object and other factors, the
WARNING
■ When using the intuitive park-
ing assist
In the following situations, the
system may not function correctly
due to a sensor malfunction, etc.
Have the vehicle checked by your
Toyota dealer.
● The intuitive parking assist
operation display flashes or
shows continuously, and a
buzzer sounds when no objects
are detected.
● If the area around a sensor col-
lides with something, or is sub-
jected to strong impact.
● If the bumper or grille collides
with something.
● If the display flashes or is dis-
played continuously and a
buzzer does not sound, except
when the mute function has
been turned on.
■ Notes when washing the vehi-
cle
Do not apply intensive bursts of
water or steam to the sensor
area.
Doing so may result in the sensor
malfunctioning.
● When using a high pressure
washer to wash the vehicle, do
not spray the sensors directly,
as doing so may cause a sensor
to malfunction.
● When using steam to clean the
vehicle, do not direct steam too
close to the sensors as doing so
may cause a sensor to malfunc-
tion.
360
5-5. Using the driving support systems
detection distance may shorten,
or detection may be impossible.
• Detection may be impossible if
static objects draw too close to the
sensor.
• There will be a short delay
between static object detection
and display (warning buzzer
sounds). Even at low speeds,
there is a possibility that the object
will come within 9.8 in. (25 cm)
before the display is shown and
the warning buzzer sounds.
• It might be difficult to hear the
buzzer due to the volume of the
audio system or air flow noise of
the air conditioning system.
• It may be difficult to hear the
sound of this system due to the
buzzers of other systems.
■ Conditions under which the
function may not function cor-
rectly
Certain vehicle conditions and the
surrounding environment may affect
the ability of a sensor to correctly
detect objects. Particular instances
where this may occur are listed
below.
● There is dirt, snow or ice on a sen-
sor. (Cleaning the sensors will
resolve this problem.)
● A sensor is frozen. (Thawing the
area will resolve this problem.)
In especially cold weather, if a
sensor is frozen the sensor dis-
play may be displayed abnor-
mally, or objects, such as a wall,
may not be detected.
● A sensor is covered in any way.
● When a sensor or the area around
a sensor is extremely hot or cold.
● On an extremely bumpy road, on
an incline, on gravel, or on grass.
● The vicinity of the vehicle is noisy
due to vehicle horns, motorcycle
engines, air brakes of large vehi-
cles, or other loud noises produc-
ing ultrasonic waves.
● There is another vehicle equipped
with parking assist sensors in the
vicinity.
● A sensor is coated with a sheet of
spray or heavy rain.
● If a sensor is hit by a large amount
of water, such as when driving on
a flooded road.
● If the vehicle is significantly tilted.
● The vehicle is approaching a tall
or curved curb.
● If objects draw too close to the
sensor.
■ Objects which may not be prop-
erly detected
The shape of the object may pre-
vent the sensor from detecting it.
Pay particular attention to the fol-
lowing objects:
● Wires, fences, ropes, etc.
● Cotton, snow and other materials
that absorb sound waves
● Sharply-angled objects
● Low objects
● Tall objects with upper sections
projecting outwards in the direc-
tion of your vehicle
People may not be detected if they
are wearing certain types of cloth-
ing.
■ Certification (Canada only)
This ISM device complies with
Canadian ICES-001.
361
5-5. Using the driving support systems
5
Driving
■ Detection range of the sen-
sors
Approximately 3.3 ft. (100
cm)
Approximately 4.9 ft. (150
cm)
Approximately 2.0 ft. (60 cm)
The diagram shows the detection
range of the sensors. Note that the
sensors cannot detect objects that
are extremely close to the vehicle.
The range of the sensors may
change depending on the shape of
the object, etc.
■ Distance display
When an object is detected by a sensor, the approximate distance to
the object will be displayed on the multi-information display, naviga-
tion system (if equipped) or multimedia system (if equipped) screen.
(As the distance to the object becomes short, the distance segments
may blink.)
The images may differ from that shown in the illustrations.
Approximate distance to object
• Front center sensor: 3.3 ft. (100 cm) to 2.0 ft. (60 cm)
• Rear center sensor: 4.9 ft. (150 cm) to 2.0 ft. (60 cm)
Sensor detection display,
object distance
A
B
C
Multi-information display Navigation or multimedia system screen
362
5-5. Using the driving support systems
Approximate distance to object: 2.0 ft. (60 cm) to 1.5 ft. (45 cm)
Approximate distance to object: 1.5 ft. (45 cm) to 1.0 ft. (30 cm)
Approximate distance to object: 1.0 ft. (30 cm) to 0.5 ft. (15 cm)
*
: The distance segments will blink slowly.
Approximate distance to object: Less than 0.5 ft. (15 cm)
*
: The distance segments will blink rapidly.
■ Buzzer operation and dis-
tance to an object
A buzzer sounds when the sen-
sors are operating.
The buzzer beeps faster as
the vehicle approaches an
object.
When the vehicle comes
within approximately 1.0 ft.
(30 cm) of the object, the
buzzer sounds continuously.
When 2 or more sensors
simultaneously detect a static
object, the buzzer sounds for
the nearest object.
Even when the sensors are
Multi-information display Navigation or multimedia system screen
Multi-information display Navigation or multimedia system screen
Multi-information display
*
Navigation or multimedia system screen
Multi-information display
*
Navigation or multimedia system screen
363
5-5. Using the driving support systems
5
Driving
operating, the buzzer will be
muted in some situations.
(automatic buzzer mute func-
tion)
■ Muting the buzzer sound
● Automatic buzzer mute function
Even when the sensors are operat-
ing, the buzzer will be muted in the
following situations:
• The distance between the vehicle
and the detected object does not
become shorter (except when the
distance between the vehicle and
object is 1.0 ft. [30 cm] or less).
• Your vehicle is moving away from
the object.
• There are no detectable objects
entering the path of your vehicle.
However, if another object is
detected or the situation changes
while the buzzer is muted, the
buzzer begins sounding again.
● To mute the buzzer sound
The buzzer can be temporarily
muted by pressing of the meter
control switches while a suggestion
that says mute is available is shown
on the multi-information display.
● When the mute is canceled
Mute will be automatically canceled
in the following situations.
• When the shift position is changed
• When the vehicle speed has
reached or exceeded a certain
speed
• When the Intuitive parking assist
is turned off once and turned on
again
• When the power switch is turned
off once and turned to ON again
■ Customization
The buzzer volume can be adjusted
on the multi-information display.
(P.177)
*
: If equipped
■ Parking Support Brake
function (static objects)
P.368
■ Parking Support Brake
function (rear-crossing
vehicles)
P.373
PKSB (Parking Sup-
port Brake)
*
The Parking Support Brake
system consists of the fol-
lowing functions that oper-
ate when driving at a low
speed or backing up, such
as when parking. When the
system determines that the
possibility of a collision
with a detected object is
high, a warning operates to
urge the driver to take eva-
sive action. If the system
determines that the possi-
bility of a collision with a
detected object is extremely
high, the brakes are auto-
matically applied to help
avoid the collision or help
reduce the impact of the
collision.
PKSB (Parking Support
Brake) system
364
5-5. Using the driving support systems
The Parking Support Brake can
be enabled/disabled on the
screen of the multi-information
display. All of the Parking Sup-
port Brake functions (static
objects and rear-crossing vehi-
cles) are enabled/disabled
simultaneously. (P.177)
When the Parking Support Brake is
disabled, the PKSB OFF indicator
(P.163) illuminates on the multi-
information display.
To re-enable the system, select
on the multi-information display,
select and turn it on.
If the system is disabled, it will
remain off even if the power switch
is turned to ON after the power
switch has been turned off.
WARNING
■ Limitations of the Parking
Support Brake system
Do not overly rely on the system,
as doing so may lead to an acci-
dent.
Always drive while checking the
safety of the surroundings of the
vehicle.
Depending on the vehicle and
road conditions, weather, etc., the
system may not operate.
The detection capabilities of sen-
sors and radars are limited.
Always drive while checking the
safety of the surroundings of the
vehicle.
● The driver is solely responsible
for safe driving. Always drive
carefully, taking care to observe
your surroundings. The Parking
Support Brake system is
designed to provide support to
lessen the severity of collisions.
However, it may not operate in
some situations.
● The Parking Support Brake sys-
tem is not designed to stop the
vehicle completely. Addition-
ally, even if the system has
stopped the vehicle, it is neces-
sary to depress the brake pedal
immediately as brake control
will be canceled after approxi-
mately 2 seconds.
● Do not attempt to test the oper-
ation of the Parking Support
Brake system yourself such as
intentionally driving to a vehicle
or wall.
Depending on the situations,
the system may not operate
properly, possibly leading to an
accident.
NOTICE
■ If “Parking Support Brake
Unavailable” is displayed on
the multi-information display
and the PKSB OFF indicator
illuminates
If this message is displayed
immediately after the power
switch is changed to ON, operate
the vehicle carefully, paying atten-
tion to your surroundings. It may
be necessary to drive the vehicle
for a certain amount of time
before the system returns to nor-
mal. (If the system does not return
to normal after driving for a while,
clean the sensors and their sur-
rounding area on the bumpers.)
Enabling/Disabling the
Parking Support Brake
365
5-5. Using the driving support systems
5
Driving
If the hybrid system output
restriction control or brake con-
trol operates, a buzzer will
sound and a message will be
displayed on the multi-informa-
tion display, head-up display (if
equipped), navigation system (if
equipped) or multimedia sys-
tem (if equipped) screen, to alert
the driver.
Depending on the situation, hybrid
system output restriction control will
operate to either limit acceleration
or restrict output as much as possi-
ble.
Hybrid system output restric-
tion control is operating
(acceleration restriction)
Acceleration greater than a certain
amount is restricted by the system.
Multi-information display and head-
up display: “Object Detected Accel-
eration Reduced” (no warning dis-
played on the head-up display)
Navigation system or multimedia
system screen: No warning dis-
played
PKSB OFF indicator: Not illumi-
nated
Buzzer: Does not sound
Hybrid system output restric-
tion control is operating (out-
put restricted as much as
possible)
The system has determined that
stronger-than-normal brake opera-
tion is necessary.
Multi-information display and head-
up display: “BRAKE!”
Navigation system or multimedia
system screen: “BRAKE!”
PKSB OFF indicator: Not illumi-
nated
Buzzer: Short beep
Brake control is operating
The system determined that emer-
gency braking is necessary.
Multi-information display and head-
up display: “BRAKE!”
Navigation system or multimedia
system screen: “BRAKE!”
PKSB OFF indicator: Illuminated
Buzzer: Short beep
Vehicle stopped by system
operation
The vehicle has been stopped by
brake control operation.
Multi-information display and head-
up display: “Switch to Brake” (If the
accelerator pedal is not depressed,
“Press Brake Pedal” will be dis-
played.)
Navigation system or multimedia
system screen: “Press Brake
Pedal”
PKSB OFF indicator: Illuminated (If
the accelerator pedal is not
depressed, the indicator is not illu-
minated.)
Buzzer: Short beep
Display and buzzer for
hybrid system output
restriction control and
brake control
366
5-5. Using the driving support systems
If the Parking Support Brake
determines that a collision with a
detected object is possible, the
hybrid system output will be
restricted to restrain any
increase in the vehicle speed.
(Hybrid system output restriction
control: See figure 2.)
Additionally, if the accelerator
pedal continues to be
depressed, the brakes will be
applied automatically to reduce
the vehicle speed. (Brake con-
trol: See figure 3.)
Figure 1: When the PKSB
(Parking Support Brake) is not
operating
Hybrid system output
Braking force
Time
Figure 2: When hybrid system
output restriction control oper-
ates
Hybrid system output
Braking force
Time
Hybrid system output restric-
tion control begins operating
(System determines that pos-
sibility of collision with
detected object is high)
Figure 3: When hybrid system
output restriction control and
brake control operates
Hybrid system output
Braking force
Time
Hybrid system output restric-
tion control begins operating
(System determines that pos-
sibility of collision with
detected object is high)
System overview
A
B
C
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
367
5-5. Using the driving support systems
5
Driving
Brake control begins operat-
ing (System determines that
possibility of collision with
detected object is extremely
high)
■ If the Parking Support Brake
has operated
If the vehicle is stopped due to oper-
ation of the Parking Support Brake,
the Parking Support Brake will be
disabled and the PKSB OFF indica-
tor will illuminate. If the Parking Sup-
port Brake operates unnecessarily,
brake control can be canceled by
depressing the brake pedal or wait-
ing for approximately 2 seconds for
it to automatically be canceled.
Then, the vehicle can be operated
by depressing the accelerator pedal.
■ Re-enabling the Parking Sup-
port Brake
To re-enable the Parking Support
Brake when it is disabled due to
operation of the Parking Support
Brake, either enable the system
again (P.364), or turn the power
switch off and then back to ON.
Additionally, if the object becomes
no longer in the traveling direction of
the vehicle or if the traveling direc-
tion of the vehicle changes (such as
changing from moving forward to
backing up, or from backing up to
moving forward), the system will be
re-enabled automatically.
■ If “Parking Support Brake
Unavailable” is displayed on
the multi-information display
and the PKSB OFF indicator
illuminates
● If “Clean Parking Assist Sensor” is
displayed simultaneously, a sen-
sor may be covered with ice,
snow, dirt, etc. In this case,
remove the ice, snow, dirt, etc.,
from the sensor to return the sys-
tem to normal. If this message is
shown even after removing dirt
from the sensor, or shown when
the sensor was not dirty to begin
with, have the vehicle inspected at
your Toyota dealer.
● If “Parking Assist Unavailable” is
displayed simultaneously, water
may be continuously flowing over
the sensor surface, such as in a
heavy rain. When the system
determines that it is normal, the
system will return to normal.
E
368
5-5. Using the driving support systems
*
: If equipped
This function will operate in situ-
ations such as the following if an
object is detected in the travel-
ing direction of the vehicle.
■ When traveling at a low
speed and the brake pedal
is not depressed, or is
depressed late
■ When the accelerator pedal
is depressed excessively
Parking Support Brake
function (static
objects)
*
If the sensors detect a static
object, such as a wall, in the
traveling direction of the
vehicle and the system
determines that a collision
may occur due to the vehi-
cle suddenly moving for-
ward due to an accidental
accelerator pedal opera-
tion, the vehicle moving the
unintended direction due to
the wrong shift position
being selected, or while
parking or traveling at low
speeds, the system will
operate to lessen the impact
with the detected static
object and reduce the
resulting damage.
Examples of function
operation
369
5-5. Using the driving support systems
5
Driving
■ When the vehicle moves in
the unintended direction
due to the wrong shift posi-
tion being selected
P.356
Types of sensors
WARNING
■ To ensure the Parking Sup-
port Brake can operate prop-
erly
Observe the following precautions
regarding the sensors (P.356).
Failure to do so may cause a sen-
sor to not operate properly, and
may cause an accident.
● Do not modify, disassemble or
paint the sensors.
● Do not replace a sensor with a
part other than a genuine part.
● Do not subject a sensor or its
surrounding area to a strong
impact.
● Do not damage the sensors,
and always keep them clean.
● If the area around a radar sen-
sor is subjected to an impact,
the system may not operate
properly due to a sensor mal-
function. Have the vehicle
inspected by your Toyota
dealer.
■ Handling the suspension
Do not modify the suspension, as
changes to the height or inclina-
tion of the vehicle may prevent
the sensors from detecting
objects correctly or cause the sys-
tem to not operate or operate
unnecessarily.
■ If the Parking Support Brake
function (static objects) oper-
ates unnecessarily, such as
at a railroad crossing
In the event that the Parking Sup-
port Brake function (static objects)
operates unnecessarily, such as
at a railroad crossing, brake con-
trol will be canceled after approxi-
mately 2 seconds, allowing you to
proceed forward and leave the
area, brake control can also be
canceled by depressing the brake
pedal. Depressing the accelera-
tor pedal after brake control is
canceled will allow you to proceed
forward and leave the area.
■ Notes when washing the vehi-
cle
Do not apply intensive bursts of
water or steam to the sensor
area.
Doing so may result in the sensor
malfunctioning.
● When using a high pressure
washer to wash the vehicle, do
not spray the sensors directly,
as doing so may cause a sensor
to malfunction.
370
5-5. Using the driving support systems
■ The Parking Support Brake
function (static object) will
operate when
The function will operate when the
PKSB OFF indicator is not illumi-
nated (P.161, 163) and all of the
following conditions are met:
● Hybrid system output restriction
control
• The Parking Support Brake is
enabled.
• The vehicle speed is approxi-
mately 9 mph (15 km/h) or less.
• There is a static object in the trav-
eling direction of the vehicle and
approximately 6 to 13 ft. (2 to 4 m)
away.
• The Parking Support Brake deter-
mines that a stronger-than-nor-
mal brake operation is necessary
to avoid a collision.
● Brake control
• Hybrid system output restriction
control is operating
• The Parking Support Brake deter-
mines that an immediate brake
operation is necessary to avoid a
collision.
■ The Parking Support Brake
function (static objects) will
stop operating when
The function will stop operating if
any of the following conditions are
met:
● Hybrid system output restriction
control
• The Parking Support Brake is dis-
abled.
• The system determines that the
collision has become avoidable
with normal brake operation.
• The static object is no longer
approximately 6 to 13 ft. (2 to 4 m)
away from the vehicle or in the
traveling direction of the vehicle.
● Brake control
• The Parking Support Brake is dis-
abled.
• Approximately 2 seconds have
elapsed since the vehicle was
stopped by brake control.
• The brake pedal is depressed
after the vehicle is stopped by
brake control.
• The static object is no longer
approximately 6 to 13 ft. (2 to 4 m)
away from the vehicle or in the
traveling direction of the vehicle.
■ Detection range of the Parking
Support Brake function (static
objects)
The detection range of the Parking
WARNING
● When using steam to clean the
vehicle, do not direct steam too
close to the sensors as doing so
may cause a sensor to malfunc-
tion.
■ When to disable the Parking
Support Brake
In the following situations, disable
the Parking Support Brake as the
system may operate even though
there is no possibility of a colli-
sion.
● When inspecting the vehicle
using a chassis roller, chassis
dynamo or free roller
● When loading the vehicle onto a
boat, truck or other transport
vessel
● If the suspension has been
modified or tires of a size other
than specified are installed
● If the front of the vehicle is
raised or lowered due to the
carried load
● When equipment that may
obstruct a sensor is installed,
such as a towing eyelet, bumper
protector (an additional trim
strip, etc.), bicycle carrier, or
snow plow
● When using an automatic car
wash
371
5-5. Using the driving support systems
5
Driving
Support Brake function (static
objects) differs from the detection
range of the intuitive parking assist.
(P.361) Therefore, even if the
intuitive parking assist detects an
object and provides a warning, the
Parking Support Brake function
(static objects) may not start operat-
ing.
■ Objects that the Parking Sup-
port Brake function (static
objects) may not detect
The sensors may not be able to
detect certain objects, such as the
following:
● Pedestrian
● Cotton, snow, and other materials
that are poor reflectors of sonic
waves
● Objects which are not perpendicu-
lar to the ground, are not perpen-
dicular to the traveling direction of
the vehicle, are uneven or are
waving
● Low objects
● Thin objects such as wires,
fences, ropes and signposts
● Objects that are extremely close
to the bumper
● Sharply-angled objects
● Tall objects with upper sections
projecting outwards in the direc-
tion of your vehicle
■ Situations in which the Parking
Support Brake function (static
objects) may not operate
When the shift lever is in N
■ Intuitive parking assist buzzer
Regardless of whether the intuitive
parking assist system is enabled or
not (P.358), if the Parking Support
Brake function (static objects) is
enabled (P.364), the front or rear
sensors detect an object and brake
control and hybrid system output
restriction control are performed, the
intuitive parking assist buzzer will
sound to notify the driver of the
approximate distance to the object.
■ Situations in which the Parking
Support Brake function (static
objects) may operate even if
there is no possibility of a colli-
sion
In some situations, such as the fol-
lowing, the Parking Support Brake
function (static objects) may operate
even though there is no possibility of
a collision.
● Vehicle surroundings
• When driving on a narrow road
• When driving on a gravel road or
in an area with tall grass
• When driving toward a banner,
flag, low-hanging branch or boom
barrier (such as those used at rail-
road crossings, toll gates and
parking lots)
• When there is a structure on the
roadside (such as when driving in
a narrow tunnel, on a narrow
bridge or on a narrow road)
• When parallel parking
• When there is a rut or hole in the
surface of the road
• When driving on a metal cover
(grating), such as those used for
drainage ditches
• When driving up or down a steep
slope
• If a sensor is hit by a large amount
372
5-5. Using the driving support systems
of water, such as when driving on
a flooded road
• When loaded on ships or trucks
• Moving type automatic car wash
• Lift type parking area or multi-
story parking lot
• Underground parking area
• Structures on the ground (speed
bumps, cat’s eyes, etc.)
• Differences in height
• When moving straight ahead or
turning right
• Snow-melting pipes
• Devices for detecting vehicles,
such as traffic lights, devices for
detecting traffic congestion, or
devices for detecting empty
spaces in parking areas
• Railroad tracks
• H-shaped steel
• When there are vehicles on both
sides, or there is a vehicle that
resembles this vehicle
● Weather
• If a sensor is covered with ice,
snow, dirt, etc. (when cleared, the
system will return to normal)
• If heavy rain or water strikes a
sensor
• When driving in inclement weather
such as fog, snow or a sandstorm
• Strong wind is blowing
● Other sonic wave sources
• When vehicle horns, vehicle
detectors, motorcycle engines, air
brakes of large vehicles, the clear-
ance sonar of other vehicles or
other devices which produce ultra-
sonic waves are near the vehicle
• If a sticker or an electronic compo-
nent, such as a backlit license
plate (especially fluorescent type),
fog lights, fender pole or wireless
antenna is installed near a sensor
● Changes in the vehicle posture
• If the vehicle is significantly tilted
• If the front of the vehicle is raised
or lowered due to the carried load
• If the orientation of a sensor has
been changed due to a collision or
other impact
■ Situations in which the Parking
Support Brake function (static
objects) may not operate prop-
erly
In some situations, such as the fol-
lowing, this function may not oper-
ate properly.
● Weather
• When a sensor or the area around
a sensor is extremely hot or cold
• When strong winds are blowing
• If a sensor is covered with ice,
snow, dirt, etc. (when cleared, the
system will return to normal)
• If heavy rain or water strikes a
sensor
• When driving in inclement weather
such as fog, snow or a sandstorm
• A sensor is frozen. (Thawing the
area will resolve this problem.)
● Vehicle surroundings
• When an object that cannot be
detected is between the vehicle
and a detected object
• If an object such as a vehicle,
motorcycle, bicycle or pedestrian
cuts in front of the vehicle or runs
out from the side of the vehicle
• The vehicle is approaching a tall
or curved curb.
• On an extremely bumpy road, on
an incline, on gravel, or on grass.
• The objects draw too close to the
sensor.
373
5-5. Using the driving support systems
5
Driving
● Other sonic waves sources
• When vehicle horns, vehicle
detectors, motorcycle engines, air
brakes of large vehicles, the clear-
ance sonar of other vehicles or
other devices which produce ultra-
sonic waves are near the vehicle
• If a sticker or an electronic compo-
nent, such as a backlit license
plate (especially fluorescent type),
fog lights, fender pole or wireless
antenna is installed near a sensor
● Changes in the vehicle
• If the vehicle is significantly tilted
• If the front of the vehicle is raised
or lowered due to the carried load
• If the orientation of a sensor has
been changed due to a collision or
other impact
• When equipment that may
obstruct a sensor is installed, such
as a towing eyelet, bumper pro-
tector (an additional trim strip,
etc.), bicycle carrier, or snow plow
• If the suspension has been modi-
fied or tires of a size other than
specified are installed
• If paint or a sticker is applied to
the sensor
*
: If equipped
This function will operate in situ-
ations such as the following if a
vehicle is detected in the travel-
ing direction of the vehicle.
■ When reversing, a vehicle is
approaching and the brake
pedal is not depressed, or
is depressed late
Parking Support Brake
function (rear-crossing
vehicles)
*
If a rear radar sensor
detects a vehicle approach-
ing from the right or left at
the rear of the vehicle and
the system determines that
the possibility of a collision
is high, this function will
perform brake control to
reduce the likelihood of an
impact with the approach-
ing vehicle.
Examples of function
operation
374
5-5. Using the driving support systems
P.350
■ The Parking Support Brake
function (rear-crossing vehi-
cles) will operate when
The function will operate when the
PKSB OFF indicator is not illumi-
nated (P.161, 163) and all of the
following conditions are met:
● Hybrid system output restriction
control
• The Parking Support Brake is
enabled.
• The vehicle speed is approxi-
mately 9 mph (15 km/h) or less.
• Vehicles are approaching from the
right or left at the rear of the vehi-
cle at a traveling speed of more
than approximately 5 mph (8
km/h)
• The shift lever is in R.
• The Parking Support Brake deter-
mines that a stronger than normal
brake operation is necessary to
avoid a collision with an approach-
ing vehicle.
● Brake control
• Hybrid system output restriction
control is operating
• The Parking Support Brake deter-
mines that an emergency brake
operation is necessary to avoid a
collision with an approaching vehi-
cle.
■ The Parking Support Brake
function (rear-crossing vehi-
cles) will stop operating when
The function will stop operating if
any of the following conditions are
met:
● Hybrid system output restriction
control
• The Parking Support Brake is dis-
abled.
• The collision becomes avoidable
with normal brake operation.
• A vehicle is no longer approaching
from the right or left at the rear of
the vehicle.
● Brake control
• The Parking Support Brake is dis-
abled.
• Approximately 2 seconds have
elapsed since the vehicle was
stopped by brake control.
• The brake pedal is depressed
after the vehicle is stopped by
brake control.
• A vehicle is no longer approaching
from the right or left at the rear of
the vehicle.
Types of sensors
WARNING
■ To ensure the Parking Sup-
port Brake (rear-crossing
vehicles) can operate prop-
erly
Observe the following precautions
regarding the rear radar sensors
(P.350). Failure to do so may
cause a sensor to not operate
properly, and may cause an acci-
dent.
● Do not modify, disassemble or
paint the sensors.
● Do not replace a rear radar sen-
sor with a part other than a gen-
uine part.
● Do not damage the rear radar
sensors, and always keep the
radar sensors and their sur-
rounding area on the bumper
clean.
● If the area around a rear radar
sensor is subjected to an
impact, the system may not
operate properly due to a sen-
sor malfunction. Have the vehi-
cle inspected by your Toyota
dealer.
● Observe the rear radar sensor
handling precautions. (P.350)
375
5-5. Using the driving support systems
5
Driving
■ Detection area of the Parking
Support Brake function (rear-
crossing vehicles)
The detection area of the Parking
Support Brake function (rear-cross-
ing vehicles) differs from the detec-
tion area of the RCTA function
(P.354). Therefore, even if the
RCTA function detects a vehicle
and provides an alert, the Parking
Support Brake function (rear-cross-
ing vehicles) may not start operat-
ing.
■ Conditions under which the
Parking Support Brake func-
tion (rear-crossing vehicles)
will not detect a vehicle
The Parking Support Brake function
(rear-crossing vehicles) is not
designed to detect the following
types of vehicles and/or objects:
● Vehicles approaching from
directly behind
● Vehicles backing up in a parking
space next to your vehicle
● Vehicles that the sensors cannot
detect due to obstructions
● Vehicles which suddenly acceler-
ate or decelerate near your vehi-
cle
● Guardrails, walls, signs, parked
vehicles and similar stationary
objects
*
● Small motorcycles, bicycles,
pedestrians, etc.
*
● Vehicles moving away from your
vehicle
● Vehicles approaching from the
parking spaces next to your vehi-
cle
*
● Objects which are extremely close
to a radar sensor
*
● Vehicles which are approaching
from the right or left at the rear of
the vehicle at a traveling speed of
less than approximately 5 mph (8
km/h)
● Vehicles which are approaching
from the right or left at the rear of
the vehicle at a traveling speed of
more than approximately 15 mph
(24 km/h)
*
: Depending on the conditions,
detection of a vehicle and/or
object may occur.
■ Situations in which the system
may operate even though there
is no possibility of a collision
In some situations such as the fol-
lowing, the Parking Support Brake
function (rear-crossing vehicles)
may operate even though there is
no possibility of a collision.
● When the parking space faces a
street and vehicles are being
driven on the street
● When a detected vehicle turns
while approaching the vehicle
● When a vehicle passes by the
side of your vehicle
376
5-5. Using the driving support systems
● When the distance between your
vehicle and metal objects, such as
a guardrail, wall, sign, or parked
vehicle, which may reflect electri-
cal waves toward the rear of the
vehicle, is short
● When there are spinning objects
near your vehicle such as the fan
of an air conditioning unit
● When water is splashed or
sprayed toward the rear bumper,
such as from a sprinkler
■ Situations in which the Parking
Support Brake function (rear-
crossing vehicles) may not
operate properly
In some situations, such as the fol-
lowing, the radar sensors may not
detect an object and this function
may not operate properly
● Stationary objects
● When a sensor or the area around
a sensor is extremely hot or cold
● If the rear bumper is covered with
ice, snow, dirt, etc.
● When it is raining heavily or water
strikes the vehicle
● When the detection area of a
radar sensor is obstructed by an
adjacent vehicle
● If the vehicle is significantly tilted
● When equipment that may
obstruct a sensor is installed, such
as a towing eyelet, bumper pro-
tector (an additional trim strip,
etc.), bicycle carrier, or snow plow
● If the suspension has been modi-
fied or tires of a size other than
specified are installed
● If the front of the vehicle is raised
or lowered due to the carried load
● If a sticker or an electronic compo-
nent, such as a backlit license
plate (especially fluorescent type),
fog lights, fender pole or wireless
antenna is installed near a radar
sensor
● If the orientation of a radar sensor
has been changed
● When multiple vehicles are
approaching with only a small gap
between each vehicle
● If a vehicle is approaching the rear
of your vehicle rapidly
● Situations in which the radar sen-
sor may not detect a vehicle
• When a vehicle approaches from
the right or left at the rear of the
vehicle while you are turning while
backing up
• When turning while backing up
• When backing out of a shallow
angle parking spot
377
5-5. Using the driving support systems
5
Driving
• When backing up on a slope with
a sharp change in grade
• When a vehicle turns into the
detection area
1 Eco drive mode
Suitable for driving to improve fuel
economy by more smoothly gener-
ating torque in response to acceler-
ator pedal operations compared to
normal mode and restraining air
conditioning system operations
(heating/cooling).
When the switch is turned to the left
while not in Eco drive mode, the
system switches to Eco drive mode
and the Eco drive mode indicator
illuminates on the multi-information
display.
2 Normal mode
Driving mode select
switch
The driving modes can be
selected to suit the driving
and usage conditions.
Selecting a driving mode
378
5-5. Using the driving support systems
Suitable for normal driving.
The driving mode returns to normal
mode if the switch is pressed while
in Eco drive mode or sport mode.
3 Sport mode
Controls the steering feeling and
hybrid system to create an acceler-
ation response that is suitable for
sporty driving. Suitable for when
crisp handling is desired, such as
when driving on mountainous
roads.
When the switch is turned to the
right while not in sport mode, the
system switches to sport mode and
the sport mode indicator illuminates
on the multi-information display.
■ When changing to a driving
mode other than normal mode
● The background color of the multi-
information display changes
according to the selected driving
mode.
● When the speedometer is set to
analog display, the speedometer
display color also changes.
● The color of the switch changes
according to the selected driving
mode. (On some models)
■ Air conditioning system opera-
tion in Eco drive mode
In Eco drive mode, heating/cooling
operations and the fan speed is con-
trolled to improve fuel efficiency.
Perform the following procedures to
increase the air conditioning perfor-
mance.
● Turn eco air conditioning mode off
(P.397)
● Adjust the fan speed (P.397)
● Cancel Eco drive mode
■ Canceling a driving mode
● Sport mode is automatically can-
celed and the driving mode
returns to normal mode when the
power switch is turned off.
● Normal mode and Eco drive mode
are not canceled until another
driving mode is selected. (Even if
the power switch is turned off, nor-
mal mode and Eco drive mode will
not be automatically canceled).
379
5-5. Using the driving support systems
5
Driving
Press the Trail Mode switch
When the switch is pressed, Trail
Mode turns on and the Trail Mode
indicator illuminates on the multi-
information display.
When the switch is pressed again,
the Trail Mode indicator turns off.
■ Trail Mode
● Trail Mode is intended for use
when driving on bumpy rough
roads. Do not turn the switch on in
other situations.
● Trail Mode controls the vehicle so
that it can use the maximum
amount of drive force when driving
on bumpy roads.
● If Trail Mode is continuously used
for a long period of time, the load
on related parts increases and the
system may be unable to operate
effectively.
■ When Trail Mode is canceled
In the following situations, Trail
Mode is automatically canceled
even if it is turned on.
● When the driving mode is
changed (P.377)
● When the power switch is turned
off
■ During Trail Mode operation
The following types of situations
may occur, but they are not mal-
functions.
● Vibrations may be felt throughout
the vehicle or steering wheel
● Operating noise may be heard
from the engine compartment
■ When an inspection at your
Toyota dealer is necessary
In the following situations, the sys-
tem may be malfunctioning. Have
the vehicle inspected by your
Toyota dealer immediately.
Trail Mode
Trail Mode is a system that
performs integrated control
for the AWD, brake and
drive force control systems
to assist the drive power on
bumpy roads, etc.
WARNING
■ Before using Trail Mode
Make sure to observe the follow-
ing precautions. Failure to
observe these precautions may
result in an unexpected accident.
● Check that the Trail Mode indi-
cator is illuminated before driv-
ing. Trail Mode will not operate
when the indicator is off.
● Trail Mode is not intended to
expand the limits of the vehicle.
Thoroughly check the road con-
ditions and drive with caution.
● Thoroughly check the road con-
ditions before driving. As Trail
Mode is suitable for driving on
bumpy roads, such as those
where the tire on one side
spins, there is a chance that
Trail Mode may not be the most
appropriate for other road con-
ditions.
Turning Trail Mode on
380
5-5. Using the driving support systems
● When the slip indicator light illumi-
nates while Trail Mode is on
● When the Trail Mode indicator
does not illuminate even though
the Trail Mode switch is pressed
■ ECB (Electronically Con-
trolled Brake System)
The electronically controlled
system generates braking force
corresponding to the brake
operation
■ ABS (Anti-lock Brake Sys-
tem)
Helps to prevent wheel lock
when the brakes are applied
suddenly, or if the brakes are
applied while driving on a slip-
pery road surface
■ Brake assist
Generates an increased level of
braking force after the brake
pedal is depressed when the
system detects a panic stop sit-
uation
Driving assist systems
To keep driving safety and
performance, the following
systems operate automati-
cally in response to various
driving situations. Be
aware, however, that these
systems are supplementary
and should not be relied
upon too heavily when oper-
ating the vehicle.
Summary of the driving
assist systems
381
5-5. Using the driving support systems
5
Driving
■ VSC (Vehicle Stability Con-
trol)
Helps the driver to control skid-
ding when swerving suddenly or
turning on slippery road sur-
faces.
■ Enhanced VSC (Enhanced
Vehicle Stability Control)
Provides cooperative control of
the ABS, TRAC, VSC and EPS.
Helps to maintain directional
stability when swerving on slip-
pery road surfaces by con-
trolling steering performance.
■ Trailer Sway Control
Helps the driver to control trailer
sway by selectively applying
brake pressure for individual
wheels and reducing driving
torque when trailer sway is
detected.
■ TRAC (Traction Control)
Helps to maintain drive power
and prevent the drive wheels
from spinning when starting the
vehicle or accelerating on slip-
pery roads
■ Active Cornering Assist
(ACA)
Helps to prevent the vehicle
from drifting to the outer side by
performing inner wheel brake
control when attempting to
accelerate while turning
■ Hill-start assist control
Helps to reduce the backward
movement of the vehicle when
starting on an uphill
■ EPS (Electric Power Steer-
ing)
Employs an electric motor to
reduce the amount of effort
needed to turn the steering
wheel
■ E-Four (Electronic On-
Demand AWD system)
Automatically switches from
front wheel drive to all-wheel
drive (AWD) according to the
driving conditions, helping to
ensure reliable handling and
stability. Examples of condi-
tions where the system will
switch to AWD are when corner-
ing, going uphill, starting off or
accelerating, and when the road
surface is slippery due to snow,
rain, etc.
■ The Secondary Collision
Brake
When the SRS airbag sensor
detects a collision and the sys-
tem operates, the brakes and
brake lights are automatically
controlled to reduce the vehicle
speed and help reduce the pos-
sibility of further damage due to
a secondary collision.
■ When the
TRAC/VSC/ABS/Trailer Sway
Control systems are operating
The slip indicator light will flash
while the TRAC/VSC/ABS/Trailer
Sway Control systems are operat-
ing.
382
5-5. Using the driving support systems
■ Disabling the TRAC system
If the vehicle gets stuck in mud, dirt
or snow, the TRAC system may
reduce power from the hybrid sys-
tem to the wheels.
Pressing to turn the system off
may make it easier for you to rock
the vehicle in order to free it.
To turn the TRAC system off,
quickly press and release .
“Traction Control Turned OFF” will
be shown on the multi-information
display.
Press again to turn the system
back on.
■ Turning off the
TRAC/VSC/Trailer Sway Con-
trol systems
To turn the TRAC/VSC/Trailer Sway
Control systems off, press and hold
for more than 3 seconds while
the vehicle is stopped.
The VSC OFF indicator light will
come on and the “Traction Control
Turned OFF” will be shown on the
multi-information display.
*
Press again to turn the systems
back on.
*
: PCS will also be disabled (only
Pre-Collision warning is avail-
able). The PCS warning light will
come on and a message will be
displayed on the multi-information
display. (P.322)
■ When the message is dis-
played on the multi-information
display showing that TRAC has
been disabled even if has
not been pressed
TRAC is temporary deactivated. If
the information continues to show,
contact your Toyota dealer.
■ Operating conditions of hill-
start assist control
When the following four conditions
are met, the hill-start assist control
will operate:
● The shift lever is in a position
other than P or N (when starting
off forward/backward on an
upward incline).
● The vehicle is stopped.
● The accelerator pedal is not
depressed.
● The parking brake is not engaged.
■ Automatic system cancelation
of hill-start assist control
The hill-start assist control will turn
off in any of the following situations:
● The shift lever is shifted to P or N.
● The accelerator pedal is
depressed.
● The parking brake is engaged.
● No more than 2 seconds have
elapsed after the brake pedal is
released.
■ Sounds and vibrations caused
by the ABS, brake assist, VSC,
Trailer Sway Control, TRAC and
hill-start assist control systems
● A sound may be heard from the
engine compartment when the
brake pedal is depressed repeat-
383
5-5. Using the driving support systems
5
Driving
edly, when the hybrid system is
started or just after the vehicle
begins to move. This sound does
not indicate that a malfunction has
occurred in any of these systems.
● Any of the following conditions
may occur when the above sys-
tems are operating. None of these
indicates that a malfunction has
occurred.
• Vibrations may be felt through the
vehicle body and steering.
• A motor sound may be heard also
after the vehicle comes to a stop.
■ ECB operating sound
ECB operating sound may be heard
in the following cases, but it does
not indicate that a malfunction has
occurred.
● Operating sound heard from the
engine compartment when the
brake pedal is operated.
● Motor sound of the brake system
heard from the front part of the
vehicle when the driver’ door is
opened.
● Operating sound heard from the
engine compartment when one or
two minutes passed after the stop
of the hybrid system.
■ Active Cornering Assist opera-
tion sounds and vibrations
When the Active Cornering Assist is
operated, operation sounds and
vibrations may be generated from
the brake system, but this is not a
malfunction.
■ EPS operation sound
When the steering wheel is oper-
ated, a motor sound (whirring
sound) may be heard. This does not
indicate a malfunction.
■ Automatic reactivation of
TRAC, Trailer Sway Control and
VSC systems
After turning the TRAC, Trailer
Sway Control and VSC systems off,
the systems will be automatically re-
enabled in the following situations:
● When the power switch is turned
off.
● If only the TRAC system is turned
off, the TRAC will turn on when
vehicle speed increases.
If both the TRAC and VSC sys-
tems are turned off, automatic re-
enabling will not occur when vehi-
cle speed increases.
■ Operating conditions of Active
Cornering Assist
The system operates when the fol-
lowing occurs.
● TRAC/VSC can operate
● The driver is attempting to accel-
erate while turning
● The system detects that the vehi-
cle is drifting to the outer side
● The brake pedal is released
■ Reduced effectiveness of the
EPS system
The effectiveness of the EPS sys-
tem is reduced to prevent the sys-
tem from overheating when there is
frequent steering input over an
extended period of time. The steer-
ing wheel may feel heavy as a
result. Should this occur, refrain
from excessive steering input or
stop the vehicle and turn the hybrid
system off. The EPS system should
return to normal within 10 minutes.
■ Secondary Collision Brake
operating conditions
The system operates when the SRS
airbag sensor detects a collision
while the vehicle is in motion. How-
ever, the system does not operate in
any of the following situations.
● The vehicle speed is below 6 mph
(10 km/h)
● Components are damaged
■ Secondary Collision Brake
automatic cancellation
The system is automatically can-
celed in any of the following situa-
tions.
384
5-5. Using the driving support systems
● The vehicle speed drops below
approximately 6 mph (10 km/h)
● A certain amount of time elapses
during operation
● The accelerator pedal is
depressed a large amount
■ If a message about AWD is shown on the multi-information display
Perform the following actions.
Message Details/Actions
“AWD System Over-
heated Switching to
2WD Mode”
AWD system is overheating.
Drive the vehicle at low speeds and stop the
vehicle in a safe place with the hybrid sys-
tem operating until the message is cleared.
Once the display message on the multi-informa-
tion display turns off, there is no problem continu-
ing to drive.
If the message does not disappear, have your
vehicle checked by your Toyota dealer immedi-
ately.
“AWD System Over-
heated 2WD Mode
Engaged”
The vehicle switched from all-wheel drive (AWD)
to front wheel drive due to overheating.
Drive the vehicle at low speeds and stop the
vehicle in a safe place with the hybrid sys-
tem operating until the message is cleared.
Once the display message on the multi-informa-
tion display turns off, the AWD system returns to
normal.
If the message does not disappear, have your
vehicle checked by your Toyota dealer immedi-
ately.
“AWD System Malfunc-
tion 2WD Mode
Engaged Visit Your
Dealer”
A malfunction occurred in the AWD system.
Have your vehicle checked by your Toyota
dealer immediately.
WARNING
■ The ABS does not operate
effectively when
● The limits of tire gripping perfor-
mance have been exceeded
(such as excessively worn tires
on a snow covered road).
● The vehicle hydroplanes while
driving at high speed on wet or
slick roads.
385
5-5. Using the driving support systems
5
Driving
WARNING
■ Stopping distance when the
ABS is operating may exceed
that of normal conditions
The ABS is not designed to
shorten the vehicle’s stopping dis-
tance. Always maintain a safe dis-
tance from the vehicle in front of
you, especially in the following sit-
uations:
● When driving on dirt, gravel or
snow-covered roads
● When driving with tire chains
● When driving over bumps in the
road
● When driving over roads with
potholes or uneven surfaces
■ TRAC/VSC may not operate
effectively when
Directional control and power may
not be achievable while driving on
slippery road surfaces, even if the
TRAC/VSC system is operating.
Drive the vehicle carefully in con-
ditions where stability and power
may be lost.
■ Active Cornering Assist does
not operate effectively when
● Do not overly rely on Active
Cornering Assist. Active Corner-
ing Assist may not operate
effectively when accelerating
down slopes or driving on slip-
pery road surfaces.
● When Active Cornering Assist
frequently operates, Active Cor-
nering Assist may temporarily
stop operating to ensure proper
operation of the brakes, TRAC
and VSC.
■ Hill-start assist control does
not operate effectively when
● Do not overly rely on hill-start
assist control. Hill-start assist
control may not operate effec-
tively on steep inclines and
roads covered with ice.
● Unlike the parking brake, hill-
start assist control is not
intended to hold the vehicle sta-
tionary for an extended period
of time. Do not attempt to use
hill-start assist control to hold
the vehicle on an incline, as
doing so may lead to an acci-
dent.
■ When the
TRAC/ABS/VSC/Trailer Sway
Control is activated
The slip indicator light flashes.
Always drive carefully. Reckless
driving may cause an accident.
Exercise particular care when the
indicator light flashes.
■ When the TRAC/VSC/Trailer
Sway Control systems are
turned off
Be especially careful and drive at
a speed appropriate to the road
conditions. As these are the sys-
tems to help ensure vehicle stabil-
ity and driving force, do not turn
the TRAC/VSC/Trailer Sway Con-
trol systems off unless necessary.
Trailer Sway Control is part of the
VSC system and will not operate
if VSC is turned off or experiences
a malfunction.
386
5-5. Using the driving support systems
WARNING
■ Replacing tires
Make sure that all tires are of the
specified size, brand, tread pat-
tern and total load capacity. In
addition, make sure that the tires
are inflated to the recommended
tire inflation pressure level.
The ABS, TRAC and VSC/Trailer
Sway Control systems will not
function correctly if different tires
are installed on the vehicle.
Contact your Toyota dealer for
further information when replacing
tires or wheels.
■ Handling of tires and the sus-
pension
Using tires with any kind of prob-
lem or modifying the suspension
will affect the driving assist sys-
tems, and may cause a system to
malfunction.
■ Trailer Sway Control precau-
tion
The Trailer Sway Control system
is not able to reduce trailer sway
in all situations. Depending on
many factors such as the condi-
tions of the vehicle, trailer, road
surface and driving environment,
the Trailer Sway Control system
may not be effective. Refer to
your trailer owner’s manual for
information on how to tow your
trailer properly.
■ If trailer sway occurs
Observe the following precau-
tions.
Failing to do so may cause death
or serious injury.
● Firmly grip the steering wheel.
Steer straight ahead. Do not try
to control trailer swaying by
turning the steering wheel.
● Begin releasing the accelerator
pedal immediately but very
gradually to reduce speed.
Do not increase speed. Do not
apply vehicle brakes.
If you make no extreme correction
with the steering or brakes, your
vehicle and trailer should stabi-
lize. (P.269)
■ Secondary Collision Brake
Do not rely solely upon the Sec-
ondary Collision Brake. This sys-
tem is designed to help reduce
the possibility of further damage
due to a secondary collision, how-
ever, that effect changes accord-
ing to various conditions. Overly
relying on the system may result
in death or serious injury.
387
5-6. Driving tips
5
Driving
5-6.Driving tips
Use fluids that are appropriate
to the prevailing outside tem-
peratures.
• Engine oil
• Engine coolant
• Power control unit coolant
• Washer fluid
Have a service technician
inspect the condition of the
12-volt battery.
Have the vehicle fitted with
four snow tires or purchase a
set of tire chains for the front
tires.
*
Ensure that all tires are the same
size and brand, and that chains
match the size of the tires.
*
: Tire chains cannot be mounted
on vehicles with 235/55R19 tires.
Winter driving tips
Carry out the necessary
preparations and inspec-
tions before driving the
vehicle in winter. Always
drive the vehicle in a man-
ner appropriate to the pre-
vailing weather conditions.
Pre-winter preparations
WARNING
■ Driving with snow tires
Observe the following precautions
to reduce the risk of accidents.
Failure to do so may result in a
loss of vehicle control and cause
death or serious injury.
● Use tires of the specified size.
● Maintain the recommended
level of air pressure.
● Do not drive in excess of 75
mph (120 km/h), regardless of
the type of snow tires being
used.
● Use snow tires on all, not just
some wheels.
■ Driving with tire chains
(except 235/55R19 tires)
Observe the following precautions
to reduce the risk of accidents.
Failure to do so may result in the
vehicle being unable to be driven
safely, and may cause death or
serious injury.
● Do not drive in excess of the
speed limit specified for the tire
chains being used, or 30 mph
(50 km/h), whichever is lower.
● Avoid driving on bumpy road
surfaces or over potholes.
● Avoid sudden acceleration,
abrupt steering, sudden brak-
ing and shifting operations that
cause sudden engine braking.
● Slow down sufficiently before
entering a curve to ensure that
vehicle control is maintained.
● Do not use LTA (Lane Tracing
Assist) system.
388
5-6. Driving tips
Perform the following according
to the driving conditions:
Do not try to forcibly open a
window or move a wiper that
is frozen. Pour warm water
over the frozen area to melt
the ice. Wipe away the water
immediately to prevent it from
freezing.
To ensure proper operation of
the climate control system
fan, remove any snow that
has accumulated on the air
inlet vents in front of the wind-
shield.
Check for and remove any
excess ice or snow that may
have accumulated on the
exterior lights, vehicle’s roof,
chassis, around the tires or on
the brakes.
Remove any snow or mud
from the bottom of your shoes
before getting in the vehicle.
Accelerate the vehicle slowly,
keep a safe distance between
you and the vehicle ahead, and
drive at a reduced speed suit-
able to road conditions.
Park the vehicle and move
the shift lever to P without set-
ting the parking brake. The
parking brake may freeze up,
preventing it from being
released. If the vehicle is
parked without setting the
parking brake, make sure to
block the wheels.
Failure to do so may be dan-
gerous because it may cause
the vehicle to move unexpect-
edly, possibly leading to an
accident.
When the parking brake is in
automatic mode, release the
parking brake after shifting
the shift lever to P. (P.290)
If the vehicle is left parked
with the brakes damp in cold
temperatures, there is a pos-
sibility of the brakes freezing.
If the vehicle is parked without
setting the parking brake,
confirm that the shift lever
cannot be moved out of P
*
.
*
: The shift lever will be locked if it is
attempted to be shifted from P to
any other position without
NOTICE
■ Repairing or replacing snow
tires
Request repairs or replacement of
snow tires from your Toyota
dealer or legitimate tire retailers.
This is because the removal and
attachment of snow tires affects
the operation of the tire pressure
warning valves and transmitters.
Before driving the vehicle
When driving the vehicle
When parking the vehicle
389
5-6. Driving tips
5
Driving
depressing the brake pedal. If the
shift lever can be shifted from P,
there may be a problem with the
shift lock system. Have the vehi-
cle inspected by your Toyota
dealer immediately.
Vehicles with 225/60R18 tires
Use the correct tire chain size
when mounting the tire chains.
Chain size is regulated for each
tire size.
Side chain:
0.12 in. (3 mm) in diameter
0.39 in. (10 mm) in width
1.18 in. (30 mm) in length
Cross chain:
0.16 in. (4 mm) in diameter
0.55 in. (14 mm) in width
0.98 in. (25 mm) in length
Vehicles with 235/55R19 tires
Tire chains cannot be mounted.
Snow tires should be used
instead.
Regulations regarding the use
of tire chains vary depending on
location and type of road.
Always check local regulations
before installing chains.
■ Tire chain installation
Observe the following precautions
when installing and removing
chains:
● Install and remove tire chains in a
safe location.
● Install tire chains on the front tires
only. Do not install tire chains on
the rear tires.
● Install tire chains on front tires as
tightly as possible. Retighten
chains after driving 1/4 - 1/2 mile
(0.5 - 1.0 km).
● Install tire chains following the
instructions provided with the tire
chains.
■ Consumption of fuel and elec-
tricity
In cold temperatures, resistance of
the parts of a vehicle (transmission,
tires, etc.) generally increases,
resulting in increase of energy con-
sumption. As a result, fuel economy
is likely to decrease.
Consumption of fuel and electricity
of this vehicle is also likely to
become worse in cold temperatures.
WARNING
■ When parking the vehicle
When parking the vehicle without
applying the parking brake, make
sure to chock the wheels. If you
do not chock the wheels, the vehi-
cle may move unexpectedly, pos-
sibly resulting in an accident.
Selecting tire chains
A
B
C
D
E
F
Regulations on the use of
tire chains (except
235/55R19 tires)
390
5-6. Driving tips
Specific design characteris-
tics give it a higher center of
gravity than ordinary passen-
ger cars. This vehicle design
feature causes this type of
vehicle to be more likely to
rollover. And, utility vehicles
have a significantly higher
rollover rate than other types
of vehicles.
An advantage of the higher
ground clearance is a better
view of the road allowing you
to anticipate problems.
It is not designed for corner-
ing at the same speeds as
ordinary passenger cars any
more than low-slung sports
cars are designed to perform
satisfactorily under off-road
conditions. Therefore, sharp
turns at excessive speeds
may cause the vehicle to roll-
over.
NOTICE
■ Fitting tire chains
The tire pressure warning valves
and transmitters may not function
correctly when tire chains are fit-
ted.
Utility vehicle precau-
tions
This vehicle belongs to the
utility vehicle class, which
has higher ground clear-
ance and narrower tread in
relation to the height of its
center of gravity to make it
capable of performing in a
wide variety of off-road
applications.
Utility vehicle feature
391
5-6. Driving tips
5
Driving
When driving your vehicle off-
road, please observe the follow-
ing precautions to ensure your
driving enjoyment and to help
prevent the closure of areas to
off-road vehicles:
Drive your vehicle only in
areas where off-road vehicles
are permitted to travel.
Respect private property. Get
owner’s permission before
entering private property.
Do not enter areas that are
closed. Honor gates, barriers
and signs that restrict travel.
Stay on established roads.
When conditions are wet,
driving techniques should be
changed or travel delayed to
prevent damage to roads.
■ Additional information for off-
road driving
For owners in U.S. mainland,
Hawaii and Puerto Rico:
To obtain additional information per-
taining to driving your vehicle off-
road, consult the following organiza-
tions:
WARNING
■ Utility vehicle precautions
Always observe the following pre-
cautions to minimize the risk of
death, serious injury or damage to
your vehicle:
● In a rollover crash, an unbelted
person is significantly more
likely to die than a person wear-
ing a seat belt. Therefore, the
driver and all passengers
should always fasten their seat
belts.
● Avoid sharp turns or abrupt
maneuvers, if at all possible.
Failure to operate this vehicle
correctly may result in loss of
control or vehicle rollover caus-
ing death or serious injury.
● Loading cargo on the roof lug-
gage carrier (if equipped) will
make the center of the vehicle
gravity higher. Avoid high
speeds, sudden starts, sharp
turns, sudden braking or abrupt
maneuvers, otherwise it may
result in loss of control or vehi-
cle rollover due to failure to
operate this vehicle correctly.
● Always slow down in gusty
crosswinds. Because of its pro-
file and higher center of gravity,
your vehicle is more sensitive to
side winds than an ordinary
passenger car. Slowing down
will allow you to have better
control.
● Do not drive horizontally across
steep slopes. Driving straight up
or straight down is preferred.
Your vehicle (or any similar off-
road vehicle) can tip over side-
ways much more easily than
forward or backward.
Off-road driving
392
5-6. Driving tips
• State and Local Parks and Recre-
ation Departments
• State Motor Vehicle Bureau
• Recreational Vehicle Clubs
• U.S. Forest Service and Bureau of
Land Management
WARNING
■ Off-road driving precautions
Always observe the following pre-
cautions to minimize the risk of
death, serious injury or damage to
your vehicle:
● Drive carefully when off the
road. Do not take unnecessary
risks by driving in dangerous
places.
● Do not grip the steering wheel
spokes when driving off-road. A
bad bump could jerk the wheel
and injure your hands. Keep
both hands and especially your
thumbs on the outside of the
rim.
● Always check your brakes for
effectiveness immediately after
driving in sand, mud, water or
snow.
● After driving through tall grass,
mud, rock, sand, rivers, etc.,
check that there is no grass,
bush, paper, rags, stone, sand,
etc. adhering or trapped on the
underbody. Clear off any such
matter from the underbody. If
the vehicle is used with these
materials trapped or adhering to
the underbody, a breakdown or
fire could occur.
● When driving off-road or in rug-
ged terrain, do not drive at
excessive speeds, jump, make
sharp turns, strike objects, etc.
This may cause loss of control
or vehicle rollover causing
death or serious injury. You are
also risking expensive damage
to your vehicle’s suspension
and chassis.
NOTICE
■ To prevent the water damage
Take all necessary safety mea-
sures to ensure that water dam-
age to the hybrid battery (traction
battery), hybrid system or other
components does not occur.
● Water entering the engine com-
partment may cause severe
damage to the hybrid system.
● Water entering the hybrid trans-
mission will cause deterioration
in transmission quality. The
malfunction indicator may come
on, and the vehicle may not be
drivable.
● Water can wash the grease
from wheel bearings, causing
rusting and premature failure,
and may also enter the hybrid
transaxle case, reducing the
gear oil’s lubricating qualities.
■ When you drive through
water
If driving through water, such as
when crossing shallow streams,
first check the depth of the water
and the bottom of the riverbed for
firmness. Drive slowly and avoid
deep water.
393
5-6. Driving tips
5
Driving
NOTICE
■ Inspection after off-road driv-
ing
● Sand and mud that has accu-
mulated around brake discs
may affect braking efficiency
and may damage brake system
components.
● Always perform a maintenance
inspection after each day of off-
road driving that has taken you
through rough terrain, sand,
mud, or water. For scheduled
maintenance information, refer
to the “Scheduled Maintenance
Guide” or “Owner’s Manual
Supplement”.
394
5-6. Driving tips
395
6
6
Interior features
Interior features
6-1. Using the air conditioning
system and defogger
Automatic air conditioning
system....................... 396
Remote Air Conditioning
System ...................... 405
Heated steering wheel/Front
seat heaters/Front seat
heaters and ventila-
tors/Rear seat heaters407
6-2. Using the interior lights
Interior lights list .......... 410
6-3. Using the storage features
List of storage features 413
Luggage compartment fea-
tures .......................... 417
6-4. Using the other interior
features
Other interior features . 420
Garage door opener.... 435
396
6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
6-1.Using the air condition ing system a nd defogger
Automatic mode switch
Left-hand side temperature control knob
Right-hand side temperature control knob
“SYNC” switch
“OFF” switch
Windshield defogger switch
Rear window defogger and outside rear view mirror defoggers
switch
Eco air conditioning mode switch
Fan speed decrease switch
Fan speed increase switch
Airflow mode control switch
Outside/recirculated air mode switch
S-FLOW mode switch
“A/C” switch
■ Adjusting the temperature
setting
Turn driver’s side temperature
control dial clockwise to
increases the temperature and
turn the dial counterclockwise to
Automatic air conditioning system
Air outlets and fan speed are automatically adjusted accord-
ing to the temperature setting.
Air conditioning controls
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
397
6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
6
Interior features
decreases the temperature.
The air conditioning system
switches between individual and
simultaneous modes each time the
“SYNC” switch is pressed.
Simultaneous mode (the indicator
on the “SYNC” switch is on):
The driver’s side temperature con-
trol dial can be used to adjust the
temperature for the driver’s and
passenger’s side. At this time,
operate the passenger’s side tem-
perature control dial to enter indi-
vidual mode.
Individual mode (the indicator on
the “SYNC” switch is off):
The temperature for the driver’s
and passenger’s side can be
adjusted separately.
■ Setting the fan speed
Press the fan speed increase
switch to increase the fan speed
and the fan speed decrease
switch to decrease the fan
speed.
Pressing the “OFF” switch turns off
the fan.
■ Change the airflow mode
Press the airflow mode control
switch.
The airflow mode changes as fol-
lows each time the switch is
pressed.
1 Upper body
2 Upper body and feet
3 Feet
4 Feet and the windshield
defogger operates
■ Switching between outside
air and recirculated air
modes
Press the outside/recirculated
air mode switch.
The mode switches between out-
side air mode and recirculated air
mode each time the switch is oper-
ated.
When recirculated air mode is
selected, the indicator illuminates
on the outside/recirculated air
mode switch.
■ Set cooling and dehumidifi-
cation function
Press the “A/C” switch.
When the function is on, the indica-
tor illuminates on the “A/C” switch.
■ Eco air conditioning mode
The air conditioning is controlled
with low fuel consumption priori-
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
398
6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
tized such as reducing fan
speed, etc.
Press the eco air conditioning
mode switch.
When the eco air conditioning
mode is on, the indicator illumi-
nates on the eco air conditioning
mode switch.
■ Defogging the windshield
Defoggers are used to defog the
windshield and front side win-
dows.
Press the windshield defogger
switch.
Set the outside/recirculated air
mode switch to outside air mode if
the recirculated air mode is used. (It
may switch automatically.)
To defog the windshield and the
side windows quickly, turn the air
flow and temperature up.
To return to the previous mode,
press the windshield defogger
switch again when the windshield is
defogged.
When the windshield defogger
switch is on, the indicator illumi-
nates on the windshield defogger
switch.
■ Defogging the rear window
and outside rear view mir-
rors
Defoggers are used to defog the
rear window and to remove rain-
drops, dew and frost from the
outside rear view mirrors.
Press the rear window defogger
and outside rear view mirror
defoggers switch.
The defoggers will automatically
turn off after 15 minutes.
When the rear window defogger
and outside rear view mirror defog-
gers switch is on, the indicator illu-
minates on the rear window
defogger and outside rear view mir-
ror defoggers switch.
■ Heating
● In HV mode, the gasoline engine
may operate in order to extract
heat from the engine coolant via
the heater.
● In EV mode, heating is done by a
heat pump system.
• When the outside temperature is
low or it is snowing, compared to
conventional vehicles, heating
may be less effective and warm
air may not come out.
• When the outside heat exchanger
is frosted over, fan speed declines
and it may become harder to heat
the interior.
However, it is not a malfunction. In
this situation, the air temperature
from the outlets may not change
even though the set temperature is
raised.
• If frost has formed of the outside
heat exchanger, the heating per-
formance will decline. The frost
can be removed from the outside
heat exchanger by operating the
Remote Air Conditioning System
before driving (P.405). When
frosted over, the heating operation
of the Remote Air Conditioning
System starts after defrosting.
• When “AUTO” switch is turned on,
the heating is controlled opti-
mally. Therefore, the set heating
performance may not be achieved
even if the fan speed setting is
increased.
399
6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
6
Interior features
Outside heat exchanger
● In the following situations the gas-
oline engine may operate in order
to extract heat from the engine
coolant via the heater even in EV
mode.
• The outside temperature is
approximately 14°F (-10°C) or low
• is operating
■ Water droplets during air condi-
tioning operation
The outside heat exchanger, accu-
mulator and air conditioning piping
may incur condensation or frost may
form.
During or after the air conditioning
operation, water droplets may fall
from the vehicle. However, it is not a
malfunction.
Accumulator
Outside heat exchanger
■ Fogging up of the windows
● The windows will easily fog up
when the humidity in the vehicle is
high. Turning “A/C” switch on will
dehumidify the air from the outlets
and defog the windshield effec-
tively.
● If you turn “A/C” switch off, the
windows may fog up more easily.
● The windows may fog up if the
recirculated air mode is used.
■ While using “My Room Mode”
● It may not be possible to obtain
the intended defogging perfor-
mance even if is pressed.
If the windows need to be
defogged before driving, stop
charging power and then press
.
● When the outside temperature is
low, heating may feel insufficient
due to restricted operation of the
air conditioning.
Heating cannot be performed
when it is 14°F (-10°C) or less as
the gasoline engine cannot be
started during “My Room Mode”. If
heating is desired, stop charging
and remove the AC charging
cable from the vehicle.
■ When driving on dusty roads
Close all windows. If dust thrown up
by the vehicle is still drawn into the
vehicle after closing the windows, it
is recommended that the air intake
mode be set to outside air mode
and the fan speed to any setting
except off.
■ Outside/recirculated air mode
● Setting to the recirculated air
mode temporarily is recom-
mended in preventing dirty air
from entering the vehicle interior
and helping to cool the vehicle
when the outside air temperature
is high.
● Outside/recirculated air mode may
automatically switch depending on
the temperature setting or the
inside temperature.
A
A
B
400
6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
■ When the outside temperature
exceeds 75°F (24°C) and the air
conditioning system is on
● In order to reduce the air condi-
tioning power consumption, the air
conditioning system may switch to
recirculated air mode automati-
cally. This may also reduce fuel
consumption.
● Recirculated air mode is selected
as a default mode when the power
switch is turned to ON.
● It is possible to switch to outside
air mode at any time by pressing
the outside/recirculated air mode
switch.
■ Operation of the air condition-
ing system in Eco drive mode
● In Eco drive mode, the air condi-
tioning system is controlled as fol-
lows to prioritize fuel efficiency:
• Engine speed and compressor
operation controlled to restrict
heating/cooling capacity
• Fan speed restricted when auto-
matic mode is selected
● To improve air conditioning perfor-
mance, perform the following
operations:
• Turn off Eco drive mode (P.377)
• Turn off Eco air conditioning mode
● When the driving mode is set to
Eco driving mode, the Eco air con-
ditioning mode will be turned on
automatically. Even in this case,
the Eco air conditioning mode can
be turned off by pressing the Eco
air conditioning mode switch.
■ When the outside temperature
falls to nearly 32°F (0°C)
The dehumidification function may
not operate even when “A/C” switch
is pressed.
■ Ventilation and air conditioning
odors
● To let fresh air in, set the air condi-
tioning system to the outside air
mode.
● During use, various odors from
inside and outside the vehicle may
enter into and accumulate in the
air conditioning system. This may
then cause odor to be emitted
from the vents.
● To reduce potential odors from
occurring:
• It is recommended that the air
conditioning system be set to out-
side air mode prior to turning the
vehicle off.
• The start timing of the blower may
be delayed for a short period of
time immediately after the air con-
ditioning system is started in auto-
matic mode.
● When parking, the system auto-
matically switches to outside air
mode to encourage better air cir-
culation throughout the vehicle,
helping to reduce odors that occur
when starting the vehicle.
■ Air conditioning filter
P.483
■ Air conditioning system refrig-
erant
● A label regarding the refrigerant of
the air conditioning system is
attached to the hood at the loca-
tion shown in the following illustra-
tion.
● The meaning of each symbol on
the label are as follows:
Caution
Air conditioning system
401
6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
6
Interior features
■ Noise from air conditioning sys-
tem
Approximately 90 seconds after the
power switch turned to OFF, you
may hear sound coming from air
conditioning system. This is the
sound of a air conditioning system
initialize and, it does not indicate a
malfunction.
■ Customization
Some functions can be customized.
(Customizable features: P.580)
1 Press the “AUTO” switch.
The dehumidification function
begins to operate. Air outlets and
fan speed are automatically
adjusted according to the tempera-
ture setting and humidity.
2 Adjust the temperature set-
ting.
3 To stop the operation, press
the “OFF” switch.
If the fan speed setting or air
flow modes are operated, the
automatic mode indicator goes
off. However, automatic mode
for functions other than that
operated is maintained.
Air conditioning system
lubricant type
Requires registered
technician to service air
conditioning system
Flammable refrigerant
WARNING
■ Cautions for using “My Room
Mode”
Do not leave children, people who
need assistance, or pets inside
the vehicle. The system may turn
off automatically and the interior
temperature may become high or
low, resulting in heat stroke, dehy-
dration or hypothermia. Failure to
do so may result in death or seri-
ous injury.
■ To prevent the windshield
from fogging up
Do not use the windshield defog-
ger switch during cool air opera-
tion in extremely humid weather.
The difference between the tem-
perature of the outside air and
that of the windshield can cause
the outer surface of the wind-
shield to fog up, blocking your
vision.
■ When the outside rear view
mirror defoggers are operat-
ing
Do not touch the rear view mirror
surfaces when the outside rear
view mirror defoggers are on.
NOTICE
■ To prevent 12-volt battery dis-
charge
Do not leave the air conditioning
system on longer than necessary
when the hybrid system is off.
■ When repairing/replacing
parts of the air conditioning
system
Have repair/replacement per-
formed by your Toyota dealer.
When a part of the air condition-
ing system, such as the evapora-
tor, is to be replaced, it must be
replaced with a new one.
Using automatic mode
402
6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
■ Using automatic mode
Fan speed is adjusted automati-
cally according to the temperature
setting and the ambient conditions.
Therefore, the fan may stop for a
while until warm or cool air is ready
to flow immediately after the auto-
matic mode switch is pressed.
■ Windshield fog detection func-
tion
When automatic mode is set, the
humidity sensor detects fog on the
windshield and controls the air con-
ditioning system to prevent fog.
This function automatically con-
trols the air conditioning airflow
so that priority is given to the
front seats. When the front pas-
senger seat is not occupied, air-
flow may switch to only the
driver’s seat. Unnecessary air
conditioning is suppressed, con-
tributing to increased fuel effi-
ciency.
Front seat concentrated airflow
mode operates in the following
situations.
No passengers are detected
in the rear seats
The windshield defogger is
not operating
While operating, illumi-
nates.
■ Manually turning front seat
concentrated airflow mode
on/off
In front seat concentrated air-
flow mode, directing airflow to
the front seats only and to all
seats can be switched via switch
operation. When the mode has
been switched manually, auto-
matic airflow control stops oper-
ating.
Press on the air condition-
ing operation panel and switch
the airflow.
Indicator illuminated: Airflow
to the front seats only
Indicator off: Airflow to all the
seats
■ Operation of automatic airflow
control
● In order to maintain a comfortable
interior, airflow may be directed to
seats without passengers immedi-
ately after the hybrid system is
started and at other times depend-
ing on the outside temperature.
● After the hybrid system is started,
if passengers move around inside
or enter/exit the vehicle, the sys-
tem cannot accurately detect the
presence of passengers and auto-
matic airflow control will not oper-
ate.
■ Operation of manual airflow
control
Even if the function is manually
switched to directing airflow to only
the front seats, when a rear seat is
occupied, it may automatically direct
airflow to all seats.
Front seat concentrated
airflow mode (S-FLOW)
403
6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
6
Interior features
■ To return to automatic airflow
control
1 With the indicator off, turn the
power switch off.
2 After 60 minutes or more elapse,
turn the power switch to ON.
This feature is used to prevent
ice from building up on the wind-
shield and wiper blades.
Press the switch to turn the sys-
tem on/off.
The indicator comes on when the
system is on.
The windshield wiper de-icer will
automatically turn off after a period
of time.
■ Location of air outlets
The air outlets and air volume
change according to the
selected air flow mode.
■ Adjusting the air flow direc-
tion and opening/closing
the air outlets
Front
1 Direct air flow to the left or
right, up or down
2 Open the vent
*
3 Close the vent
*
*
: If equipped (center air outlets
only)
Windshield wiper de-icer
(if equipped)
WARNING
■ To prevent burns
Do not touch the glass at lower
part of the windshield or to the
side of the front pillars when the
windshield wiper deicer is on.
Air outlet layout and oper-
ations
404
6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Rear
1 Direct air flow to the left or
right, up or down
2 Open the vent
3 Close the vent
WARNING
■ To not interrupt the wind-
shield defogger from operat-
ing
Do not place anything on the
instrument panel which may cover
the air outlets. Otherwise, air flow
may be obstructed, preventing the
windshield defoggers from defog-
ging.
NOTICE
■ Humidity sensor
In order to detect fog on the wind-
shield, a sensor which monitors
the temperature of the windshield,
the surround humidity, etc. is
installed.
Follow these points to avoid dam-
aging the sensor:
● Do not disassemble the sensor
● Do not spray the glass cleaner
on the sensor or subject it to
strong impacts
● Do not stick anything on the
sensor
405
6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
6
Interior features
If the Remote Air Conditioning
System is used while the AC
charging cable is connected to
the vehicle, electricity from an
external power source can be
used minimizing the drop in
charge of the hybrid battery
(traction battery).
Charging will be conducted auto-
matically after the Remote Air Con-
ditioning System is stopped.
Check the temperature setting
of the air conditioning system.
(P.396)
The Remote Air Conditioning Sys-
tem will operate in accordance with
the temperature settings of the air
conditioning system.
Press and hold “A/C” on the
wireless remote control to oper-
ate the Remote Air Conditioning
System.
The system can be stopped by
pressing “A/C” twice.
■ Operating conditions
The system will only operate if all of
the following conditions are met:
● The shift lever is in P.
● The power switch is off.
● All doors are closed.
● The hood is closed.
■ Remote Air Conditioning Sys-
tem automatic shut-off
The system will automatically shut
off under the following conditions:
● About 20 minutes have passed
since operation began
● Any one of the operating condi-
tions is not met
The system may also shut off if the
charge level of the hybrid battery
(traction battery) drops to low.
■ Conditions affecting operation
The system may not start in the fol-
lowing situations:
● The charge level of the hybrid bat-
tery (traction battery) is low
● The outside temperature is
extremely low
● When the hybrid system is cool
(for example, after being left for a
long time in low temperatures)
■ Windshield defogger
When defogging the windshield
using the Remote Air Conditioning
System, defogging may be insuffi-
Remote Air Condition-
ing System
The Remote Air Condition-
ing System uses electrical
energy stored in the hybrid
battery (traction battery)
and allows the air condition-
ing to be operated by
remote control.
Before leaving the vehicle
Activating the Remote Air
Conditioning System
406
6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
cient due to the power being
restricted more than during normal
air conditioning operation. Also, the
outside of the windshield may fog up
due to the outside temperature,
humidity or air conditioning set tem-
perature.
■ Using the heater via the Remote
Air Conditioning System
● When the outside temperature is
low, heating may feel insufficient
due to restricted operation of the
air conditioning.
● When the outside heat exchanger
becomes frosted over, heating
performance may decline due to
automatically switching to the frost
removal operation. (P.396)
■ Security feature
Any unlocked doors will be automat-
ically locked when the system is
operating. The buzzer sounds and
the emergency flashers flash to indi-
cate that the doors have been
locked or the system has been
turned off.
■ Conditions affecting operation
P.218
■ While the Remote Air Condi-
tioning System is operating
● Depending on the operating con-
dition of the Remote Air Condition-
ing System, the air conditioning
compressor or cooling fan may
spin and an operating noise may
be heard. However, this does not
indicate a malfunction.
● The air conditioning operation
switches, etc. will not operate
while the Remote Air Condition-
ing System is operating.
■ Electronic key battery depletion
P.194
■ When the electronic key bat-
tery is fully depleted
P.493
■ Customization
Setting (e.g. Operation using “A/C”
on the wireless remote control) can
be changed. (Customizable fea-
tures: P.569)
WARNING
■ Precautions for the Remote
Air Conditioning System
● Do not use the system if people
are in the vehicle.
Even when the system is in use,
the internal temperature may
still reach a high or low level
due to features such as the
automatic shut-off. Children and
pets left inside the vehicle may
suffer heatstroke dehydration or
hypothermia or could result in
death or serious injury.
● Depending on the surrounding
environment, signals from the
wireless switch may transmit
further than expected. Pay
appropriate attention to the
vehicle’s surroundings and use
the switch only when neces-
sary.
● Do not operate “A/C” on the
wireless remote control if the
hood is open. The Remote Air
Conditioning System may oper-
ate unintentionally and objects
may be drawn into the electrical
cooling fan.
NOTICE
■ To prevent the hybrid battery
(traction battery) from being
discharged
Use “A/C” on the wireless remote
control only when necessary.
407
6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
6
Interior features
*
: If equipped
Turns the heated steering wheel
on/off
The indicator light comes on when
the heated steering wheel is oper-
ating.
Heated steering
wheel
*
/Front seat
heaters
*
/Front seat
heaters and ventila-
tors
*
/Rear seat heat-
ers
*
Heated steering wheel
Warm up the grip of the steer-
ing wheel
Front seat heaters
Warm up the front seat uphol-
stery
Front seat ventilators
Maintain good ventilation by
pulling air through the front
seat upholstery
Rear seat heaters
Warm up the rear seat uphol-
stery
WARNING
■ To prevent minor burn inju-
ries
Care should be taken if anyone in
the following categories comes in
contact with the steering wheel or
seats when the heater is on:
● Babies, small children, the
elderly, the sick and the physi-
cally challenged
● Persons with sensitive skin
● Persons who are fatigued
● Persons who have taken alco-
hol or drugs that induce sleep
(sleeping drugs, cold remedies,
etc.)
■ To prevent causes of over-
heating and minor burn inju-
ries
Observe the following precautions
when using a seat heater:
● Do not cover the seat with a
blanket or cushion when using
the seat heater.
● Do not use seat heater more
than necessary.
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the
seat heaters and seat ventila-
tors
Do not put heavy objects that
have an uneven surface on the
seat and do not stick sharp
objects (needles, nails, etc.) into
the seat.
■ To prevent 12-volt battery dis-
charge
Do not use the functions when the
hybrid system is off.
Heated steering wheel
408
6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
■ Operation condition
The power switch is in ON.
Turns the seat heaters on/off
1 High temperature
2 Low temperature
When the seat heater is on, the
indicator illuminates on the seat
heater switch.
When not in use, put the switch in
the neutral position. The indicator
will turn off.
Turns the front seat heaters and
ventilators on/off
Each time the switch is pressed,
the operation condition changes as
follows.
Hi (3 segments lit) Mid (2 seg-
ments lit) Lo (1 segment lit)
Off
1 Turns the seat heater on
The level indicators (yellow)
light up during operation.
2 Turns the seat ventilator on
The level indicators (green)
light up during operation.
■ Operation condition
The power switch is in ON.
■ Air conditioning system-linked
control mode
When a seat ventilator is set to Hi,
the fan speed of the seat ventilator
may increase according to the fan
speed of the air conditioning sys-
tem.
■ Customization
Seat ventilation blower level can be
customized.
(Customizable features: P.580)
Turns the seat heaters on/off
The indicator light comes on when
the seat heater is operating.
Operating the front seat
heaters
Operating the front seat
heaters and ventilators
Operating the rear seat
heaters (if equipped)
A
A
409
6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
6
Interior features
■ Operation condition
The power switch is in ON.
410
6-2. Using the interior lights
6-2.Using the interior lights
Rear interior light (P.411)
Front interior lights/personal lights (P.410, 411)
Open tray lights (if equipped)
*
Footwell lights (if equipped)
*
Front cup holder lights (if equipped)
*
*
: These lights turn on when a door is unlocked.
When the shift lever is in a position other than P, the brightness of these
lights will reduce intensity.
■ Front interior lights
Turns the lights on/off
Interior lights list
Location of the interior lights
A
B
C
D
E
Operating the interior
lights
411
6-2. Using the interior lights
6
Interior features
Turns the switch to the door
position (door linked)
When a door is opened while the
door position is on, the lights turn
on.
1 Turns the door position on
2 Turns the lights off
■ Rear interior light
1 Turns the light off
2 Turns the door position on
When a door is opened while the
door position is on, the light turns
on.
3 Turns the light on
Turns the lights on/off
■ Illuminated entry system
The lights automatically turn on/off
according to the power switch
mode, the presence of the elec-
tronic key, whether the doors are
locked/unlocked, and whether the
doors are opened/closed.
■ To prevent the 12-volt battery
from being discharged
If the interior lights remain on when
the power switch is turned to OFF,
the lights will go off automatically
after 20 minutes.
■ The interior lights will turn on
automatically when
If any of the SRS airbags deploy
(inflate) or in the event of a strong
rear impact, the interior lights will
turn on automatically.
The interior lights will turn off auto-
matically after approximately 20
minutes.
The interior lights can be turned off
manually. However, in order to help
prevent further collisions, it is rec-
ommended that they be left on until
safety can be ensured.
(The interior lights may not turn on
automatically depending on the
force of the impact and conditions of
the collision.)
■ Customization
Setting (e.g. the time elapsed before
the lights turn off) can be changed.
(Customizable features: P.581)
Operating the personal
lights
412
6-2. Using the interior lights
NOTICE
■ To prevent 12-volt battery dis-
charge
Do not leave the lights on longer
than necessary when the hybrid
system is off.
413
6-3. Using the storage features
6
Interior features
6-3.Using the storage features
Open tray (P.416)
Auxiliary boxes (P.415)
Bottle holders (P.415)
Console box (P.414)
Cup holders (P.414)
Glove box (P.413)
Pull up the lever to open the
glove box.
List of storage features
Location of the storage features
A
B
C
D
E
F
WARNING
■ Items that should not be left
in the vehicle
Do not leave glasses, lighters or
spray cans in the storage spaces,
as this may cause the following
when cabin temperature becomes
high:
● Glasses may be deformed by
heat or cracked if they come
into contact with other stored
items.
● Lighters or spray cans may
explode. If they come into con-
tact with other stored items, the
lighter may catch fire or the
spray can may release gas,
causing a fire hazard.
Glove box
414
6-3. Using the storage features
Lift the lid while pushing the but-
ton to release the lock.
Front
Rear
Pull the armrest down.
WARNING
■ Caution while driving
Keep the glove box closed. In the
event of sudden braking or sud-
den swerving, an accident may
occur due to an occupant being
struck by the open glove box or
the items stored inside.
Console box
WARNING
■ Caution while driving
Keep the console box closed.
Injuries may result in the event of
an accident or sudden braking.
Cup holders
WARNING
■ Items unsuitable for the cup
holders
Do not place anything other than
cups or beverage cans in the cup
holders.
Inappropriate items must not be
stored in the cup holders even if
the lid is closed.
Other items may be thrown out of
the holders in the event of an
accident or sudden braking and
cause injury. If possible, cover hot
drinks to prevent burns.
415
6-3. Using the storage features
6
Interior features
Front
Rear
■ Bottle holders
● When storing a bottle, close the
cap.
● The bottle may not be stored
depending on its size or shape.
Push the lid.
Bottle holders
WARNING
■ Items unsuitable for the bottle
holders
Do not place anything other than
a bottle in the bottle holders.
Other items may be thrown out of
the holders in the event of an
accident or sudden braking and
cause injury.
NOTICE
■ Items that should be not
stowed in the bottle holders
Do not place open bottles or glass
and paper cups containing liquid
in the bottle holders. The contents
may spill and glasses may break.
Auxiliary box
WARNING
■ Caution while driving
Do not leave the auxiliary box
open while driving.
Injuries may result in the event of
an accident or sudden braking.
■ Items unsuitable for storing
Do not store items heavier than
0.4 lb. (0.2 kg).
Doing so may cause the auxiliary
box to open and the items inside
may fall out, resulting in an acci-
dent.
416
6-3. Using the storage features
Driver’s side
Front passenger’s side
Front of console
Vehicles with wireless charger:
P.427
Open tray
WARNING
■ Items unsuitable for the open
tray
Observe the following precautions
when putting items in the open
tray. Failure to do so may cause
items to be thrown out of the tray
in the event of sudden braking or
steering. In these cases, the items
may interfere with pedal operation
or cause driver distraction, result-
ing in an accident.
● Do not store items in the tray
that can easily shift or roll out.
● Do not stack items in the tray
higher than the tray’s edge.
● Do not put items in the tray that
may protrude over the tray’s
edge.
417
6-3. Using the storage features
6
Interior features
Raise the hook to use.
The cargo hooks are provided for
securing loose items.
Pull the tab and open the deck
board.
Pull the tab and open the deck
board.
The AC charging cable, etc., can be
stored.
Luggage compart-
ment features
Cargo hooks
WARNING
■ When cargo hooks are not in
use
To avoid injury, always return the
hooks to their stowed positions
when not in use.
Deck board
WARNING
■ When operating the deck
board
Do not place anything on the deck
board when operating the board.
Otherwise, your fingers may be
caught or an accident may result
causing injuries.
■ Caution while driving
Keep the deck board closed.
In the event of sudden braking, an
accident may occur due to an
occupant being struck by the deck
board or the items stored under
the deck board.
Deck under tray
418
6-3. Using the storage features
■ Installing the luggage cover
1 Compress the both ends of
the luggage cover and insert
into the recess to install.
2 Pull out the luggage cover
and hook it onto the anchors.
■ Removing the luggage
cover
1 Release the cover from the
left and right anchors and
allow it to retract.
2 Compress the end of the lug-
gage cover and lift the lug-
gage cover up.
WARNING
■ Caution while driving
Keep the deck board closed.
In the event of sudden braking, an
accident may occur due to an
occupant being struck by the deck
board or the items stored in the
deck under tray.
Luggage cover (if
equipped)
WARNING
■ Luggage cover
● When installing/stowing the lug-
gage cover, make sure that the
luggage cover is securely
installed/stowed. Failure to do
so may result in serious injury in
the event of sudden braking or a
collision.
● Do not place anything on the
luggage cover. In the event of
sudden braking or turning, the
item may go flying and strike an
occupant. This could lead to an
unexpected accident, resulting
in death or serious injury.
419
6-3. Using the storage features
6
Interior features
WARNING
● Do not allow children to climb
on the luggage cover. Climbing
on the luggage cover could
result in damage to the luggage
cover, possibly causing death or
serious injury to the child.
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the lug-
gage cover
Do not place anything on top of
the luggage cover. When rolling
up the luggage cover, objects
may be caught in the cover, dam-
aging the cover and generating
noise.
420
6-4. Using the other interior features
6-4.Using the other interior features
1 To set the visor in the forward
position, flip it down.
2 To set the visor in the side
position, flip down, unhook,
and swing it to the side.
3 To use the side extender (if
equipped), place the visor in
the side position, then slide it
backward.
Slide the cover to open.
The light turns on when the cover is
opened.
■ Automatic light off to prevent
12-volt battery discharge
If the vanity lights remain on when
the power switch is turned to OFF,
the lights will go off automatically
after 20 minutes.
Please use a power supply for
electronic goods that use less
than 12 VDC /10 A (power con-
sumption of 120 W).
When using electronic goods,
make sure that the power con-
sumption of all the connected
power outlets is less than 120
W.
■ Front
Open the lid.
■ Luggage compartment
Open the lid.
Other interior features
Sun visors
Vanity mirrors
NOTICE
■ To prevent 12-volt battery dis-
charge
Do not leave the vanity lights on
for extended periods while the
hybrid system is off.
Power outlet (12 VDC)
421
6-4. Using the other interior features
6
Interior features
■ The power outlet can be used
when
The power switch is in ACC or ON.
■ When stopping the hybrid sys-
tem
Disconnect electrical devices with
charging functions, such as mobile
battery packs.
If such devices are left connected,
the hybrid system may not stop nor-
mally.
Please use a power supply for
electronic goods that use less
than 120 VAC (power consump-
tion of 1500 W).
When using electronic goods,
make sure that the power con-
sumption of all the connected
power outlets is less than 1500
W.
■ Using the power outlet
Open the lid.
■ When turning the power
outlet on
1 Check that the parking brake
is engaged, securely depress
the brake pedal and press
the power switch (P.279).
2 Check that the READY indi-
cator is illuminated, and
press the AC 120 V switch.
The power outlet can be used when
the indicator on the AC 120 V
switch is illuminated.
The power outlet are turned off/on
each time the AC 120 V switch is
NOTICE
■ When power outlet is not in
use
To avoid damaging the power out-
let, close the power outlet lid
when the power outlet is not in
use.
Foreign objects or liquids that
enter the power outlet may cause
a short circuit.
■ To prevent blown fuse
Do not use an accessory that
uses more than 12 V 10 A.
■ To prevent 12-volt battery dis-
charge
Do not use the power outlet lon-
ger than necessary when the
hybrid system is off.
Power outlet (120 VAC) (if
equipped)
422
6-4. Using the other interior features
pressed.
■ When connecting a device
Open the lid, and fully and
securely insert the plug of the
device into the power outlet.
■ When turning the power
outlet off
1 Turn the connected devices
off.
2 Press the AC 120 V switch to
turn the power outlet off.
3 Disconnect each plug from
the power outlet.
4 Close the lid of the power
outlet.
■ The power outlet (120 VAC) can
be used when
“READY” indicator is illuminated.
■ Engine operating
The engine starts automatically and
charging starts when the remaining
charge of the hybrid battery (traction
battery) decreases, etc.
■ The power outlet (120 VAC)
● Use electrical devices that do not
exceed a total maximum power
usage of 1500 W at AC 120 V for
the power outlet (AC 120 V/1500
W). If electrical devices exceeding
the specified capacity are used,
the protection function will activate
and prevent the power outlet from
being used.
● A large current may flow causing
the current power to exceed 1500
W depending on the electrical
device used. In this situation, the
protective function activates and
the outlet cannot be used. How-
ever, this is not a malfunction.
● Certain types of electrical devices
may disturb TV or radio by noises.
● Power outlet voltage cannot be
measured accurately by using a
commercial tester. If you need to
check the voltage, have the vehi-
cle inspected at your Toyota
dealer.
● Noise may be heard from the cool-
ing fan under the rear seats when
using the power outlet, but this is
not a malfunction.
■ 120 VAC Devices which may
not operate properly
The following 120 VAC devices may
not operate properly even if their
power consumption is less than
1500 W:
● Devices with high initial peak watt-
age
● Measuring devices that process
precise data
● Devices that require an extremely
stable power supply
● Devices that require a constant
power supply from the power out-
let, such as a device with a timer.
423
6-4. Using the other interior features
6
Interior features
■ When the 120 VAC power outlet
cannot be used
If the AC 120 V switch is pressed
but the switch indicator does not illu-
minate, the protection circuit may
have operated.
In this case, perform the appropriate
procedures as follows.
● Disconnect the plug of each
device from the power outlet,
check that the total power con-
sumption of all devices to be con-
nected to the power outlet is less
than 1500 W, reconnect the
devices and then press the AC
120 V switch again.
● Disconnect the plug of each
device from the power outlet,
check that the devices are not
malfunctioning, reconnect the
devices and then press the AC
120 V switch again.
● Check the charge of the hybrid
battery (traction battery)
(P.165). If the charge is low,
shift the shift lever to P, allow the
engine to run to charge the hybrid
battery (traction battery), and then
press the AC 120 V switch again.
● If the temperature inside the vehi-
cle is high, such as after the vehi-
cle has been parked in the sun,
use the air conditioning system to
sufficiently ventilate or cool the
interior, and then press the AC
120 V switch again.
● If the vehicle has been stopped in
a cold area, to protect the hybrid
battery (traction battery), the
power outlet may not be able to be
used. In this case, drive the vehi-
cle for a while to warm up the
hybrid battery (traction battery),
and then press the AC 120 V
switch again.
If the power outlet cannot be used
even after performing the appropri-
ate procedures above, have the
vehicle inspected by your Toyota
dealer.
● If any electrical device has mal-
functioned, park the vehicle in a
safe location and turn the AC
inverter off.
● If the protection function activates
and power is cut, perform the fol-
lowing procedure.
1 Stop the vehicle in a safe place
and set the parking brake.
2 Ensure that the shift lever is in P
or N.
3 Check that the power consumed
by the electrical devices is within
1500 W and any device has not
malfunctioned.
4 Press the AC 120 V switch.
If the inside of the vehicle is hot,
open the windows to lower the tem-
perature and turn the switch back on
once the inside of the vehicle
reaches a normal temperature. If
following the procedure above does
not restore power, have the vehicle
inspected at your Toyota dealer.
WARNING
■ For safe use
Observe the following precau-
tions.
Failure to do so may lead to an
accident, resulting in death or
serious injury.
● Do not use devices such as the
following when driving. Also, do
not use a device if it cannot be
secured within the vehicle.
• Devices which may distract the
driver and be a hinderance to
safe driving, such as a TV, DVD
player, etc.
• Unsecured devices or devices
which generate heat, such as a
toaster, microwave, electric
heater, electric kettle, coffee
maker, etc., as they may fly
around possibly causing injury,
burns or a fire in the case of
sudden braking or an accident.
424
6-4. Using the other interior features
WARNING
• Devices which may fall under
the pedals and prevent the
brake pedal from being
depressed, such as a hair dryer,
AC adaptor, mouse, etc.
● Do not use devices which pro-
duce steam while the windows
are closed. Doing so may cause
the windows to fog up, reducing
visibility and making it difficult to
drive safely. Also, the steam
may damage or negatively
affect other devices. If the
device must be used, stop the
vehicle and open the windows
before use.
● Do not connect a malfunctioning
device to a power outlet, as
doing so may cause the power
outlet to become inoperable.
● Do not disconnect the plug of a
device while your hands are wet
or insert a pin or other object
into the power outlet. Also, if a
liquid or snow is on the power
outlet, dry the outlet before
using it.
● Be careful not to get pinched by
the power outlet lid.
● Do not attempt to modify, disas-
semble or repair a power outlet.
Also, do not replace the 120
VAC inverter with a commer-
cially available one. For infor-
mation on repairs, contact your
Toyota dealer.
● Do not let children touch the
power outlet.
● Keep the power outlet free of
foreign matter.
● Keep the power outlet free of
dust and foreign matter. Also,
make sure to clean the power
outlet periodically.
● If the plug of a device fits
loosely in a power outlet, even
though it is fully inserted,
replace the power outlet. For
information on replacement,
contact your Toyota dealer.
■ Using the power outlet while
parked or stopped
Observe the following precau-
tions.
Failure to do so may lead to an
accident, possibly resulting in
death or serious injury.
● Make sure to securely engage
the parking brake and shift the
shift lever to P.
● Do not leave the vehicle unat-
tended while the READY indica-
tor is illuminated and a device is
connected to a power outlet.
● Make sure that the hood is
closed. As the engine will start
automatically depending on the
condition of the vehicle, make
sure that nothing is left near or
contacting the exhaust pipes.
Also, do not put your head or
hands anywhere inside the
engine compartment, as the
cooling fans may operate sud-
denly. Keep hands and clothing
(especially a tie, scarf, etc.)
away from the fans as they may
get caught in a fan.
● Do not stop the vehicle near
objects which burn easily. If the
exhaust system is extremely
hot, it may cause a fire.
425
6-4. Using the other interior features
6
Interior features
WARNING
● When using a power outlet in an
area with poor ventilation or an
enclosed area, such as a
garage, to prevent the exhaust
gasses from accumulating and
causing a lack of oxygen, make
sure to use a ventilation or
exhaust system.
The power outlet are for use in
directly connecting electrical
devices such as lights. Do not
use the power outlet as genera-
tors to supply power to a house,
etc.
● Do not use the power outlet if
the vehicle has a vehicle cover
installed.
● Do not sleep in the vehicle while
using devices such as an elec-
tric heater.
■ Devices to be connected
Make sure to read any instruction
manual which came with a device
and observe any warnings on the
device. Do not connect a device
to a power outlet if the device is
malfunctioning or its plug is dam-
aged. Also, do not use the power
outlet to power the following
devices:
● Medical devices
Do not use a power outlet to
power these types of devices as
the output of the power outlet may
be cut, depending on the condi-
tion of the vehicle.
NOTICE
Observe the following precau-
tions.
Failure to do so may lead to the
power outlet not operating cor-
rectly or damage to the vehicle or
a connected device.
■ To avoid short circuit or mal-
function
● Do not set a toaster or other
device which generates heat
near the interior components or
on a seat. Heat may cause
these parts to melt or burn.
● Do not use devices which are
sensitive to vibration or heat in
the vehicle.
These devices may malfunction
due to vibration while driving or
heat while the vehicle is parked
in the sun.
● When not using a power outlet,
make sure to close the cover. If
foreign matter or a liquid enters
the power outlet, it may cause a
malfunction or short circuit.
● Do not use a multi-point outlet
adaptor as doing so may over-
load the power outlet.
■ When the ambient tempera-
ture is high
If the temperature inside the vehi-
cle is high, such as after the vehi-
cle has been parked in the sun,
use the air conditioning system to
sufficiently ventilate or cool the
interior.
■ When the ambient tempera-
ture is low
If the vehicle has been stopped in
a cold area, to protect the hybrid
battery (traction battery), the
power outlet may not be able to
be used. In this case, drive the
vehicle for a while to warm up the
hybrid battery (traction battery).
■ To prevent 12-volt battery dis-
charge
If using an electrical device that
consumes 100 W or more of
power for a period of time, turn off
the headlights, air conditioning
and all other electrical compo-
nents equipped to the vehicle.
426
6-4. Using the other interior features
The USB charging ports are
used to supply 2.1 A of electric-
ity at 5 V to external devices.
The USB charging ports are for
charging only. They are not
designed for data transfer or
other purposes.
Depending on the external
device, it may not charge prop-
erly. Refer to the manual
included with the device before
using a USB charging port.
■ Using the USB charging
ports
Console box
Type A:
Open the console box and open
the lid.
Type B:
Rear
Open the lid.
■ The USB charging ports can be
used when
The power switch is in ACC or ON.
■ Situations in which the USB
charging ports may not operate
correctly
● If a device which consumes more
than 2.1 A at 5 V is connected
● If a device designed to communi-
cate with a personal computer,
such as a USB memory device, is
connected
● If the connected external device is
turned off (depending on device)
● If the temperature inside the vehi-
cle is high, such as after the vehi-
cle has been parked in the sun
■ About connected external
devices
Depending on the connected exter-
nal device, charging may occasion-
ally be suspended and then start
again. This is not a malfunction.
USB charging ports
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the
USB charging ports
● Do not insert foreign objects into
the ports.
● Do not spill water or other liq-
uids into the ports.
427
6-4. Using the other interior features
6
Interior features
A portable device can be
charged by just placing Qi stan-
dard wireless charge compatible
portable devices according to
the Wireless Power Consortium,
such as smartphones and
mobile batteries, etc., on the
charge area.
This function cannot be used
with portable devices that are
larger than the charging area.
Also, depending on the portable
device, it may not operate as
normal. Please read the opera-
tion manual for portable devices
to be used.
■ The “Qi” symbol
The “Qi” symbol is a trademark
of the Wireless Power Consor-
tium.
■ Name for all parts
Charge area
Operation indicator light
Power supply switch
■ Using the wireless charger
1 Press the power supply
switch of the wireless char-
ger.
Switches on and off with each
NOTICE
● When the USB charging ports
are not in use, close the lids. If a
foreign object or liquid enters a
port may cause a short circuit.
● Do not apply excessive force to
or impact the USB charging
ports.
● Do not disassemble or modify
the USB charging ports.
■ To prevent damage to exter-
nal devices
● Do not leave external devices in
the vehicle. The temperature
inside the vehicle may become
high, resulting in damage to an
external device.
● Do not push down on or apply
unnecessary force to an exter-
nal device or the cable of an
external device while it is con-
nected.
■ To prevent 12-volt battery dis-
charge
Do not use the USB charging
ports for a long period of time
when the hybrid system is off.
Wireless charger (if
equipped)
A
B
C
428
6-4. Using the other interior features
press of the power supply switch.
When turned on, the operation indi-
cator light (green) comes on.
Even with the hybrid system off, the
on/off state of the power supply
switch is memorized.
2 Place the charging side of
the portable device down.
When charging, the operation indi-
cator light (orange) comes on.
If charging is not occurring, try plac-
ing the portable device as close to
the center of the charging area as
possible.
When charging is complete, the
operation indicator light (green)
comes on.
■ Recharging function
When charging is complete
and after a fixed time in the
charge suspension state,
charging restarts.
When the portable device is
moved, charging is stopped
for a moment and then it
restarts.
■ Lighting conditions of oper-
ation indicator light
*
: Depending on the portable
device, there are cases where the
operation indicator light will con-
tinue being lit up orange even
after the charging is complete.
When the operation indicator
light flashes
When an error occurs, the oper-
ation indicator light flashes an
orange color.
Handle the error based on the
following tables.
Operation
indicator
light
Conditions
Turning off
When the Wireless
charger power supply
is off
Green
(comes
on)
On Standby (charging
possible state)
When charging is com-
plete
*
Orange
(comes
on)
When placing the por-
table device on the
charging area (detect-
ing the portable device)
Charging
429
6-4. Using the other interior features
6
Interior features
• Flashing repeatedly once
every second (Orange)
• Repeatedly flashes 3 times
continuously (Orange)
• Repeatedly flashes 4 times
continuously (Orange)
■ The wireless charger can be
operated when
The power switch is in ACC or ON.
■ Usable portable devices
Qi standard wireless charge stan-
dard can be used on compatible
devices.
However, not all Qi standard
devices and compatibility are guar-
anteed.
Starting with mobile phones and
smartphones, it is aimed for low
power electrically supplied portable
devices of no more than 5W.
■ When covers and accessories
are attached to portable devices
Do not charge in situations where
cover and accessories not able to
handle Qi are attached to the porta-
ble device. Depending on the type
of cover and accessory, it may not
be possible to charge. When
charging is not performed even with
the portable device placed on the
charge area, remove the cover and
accessories.
■ While charging, noise enters
the AM radio
Turn off the wireless charger and
confirm that the noise has
decreased. If the noise decreases,
continuously pushing the power
supply switch of the wireless char-
ger for 2 seconds, the frequency of
the charger can be changed and the
noise can be reduced.Also, on that
occasion, the operation indicator
Suspected
causes
Handling method
Vehicle to char-
ger communica-
tion failure.
If the power
switch is in ACC:
Turn the power
switch to ON.
If the power
switch is in ON:
Turn the power
switch off and
then back to ON.
If the operation
indicator light still
blinks after per-
forming the
above proce-
dure, contact
your Toyota
dealer.
Suspected
causes
Handling method
A foreign sub-
stance is
between the por-
table device and
charge area.
Remove the for-
eign substance
from between
portable device
and the charge
area.
The portable
device is out of
sync due to the
device being
shifted from the
center of the
charge area.
Place the porta-
ble device near
the center of the
charge area.
Suspected
causes
Handling method
Temperature ris-
ing within the
wireless charger.
Stop charging at
once and start
charging again
after for a while.
430
6-4. Using the other interior features
light will flash orange 2 times.
■ Important points of the wireless
charger
● If the electronic key cannot be
detected within the vehicle inte-
rior, charging cannot be done.
When the door is opened and
closed, charging may be tempo-
rarily suspended.
● When charging, the wireless
charging device and portable
device will get warmer, however
this is not a malfunction.
When a portable device gets
warm while charging, charging
may stop due to the protection
function on the portable device
side. In this case, when the tem-
perature of the portable device
drops significantly, charge again.
● Depending on usage of the porta-
ble device, it may not be fully
charged. This is not a malfunction.
● When using a mobile phone near
a wireless charger, the call sensi-
tivity and communication speed
may be reduced.
■ Operation sounds
When the power supply is turned
on, while searching for the portable
device a sound will be produced,
however this is not a malfunction.
■ Cleaning the wireless charger
P.448
■ Label indicating precautions for
using the wireless charger
There is a label on the wireless
charger. Follow the instructions on
the label.
■ Certification for the wireless charger
431
6-4. Using the other interior features
6
Interior features
432
6-4. Using the other interior features
433
6-4. Using the other interior features
6
Interior features
WARNING
■ Caution while driving
When charging a portable device,
for safety reasons, the driver
should not operate the main part
of the portable device while driv-
ing.
■ Caution regarding interfer-
ence with electronic devices
People with implantable cardiac
pacemakers, cardiac resynchroni-
zation therapy-pacemakers or
implantable cardioverter defibrilla-
tors, as well as any other electri-
cal medical device, should consult
their physician about the usage of
the wireless charger. The opera-
tions of the wireless charger may
have an affect on medical
devices.
■ To prevent damage or burns
Observe the following precau-
tions.
Failure to do so may result in a
possibility of equipment failure
and damage, catch fire, burns due
to overheat.
● Do not insert any metallic
objects between the charging
area and the portable device
while charging
● Do not place containers with liq-
uid such as water on the wire-
less charger.
● Do not attach stickers, metallic
objects, etc., to the charger area
or portable device
● Do not cover with cloth, etc.,
and charge
● Do not charge portable devices
other than designated
● Do not attempt to dismantle for
disassembly or modifications
● Do not hit or apply a strong
force
NOTICE
■ Conditions in which the func-
tion may not operate cor-
rectly
In the following conditions, it may
not operate correctly
● The portable device is fully
charged
● There is foreign matter between
the charge area and portable
device
● The temperature of the portable
device gets higher from
charging
● The charging surface of the por-
table device is facing up
● The placement of the portable
device is out of alignment with
the charge area
● Near a TV tower, electric power
plant, gas station, radio station,
large display, airport or other
facility that generates strong
radio waves or electrical noise
● When the electronic key is in
contact with, or is covered by
the following metallic objects
• Cards to which aluminum foil is
attached
• Cigarette boxes that have alu-
minum foil inside
• Metallic wallets or bags
• Coins
• Hand warmers made of metal
• Media such as CDs and DVDs
434
6-4. Using the other interior features
Fold down the armrest for use.
An assist grip installed on the
ceiling can be used to support
your body while sitting on the
seat.
NOTICE
● When other wireless keys (that
emit radio waves) are being
used nearby
In addition, excluding the above-
mentioned, when the charger
does not perform normally or the
operation display lamp is flashing
continuously, it is considered that
the wireless charger is malfunc-
tioning. Contact authorized
Toyota dealer.
■ To prevent failure or damage
to data
● Do not bring magnetic cards,
such as credit cards, a contact-
less IC card, or magnetic
recording media, etc., close to
the charger while charging, oth-
erwise, data may disappear
under the influence of magne-
tism. Also, do not bring preci-
sion instruments such as wrist
watches, etc., close to the char-
ger, as such objects may break.
● Do not leave portable devices in
the cabin. The temperature
inside the cabin may become
high, when under the sun, and
cause damage to the device.
■ To prevent 12-volt battery dis-
charge
When the hybrid system is
stopped, do not use the wireless
charger for a long time.
Armrest
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the
armrest
Do not apply too much load on the
armrest.
Assist grips
WARNING
■ Assist grips
Do not use the assist grip when
getting in or out of the vehicle or
rising from your seat.
435
6-4. Using the other interior features
6
Interior features
The coat hooks are provided
with the rear assist grips.
*
: If equipped
The HomeLink
®
wireless control
system in your vehicle has 3
buttons which can be pro-
grammed to operate 3 different
devices. Refer to the program-
ming methods on the following
pages to determine the method
which is appropriate for the
device.
Vehicles with auto anti-glare
inside rear view mirror
HomeLink
®
indicator light
Garage door operation indi-
cators
HomeLink
®
icon
Illuminates while HomeLink
®
is
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the
assist grip
Do not hang any heavy object or
put a heavy load on the assist
grip.
Coat hooks
WARNING
■ Items that must not be
hanged on the hook
Do not hang coat hangers or
other hard or sharp objects on the
hook. If the SRS curtain shield air-
bags deploy, these items may
become projectiles, causing death
or serious injury.
Garage door opener
*
The garage door opener can
be programmed using the
HomeLink
®
to operate
garage doors, gates, entry
doors, door locks, home
lighting systems, security
systems, and other devices.
System components
A
B
C
436
6-4. Using the other interior features
operating.
Buttons
Vehicles with Digital Rear-
view Mirror
HomeLink
®
indicator light
Illuminates above each button
selected.
HomeLink
®
icon
Garage door operation indi-
cators
HomeLink
®
logo
Appears while HomeLink
®
is oper-
ating.
When the HomeLink
®
button is
pressed, the logo disappears even
while the HomeLink
®
is operating.
Setting icon
Press the menu button to change
the setting.
Menu buttons
HomeLink
®
buttons
■ Codes stored in the HomeLink
®
memory
● The registered codes are not
erased even if the 12-volt battery
cable is disconnected.
● If learning failed when registering
a different code to a HomeLink
®
button that already has a code
registered to it, the already regis-
tered code will not be erased.
■ Certification for the garage door opener
For vehicles sold in the U.S. mainland and Hawaii
D
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
437
6-4. Using the other interior features
6
Interior features
For vehicles sold in Canada
■ When support is necessary
Visit on the web at
www.homelink.com/toyota
or call
1-800-355-3515.
■ Before programming
HomeLink
®
During programming, it is pos-
sible that garage doors,
gates, or other devices may
operate. For this reason,
make sure that people and
objects are clear of the
garage door or other devices
to prevent injury or other
potential harm.
It is recommended that a new
battery be placed in the
remote control transmitter for
successful programming.
WARNING
■ When programming a garage
door or other remote control
device
The garage door or other device
may operate, so ensure people
and objects are out of danger to
prevent potential harm.
■ Conforming to federal safety
standards
Do not use the HomeLink
®
com-
patible transceiver with any
garage door opener or device that
lacks safety stop and reverse fea-
tures as required by federal safety
standards.
This includes any garage door
that cannot detect an interfering
object. A door or device without
these features increases the risk
of death or serious injury.
■ When operating or program-
ming HomeLink
®
Never allow a child to operate or
play with the HomeLink
®
buttons.
Programming HomeLink
®
438
6-4. Using the other interior features
Garage door opener motors
manufactured after 1995 may
be equipped with rolling code
protection. If this is the case,
you may need a stepladder or
other sturdy, safe device to
reach the “Learn” or “Smart”
button on the garage door
opener motor.
■ Programming HomeLink
®
Steps 2 through 4 must be per-
formed within 60 seconds, oth-
erwise the HomeLink
®
indicator
light will stop flashing and pro-
gramming will not be success-
fully completed.
1 Vehicles with Digital Rear-
view Mirror: Press the
HomeLink
®
button or menu
button
When the HomeLink
®
button is
pressed:
Homelink
®
Training Tutorial will be
displayed to assist you program-
ming the HomeLink
®
.
When Homelink
®
Training Tutorial
is displayed, follow the instructions
displayed.
When the menu button is pressed:
Press the menu button and
select the “Set Up >”. Homelink
®
Training Tutorial will be displayed
to assist you programming the
HomeLink
®
.
When Homelink
®
Training Tutorial
is displayed, follow the instructions
displayed.
2 Press and release the
HomeLink
®
button you want
to program and check that
the HomeLink
®
indicator light
flashes (orange).
3 Point the remote control
transmitter for the device at
the rear view mirror, 1 to 3 in.
(25 to 75 mm) from the
HomeLink
®
buttons.
Keep the HomeLink
®
indicator light
in view while programming.
4 Program a device.
Programming a device other
than an entry gate (for U.S.A.
owners)
Press and hold the remote con-
trol transmitter button until the
HomeLink
®
indicator light
changes from slowly flashing
orange to rapidly flashing green
(rolling code) or continuously lit
green (fixed code), then release
439
6-4. Using the other interior features
6
Interior features
the button.
Programming an entry gate
(for U.S.A. owners)/Program-
ming a device in the Cana-
dian market
Press and release the remote
control transmitter button at 2
second intervals, repeatedly,
until the HomeLink
®
indicator
light changes from slowly flash-
ing orange to rapidly flashing
(green) (rolling code) or continu-
ously lit (green) (fixed code).
5 Test the HomeLink
®
opera-
tion by pressing the newly
programmed button and
observing the HomeLink
®
indicator light:
HomeLink
®
indicator light illu-
minates: Programming of a
fixed code device has com-
pleted. The garage door or
other device should operate
when a HomeLink
®
button is
pressed and released.
HomeLink
®
indicator light
flashes rapidly: The garage
door opener or other device is
equipped with a rolling code.
To complete programming,
firmly press and hold the
HomeLink
®
button for 2 sec-
onds then release it.
If the garage door or other
device does not operate, pro-
ceed to “Programming a roll-
ing code system”.
6 Repeat the steps above to
program another device for
any of the remaining
HomeLink
®
buttons.
■ Programming a rolling code
system
Two or more people may be
needed to complete rolling code
programming.
1 Locate the “Learn” or “Smart”
button on the garage door
opener motor in the garage.
This button can usually be found
where the hanging antenna wire is
attached to the unit. The name and
color of the button may vary by
manufacturer. Refer to the owner’s
manual supplied with the garage
door opener motor for details.
2 Press and release the
“Learn” or “Smart” button.
Perform 3 within 30 seconds after
performing 2.
440
6-4. Using the other interior features
3 Press and hold the desired
HomeLink
®
button (inside the
vehicle) for 2 seconds and
release it. Repeat this
sequence
(press/hold/release) up to 3
times to complete program-
ming.
If the garage door opener
motor operates when the
HomeLink
®
button is
pressed, the garage door
opener motor recognizes the
HomeLink
®
signal.
■ Enabling 2-way communi-
cation with a garage door
(only available for compati-
ble devices)
When enabled, 2-way communi-
cation allows you to check the
status of the opening and clos-
ing of a garage door through
indicators in your vehicle.
2-way communication is only
available if the garage door
opener motor used is a compati-
ble device. (To check device
compatibility, refer to
www.homelink.com.)
1 Within 5 seconds after pro-
gramming the garage door
opener has been completed,
if the garage door opener
motor is trained to
HomeLink
®
, both garage
door operation indicators will
flash rapidly (green) and the
light on the garage door
opener motor will blink twice,
indicating that 2-way commu-
nication is enabled.
If the indicators do not flash, per-
form 2 and 3 within the first 10
presses of the HomeLink
®
button
after programming has been com-
pleted.
2 Press a programmed
HomeLink
®
button to oper-
ate a garage door.
3 Within 1 minute of pressing
the HomeLink
®
button, after
the garage door operation
has stopped, press the
“Learn” or “Smart” button on
the garage door opener
motor. Within 5 seconds of
the establishment of 2-way
communication with the
garage door opener, both
garage door operation indica-
tors in the vehicle will flash
rapidly (green) and the light
on the garage door opener
motor will blink twice, indicat-
ing that 2-way communica-
tion is enabled.
441
6-4. Using the other interior features
6
Interior features
■ Reprogramming a single
HomeLink
®
button
When the following procedure is
performed, buttons which
already have devices registered
to them can be overwritten:
1 Press and hold the desired
HomeLink
®
button.
2 When the HomeLink
®
indica-
tor starts flashing orange,
release the HomeLink
®
but-
ton and perform “Program-
ming HomeLink
®
” 1 (it takes
20 seconds for the
HomeLink
®
indicator to start
flashing).
■ Before programming
● Install a new battery in the trans-
mitter.
● The battery side of the transmitter
must be pointed away from the
HomeLink
®
buttons.
Press the appropriate
HomeLink
®
button. The
HomeLink
®
indicator light
should turn on.
The status of the opening and
closing of a garage door is
shown by the garage door oper-
ation indicators.
Vehicles with auto anti-glare
inside rear view mirror
Opening
Closing
Vehicles with Digital Rear-
view Mirror
Opening
Closing
This function is only available if the
garage door opener motor used is a
compatible device. (To check
device compatibility, refer to
www.homelink.com.)
Operating HomeLink
®
Color Status
Orange (flash-
ing)
Currently open-
ing/closing
A
B
A
B
442
6-4. Using the other interior features
The indicators can operate
within approximately 820 ft. (250
m) of the garage door. However,
if there are obstructions
between the garage door and
the vehicle, such as houses and
trees, feedback signals from the
garage door may not be
received.
To recall the previous door oper-
ation status, press and release
either HomeLink
®
buttons
and or and (vehicles
with auto anti-glare inside rear
view mirror), and
or and (vehicles
with Digital Rear-view Mirror)
simultaneously. The last
recorded status will be dis-
played for 3 seconds.
Press and hold the 2 outside
buttons for 10 seconds until the
HomeLink
®
indicator light
changes from continuously lit
(orange) to rapidly flashing
(green).
If you sell your vehicle, be sure to
erase the programs stored in the
HomeLink
®
memory.
Green
Opening/closing
has completed
Red (flashing)
Feedback sig-
nals cannot be
received
Erasing the entire
HomeLink
®
memory (all
three codes)
Color Status
443
7
7
Maintenance and care
Maintenance and care
7-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting the
vehicle exterior.......... 444
Cleaning and protecting the
vehicle interior........... 447
7-2. Maintenance
Maintenance requirements
.................................. 450
General maintenance.. 451
Emission inspection and
maintenance (I/M) pro-
grams ........................ 454
7-3. Do-it-yourself mainte-
nance
Do-it-yourself service pre-
cautions..................... 455
Hood ........................... 457
Positioning a floor jack 458
Engine compartment... 460
12-volt battery ............. 466
Tires ............................ 468
Tire inflation pressure . 480
Wheels ........................ 482
Air conditioning filter.... 483
Cleaning the DC/DC Con-
verter air intake vent and
filter .......................... 486
Wiper insert replacement
.................................. 489
Electronic key battery.. 493
Checking and replacing
fuses.......................... 495
Light bulbs................... 497
444
7-1. Maintenance and care
7-1.Maintenance and care
Working from top to bottom,
liberally apply water to the
vehicle body, wheel wells and
underside of the vehicle to
remove any dirt and dust.
Wash the vehicle body using
a sponge or soft cloth, such
as a chamois.
For hard-to-remove marks,
use car wash soap and rinse
thoroughly with water.
Wipe away any water.
Wax the vehicle when the
waterproof coating deterio-
rates.
If water does not bead on a clean
surface, apply wax when the vehi-
cle body is cool.
■ Before car washes
Check that the fuel filler door and
charging port lid on your vehicle are
closed properly.
■ Automatic car washes
● Before washing the vehicle:
• Fold the mirrors
• Turn off the power back door (if
equipped)
Start washing from the front of the
vehicle. Make sure to extend the
mirrors before driving.
● Brushes used in automatic car
washes may scratch the vehicle
surface, parts (wheel, etc.) and
harm your vehicle’s paint.
● Rear spoiler may not be washable
in some automatic car washes.
There may also be an increased
risk of damage to vehicle.
■ High pressure car washes
As water may enter the cabin, do
not bring the nozzle tip near the
gaps around the doors or perimeter
of the windows, or spray these
areas continuously.
■ Note for a smart key system
If the door handle becomes wet
while the electronic key is within the
effective range, the door may lock
and unlock repeatedly. In that case,
follow the following correction pro-
cedures to wash the vehicle:
● Place the key in a position 6 ft. (2
m) or more separate from the
vehicle while the vehicle is being
washed. (Take care to ensure that
the key is not stolen.)
● Set the electronic key to battery-
saving mode to disable the smart
key system. (P.218)
■ Wheels and wheel ornaments
● Remove any dirt immediately by
using a neutral detergent.
● Wash detergent off with water
immediately after use.
● To protect the paint from damage,
make sure to observe the follow-
ing precautions.
• Do not use acidic, alkaline or
abrasive detergent
• Do not use hard brushes
• Do not use detergent on the
wheels when they are hot, such
as after driving or parking in hot
weather
Cleaning and protect-
ing the vehicle exte-
rior
Perform the following to
protect the vehicle and
maintain it in prime condi-
tion:
Cleaning instructions
445
7-1. Maintenance and care
7
Maintenance and care
■ Front side windows water-
repellent coating (except quar-
ter window)
● The following precautions can
extend the effectiveness of the
water-repellent coating.
• Remove any dirt, etc., from the
front side windows regularly.
• Do not allow dirt and dust to accu-
mulate on the windows for a long
period. Clean the windows with a
soft, damp cloth as soon as possi-
ble.
• Do not use wax or glass cleaners
that contain abrasives when
cleaning the windows.
• Do not use any metallic objects to
remove condensation build up.
■ Bumpers
Do not scrub with abrasive cleaners.
■ Plated portions
If dirt cannot be removed, clean the
parts as follows:
● Use a soft cloth dampened with
an approximately 5% solution of
neutral detergent and water to
clean the dirt off.
● Wipe the surface with a dry, soft
cloth to remove any remaining
moisture.
● To remove oily deposits, use alco-
hol wet wipes or a similar product.
WARNING
■ When washing the vehicle
Do not apply water to the inside of
the engine compartment. Doing
so may cause the electrical com-
ponents, etc. to catch fire.
■ When cleaning the windshield
(vehicles with rain-sensing
windshield wipers)
Set the wiper switch to off.
If the wiper switch is in “AUTO”,
the wipers may operate unexpect-
edly in the following situations,
and may result in hands being
caught or other serious injuries
and cause damage to the wiper
blades.
Off
AUTO
● When the upper part of the
windshield where the raindrop
sensor is located is touched by
hand
● When a wet rag or similar is
held close to the raindrop sen-
sor
● If something bumps against the
windshield
● If you directly touch the raindrop
sensor body or if something
bumps into the raindrop sensor
■ Precautions regarding the
exhaust pipes
Exhaust gasses cause the
exhaust pipes to become quite
hot.
When washing the vehicle, be
careful not to touch the pipes until
they have cooled sufficiently, as
touching hot exhaust pipes can
cause burns.
A
B
446
7-1. Maintenance and care
WARNING
■ Precaution regarding the rear
bumper with Blind Spot Moni-
tor
If the paint of the rear bumper is
chipped or scratched, the system
may malfunction. If this occurs,
consult your Toyota dealer.
NOTICE
■ To prevent paint deterioration
and corrosion on the body
and components (aluminum
wheels, etc.)
● Wash the vehicle immediately in
the following cases:
• After driving near the sea coast
• After driving on salted roads
• If coal tar or tree sap is present
on the paint surface
• If dead insects, insect droppings
or bird droppings are present on
the paint surface
• After driving in an area contami-
nated with soot, oily smoke,
mine dust, iron powder or chem-
ical substances
• If the vehicle becomes heavily
soiled with dust or mud
• If liquids such as benzene and
gasoline are spilled on the paint
surface
● If the paint is chipped or
scratched, have it repaired
immediately.
● To prevent the wheels from cor-
roding, remove any dirt and
store in a place with low humid-
ity when storing the wheels.
■ Cleaning the exterior lights
● Wash carefully. Do not use
organic substances or scrub
with a hard brush.
This may damage the surfaces
of the lights.
● Do not apply wax to the sur-
faces of the lights.
Wax may cause damage to the
lenses.
■ When using an automatic car
wash (vehicles with rain-
sensing windshield wipers)
Set the wiper switch to off posi-
tion.
If the wiper switch is in “AUTO”,
the wipers may operate and the
wiper blades may be damaged.
■ When using a high pressure
car wash
● When washing the vehicle, do
not let water from the high-pres-
sure washer directly hit the
camera or the area around the
camera. Due to the shock from
the high pressure water, it is
possible that the device may not
operate normally.
● Do not bring the nozzle tip close
to boots (rubber or resin manu-
factured cover), or connectors
or the following parts.
The parts may be damaged if
they come into contact with
high-pressure water.
• Traction battery
•Traction related parts
• Steering parts
• Suspension parts
• Brake parts
447
7-1. Maintenance and care
7
Maintenance and care
Remove dirt and dust using a
vacuum cleaner. Wipe dirty
surfaces with a cloth damp-
ened with lukewarm water.
If dirt cannot be removed,
wipe it off with a soft cloth
dampened with neutral deter-
gent diluted to approximately
1%.
Wring out any excess water
from the cloth and thoroughly
wipe off remaining traces of
detergent and water.
■ Shampooing the carpets
There are several commercial foam-
ing-type cleaners available. Use a
sponge or brush to apply the foam.
Rub in overlapping circles. Do not
use water. Wipe dirty surfaces and
let them dry. Excellent results are
obtained by keeping the carpet as
dry as possible.
■ Handling the seat belts
Clean with mild soap and lukewarm
water using a cloth or sponge. Also
check the belts periodically for
excessive wear, fraying or cuts.
NOTICE
● Keep the cleaning nozzle at
least 11.9 in. (30 cm) away from
the vehicle body. Otherwise
resin section, such as moldings
and bumpers, may be deformed
and damaged. Also, do not con-
tinuously hold the nozzle in the
same place.
● Do not spray the lower part of
the windshield continuously. If
water enters the air conditioning
system intake located near the
lower part of the windshield, the
air conditioning system may not
operate correctly.
● Do not wash the underside of
the vehicle using a high pres-
sure car washer.
● Do not use the washer on the
area around the charging port
lid. Water could get into the AC
charging inlet and could dam-
age the vehicle.
Cleaning and protect-
ing the vehicle interior
Perform cleaning in a man-
ner appropriate to each
component and its material.
Protecting the vehicle
interior
448
7-1. Maintenance and care
WARNING
■ Water in the vehicle
● Do not splash or spill liquid in
the vehicle, such as on the floor,
on the rear seats, in the DC/DC
Converter air intake vent, junc-
tion box or in the luggage com-
partment. (P.91)
Doing so may cause the DC/DC
Converter, electrical compo-
nents, etc. to malfunction or
catch fire.
● Do not get any of the SRS com-
ponents or wiring in the vehicle
interior wet.
(P.35)
An electrical malfunction may
cause the airbags to deploy or
not function properly, resulting
in death or serious injury.
● Vehicles with wireless charger:
Do not let the wireless charger
(P.427) get wet. Failure to do
so may cause the charger to
become hot and cause burns or
could cause electric shock
resulting in death or serious
injury.
■ Cleaning the interior (espe-
cially instrument panel)
Do not use a polish wax or polish
cleaner. The instrument panel
may reflect off the windshield,
obstructing the driver’s view and
leading to an accident, resulting in
death or serious injury.
NOTICE
■ Cleaning detergents
● Do not use the following types
of detergent, as they may dis-
color the vehicle interior or
cause streaks or damage to
painted surfaces:
• Non-seat portions: Organic sub-
stances such as benzene or
gasoline, alkaline or acidic solu-
tions, dye, and bleach
• Seats: Alkaline or acidic solu-
tions, such as thinner, benzene,
and alcohol
● Do not use a polish wax or pol-
ish cleaner. The instrument
panel’s or other interior part’s
painted surface may be dam-
aged.
■ Preventing damage to leather
surfaces
Observe the following precautions
to avoid damage to and deteriora-
tion of leather surfaces:
● Remove any dust or dirt from
leather surfaces immediately.
● Do not expose the vehicle to
direct sunlight for extended peri-
ods of time. Park the vehicle in
the shade, especially during
summer.
● Do not place items made of
vinyl, plastic, or containing wax
on the upholstery, as they may
stick to the leather surface if the
vehicle interior heats up signifi-
cantly.
449
7-1. Maintenance and care
7
Maintenance and care
Remove dirt and dust using a
vacuum cleaner.
Wipe off any excess dirt and
dust with a soft cloth damp-
ened with diluted detergent.
Use a diluted water solution of
approximately 5% neutral wool
detergent.
Wring out any excess water
from the cloth and thoroughly
wipe off all remaining traces
of detergent.
Wipe the surface with a dry,
soft cloth to remove any
remaining moisture. Allow the
leather to dry in a shaded and
ventilated area.
■ Caring for leather areas
Toyota recommends cleaning the
interior of the vehicle at least twice a
year to maintain the quality of the
vehicle’s interior.
Remove dirt and dust using a
vacuum cleaner.
Wipe it off with a soft cloth
dampened with neutral deter-
gent diluted to approximately
1%.
Wring out any excess water
from the cloth and thoroughly
wipe off remaining traces of
detergent and water.
NOTICE
■ Water on the floor
Do not wash the vehicle floor with
water.
Vehicle systems such as the
audio system may be damaged if
water comes into contact with
electrical components such as the
audio system above or under the
floor of the vehicle. Water may
also cause the body to rust.
■ When cleaning the inside of
the windshield
Do not allow glass cleaner to con-
tact the lens. Also, do not touch
the lens. (P.309)
■ Cleaning the inside of the rear
window
● Do not use a glass cleaner to
clean the rear window, as this
may cause damage to the rear
window defogger heater wires.
Use a cloth dampened with
lukewarm water to gently wipe
the window clean. Wipe the win-
dow in strokes running parallel
to the heater wires.
● Be careful not to scratch or
damage the heater wires.
Cleaning the leather areas
Cleaning the synthetic
leather areas
450
7-2. Maintenance
7-2.Maintenance
■ Repair and replacement
It is recommended that genuine
Toyota parts be used for repairs to
ensure performance of each sys-
tem. If non-Toyota parts are used in
replacement or if a repair shop other
than a Toyota dealer performs
repairs, confirm the warranty cover-
age.
■ Allow inspection and repairs to
be performed by a Toyota
dealer
● Toyota technicians are well-
trained specialists and are kept up
to date with the latest service
information. They are well
informed about the operations of
all systems on your vehicle.
● Keep a copy of the repair order. It
proves that the maintenance that
has been performed is under war-
ranty coverage. If any problem
should arise while your vehicle is
under warranty, your Toyota
dealer will promptly take care of it.
General maintenance should be
performed on a daily basis. This
can be done by yourself or by a
Toyota dealer.
Scheduled maintenance should
be performed at specified inter-
vals according to the mainte-
nance schedule.
For details about maintenance
items and schedules, refer to the
“Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or
“Owner’s Manual Supplement”.
Maintenance require-
ments
To ensure safe and econom-
ical driving, day-to-day care
and regular maintenance
are essential. It is the
owner’s responsibility to
perform regular checks.
Toyota recommends the fol-
lowing maintenance:
WARNING
■ If your vehicle is not properly
maintained
Improper maintenance could
result in serious damage to the
vehicle and possible death or seri-
ous injury.
■ Handling of the 12-volt bat-
tery
● Engine exhaust, some of its
constituents, and a wide variety
of automobile components con-
tain or emit chemicals known to
the State of California to cause
cancer and birth defects and
other reproductive harm. Work
in a well ventilated area.
● Oils, fuels and fluids contained
in vehicles as well as waste pro-
duced by component wear con-
tain or emit chemicals known to
the State of California to cause
cancer and birth defects or
other reproductive harm. Avoid
exposure and wash any
affected area immediately.
● 12-volt battery posts, terminals
and related accessories con-
tain lead and lead compounds
which are known to cause brain
damage. Wash your hands after
handling. (P.466)
General maintenance
Scheduled maintenance
451
7-2. Maintenance
7
Maintenance and care
■ Resetting the message indicat-
ing maintenance is required
After the required maintenance is
performed according to the mainte-
nance schedule, please reset the
reminder light or message.
To reset the reminder light or mes-
sage, follow the procedure
described below:
1 Press or of the meter
control switches and select
on the multi-information display.
2 Press or of the meter
control switches and select
“Vehicle Settings”. Then press
and hold .
3 Press or of the meter
control switches and select
“Scheduled Maintenance”. Then
press .
4 Select “Yes” and press .
You can perform some mainte-
nance procedures by yourself.
Please be aware that do-it-your-
self maintenance may affect
warranty coverage.
The use of Toyota Repair Manuals
is recommended.
For details about warranty cover-
age, refer to the separate “Owner’s
Warranty Information Booklet” or
“Owner’s Manual Supplement”.
Do-it-yourself mainte-
nance
General maintenance
Listed below are the general
maintenance items that
should be performed at the
intervals specified in the
“Owner’s Warranty Informa-
tion Booklet” or “Owner’s
Manual Supplement/Sched-
uled Maintenance Guide”. It
is recommended that any
problem you notice should
be brought to the attention
of your Toyota dealer or
qualified service shop for
advice.
WARNING
■ If the hybrid system is run-
ning
Turn the hybrid system off and
ensure that there is adequate
ventilation before performing
maintenance checks.
Engine compartment
Items Check points
Brake fluid
Is the brake fluid at
the correct level?
(P.464)
Engine/power
control unit
coolant
Is the
engine/power con-
trol unit coolant at
the correct level?
(P.462)
Engine oil
Is the engine oil at
the correct level?
(P.460)
452
7-2. Maintenance
Exhaust sys-
tem
There should not
be any fumes or
strange sounds.
Radiator/con-
denser
The radiator and
condenser should
be free from for-
eign objects.
(P.463)
Washer fluid
Is there sufficient
washer fluid?
(P.465)
Luggage compartment
Items Check points
12-volt battery
Check the connec-
tions. (P.466)
Vehicle interior
Items Check points
Accelerator
pedal
• The accelerator
pedal should
move smoothly
(without uneven
pedal effort or
catching).
Hybrid trans-
mission “Park”
mechanism
• When parked on
a slope and the
shift position is in
P, is the vehicle
securely
stopped?
Items Check points
Brake pedal
• Does the brake
pedal move
smoothly?
• Does the brake
pedal have
appropriate
clearance from
the floor?
• Does the brake
pedal have the
correct amount
of free play?
Brakes
• The vehicle
should not pull to
one side when
the brakes are
applied.
• The brakes
should work
effectively.
• The brake pedal
should not feel
spongy.
• The brake pedal
should not get
too close to the
floor when the
brakes are
applied.
Head
restraints
• Do the head
restraints move
smoothly and
lock securely?
Indica-
tors/buzzers
• Do the indica-
tors and buzzers
function prop-
erly?
Lights
• Do all the lights
come on?
Items Check points
453
7-2. Maintenance
7
Maintenance and care
Parking brake
• Does the park-
ing brake oper-
ate normally?
• When parked on
a slope and the
parking brake is
on, is the vehicle
securely
stopped?
Seat belts
• Do the seat belts
operate
smoothly?
• The seat belts
should not be
damaged.
Seats
• Do the seat con-
trols operate
properly?
Steering wheel
• Does the steer-
ing wheel rotate
smoothly?
• Does the steer-
ing wheel have
the correct
amount of free
play?
• There should not
be any strange
sounds coming
from the steer-
ing wheel.
Items Check points
Vehicle exterior
Items Check points
Doors
• Do the doors
operate
smoothly?
Engine hood
• Does the engine
hood lock system
work properly?
Fluid leaks
• There should not
be any signs of
fluid leakage
after the vehicle
has been parked.
Tires
• Is the tire infla-
tion pressure
correct?
• The tires should
not be damaged
or excessively
worn.
• Have the tires
been rotated
according to the
maintenance
schedule?
• The wheel nuts
should not be
loose.
Windshield
wipers/rear
window wiper
• The wiper blades
should not show
any signs of
cracking, split-
ting, wear, con-
tamination or
deformation.
• The wiper blades
should clear the
windshield/rear
window without
streaking or skip-
ping.
454
7-2. Maintenance
The OBD system determines
that a problem exists some-
where in the emission control
system. Your vehicle may not
pass the I/M test and may need
to be repaired. Contact your
Toyota dealer to service the
vehicle.
When the 12-volt battery is
disconnected or discharged
Readiness codes that are set
during ordinary driving are
erased.
Also, depending on your driv-
ing habits, the readiness
codes may not be completely
set.
When the fuel tank cap is
loose
The malfunction indicator
lamp comes on indicating a
temporary malfunction and
your vehicle may not pass the
I/M test.
The error code in the OBD sys-
tem will not be cleared unless
the vehicle is driven 40 or more
times.
Contact your Toyota dealer to
prepare the vehicle for re-test-
ing.
Emission inspection
and maintenance (I/M)
programs
Some states have vehicle
emission inspection pro-
grams which include OBD
(On Board Diagnostics)
checks. The OBD system
monitors the operation of
the emission control sys-
tem.
If the malfunction indica-
tor lamp comes on
Your vehicle may not
pass the I/M test in the fol-
lowing situations:
When the malfunction
indicator lamp still
remains on after several
driving trips
If your vehicle does not
pass the I/M test
455
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
7
Maintenance and care
7-3.Do-it-yourself maintenance
Do-it-yourself service
precautions
If you perform maintenance
by yourself, be sure to fol-
low the correct procedure as
given in these sections.
Maintenance
Items Parts and tools
12-volt bat-
tery condi-
tion
(P.466)
•Grease
• Conventional
wrench (for termi-
nal clamp bolts)
Brake fluid
level
(P.464)
• FMVSS No.116
DOT 3 or SAE
J1703 brake fluid
• FMVSS No.116
DOT 4 or SAE
J1704 brake fluid
• Rag or paper
towel
• Funnel (used only
for adding brake
fluid)
Engine/power
control unit
coolant level
(P.462)
• “Toyota Super
Long Life Cool-
ant” or a similar
high quality eth-
ylene glycol-based
non-silicate, non-
amine, non-nitrite
and non-borate
coolant with long-
life hybrid organic
acid technology
For the U.S.A.:
“Toyota Super
Long Life Cool-
ant” is pre-mixed
with 50% coolant
and 50% deion-
ized water.
For Canada:
“Toyota Super
Long Life Cool-
ant” is pre-mixed
with 55% coolant
and 45% deion-
ized water.
• Funnel (used only
for adding coolant)
Engine oil
level
(P.460)
• “Toyota Genuine
Motor Oil” or
equivalent
• Rag or paper
towel
• Funnel (used only
for adding engine
oil)
Fuses
(P.495)
• Fuse with same
amperage rating
as original
Items Parts and tools
456
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
DC/DC Con-
verter air
intake vent
(P.486)
• Vacuum cleaner,
etc,
• Phillips screw-
driver
Light bulbs
(P.497)
• Bulb with same
number and watt-
age rating as origi-
nal
• Phillips-head
screwdriver
• Flathead screw-
driver
•Wrench
Radiator and
condenser
(P.463)
Tire inflation
pressure
(P.480)
• Tire pressure
gauge
• Compressed air
source
Washer fluid
(P.465)
• Water or washer
fluid containing
antifreeze (for win-
ter use)
• Funnel (used only
for adding water or
washer fluid)
WARNING
The engine compartment contains
many mechanisms and fluids that
may move suddenly, become hot,
or become electrically energized.
To avoid death or serious injury,
observe the following precautions.
■ When working on the engine
compartment
● Make sure that “IGNITION ON”
on the multi-information display
and the “READY” indicator are
both off.
Items Parts and tools ● Keep hands, clothing and tools
away from the moving fan.
● Do not leave anything that may
burn easily, such as paper and
rags, in the engine compart-
ment.
● Do not smoke, cause sparks or
expose an open flame to fuel or
the battery. Fuel and battery
fumes are flammable.
■ When working near the elec-
tric cooling fan or radiator
grille
Be sure the power switch is OFF.
With the power switch in ON, the
electric cooling fan may automati-
cally start to run if the air condi-
tioning is on and/or the coolant
temperature is high. (P.463)
■ Safety glasses
Wear safety glasses to prevent
flying or falling material, fluid
spray, etc., from getting in your
eyes.
NOTICE
■ If you remove the air cleaner
filter
Driving with the air cleaner filter
removed may cause excessive
engine wear due to dirt in the air.
457
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
7
Maintenance and care
1 Pull the hood lock release
lever.
The hood will pop up slightly.
2 Push the auxiliary catch lever
to the left and lift the hood.
3 Hold the hood open by insert-
ing the supporting rod into
the slot.
Hood
Release the lock from the
inside of the vehicle to open
the hood.
Opening the hood
WARNING
■ Pre-driving check
Check that the hood is fully closed
and locked.
If the hood is not locked properly,
it may open while the vehicle is in
motion and cause an accident,
which may result in death or seri-
ous injury.
■ To prevent burns
Do not touch the pipes when the
compressor is operating or after it
is stopped, because the pipes are
hot.
Touching by hands before the
pipes cool down may cause
burns.
458
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Front
WARNING
■ After installing the support
rod into the slot
Make sure the rod supports the
hood securely from falling down
on to your head or body.
■ When closing the hood
When closing the hood, take extra
care to prevent your fingers etc.
from being caught.
NOTICE
■ When closing the hood
Be sure to return the support rod
to its clip before closing the hood.
Closing the hood without return-
ing the support rod properly could
cause the hood to bend.
Positioning a floor
jack
When using a floor jack, fol-
low the instructions in the
manual provided with the
jack and perform the opera-
tion safely.
When raising your vehicle
with a floor jack, position
the jack correctly.
Improper placement may
damage your vehicle or
cause injury.
Location of the jack point
459
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
7
Maintenance and care
■ Rear
460
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Fuse boxes (P.495)
Engine oil filler cap (P.461)
Engine oil level dipstick (P.460)
Brake fluid reservoir (P.464)
Radiator (P.463)
Electric cooling fan
Condenser (P.463)
Power control unit coolant reservoir (P.463)
Washer fluid tank (P.465)
Engine coolant reservoir (P.462)
■ 12-volt battery
P.466
With the engine at operating
temperature and turned off,
Engine compartment
Components
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
Checking and adding the
engine oil
461
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
7
Maintenance and care
check the oil level on the dip-
stick.
■ Checking the engine oil
1 Park the vehicle on level
ground. After warming up the
engine and turning off the
hybrid system, wait more
than 5 minutes for the oil to
drain back into the bottom of
the engine.
2 Holding a rag under the end,
pull the dipstick out.
3 Wipe the dipstick clean.
4 Reinsert the dipstick fully.
5 Holding a rag under the end,
pull the dipstick out and
check the oil level.
Low
Normal
Excessive
The shape of the dipstick may differ
depending on the type of vehicle or
engine.
6 Wipe the dipstick and reinsert
it fully.
■ Checking the oil type and
preparing the items needed
Make sure to check the oil type
and prepare the items needed
before adding oil.
Engine oil selection
P.552
Oil quantity (Low Full)
1.6 qt. (1.5 L, 1.3 Imp. qt.)
Item
Clean funnel
■ Adding engine oil
If the oil level is below or near
the low level mark, add engine
oil of the same type as that
already in the engine.
1 Remove the oil filler cap by
turning it counterclockwise.
2 Add engine oil slowly, check-
ing the dipstick.
3 Install the oil filler cap by
turning it clockwise.
A
B
C
462
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Engine oil consumption
A certain amount of engine oil will
be consumed while driving. In the
following situations, oil consump-
tion may increase, and engine oil
may need to be refilled in between
oil maintenance intervals.
● When the engine is new, for
example directly after purchasing
the vehicle or after replacing the
engine
● If low quality oil or oil of an inap-
propriate viscosity is used
● When driving at high engine
speeds or with a heavy load,
when towing, or when driving
while accelerating or decelerating
frequently
● When leaving the engine idling for
a long time, or when driving fre-
quently through heavy traffic
The coolant level is satisfactory
if it is between the “FULL” and
“LOW” lines on the reservoir
when the hybrid system is cold.
■ Engine coolant reservoir
WARNING
■ Used engine oil
● Used engine oil contains poten-
tially harmful contaminants
which may cause skin disorders
such as inflammation and skin
cancer, so care should be taken
to avoid prolonged and
repeated contact. To remove
used engine oil from your skin,
wash thoroughly with soap and
water.
● Dispose of used oil and filters
only in a safe and acceptable
manner. Do not dispose of used
oil and filters in household trash,
in sewers or onto the ground.
Call your Toyota dealer, service
station or auto parts store for
information concerning recy-
cling or disposal.
● Do not leave used engine oil
within the reach of children.
NOTICE
■ To prevent serious engine
damage
Check the oil level on a regular
basis.
■ When replacing the engine oil
● Be careful not to spill engine oil
on the vehicle components.
● Avoid overfilling, or the engine
could be damaged.
● Check the oil level on the dip-
stick every time you refill the
vehicle.
● Be sure the engine oil filler cap
is properly tightened.
■ If oil is spilled on the engine
cover
To prevent the engine cover from
being damaged, remove any
engine oil from the engine cover
as soon as possible using a neu-
tral detergent. Do not use an
organic solvent such as brake
cleaner.
Checking the coolant
463
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
7
Maintenance and care
Reservoir cap
“FULL” line
“LOW” line
If the level is on or below the “LOW”
line, add coolant up to the “FULL”
line. (P.544)
■ Power control unit coolant
reservoir
Reservoir cap
“FULL” line
“LOW” line
If the level is on or below the “LOW”
line, add coolant up to the “FULL”
line. (P.546)
■ Coolant selection
Only use “Toyota Super Long Life
Coolant” or a similar high quality
ethylene glycol based non-silicate,
non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-
borate coolant with long-life hybrid
organic acid technology.
U.S.A.:
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is
a mixture of 50% coolant and 50%
deionized water. (Minimum tem-
perature: -31°F [-35°C])
Canada:
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is
a mixture of 55% coolant and 45%
deionized water. (Minimum tem-
perature: -44°F [-42°C])
For more details about coolant, con-
tact your Toyota dealer.
■ If the coolant level drops within
a short time of replenishing
Visually check the radiators, hoses,
engine/power control unit coolant
reservoir caps, drain cock and water
pump.
If you cannot find a leak, have your
Toyota dealer, test the cap and
check for leaks in the cooling sys-
tem.
Check the radiator and con-
denser, and clear away any for-
eign objects.
If either of the above parts is
extremely dirty or you are not
sure of their condition, have
A
B
C
A
B
C
WARNING
■ When the hybrid system is
hot
Do not remove the engine/power
control unit coolant reservoir
caps.
The cooling system may be under
pressure and may spray hot cool-
ant if the cap is removed, causing
serious injuries, such as burns.
NOTICE
■ When adding coolant
Coolant is neither plain water nor
straight antifreeze. The correct
mixture of water and antifreeze
must be used to provide proper
lubrication, corrosion protection
and cooling. Be sure to read the
antifreeze or coolant label.
■ If you spill coolant
Be sure to wash it off with water to
prevent it from damaging parts or
paint.
Checking the radiator and
condenser
464
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
your vehicle inspected by your
Toyota dealer.
■ Checking fluid level
The brake fluid level should be
between the “MAX” and “MIN”
lines on the tank.
■ Adding fluid
1 Slide and lift up the rubber
strip to partly remove it as
shown.
2 Disconnect the claws and
remove the service cover.
3 Remove the reservoir cap.
4 Add brake fluid slowly while
checking the fluid level.
Make sure to check the fluid
type and prepare the necessary
item.
WARNING
■ When the hybrid system is
hot
Do not touch the radiator or con-
denser as they may be hot and
cause serious injuries, such as
burns.
■ When the electric cooling fan
is operating
Do not touch the engine compart-
ment.
With the power switch in ON
mode, the electric cooling fan may
automatically start to run if the air
conditioning is on and/or the cool-
ant temperature is high. Be sure
the power switch is OFF when
working near the electric cooling
fan or radiator grille.
Checking and adding the
brake fluid
465
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
7
Maintenance and care
■ Brake fluid can absorb moisture
from the air
Excess moisture in the brake fluid
can cause a dangerous loss of brak-
ing efficiency. Use only newly
opened brake fluid.
If any washer does not work or
the warning message appears
on the multi-information display,
the washer tank may be empty.
Add washer fluid.
Fluid
type
FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or
SAE J1703 brake fluid
FMVSS No.116 DOT 4 or
SAE J1704 brake fluid
Item Clean funnel
WARNING
■ When filling the reservoir
Take care as brake fluid can harm
your hands and eyes and damage
painted surfaces.
If fluid gets on your hands or in
your eyes, flush the affected area
with clean water immediately.
If you still experience discomfort,
see a doctor.
NOTICE
■ If the fluid level is low or high
It is normal for the brake fluid level
to go down slightly as the brake
pads wear out or when the fluid
level in the accumulator is high.
If the reservoir needs frequent
refilling, there may be a serious
problem.
Adding the washer fluid
WARNING
■ When adding washer fluid
Do not add washer fluid when the
hybrid system is hot or operating
as washer fluid contains alcohol
and may catch fire if spilled on the
hybrid system, etc.
NOTICE
■ Do not use any fluid other
than washer fluid
Do not use soapy water or engine
antifreeze instead of washer fluid.
Doing so may cause streaking on
the vehicle’s painted surfaces, as
well as damaging the pump lead-
ing to problems of the washer
fluid not spraying.
■ Diluting washer fluid
Dilute washer fluid with water as
necessary.
Refer to the freezing tempera-
tures listed on the label of the
washer fluid bottle.
466
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
The 12-volt battery is located in
the right-hand side of luggage
compartment.
■ Before recharging
When recharging, the 12-volt bat-
tery produces hydrogen gas which
is flammable and explosive. There-
fore, observe the following precau-
tions before recharging:
● If recharging with the 12-volt bat-
tery installed on the vehicle, be
sure to disconnect the ground
cable.
● Make sure the power switch on
the charger is off when connecting
and disconnecting the charger
cables to the 12-volt battery.
■ After recharging/reconnecting
the 12-volt battery
● The hybrid system may not start.
Follow the procedure below to ini-
tialize the system.
1 Shift the shift lever to P.
2 Open and close any of the doors.
3 Restart the hybrid system.
● Unlocking the doors using the
smart key system may not be pos-
sible immediately after reconnect-
ing the 12-volt battery. If this
happens, use the wireless remote
control or the mechanical key to
lock/unlock the doors.
● Start the hybrid system with the
power switch in ACC. The hybrid
system may not start with the
power switch turned off. How-
ever, the hybrid system will oper-
ate normally from the second
attempt.
● The power switch mode is
recorded by the vehicle. If the 12-
volt battery is reconnected, the
vehicle will return the power
switch mode to the status it was in
before the 12-volt battery was dis-
connected. Make sure to turn off
the power switch before discon-
nect the 12-volt battery. Take
extra care when connecting the
12-volt battery if the power switch
mode prior to discharge is
unknown.
If the hybrid system will not start
even after multiple attempts at all
methods above, contact your
Toyota dealer.
12-volt battery
Location
WARNING
■ Chemicals in the 12-volt bat-
tery
The 12-volt battery contains poi-
sonous and corrosive sulfuric acid
and may produce hydrogen gas
which is flammable and explosive.
To reduce the risk of death or
serious injury, take the following
precautions while working on or
near the 12-volt battery:
● Do not cause sparks by touch-
ing the 12-volt battery terminals
with tools.
● Do not smoke or light a match
near the 12-volt battery.
● Avoid contact with eyes, skin
and clothes.
● Never inhale or swallow electro-
lyte.
467
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
7
Maintenance and care
1 Open the deck board
(P.417)
2 Disengage the 13 claws and
pull the luggage side cover to
remove it.
When installing the luggage side
cover, make sure that the claws are
installed securely.
Make sure that the 12-volt bat-
tery terminals are not corroded
and that there are no loose con-
nections, cracks, or loose
WARNING
● Wear protective safety glasses
when working near the 12-volt
battery.
● Keep children away from the
12-volt battery.
■ Where to safely charge the
12-volt battery
Always charge the 12-volt battery
in an open area. Do not charge
the 12-volt battery in a garage or
closed room where there is insuf-
ficient ventilation.
■ Emergency measures regard-
ing electrolyte
● If electrolyte gets in your eyes
Flush your eyes with clean water
for at least 15 minutes and get
immediate medical attention. If
possible, continue to apply water
with a sponge or cloth while trav-
eling to the nearest medical facil-
ity.
● If electrolyte gets on your skin
Wash the affected area thor-
oughly. If you feel pain or burning,
get medical attention immediately.
● If electrolyte gets on your
clothes
It can soak through clothing on to
your skin. Immediately take off the
clothing and follow the procedure
above if necessary.
● If you accidentally swallow elec-
trolyte
Drink a large quantity of water or
milk. Get emergency medical
attention immediately.
■ When there is insufficient 12-
volt battery fluid
Do not use if there is insufficient
fluid in the 12-volt battery. There
is a possible danger that the 12-
volt battery may explode.
NOTICE
■ When recharging the 12-volt
battery
Never recharge the 12-volt bat-
tery while the hybrid system is
operating. Also, be sure all acces-
sories are turned off.
Removing the 12-volt bat-
tery cover
Exterior
468
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
clamps.
Terminals
Hold-down clamp
Check the battery condition by
indicator color.
Blue: Good condition
Red: Charging is necessary.
Have the vehicle inspected by your
Toyota dealer.
Clear: Not working properly.
Add distilled water or replace the
battery.
Have the vehicle inspected by your
Toyota dealer.
Check if the treadwear indica-
tors are showing on the tires.
Also check the tires for uneven
wear, such as excessive wear
on one side of the tread.
Check the spare tire condition
and pressure if not rotated.
New tread
Worn tread
Treadwear indicator
The location of treadwear indicators
is shown by a “TWI” or “ ” mark,
Checking the battery con-
dition (if equipped)
A
B
A
B
C
Tires
Replace or rotate tires in
accordance with mainte-
nance schedules and tread-
wear.
Checking tires
A
B
C
469
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
7
Maintenance and care
etc., molded into the sidewall of
each tire.
Replace the tires if the treadwear
indicators are showing on a tire.
■ When to replace your vehicle’s
tires
Tires should be replaced if:
● The treadwear indicators are
showing on a tire.
● You have tire damage such as
cuts, splits, cracks deep enough
to expose the fabric, and bulges
indicating internal damage.
● A tire goes flat repeatedly or can-
not be properly repaired due to
the size or location of a cut or
other damage.
If you are not sure, consult with your
Toyota dealer.
■ Tire life
Any tire over 6 years old must be
checked by a qualified technician
even if it has seldom or never been
used or damage is not obvious.
■ Maximum load of tire
Check that the number given by
dividing the maximum load by 1.10
of the replacement tire is greater
than 1/2 of the Gross Axle Weight
Ratings (GAWR) of either the front
axle or the rear axle, whichever is
greater.
For the GAWR, see the Certification
Regulation Label. For the maximum
load of the tire, see the load limit at
maximum cold tire inflation pressure
mentioned on the sidewall of the
tire. (P.559)
■ Tire types
● Summer tires
Summer tires are high-speed perfor-
mance tires best suited to highway
driving under dry conditions. Since
summer tires do not have the same
traction performance as snow tires,
summer tires are inadequate for
driving on snow-covered or icy
roads. For driving on snow-covered
roads or icy roads, the use of snow
tires is recommended. When install-
ing snow tires, be sure to replace all
four tires.
● All season tires
All season tires are designed to pro-
vide better traction in snow and to
be adequate for driving in most win-
ter conditions as well as for use
year-round. All season tires, how-
ever, do not have adequate traction
performance compared with snow
tires in heavy or loose snow. Also,
all season tires fall short in accelera-
tion and handling performance com-
pared with summer tires in highway
driving.
● Snow tires
For driving on snow-covered roads
or icy roads, we recommend using
snow tires. If you need snow tires,
select tires of the same size, con-
struction and load capacity as the
originally installed tires. Since your
vehicle has radial tires as original
equipment, make sure your snow
tires also have radial construction.
Do not install studded tires without
first checking local regulations for
possible restrictions. Snow tires
should be installed on all wheels.
(P.387)
470
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ If the tread on snow tires wears
down below 0.16 in. (4 mm)
The effectiveness of the tires as
snow tires is lost.
Rotate the tires in the order
shown.
To equalize tire wear and extend
tire life, Toyota recommends that
tire rotation is carried out at the
same interval as tire inspection.
Do not fail to initialize the tire pres-
sure warning system after tire rota-
tion.
Front
■ When rotating the tires
Make sure that the power switch is
WARNING
■ When inspecting or replacing
tires
Observe the following precautions
to prevent accidents.
Failure to do so may cause dam-
age to parts of the drive train as
well as dangerous handling char-
acteristics, which may lead to an
accident resulting in death or seri-
ous injury.
● Do not mix tires of different
makes, models or tread pat-
terns.
Also, do not mix tires of remark-
ably different treadwear.
● Do not use tire sizes other than
those recommended by Toyota.
● Do not mix differently con-
structed tires (radial, bias-belted
or bias-ply tires).
● Do not mix summer, all season
and snow tires.
● Do not use tires that have been
used on another vehicle.
Do not use tires if you do not
know how they were used previ-
ously.
● Do not tow if your vehicle has a
compact spare tire installed.
NOTICE
■ Driving on rough roads
Take particular care when driving
on roads with loose surfaces or
potholes.
These conditions may cause
losses in tire inflation pressure,
reducing the cushioning ability of
the tires. In addition, driving on
rough roads may cause damage
to the tires themselves, as well as
the vehicle’s wheels and body.
■ If tire inflation pressure of
each tire becomes low while
driving
Do not continue driving, or your
tires and/or wheels may be
ruined.
Tire rotation
A
471
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
7
Maintenance and care
OFF. If the tires are rotated while
the power switch is in ON, the tire
position information will not be
updated. If this accidentally occurs,
either turn the power switch to OFF
and then to ON, or initialize the sys-
tem after checking that the tire pres-
sure is properly adjusted.
Your vehicle is equipped with a
tire pressure warning system
that uses tire pressure warning
valves and transmitters to detect
low tire inflation pressure before
serious problems arise.
The tire pressure warning sys-
tem of this vehicle adopts a 2-
type warning system
When “Adjust Pressure” is
displayed (Normal Warning)
The tire pressure warning light
comes on and a buzzer sounds
when the tire inflation pressure
becomes low due to natural air
leakage or outside temperature.
(Ways of coping: P.518, 555)
When “Immediately Check
tire when Safe” is displayed
(Emergency Warning)
The tire pressure warning light
comes on and a buzzer sounds
when the tire inflation pressure
becomes low suddenly due to a
blowout. (Ways of coping: P.518,
527) However, the system may not
be able to detect sudden tire rup-
tures (bursting, etc.).
The tire pressure detected by
the tire pressure warning sys-
tem can be displayed on the
multi-information display.
The unit can be changed.
■ How to change the unit
1 Park the vehicle in a safe
place and turn the power
switch off.
Changing the unit cannot be per-
formed while the vehicle is moving.
2 Turn the power switch to ON.
3 Press or of the meter
control switches on the steer-
ing wheel and select .
4 Press or of the meter
control switches and select
“Vehicle Settings”, and then
press and hold .
5 Press or of the meter
control switches and select
“TPWS”, and then press .
Tire pressure warning
system
472
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
6 Press or to select
“Setting Unit”.
7 Press or to select the
desired unit and then press
.
■ Routine tire inflation pressure
checks
The tire pressure warning system
does not replace routine tire inflation
pressure checks. Make sure to
check tire inflation pressure as part
of your routine of daily vehicle
checks.
■ Tire inflation pressure
● It may take a few minutes to dis-
play the tire inflation pressure
after the power switch is turned to
ON. It may also take a few min-
utes to display the tire inflation
pressure after inflation pressure
has been adjusted.
● Tire inflation pressure changes
with temperature.
The displayed values may also be
different from the values mea-
sured using a tire pressure gauge.
■ Situations in which the tire
pressure warning system may
not operate properly
● In the following cases, the tire
pressure warning system may not
operate properly.
• If non-genuine Toyota wheels are
used.
• A tire has been replaced with a
tire that is not an OE (Original
Equipment) tire.
• A tire has been replaced with a
tire that is not of the specified size.
• Tire chains, etc. are equipped.
• An auxiliary-supported run-flat tire
is equipped.
• If a window tint that affects the
radio wave signals is installed.
• If there is a lot of snow or ice on
the vehicle, particularly around the
wheels or wheel housings.
• If the tire inflation pressure is
extremely higher than the speci-
fied level.
• If wheel without tire pressure
warning valves and transmitters
are used.
• If the ID code on the tire pressure
warning valves and transmitters is
not registered in the tire pressure
warning computer.
● Performance may be affected in
the following situations.
• Near a TV tower, electric power
plant, gas station, radio station,
large display, airport or other facil-
ity that generates strong radio
waves or electrical noise
• When carrying a portable radio,
cellular phone, cordless phone or
other wireless communication
device
If tire position information is not
correctly displayed due to the
radio wave conditions, the display
may be corrected by driving and
changing the radio wave condi-
tions.
● When the vehicle is parked, the
time taken for the warning to start
or go off could be extended.
● When tire inflation pressure
declines rapidly for example when
a tire has burst, the warning may
not function.
■ Warning performance of the tire
pressure warning system
The warning of the tire pressure
warning system will change in
accordance with the conditions
under which it was initialized. For
this reason, the system may give a
warning even if the tire pressure
does not reach a low enough level,
or if the pressure is higher than the
pressure that was adjusted to when
the system was initialized.
473
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
7
Maintenance and care
■ Certification for tire pressure warning system
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A. and Hawaii
For vehicles sold in Canada
When replacing tires or wheels,
tire pressure warning valves and
transmitters must also be
installed.
When new tire pressure warning
valves and transmitters are
installed, new ID codes must be
registered in the tire pressure
warning computer and the tire
pressure warning system must
Installing tire pressure
warning valves and trans-
mitters
474
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
be initialized. (P.476)
■ When replacing the tires and
wheels
If the ID code of the tire pressure
warning valve and transmitter is not
registered, the tire pressure warning
system will not work properly. After
driving for about 20 minutes, the tire
pressure warning light blinks for 1
minute and stays on to indicate a
system malfunction.
■ The tire pressure warning
system must be initialized
in the following circum-
stances:
When rotating the tires.
When changing the tire.
After registering the ID codes.
(P.476)
When changing between two
registered wheel sets.
When the tire pressure warning
system is initialized, the current
tire inflation pressure is set as
the benchmark pressure.
■ How to initialize the tire
pressure warning system
1 Park the vehicle in a safe
place and stop the hybrid
system for 20 minutes or
more.
Initialization cannot be performed
while the vehicle is moving.
2 Adjust the tire inflation pres-
sure to the specified cold tire
inflation pressure level.
(P.555)
Make sure to adjust the tire pres-
sure to the specified cold tire infla-
tion pressure level. The tire
pressure warning system will oper-
ate based on this pressure level.
3 Start the hybrid system.
4 Press or of the meter
control switches on the steer-
ing wheel and select .
NOTICE
■ Repairing or replacing tires,
wheels, tire pressure warn-
ing valves, transmitters and
tire valve caps
● When removing or fitting the
wheels, tires or the tire pressure
warning valves and transmit-
ters, contact your Toyota dealer
as the tire pressure warning
valves and transmitters may be
damaged if not handled cor-
rectly.
● Make sure to install the tire
valve caps. If the tire valve caps
are not installed, water could
enter the tire pressure warning
valves and the tire pressure
warning valves could be bound.
● When replacing tire valve caps,
do not use tire valve caps other
than those specified.
The cap may become stuck.
Initializing the tire pres-
sure warning system
475
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
7
Maintenance and care
5 Press or of the meter
control switches, select
“Vehicle Settings” and then
press and hold .
6 Press or of the meter
control switches, select
“TPWS” and then press .
7 Press or of the meter
control switches, select the
“Setting Pressure”. Then
press and hold .
“Set Pressure Accepted” will be dis-
played on the multi-information dis-
play and the tire pressure warning
light will blink 3 times.
When the message disappears, ini-
tialization is complete.
A message is displayed on the
multi-information display. Also, “--”
is displayed for inflation pressure of
each tire on the multi-information
display while the tire pressure
warning system determines the
position.
8 Drive straight (with occa-
sional left and right turns) at
approximately 25mph (40
km/h) or more for approxi-
mately 10 to 30 minutes.
When initialization is complete, the
inflation pressure of each tire will be
displayed on the multi-information
display.
Even if the vehicle is not driven at
approximately 25 mph (40 km/h) or
more, initialization can be com-
pleted by driving for a long time.
However, if initialization does not
complete after driving for 1 hour or
more, park the vehicle in a safe
place for approximately 20 minutes
and then drive the vehicle again.
■ When initializing
● Initialization is performed while
driving at a vehicle speed of
approximately 25 mph (40 km/h)
or more.
● Make sure to carry out initializa-
tion after adjusting the tire inflation
pressure. Also, make sure the
tires are cold before carrying out
initialization or tire inflation pres-
sure adjustment.
● The tire pressure warning system
can be initialized by yourself, but
depending on the driving condi-
tions and driving environment, ini-
tialization may take some time to
complete.
■ The initialization operation
● If you have accidentally turned the
power switch to OFF during initial-
ization, it is not necessary to
restart the initialization again as
initialization will restart automati-
cally when the power switch has
been turned to ON for the next
time.
● If you accidentally perform initial-
ization when initialization is not
necessary, adjust the tire inflation
pressure to the specified level
when the tires are cold, and con-
duct initialization again.
● While the position of each tire is
being determined and the inflation
pressures are not being displayed
on the multi-information display, if
the inflation pressure of a tire
drops, the tire pressure warning
light will come on.
■ If the tire pressure warning sys-
tem is not initialized properly
● In the following situations, initial-
ization may take longer than usual
to be completed or may not be
possible. Normally, initialization
completes within approximately
30 minutes.
• Vehicle is not driven at approxi-
mately 25 mph (40 km/h) or more
476
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
• Vehicle is driven on unpaved
roads
• Vehicle is driven near other vehi-
cles and system cannot recog-
nize tire pressure warning valve
and transmitters of your vehicle
over those of other vehicles.
• If the vehicle is driven in heavy
traffic or another situation where
other vehicles are driven close by,
it may take time for the system to
recognize the tire pressure warn-
ing valve and transmitters of your
vehicle over those of other vehi-
cles.
● If initialization does not complete
after driving for 1 hour or more,
park the vehicle in a safe place for
approximately 20 minutes and
then drive the vehicle again.
● If the vehicle is reversed during
initialization, the data up to that
point is reset, so perform the ini-
tialization procedure again from
the beginning.
● In the following situations, initial-
ization will not be started or was
not completed properly and the
system will not operate properly.
Perform the initialization proce-
dure again.
• If, when attempting to start initial-
ization, the tire pressure warning
light does not blink 3 times.
• If, when the vehicle has been
driven for about 20 minutes after
performing initialization, the tire
pressure warning light blinks for
approximately 1 minute and then
illuminates.
If initialization cannot be completed
after performing the above proce-
dure, contact your Toyota dealer.
Every tire pressure warning
valve and transmitter has a
unique ID code. When replacing
a tire pressure warning valve
and transmitter, it is necessary
to register the ID code.
When registering the ID codes,
perform the following procedure.
1 Park the vehicle in a safe
place, wait for approximately
20 minutes, and then start
the hybrid system.
2 Press or of the meter
control switches on the steer-
ing wheel and select .
3 Press or of the meter
control switches and select
WARNING
■ When initializing the tire pres-
sure warning system
Do not initialize tire inflation pres-
sure without first adjusting the tire
inflation pressure to the specified
level. Otherwise, the tire pressure
warning light may not come on
even if the tire inflation pressure is
low, or it may come on when the
tire inflation pressure is actually
normal.
Registering ID codes
477
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
7
Maintenance and care
“Vehicle Settings”, and then
press and hold .
4 Press or of the meter
control switches and select
“TPWS”, and then press .
5 Press or of the meter
control switches and select
“Identify Wheel”. Then press
and hold until the tire
pressure warning light starts
slowly blinking 3 times.
The change wheel set mode is acti-
vated and registration is started.
Then a message will be displayed
on the multi-information display.
When registration is being per-
formed, the tire pressure warning
light will blink for approximately 1
minute then illuminate and “--” will
be displayed for the inflation pres-
sure of each tire on the multi-infor-
mation display.
6 Drive straight (with occa-
sional left and right turns) at
approximately 25mph (40
km/h) or more for approxi-
mately 10 to 30 minutes.
When registration is completed, the
tire pressure warning light will go off
and the inflation pressure of each
tire will be displayed on the multi-
information display.
Even if the vehicle is not driven at
approximately 25 mph (40 km/h) or
more, registration can be com-
pleted by driving for a long time.
However, if registration does not
complete after driving for 1 hour or
more, perform the procedure again
from the beginning.
7 Initialize the tire pressure
warning system. (P.474)
■ When registering ID codes
● ID code registration is performed
while driving at a vehicle speed of
approximately 25 mph (40 km/h)
or more.
● Before performing ID code regis-
tration, make sure that no wheels
with tire pressure warning valve
and transmitters installed are near
the vehicle.
● Make sure to initialize the tire
pressure warning system after
registering the ID codes. If the
system is initialized before regis-
tering the ID codes, the initialized
values will be invalid.
● ID codes can be registered by
yourself, but depending on the
driving conditions and driving
environment, registration may
take some time to complete.
● As the tires will be warm when
registration is completed, make
sure to allow the tires to cool
before performing initialization.
■ Canceling ID code registration
● To cancel ID code registration
after it has been started, select
“Identify Wheel” on the multi-infor-
mation display and press and hold
again.
● If ID code registration has been
canceled, the tire pressure warn-
ing light will blink for approxi-
mately 1 minute when the power
switch is turned to ON and then
illuminate. The tire pressure warn-
478
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
ing system will be operational
when the tire pressure warning
light turns off.
● If the warning light does not turn
off even after several minutes
have elapsed, ID code registration
may not have been canceled cor-
rectly. To cancel registration, per-
form the ID code registration start
procedure again and then turn the
power switch off before driving.
■ If ID codes are not registered
properly
● In the following situations, ID code
registration may take longer than
usual to be completed or may not
be possible. Normally, registra-
tion completes within approxi-
mately 30 minutes.
If ID code registration is not com-
plete after driving for approxi-
mately 30 minutes, continue
driving for a while.
• Vehicle is not parked for approxi-
mately 20 minutes or more before
driving
• Vehicle is not driven at approxi-
mately 25 mph (40 km/h) or more
• Vehicle is driven on unpaved
roads
• Vehicle is driven near other vehi-
cles and system cannot recog-
nize tire pressure warning valve
and transmitters of your vehicle
over those of other vehicles
• Wheel with tire pressure warning
valve and transmitter installed is
inside or near the vehicle
If registration does not complete
after driving for 1 hour or more, per-
form the ID code registration proce-
dure again from the beginning.
● If the vehicle is reversed during
registration, the data up to that
point is reset, so perform the reg-
istration procedure again from the
beginning.
● In the following situations, ID code
registration will not be started or
was not completed properly and
the system will not operate prop-
erly. Perform the ID code registra-
tion procedure again.
• If, when attempting to start ID
code registration, the tire pressure
warning light does not blink slowly
3 times.
• If, when the vehicle has been
driven for about 20 minutes after
performing ID code registration,
the tire pressure warning light
blinks for approximately 1 minute
and then illuminates.
● If ID code registration cannot be
completed after performing the
above procedure, contact your
Toyota dealer.
Your vehicle is equipped with
tire pressure warning system
with the function to have ID
codes registered for a second
wheel set, for example a winter
set. You can register a second
wheel set by yourself or your
Toyota dealer.
After registration of a second
wheel set, either of these two
wheel sets can be selected for
usage with the tire pressure
warning system.
■ Operating conditions for
the function
This function will perform the
change of wheel set only if a
second wheel set has been
registered. If no second wheel
set has been registered, no
change will be made when
selecting this function in the
menu.
Only a change between both
Selecting wheel set
479
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
7
Maintenance and care
registered wheel set is possi-
ble, mixing between these
wheel sets is not supported.
■ How to change between
wheel sets
1 Have the vehicle fitted with
the preferred wheel set.
2 Press or of the meter
control switches on the steer-
ing wheel and select .
3 Press or of the meter
control switches and select
“Vehicle Settings”, and then
press and hold .
4 Press or of the meter
control switches and select
“TPWS”, and then press .
5 Press or of the meter
control switches and select
“Identify Wheel”. Then press
and hold until the tire
pressure warning light starts
slowly blinking 3 times.
Afterward, the tire pressure
warning light turns on after
flashing for 1 minute.
After 2 minutes, registration of a
second wheel set is being per-
formed. The tire pressure warn-
ing light will turn off and “--” will
be displayed for the inflation
pressure of each tire on the
multi-information display.
6 Initialize the tire pressure
warning system. (P.474)
If the tire inflation pressure settings
for the installed tires change, initial-
ization operations are required, but
if the tire inflation pressure settings
are the same, initialization is not
required.
7 Drive straight (with occa-
sional left and right turns) at
approximately 25 mph (40
km/h) or more for approxi-
mately 10 to 30 minutes.
Registration of a second wheel set
is complete when the tire pressure
warning light turns off and the infla-
tion pressure of each tire is dis-
played on the multi-information
display.
480
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
The recommended cold tire
inflation pressure and tire size
are displayed on the tire and
loading information label.
(P.555)
Tire valve
Tire pressure gauge
1 Remove the tire valve cap.
2 Press the tip of the tire pres-
sure gauge onto the tire
valve.
3 Read the pressure using the
gauge gradations.
4 If the tire inflation pressure is
not at the recommended
level, adjust the pressure. If
you add too much air, press
the center of the valve to
deflate.
5 After completing the tire infla-
tion pressure measurement
and adjustment, apply soapy
water to the valve and check
for leakage.
6 Put the tire valve cap back
on.
■ Tire inflation pressure check
interval
You should check tire inflation pres-
sure every two weeks, or at least
once a month.
Tire inflation pressure
Make sure to maintain the
proper tire inflation pres-
sure. Tire inflation pressure
should be checked at least
once per month. However,
Toyota recommends that
tire inflation pressure be
checked once every two
weeks. (P.555)
Checking the specified
tire inflation pressure
Inspection and adjust-
ment procedure
A
B
481
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
7
Maintenance and care
Do not forget to check the spare.
■ Effects of incorrect tire inflation
pressure
Driving with incorrect tire inflation
pressure may result in the following:
● Reduced fuel economy
● Reduced driving comfort and poor
handling
● Reduced tire life due to wear
● Reduced safety
● Damage to the drive train
If a tire needs frequent inflating,
have it checked by your Toyota
dealer.
■ Instructions for checking tire
inflation pressure
When checking tire inflation pres-
sure, observe the following:
● Check only when the tires are
cold.
If your vehicle has been parked
for at least 3 hours or has not
been driven for more than 1 mile
or 1.5 km, you will get an accurate
cold tire inflation pressure reading.
● Always use a tire pressure gauge.
It is difficult to judge if a tire is
properly inflated based only on its
appearance.
● It is normal for the tire inflation
pressure to be higher after driving
as heat is generated in the tire. Do
not reduce tire inflation pressure
after driving.
● Never exceed the vehicle capacity
weight. Passengers and luggage
weight should be placed so that
the vehicle is balanced.
WARNING
■ Proper inflation is critical to
save tire performance
Keep your tires properly inflated.
If the tires are not properly
inflated, the following conditions
may occur which could lead to an
accident resulting in death or seri-
ous injury:
● Excessive wear
● Uneven wear
● Poor handling
● Possibility of blowouts resulting
from overheated tires
● Air leaking from between tire
and wheel
● Wheel deformation and/or tire
damage
● Greater possibility of tire dam-
age while driving (due to road
hazards, expansion joints,
sharp edges in the road, etc.)
NOTICE
■ When inspecting and adjust-
ing tire inflation pressure
Be sure to put the tire valve caps
back on.
If a valve cap is not installed, dirt
or moisture may get into the valve
and cause an air leak, resulting in
decreased tire inflation pressure.
482
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
When replacing wheels, care
should be taken to ensure that
they are equivalent to those
removed in load capacity, diam-
eter, rim width and inset
*
.
Replacement wheels are avail-
able at your Toyota dealer.
*
: Conventionally referred to as off-
set.
Toyota does not recommend
using the following:
Wheels of different sizes or
types
Used wheels
Bent wheels that have been
straightened
■ When replacing wheels
The wheels of your vehicle are
equipped with tire pressure warning
valves and transmitters that allow
the tire pressure warning system to
provide advance warning in the
event of a loss in tire inflation pres-
sure. Whenever wheels are
replaced, tire pressure warning
valves and transmitters must be
installed. (P.471, 483)
Wheels
If a wheel is bent, cracked or
heavily corroded, it should
be replaced. Otherwise, the
tire may separate from the
wheel or cause a loss of
handling control.
Wheel selection
WARNING
■ When replacing wheels
● Do not use wheels that are a dif-
ferent size from those recom-
mended in the Owner’s Manual,
as this may result in a loss of
handling control.
● Never use an inner tube in a
leaking wheel which is designed
for a tubeless tire. Doing so may
result in an accident, causing
death or serious injury.
■ When installing the wheel
nuts
● Be sure to install the wheel nuts
with the tapered ends facing
inward. (P.531) Installing the
nuts with the tapered ends fac-
ing outward can cause the
wheel to break and eventually
cause the wheel to come off
while driving, which could lead
to an accident resulting in death
or serious injury.
● Never use oil or grease on the
wheel bolts or wheel nuts. Oil
and grease may cause the
wheel nuts to be excessively
tightened, leading to bolt or disc
wheel damage. In addition, the
oil or grease can cause the
wheel nuts to loosen and the
wheel may fall off, causing an
accident and resulting in death
or serious injury. Remove any
oil or grease from the wheel
bolts or wheel nuts.
■ Use of defective wheels pro-
hibited
Do not use cracked or deformed
wheels.
Doing so could cause the tire to
leak air during driving, possibly
causing an accident.
483
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
7
Maintenance and care
Use only Toyota wheel nuts
and wrenches designed for
use with your aluminum
wheels.
When rotating, repairing or
changing your tires, check
that the wheel nuts are still
tight after driving 1000 miles
(1600 km).
Be careful not to damage the
aluminum wheels when using
tire chains.
Use only Toyota genuine bal-
ance weights or equivalent
and a plastic or rubber ham-
mer when balancing your
wheels.
1 Turn the power switch off.
Confirm that the charging connec-
tor is not connected. Also, do not
use the Remote Air Conditioning
System during the procedure.
2 Open the front passenger’s
door.
By keeping the door open, unex-
pected operation of the Remote Air
Conditioning System can be pre-
vent. (P.405)
3 Open the glove box and slide
off the damper.
4 Push in each side of the
glove box to disconnect the
claws, and then slowly and
NOTICE
■ Replacing tire pressure warn-
ing valves and transmitters
● Because tire repair or replace-
ment may affect the tire pres-
sure warning valves and
transmitters, make sure to have
tires serviced by your Toyota
dealer or other qualified service
shop. In addition, make sure to
purchase your tire pressure
warning valves and transmit-
ters at your Toyota dealer.
● Ensure that only genuine
Toyota wheels are used on your
vehicle.
Tire pressure warning valves
and transmitters may not work
properly with non-genuine
wheels.
Aluminum wheel precau-
tions
Air conditioning filter
The air conditioning filter
must be changed regularly
to maintain air conditioning
efficiency.
Removal method
484
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
fully open the glove box while
supporting it.
5 With the glove box fully open,
slightly lift up the glove box
and pull toward the seat to
detach the bottom of the
glove box.
Do not use excessive force if the
glove box does not detach when
lightly pulled. Instead, pull toward
the seat while slightly adjusting the
height of the glove box.
6 Unlock the filter cover ( ),
pull the filter cover out of the
claws ( ), and remove the
filter cover.
7 Remove the filter case.
8 Remove the air conditioning
filter from the filter case and
replace it with a new one.
The “ UP” marks shown on the
filter should be pointing up.
9 When installing, reverse the
steps listed.
■ Checking interval
Inspect and replace the air condi-
A
B
485
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
7
Maintenance and care
tioning filter according to the mainte-
nance schedule. In dusty areas or
areas with heavy traffic flow, early
replacement may be required. (For
scheduled maintenance information,
please refer to the “Owner’s Manual
Supplement” or “Scheduled Mainte-
nance”.)
■ If air flow from the vents
decreases dramatically
The filter may be clogged. Check
the filter and replace if necessary.
WARNING
■ When replacing the air condi-
tioning filter
Observe the following precau-
tions. Failure to do so may result
in the air conditioning system
operating during the procedure,
possibly resulting in injury.
● Check that the charging con-
nector is not connected
The air conditioning may operate
due to the “Climate Prep”
(P.131) setting.
● Do not use the Remote Air Con-
ditioning System
NOTICE
■ When using the air condition-
ing system
Make sure that a filter is always
installed. Using the air condition-
ing system without a filter may
cause damage to the system.
■ When removing the glove box
Always follow the specified proce-
dure to remove the glove box
(P.483). If the glove box is
removed without following the
specified procedure, the hinge of
the glove box may become dam-
aged.
■ To prevent damage to the fil-
ter cover
When moving the filter cover in
the direction of arrow to release
the fitting, pay attention not to
apply excessive force to the
claws. Otherwise, the claws may
be damaged.
486
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Remove the dust from the air
intake vent with a vacuum
cleaner, etc.
Make sure to only use a vacuum to
suck out dust and clogs. Attempting
to blow out dust and clogs using an
airgun, etc. may push it into the air
intake vent. (P.488)
If dust and clogs cannot be com-
pletely removed with the air
intake vent cover installed,
remove the cover and clean the
filter.
1 Turn the power switch off.
2 Using a Phillips screwdriver,
remove the clip.
3 Remove the air intake vent
cover.
Pull the cover as shown in the illus-
tration to disengage the 8 claws,
starting from the claw in the upper
right corner and pull the cover
toward the front of the vehicle to
remove it.
4 Remove the air intake vent
filter.
Disengage the 4 center claws from
Cleaning the DC/DC
Converter air intake
vent and filter
To prevent the 12-volt bat-
tery from discharge, visu-
ally inspect the DC/DC
Converter air intake vent
periodically for dust and
clogs. If it is dusty or
clogged or if “Maintenance
required for DCDC con-
verter cooling parts See
Owner’s Manual” is shown
on the multi-information
display, clean the air intake
vent using the following
procedures:
Cleaning the air intake
vent
If dust and clogs cannot
be completely removed
487
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
7
Maintenance and care
the filter.
Disengage the claws in the order of
and to remove the filter from
the cover.
5 Remove the dust and clogs
from the filter using a vacuum
cleaner, etc.
Make sure to also remove the dust
and clogs from the inside of the air
intake vent cover.
6 Reinstall the filter to the
cover.
Engage the claws in the order of
and .
Engage the 4 center claws to install
the filter.
Make sure that the filter is not
crooked or deformed when install-
ing it.
7 Install the air intake vent
cover.
Insert the tab of the cover as shown
in the illustration and push the
cover to engage the 8 claws.
A
B
B
A
488
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
8 Install the clip.
■ Cleaning the air intake vent
● Dust in the air intake vent may
interfere with the cooling of the
DC/DC converter. If the cooling
performance/capacity of the
DC/DC converter becomes lim-
ited, the 12-volt battery may dis-
charge. Inspect and clean the air
intake vent periodically.
● Improper handling of the air intake
vent cover and filter may result in
damage to them. If you have any
concerns about cleaning the filter,
contact your Toyota dealer.
■ If “Maintenance required for
DCDC converter cooling parts
See Owner’s Manual” is shown
on the multi-information display
● If this warning message is shown
on the multi-information display,
remove the air intake vent cover
and clean the filter. (P.486)
● After cleaning the air intake vent,
start the hybrid system and check
that the warning message is no
longer shown.
It may take approximately 20 min-
utes after the hybrid system is
started until the warning message
disappears. If the warning mes-
sage does not disappear, have
the vehicle inspected by your
Toyota dealer.
WARNING
■ When cleaning the air intake
vent
● Do not use water or other liq-
uids to clean the air intake vent.
If water is applied to the DC/DC
converter or other components,
a malfunction or fire may occur.
● Before cleaning the air intake
vent, make sure to turn the
power switch off to stop the
hybrid system.
NOTICE
■ When cleaning the air intake
vent
When cleaning the air intake vent,
make sure to only use a vacuum
to suck out dust and clogs. If a
compressed air blow gun, etc. is
used to blow out dust and clogs,
the dust or clogs may be pushed
into the air intake vent, which may
affect the performance of the
DC/DC converter and cause a
malfunction.
489
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
7
Maintenance and care
■ Windshield wiper blade
removal and installation
1 While holding the hook por-
tion of the wiper arm, first
lift up the driver side, and
then lift up the passenger
side.
When returning the wiper arms to
their original positions, first lower
the passenger side, and then lower
the driver side.
2 Lift the stopper using a flat-
head screwdriver as shown
in the illustration.
To prevent damage to the wiper
arm, protect the tip of the screw-
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the
vehicle
● Do not allow water or foreign
matter to enter the air intake
vent when the cover is
removed.
● Carefully handle the removed
filter so that it will not be dam-
aged. If the filter is damaged,
have it replaced with a new filter
by your Toyota dealer.
● Make sure to reinstall the filter
and cover to their original posi-
tions after cleaning.
● Do not install anything to the air
intake vent other than the exclu-
sive filter for this vehicle or use
the vehicle without the filter
installed.
■ If “Maintenance required for
DCDC converter cooling parts
See Owner’s Manual” is
shown on the multi-informa-
tion display
If the vehicle is continuously
driven with the warning message
(indicating that the cooling perfor-
mance/capacity of the DC/DC
converter may become limited)
displayed, the DC/DC converter
may malfunction. If the warning
message is displayed, clean the
air intake vent immediately.
Wiper insert replace-
ment
When replacing the wiper
insert, perform the following
procedure to operate each
wiper.
Windshield wipers
A
490
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
driver with a rag.
3 Slide the wiper blade to
remove it from the wiper arm.
When installing, reverse the steps
listed.
■ Wiper insert replacement
1 Pull the wiper insert to
remove the claw of the wiper
blade from the stopper, and
pull out the wiper insert.
Stopper
Claw
2 Remove the 2 metal plates
from the wiper insert pulled
out, and install the plates to a
new wiper insert.
Make sure that the cutout location
and warp direction of the metal
blades are same as the original.
3 Install the wiper insert to the
wiper blade from the side
without the stopper.
4 Secure the stopper of the
wiper insert with the claw of
the wiper blade.
1 Lift up the rear window wiper
arm head cap.
2 Move the wiper blade until a
click sound can be heard and
Rear window wiper
A
B
491
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
7
Maintenance and care
the claw detaches, and then
remove the wiper blade from
the wiper arm.
3 Pull the wiper insert out past
the stopper on the wiper
blade, and then continue to
pull until it is completely
removed.
Lightly grasp between the claws of
the wiper blade to allow the wiper
insert to lift up, making it easier to
remove.
4 Remove the 2 metal plates
from the old wiper insert and
install them to the replace-
ment wiper insert.
5 Insert the wiper insert starting
from the claw at the center of
the wiper blade. Pass the
wiper insert through the 3
claws so that it sticks out
from the stopper, and then
pass the wiper insert through
the final remaining claw.
Applying a small amount of washer
fluid to the wiper insert can make it
easier to insert the claws into the
grooves.
6 Check that the wiper blade
claws are fitted in the
grooves of the wiper insert.
If the wiper blade claws are not fit-
ted in the grooves of the wiper
insert, grasp the wiper insert and
slide it back and forth multiple times
to insert the claws into the grooves.
Lightly lift up the center of the wiper
insert to make the rubber easier to
492
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
slide.
7 When installing a wiper
blade, reverse the procedure
in step 1.
After installing the wiper blade,
check that the connection is locked.
■ Wiper blade and wiper insert
handling
Improper handling may result in
damage to the wiper blades or wiper
insert. If you have any concerns
about replacing the wiper blades or
wiper insert yourself, contact your
Toyota dealer.
NOTICE
■ When lifting the windshield
wipers
● When raising the wiper arms off
the windshield, lift up the driver
side first, and then lift up pas-
senger side. When returning the
wipers to their original position,
return the passenger side first.
● Do not lift a windshield wiper by
the wiper blade. Otherwise, the
wiper blade may be deformed.
● Do not operate the wiper lever
when the windshield wipers are
lifted. Otherwise, the wind-
shield wipers may contact the
hood, possibly resulting in dam-
age to the windshield wipers
and/or hood.
■ To prevent damage
● Be careful not to damage the
claws when replacing the wiper
insert.
● After the wiper blade is removed
from the wiper arm, place a
cloth, etc., between the rear
window and wiper arm to pre-
vent damage to the rear win-
dow.
● Be sure not to pull excessively
on the wiper insert or deform its
metal plates.
493
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
7
Maintenance and care
■ If the key battery is depleted
The following symptoms may occur:
● The smart key system and wire-
less remote control will not func-
tion properly.
● The operational range will be
reduced.
Prepare the following before
replacing the battery:
Flathead screwdriver
Small flathead screwdriver
Lithium battery CR2450
■ Use a CR2450 lithium battery
● Batteries can be purchased at
your Toyota dealer, local electrical
appliance shops or camera stores.
● Replace only with the same or
equivalent type recommended by
the manufacturer.
● Dispose of used batteries accord-
ing to the local laws.
1 Release the lock and remove
the mechanical key.
2 Remove the key cover.
Use a screwdriver of an appropriate
size. Forcedly prying may cause
the cover damaged.
To prevent damage to the key,
cover the tip of the flathead screw-
driver with a rag.
3 Remove the depleted battery
using a small flathead screw-
driver.
When removing the cover, the elec-
tronic key module may stick to the
cover and the battery may not be
visible. In this case, remove the
electronic key module in order to
remove the battery.
Insert a new battery with the “+” ter-
Electronic key battery
Replace the battery with a
new one if it is depleted.
Items to prepare
Replacing the battery
494
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
minal facing up.
4 When installing, reverse the
steps listed.
WARNING
■ Battery precautions
Observe the following precau-
tions.
Failure to do so may result in
death or serious injury.
● Do not swallow the battery.
Doing so may cause chemical
burns.
● A coin battery or button battery
is used in the electronic key. If a
battery is swallowed, it may
cause severe chemical burns in
as little as 2 hours and may
result in death or serious injury.
● Keep away new and removed
batteries from children.
● If the cover cannot be firmly
closed, stop using the electronic
key and stow the key in the
place where children cannot
reach, and then contact your
Toyota dealer.
● If you accidentally swallow a
battery or put a battery into a
part of your body, get emer-
gency medical attention imme-
diately.
■ To prevent battery explosion
or leakage of flammable liq-
uid or gas
● Replace the battery with a new
battery of the same type. If a
wrong type of battery is used, it
may explode.
● Do not expose batteries to
extremely low pressure due to
high altitude or extremely high
temperatures.
● Do not burn, break or cut a bat-
tery.
NOTICE
■ When replacing the battery
Use a flathead screwdriver of
appropriate size. Applying exces-
sive force may deform or damage
the cover.
■ For normal operation after
replacing the battery
Observe the following precautions
to prevent accidents:
● Always work with dry hands.
Moisture may cause the battery
to rust.
● Do not touch or move any other
component inside the remote
control.
● Do not bend either of the battery
terminals.
495
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
7
Maintenance and care
1 Turn the power switch off.
Confirm that the charging connec-
tor is not connected. Also, do not
use the Remote Air Conditioning
System during the procedure.
2 Open the fuse box cover.
Engine compartment: Type A
fuse box
Push claw and to com-
pletely release the lock, and then lift
up the cover.
Engine compartment: Type B
fuse box
Push claw and to com-
pletely release the lock, and then lift
up the cover.
Left side instrument panel
Remove the lid.
Right side luggage compart-
ment
Open the deck board. (P.417)
Push claw and to com-
pletely release the lock, and then lift
up the cover.
3 Remove the fuse.
Only type A fuse can be removed
Checking and replac-
ing fuses
If any of the electrical com-
ponents do not operate, a
fuse may have blown. If this
happens, check and replace
the fuses as necessary.
Checking and replacing
fuses
A B
A B
A
B
496
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
using the pullout tool.
4 Check if the fuse is blown.
Replace the blown fuse with a new
fuse of an appropriate amperage
rating. The amperage rating can be
found on the fuse box lid.
Type A
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Type B
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Type C
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
■ After a fuse is replaced
● When installing the lid, make sure
that the tab is installed securely.
● If the lights do not turn on even
after the fuse has been replaced,
a bulb may need replacement.
(P.497)
● If the replaced fuse blows again,
have the vehicle inspected by
your Toyota dealer.
■ If there is an overload in a cir-
cuit
The fuses are designed to blow,
protecting the wiring harness from
damage.
■ When replacing an electronic
component, such as a lights,
etc.
Toyota recommends that you use
genuine Toyota products designed
for this vehicle. Because certain
bulbs are connected to circuits
designed to prevent overload, non-
genuine parts or parts not designed
for this vehicle may be unusable.
A
B
A
B
A
B
497
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
7
Maintenance and care
Check the wattage of the light
bulb to be replaced. (P.556)
Front turn signal lights
Front side marker lights
WARNING
■ To prevent system break-
downs and vehicle fire
Observe the following precau-
tions.
Failure to do so may cause dam-
age to the vehicle, and possibly a
fire or injury.
● Never use a fuse of a higher
amperage rating than that indi-
cated, or use any other object in
place of a fuse.
● Always use a genuine Toyota
fuse or equivalent.
Never replace a fuse with a
wire, even as a temporary fix.
● Do not modify the fuses or fuse
boxes.
NOTICE
■ Before replacing fuses
Have the cause of electrical over-
load determined and repaired by
your Toyota dealer as soon as
possible.
■ To prevent damage to the
engine compartment fuse box
cover
When opening the fuse box, com-
pletely release the claw locks
before lifting up the cover. Other-
wise, the claws may be damaged.
Light bulbs
You may replace the follow-
ing bulbs by yourself. The
difficulty level of replace-
ment varies depending on
the bulb. If necessary bulb
replacement seems difficult
to perform, contact your
Toyota dealer.
For more information about
replacing other light bulbs,
contact your Toyota dealer.
Preparing for light bulb
replacement
Bulb location
A
B
498
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Rear
Rear turn signal lights
Back-up lights
■ Lights that need to be
replaced by your Toyota
dealer
Headlights
Daytime running lights and
parking lights
LED accessory lights (if
equipped)
Side turn signal lights
Tail lights
Stop lights
Rear side marker lights
High mounted stoplight
License plate lights
Outer foot lights (if equipped)
■ LED lights
The lights other than the following
lights each consist of a number of
LEDs. If any of the LEDs burn out,
take your vehicle to your Toyota
dealer to have the light replaced.
● Front turn signal lights
● Front side marker lights
● Rear turn signal lights
● Back-up lights
■ Condensation build-up on the
inside of the lens
Temporary condensation build-up
on the inside of the light lens does
not indicate a malfunction. Contact
your Toyota dealer for more infor-
mation in the following situations:
● Large drops of water have built up
on the inside of the lens.
● Water has built up inside the light.
■ When replacing an electronic
component, such as a lights,
etc.
P.496
■ Front turn signal lights
1 Turn the bulb base counter-
clockwise.
2 Remove the light bulb.
3 Install a new light bulb then
install the bulb base to the
A
B
Replacing light bulb
499
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
7
Maintenance and care
light unit by inserting it and
turning the bulb base clock-
wise.
■ Front side marker lights
1 Turn the bulb base counter-
clockwise.
2 Remove the light bulb.
3 Install a new light bulb then
install the bulb base to the
light unit by inserting it and
turning the bulb base clock-
wise.
■ Rear turn signal lights
1 Open the back door and
remove the cover.
2 Remove the screws and
remove the unit.
Remove the lamp assembly by pull-
ing it directly backward from the
rear of the vehicle.
500
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
3 Turn the bulb base counter-
clockwise.
4 Remove the light bulb.
5 Install a new light bulb then
install the bulb base to the
light unit by inserting it and
turning the bulb base clock-
wise.
6 Align the grooves on the light
unit with the claws, and insert
the light unit straight so that
the pin on the light unit fit into
the hole.
Confirm that the light unit is com-
pletely secured.
7 Reinstall the screws.
8 Reinstall the cover.
■ Back-up lights
1 Open the back door and
remove the cover.
To prevent damage to the cover,
protect the tip of the screwdriver
501
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
7
Maintenance and care
with a rag.
2 Turn the bulb base counter-
clockwise.
Remove the cord from the clip
before turning the bulb base.
3 Remove the light bulb.
4 Install a new light bulb.
5 Install the bulb base to the
light unit by inserting it and
turning the bulb base clock-
wise.
Secure the cord with the clip back
again after installing the bulb base.
6 Reinstall the cover.
502
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
WARNING
■ Replacing light bulb
● Turn off the light. Do not attempt
to replace the bulb immediately
after turning off the light.
The bulb become very hot and
may cause burns.
● Do not touch the glass portion
of the light bulb with bare
hands. When it is unavoidable
to hold the glass portion, use
and hold with a clean dry cloth
to avoid getting moisture and
oils on the bulb.
Also, if the bulb is scratched or
dropped, it may blow out or
crack.
● Fully install light bulb and any
parts used to secure it. Failure
to do so may result in heat dam-
age, fire, or water entering the
light unit. This may damage the
light or cause condensation to
build up on the lens.
● Do not attempt to repair or dis-
assemble light bulbs, connec-
tors, electric circuits or
component parts.
Doing so may result in death or
serious injury due to electric
shock.
■ To prevent damage or fire
● Make sure bulb is fully seated
and locked.
● Check the wattage of the bulb
before installing to prevent heat
damage.
503
8
8
When trouble arises
When trouble arises
8-1. Essential information
Emergency flashers .... 504
If your vehicle has to be
stopped in an emergency
.................................. 505
If the vehicle is trapped in
rising water................ 506
8-2. Steps to take in an emer-
gency
If your vehicle needs to be
towed......................... 507
If you think something is
wrong ........................ 509
If a warning light turns on or
a warning buzzer sounds
.................................. 511
If a warning message is dis-
played........................ 523
If you have a flat tire.... 527
If the hybrid system will not
start ........................... 534
If you lose your keys ... 536
If the fuel filler door cannot
be opened ................. 536
If the electronic key does
not operate properly.. 537
If the 12-volt battery is dis-
charged ..................... 539
If your vehicle overheats
.................................. 544
If the vehicle becomes stuck
.................................. 548
504
8-1. Essential information
8-1.Essential i nformation
Press the switch.
All the turn signal lights will flash.
To turn them off, press the switch
once again.
■ Emergency flashers
● If the emergency flashers are
used for a long time while the
hybrid system is not operating
(while the “READY” indicator is
not illuminated), the 12-volt bat-
tery may discharge.
● If any of the SRS airbags deploy
(inflate) or in the event of a strong
rear impact, the emergency flash-
ers will turn on automatically.
The emergency flashers will turn
off automatically after operating
for approximately 20 minutes. To
manually turn the emergency
flashers off, press the switch
twice. (The emergency flashers
may not turn on automatically
depending on the force of the
impact and conditions of the colli-
sion.)
Emergency flashers
The emergency flashers are
used to warn other drivers
when the vehicle has to be
stopped in the road due to a
breakdown, etc.
Operating instructions
505
8-1. Essential information
8
When trouble arises
1 Steadily step on the brake
pedal with both feet and
firmly depress it.
Do not pump the brake pedal
repeatedly as this will increase the
effort required to slow the vehicle.
2 Shift the shift lever to N.
If the shift lever is shifted to N
3 After slowing down, stop the
vehicle in a safe place by the
road.
4 Stop the hybrid system.
If the shift lever cannot be
shifted to N
3 Keep depressing the brake
pedal with both feet to reduce
vehicle speed as much as
possible.
4 Perform the following proce-
dure to stop the hybrid sys-
tem:
Press and hold the power switch for
2 consecutive seconds or more, or
press it briefly 3 times or more in
succession.
5 Stop the vehicle in a safe
place by the road.
■ If emergency stopped
The functions of the air conditioning,
etc. may be partially limited in order
to reduce the power consumption of
the 12-volt battery.
If your vehicle has to
be stopped in an emer-
gency
Only in an emergency, such
as if it becomes impossible
to stop the vehicle in the
normal way, stop the vehi-
cle using the following pro-
cedure:
Stopping the vehicle
WARNING
■ If the hybrid system has to be
turned off while driving
Turning the hybrid system off
while driving will not cause a loss
of steering or braking control.
However, power assist for the
steering wheel may be lost mak-
ing it difficult to steer smoothly
before stopping the vehicle
depending on the remaining
charge in the 12-volt battery or
usage conditions. Decelerate as
much as possible before turning
off the hybrid system.
506
8-1. Essential information
Remove the seat belt first.
If the door can be opened,
open the door and exit the
vehicle.
If the door can not be opened,
open the window using the
power window switch and exit
the vehicle through the win-
dow.
If the window can not be
opened using the power win-
dow switch, remain calm, wait
until the water level inside the
vehicle rises to the point that
the water pressure inside of
the vehicle equals the water
pressure outside of the vehi-
cle, and then open the door
and exit the vehicle.
If the vehicle is
trapped in rising water
In the event the vehicle is
submerged in water, remain
calm and perform the fol-
lowing.
WARNING
■ Using an emergency hammer
*
for emergency escape
The rear side windows and rear
window of this vehicle can be
shattered by an emergency ham-
mer
*
used for emergency escape,
however, since the windshield
and front side windows are lami-
nated glass they can not be shat-
tered by an emergency hammer
*
.
*
: Contact your Toyota dealer, or
aftermarket accessory manu-
facturer for further information
about an emergency hammer.
■ Escaping the vehicle from the
window
There are cases where escaping
the vehicle from the window is not
possible due to seating position,
passenger body type, etc.
When using an emergency ham-
mer, consider your seat location
and the size of the window open-
ing to ensure that the opening is
accessible and large enough to
escape.
507
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
8
When trouble arises
8-2.Steps to take in an emergency
If your vehicle needs
to be towed
If towing is necessary, we
recommend having your
vehicle towed by your
Toyota dealer or commer-
cial towing service, using a
wheel-lift type truck or flat-
bed truck.
Use a safety chain system
for all towing, and abide by
all state/provincial and local
laws.
If towing your vehicle with a
wheel-lift type truck, use a
towing dolly. (P.507, 508)
WARNING
Observe the following precau-
tions. Failure to do so may result
in death or serious injury.
■ When towing the vehicle
Be sure to transport the vehicle
with all four wheels raised off the
ground. If the vehicle is towed
with the tires contacting the
ground, the drivetrain or related
parts may be damaged, the vehi-
cle may fly off the truck, or elec-
tricity generated by the operation
of the motor may cause a fire to
occur depending on the nature of
the damage or malfunction.
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the
vehicle when towing using a
wheel-lift type truck
● Do not tow the vehicle from the
rear when the power switch is
off. The steering lock mecha-
nism is not strong enough to
hold the front wheels straight.
● When raising the vehicle,
ensure adequate ground clear-
ance for towing at the opposite
end of the raised vehicle. With-
out adequate clearance, the
vehicle could be damaged while
being towed.
508
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
The following may indicate a
problem with your transmission.
Contact your Toyota dealer or
commercial towing service
before towing.
The hybrid system warning
message is shown on the
multi-information display and
the vehicle does not move.
The vehicle makes an abnor-
mal sound.
From the front
Use a towing dolly under the
rear wheels.
From the rear
Use a towing dolly under the
front wheels.
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the
vehicle when towing with a
sling-type truck
Do not tow with a sling-type truck,
either from the front or rear.
■ Recreational towing (behind
motor home, etc.)
Never dinghy tow your vehicle to
prevent causing serious damage
to the AWD system and hybrid
transmission. (P.278)
Situations when it is nec-
essary to contact dealers
before towing
Towing with a wheel-lift
type truck
NOTICE
■ Towing with a sling-type
truck
Do not tow with a sling-type truck
to prevent body damage.
509
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
8
When trouble arises
When using a flat-bed truck to
transport the vehicle, use tire
strapping belts. Refer to the
owner’s manual of the flat-bed
truck for the tire strapping
method.
In order to suppress vehicle
movement during transporta-
tion, set the parking brake and
turn the power switch off.
Fluid leaks under the vehicle
(Water dripping from the air
conditioning after use is nor-
mal.)
Flat-looking tires or uneven
tire wear
High coolant temperature
warning light flashes or come
on
Changes in exhaust sound
Excessive tire squeal when
cornering
Strange noises related to the
suspension system
Pinging or other noises
related to the hybrid system
Engine missing, stumbling or
running roughly
Appreciable loss of power
Vehicle pulls heavily to one
Using a flatbed truck If you think something
is wrong
If you notice any of the fol-
lowing symptoms, your
vehicle probably needs
adjustment or repair. Con-
tact your Toyota dealer as
soon as possible.
Visible symptoms
Audible symptoms
Operational symptoms
510
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
side when braking
Vehicle pulls heavily to one
side when driving on a level
road
Loss of brake effectiveness,
spongy feeling, pedal almost
touches the floor
511
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
8
When trouble arises
■ Brake system warning light (warning buzzer)
■ Brake system warning light
■ Charging system warning light
*
*
: This light illuminates on the multi-information display.
If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer
sounds
Calmly perform the following actions if any of the warning
lights comes on or flashes. If a light comes on or flashes, but
then goes off, this does not necessarily indicate a malfunc-
tion in the system. However, if this continues to occur, have
the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
Actions to the warning lights or warning buzzers
Warning light Details/Actions
(U.S.A.)
(Canada)
(Red)
Indicates that:
The brake fluid level is low; or
The brake system is malfunctioning
Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe
place and contact your Toyota dealer.
Continuing to drive the vehicle may be
dangerous.
Warning light Details/Actions
(Yellow)
Indicates a malfunction in:
The parking brake system;
The regenerative braking system; or
The electronically controlled brake system
Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota
dealer immediately.
Warning light Details/Actions
Indicates a malfunction in the vehicle’s charging
system
Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe
place and contact your Toyota dealer.
512
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■ High coolant temperature warning light
*
(warning buzzer)
*
: This light illuminates on the multi-information display with a message.
■ Hybrid system overheat warning light
*
(warning buzzer)
*
: This light illuminates on the multi-information display with a message.
■ Low engine oil pressure warning light
*
(warning buzzer)
*
: This light illuminates on the multi-information display with a message.
■ Malfunction indicator lamp
*
*
: This light illuminates on the multi-information display.
Warning light Details/Actions
Indicates that the engine is overheating
Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe
place.
Handling method (P.544)
Warning light Details/Actions
Indicates that the hybrid system has overheated
Stop the vehicle in a safe place.
Handling method (P.544)
Warning light Details/Actions
Indicates that the engine oil pressure is too low
Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe
place and contact your Toyota dealer.
Warning light Details/Actions
(U.S.A.)
(Canada)
Indicates a malfunction in:
The hybrid system;
The electronic engine control system;
The electronic throttle control system; or
The emission control system (if equipped)
Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota
dealer immediately.
513
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
8
When trouble arises
■ SRS warning light
■ ABS warning light
■ Electric power steering system warning light
*
(warning
buzzer)
*
: This light illuminates on the multi-information display.
Warning light Details/Actions
Indicates a malfunction in:
The SRS airbag system;
The front passenger occupant classification
system; or
The seat belt pretensioner system
Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota
dealer immediately.
Warning light Details/Actions
(U.S.A.)
(Canada)
Indicates a malfunction in:
The ABS; or
The brake assist system
Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota
dealer immediately.
Warning light Details/Actions
(Red/yellow)
Indicates a malfunction in the EPS (Electric
Power Steering) system
Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota
dealer immediately.
514
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■ PCS warning light (warning buzzer)
■ LTA indicator
*
(warning buzzer)
*
: This light illuminates on the multi-information display.
■ Intuitive parking assist OFF indicator
*
(warning buzzer)
Warning light Details/Actions
(Flashes or illuminates)
When a buzzer sounds simultaneously:
Indicates a malfunction has occurred in the PCS
(Pre-Collision System).
Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota
dealer immediately.
When a buzzer does not sound:
The PCS (Pre-Collision System) has become
temporarily unavailable, corrective action may
be necessary.
Follow the instructions displayed on the
multi-information display. (P.313, 526)
If the PCS (Pre-Collision System) or VSC (Vehi-
cle Stability Control) system is disabled, the
PCS warning light will illuminate.
P.322
Warning light Details/Actions
(Orange)
Indicates a malfunction in the LTA (Lane Trac-
ing Assist)
Follow the instructions displayed on the
multi-information display. (P.332)
Warning light Details/Actions
(If equipped)
When a buzzer sounds:
Indicates a malfunction in the Intuitive parking
assist function
Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota
dealer immediately.
When a buzzer does not sound:
Indicates that the system is temporarily unavail-
able, possibly due to a sensor being dirty or cov-
ered with ice, etc.
Follow the instructions displayed on the
multi-information display. (P.359, 523)
515
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
8
When trouble arises
*
: This light illuminates on the multi-information display.
■ PKSB OFF indicator
*
(warning buzzer)
*
: This light illuminates on the multi-information display.
■ BSM OFF indicator
*
(warning buzzer)
*
: This light illuminates on the multi-information display.
Warning light Details/Actions
(If equipped)
If “Parking Support Brake Malfunction Visit Your
Dealer” is displayed on the multi-information
display:
Indicates a malfunction in the PKSB (Parking
Support Brake) system
Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota
dealer immediately.
If “Parking Assist Unavailable” is displayed on
the multi-information display:
Indicates that the system is temporarily unavail-
able, possibly due to a sensor being dirty or cov-
ered with ice, etc.
Follow the instructions displayed on the
multi-information display. (P.367, 523)
Warning light Details/Actions
Indicates a malfunction in the BSM (Blind Spot
Monitor) function
Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota
dealer immediately.
Indicates that the rear bumper around the radar
sensor is covered with dirt, etc. (P.350)
Follow the instructions displayed on the
multi-information display. (P.348, 523)
516
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■ RCTA OFF indicator
*
(warning buzzer)
*
: This light illuminates on the multi-information display.
■ Slip indicator light
■ Brake Override System/Drive-Start Control/PKSB (if
equipped) warning light
*
(warning buzzer)
*
: This light illuminates on the multi-information display with a message.
Warning light Details/Actions
(If equipped)
Indicates a malfunction in the RCTA (Rear
Cross Traffic Alert) function
Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota
dealer immediately.
Indicates that the rear bumper around the radar
sensor is covered with dirt, etc. (P.350)
Follow the instructions displayed on the
multi-information display. (P.348, 523)
Warning light Details/Actions
Indicates a malfunction in:
The VSC/Trailer Sway Control system;
The TRAC system;
The Trail Mode function; or
The hill-start assist control system
Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota
dealer immediately.
Warning light Details/Actions
When a buzzer sounds:
Brake Override System is malfunctioning;
Drive-Start Control is operating;
Drive-Start Control is malfunctioning; or
Parking Support Brake function (for static
objects) (if equipped) is operating
Follow the instructions displayed on the
multi-information display and head-up
display (if equipped).
When a buzzer does not sound:
Brake Override System is operating
Release the accelerator pedal and
depress the brake pedal.
517
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
8
When trouble arises
■ Brake hold operated indicator (warning buzzer)
■ Parking brake indicator
■ Tire pressure warning light
*
*
: This light illuminates on the multi-information display.
Warning light Details/Actions
(Flashes)
Indicates a malfunction in the brake hold system
Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota
dealer immediately.
Warning light Details/Actions
(U.S.A.)
(Flashes)
(Canada)
(Flashes)
It is possible that the parking brake is not fully
engaged or released
Operate the parking brake switch once
again.
This light comes on when the parking brake is
not released. If the light turns off after the park-
ing brake is fully released, the system is operat-
ing normally.
Warning light Details/Actions
When the light comes on after blinking for
approximately 1 minute (a buzzer does not
sound):
Malfunction in the tire pressure warning system
Have the system checked by your Toyota
dealer.
When the light comes on (a buzzer sounds):
Low tire inflation pressure from natural causes
Adjust the tire inflation pressure to the
specified cold tire inflation pressure level.
(P.555)
Low tire inflation pressure from flat tire
Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe
place.
Handling method (P.520)
518
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■ Low fuel level warning light
■ Driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt reminder light (warn-
ing buzzer
*
)
*
: Driver’s seat belt warning buzzer:
The driver’s seat belt warning buzzer sounds to alert the driver that his or
her seat belt is not fastened. Once the power switch is turned to ON, the
buzzer sounds. If the seat belt is still unfastened, the buzzer sounds inter-
mittently for a certain period of time after the vehicle reaches a certain
speed.
Front passenger’s seat belt warning buzzer:
The front passenger’s seat belt warning buzzer sounds to alert the front
passenger that his or her seat belt is not fastened. If the seat belt is
unfastened, the buzzer sounds intermittently for a certain period of time
after the vehicle reaches a certain speed.
■ Rear passengers’ seat belt reminder lights
*1, 2
(warning
buzzer
*3
)
*1
:This light illuminates on the multi-information display.
*2
:Regardless of whether or not a rear passenger is present, this light will
also illuminate for a certain period of time after the rear door is opened
and closed.
*3
:Rear passengers’ seat belt warning buzzer:
Warning light Details/Actions
Indicates that remaining fuel is approximately
2.2 gal. (8.3 L, 1.8 Imp. gal.) or less
Refuel the vehicle.
Warning light Details/Actions
Warns the driver and/or front passenger to fas-
ten their seat belts
Fasten the seat belt.
If the front passenger’s seat is occupied,
the front passenger’s seat belt also needs
to be fastened to make the warning light
(warning buzzer) turn off.
Warning light Details/Actions
(If equipped)
Warns the rear passengers to fasten their seat
belts
Fasten the seat belt.
519
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
8
When trouble arises
The rear passengers’ seat belt warning buzzer sounds to alert the rear
passengers that his or her seat belt is not fastened. If the seat belt is
unfastened, the buzzer sounds intermittently for a certain period of time,
after the seat belt is fastened and unfastened and the vehicle reaches a
certain speed.
■ Warning buzzer
In some cases, the buzzer may not
be heard because of noisy place or
an audio sound.
■ Front passenger detection sen-
sor, seat belt reminder and
warning buzzer
● If luggage is placed on the front
passenger seat, the front passen-
ger detection sensor may cause
the warning light to flash and the
warning buzzer to sound even if a
passenger is not sitting in the
seat.
● If a cushion is placed on the seat,
the sensor may not detect a pas-
senger, and the warning light may
not operate properly.
■ SRS warning light
This warning light system monitors
the airbag sensor assembly, front
impact sensors, side impact sensors
(front door), side impact sensors
(front), side impact sensors (rear),
driver’s seat position sensor, front
passenger occupant classification
sensors, “AIR BAG ON” indicator
light, “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light,
front passenger’s seat belt buckle
switch, driver’s seat belt preten-
sioner, front passenger’s seat belt
pretensioner and force limiter, air-
bags, interconnecting wiring and
power sources. (P.35)
■ If the malfunction indicator
lamp comes on while driving
First check the following:
● Is the fuel tank empty?
If it is, fill the fuel tank immediately.
● Is the fuel tank cap loose?
If it is, tighten it securely.
The light will go off after several
driving trips.
If the light does not go off even after
several trips, contact your Toyota
dealer as soon as possible.
■ Electric power steering system
warning light (warning buzzer)
When the 12-volt battery charge
becomes insufficient or the voltage
temporarily drops, the electric power
steering system warning light may
come on and the warning buzzer
may sound.
At this time, the functions of the air
conditioning, etc. may be partially
limited in order to reduce the power
consumption of the 12-volt battery.
■ When the tire pressure warning
light comes on
Inspect the tires to check if a tire is
punctured.
If a tire is punctured: P.527
If none of the tires are punctured:
Turn the power switch to OFF then
turn it to ON. Check if the tire pres-
sure warning light comes on or
blinks.
If the tire pressure warning light
blinks for approximately 1 minute
then stays on
There may be a malfunction in the
tire pressure warning system. Have
the vehicle inspected by your
Toyota dealer immediately.
If the tire pressure warning light
comes on
1 After the temperature of the tires
has lowered sufficiently, check
the inflation pressure of each tire
and adjust them to the specified
level.
520
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
2 If the warning light does not turn
off even after several minutes
have elapsed, check that the
inflation pressure of each tire is
at the specified level and perform
initialization. (P.474)
■ The tire pressure warning light
may come on due to natural
causes
The tire pressure warning light may
come on due to natural causes such
as natural air leaks and tire inflation
pressure changes caused by tem-
perature. In this case, adjusting the
tire inflation pressure will turn off the
warning light (after a few minutes).
■ When a tire is replaced with a
compact spare tire
The compact spare tire is not
equipped with a tire pressure warn-
ing valve and transmitter. If a tire
goes flat, the tire pressure warning
light will not turn off even though the
flat tire has been replaced with the
spare tire. Replace the spare tire
with the standard tire and adjust the
tire inflation pressure. The tire pres-
sure warning light will go off after a
few minutes.
■ Conditions that the tire pres-
sure warning system may not
function properly
P.472
WARNING
■ If a warning light comes on or
a warning buzzer sounds
when a warning message is
shown on the multi-informa-
tion display
*
Check and follow the message
shown on the multi-information
display.
Failure to do so may result in
death or serious injury.
*
: Warning lights illuminate in red
or yellow and the warning
buzzer beeps once or sounds
continuously.
■ When the electric power
steering system warning light
comes on
When the light comes on yellow,
the assist to the power steering is
restricted. When the light comes
on red, the assist to the power
steering is lost and handling oper-
ations of the steering wheel
become extremely heavy.
If the steering wheel becomes
heavier than usual when operat-
ing, hold firmly and operate using
more force than usual.
■ If the tire pressure warning
light comes on
Be sure to observe the following
precautions. Failure to do so
could cause a loss of vehicle con-
trol and result in death or serious
injury.
● Stop your vehicle in a safe
place as soon as possible.
Adjust the tire inflation pressure
immediately.
521
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
8
When trouble arises
● If the tire pressure warning light
comes on even after tire infla-
tion pressure adjustment, it is
probable that you have a flat
tire. Check the tires. If a tire is
flat, change it with the spare tire
and have the flat tire repaired by
the nearest Toyota dealer.
● Avoid abrupt maneuvering and
braking. If the vehicle tires dete-
riorate, you could lose control of
the steering wheel or the
brakes.
■ If a blowout or sudden air
leakage should occur
The tire pressure warning system
may not activate immediately.
■ Maintenance of the tires
Each tire, including the spare (if
provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated to
the inflation pressure recom-
mended by the vehicle manufac-
turer on the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label (tire and
load information label). (If your
vehicle has tires of a different size
than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label [tire and load infor-
mation label], you should deter-
mine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)
WARNING
As an added safety feature, your
vehicle has been equipped with a
tire pressure monitoring system
(TPMS-tire pressure warning sys-
tem) that illuminates a low tire
pressure telltale (tire pressure
warning light) when one or more
of your tires is significantly under-
inflated. Accordingly, when the
low tire pressure telltale (tire pres-
sure warning light) illuminates,
you should stop and check your
tires as soon as possible, and
inflate them to the proper pres-
sure. Driving on a significantly
under-inflated tire causes the tire
to overheat and can lead to tire
failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehi-
cle’s handling and stopping abil-
ity.
Please note that the TPMS (tire
pressure warning system) is not a
substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s
responsibility to maintain correct
tire pressure, even if under-infla-
tion has not reached the level to
trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale (tire pres-
sure warning light).
522
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■ Warning messages
The warning messages explained
below may differ from the actual
messages according to operation
conditions and vehicle specifica-
tions.
■ If a message about an operation
is shown
● If a message about an operation
of the accelerator pedal or brake
Your vehicle has also been
equipped with a TPMS (tire pres-
sure warning system) malfunc-
tion indicator to indicate when the
system is not operating properly.
The TPMS (tire pressure warning
system) malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pres-
sure telltale (tire pressure warning
light). When the system detects a
malfunction, the telltale will flash
for approximately one minute and
then remain continuously illumi-
nated. This sequence will con-
tinue upon subsequent vehicle
start-ups as long as the malfunc-
tion exists. When the malfunction
indicator is illuminated, the sys-
tem may not be able to detect or
signal low tire pressure as
intended.
TPMS (tire pressure warning sys-
tem) malfunctions may occur for a
variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS
(tire pressure warning system)
from functioning properly. Always
check the TPMS (tire pressure
warning system) malfunction tell-
tale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or
alternate tires and wheels allow
the TPMS (tire pressure warning
system) to continue to function
properly.
NOTICE
■ To ensure the tire pressure
warning system operates
properly
Do not install tires with different
specifications or manufacturers
as the tire pressure warning sys-
tem may not operate properly.
If a warning message
is displayed
The multi-information dis-
play shows warnings of sys-
tem malfunctions,
incorrectly performed oper-
ations, and messages that
indicate a need for mainte-
nance. When a message is
shown, perform the correc-
tion procedure appropriate
to the message.
If a warning message is dis-
played again after the appro-
priate actions have been
performed, contact your
Toyota dealer.
When a message about
charging is displayed, refer to
P.152.
523
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
8
When trouble arises
pedal is shown
A warning message about an opera-
tion of the brake pedal may be
shown while the driving support sys-
tems such as PCS (Pre-Collision
system) or the dynamic radar cruise
control with full-speed range is oper-
ating. If a warning message is
shown, be sure to decelerate the
vehicle or follow an instruction
shown on the multi-information dis-
play.
• A warning message is shown
when Brake Override System
operates. (P.259, 517)
• A warning message is shown
when Drive-Start Control or Park-
ing Support Brake function (if
equipped) operates (P.259,
363). Follow the instructions on
the multi-information display.
● If a message about an operation
of the power switch is shown
An instruction for operation of the
power switch is shown when the
incorrect procedure for starting the
hybrid system is performed or the
power switch is operated incorrectly.
Follow the instructions shown on the
multi-information display to operate
the power switch again.
● If a message about a shift lever
operation is shown
To prevent the shift lever from being
operated incorrectly or the vehicle
from moving unexpectedly, a mes-
sage that requires shifting the shift
lever may be shown on the multi-
information display. In that case, fol-
low the instruction of the message
and shift the shift lever.
● If a message or image about an
open/close state of a part or
replenishment of a consumable is
shown
Confirm the part indicated by the
multi-information display or a warn-
ing light, and then perform the cop-
ing method such as closing the
open door or replenishing a con-
sumable.
■ If a message that indicates the
need for visiting your Toyota
dealer is displayed
The system or part shown on the
multi-information display is malfunc-
tioning. Have the vehicle inspected
by your Toyota dealer immediately.
■ If a message that indicates the
need for referring to Owner’s
Manual is displayed
● If the following messages are
shown, follow the instructions,
accordingly.
• “Blind Spot Monitor Unavailable”
(P.348, 523)
• “Rear Cross Traffic Alert Unavail-
able”(P.348, 523)
• “Engine Coolant Temp High”
(P.544)
● If the following messages are
shown, there may be a malfunc-
tion. Immediately stop the vehicle
in a safe place and contact your
Toyota dealer. Continuing to drive
the vehicle may be dangerous.
• “Plug-in charging system malfunc-
tion”
• “Hybrid System Malfunction”
• “Charging System Malfunction”
• “Check Engine”
• “Hybrid Battery System Malfunc-
tion”
• “Accelerator System Malfunction”
• “Smart Key System Malfunction”
● If the following messages are
shown, there may be a malfunc-
tion. Immediately have the vehi-
cle inspected by your Toyota
dealer.
• “Oil Pressure Low”
• “Braking Power Low”
● If any of the following messages
are shown on the multi-informa-
tion display, the vehicle may have
run out of fuel. Stop the vehicle in
524
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
a safe place and, if the fuel level is
low, refuel the vehicle.
• “Hybrid System Stopped”
• “Engine Stopped”
● If “Maintenance required for
DCDC converter cooling parts
See Owner’s Manual” is shown,
the filter may be clogged, the air
intake vent may be blocked, or
there may be a gap in the duct.
Therefore, perform the following
correction procedure.
• If the air intake vent or filter of the
DC/DC converter are dirty, per-
form the procedures on P.486 to
clean them.
• If the warning message is shown
when the air intake vent and filter
of the DC/DC converter are not
dirty, have the vehicle inspected
at your Toyota dealer.
● If “12-Volt Battery Charging Sys-
tem Malfunction Stop in a Safe
Place See Owner’s Manual” is
shown
Indicates a malfunction in the vehi-
cle’s charging system. Pull over and
stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe
to do so.
While the message is displayed, the
functions of the air conditioning, etc.
may be partially limited in order to
reduce the power consumption of
the 12-volt battery.
■ If “Hybrid System Overheated
Output Power Reduced” is
shown
The message may be shown when
driving under severe operating con-
ditions. (For example, when driving
up a long steep hill or driving up a
steep hill in reverse.)
Coping method: P.544
■ If “Traction Battery Needs to be
Protected Refrain from the Use
of N Position” is shown
This message may be displayed
when the shift lever is in N.
As the hybrid battery (traction bat-
tery) cannot be charged when the
shift lever is in N, shift the shift lever
to P when the vehicle is stopped.
■ If “Traction Battery Needs to be
Protected Shift into P to
Restart” is shown
This message is displayed when the
hybrid battery (traction battery)
charge has become extremely low
because the shift lever has been left
in N for a certain amount of time.
When operating the vehicle, shift to
P and restart the hybrid system.
■ If “Shift to P when Parked” is
shown
Message is displayed when the
driver’s door is opened without turn-
ing the power switch to OFF with the
shift lever in any position other than
P.
Shift the shift lever to P.
■ If “Shift is in N Release Acceler-
ator Before Shifting” is shown
Message is displayed when the
accelerator pedal has been
depressed and the shift lever is in N.
Release the accelerator pedal and
shift the shift lever to D or R.
■ If “Press Brake when Vehicle is
Stopped Hybrid System may
Overheat” is shown
Message is displayed when the
accelerator pedal is depressed to
maintain the vehicle position when
stopped on a upward slope, etc.
If this continues, the hybrid system
may overheat.
Release the accelerator pedal and
depress the brake pedal.
■ If “Auto Power OFF to Conserve
Battery” is shown
Power was turned off due to the
automatic power off function.
Next time when starting the hybrid
system, operate the hybrid system
for approximately 5 minutes to
525
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
8
When trouble arises
recharge the 12-volt battery.
■ If “Engine Oil Level Low Add or
Replace” is displayed
The engine oil level may be low.
Check the level of the engine oil,
and add engine oil if necessary.
This message may be displayed if
the vehicle is stopped on a slope.
Move the vehicle to a level surface
and check if the message disap-
pears.
■ If “Maintenance Required
Soon” is shown
Indicates that all maintenance
according to the driven distance on
the maintenance schedule
*
should
be performed soon.
Comes on approximately 4500
miles (7200 km) after the message
has been reset.
If necessary, perform maintenance.
Please reset the message after the
maintenance is performed.
(P.451)
*
: Refer to the separate “Scheduled
Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’
Manual Supplement” for the main-
tenance interval applicable to your
vehicle.
■ If “Maintenance Required Visit
Your Dealer” is shown
Indicates that all maintenance is
required to correspond to the driven
distance on the maintenance sched-
ule
*
.
Comes on approximately 5000
miles (8000 km) after the message
has been reset. (The indicator will
not work properly unless the mes-
sage has been reset.)
Perform the necessary mainte-
nance. Please reset the message
after the maintenance is performed.
(P.451)
*
: Refer to the separate “Scheduled
Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’
Manual Supplement” for the main-
tenance interval applicable to your
vehicle.
■ If a message that indicates the
malfunction of front camera is
displayed
The following systems may be sus-
pended until the problem shown in
the message is resolved. (P.313,
511)
● PCS (Pre-Collision System)
● LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)
● Automatic High Beam
● RSA (Road Sign Assist)
*
● Dynamic radar cruise control with
full-speed range
*
: If equipped
■ If “Radar Cruise Control
Unavailable See Owner’s Man-
ual” is shown
The dynamic radar cruise control
with full-speed range system is sus-
pended temporarily or until the prob-
lem shown in the message is
resolved. (causes and coping meth-
ods: P.313)
■ If “Radar Cruise Control
Unavailable” is shown
The dynamic radar cruise control
with full-speed range system cannot
be used temporarily. Use the sys-
tem when it becomes available
again.
■ Warning buzzer
P.519
WARNING
■ If a warning light comes on or
a warning buzzer sounds
when a warning message is
shown on the multi-informa-
tion display
P.521
526
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
NOTICE
■ “High Power Consumption
Partial Limit On AC/Heater
Operation” is frequently
shown
There is a possible malfunction
relating to the charging system or
the 12-volt battery may be deteri-
orating. Have the vehicle
inspected by your Toyota dealer.
■ If “Maintenance required For
Traction Battery At Your
Dealer” is shown
The hybrid battery (traction bat-
tery) is scheduled to be inspected
or replaced. Have the vehicle
inspected by your Toyota dealer
immediately.
● Continuing to drive the vehicle
without having the hybrid bat-
tery (traction battery) inspected
will cause the hybrid system not
to start.
● If the hybrid system does not
start, contact your Toyota
dealer immediately.
527
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
8
When trouble arises
Stop the vehicle in a safe place on a hard, flat surface.
Set the parking brake.
Shift the shift lever to P.
Stop the hybrid system.
Turn on the emergency flashers. (P.504)
For vehicles with power back door: Turn off the power back door
system. (P.216)
If you have a flat tire
Your vehicle is equipped with a spare tire. The flat tire can be
replaced with the spare tire.
For details about tires: P.468
WARNING
■ If you have a flat tire
Do not continue driving with a flat tire.
Driving even a short distance with a flat tire can damage the tire and the
wheel beyond repair, which could result in an accident.
Before jacking up the vehicle
528
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Jack
Spare tire
Jack handle
Wheel nut wrench
Location of the spare tire, jack and tools
A
B
C
D
WARNING
■ Using the tire jack
Observe the following precau-
tions.
Improper use of the tire jack may
cause the vehicle to suddenly fall
off the jack, leading to death or
serious injury.
● Do not use the tire jack for any
purpose other than replacing
tires or installing and removing
tire chains.
● The equipped jack can only be
used with your vehicle. Do not
use it with other vehicles.
● And do not use jacks from other
vehicles with your vehicle.
● Put the jack properly in its jack
point.
● Do not put any part of your body
under the vehicle while it is sup-
ported by the jack.
● Do not start the hybrid system
or drive the vehicle while the
vehicle is supported by the jack.
529
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
8
When trouble arises
1 Open the deck board
(P.417).
2 Unhook the tightening strap
and take out the jack from the
deck under tray.
After taking out the jack, hold it in
place by attaching the rubber band
temporarily to the hole shown in the
illustration.
To store the jack, rotate the jack
and tighten until it no longer moves.
Insert it into the deck under tray
and then secure it in place with a
rubber band.
Take out the tools.
1 Take out the deck under tray.
2 Loosen the center fastener
that secures the spare tire,
WARNING
● Do not raise the vehicle while
someone is inside.
● When raising the vehicle, do not
put an object on or under the
jack.
● Do not raise the vehicle to a
height greater than that required
to replace the tire.
● Use a jack stand if it is neces-
sary to get under the vehicle.
● Stop the vehicle on firm, flat and
level ground, firmly set the park-
ing brake and shift the shift
lever to P. Block the wheel diag-
onally opposite to the one being
changed if necessary.
● When lowering the vehicle,
make sure that there is no-one
near the vehicle. If there are
people nearby, warn them
vocally before lowering.
Taking out the jack
Taking out the tools
Taking out the spare tire
530
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
and then take out the spare
tire.
1 Chock the tires.
2 Slightly loosen the wheel
nuts (one turn).
3 Turn the tire jack portion
by hand until the notch of the
jack is in contact with the jack
point.
The jack point guides are located
under the rocker panel. They indi-
cate the jack point positions.
4 Assemble the jack handle
and the wheel nut wrench as
shown in the illustration.
WARNING
■ When storing the spare tire
Be careful not to catch fingers or
other body parts between the
spare tire and the body of the
vehicle.
Replacing a flat tire
Flat tire Wheel chock positions
Front left-
hand side
Behind the rear right-
hand side tire
Front right-
hand side
Behind the rear left-
hand side tire
Rear left-
hand side
In front of the front
right-hand side tire
Rear right-
hand side
In front of the front
left-hand side tire
A
531
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
8
When trouble arises
5 Raise the vehicle until the tire
is slightly raised off the
ground.
6 Remove all the wheel nuts
and the tire.
When resting the tire on the
ground, place the tire so that the
wheel design faces up to avoid
scratching the wheel surface.
1 Remove any dirt or foreign
matter from the wheel con-
tact surface.
If foreign matter is on the wheel
contact surface, the wheel nuts
may loosen while the vehicle is in
WARNING
■ Replacing a flat tire
● Do not touch the disc wheels or
the area around the brakes
immediately after the vehicle
has been driven.
After the vehicle has been
driven the disc wheels and the
area around the brakes will be
extremely hot. Touching these
areas with hands, feet or other
body parts while changing a tire,
etc. may result in burns.
● Failure to follow these precau-
tions could cause the wheel
nuts to loosen and the tire to fall
off, resulting in death or serious
injury.
• Have the wheel nuts tightened
with a torque wrench to 76 ft•lbf
(103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m) as soon
as possible after changing
wheels.
• When installing a tire, only use
wheel nuts that have been spe-
cifically designed for that wheel.
• If there are any cracks or defor-
mations in the bolt screws, nut
threads or bolt holes of the
wheel, have the vehicle
inspected by your Toyota
dealer.
● For vehicles with power back
door: In cases such as when
replacing tires, make sure to
turn off the power back door
system (P.216). Failure to do
so may cause the back door to
operate unintentionally if the
power back door switch is acci-
dentally touched, resulting in
hands and fingers being caught
and injured.
Installing the spare tire
532
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
motion, causing the tire to come off.
2 Install the spare tire and
loosely tighten each wheel
nut by hand by approximately
the same amount.
Turn the wheel nuts until the wash-
ers ( ) come into contact with the
disc wheel ( ).
3 Lower the vehicle.
4 Firmly tighten each wheel nut
two or three times in the
order shown in the illustra-
tion.
Tightening torque:
76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)
5 Stow the flat tire, tire jack and
all tools.
■ The compact spare tire
● The compact spare tire is identi-
fied by the label “TEMPORARY
USE ONLY” on the tire sidewall.
Use the compact spare tire tem-
porarily, and only in an emer-
gency.
● Make sure to check the tire infla-
tion pressure of the compact
spare tire. (P.555)
■ When using the compact spare
tire
As the compact spare tire is not
equipped with a tire pressure warn-
ing valve and transmitter, low infla-
tion pressure of the spare tire will
not be indicated by the tire pressure
warning system. Also, if you replace
the compact spare tire after the tire
pressure warning light comes on,
the light remains on.
■ When the compact spare tire is
attached
The vehicle height may become
lower when driving with the compact
spare tire compared to when driving
with standard tires.
■ If you have a flat front tire on a
road covered with snow or ice
(except 235/55R19 tires)
Install the compact spare tire on one
of the rear wheels of the vehicle.
Perform the following steps and fit
A
B
533
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
8
When trouble arises
tire chains to the front tires:
1 Replace a rear tire with the com-
pact spare tire.
2 Replace the flat front tire with the
tire removed from the rear of the
vehicle.
3 Fit tire chains to the front tires.
WARNING
■ When using the compact
spare tire
● Remember that the compact
spare tire provided is specifi-
cally designed for use with your
vehicle. Do not use your com-
pact spare tire on another vehi-
cle.
● Do not use more than one com-
pact spare tire simultaneously.
● Replace the compact spare tire
with a standard tire as soon as
possible.
● Avoid sudden acceleration,
abrupt steering, sudden brak-
ing and shifting operations that
cause sudden engine braking.
■ When the compact spare tire
is attached
The vehicle speed may not be
correctly detected, and the follow-
ing systems may not operate cor-
rectly:
• ABS & Brake assist
• VSC/Trailer Sway Control
•TRAC
• Dynamic radar cruise control
with full-speed range
• PCS (Pre-Collision System)
•EPS
• LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)
• Tire pressure warning system
• AHB (Automatic High Beam)
• AFS (Adaptive Front-lighting
System) (if equipped)
• BSM (Blind Spot Monitor)
• Rear view monitor system (if
equipped)
• Panoramic view monitor (if
equipped)
• Toyota parking assist monitor (if
equipped)
• Intuitive parking assist (if
equipped)
• PKSB (Parking Support Brake)
(if equipped)
• Navigation system (if equipped)
Also, not only can the following
system not be utilized fully, but it
may actually negatively affect the
drive-train components:
• E-Four (Electronic On-Demand
AWD system)
■ Speed limit when using the
compact spare tire
Do not drive at speeds in excess
of 50 mph (80 km/h) when a com-
pact spare tire is installed on the
vehicle.
The compact spare tire is not
designed for driving at high
speeds. Failure to observe this
precaution may lead to an acci-
dent causing death or serious
injury.
■ After using the tools and jack
Before driving, make sure all the
tools and jack are securely in
place in their storage location to
reduce the possibility of personal
injury during a collision or sudden
braking.
534
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
One of the following may be the
cause of the problem:
The AC charging cable may
be attached to the vehicle.
(P.123)
The electronic key may not be
functioning properly.
(P.537)
There may not be sufficient
fuel in the vehicle’s tank.
Refuel the vehicle. (P.306)
There may be a malfunction
in the immobilizer system.
(P.72)
There may be a malfunction
in the steering lock system.
The hybrid system may be
malfunctioning due to an elec-
trical problem such as elec-
tronic key battery depletion or
a blown fuse. However,
depending on the type of mal-
NOTICE
■ Be careful when driving over
bumps with the compact
spare tire installed on the
vehicle
The vehicle height may become
lower when driving with the com-
pact spare tire compared to when
driving with standard tires. Be
careful when driving over uneven
road surfaces.
■ Driving with tire chains and
the compact spare tire
Do not fit tire chains to the com-
pact spare tire.
Tire chains may damage the vehi-
cle body and adversely affect driv-
ing performance.
■ When replacing the tires
When removing or fitting the
wheels, tires or the tire pressure
warning valve and transmitter,
contact your Toyota dealer as the
tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter may be damaged if not
handled correctly.
If the hybrid system
will not start
Reasons for the hybrid sys-
tem not starting vary
depending on the situation.
Check the following and
perform the appropriate
procedure:
The hybrid system will not
start even though the cor-
rect starting procedure is
being followed (P.279)
535
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
8
When trouble arises
function, an interim measure
is available to start the hybrid
system. (P.535)
There is a possibility that the
temperature of the hybrid bat-
tery (traction battery) is
extremely low (approximately
below -22°F [-30°C]).
(P.280)
One of the following may be the
cause of the problem:
The 12-volt battery may be
discharged. (P.539)
The 12-volt battery terminal
connections may be loose or
corroded. (P.467)
One of the following may be the
cause of the problem:
The 12-volt battery may be
discharged. (P.539)
One or both of the 12-volt bat-
tery terminals may be discon-
nected. (P.467)
Contact your Toyota dealer if
the problem cannot be repaired,
or if repair procedures are
unknown.
When the hybrid system does
not start, the following steps can
be used as an interim measure
to start the hybrid system if the
power switch is functioning nor-
mally.
Do not use this starting proce-
dure except in cases of emer-
gency.
1 Pull the parking brake switch
to check that the parking
brake is set. (P.290)
Parking brake indicator will come
on.
2 Shift the shift lever to P.
3 Turn the power switch to
ACC.
4 Press and hold the power
switch for about 15 seconds
while depressing the brake
pedal firmly.
Even if the hybrid system can be
started using the above steps,
the system may be malfunction-
ing. Have the vehicle inspected
by your Toyota dealer.
The interior lights and
headlights are dim, or the
horn does not sound or
sounds at a low volume
The interior lights and
headlights do not turn on,
or the horn does not
sound
Starting the hybrid sys-
tem in an emergency
536
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
1 Remove the cover inside the
luggage compartment by
inserting a screwdriver.
When removing the cover, to pre-
vent damage, cover the tip of the
screwdriver with a rag.
2 Pull the lever.
Using the lever to open the fuel
filler door may not allow for an ade-
quate reduction in fuel tank pres-
sure before refueling. To prevent
fuel from spilling out, turn the cap
slowly when removing it.
During refueling, fuel may spill out
from the filler opening due to air
being discharged from inside the
fuel tank. Therefore, fill the fuel tank
If you lose your keys
New genuine keys can be
made by your Toyota dealer
using the other key and the
key number stamped on
your key number plate.
Keep the plate in a safe
place such as your wallet,
not in the vehicle.
NOTICE
■ When an electronic key is lost
If the electronic key remains lost,
the risk of vehicle theft increases
significantly. Visit your Toyota
dealer immediately with all
remaining electronic keys that
were provided with your vehicle.
If the fuel filler door
cannot be opened
If the fuel filler door opener
switch cannot be operated,
contact your Toyota dealer
to service the vehicle. In
case where refueling is
urgently necessary, the fol-
lowing procedure can be
used to open the fuel filler
door.
Opening the fuel filler
door
537
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
8
When trouble arises
carefully and slowly.
■ When the electronic key does
not work properly
● Make sure that the smart key sys-
tem has not been deactivated in
the customization setting. If it is
off, turn the function on.
(Customizable features: P.574)
● Check if battery-saving mode is
set. If it is set, cancel the function.
(P.218)
Use the mechanical key
(P.196) in order to perform the
If the electronic key
does not operate prop-
erly
If communication between
the electronic key and vehi-
cle is interrupted (P.218)
or the electronic key cannot
be used because the battery
is depleted, the smart key
system and wireless remote
control cannot be used. In
such cases, the doors can
be opened and the hybrid
system can be started by
following the procedure
below.
NOTICE
■ In case of a smart key system
malfunction, or other key
related problems
Take your vehicle with all the
electronic keys provided with your
vehicle to your Toyota dealer.
Locking and unlocking
the doors
538
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
following operations.
1 Locks all the doors
2 Unlocks the door
Turning the key rearward unlocks
the driver’s door. Turning the key
once again within 5 seconds
unlocks the other doors.
■ Key linked functions
1 Closes the windows and the
moon roof
*1
or panoramic moon
roof
*1
(turn and hold)
*2
2 Opens the windows and the
moon roof
*1
or panoramic moon
roof
*1
(turn and hold)
*2
*1
:If equipped
*2
:These settings must be custom-
ized at your Toyota dealer.
1 Ensure that the shift lever is
in P and depress the brake
pedal.
2 Touch the area behind the
buttons on the electronic key
to the power switch.
When the electronic key is
detected, a buzzer sounds and the
power switch will turn to ON.
When the smart key system is
deactivated in customization set-
ting, the power switch will turn to
ACC.
WARNING
■ When using the mechanical
key and operating the power
windows or the moon roof (if
equipped) or panoramic
moon roof (if equipped)
Operate the power window or the
moon roof or panoramic moon
roof after checking to make sure
that there is no possibility of any
passenger having any of their
body parts caught in the window
or the moon roof or panoramic
moon roof. Also, do not allow chil-
dren to operate the mechanical
key. It is possible for children and
other passengers to get caught in
the power window or the moon
roof or panoramic moon roof.
Starting the hybrid sys-
tem
539
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
8
When trouble arises
3 Firmly depress the brake
pedal and check that
is displayed on the multi-
information display.
4 Press the power switch
shortly and firmly.
In the event that the hybrid system
still cannot be started, contact your
Toyota dealer.
■ Stopping the hybrid system
Shift the shift lever to P, set the
parking brake and press the power
switch as you normally do when
stopping the hybrid system.
■ Replacing the key battery
As the above procedure is a tempo-
rary measure, it is recommended
that the electronic key battery be
replaced immediately when the bat-
tery is depleted. (P.493)
■ Changing power switch modes
Release the brake pedal and press
the power switch in step 3 above.
The hybrid system does not start
and modes will be changed each
time the switch is pressed.
(P.283)
If you have a set of jumper (or
booster) cables and a second
vehicle with a 12-volt battery,
you can jump start your vehicle
by following the steps below.
1 Vehicles with alarm: Confirm
that the electronic key is
being carried.
When connecting the jumper (or
booster) cables, depending on the
situation, the alarm may activate
and the doors locked. (P.74)
2 Open the hood (P.457) and
fuse box cover.
Push claw and to com-
pletely release the lock, and then lift
If the 12-volt battery is
discharged
The following procedures
may be used to start the
hybrid system if the vehi-
cle’s 12-volt battery is dis-
charged.
You can also call your
Toyota dealer or a qualified
repair shop.
Restarting the hybrid sys-
tem
A
B
540
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
up the cover.
3 Open the exclusive jump
starting terminal cover.
4 Connect a positive jumper cable clamp to on your vehicle and
connect the clamp on the other end of the positive cable to on
the second vehicle. Then, connect a negative cable clamp to
on the second vehicle and connect the clamp at the other end of
the negative cable to .
Exclusive jump starting terminal (your vehicle)
Positive (+) battery terminal (second vehicle)
Negative (-) battery terminal (second vehicle)
Solid, stationary, unpainted metallic point away from the exclu-
sive jump starting terminal and any moving parts as shown in the
illustration
5 Start the engine of the sec-
ond vehicle. Increase the
engine speed slightly and
maintain at that level for
approximately 5 minutes to
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
541
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
8
When trouble arises
recharge the 12-volt battery
of your vehicle.
6 Open and close any of the
doors of your vehicle with the
power switch off.
7 Maintain the engine speed of
the second vehicle and start
the hybrid system of your
vehicle by turning the power
switch to ON.
8 Make sure the “READY” indi-
cator comes on. If the indica-
tor light does not come on,
contact your Toyota dealer.
9 Once the hybrid system has
started, remove the jumper
cables in the exact reverse
order from which they were
connected.
10Close the exclusive jump
starting terminal cover, and
reinstall the fuse box cover to
its original position.
Once the hybrid system starts,
have the vehicle inspected at
your Toyota dealer as soon as
possible.
■ Starting the hybrid system
when the 12-volt battery is dis-
charged
The hybrid system cannot be
started by push-starting.
■ To prevent 12-volt battery dis-
charge
● Turn off the headlights and the
audio system while the hybrid sys-
tem is off.
● Turn off any unnecessary electri-
cal components when the vehicle
is running at a low speed for an
extended period, such as in heavy
traffic.
■ When the 12-volt battery is
removed or discharged
● Information stored in the ECU is
cleared. When the 12-volt battery
is depleted, have the vehicle
inspected at your Toyota dealer.
● Some systems may require initial-
ization. (P.582)
■ When removing the 12-volt bat-
tery terminals
When the 12-volt battery terminals
are removed, the information stored
in the ECU is cleared. Before
removing the 12-volt battery termi-
nals, contact your Toyota dealer.
■ Charging the 12-volt battery
The electricity stored in the 12-volt
battery will discharge gradually even
when the vehicle is not in use, due
to natural discharge and the drain-
ing effects of certain electrical appli-
ances. If the vehicle is left for a long
time, the 12-volt battery may dis-
charge, and the hybrid system may
be unable to start. (The 12-volt bat-
tery recharges automatically while
the hybrid system is operating.)
■ When recharging or replacing
the 12-volt battery
● In some cases, it may not be pos-
sible to unlock the doors using the
smart key system when the 12-
volt battery is discharged. Use the
wireless remote control or the
mechanical key to lock or unlock
the doors.
● The hybrid system may not start
on the first attempt after reinstall-
ing the 12-volt battery. In that
case, start the hybrid system in
the same manner as when the
electronic key does not operate
properly (P.538). This is not a
malfunction, as the hybrid system
will start normally on the second
attempt.
542
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
● The power switch mode is memo-
rized by the vehicle. When the 12-
volt battery is reconnected, the
system will return to the mode it
was in before the 12-volt battery
was discharged. Before discon-
necting the 12-volt battery, turn
the power switch off.
If you are unsure what mode the
power switch was in before the
12-volt battery discharged, be
especially careful when recon-
necting the 12-volt battery.
● Some systems may require initial-
ization. (P.582)
■ When replacing the 12-volt bat-
tery
● Use a 12-volt battery that con-
forms to European regulations.
● Use a 12-volt battery that the case
size is same as the previous one
(LN2), 20 hours rate capacity
(20HR) is equivalent (55Ah) or
greater, and performance rating
(CCA) is equivalent (345A) or
greater.
• If the sizes differ, the 12-volt bat-
tery cannot be properly secured.
• If the 20 hour rate capacity is low,
even if the time period where the
vehicle is not used is a short time,
the 12-volt battery may discharge
and hybrid system may not be
able to start.
● Use a ventilation type calcium bat-
tery
● Use a 12-volt battery with a han-
dle. If a 12-volt battery without a
handle is used, removal is more
difficult.
● When removing the 12-volt bat-
tery: P.467
● After replacing, firmly attach the
following items to the exhaust hole
of the 12-volt battery.
• Use the exhaust hose that was
attached to the 12-volt battery
before replacing and confirm that
it is firmly connected to the hole
section of the vehicle.
• Use the exhaust hole plug
included with the new 12-volt bat-
tery or the one installed on the
battery prior to the replacement.
(Depending on the new 12-volt
battery installed, the exhaust hole
may be plugged.)
For details, consult your Toyota
dealer.
Exhaust hole
Exhaust hose
Hole section of the vehicle
● The terminals can be connected
to the body side when the nega-
tive terminal of the 12-volt battery
is disconnected, as shown in the
illustration.
WARNING
■ When removing the battery
terminals
Always remove the negative (-)
terminal first. If the positive (+) ter-
minal contacts any metal in the
surrounding area when the posi-
tive (+) terminal is removed, a
spark may occur, leading to a fire
in addition to electrical shocks
and death or serious injury.
A
B
C
543
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
8
When trouble arises
WARNING
■ Avoiding 12-volt battery fires
or explosions
Observe the following precautions
to prevent accidentally igniting the
flammable gas that may be emit-
ted from the 12-volt battery:
● Make sure each jumper cable is
connected to the correct termi-
nal and that it is not unintention-
ally in contact with any other
than the intended terminal.
● Do not allow the other end of
the jumper cable connected to
the “+” terminal to come into
contact with any other parts or
metal surfaces in the area, such
as brackets or unpainted metal.
● Do not allow the + and - clamps
of the jumper cables to come
into contact with each other.
● Do not smoke, use matches,
cigarette lighters or allow open
flame near the 12-volt battery.
■ 12-volt battery precautions
The 12-volt battery contains poi-
sonous and corrosive acidic elec-
trolyte, while related parts contain
lead and lead compounds.
Observe the following precautions
when handling the 12-volt battery:
● When working with the 12-volt
battery, always wear safety
glasses and take care not to
allow any battery fluids (acid) to
come into contact with skin,
clothing or the vehicle body.
● Do not lean over the 12-volt bat-
tery.
● In the event that battery fluid
comes into contact with the skin
or eyes, immediately wash the
affected area with water and
seek medical attention.
Place a wet sponge or cloth
over the affected area until
medical attention can be
received.
● Always wash your hands after
handling the 12-volt battery sup-
port, terminals, and other bat-
tery-related parts.
● Do not allow children near the
12-volt battery.
■ After recharging the 12-volt
battery
Have the 12-volt battery
inspected at your Toyota dealer
as soon as possible.
If the 12-volt battery is deteriorat-
ing, continued use may cause the
12-volt battery to emit a malodor-
ous gas, which may be detrimen-
tal to the health of passengers.
■ When replacing the 12-volt
battery
● For information regarding 12-
volt battery replacement, con-
tact your Toyota dealer.
● After replacing, securely attach
the exhaust hose and exhaust
hole plug to the exhaust hole of
the replaced 12-volt battery. If
not properly installed, gases
(hydrogen) may leak into the
vehicle interior, and there is the
possible danger of the gas ignit-
ing and exploding.
544
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■ If the high coolant tempera-
ture warning light comes
on, flashes or “Engine
Coolant Temp High Stop in
a Safe Place See Owner’s
Manual” is shown on the
multi-information display
1 Stop the vehicle in a safe
place and turn off the air con-
ditioning system, and then
stop the hybrid system.
2 If you see steam:
Carefully lift the hood after
NOTICE
■ When handling jumper cables
When connecting the jumper
cables, ensure that they do not
become entangled in the cooling
fan, etc.
■ To prevent damaging the
vehicle
The exclusive jump starting termi-
nal is to be used when charging
the 12-volt battery from another
vehicle in an emergency. It cannot
be used to jump start another
vehicle.
If your vehicle over-
heats
The following may indicate
that your vehicle is over-
heating.
The high coolant tempera-
ture warning light (P.161)
comes on or flashes, or a
loss of hybrid system power
is experienced. (For exam-
ple, the vehicle speed does
not increase.)
“Engine Coolant Temp High
Stop in a Safe Place See
Owner’s Manual” or “Hybrid
System Overheated Output
Power Reduced” is shown
on the multi-information dis-
play.
Steam comes out from
under the hood.
Correction procedures
545
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
8
When trouble arises
the steam subsides.
If you do not see steam:
Carefully lift the hood.
3 After the hybrid system has
cooled down sufficiently,
inspect the hoses and radia-
tor core (radiator) for any
leaks.
Radiator
Cooling fan
If a large amount of coolant leaks,
immediately contact your Toyota
dealer.
4 The coolant level is satisfac-
tory if it is between the
“FULL” and “LOW” lines on
the reservoir.
Reservoir
“FULL” line
“LOW” line
5 Add coolant if necessary.
Water can be used in an emer-
gency if engine coolant is unavail-
able.
If water was added in an emer-
gency, have the vehicle inspected
at your Toyota dealer as soon as
possible.
6 Start the hybrid system and
turn the air conditioning sys-
tem on to check that the radi-
ator cooling fan operates and
to check for coolant leaks
from the radiator or hoses.
The fan operates when the air con-
ditioning system is turned on imme-
diately after a cold start. Confirm
that the fan is operating by check-
ing the fan sound and air flow. If it is
difficult to check these, adjust the
temperature control switch to “LO”
and turn the “A/C” switch ON and
OFF. After this, turn the air condi-
tioning system on and off repeat-
edly. (The fan may not operate in
freezing temperatures.)
7 If the fan is not operating:
Stop the hybrid system
immediately and contact your
Toyota dealer.
If the fan is operating:
Have the vehicle inspected at
the nearest Toyota dealer.
8 Check if “Engine Coolant
Temp High Stop in a Safe
A
B
A
B
C
546
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Place See Owner’s Manual”
is shown on the multi-infor-
mation display.
If the message does not disappear:
Stop the hybrid system and contact
your Toyota dealer.
If the message is not displayed:
Have the vehicle inspected at the
nearest Toyota dealer.
■ If “Hybrid System Over-
heated Output Power
Reduced” is shown on the
multi-information display
1 Stop the vehicle in a safe
place.
2 Stop the hybrid system and
carefully lift the hood.
3 After the hybrid system has
cooled down, inspect the
hoses and radiator core (radi-
ator) for any leaks.
Radiator
Cooling fan
If a large amount of coolant leaks,
immediately contact your Toyota
dealer.
4 The coolant level is satisfac-
tory if it is between the
“FULL” and “LOW” lines on
the reservoir.
Reservoir
“FULL” line
“LOW” line
5 Add coolant if necessary.
Water can be used in an emer-
gency if power control unit coolant
is unavailable.
If water was added in an emer-
gency, have the vehicle inspected
at your Toyota dealer as soon as
possible.
6 After stopping the hybrid sys-
tem and waiting for 5 minutes
or more, start the hybrid sys-
tem again and check for the
multi-information display.
If the message does not disappear:
Stop the hybrid system and contact
your Toyota dealer.
If the message is not displayed:
The hybrid system temperature has
A
B
A
B
C
547
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
8
When trouble arises
dropped and the vehicle may be
driven normally.
However, if the message appears
again frequently, contact your
Toyota dealer.
WARNING
■ When inspecting under the
hood of your vehicle
Observe the following precau-
tions.
Failure to do so may result in seri-
ous injury such as burns.
● If steam is seen coming from
under the hood, do not open the
hood until the steam has sub-
sided. The engine compart-
ment may be very hot.
● After the hybrid system has
been turned off, check that the
“READY” indicator is off.
When the hybrid system is oper-
ating, the gasoline engine may
automatically start, or the cool-
ing fan may suddenly operate
even if the gasoline engine
stops. Do not touch or approach
rotating parts such as the fan,
which may lead to fingers or
clothing (especially a tie, a scarf
or a muffler) getting caught,
resulting in serious injury.
● Do not loosen the coolant reser-
voir cap while the hybrid system
and radiator are hot.
High temperature steam or
coolant could spray out.
NOTICE
■ When adding engine/power
control unit coolant
Add coolant slowly after the
hybrid system has cooled down
sufficiently. Adding cool coolant to
a hot hybrid system too quickly
can cause damage to the hybrid
system.
■ To prevent damage to the
cooling system
Observe the following precau-
tions:
● Avoid contaminating the coolant
with foreign matter (such as
sand or dust, etc.).
● Do not use any coolant additive.
548
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
1 Stop the hybrid system. Set
the parking brake and shift
the shift lever to P.
2 Remove the mud, snow or
sand from around the stuck
tire.
3 Place wood, stones or some
other material to help provide
traction under the tires.
4 Restart the hybrid system
5 Shift the shift lever to D or R
and release the parking
brake. Then, while exercising
caution, depress the acceler-
ator pedal.
■ When it is difficult to free the
vehicle
Press to turn off TRAC.
(P.382)
If the vehicle becomes
stuck
Carry out the following pro-
cedures if the tires spin or
the vehicle becomes stuck
in mud, dirt or snow:
Recovering procedure
WARNING
■ When attempting to free a
stuck vehicle
If you choose to push the vehicle
back and forth to free it, make
sure the surrounding area is clear
to avoid striking other vehicles,
objects or people. The vehicle
may also lunge forward or lunge
back suddenly as it becomes free.
Use extreme caution.
■ When shifting the shift lever
Be careful not to shift the shift
lever with the accelerator pedal
depressed.
This may lead to unexpected
rapid acceleration of the vehicle
that may cause an accident
resulting in death or serious
injury.
NOTICE
■ To avoid damaging the trans-
mission and other compo-
nents
● Avoid spinning the wheels and
depressing the accelerator
pedal more than necessary.
● If the vehicle remains stuck
even after these procedures are
performed, the vehicle may
require towing to be freed.
550
9-1. Specifications
9-1.Specifications
*
: Unladen vehicle
■ Vehicle identification num-
ber
The vehicle identification num-
ber (VIN) is the legal identifier
for your vehicle. This is the pri-
mary identification number for
your Toyota. It is used in regis-
tering the ownership of your
vehicle.
This number is stamped on the
top left of the instrument panel.
This number is also stamped
Maintenance data (fuel, oil level, etc.)
Dimensions and weights
Overall length
*
180.9 in. (4595 mm)
Overall width
*
73.0 in. (1855 mm)
Overall height
*
With18-inch wheels 67.0 in. (1701 mm)
With19-inch wheels 67.2 in. (1706 mm)
Wheelbase
*
105.9 in. (2690 mm)
Tread
*
With18-inch
wheels
Front 63.0 in. (1600 mm)
Rear 63.7 in. (1619 mm)
With19-inch
wheels
Front 62.6 in. (1590 mm)
Rear 63.3 in. (1609 mm)
Vehicle capacity weight (Occupants + luggage) 970 lb. (440 kg)
Trailer Weight Rating (Trailer weight + cargo
weight)
2500 lb. (1135 kg)
Seating capacity
Seating capacity 5 (Front 2, Rear 3)
Vehicle identification
551
9-1. Specifications
9
Vehicle specifications
under the right-hand front seat.
This number is also on the Certi-
fication Regulation Label.
■ Engine number
The engine number is stamped
on the engine block as shown.
Engine
Model 2.5 L 4-cylinder (A25A-FXS)
Type 4-cylinder in line, 4-cycle, gasoline
Bore and stroke 3.444.07 in. (87.50103.48 mm)
Displacement
151.8 cu. in. (2487 cm
3
)
Valve clearance Automatic adjustment
Fuel
Fuel type Unleaded gasoline only
Octane Rating
87 (Research Octane Number 91) or
higher
Fuel tank capacity (Reference) 14.5 gal. (55 L, 12.1 Imp.gal.)
552
9-1. Specifications
Front
Rear
■ Oil capacity (Drain and refill reference
*
)
*
: The engine oil capacity is a reference quantity to be used when changing
the engine oil. Warm up and turn off the hybrid system, wait more than 5
minutes, and check the oil level on the dipstick.
■ Engine oil selection
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is
used in your Toyota vehicle.
Use Toyota approved “Toyota
Genuine Motor Oil” or equiva-
lent to satisfy the following
grade and viscosity.
Oil grade:
API SN/RC multigrade engine
oil
Recommended viscosity:
SAE 0W-16
Electric motor (traction motor)
Type Permanent magnet synchronous motor
Maximum output 134 kW
Maximum torque 199 ft•lbf (270 N•m, 27.5 kgf•m)
Type Permanent magnet synchronous motor
Maximum output 40 kW
Maximum torque 89.2 ft•lbf (121 N•m, 12.3 kgf•m)
Hybrid battery (traction battery)
Type Lithium-ion battery
Voltage 3.7 V/cell
Capacity 51 Ah
Quantity 96 cells
Nominal voltage 355.2 V
Lubrication system
With filter 4.8 qt. (4.5 L, 4.0 Imp. qt.)
Without filter 4.4 qt. (4.2 L, 3.7 Imp. qt.)
553
9-1. Specifications
9
Vehicle specifications
SAE 0W-16 is the best choice
for good fuel economy and good
starting in cold weather.
If SAE 0W-16 is not available,
SAE 0W-20 oil may be used.
However, it must be replaced
with SAE 0W-16 at the next oil
change.
Outside temperature
Oil viscosity (0W-16 is explained
here as an example):
• The 0W in 0W-16 indicates
the characteristic of the oil
which allows cold startability.
Oils with a lower value before
the W allow for easier starting
of the engine in cold weather.
• The 16 in 0W-16 indicates the
viscosity characteristic of the
oil when the oil is at high tem-
perature. An oil with a higher
viscosity (one with a higher
value) may be better suited if
the vehicle is operated at high
speeds, or under extreme
load conditions.
How to read oil container label:
API registered mark is added to
some oil containers to help you
select the oil you should use.
*
: The coolant capacity is the quantity of reference.
A
Cooling system
Capacity
*
Gasoline engine 8.7 qt. (8.2 L, 7.2 Imp. qt.)
Power control unit 2.1 qt. (2.0 L, 1.8 Imp. qt.)
Coolant type
Use either of the following:
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”
Similar high-quality ethylene gly-
col-based non-silicate, non-amine,
non-nitrite, and non-borate cool-
ant with long-life hybrid organic
acid technology
Do not use plain water alone.
554
9-1. Specifications
If replacement is necessary, contact your Toyota dealer.
*
: The fluid capacity is the quantity of reference.
If replacement is necessary, contact your Toyota dealer.
Ignition system (spark plug)
Make DENSO FC16HR-Q8
Gap 0.031 in. (0.8 mm)
NOTICE
■ Iridium-tipped spark plugs
Use only iridium-tipped spark plugs. Do not adjust the spark plug gap.
Electrical system (12-volt battery)
Specific voltage reading at
68°F (20°C):
12.0 V or higher
(Turn the power switch to OFF and turn on
the high beam headlights for 30 seconds.)
If the voltage is lower than the standard
value, charge the battery.
Charging rates
Quick charge 15 A max.
Slow charge 5 A max.
Hybrid transmission
Fluid capacity
*
4.6 qt. (4.4 L, 3.9 Imp.qt.)
Fluid type Toyota Genuine ATF WS
NOTICE
■ Hybrid transmission fluid type
Using transmission fluid other than the above type may cause abnormal
noise or vibration, or ultimately damage the transmission of your vehicle.
Rear differential (rear electric motor)
Fluid capacity
*
1.8 qt. (1.7 L, 1.5 Imp.qt.)
Fluid type Toyota Genuine ATF WS
555
9-1. Specifications
9
Vehicle specifications
*
: The fluid capacity is the quantity of reference.
If replacement is necessary, contact your Toyota dealer.
*
: Minimum pedal clearance when depressed with a force of 67.4 lbf (300 N,
30.5 kgf) while the hybrid system is operating.
Vehicles with 18-inch wheels
NOTICE
■ Rear differential fluid type
Using differential fluid other than the above type may cause abnormal
noise or vibration, or ultimately damage the differential of your vehicle.
Brakes
Pedal clearance
*
5.0 in. (128 mm) Min.
Pedal free play 0.04 0.24 in. (1.0 6.0 mm)
Brake pad wear limit 0.04 in. (1.0 mm)
Fluid type
FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703
FMVSS No.116 DOT 4 or SAE J1704
Steering
Free play Less than 1.2 in. (30 mm)
Tires and wheels
Tire size
225/60R18 100H, T165/80R17 104M
(spare)
Tire inflation pressure
(Recommended cold tire infla-
tion pressure)
Front:
33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm
2
or bar)
Rear:
33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm
2
or bar)
Spare:
60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm
2
or bar)
Wheel size 18 x 7J, 17 x 4T (spare)
Wheel nut torque 76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)
556
9-1. Specifications
Vehicles with 19-inch wheels
A: Wedge base bulbs (clear)
B: Wedge base bulbs (amber)
C: Double end bulbs (clear)
*1
:The 28/8 W bulb is used. However, only the 28 W filament illuminates.
*2
:If equipped
Tire size
235/55R19 101V, T165/90D18 107M
(spare)
Tire inflation pressure
(Recommended cold tire infla-
tion pressure)
Front:
35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm
2
or bar)
Rear:
35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm
2
or bar)
Spare:
60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm
2
or bar)
Wheel size 19 7 1/2J, 18 4T (spare)
Wheel nut torque 76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)
Light bulbs
Light bulbs Bulb No. W Type
Exterior
Front side marker lights W5W 5 A
Front turn signal lights (P.497) 7444NA
28/8
*1
B
Rear turn signal lights WY21W 21 B
Back-up lights W16W 16 A
Outer foot lights
*2
5 A
Interior
Vanity lights 8 A
Interior lights (front)/personal lights 5 A
Interior light (rear) 8 C
Luggage compartment light 5 A
557
9-1. Specifications
9
Vehicle specifications
■ Gasoline quality
In very few cases, driveability prob-
lems may be caused by the brand of
gasoline you are using. If driveability
problems persist, try changing the
brand of gasoline. If this does not
correct the problem, consult your
Toyota dealer.
■ Recommendation of the use of
gasoline containing detergent
additives
● Toyota recommends the use of
gasoline that contains detergent
additives to avoid the build-up of
engine deposits.
● All gasoline sold in the U.S.A. con-
tains minimum detergent additives
to clean and/or keep clean intake
systems, per EPA’s lowest addi-
tives concentration program.
● Toyota strongly recommends the
use of Top Tier Detergent Gaso-
line. For more information on Top
Tier Detergent Gasoline and a list
of marketers, please go to the offi-
cial website www.toptiergas.com.
■ Recommendation of the use of
low emissions gasoline
Gasolines containing oxygenates
such as ethers and ethanol, as well
as reformulated gasolines, are avail-
able in some cities. These fuels are
typically acceptable for use, provid-
ing they meet other fuel require-
ments.
Toyota recommends these fuels,
since the formulations allow for
reduced vehicle emissions.
■ Non-recommendation of the
use of blended gasoline
● Use only gasoline containing up to
15% ethanol.
DO NOT use any flex-fuel or gas-
oline that could contain more than
15% ethanol, including from any
pump labeled E30 (30% ethanol
), E50 (50% ethanol ), E85
(85% ethanol ) (which are only
some examples of fuel containing
more than 15% ethanol).
● If you use gasohol in your vehicle,
be sure that it has an octane rat-
ing no lower than 87.
● Toyota does not recommend the
use of gasoline containing metha-
nol.
■ Non-recommendation of the
use of gasoline containing MMT
Some gasoline contains an octane
enhancing additive called MMT
(Methylcyclopentadienyl Manga-
nese Tricarbonyl).
Toyota does not recommend the
use of gasoline that contains MMT.
If fuel containing MMT is used, your
Fuel information
You must only use unleaded
gasoline in your vehicle.
Select octane rating 87
(Research Octane Number
91) or higher. Use of
unleaded gasoline with an
octane rating lower than 87
may result in engine knock-
ing. Persistent knocking
can lead to engine damage.
At minimum, the gasoline you
use should meet the specifica-
tions of ASTM D4814 in the
U.S.A..
A B
C
558
9-1. Specifications
emission control system may be
adversely affected.
The malfunction indicator lamp on
the instrument cluster may come on.
If this happens, contact your Toyota
dealer for service.
■ If your engine knocks
● Consult your Toyota dealer.
● You may occasionally notice light
knocking for a short time while
accelerating or driving uphill. This
is normal and there is no need for
concern.
NOTICE
■ Notice on fuel quality
● Do not use improper fuels. If
improper fuels are used, the
engine will be damaged.
● Do not use leaded gasoline.
Leaded gasoline can cause
damage to your vehicle’s three-
way catalytic converters caus-
ing the emission control system
to malfunction.
● Do not use gasohol other than
the type previously stated.
Other gasohol may cause fuel
system damage or vehicle per-
formance problems.
● Using unleaded gasoline with
an octane number or rating
lower than the level previously
stated will cause persistent
heavy knocking.
At worst, this will lead to engine
damage.
■ Fuel-related poor driveability
If poor driveability (poor hot start-
ing, vaporization, engine knock-
ing, etc.) is encountered after
using a different type of fuel, dis-
continue the use of that type of
fuel.
■ When refueling with gasohol
Take care not to spill gasohol. It
can damage your vehicle’s paint.
559
9-1. Specifications
9
Vehicle specifications
Full-size tire
Compact spare tire
Tire size (P.561)
DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN) (P.560)
Location of treadwear indicators (P.468)
Tire ply composition and materials
Plies are layers of rubber-coated parallel cords. Cords are the strands
which form the plies in a tire.
Tire information
Typical tire symbols
A
B
C
D
560
9-1. Specifications
Radial tires or bias-ply tires
A radial tire has “RADIAL” on the sidewall. A tire not marked “RADIAL” is a
bias-ply tire.
TUBELESS or TUBE TYPE
A tubeless tire does not have a tube and air is directly put into the tire. A
tube type tire has a tube inside the tire and the tube maintains the air pres-
sure.
Load limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure (P.563)
Maximum cold tire inflation pressure (P.563)
This means the pressure to which a tire may be inflated.
Uniform tire quality grading
For details, see “Uniform Tire Quality Grading” that follows.
Summer tires or all season tires (P.469)
An all season tire has “M+S” on the sidewall. A tire not marked “M+S” is a
summer tire.
“TEMPORARY USE ONLY”
A compact spare tire is identified by the phrase “TEMPORARY USE ONLY”
molded on its sidewall. This tire is designed for temporary emergency use
only.
Type A
DOT symbol
*
Tire Identification Number
(TIN)
Tire manufacturer’s identifi-
cation mark
Tire size code
Manufacturer’s optional tire
type code (3 or 4 letters)
Manufacturing week
Manufacturing year
*
: The DOT symbol certifies that the
tire conforms to applicable Fed-
eral Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-
dards.
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
Typical DOT and Tire
Identification Number
(TIN)
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
561
9-1. Specifications
9
Vehicle specifications
Type B
DOT symbol
*
Tire Identification Number
(TIN)
Tire manufacturer’s identifi-
cation mark
Manufacturer’s code
Manufacturing week
Manufacturing year
*
: The DOT symbol certifies that the
tire conforms to applicable Fed-
eral Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-
dards.
■ Typical tire size information
The illustration indicates typical
tire size.
Tire use
(P = Passenger car,
T = Temporary use)
Section width (millimeters)
Aspect ratio
(tire height to section width)
Tire construction code
(R = Radial, D = Diagonal)
Wheel diameter (inches)
Load index (2 digits or 3 dig-
its)
Speed symbol (alphabet with
one letter)
■ Tire dimensions
Section width
Tire height
Wheel diameter
Tire size
A
B
C
D
E
F
A
Tire section names
B
C
D
E
F
G
A
B
C
562
9-1. Specifications
Bead
Sidewall
Shoulder
Tread
Belt
Inner liner
Reinforcing rubber
Carcass
Rim lines
Bead wires
Chafer
This information has been pre-
pared in accordance with regu-
lations issued by the National
Highway Traffic Safety Adminis-
tration of the U.S. Department of
Transportation.
It provides the purchasers
and/or prospective purchasers
of Toyota vehicles with informa-
tion on uniform tire quality grad-
ing.
Your Toyota dealer will help answer
any questions you may have as you
read this information.
■ DOT quality grades
All passenger vehicle tires must
conform to Federal Safety
Requirements in addition to
these grades. Quality grades
can be found where applicable
on the tire sidewall between
tread shoulder and maximum
section width.
For example: Treadwear 200 Trac-
tion AA Temperature A
■ Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a com-
parative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a
specified government test
course.
For example, a tire graded 150
would wear one and a half (1 - 1/2)
times as well on the government
course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions
of their use. Performance may dif-
fer significantly from the norm due
to variations in driving habits, ser-
vice practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
■ Traction AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from high-
est to lowest, are AA, A, B and
C, and they represent the tire’s
ability to stop on wet pavement
as measured under controlled
conditions on specified govern-
ment test surfaces of asphalt
and concrete.
A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on
braking (straight ahead) traction
tests and does not include corner-
ing (turning) traction.
Uniform Tire Quality
Grading
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
563
9-1. Specifications
9
Vehicle specifications
■ Temperature A, B, C
The temperature grades are A
(the highest), B, and C, repre-
senting the tire’s resistance to
the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when
tested under controlled condi-
tions on a specified indoor labo-
ratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can
cause the material of the tire to
degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure.
Grade C corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger
car tires must meet under the Fed-
eral Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher
levels of performance on the labo-
ratory test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
Warning: The temperature grades
of a tire assume that it is properly
inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, underinflation, or
excessive loading, either sepa-
rately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire fail-
ure.
Glossary of tire terminology
Tire related term Meaning
Cold tire inflation pres-
sure
Tire pressure when the vehicle has been parked
for three hours or more, or has not been driven
more than 1 mile or 1.5 km under that condition
Maximum inflation pres-
sure
The maximum cold inflated pressure to which a
tire may be inflated, shown on the sidewall of
the tire
Recommended inflation
pressure
Cold tire inflation pressure recommended by a
manufacturer
Accessory weight
The combined weight (in excess of those stan-
dard items which may be replaced) of transmis-
sion, power steering, power brakes, power
windows, power seats, radio and heater, to the
extent that these items are available as factory-
installed equipment (whether installed or not)
Curb weight
The weight of a motor vehicle with standard
equipment, including the maximum capacity of
fuel, oil and coolant, and if so equipped, air con-
ditioning and additional weight optional engine
564
9-1. Specifications
Maximum loaded vehicle
weight
The sum of:
(a) Curb weight
(b) Accessory weight
(c) Vehicle capacity weight
(d) Production options weight
Normal occupant weight
150 lb. (68 kg) times the number of occupants
specified in the second column of Table 1
*
that
follows
Occupant distribution
Distribution of occupants in a vehicle as speci-
fied in the third column of Table 1
*
below
Production options weight
The combined weight of installed regular pro-
duction options weighing over 5 lb. (2.3 kg) in
excess of the standard items which they
replace, not previously considered in curb
weight or accessory weight, including heavy
duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty
battery, and special trim
Rim
A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube
assembly upon which the tire beads are seated
Rim diameter
(Wheel diameter)
Nominal diameter of the bead seat
Rim size designation Rim diameter and width
Rim type designation
The industry manufacturer’s designation for a
rim by style or code
Rim width Nominal distance between rim flanges
Vehicle capacity weight
(Total load capacity)
The rated cargo and luggage load plus 150 lb.
(68 kg) times the vehicle’s designated seating
capacity
Vehicle maximum load on
the tire
The load on an individual tire that is determined
by distributing to each axle its share of the max-
imum loaded vehicle weight, and dividing by two
Vehicle normal load on
the tire
The load on an individual tire that is determined
by distributing to each axle its share of curb
weight, accessory weight, and normal occupant
weight (distributed in accordance with Table 1
*
below), and dividing by two
Tire related term Meaning
565
9-1. Specifications
9
Vehicle specifications
Weather side
The surface area of the rim not covered by the
inflated tire
Bead
The part of the tire that is made of steel wires,
wrapped or reinforced by ply cords and that is
shaped to fit the rim
Bead separation
A breakdown of the bond between components
in the bead
Bias ply tire
A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that
extend to the beads are laid at alternate angles
substantially less than 90 degrees to the center-
line of the tread
Carcass
The tire structure, except tread and sidewall
rubber which, when inflated, bears the load
Chunking
The breaking away of pieces of the tread or
sidewall
Cord The strands forming the plies in the tire
Cord separation
The parting of cords from adjacent rubber com-
pounds
Cracking
Any parting within the tread, sidewall, or inner-
liner of the tire extending to cord material
CT
A pneumatic tire with an inverted flange tire and
rim system in which the rim is designed with rim
flanges pointed radially inward and the tire is
designed to fit on the underside of the rim in a
manner that encloses the rim flanges inside the
air cavity of the tire
Extra load tire
A tire designed to operate at higher loads and at
higher inflation pressures than the correspond-
ing standard tire
Groove The space between two adjacent tread ribs
Innerliner
The layer(s) forming the inside surface of a
tubeless tire that contains the inflating medium
within the tire
Innerliner separation
The parting of the innerliner from cord material
in the carcass
Tire related term Meaning
566
9-1. Specifications
Intended outboard side-
wall
(a)The sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears
white lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand,
and/or model name molding that is higher or
deeper than the same molding on the other
sidewall of the tire, or
(b)The outward facing sidewall of an asymmetri-
cal tire that has a particular side that must
always face outward when mounted on a vehi-
cle
Light truck (LT) tire
A tire designated by its manufacturer as primar-
ily intended for use on lightweight trucks or mul-
tipurpose passenger vehicles
Load rating
The maximum load that a tire is rated to carry
for a given inflation pressure
Maximum load rating
The load rating for a tire at the maximum per-
missible inflation pressure for that tire
Maximum permissible
inflation pressure
The maximum cold inflation pressure to which a
tire may be inflated
Measuring rim
The rim on which a tire is fitted for physical
dimension requirements
Open splice
Any parting at any junction of tread, sidewall, or
innerliner that extends to cord material
Outer diameter The overall diameter of an inflated new tire
Overall width
The linear distance between the exteriors of the
sidewalls of an inflated tire, including elevations
due to labeling, decorations, or protective bands
or ribs
Passenger car tire
A tire intended for use on passenger cars, multi-
purpose passenger vehicles, and trucks, that
have a gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) of
10,000 lb. or less.
Ply A layer of rubber-coated parallel cords
Ply separation
A parting of rubber compound between adjacent
plies
Tire related term Meaning
567
9-1. Specifications
9
Vehicle specifications
Pneumatic tire
A mechanical device made of rubber, chemi-
cals, fabric and steel or other materials, that,
when mounted on an automotive wheel, pro-
vides the traction and contains the gas or fluid
that sustains the load
Radial ply tire
A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that
extend to the beads are laid at substantially 90
degrees to the centerline of the tread
Reinforced tire
A tire designed to operate at higher loads and at
higher inflation pressures than the correspond-
ing standard tire
Section width
The linear distance between the exteriors of the
sidewalls of an inflated tire, excluding elevations
due to labeling, decoration, or protective bands
Sidewall
That portion of a tire between the tread and
bead
Sidewall separation
The parting of the rubber compound from the
cord material in the sidewall
Snow tire
A tire that attains a traction index equal to or
greater than 110, compared to the ASTM E-
1136 Standard Reference Test Tire, when using
the snow traction test as described in ASTM F-
1805-00, Standard Test Method for Single
Wheel Driving Traction in a Straight Line on
Snow-and Ice-Covered Surfaces, and which is
marked with an Alpine Symbol ( ) on at least
one sidewall
Test rim
The rim on which a tire is fitted for testing, and
may be any rim listed as appropriate for use
with that tire
Tread
That portion of a tire that comes into contact
with the road
Tread rib
A tread section running circumferentially around
a tire
Tread separation Pulling away of the tread from the tire carcass
Tire related term Meaning
568
9-1. Specifications
*
:Table 1 Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for
various designated seating capacities
Treadwear indicators
(TWI)
The projections within the principal grooves
designed to give a visual indication of the
degrees of wear of the tread
Wheel-holding fixture
The fixture used to hold the wheel and tire
assembly securely during testing
Designated seating
capacity, Number of
occupants
Vehicle normal load,
Number of occupants
Occupant distribution in
a normally loaded vehi-
cle
2 through 4 2 2 in front
5 through 10 3
2 in front, 1 in second
seat
11 through 15 5
2 in front, 1 in second
seat, 1 in third seat, 1 in
fourth seat
16 through 20 7
2 in front, 2 in second
seat, 2 in third seat, 1 in
fourth seat
Tire related term Meaning
569
9-2. Customization
9
Vehicle specifications
9-2.Customization
■ Changing using the naviga-
tion/multimedia system
1 Press the “MENU” button.
2 Select “Setup” on the menu
screen and select “Vehicle”.
3 Select “Vehicle Customiza-
tion”.
Various setting can be changed.
Refer to the list of settings that can
be changed for details.
■ Changing using the multi-
information display
1 Press or of the meter
control switches and select
.
2 Press or of the meter
control switches, select the
item.
3 To switch the function on and
off, press to switch to the
desired setting.
4 To perform detailed setting of
functions that support
detailed settings, press and
hold and display the set-
ting screen.
The method of performing detailed
setting differs for each screen.
Please refer to the advice sentence
displayed on the screen.
To go back to the previous screen
or exit the customize mode, press
.
■ When customizing using the
navigation/multimedia system
or multi-information display
Stop the vehicle in a safe place,
apply the parking brake, and shift
the shift lever to P. Also, to prevent
12-volt battery discharge, leave the
hybrid system operating while cus-
tomizing the features.
Customizable features
Your vehicle includes a vari-
ety of electronic features
that can be personalized to
suit your preferences. The
settings of these features
can be changed using the
multi-information display,
navigation/multimedia sys-
tem, or at your Toyota
dealer.
Customizing vehicle fea-
tures
WARNING
■ During customization
As the hybrid system needs to be
operating during customization,
ensure that the vehicle is parked
in a place with adequate ventila-
tion. In a closed area such as a
garage, exhaust gases including
harmful carbon monoxide (CO)
may collect and enter the vehicle.
This may lead to death or a seri-
ous health hazard.
NOTICE
■ During customization
To prevent 12-volt battery dis-
charge, ensure that the hybrid
system is operating while custom-
izing features.
570
9-2. Customization
Some function settings are changed simultaneously with other func-
tions being customized. Contact your Toyota dealer for further
details.
Vehicles with navigation system or multimedia system: Settings
that can be changed using the navigation system or multimedia sys-
tem
Settings that can be changed using the multi-information display
Settings that can be changed by your Toyota dealer
Definition of symbols: O = Available, – =Not available
■ Charging system (P.112, 115)
*
: Vehicles with 6.6 kW onboard traction battery charger only
■ Gauges, meters and multi-information display (P.165, 170)
Customizable Features
Function Default setting
Customized
setting
“Charging Current” MAX
8A
– O –
16A
*
“Battery Heater” On Off – O –
“Battery Cooler” On Off – O –
Function
*1
Default setting
Customized
setting
Language
*2
“English”
(English)
“Français can-
adien” (Cana-
dian French)
O O –
“Español mexi-
cano” (Mexi-
can Spanish)
A
B
C
A
B
C
A
B
C
571
9-2. Customization
9
Vehicle specifications
Units
*2
miles (MPG
US,
miles/kWh)
km (km/L,
km/kWh)
O O –
km (L/100km,
kWh/100km)
miles (MPG
UK,
miles/kWh)
Speedometer display Analog Digital – O –
EV indicator On Off – O –
“Eco Guidance” (ECO Accel-
erator Guidance)
On Off – O –
“Fuel Economy”
“Total Aver-
age”
“Trip Average”
– O –
“Tank Aver-
age”
“Power Consumption”
“Total Aver-
age”
“Trip Average” – O –
Audio system linked display On Off – O –
Energy monitor On Off – O –
AWD system display On Off – O –
Drive information type Trip Total – O –
Drive information items (first
item)
Distance
Average
Speed
– O –
Total Time
Drive information items (sec-
ond item)
Total Time
Average
Speed
– O –
Distance
“Closing Display” “ECO Score”
“Drive Info”
– O –
“Charging
Schedule”
Pop-up display On Off – O –
Calendar
*3
– – – O –
Function
*1
Default setting
Customized
setting
A
B
C
572
9-2. Customization
*1
:For details about each function: P.177
*2
:The default setting varies according to country.
*3
:This can only be set if GPS calibration of clock is turned off in the multi-
media system settings.
■ Head-up display
*1
(P.182)
*1
:If equipped
*2
:For details about each function: P.184
Multi-Information display off Off On – O –
Suggestion function On
On (when the
vehicle is
stopped)
O – O
Off
Function
*2
Default setting
Customized
setting
Head-up display On Off – O –
Gauge information
Hybrid Sys-
tem Indicator
Tachometer
– O –
No content
Route guidance to destina-
tion/street name
*1
On Off – O –
Driving support system infor-
mation display
On Off – O –
Compass
*1
On Off – O –
Audio system operation sta-
tus
*1
On Off – O –
Function
*1
Default setting
Customized
setting
A
B
C
A
B
C
573
9-2. Customization
9
Vehicle specifications
■ Door lock (P.198, 537)
■ Smart key system and wireless remote control (P.196, 217)
Function Default setting
Customized
setting
Unlocking using a key
Driver’s door
unlocked in
first step, all
doors
unlocked in
second step
All doors
unlocked in
first step
– – O
Automatic door locking func-
tion
Shift position
linked door
locking opera-
tion
Off
O – O
Speed linked
door locking
operation
Automatic door unlocking
function
Shift position
linked door
unlocking
operation
Off
O – O
Driver’s door
linked door
unlocking
operation
Function Default setting
Customized
setting
Operation signal (emer-
gency flashers)
On Off O – O
Operation buzzer volume 5
Off
O – O
1 to 7
Time elapsed before the
automatic door lock function
is activated if a door is not
opened after being unlocked
60 seconds
Off
O – O30 seconds
120 seconds
Open door reminder buzzer
(When locking the vehicle)
On Off – – O
A
B
C
A
B
C
574
9-2. Customization
■ Smart key system (P.217)
*
: This setting can be changed when the smart door unlocking setting is set
to Driver’s door.
■ Wireless remote control (P.196)
*
: If equipped
Function Default setting
Customized
setting
Smart key system On Off – – O
Smart door unlocking Driver’s door All the doors O – O
Number of consecutive door
lock operations
2 times
As many as
desired
– – O
Time elapsed before unlock-
ing all the door when gripping
and holding the driver’s door
handle
*
2 seconds
Off
– – O
1.5 seconds
2.5 seconds
Power switch illumination On Off – – O
Function Default setting
Customized
setting
Wireless remote control On Off – – O
Unlocking operation
Driver’s door
unlocked in
first step, all
doors
unlocked in
second step
All doors
unlocked in
first step
O – O
Theft deterrent panic mode On Off – – O
Locking operation when door
opened
On Off O – O
The function that activates
the switch of the wire-
less remote control when
locking the door
*
(P.207)
On (Unlocking
all the door)
Off
– – O
On (Unlocking
back door
only)
A
B
C
A
B
C
575
9-2. Customization
9
Vehicle specifications
■ Rear seat reminder function (P.200)
■ Power back door
*1
(P.207)
*1
:If equipped
*2
:The operation buzzer that sounds when the back door begins to operate
cannot be turned off.
*3
:The open position is set by the power back door switch. (P.216)
*4
:When the towing hitch is installed, Hands Free Power Back Door does
not work.
Function Default setting
Customized
setting
Rear seat reminder function On Off – O –
Function Default setting
Customized
setting
Power back door operations On Off – O –
Back door opener switch
operations
Press and hold
One short
press
– – O
switch of the wireless
remote control operation
Press and hold
One short
press
– – O
Push twice
Off
Operation buzzer volume 3
1
– O –
2
Operation buzzer while the
back door is operating
*2
Off On – – O
Opening angle 5
1 to 4
– O –
User setting
*3
Power back door open oper-
ation when the back door
opener switch is pressed
On Off – – O
Back door closing assist On Off – – O
Hands Free Power Back
Door
*1, 4
On Off – O O
A
B
C
A
B
C
576
9-2. Customization
■ Driving position memory
*
(P.227)
*
: If equipped
■ Power windows, and moon roof
*
or panoramic moon roof
*
(P.246, 249, 252)
*
: If equipped
■ Lights (P.295)
Function Default setting
Customized
setting
Selection the door linking
driving position memory with
door unlock operation
Driver’s door All doors – – O
Function to prevent contact
between the head restraint
and ceiling (while moving to
memory location)
On Off – – O
Function Default setting
Customized
setting
Key linked operation (open) Off On – – O
Key linked operation (close) Off On – – O
Wireless remote control
linked operation (open)
Off On – – O
Wireless remote control
linked operation signal
(buzzer)
On Off – – O
Side windows open warning
function
On Off – – O
Sliding roof open warning
function
On Off – – O
Function Default setting
Customized
setting
Daytime Running Lights
*1
On Off O – O
Light reminder buzzer On Off – – O
AFS (Adaptive Front-lighting
System)
*2
On Off – – O
A
B
C
A
B
C
A
B
C
577
9-2. Customization
9
Vehicle specifications
*1
:Except for Canada
*2
:If equipped
■ Automatic light control system
*
(P.295)
*
: If equipped
■ Rear window wiper (P.304)
■ PCS (Pre-Collision System) (P.315)
Function Default setting
Customized
setting
Light sensor sensitivity Standard –2 to 2 O – O
Time elapsed before head-
lights automatically turn off
after doors are closed
30 seconds
Off
O – O60 seconds
90 seconds
Windshield wiper linked
headlight illumination
On Off – – O
Function Default setting
Customized
setting
Back door opening linked
rear window wiper stop func-
tion
Off On – – O
Washer linked rear window
wiper operation
On Off – – O
Shift position linked rear win-
dow wiper operation
(P.305)
Only once
Off
– – O
Continuous
Function Default setting
Customized
setting
PCS (Pre-Collision System) On Off – O –
Adjust alert timing Middle
Early
– O –
Late
A
B
C
A
B
C
A
B
C
578
9-2. Customization
■ LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) (P.323)
■ RSA (Road Sign Assist)
*
(P.333)
*
: If equipped
■ BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) (P.347)
Function Default setting
Customized
setting
Lane centering function On Off – O –
Steering assist function On Off – O –
Alert type
Steering wheel
vibration
Buzzer – O –
Alert sensitivity High Standard – O –
Vehicle sway warning func-
tion
On Off – O –
Vehicle sway warning sensi-
tivity
Standard
Low
– O –
High
Function Default setting
Customized
setting
RSA (Road Sign Assist) On Off – O –
Excess speed notification
method
Display only
No notification
– O –
Display and
buzzer
Excess speed notification
level
1 mph (2 km/h)
3 mph (5 km/h)
– O –
5 mph (10
km/h)
Other notifications method
(No-entry notification)
Display only
No notification
– O –
Display and
buzzer
Function Default setting
Customized
setting
BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) On Off – O –
Outside rear view mirror indi-
cator brightness
Bright Dim – O –
A
B
C
A
B
C
A
B
C
579
9-2. Customization
9
Vehicle specifications
■ RCTA (Rear cross traffic alert) function
*1
(P.347)
*1
:If equipped
*2
:This setting is linked with the buzzer volume of the intuitive parking
assist.
■ Intuitive parking assist
*1
(P.356)
*1
:If equipped
*2
:This setting is linked with the buzzer volume of the RCTA (Rear cross
traffic alert) function.
■ PKSB (Parking Support Brake)
*
(P.363)
Alert timing for presence of
approaching vehicle (sensi-
tivity)
Intermediate
Early
– O –
Late
Only when
vehicle
detected in
blind spot
Function Default setting
Customized
setting
RCTA (Rear cross traffic
alert) function
On Off – O –
Buzzer volume
*2
Level 2
Level 1
– O –
Level 3
Function Default setting
Customized
setting
Intuitive parking assist On Off – O O
Buzzer volume
*2
2
1
– O O
3
Function Default setting
Customized
setting
PKSB (Parking Support
Brake) function
On Off – O –
Function Default setting
Customized
setting
A
B
C
A
B
C
A
B
C
A
B
C
580
9-2. Customization
*
: If equipped
■ Automatic air conditioning system (P.396)
■ Seat ventilators
*
(P.407)
*
: If equipped
■ Remote Air Conditioning System (P.405)
Function Default setting
Customized
setting
A/C Auto switch operation On Off O – O
Switching to the outside air
mode when the vehicle is
parked
On Off – – O
Function Default setting
Customized
setting
Blower level Normal Decrease – – O
Function Default setting
Customized
setting
Operation using the “A/C”
button on the wireless
remote control
Press and hold
(short)
Press once
– – O
Press twice
Press and hold
(long)
Off
Stopping operation using the
“A/C” button on the wireless
remote control
Press twice
Press once
– – O
Press and hold
(short)
Press and hold
(long)
Off
A
B
C
A
B
C
A
B
C
581
9-2. Customization
9
Vehicle specifications
■ Illumination (P.410)
*
: If equipped
■ Vehicle customization
● When the speed linked door locking function and shift position linked door
locking function are both on, the door lock operates as follows.
• If the vehicle is started with all the doors locked, the speed linked door
locking function would not operate.
• If the vehicle is started with any door unlocked, the speed linked door lock-
ing function will operate.
• When shifting the shift lever to any position other than P, all the doors will
be locked.
● When the smart key system is off, the selecting door to unlock cannot be
customized.
● When the doors remain closed after unlocking the doors and the auto-
matic door lock function is activated, the signals will be generated in
accordance with the Operation signal (buzzer) and the Operation signal
(emergency flashers) settings.
Function Default setting
Customized
setting
Time elapsed before the inte-
rior lights turn off
15 seconds
Off
O – O7.5 seconds
30 seconds
Operation after the power
switch is turned off
On Off – – O
Operation when the doors
are unlocked
On Off – – O
Operation when you
approach the vehicle with the
electronic key on your per-
son
On Off – – O
Footwell lighting
*
On Off – – O
A
B
C
582
9-3. Initialization
9-3.Initializ ation
*1
:If equipped
*2
:Vehicles with Audio Plus or Premium Audio
Items to initialize
The following items must be initialized for normal system
operation after such cases as the battery being reconnected,
or maintenance being performed on the vehicle:
List of the items to initialize
Item When to initialize Reference
Power back door
*1
• After reconnecting or chang-
ing the 12-volt battery
• After changing a fuse
P.212
Power windows
• When functioning abnor-
mally
P.246
Moon roof
*1
P.250
Panoramic moon roof
*1
P.253
Maintenance required
reminder message
• After the maintenance is
performed
P.450
Tire pressure warning system
• When rotating the tires
• When changing the tire
• After registering the ID
codes
P.474
Toyota parking assist moni-
tor
*1
• After reconnecting or chang-
ing the 12-volt battery
• After changing a fuse
Refer to
“NAVIGA-
TION AND
MULTIME-
DIA SYS-
TEM
OWNER’S
MANUAL”
Panoramic view monitor
*1, 2
584
10-1. For owners
10-1.For owners
Reporting safety
defects for U.S. own-
ers
If you believe that your vehi-
cle has a defect which could
cause a crash or could
cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform
the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration
(NHTSA) in addition to noti-
fying Toyota Motor Sales,
U.S.A., Inc. (Toll-free: 1-800-
331-4331).
If NHTSA receives similar
complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds
that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may
order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA
cannot become involved in
individual problems
between you, your dealer, or
Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A.,
Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may
call the Vehicle Safety
Hotline toll-free at 1-888-
327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-
9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or
write to: Administrator,
NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey
Ave. S.E., Washington, DC
20590. You can also obtain
other information about
motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
585
10-1. For owners
10
For owners
Tirez sur la ceinture épau-
lière jusqu’à ce qu’elle recou-
vre entièrement l’épaule; elle
ne doit cependant pas
toucher le cou ni glisser de
l’épaule.
Placez la ceinture abdominale
le plus bas possible sur les
hanches.
Réglez la position du dossier.
Tenez-vous assis bien au
fond du siège, le dos droit.
Ne vrillez pas la ceinture de
sécurité.
■ Manipulation des ceintures
de sécurité
Avec un chiffon ou une éponge,
nettoyez à l’aide d’un savon
doux et de l’eau tiède. Vérifiez
aussi les ceintures régulière-
ment pour vous assurer qu’elles
ne présentent pas d’usure
excessive, d’effilochage ou de
coupures.
Seat belt instructions
for Canadian owners
(in French)
The following is a French
explanation of seat belt
instructions extracted from
the seat belt section in this
manual.
See the seat belt section for
more detailed seat belt
instructions in English.
Utilisation adéquate des
ceintures de sécurité
Entretien et soin
AVERTISSEMENT
■ Dommages et usure de la
ceinture de sécurité
Vérifiez périodiquement le sys-
tème de ceintures de sécurité.
Vérifiez qu’il n’y a pas de cou-
pures, d’effilochures ni de pièces
desserrées. N’utilisez pas une
ceinture de sécurité endommagée
avant qu’elle ne soit remplacée.
Les ceintures de sécurité endom-
magées ne peuvent pas protéger
les occupants contre les bless-
ures graves, voire mortelles.
586
10-1. For owners
■ Emplacement des coussins gonflables SRS
Coussins gonflables SRS avant
Coussin gonflable SRS du conducteur/coussin gonflable SRS du
passager avant
Peuvent aider à protéger la tête et la poitrine du conducteur et du passager
avant contre les impacts avec des composants intérieurs
Coussin gonflable SRS de protection des genoux
Peut aider à protéger le conducteur
Coussin gonflable SRS du coussin de siège
Peut aider à retenir le passager avant
SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners (in
French)
The following is a French explanation of SRS airbag instruc-
tions extracted from the SRS airbag section in this manual.
See the SRS airbag section for more detailed SRS airbag instruc-
tions in English.
Système de coussins gonflables SRS
A
B
C
587
10-1. For owners
10
For owners
Coussins gonflables SRS latéraux et en rideau
Coussins gonflables SRS latéraux avant
Peuvent aider à protéger le torse des occupants des sièges avant
Coussins gonflables SRS en rideau
• Peuvent aider à protéger principalement la tête des occupants des sièges
latéraux
• Peuvent aider à empêcher les occupants d’être éjectés du véhicule en
cas de tonneaux
■ Composants du système de coussins gonflables SRS
Capteurs d’impact avant
Voyants “AIR BAG ON” et “AIR BAG OFF”
Coussin gonflable du passager avant
Capteurs d’impact latéral (portière avant)
Coussins gonflables en rideau
Limiteurs de force et dispositifs de tension des ceintures de sécu-
rité (sièges avant)
Capteurs d’impact latéral (avant)
Coussins gonflables latéraux
Coussin gonflable du coussin de siège
D
E
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
588
10-1. For owners
Contacteur de boucle de ceinture de sécurité du passager avant
Capteurs d’impact latéral (arrière)
Limiteurs de force et dispositifs de tension des ceintures de sécu-
rité (sièges latéraux arrière)
Capteur de position du siège du conducteur
Coussin gonflable du conducteur
Capteurs du système de classification de l’occupant du siège du
passager avant
Coussin gonflable de protection des genoux
Lampe témoin SRS
Module de capteur de coussin gonflable
Votre véhicule est doté de COUSSINS GONFLABLES ÉVOLUÉS
dont la conception s’appuie sur les normes de sécurité des véhicules
à moteur américains (FMVSS208). Le module de capteur de coussin
gonflable (ECU) contrôle le déploiement des coussins gonflables en
fonction des informations obtenues des capteurs et d’autres élé-
ments affichés dans le diagramme des composants du système ci-
dessus. Ces informations comprennent des données relatives à la
gravité de l’accident et aux occupants. Au moment du déploiement
des coussins gonflables, une réaction chimique se produit dans les
gonfleurs de coussin gonflable et les coussins gonflables se remplis-
sent rapidement d’un gaz non toxique pour aider à limiter le mouve-
ment des occupants.
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
589
10-1. For owners
10
For owners
AVERTISSEMENT
■ Précautions relatives aux
coussins gonflables SRS
Observez les précautions suiva-
ntes en ce qui concerne les cous-
sins gonflables SRS.
Négliger de le faire pourrait occa-
sionner des blessures graves,
voire mortelles.
● Le conducteur et tous les pas-
sagers du véhicule doivent por-
ter leur ceinture de sécurité de
la manière appropriée.
Les coussins gonflables SRS
sont des dispositifs supplémen-
taires qui doivent être utilisés
avec les ceintures de sécurité.
● Le coussin gonflable SRS du
conducteur se déploie avec une
force considérable et peut occa-
sionner des blessures graves,
voire mortelles, notamment lor-
sque le conducteur se trouve
très près du coussin gonflable.
La National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA),
aux États-Unis, fait les recom-
mandations suivantes :
La zone à risque du coussin gon-
flable du conducteur couvre
2à3in. (50à75mm) de la zone
de déploiement du coussin gon-
flable. Pour assurer une marge de
sécurité suffisante, restez à 10 in.
(250 mm) du coussin gonflable.
Cette distance est mesurée
depuis le centre du volant jusqu’à
votre sternum. Si maintenant
vous vous tenez assis à moins de
10 in. (250 mm), vous pouvez
changer votre position de con-
duite de plusieurs manières :
• Reculez votre siège à la posi-
tion maximale vous permettant
d’atteindre encore aisément les
pédales.
• Inclinez légèrement le dossier
du siège.
Bien que les véhicules soient
conçus différemment, la plupart
des conducteurs peuvent main-
tenir une distance de 10 in.
(250 mm), même si leur siège
se trouve complètement vers
l’avant, simplement en inclinant
un peu le dossier du siège vers
l’arrière. Si la visibilité avant est
moindre après avoir incliné le
dossier de votre siège, utilisez
un coussin ferme et non glissant
pour être assis plus haut ou
relevez le siège si cette option
est disponible sur votre
véhicule.
• Si votre volant est réglable en
hauteur, inclinez-le vers le bas.
Cela vous permet d’orienter le
coussin gonflable vers votre
buste plutôt que vers votre tête
et vers votre cou.
Le siège doit être réglé de la
manière recommandée ci-dessus
par la NHTSA, tout en gardant le
contrôle des pédales et du volant,
ainsi que la vue sur les com-
mandes du tableau de bord.
590
10-1. For owners
AVERTISSEMENT
● Si la rallonge de ceinture de
sécurité a été reliée à la boucle
de la ceinture de sécurité du
siège du passager avant sans
avoir aussi été attachée à la
plaque de blocage des cein-
tures de sécurité, les coussins
gonflables SRS avant con-
sidéreront que le passager
avant porte tout de même sa
ceinture de sécurité même si la
ceinture de sécurité n’est pas
attachée.
Les coussins gonflables SRS du
passager avant peuvent alors ne
pas s’activer correctement lors
d’une collision, ce qui pourrait
occasionner des blessures
graves, voire mortelles, en cas de
collision. Assurezvous de toujours
porter la ceinture de sécurité avec
la rallonge de ceinture de sécu-
rité.
● Le coussin gonflable SRS du
passager avant se déploie
également avec une force con-
sidérable et peut occasionner
des blessures graves, voire
mortelles, notamment lorsque le
passager avant se trouve très
près du coussin gonflable. Le
siège du passager avant doit se
trouver le plus loin possible du
coussin gonflable et le dossier
doit être réglé de manière à ce
que le passager avant soit assis
bien droit.
● Le déploiement d’un coussin
gonflable risque d’infliger des
blessures graves, voire mor-
telles, aux bébés et aux enfants
mal assis et/ou mal attachés.
Un bébé ou un enfant trop petit
pour utiliser une ceinture de
sécurité doit être correctement
retenu à l’aide d’un dispositif de
retenue pour enfants. Toyota
recommande vivement de
placer et d’attacher correcte-
ment tous les bébés et tous les
enfants sur les sièges arrière du
véhicule à l’aide de dispositifs
de retenue adaptés. Les sièges
arrière sont plus sécuritaires
pour les bébés et les enfants
que le siège du passager avant.
● N’installez jamais un dispositif
de retenue pour enfants de type
dos à la route sur le siège du
passager avant, même si le
voyant “AIR BAG OFF” est
allumé. En cas d’accident, la
force et la vitesse de déploie-
ment du coussin gonflable du
passager avant pourraient
infliger à l’enfant des blessures
graves, voire mortelles, si le dis-
positif de retenue pour enfants
de type dos à la route était
installé sur le siège du passager
avant.
● Ne vous asseyez pas sur le
bord du siège et ne vous
appuyez pas sur la planche de
bord.
591
10-1. For owners
10
For owners
AVERTISSEMENT
● Ne laissez pas un enfant se
tenir face au coussin gonflable
SRS du passager avant ni
s’asseoir sur les genoux d’un
passager avant.
● Ne laissez pas les occupants
des sièges avant tenir des
objets sur leurs genoux.
● Ne vous appuyez pas sur la
portière ou sur le brancard de
pavillon, ni sur les montants
avant, latéraux ou arrière.
● Ne laissez personne s’age-
nouiller face à la portière sur le
siège du passager ni sortir la
tête ou les mains à l’extérieur
du véhicule.
● Ne fixez et n’appuyez rien sur
des zones telles que la planche
de bord, le tampon de volant ou
encore la partie inférieure du
tableau de bord.
Ces objets peuvent se trans-
former en projectiles lorsque les
coussins gonflables SRS du
conducteur, du passager avant
et de protection des genoux se
déploient.
● Ne fixez rien sur des zones
telles que les portières, le pare-
brise, les glaces latérales, les
montants avant ou arrière, le
brancard de pavillon et la poi-
gnée de maintien.
● N’accrochez pas de cintres ni
d’autres objets rigides sur les
crochets porte-vêtements. Tous
ces objets pourraient se trans-
former en projectiles et vous
occasionner des blessures
graves, voire mortelles, en cas
de déploiement des coussins
gonflables SRS en rideau.
● Si un recouvrement de vinyle
est placé sur la zone de
déploiement du coussin gon-
flable SRS de protection des
genoux, veillez à le retirer.
592
10-1. For owners
AVERTISSEMENT
● N’utilisez pas d’accessoires
recouvrant les parties du siège
où les coussins gonflables SRS
latéraux et le coussin gonflable
SRS du coussin de siège se
déploient, car ces accessoires
pourraient entraver le déploie-
ment des coussins SRS. De tels
accessoires peuvent empêcher
les coussins gonflables latéraux
et le coussin gonflable du cous-
sin de siège de se déployer cor-
rectement, rendre le système
inopérant ou provoquer acci-
dentellement le déploiement
des coussins gonflables
latéraux et du coussin gonflable
du coussin de siège, occasion-
nant des blessures graves,
voire mortelles.
● Ne frappez pas et n’appliquez
pas une pression importante à
l’emplacement des portières
avant ou des composants des
coussins gonflables SRS.
Cela peut provoquer un mau-
vais fonctionnement des couss-
ins gonflables SRS.
● Ne touchez à aucun composant
des coussins gonflables SRS
immédiatement après leur
déploiement (gonflage), car ils
pourraient être chauds.
● Si vous avez de la difficulté à
respirer après le déploiement
des coussins gonflables SRS,
ouvrez une portière ou une
glace latérale pour laisser entrer
l’air frais, ou quittez le véhicule
si vous pouvez le faire en toute
sécurité. Dès que possible, net-
toyez tous les résidus afin
d’éviter les irritations cutanées.
● Si les emplacements de stock-
age des coussins gonflables
SRS, tels que le tampon de
volant et les garnitures des
montants avant et arrière, sont
endommagés ou fissurés,
faites-les remplacer par votre
concessionnaire Toyota.
● Ne placez aucun objet, par
exemple un coussin, sur le
siège du passager avant. Cela
disperserait le poids du pas-
sager, ce qui empêcherait le
capteur de le détecter correcte-
ment. Cela pourrait empêcher le
déploiement des coussins gon-
flables SRS du passager avant
en cas de collision.
■ Modification et mise au rebut
des composants du système
de coussins gonflables SRS
Ne mettez pas votre véhicule au
rebut et n’effectuez aucune des
modifications suivantes sans
d’abord consulter votre conces-
sionnaire Toyota. Les coussins
gonflables SRS pourraient
fonctionner de manière incor-
recte ou se déployer (gonfler)
accidentellement, ce qui serait
susceptible d’occasionner des
blessures graves, voire mortelles.
● Installation, retrait, démontage
et réparation des coussins gon-
flables SRS
● Réparations, modifications,
retrait ou remplacement du
volant, du tableau de bord, de la
planche de bord, des sièges ou
du capitonnage des sièges, des
montants avant, latéraux et
arrière, des brancards de pavil-
lon, des panneaux des portières
avant, des garnitures des
portières avant ou des haut-
parleurs des portières avant
● Modifications du panneau de la
portière avant (comme le per-
forer)
593
10-1. For owners
10
For owners
AVERTISSEMENT
● Réparations ou modifications de
l’aile avant, du pare-chocs
avant ou du côté de l’habitacle
● Installation d’une protection de
calandre (barre safari, barre
kangourou, etc.), de lames de
déneigement, de treuils ou d’un
porte-bagages de toit
● Modifications du système de
suspension du véhicule
● Installation d’appareils électro-
niques tels qu’un émetteur-
récepteur radio ou un lecteur de
CD
● Modifications à votre véhicule
pour une personne aux capac-
ités physiques réduites
594
10-1. For owners
596
What to do if... (Troubleshooting)
1-1.What to d o if... (Troubleshooting)
What to do if... (Troubleshooting)
If you lose your keys or
mechanical keys, new genu-
ine keys or mechanical keys
can be made by your Toyota
dealer. (P.536)
If you lose your electronic
keys, the risk of vehicle theft
increases significantly. Con-
tact your Toyota dealer imme-
diately. (P.536)
Is the key battery weak or
depleted? (P.493)
Is the power switch in ON?
When locking the doors, turn
the power switch off.
(P.283)
Is the electronic key left inside
the vehicle?
When locking the doors,
make sure that you have the
electronic key on your person.
The function may not operate
properly due to the condition
of the radio wave. (P.218)
Is the child-protector lock set?
The rear door cannot be
opened from inside the vehi-
cle when the lock is set. Open
the rear door from outside
and then unlock the child-pro-
tector lock. (P.202)
Did you press the power
switch while firmly depress-
ing the brake pedal?
(P.279)
Is the shift lever in P?
(P.279)
Is the electronic key any-
where detectable inside the
vehicle? (P.217)
Is the steering wheel
unlocked? (P.280)
Is the electronic key battery
weak or depleted?
In this case, the hybrid sys-
If you have a problem,
check the following before
contacting your Toyota
dealer.
The doors cannot be
locked, unlocked, opened
or closed
You lose your keys
The doors cannot be
locked or unlocked
The rear door cannot be
opened
If you think something is
wrong
The hybrid system does
not start
597
What to do if... (Troubleshooting)
tem can be started in a tem-
porary way. (P.538)
Is the 12-volt battery dis-
charged? (P.539)
Is the power switch in ON?
If you cannot release the shift
lever by depressing the brake
pedal with the power switch in
ON (P.286)
It is locked automatically to
prevent theft of the vehicle.
(P.280)
Is the window lock switch
pressed?
The power window except for
the one at the driver’s seat
cannot be operated if the win-
dow lock switch is pressed.
(P.248)
The auto power off function
will be operated if the vehicle
is left in ACC or ON (the
hybrid system is not operat-
ing) for a period of time.
(P.283)
The seat belt reminder light is
flashing
Are the driver and the passengers
wearing the seat belts? (
P.518,
519
)
The parking brake indicator is
on
Is the parking brake released?
(
P.290)
Depending on the situation,
other types of warning buzzer
may also sound. (P.511, 523)
Did anyone inside the vehicle
open a door during setting the
alarm?
The sensor detects it and the
alarm sounds. (P.73)
To stop the alarm, turn the power
switch to ON or start the hybrid sys-
tem.
Is the message displayed on
the multi-information display?
Check the message on the
multi-information display.
The shift lever cannot be
shifted from P even if you
depress the brake pedal
The steering wheel can-
not be turned after the
hybrid system is stopped
The windows do not open
or close by operating the
power window switches
The power switch is
turned off automatically
A warning buzzer sounds
during driving
An alarm is activated and
the horn sounds (if
equipped)
A warning buzzer sounds
when leaving the vehicle
598
What to do if... (Troubleshooting)
(P.523)
When a warning light turns on
or a warning message is dis-
played, refer to P.511, 523.
Stop the vehicle in a safe
place and replace the flat tire
with the spare tire. (P.527)
Try the procedure for when
the vehicle becomes stuck in
mud, dirt, or snow. (P.548)
A warning light turns on
or a warning message is
displayed
When a problem has
occurred
If you have a flat tire
The vehicle becomes
stuck
599
Alphabetical Index
Alphabetical Index
A
A/C
“My Room Mode” .................144
Air conditioning filter.............483
Automatic air conditioning sys-
tem .....................................396
Eco air conditioning mode....397
Front seat concentrated airflow
mode (S-FLOW).................402
Humidity sensor ...................404
Remote Air Conditioning System
...........................................405
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)
...............................................380
Function ...............................380
Warning light ........................513
ACA (Active Cornering Assist)
...............................................381
AC charging cable..................102
CCID (Charging Circuit Interrupt-
ing Device) .........................103
If the charging connector cannot
be unlocked........................110
Indicator ...............................104
Locking and unlocking..........108
Maintenance.........................106
Safety functions....................104
Acoustic Vehicle Alerting Sys-
tem...........................................85
Active Cornering Assist (ACA)
...............................................381
Adaptive Front-lighting System
(AFS)......................................297
AFS (Adaptive Front-lighting
System) .................................297
Airbags ......................................34
Airbag operating conditions....36
Airbag precautions for your child
.............................................39
Airbag warning light..............513
Correct driving posture...........27
Curtain shield airbag operating
conditions .............................37
Curtain shield airbag precautions
.............................................39
Front passenger occupant clas-
sification system ...................44
General airbag precautions ....39
Locations of airbags ...............34
Modification and disposal of air-
bags......................................42
Seat cushion airbag................34
Side airbag operating conditions
.............................................37
Side airbag precautions..........39
Side and curtain shield airbags
operating conditions .............37
Side and curtain shield airbags
precautions...........................39
SRS airbag instructions for
Canadian owners ...............586
SRS airbags ...........................34
SRS warning light.................513
Air conditioning filter .............483
Air conditioning system
“My Room Mode”..................144
Air conditioning filter .............483
Automatic air conditioning sys-
tem .....................................396
Eco air conditioning mode ....397
Front seat concentrated airflow
mode (S-FLOW) .................402
Remote Air Conditioning System
...........................................405
Air intake vent...........................91
Cleaning ...............................486
Alarm .........................................73
Alarm ......................................73
Warning buzzer ....................511
Anchor brackets .................53, 62
Antenna (Smart key system) .217
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)380
Function................................380
600
Alphabetical Index
Warning light ........................513
Approach warning..................343
Armrest ...................................434
Assist grips.............................434
AUTO EV/HV mode................... 77
AUTO EV/HV mode switch.......78
Automatic air conditioning sys-
tem.........................................396
“My Room Mode” .................144
Air conditioning filter.............483
Eco air conditioning mode....397
Front seat concentrated airflow
mode (S-FLOW).................402
Remote Air Conditioning System
...........................................405
Automatic door locking and
unlocking systems...............202
Automatic headlight leveling
system................................... 296
Automatic High Beam (AHB).298
Automatic light control system
...............................................296
Auxiliary boxes.......................415
Average fuel consumption ....189
Average fuel economy...........172
Average vehicle speed ..176, 189
B
Back door................................203
Hands Free Power Back Door
...........................................208
Power back door ..................207
Wireless remote control .......207
Back-up lights
Replacing light bulbs ............497
Wattage................................556
Battery (12-volt battery) .........466
If the 12-volt battery is dis-
charged ..............................539
Preparing and checking before
winter..................................387
Replacing .............................542
Warning light ........................511
Battery (traction battery)..........87
Charging...............................123
Location..................................87
Specification .........................552
Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) ......347
Blind Spot Monitor function ..350
Rear Cross Traffic Alert function
...........................................353
Bottle holders .........................415
Brake
Brake Hold............................293
Fluid......................................464
Parking brake .......................290
Regenerative braking .............82
Warning light ........................511
Brake assist ............................380
Brake Hold...............................293
Brake Override System ..........259
Break-in tips............................259
Brightness control
Instrument panel light control169
BSM (Blind Spot Monitor)......347
Blind Spot Monitor function ..350
Rear Cross Traffic Alert function
...........................................353
C
Care
Aluminum wheels .................444
Exterior .................................444
Front camera ........................310
Interior ..................................447
Radar sensor........................310
Seat belts .............................447
Water-repellent coating ........445
Cargo capacity................265, 268
Cargo hooks............................417
Chains......................................389
Charging
“My Room Mode”..................144
AC charging cable ................102
Alphabetical Index
601
Charging equipment...............99
Charging indicator ................100
Charging messages .............152
Charging precautions ...........126
Charging procedure .............123
Charging schedule function..130
Charging time may increase 115
High voltage components.......87
How to charge ......................123
Information related to charging
display................................119
Opening and closing the
charging port lid..................100
Power sources precautions..113
Power sources that can be used
...........................................111
Safety functions....................120
When charging cannot be car-
ried out ...............................147
Charging port ...........................99
If the charging port lid does not
open ...................................108
Locking and unlocking..........107
Opening and closing ............100
Child-protector .......................202
Child restraint system .............51
Fixed with a LATCH system...60
Fixed with a seat belt .............55
Front passenger occupant clas-
sification system...................44
Points to remember................51
Riding with children ................50
Types of child restraint system
installation method ...............53
Using an anchor bracket ........62
Child safety ...............................50
12-volt battery
precautions.................466, 543
Airbag precautions .................39
Back door precautions .........203
Charging precautions ...........120
Child restraint system.............53
Heated steering wheel and seat
heater precautions..............407
How your child should wear the
seat belt................................30
Moon roof precautions..........250
Panoramic moon roof precau-
tions....................................254
Power window lock switch....248
Power window precautions...247
Rear door child-protectors....202
Seat belt extender precautions
.............................................30
Seat belt precautions..............29
Seat heater precautions .......407
Cleaning ..........................444, 447
Aluminum wheels .................444
DC/DC Converter air intake vent
...........................................486
Exterior .................................444
Front camera ........................310
Interior ..................................447
Radar sensor........................310
Seat belts .............................447
Water-repellent coating ........445
Clock........................................169
Coat hooks ..............................435
Condenser...............................463
Console box ............................414
Consumption screen..............187
Coolant
Capacity ...............................553
Checking ..............................462
Preparing and checking before
winter..................................387
Warning light ........................512
Cooling system.......................462
Engine overheating ..............544
Hybrid system overheating...546
Cruise control
Dynamic radar cruise control
with full-speed range ..........336
Cup holders.............................414
602
Alphabetical Index
Current fuel consumption .....189
Current fuel economy ............172
Curtain shield airbags .............34
Customizable features ...........569
D
Daytime running light system295
Replacing light bulbs ............497
DC/DC converter air intake vent
.................................................91
Cleaning ...............................486
Deck board..............................417
Defogger
Outside rear view mirrors .....398
Rear window ........................398
Windshield............................398
Digital Rear-view Mirror .........234
Dimensions .............................550
Dinghy towing ........................278
Display
BSM (Blind Spot Monitor).....347
Consumption screen ............187
Drive information ..................176
Driving information ...............172
Dynamic radar cruise control
with full-speed range..........336
Energy monitor.....................187
Head-up display ...................182
Intuitive parking assist..........356
LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)....328
Multi-information display ......170
Parking Support Brake function
...........................................365
Pre-collision warning ............315
RCTA ...................................347
RSA (Road Sign Assist) .......333
Warning messages ..............523
Do-it-yourself
maintenance .................451, 455
Door lock
Back door .............................203
Side doors ............................198
Smart key system.................217
Wireless remote control........196
Doors
Automatic door locking and
unlocking system................202
Back door .............................203
Door glasses ........................246
Door lock ..............................198
Open door warning buzzer ...202
Outside rear view mirrors .....244
Rear door child-protectors....202
Side doors ............................198
Drive information....................176
Driver’s seat belt reminder light
...............................................518
Driver’s seat position memory
...............................................227
Driving position memory.......227
Memory recall function .........228
Drive-start control ..................259
Driving
Break-in tips .........................259
Correct posture.......................27
Driving mode select switch...377
Plug-in hybrid vehicle driving tips
.............................................92
Procedures ...........................258
Winter drive tips....................387
Driving information display ...172
Driving mode select switch ...377
Driving position memory .......227
Memory recall function .........228
Driving support system informa-
tion display............................175
Dynamic radar cruise control
with full-speed range
Function................................336
Warning message ................523
E
ECB (Electronically Controlled
Brake System).......................380
Alphabetical Index
603
Eco drive mode ......................377
EDR (Event data recorder).........8
E-Four (Electronic On-Demand
AWD system) ........................381
Elapsed time ...........................176
Electric motor
Location..................................76
Specification.........................552
Electric Power Steering (EPS)
Function ...............................381
Warning light ........................513
Electronically Controlled Brake
System (ECB) .......................380
Electronic key
Battery-saving function.........218
If the electronic key does not
operate properly.................537
Replacing the battery ...........493
Electronic sunshade ..............252
Jam protection function ........253
Operation .............................252
Emergency, in case of
If a warning buzzer sounds ..511
If a warning light turns on.....511
If a warning message is dis-
played.................................523
If the 12-volt battery is dis-
charged ..............................539
If the electronic key does not
operate properly.................537
If the fuel filler door cannot be
opened ...............................536
If the hybrid system will not start
...........................................534
If the vehicle is trapped in rising
water ..................................506
If you have a flat tire.............527
If you lose your keys ............536
If you think something is wrong
...........................................509
If your vehicle becomes stuck
...........................................548
If your vehicle has to be stopped
in an emergency.................505
If your vehicle needs to be towed
...........................................507
If your vehicle overheats ......544
Emergency flashers ...............504
Energy monitor .......................187
Engine
Compartment........................460
Exhaust gas precautions ........49
Hood.....................................457
How to start the hybrid system
...........................................279
Identification number ............551
If the hybrid system will not start
...........................................534
If your vehicle has to be stopped
in an emergency.................505
Overheating..........................544
Power switch ........................279
Engine coolant
Capacity ...............................553
Checking ..............................462
High coolant temperature warn-
ing light ...............................512
Preparing and checking before
winter..................................387
Warning light ........................512
Engine oil
Capacity ...............................552
Checking ..............................460
Preparing and checking before
winter..................................387
Warning light ........................512
Enhanced Vehicle Stability Con-
trol (Enhanced VSC).............381
Enhanced VSC (Enhanced Vehi-
cle Stability Control).............381
EPS (Electric Power Steering)
Function................................381
Warning light ........................513
EV/HV mode selection switch .78
604
Alphabetical Index
EV driving range.......................95
Event data recorder (EDR).........8
EV mode.................................... 77
Exhaust gas precautions.........44
F
Flat tire ....................................527
Tire pressure warning system
...........................................471
Floor mats .................................26
Fluid
Brake............................464, 555
Hybrid transmission..............554
Rear differential....................554
Washer.................................465
Fog lights
Replacing light bulbs ............497
Wattage................................556
Footwell lights ........................410
Front passenger’s seat belt
reminder light .......................518
Front passenger occupant clas-
sification system ....................44
Front seat concentrated airflow
mode (S-FLOW) ....................402
Front seat heaters ..................407
Front seats..............................224
Adjustment ...........................224
Cleaning ...............................447
Correct driving posture...........27
Driving position memory.......227
Head restraints.....................230
Memory recall function .........228
Seat heaters.........................407
Seat position memory ..........227
Seat ventilators ....................407
Front side marker lights ........295
Light switch ..........................295
Replacing light bulbs ............497
Wattage................................556
Front turn signal lights
Replacing light bulbs ............497
Turn signal lever...................289
Wattage ................................556
Fuel
Capacity ...............................551
Fuel gauge ...........................165
Gas station information ........616
Information ...........................557
Refueling ..............................306
Type .............................551, 557
Warning light ........................518
Fuel consumption information
Average fuel consumption....189
Current fuel consumption .....189
Fuel filler door.........................307
If the fuel filler door cannot be
opened ...............................536
Opener .................................307
Refueling ..............................306
Fuses .......................................495
G
Garage door opener ...............435
Gas station information .........616
Glove box ................................413
H
Headlights ...............................295
Adaptive Front-lighting System
(AFS) ..................................297
Automatic headlight leveling sys-
tem .....................................296
Automatic High Beam (AHB) 298
Light switch...........................295
Replacing light bulbs ............497
Wattage ................................556
Head restraints .......................230
Head-up display......................182
Heated steering wheel............407
Heaters
Automatic air conditioning sys-
tem .....................................396
Alphabetical Index
605
Heated steering wheel .........407
Hybrid battery (traction battery)
...........................................115
Outside rear view mirrors .....398
Seat heaters.........................407
High coolant temperature warn-
ing light .................................512
High mounted stoplight
Replacing light bulbs ............497
High voltage components .......87
Hill-start assist control ..........381
Hood ........................................457
Warning message ................523
Hooks
Cargo hooks.........................417
Coat hooks ...........................435
Retaining hooks (floor mat) ....26
Horn .........................................232
HV mode....................................77
Hybrid battery (traction battery)
Charging...............................123
Location..................................87
Specification.........................552
Hybrid battery (traction battery)
charge mode........................... 79
Hybrid system
ACC......................................283
Acoustic Vehicle Alerting System
.............................................85
Brake Override System ........259
Drive-Start Control ...............259
Emergency shut off system....91
Energy monitor/consumption
screen ................................187
High voltage components.......87
How to start the hybrid system
...........................................279
Hybrid System Indicator .......165
If the hybrid system will not start
...........................................534
If your vehicle has to be stopped
in an emergency.................505
Ignition switch (power switch)
...........................................279
Overheating..........................544
Plug-in hybrid system precau-
tions......................................87
Plug-in hybrid vehicle driving tips
.............................................92
Power (ignition) switch .........279
Regenerative braking .............82
Starting the hybrid system....279
Hybrid System Indicator ........165
Hybrid transmission...............285
S mode .................................288
I
I/M test .....................................454
Identification
Engine ..................................551
Vehicle..................................550
Ignition switch (power switch)
...............................................279
Auto power off function.........283
Changing the power switch
modes.................................283
If your vehicle has to be stopped
in an emergency.................505
Starting the hybrid system....279
Immobilizer system ..................72
Indicators ................................160
Initialization
Items to initialize...................582
Maintenance.........................451
Moon roof .............................250
Panoramic moon roof ...........253
Power back door ..................212
Power windows ....................246
Tire pressure warning system
...........................................474
Inside rear view mirror ...233, 234
Instrument panel light control
...............................................169
Interior lights...........................410
606
Alphabetical Index
Switch...................................410
Wattage................................556
Intuitive parking assist
Function ...............................356
Warning message ................359
J
Jack
Positioning a floor jack .........458
Vehicle-equipped jack ..........528
Jack handle.............................528
Jam protection function
Electronic sunshade.............253
Moon roof .............................249
Panoramic moon roof...........253
Power back door ..................210
Power windows ....................246
K
Keyless entry
Smart key system.................217
Wireless remote control .......196
Keys......................................... 194
Battery-saving function.........218
Electronic key.......................194
If the electronic key does not
operate properly.................537
If you lose your keys ............536
Key number plate .................194
Keyless entry................196, 217
Mechanical key ....................196
Power switch ........................279
Replacing the battery ...........493
Warning buzzer ....................217
Wireless remote control key.196
Knee airbags.............................34
L
Lane Tracing Assist (LTA).....323
Operation .............................323
Warning messages...............332
Language (multi-information dis-
play) ...............................179, 570
LATCH anchors ........................60
LED accessory lights .............296
Replacing light bulbs ............497
Lever
Auxiliary catch lever .............457
Hood lock release lever........457
Shift lever .............................285
Turn signal lever...................289
Wiper lever ...................301, 304
License plate lights
Light switch...........................295
Replacing light bulbs ............497
Light bulbs
Replacing .............................497
Wattage ................................556
Lights
Automatic High Beam (AHB) 298
Emergency flasher switch ....504
Front interior lights................410
Headlight switch ...................295
Illuminated entry system.......411
Interior lights.........................410
Luggage compartment
light.............................205, 209
Personal lights......................411
Rear interior light ..................411
Replacing light bulbs ............497
Turn signal lever...................289
Vanity lights ..........................420
Wattage ................................556
Load capacity..........................268
LTA (Lane Tracing Assist).....323
Operation..............................323
Warning messages...............332
Luggage compartment
light................................205, 209
Wattage ................................556
Luggage cover ........................418
Alphabetical Index
607
M
Maintenance
Do-it-yourself maintenance ..455
General maintenance...........451
Maintenance data.................550
Maintenance requirements...450
Malfunction indicator lamp....512
Menu icons ............................. 171
Meter
“ODO TRIP” switch ..............169
Clock ....................................169
Head-up display ...................182
Indicators..............................163
Instrument panel light control169
Meter control switches .........171
Multi-information display ......170
Settings ........................177, 570
Units .............................179, 570
Warning lights ..............161, 511
Warning messages ......181, 523
Meter control switches .......... 171
Mirrors
Digital Rear-view Mirror........234
Inside rear view mirror..........233
Outside rear view mirror defog-
gers ....................................398
Outside rear view mirrors .....244
Vanity mirrors .......................420
Moon roof
Door lock linked moon roof oper-
ation ...................................249
Jam protection function ........249
Operation .............................249
Warning message ................250
Multi-information display
Audio system-linked display.175
BSM (Blind Spot Monitor).....347
Changing the display............171
Display contents...................170
Driving information display ...172
Driving support system informa-
tion display .........................175
Dynamic radar cruise control
with full-speed range ..........336
Energy monitor/consumption
screen.................................187
Hybrid System Indicator .......167
Intuitive parking assist-sensor
...........................................356
Language .....................179, 570
LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)....328
Menu icons ...........................171
Meter control switches..........171
Navigation system-linked display
...........................................175
Parking Support Brake function
...........................................365
PCS (Pre-Collision System) .315
Pop-up display......................179
RSA (Road Sign Assist) .......333
Settings ........................177, 570
Suggestion function......181, 570
Tire pressure ........................471
Units .............................179, 570
Vehicle information display...176
Warning message display ....181
Warning messages...............523
“My Room Mode” ...................144
N
Navigation system-linked display
...............................................175
Noise from under vehicle...........6
Normal mode...........................377
O
Odometer.................................165
“ODO TRIP” switch...............169
“ODO TRIP”switch .................169
Oil
Engine oil..............................552
Opener
608
Alphabetical Index
Back door .....................205, 207
Fuel filler door ......................307
Garage door .........................435
Hood.....................................457
Outer foot lights
Replacing light bulbs ............497
Wattage................................556
Outside rear view mirrors......244
Adjusting and folding............244
BSM (Blind Spot Monitor).....347
Outside rear view mirror defog-
gers ....................................398
Outside temperature display.168
Overheating ............................544
P
Paddle shift switches.............287
Panic mode .............................196
Panoramic moon roof
Jam protection function ........253
Operation .............................252
Warning message ................254
Parking assist sensors (intuitive
parking assist)......................356
Parking brake
Operation .............................290
Parking brake engaged warning
buzzer ................................292
Warning light ........................517
Warning message ................291
Parking lights
Light switch ..................295, 295
Replacing light bulbs ............497
Wattage................................556
Parking Support Brake (PKSB)
...............................................363
Indicator ...............................163
Parking Support Brake function
(rear-crossing vehicles)......373
Parking Support Brake function
(static objects) ....................368
Warning light ........................515
Warning message ................367
PCS (Pre-Collision System)
Enabling/disabling the pre-colli-
sion system ........................317
Function................................315
Warning light ........................514
Warning message ........313, 526
Personal lights........................411
Switch...................................411
Wattage ................................556
PKSB (Parking Support Brake)
...............................................363
Indicator................................163
Parking Support Brake function
(rear-crossing vehicles)......373
Parking Support Brake function
(static objects) ....................368
Warning light ........................515
Warning message ................367
Plug-in hybrid system ..............76
AUTO EV/HV mode switch.....78
AUTO EV/HV mode................77
Driving tips..............................92
EV driving range.....................95
EV mode.................................77
EV/HV mode selection switch 78
Features .................................76
How to charge ......................123
HV mode ................................77
Hybrid battery (traction battery)
charge mode ........................77
Power back door switch 207, 207
Power control unit coolant ....462
Capacity ...............................553
Checking ..............................463
Preparing and checking before
winter..................................387
Radiator................................463
Power outlets ..................420, 421
Power sources ........................111
Power steering (Electric Power
Steering system)...................381
Alphabetical Index
609
Warning light ........................513
Power switch ..........................279
Auto power off function ........283
Changing the power switch
modes ................................283
If your vehicle has to be stopped
in an emergency.................505
Starting the hybrid system....279
Power windows
Catch protection function .....246
Door lock linked window opera-
tion .....................................247
Jam protection function ........246
Operation .............................246
Window lock switch ..............248
Pre-Collision System (PCS)
Enabling/disabling the pre-colli-
sion system ........................317
Function ...............................315
Warning light ........................514
Warning message ........313, 526
Predictive efficient drive..........85
R
Radar cruise control
Dynamic radar cruise control
with full-speed range..........336
Radiator...................................463
RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert)
RCTA Function.............347, 353
Warning message ................348
Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)
...............................................347
Rear passengers’ seat belt
reminder light .......................519
Rear seat .................................225
Folding down the rear seatbacks
...........................................226
Head restraints.....................230
Seat heaters.........................408
Rear side marker lights
Light switch ..........................295
Replacing light bulbs ............497
Rear turn signal lights
Replacing light bulbs ............497
Turn signal lever...................289
Wattage ................................556
Rear view mirror
Digital Rear-view Mirror........234
Inside rear view mirror..........233
Outside rear view mirrors .....244
Rear window defogger ...........398
Rear window wiper .................304
Refueling .................................306
Capacity ...............................551
Fuel types.....................551, 557
If the fuel filler door cannot be
opened ...............................536
Opening the fuel tank cap ....307
Regenerative braking ...............82
Remote Air Conditioning System
...............................................405
Replacing
Electronic key battery ...........493
Fuses....................................495
Light bulbs ............................497
Tires .....................................527
Wiper insert ..........................489
Reporting safety defects for U.S.
owners ...................................584
Resetting the message indicat-
ing maintenance is required451
Road accident cautions ...........89
Road Sign Assist ....................333
RSA (Road Sign Assist) .........333
S
Safety Connect .........................66
Seat belt reminder light..518, 519
Seat belts...................................29
Adjusting the seat belt shoulder
anchor height........................31
Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) ....................................31
610
Alphabetical Index
Child restraint system installation
.............................................55
Cleaning and maintaining the
seat belt..............................447
Emergency Locking Retractor
(ELR)....................................31
How to wear your seat belt.....30
How your child should wear the
seat belt................................30
Pregnant women, proper seat
belt use.................................29
Reminder light and buzzer .518,
519
Seat belt extender ..................30
Seat belt instructions for Cana-
dian owners........................585
Seat belt pretensioners ..........32
SRS warning light.................513
Seat heaters ............................407
Seating capacity.............268, 550
Seat position memory............227
Seats
Adjustment precautions224, 225
Adjustment ...................224, 225
Armrest.................................434
Child seats/child restraint system
installation ............................51
Cleaning ...............................447
Driving position memory.......227
Folding down the rear seatbacks
...........................................226
Head restraint.......................230
Properly sitting in the seat......27
Seat heaters.........................407
Seat position memory ..........227
Seat ventilators ....................407
Seat ventilators ...................... 407
Secondary Collision Brake....381
Sensor
Automatic headlight system .296
Automatic High Beam (AHB)298
BSM (Blind Spot Monitor).....350
Digital Rear-view Mirror........238
Front camera ........................309
Inside rear view mirror..........234
Intuitive parking assist ..........356
LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)....323
Parking Support Brake function
(rear-crossing vehicles)......350
Parking Support Brake function
(static objects) ....................356
Radar sensor........................309
Rain-sensing windshield wipers
...........................................303
RCTA....................................350
Toyota Safety Sense 2.0 ......309
Service plug ..............................87
Service reminder message....451
Shift lever ................................285
If the shift lever cannot be shifted
from P.................................286
Shift lock system ....................286
Side airbags ..............................34
Side doors ...............................198
Side marker lights
Light switch...........................295
Replacing light bulbs ............497
Wattage ................................556
Side mirrors ............................244
Adjustment ...........................244
BSM (Blind Spot Monitor).....347
Folding..................................244
Heaters.................................398
Outside rear view mirror defog-
gers ....................................398
Side turn signal lights
Replacing light bulbs ............497
Turn signal lever...................289
Side windows..........................246
Smart key system ...................217
Antenna location...................217
Entry functions..............198, 204
Starting the hybrid system....279
Warning message ................523
Alphabetical Index
611
Snow tires ...............................387
“SOS” button ............................66
Spare tire
Storage location ...................528
Spark plug...............................554
Specifications .........................550
Speedometer ..........................165
Sport mode .............................377
SRS airbags ..............................34
Steering lock
Column lock release.............280
Steering lock system warning
message.............................280
Steering wheel
Adjustment ...........................232
Heated steering wheel .........407
Meter control switches .........171
Stop lights
Replacing light bulbs ............497
Storage feature .......................413
Storage precautions ..............413
Stuck
If the vehicle becomes stuck 548
Suggestion function...............181
Sunshade ........................249, 252
Sun visors...............................420
Switches
“ODO TRIP”switch ...............169
“SOS” button ..........................66
AUTO EV/HV mode switch ....78
Automatic High Beam switch298
Brake hold switch .................293
Digital Rear-view Mirror control
switches .............................234
Door lock switch ...................201
Driving mode select switch...377
Driving position memory
switches .............................227
Dynamic radar cruise control
with full-speed range..........336
Electronic sunshade switch..252
Emergency flashers switch ..504
EV/HV mode selection switch 78
Fuel filler door opener switch307
Garage door opener switches
...........................................435
Heated steering wheel..........407
Ignition switch (power switch)
...........................................279
Intuitive parking assist ..........358
Light switch...........................295
LTA switch............................328
Meter control switches..........171
Moon roof switches ..............249
Outside rear view mirror
switches..............................244
Paddle shift switches............287
Panoramic moon roof switches
...........................................252
Parking brake switch ............290
Power back door switch .......207
Power switch ........................279
Power window switch ...........246
Rear window and outside rear
view mirror defoggers switch
...........................................398
Rear window wiper and washer
switch .................................304
Seat heater switches ............408
Seat ventilator switches........408
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance
switch .................................336
VSC OFF switch...................382
Window lock switch ..............248
Windshield defogger switch..398
Windshield wiper de-icer switch
...........................................403
Windshield wipers and washer
switch .................................301
Wireless charger power supply
switch .................................427
T
Tail lights
612
Alphabetical Index
Light switch ..........................295
Replacing light bulbs ............497
Theft deterrent system
Alarm......................................73
Immobilizer system ................72
Tire inflation pressure
Maintenance data.................555
Tire inflation pressure display
function...............................471
Warning light ........................518
Tire information ......................559
Glossary ...............................563
Size ......................................561
Tire identification number.....560
Tire section names...............561
Tire pressure warning system
Function ...............................471
Initializing .............................474
Installing tire pressure warning
valves and transmitters ......473
Registering ID codes............476
Warning light ........................518
Tires......................................... 468
Chains ..................................389
Checking ..............................468
Glossary ...............................563
If you have a flat tire.............527
Inflation pressure..................480
Information ...........................559
Replacing .............................527
Rotating tires ........................470
Size ......................................555
Snow tires ............................387
Spare tire..............................527
Tire identification number.....560
Tire inflation pressure display
function...............................471
Tire pressure warning system
...........................................471
Uniform Tire Quality Grading562
Warning light ........................518
Tools........................................528
Top tether strap ........................62
Total load capacity .........265, 268
Towing
Dinghy towing.......................278
Towing eyelet .......................528
Trailer sway control ..............381
Trailer towing........................269
Toyota Safety Sense 2.0 ........309
Automatic High Beam (AHB) 298
Dynamic radar cruise control
with full-speed range ..........336
LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)....323
PCS (Pre-Collision System) .315
RSA (Road Sign Assist) .......333
TRAC (Traction Control) ........381
Traction battery (Hybrid battery)
Charging.................................99
Location..................................87
Specification .........................552
Traction Control (TRAC) ........381
Traction motor (electric motor)76
Trailer sway control................381
Trailer towing ..........................269
Trail Mode................................379
Transmission
Driving mode select switch...377
Hybrid transmission..............285
Trip meters ..............................165
Turn signal lights
Replacing light bulbs ............497
Turn signal lever...................289
Wattage ................................556
U
USB charging ports................426
Utility vehicle precautions .....390
V
Vanity lights
Vanity lights ..........................420
Wattage ................................556
Alphabetical Index
613
Vanity mirrors .........................420
Vehicle data recordings.............7
Vehicle identification number550
Vehicle Stability Control (VSC)
...............................................381
Ventilators (seat ventilators) .407
VSC (Vehicle Stability Control)
...............................................381
W
Warning buzzers
Approach warning ................343
Brake hold ............................517
Brake Override System ........517
Brake system .......................511
BSM OFF indicator...............516
Charging system ..................511
Downshifting.................287, 288
Drive-Start Control ...............517
Electric power steering.........513
High coolant temperature.....512
Hybrid system overheat .......512
Intuitive parking assist OFF indi-
cator ...................................515
Intuitive parking assist..........356
Low engine oil pressure .......512
LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)....323
LTA indicator ........................514
Open door ............................202
Open hood ...........................202
Open window .......................247
PKSB OFF indicator.............515
Pre-collision warning ............315
Radar cruise control .............343
RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert)
...........................................347
RCTA OFF indicator.............516
RSA (Road Sign Assist) .......333
Seat belt reminder........518, 519
Shift position.................287, 288
Vehicle sway warning...........327
Warning lights
ABS ......................................513
Brake hold operated indicator
...........................................517
Brake Override System ........517
Brake system........................511
BSM OFF indicator...............516
Charging system ..................511
Driver’s seat belt reminder light
...........................................518
Drive-Start Control................517
Electric power steering .........513
Engine ..................................512
Front passenger’s seat belt
reminder light......................518
High coolant temperature .....512
Hybrid system overheat........512
Intuitive parking assist OFF indi-
cator ...................................515
Low engine oil pressure .......512
Low fuel level........................518
LTA indicator ........................514
Malfunction indicator lamp....512
Parking brake indicator.........517
PCS warning light.................514
PKSB (Parking Support Brake)
...........................................515
PKSB OFF indicator .............515
RCTA OFF indicator.............516
Rear passengers’ seat belt
reminder lights....................519
Seat belt reminder light 518, 519
Slip indicator.........................516
SRS ......................................513
Tire pressure ........................518
Warning messages.................523
Washer
Checking ..............................465
Low washer fluid warning mes-
sage............................465, 523
Preparing and checking before
winter..................................387
Switch...........................301, 304
614
Alphabetical Index
Washing and waxing..............444
Weight
Cargo capacity .............265, 268
Load limits ............................268
Weight ..................................550
Wheels.....................................482
Replacing wheels .................482
Size ......................................555
Window glasses
Power windows ....................246
Window lock switch ...............248
Windows
Power windows ....................246
Rear window defogger .........398
Washer.........................301, 304
Windshield defogger..............398
Windshield wiper de-icer.......403
Windshield wipers
Intermittent windshield wipers
...........................................301
Position ........................301, 304
Rain-sensing windshield wipers
...........................................301
Replacing the wiper insert....489
Winter driving tips..................387
Wiper insert ............................489
Wireless charger ....................427
Wireless remote control ........196
Battery-saving function.........218
Locking/Unlocking ................196
Panic mode ..........................196
Remote Air Conditioning System
...........................................405
Replacing the battery ...........493
For vehicles with Premium
Audio with Navigation or
Audio Plus, refer to “NAVI-
GATION AND MULTIME-
DIA SYSTEM OWNER’S
MANUAL” for information
regarding the equipment
listed below.
· Navigation system
· Audio system
· Rear view monitor system
· Toyota parking assist monitor
· Panoramic view monitor
Alphabetical Index
615
616
GAS STATION INFORMATION
Auxiliary catch lever (P.457)
Power back door switch
*
(P.207)
Fuel filler door opener switch (P.307)
Fuel filler door (P.307)
Tire inflation pressure (P.555)
Hood lock release lever (P.457)
*
: Vehicles with power back door
Fuel tank capacity
(Reference)
14.5 gal. (55 L, 12.1 Imp.gal.)
Fuel type Unleaded gasoline only P.551
Cold tire inflation
pressure
P.555
Engine oil capacity
(Drain and refill
reference)
With filter
Without filter
4.8 qt. (4.5 L, 4.0 Imp. qt.)
4.4 qt. (4.2 L, 3.7 Imp. qt.)
Engine oil type P.552
A
B
C
D
E
F
617
*
: Gives an estimation of the amount of time needed to charge fully from
when an EV driving range is not displayed on the multi-information dis-
play etc.
Depending on the specifications of a charger, power supply may be inter-
rupted before the hybrid battery (traction battery) is fully charged.
For the charging procedure, refer to “How to charge” (P.123).
Handling may differ in accordance with the type of plug provided at the
charging station. Check at each station.
CHARGING STATION INFORMATION
Charging port lid
Charger type AC charger (SAE J1772 level1/level2)
Voltage rating AC 240 V 16 A
Time needed for
charging
*
Approximately 4 hours 30 minutes
Battery type Lithium-ion battery
A
618
